SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 Series Converters for speed control of slipring motors with stator phase-angle control and electronic phase reversal Operating Instructions Edition 03/2015 Answers for industry. Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Order number: 6SG7000-0BA76 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 1999 - 2015. All rights reserved 03.2015 Table of contents Table of contents 1 2 3 Notes ...............................................................................................................................................13 1.1 Converter software version ..........................................................................................13 1.2 Safety informations ......................................................................................................13 Type spectrum ................................................................................................................................17 2.1 Converter order no. code .............................................................................................18 2.2 Ordering information for options and accessories .......................................................19 Description ......................................................................................................................................21 3.1 Applications .................................................................................................................21 3.2 Design ..........................................................................................................................21 3.3 3.3.1 Mode of operation ........................................................................................................22 Converter design .........................................................................................................22 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 Speed control using stator phase-angle control ..........................................................23 Speed control by changing the rotor resistance levels ................................................24 Method of operation of electronic phase reversal with plug braking ...........................25 SIMOTRAS HD - control characteristics for lifting gear ..............................................26 SIMOTRAS HD - control characteristics for travel gear .............................................27 Detection of motor speed.............................................................................................28 3.5 Technical data .............................................................................................................29 3.6 Applicable standards ...................................................................................................36 3.7 Certification ..................................................................................................................36 3.8 Abbreviations ...............................................................................................................36 4 Shipment, unpacking .....................................................................................................................37 5 Installation ......................................................................................................................................39 6 5.1 Dimension drawings ....................................................................................................40 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 Mounting options .........................................................................................................46 Terminal expansion board CUD2 ................................................................................46 Optional supplementary boards ...................................................................................47 Local bus adapter (LBA) for mounting optional supplementary boards ......................47 Mounting of optional supplementary boards................................................................48 Connections ....................................................................................................................................49 6.1 Block diagram with suggested connection ..................................................................50 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.1.6 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 Installation instructions for proper EMC installation of drives ......................................54 Fundamental principles of EMC ..................................................................................54 What is EMC ................................................................................................................54 Noise radiation and noise immunity.............................................................................54 Limit values ..................................................................................................................54 Using SIMOTRAS HD in an industrial environment ....................................................55 Non-grounded supply systems ....................................................................................55 EMC planning ..............................................................................................................55 Proper EMC installation of drives (installation instructions) ........................................56 General ........................................................................................................................56 Rules for proper EMC installation ................................................................................56 Arrangement of components for converters ................................................................64 RI suppression filters ...................................................................................................64 6.3 Parallel connection of converters ................................................................................65 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 5 Table of contents 6.3.1 6.3.2 Circuit diagram showing parallel connection of SIMOTRAS converters .................... 65 Parameterization of SIMOTRAS converters for parallel connection........................... 66 6.4 Power connections ...................................................................................................... 67 6.5 Fuses .......................................................................................................................... 73 6.6 Terminal arrangement................................................................................................. 74 6.7 6.7.1 Terminal assignments ................................................................................................. 77 Overview of terminal connections on the C98043-A7001 (CUD1) electronics module ........................................................................................................................ 77 Overview of terminal connections on the optional C98043-A7006 (CUD2) terminal expansion module ....................................................................................................... 77 Terminal description .................................................................................................... 78 6.7.2 6.7.3 7 6 03.2015 Start-up ........................................................................................................................................... 89 7.1 General safety information for start-up ....................................................................... 89 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 Operator control panels .............................................................................................. 90 Simple operator control panel (PMU "Parameterization Unit") ................................... 90 User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S) .............................................................. 91 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 Parameterization procedure........................................................................................ 92 Parameter types .......................................................................................................... 92 Parameterization at the simple operator control panel ............................................... 93 7.4 Restore factory setting ................................................................................................ 94 7.5 Notes to be read before switching on ......................................................................... 95 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.5.1 7.6.5.2 7.6.6 7.6.6.1 7.6.6.2 7.6.7 7.6.8 7.6.9 7.6.10 7.6.11 7.6.12 7.6.13 7.6.14 7.6.15 7.6.16 7.6.17 7.6.18 7.6.19 7.6.20 Start-up procedure ...................................................................................................... 96 Access authorization ................................................................................................... 96 Adjustment of converter rated currents ....................................................................... 96 Adjustment to actual converter supply voltage ........................................................... 96 Input of motor data ...................................................................................................... 96 Actual speed sensing data .......................................................................................... 97 Operation with pulse encoder (often present when retrofitting existing systems) ..... 97 Operation with analog tacho (used in new systems) .................................................. 97 Speed setpoint data .................................................................................................... 97 Operation with analog setpoint (U251=0) ................................................................... 97 Operation with 4 stage master switch (U251=1) ......................................................... 97 Selection of basic technological functions .................................................................. 97 Setting the current controller loop ............................................................................... 98 Checking direction of rotation of the motor ................................................................. 99 Setting the speed control loop .................................................................................... 99 Setting the ramp times of the ramp-function generator .............................................. 100 Setting the brake control ............................................................................................. 101 Setting the start pulse for the speed controller ........................................................... 103 Setting of limit value for closed-loop/open-loop operation .......................................... 103 Setting the rotor contactor stepping ............................................................................ 104 Counter-torque operation and premature switching over from counter-torque stage to start-up stage .......................................................................................................... 106 Setting the ramp-down monitoring function ................................................................ 107 Setting up setpoint/actual value monitoring ................................................................ 107 Setting the setpoint reduction when pre-limit switches are activated ......................... 108 Documentation of setting values ................................................................................. 108 7.7 SIMOTRAS HD troubleshooting table ........................................................................ 109 7.8 Data for existing drive ................................................................................................. 110 7.9 SIMOTRAS HD - QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS................................................... 112 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.10 7.10.1 7.10.2 7.10.2.1 7.10.2.2 7.10.3 7.10.3.1 7.10.3.2 7.10.3.3 7.10.4 7.10.5 7.10.6 7.10.7 7.10.8 Table of contents Starting up optional supplementary boards .................................................................114 Sequence of operations for starting up the T300 technology board ...........................114 Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards (CBP2) ...........................115 Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS: .....................................117 Diagnostic tools: ..........................................................................................................118 Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC) .................................122 Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2 .........................................................................123 Description of CBC with CANopen ..............................................................................127 Diagnostic tools: ..........................................................................................................129 Procedure for starting up the SIMOLINK board (SLB) ................................................133 Procedure for starting up expansion boards (EB1 and EB2) ......................................137 Procedure for starting up the pulse encoder board (SBP) ..........................................138 Structure of request/response telegrams ....................................................................139 Transmission of double-word connectors for technology and communication modules .......................................................................................................................142 8 Function diagrams .........................................................................................................................143 9 Function descriptions ....................................................................................................................299 10 9.1 General explanations of terms and functionality .........................................................299 9.2 Computation cycles, time delay ...................................................................................304 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 Commands for switch on, shutdown and disabling of the firing pulses .......................305 Switch-on / shutdown (ON / OFF1): terminal 37 - control word 1, bit 0 ....................305 Operating enable: terminal 38 - control word 1, bit 3 ................................................307 OFF2 (voltage disconnection): control word 1, bit 1 ...................................................308 OFF3 (Fast stop): control word 1, bit 2 ........................................................................308 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 Commands for specifying setpoints .............................................................................310 Inching .........................................................................................................................310 Crawl ............................................................................................................................311 Fixed setpoint ..............................................................................................................312 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 9.5.8 Ramp-function generator .............................................................................................312 Definitions ....................................................................................................................313 Operating principle of ramp-function generator ...........................................................313 Control signals for ramp-function generator ................................................................314 Ramp-function generator settings 1, 2 and 3 ..............................................................314 Ramp-up integrator ......................................................................................................315 Ramp-function generator tracking ...............................................................................315 Limitation after ramp-function generator......................................................................316 Velocity signal dv/dt (K0191) .......................................................................................316 9.6 Speed controller ...........................................................................................................316 9.7 Switch on auxiliaries ....................................................................................................317 9.8 Switch over parameter sets .........................................................................................318 9.9 9.9.1 9.9.2 Serial interfaces ...........................................................................................................319 Serial interfaces with USS(R) protocol...........................................................................320 Serial interfaces with peer-to-peer protocol .................................................................322 9.10 Thermal overload protection of motor (I2t monitoring of motor) ..................................326 9.11 Automatic restart ..........................................................................................................328 9.12 Status description of some bits of status word ZSW1 .................................................329 Faults and alarms ...........................................................................................................................331 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.2.1 10.1.2.2 10.1.2.3 Fault messages ...........................................................................................................332 General information about faults .................................................................................332 List of fault messages ..................................................................................................332 Supply faults ................................................................................................................333 Interface error ..............................................................................................................335 External faults, fault messages from free function blocks ...........................................336 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 7 Table of contents 11 8 03.2015 10.1.2.4 10.1.2.5 10.1.2.6 10.1.2.7 10.1.2.8 10.1.2.9 10.1.2.10 10.1.2.11 10.1.2.12 Fault messages from motor sensors .......................................................................... 338 Drive faults .................................................................................................................. 338 External faults ............................................................................................................. 338 Drive faults .................................................................................................................. 339 External faults ............................................................................................................. 340 Start-up faults .............................................................................................................. 341 Internal faults............................................................................................................... 341 Communication errors with supplementary boards .................................................... 344 Fault messages from supplementary boards .............................................................. 345 10.2 Alarm messages ......................................................................................................... 346 Parameter list ................................................................................................................................. 349 11.1 Operating status display ............................................................................................. 352 11.2 General visualization parameters ............................................................................... 354 11.3 Access authorization levels......................................................................................... 358 11.4 Definition of SIMOTRAS converter ............................................................................. 359 11.5 Definition of SIMOTRAS power section ...................................................................... 361 11.6 Setting values for converter control ............................................................................ 362 11.7 Definition of motor ....................................................................................................... 364 11.8 Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder............................... 365 11.9 Closed-loop current control, auto-reversing stage, gating unit ................................... 368 11.10 Current limitation, torque limitation ............................................................................. 369 11.11 Speed controller .......................................................................................................... 370 11.12 Ramp-function generator ............................................................................................ 372 11.13 Setpoint processing .................................................................................................... 374 11.14 Ramp-function generator ............................................................................................ 375 11.15 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits....................................................... 375 11.16 Setting values for limit-value monitors ........................................................................ 376 11.17 Settable fixed values ................................................................................................... 377 11.18 Fixed control bits ......................................................................................................... 378 11.19 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints) ........................ 379 11.20 Position sensing with pulse encoder ........................................................................... 381 11.21 Connector selector switches ....................................................................................... 381 11.22 Motorized potentiometer ............................................................................................. 382 11.23 Oscillation.................................................................................................................... 383 11.24 Temperature sensor inputs ......................................................................................... 384 11.25 Binary inputs ............................................................................................................... 385 11.26 Configuring of torque shell input ................................................................................. 385 11.27 Speed limiting controller .............................................................................................. 386 11.28 Friction compensation ................................................................................................. 386 11.29 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) .................................................. 387 11.30 Speed controller .......................................................................................................... 389 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Table of contents 11.31 Input quantities for signals ...........................................................................................390 11.32 Configuring of closed-loop control ...............................................................................391 11.33 Control word, status word ............................................................................................398 11.34 Further configuring measures ......................................................................................401 11.35 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs) ...........................402 11.36 Analog outputs .............................................................................................................406 11.37 Binary outputs ..............................................................................................................408 11.38 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter ..................................................408 11.39 Deactivation of monitoring functions ............................................................................418 11.40 Compensation values ..................................................................................................418 11.41 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S ......................................................................418 11.42 Profile parameters .......................................................................................................419 11.43 Fault memory, alarm parameters ................................................................................420 11.44 Visualization parameters: Alarms ................................................................................421 11.45 Device identification .....................................................................................................422 11.46 Visualization parameters: Control and status word .....................................................422 11.47 Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters .423 11.48 Password protection, key/lock mechanism..................................................................424 11.49 Processor utilization.....................................................................................................425 11.50 Display parameters for technology functions with S00 ................................................425 11.51 Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................426 11.52 Settable fixed values ....................................................................................................428 11.53 Triggering of faults and alarms ....................................................................................428 11.54 Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters ...................................430 11.55 Binector/connector converter for serial interfaces .......................................................431 11.56 Mathematical functions ................................................................................................432 11.57 Processing of connectors ............................................................................................437 11.58 Limiters, limit-value monitors .......................................................................................437 11.59 Processing of connectors ............................................................................................442 11.60 Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching ..............446 11.61 Simple ramp-function generator ..................................................................................452 11.62 Multiplexer ...................................................................................................................453 11.63 Counters ......................................................................................................................454 11.64 Logic functions .............................................................................................................454 11.65 Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches ....................................461 11.66 Technology controller ..................................................................................................466 11.67 Velocity/speed calculator .............................................................................................469 11.68 Variable moment of inertia ...........................................................................................470 11.69 PI controller ..................................................................................................................471 11.70 Closed-loop control elements ......................................................................................474 11.71 Control inputs, control outputs, setpoint reduction ......................................................475 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 9 Table of contents 12 13 11.72 Rotor stage stepping ................................................................................................... 476 11.73 Start pulse, speed controller ....................................................................................... 478 11.74 Evaluation of a four-stage master switch .................................................................... 478 11.75 Position/positional deviation acquisition ..................................................................... 479 11.76 Root extractor.............................................................................................................. 480 11.77 Configuration of SCB1 with SCI .................................................................................. 481 11.78 Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3 ........................... 484 11.79 Configuring the SIMOLINK board ............................................................................... 488 11.80 Configuring the EB1 expansion boards ...................................................................... 490 11.81 Configuring the EB2 expansion boards ...................................................................... 493 11.82 Configuring the SBP pulse encoder board ................................................................. 495 11.83 Configuration of paralleling interface .......................................................................... 496 11.84 Parameter for DriveMonitor ......................................................................................... 499 11.85 Slot deactivation .......................................................................................................... 500 11.86 Parameter for DriveMonitor ......................................................................................... 500 11.87 Technology software S00: Sampling times................................................................. 501 11.88 Parameter for DriveMonitor ......................................................................................... 503 11.89 Technology software S00: Altering the processing sequence of function blocks ...... 504 11.90 Parameter access for experts ..................................................................................... 505 11.91 List of existing and modified U and n parameters....................................................... 506 List of connectors and binectors ................................................................................................. 509 12.1 Connector list .............................................................................................................. 509 12.2 Binector list.................................................................................................................. 535 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 571 13.1 Procedure for updating software ................................................................................. 571 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 Replacement of components ...................................................................................... 573 Replacement of fan ..................................................................................................... 573 Replacement of PCBs ................................................................................................. 577 Replacement of thyristor modules on D400 / 60 - 680 Mre and D500 / 360 Mre converters ................................................................................................................... 578 Replacement of fuses and thyristor assemblies on D400 / 900 Mre converters ........ 579 13.2.4 14 15 10 03.2015 Servicing / Spare parts.................................................................................................................. 581 14.1 Servicing ..................................................................................................................... 581 14.2 Spare parts.................................................................................................................. 581 DriveMonitor .................................................................................................................................. 585 15.1 Scope of delivery ........................................................................................................ 585 15.2 Installing the software ................................................................................................. 585 15.3 Connecting the SIMOTRAS HD to the PC .................................................................. 585 15.4 Setting up an online link to the SIMOTRAS HD.......................................................... 586 15.5 Further information ...................................................................................................... 586 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Table of contents 16 Environmental compatibility .........................................................................................................587 17 Configuration example ..................................................................................................................589 18 17.1 Task .............................................................................................................................590 17.2 Selecting a motor .........................................................................................................590 17.3 Selecting an actual value sensor .................................................................................590 17.4 Selecting a rotor resistor ..............................................................................................591 17.5 Selecting a SIMOTRAS HD converter .........................................................................594 17.6 Selecting the contactors ..............................................................................................594 17.7 Selecting a master switch ............................................................................................594 Appendix .........................................................................................................................................595 18.1 Compatibility with SIMOTRAS HE (6GA4625 series) .................................................595 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 11 03.2015 Safety information 1 Notes 1.1 Converter software version As these Operating Instructions went to print, SIMOTRAS HD converters were being delivered from the factory with software version 3.2 installed. These Operating Instructions also apply to other software versions. Earlier software versions: Some parameters described in this document might not be stored in the software (i.e. the corresponding functionality is not available on the converter) or some parameters will have a restricted setting range. If this is the case, however, appropriate reference to this status will be made in the Parameter List. Later software versions: Additional parameters might be available on the SIMOTRAS HD (i.e. extra functions might be available which are not described in these Operating Instructions) or some parameters might have an extended setting range. In this case, leave the relevant parameters at their factory setting, or do not set any parameter values which are not described in these instructions. The software version of the SIMOTRAS HD can be read in parameters r060 and r065. The latest software version is available at the following Internet site: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804957/133100 From software version 1.5, the SIMOREG 6RA70 software also contains the SIMOTRAS HD software. Software update Before updating your software, find out the product state of your SIMOTRAS HD device. You will find this on the rating plate (field on the bottom left-hand side "Prod. State"). Prod. State = A1, A2 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L1-xx): It is only permissible to load software versions 1.xx and 2.xx. Prod. State = A3 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L2-xx): It is only permissible to load software versions 3.xx 1.2 Safety informations Note In the interests of clarity, these operating instructions do not contain full details of all information for all product types and cannot take into account every possible aspect of installation, operation, or maintenance. If you require further information, or problems arise, which these operating instructions do not cover in enough detail, please contact your local Siemens office. Furthermore, the contents of these operating instructions shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment, or legal relationship. The Purchase Agreement contains the complete and exclusive obligations of Siemens, including the warranty provisions. Any statements contained in these operating instructions neither expand nor restrict the scope of these contractual warranty conditions. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 13 Safety information 03.2015 Qualified personnel For the purpose of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel are persons ("skilled technical personnel" in accordance with EN 50110-1 "Operation of electrical systems") who are familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning and operation of the product. They must be properly qualified for the tasks with which they are charged, for example: * Training and experience of the relevant regulations to evaluate the commissioned work as well as recognize and prevent electrotechnical and other possible dangers. * Training or instruction and/or authorization to switch on and off, ground, and identify electric circuits and equipment according to the standards of safety technology. * Trained or instructed according to the latest safety standards regarding the maintenance and use of the appropriate safety equipment. * Training in first aid measures. WARNING Hazardous voltages and rotating parts (fans) are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation, proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance. DANGER Converters contain hazardous electrical voltages, Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage can occur if the safety measures are not followed. The following precautions should be taken in order to reduce the risk of death or injury. 1. Only qualified personnel, who are knowledgeable about the converters and the provided information, can install, start up, operate, troubleshoot or repair the converters. 2. The converter must be installed in accordance with the relevant safety regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE), as well as all other relevant national and local regulations. It must be ensured that the grounding, cable dimensioning and appropriate short-circuit protection have been implemented to guarantee operational safety and reliability. 3. All panels and doors must be kept closed during normal operation. 4. Before carrying out visual checks and maintenance work, ensure that the AC power supply is disconnected and locked out. Before the AC supply is disconnected, both converters and motors are at hazardous voltage levels. Even when the converter contactor is open, hazardous voltages are still present. 5. When making measurements with the power supply switched on, electrical connections must not be touched under any circumstances. Remove all jewellery from wrists and fingers. Ensure that the test equipment is in good conditions and operationally safe. 6. When working on units which are switched on, stand on an insulating surface, i.e. ensure that you are not grounded. 7. Carefully follow the relevant instructions and observe all danger, warning and cautionary instructions. 8. This does not represent a full listing of all the measures necessary for safe operation of the equipment. If you require other information or if certain problems occur which are not handled in enough detail in the information provided in the Instruction Manual, please contact your local Siemens office. 14 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Safety information NOTICE Operating the unit in the immediate vicinity (< 1.5 m) of mobile telephones with a transmitter power of > 1 W may lead to incorrect operation of the unit. NOTICE Electrostatically sensitive devices The converter contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These can easily be destroyed if they are not handled correctly. If, however, it is absolutely essential for you to work on electronic modules, please pay careful attention to the following instructions: * Electronic modules (PCBs) should not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them. * Before touching a PCB, the person carrying out the work must be electrostatically discharged. The simplest way of doing this is to touch an electrically conductive earthed object, e.g. socket outlet earth contact. * PCBs must not be allowed to come into contact with electrically insulating materials - plastic foil, insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic fibres * PCBs may only be set down or stored on electrically conducting surfaces. * When carrying out soldering jobs on PCBs, make sure that the soldering tip has been earthed. * PCBs and electronic components should generally be packed in electrically conducting containers (such as metallized-plastic boxes or metal cans) before being stored or shipped. * If the use of non-conducting packing containers cannot be avoided, PCBs must be wrapped in a conducting material before being put in them. Examples of such materials include electrically conducting foam rubber or household aluminium foil. For easy reference, the protective measures necessary when dealing with sensitive electronic components are illustrated in the sketches below. a b c = = = Conductive flooring Anti-static table Anti-static footwear Seated workstation d e f = = = Anti-static overall Anti-static chain Earthing connections of cabinets Standing workstation Standing/seated workstation WARNING Hazardous voltage are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation, proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 15 Safety information 16 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 2 Type spectrum Type spectrum Converter order no. Type designation --------------------------------------------------- 6SG7050 - 0EB60 - 0 D400 / 60 Mre 6SG7052 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7055 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7060 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7062 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7065 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7070 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7072 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7076 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7080 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7082 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7085 - 0EB60 - 0 6SG7076 - 0KB60 - 0 D400 / 78 Mre D400 / 98 Mre D400 / 112 Mre D400 / 142 Mre D400 / 180 Mre D400 / 225 Mre D400 / 285 Mre D400 / 360 Mre D400 / 525 Mre D400 / 680 Mre D400 / 900 Mre D500 / 360 Mre D400 / 525 Mre SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 D400 / 142 Mre 17 Type spectrum 2.1 03.2015 Converter order no. code 6 S G - - 0 - Defined according to standard general MLFB guidelines Converter model: 70: AC and three-phase DC power controller Rated current of: 50: 60A 52: 78A 55: 98A 60: 112A 62: 142A 65: 180A 70: 225A 72: 285A 76: 360A 80: 525A 82: 680A 85: 900A Version: 0: Thyristor Rated voltage of: E: 500V K: 690V Current converter: B: with current converter Converter connection: 60: 4-quadrant converter 0 Options: -: no options Z: with option 18 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 2.2 Type spectrum Ordering information for options and accessories Ordering information for options using codes 6 S G 7 0 0 Z SIMOTRAS HD converter order no. with suffix Z and codes (several codes together) and/or plaintext (if required) Options Codes Operation of SIMOTRAS HD converter at temperatures of 65C (not available for MLFB = 6SG7076- 0KB60-0) H78 Special version only for MLFB 6SG7076-0EB60-0 and 6SG7076-0KB60-0, selfventilated with rated current =130 A for exciter applications H70 Operating instructions in English D76 Operating Instructions and DriveMonitor in German and English on DVD-ROM D64 Ordering information for accessories Artikel Bestell-Nr. Terminal expansion module (CUD2) 6RX1700-0AK00 DriveMonitor PC - PMU (RS232) connecting cable, 3m 9AK1012-1AA00 Operating instructions in German 6SG7000-0BA00 Operating instructions in English 6SG7000-0BA76 Operating Instructions and DriveMonitor in German and English on DVD-ROM 6SG7000-0CD00 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 19 Type spectrum 20 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Description 3 Description 3.1 Applications SIMOTRAS HD converters in the 6SG70 series are fully digital compact converters and have been developed for regulating three-phase lifting gear motors with slipring rotors in the output range up to 580 kW and for higher-level control of the drive. For - lifting gear s lewing gear luffing gear trolley travel gear travel gear auxiliary-range gearboxes The benefits are: very efficient drive unit solutions in older systems extremely simple retrofitting resulting in significant improvements to existing systems low modernization costs as existing components such as motors, resistors, cables and cabinets can continue to be used fast, variable and user-friendly solution with low system standstill times very cost-effective solution for new systems low requirements for contactor controls and external interlocks, as important control functions are already integrated little planning and configuration work required cost-saving due to short assembly and commissioning times thanks to connection-ready compact converter technology very smooth travel, which helps prevent system wear very high level of control quality by utilizing the particular electrical advantages of the slipring motor very high level of control dynamics with the use of stator phase-angle control all standard lifting components and interfaces can be used no special technologies required! 3.2 Design Series 6SG70 SIMOTRAS HD converters are characterized by their compact, space-saving construction. Their compact design makes them particularly easy to service and maintain since individual components are readily accessible. The electronics box contains the basic electronic circuitry as well as any supplementary boards. All SIMOTRAS HD converters are equipped with a PMU simple operator panel mounted in the converter door. The panel consists of a five-digit, seven-segment display, three LEDs as status indicators and three parameterization keys. The PMU also features connector X300 with a USS interface in accordance with the RS232 or RS485 standard. The panel provides all the facilities for making adjustments or settings and displaying measured values required to start up the converter. The converter can also be parameterized on a standard PC with appropriate software connected to the serial interface on the basic unit. This PC interface is used during start-up, for maintenance during shutdown and for diagnosis in operation. Furthermore, converter software upgrades can be loaded via this interface for storage in a Flash memory. The power section is constructed of isolated thyristor modules. The heatsink is thus electrically isolated. The housing and terminal covers on power connections provide protection against accidental contact for operators working in the vicinity. All connecting terminals are accessible from the front. The power section cooling system is monitored by means of temperature sensors. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 21 Description 03.2015 3.3 Mode of operation 3.3.1 Converter design SIMOTRAS HD is a fully controllable, three-phase thyristor power controller which uses compact converter technology The converter is used to adjust and control three-phase motors with slipring rotor for lifting gear drives It is suitable for single and multi-motor drives. Two additional thyristor modules in the shunt arm of the power section facilitate the torque switchover and thus the 4Q operation of the drive. Using the auto-reversing stage, the phase sequence on the converter output is electronically reversed. Depending on the load conditions, the converter functions in plug braking mode (braking) or it drives the machine in the other direction of rotation (driving). A driving cycle that is both highly dynamic and gentle is possible because the conventional stator contactor is no longer required. The voltage on the motor is adjusted using the stator phase-angle control from three inverseparallel thyristor pairs. In this process, the supply frequency of the motor is not changed; it is always identical to the relevant mains frequency. The thyristors are controlled by the gating unit. This generates line-synchronous firing pulses. The control electronics are separated from the line potential by ignition transducers. The operating states are displayed on the unit via the 7-segment display and LEDs. All converter settings (e.g. controller parameters, limit values, etc.) are saved in non-volatile memory in the converter. The adjustment is made digitally via the converter control panel. The values can therefore be easily reproduced at any time. SIMOTRAS HD combines two traditional procedures for adjusting the speed of asynchronous machines: - changing the motor voltage using the stator phase-angle control gradient of motor characteristic curve using variable rotor resistances This combination permits excellent control response where the advantages of both procedures are exploited and the disadvantages are largely avoided. Both procedures are described below. 22 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 3.4 Description Speed control using stator phase-angle control The amplitude of the fundamental wave of the supply voltage is changed using the stator phaseangle control. With a constantly ascending ramp for the setpoint voltage from zero to maximum activation, the control angle and therefore the voltage time-area are continually increased. This increases the motor voltage (UM) continually and the drive is thereby slowly accelerated. The motor 2 torque increases proportionally to UM . Phase-angle control Load Motor Mains MM M 3~ Figure 3.4.1 n ML Simplified drive diagram with stator phase-angle control and asynchronous machine under load n Possible load characteristic ML n0 nN Motor characteristics nK MB* ML MM = Synchronous speed = Speed at nominal working point = Speed at pull-out torque = Pull-out torque of simple squirrel-cage rotor = Torque at dip = Start-up torque of simple squirrel-cage rotor without stator phase-angle control ML = Load torque MM = Motor torque MA* = Start-up torque with stator phase-angle control M* = Temporary motor characteristic MB* = Acceleration torque n0 nN nK MK MS MA M* With direct start-up: - simple squirrelcage rotor - double squirrelcage rotor 0 MA* MA Figure 3.4.2 M* = MS MK M Simplified characteristic curve of the asynchronous machine with stator phaseangle control for a direction of rotation/torque direction temporarily effective motor characteristic (dotted line) for a single squirrel-cage motor with stator phase-angle control MB* = Acceleration torque of the drive provides the speed ramp-up. Derived from the present difference MM - ML. The acceleration torque MB effective across the entire range is shown as the shaded area in the figure. MA* = Start-up torque of the motor set by the stator phase-angle. In order to start, MA* must be larger than the load torque ML. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 23 Description 3.4.1 03.2015 Speed control by changing the rotor resistance levels The torque can be influenced by switching on an additional ohmic resistance in the rotor circuit in the asynchronous motor. To do this, however, an asynchronous machine with a slipring rotor is required. Starting with the characteristic curve for a squirrel-cage motor, the gradients of the speedtorque curves increase as the resistance in the rotor circuit increases. The level of the pull-out torque MK remains constant. This means that at a specific load torque ML, the various constant speeds n2, n3 or n4 can be set. If the load changes, the speed increases as well. Speed n E.g. constant load torque Breakdown torque s=0 nN Motor characteristic of a short-circuit rotor motor n2 n3 n4 Motor characteristic curves at various rotor resistances Motor torque s=1 0 MK ML MM Figure 3.4.1.1 Speed-torque characteristic curves at different rotor resistances When changing the speed using additional rotor resistances, the Rotor output P2V = rotor power input Pd * slip s is largely converted into heat in the external resistor. This prevents excessive heating of the motor when running for extended periods at low speed. 24 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 3.4.2 Description Method of operation of electronic phase reversal with plug braking The drive starts up with the positive speed and stabilizes at point a. A constant load profile is assumed during this process. If a lower setpoint or a setpoint with the opposite polarity is connected when in this state, the SIMOTRAS HD will be switched to counter-torque operation. The thyristors that are currently conducting for the clockwise rotating field are first blocked. The thyristors for the anti-clockwise rotating field are then fired. This changes the phase sequence on the output terminals to produce a new direction of rotation, point b. The motor then starts plug braking and reduces its speed. A slip value s = 2 exists on the machine immediately following the switchover from motor operation at point a with the speed n = nN to braking operation at point b. With a direct switchover at full supply voltage, the motor current would now be greater than the start-up current (slip s=1, maximum current). SIMOTRAS HD therefore automatically reduces the motor voltage at this point, thereby limiting the maximum current. +n n0 s=2 nN b Mload = const. Clockwise field a Plug braking n=0 Positive torque -ML -M ML +M -nN Anti-clockwise field -n Figure 3.4.2.1 Speed-torque characteristic curves at phase reversal SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 25 Description 3.4.3 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD - control characteristics for lifting gear +n Braking Lift Full load curve Lift Driving Lift % 100 K S4 80 S3 60 S2 * 40 20 % -M -140 -100 -60 S1 -20 20 S1 60 100 140 * 180 % +M -20 -40 S2 -60 S3 -80 K S4 * -120 % Driving Lower -n Full load curve Lower Braking Lower ..... SIMOTRAS HD control range K ................... Characteristic curves for counter-torque operation (plug braking), i.e. delay lowering with overhauling loads or delay lifting when active counter-torque operation requested S2, S3, S4 .... Characteristic curves for open-loop operation * .................... Use of current limiting (e.g. Imax = 2 * IN) Up to 4 rotor resistance switching stages can be provided. With less than 4 stages, the upper stages (S3 / S4) remain free. 26 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Description 3.4.4 SIMOTRAS HD - control characteristics for travel gear +n Braking Clockwise Driving Clockwise % 100 K 80 S3 60 S2 * 40 20 % -M -140 -100 -60 S1 -20 20 S1 60 140 100 * 180 % +M -20 -40 S2 -60 -80 S3 K * -120 % Driving Anti-clockwise -n Braking Anti-clockwise ..... SIMOTRAS HD control range K ...... Characteristic curves for counter-torque operation (plug braking) S3 .... Characteristic curve for open-loop operation * ....... Use of current limiting (e.g. Imax = 2 * IN) Up to 4 rotor resistance switching stages can be provided. With less than 4 stages, the upper stages (S3 / S4) remain free. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 27 Description 3.4.5 03.2015 Detection of motor speed The motor speed can be measured as an analog value by means of a tachogenerator or digitally by means of an incremental encoder. Tachogenerator: Connection: See block diagram with connecting suggestion and description of terminal XT in section 6. Parameters: The parameters to be set are shown in function plan G113 in section 8. The parameters are described in the parameter list in section 11. Encoder: Recommended type of encoder: HOG 10 D and POG 10 D made by Baumer Hubner GmbH Berlin Connection: See block diagram with connecting suggestion and the description of terminal X173 in section 6. Parameters: The parameters to be set are shown in function plan G145 in section 8. A description of the parameters and other notes on selection of the incremental encoder are given in the parameter list in section 11. Actual speed: The actually used speed is selected with parameter P083 (see function plan G151 in section 8 and parameter list in section 11). 28 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 3.5 Description Technical data 60A to 180A converters, 3AC 110V to 500V Order No. 6SG70 . . - 0EB60-0 50 52 55 60 62 65 Rated supply voltage power section V 3AC 110V -10% to 3AC 500V +10% Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V Fan rated supply voltage V Overload capability 60 78 98 112 142 2AC 380 (-25%) to 460 (+15%); or 1AC 190 (-25%) to 230 (+15%); (- 35% for 1min) - - 180 In=1A In=2A DC 24 V internal 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 272 306 386 439 500 630 Minimum load A 3 6 6 6 7 7 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C 0 to 45 self-cooled Upper limit temperature with current derating C 55 50 Cooling air requirement m /h 3 - 100 Sound pressure level dBA - 40 Storage and transport temperature C 0 to 40 forced-cooled 1) -25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 3500m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 16 16 16 16 17 17 Explanation at end of list of tables SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 29 Description 03.2015 225A to 900A converters, 3AC 110V to 500V Order No. 6SG70 . . - 0EB60-0 70 Rated supply voltage power section Rated frequency V Hz Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V Fan rated supply voltage V 72 80 82 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. 225 285 525 680 3 AC 400 15% 50Hz A Overload capability 900 2AC 380 (-25%) to 460 (+15% ) In=1A or 1AC 190 (-25%) to 230 (+15% ) In=2A (- 35% for 1min) 3 AC 400 10% 50Hz 3 AC 460 10% 60Hz 3 AC 460 10% 60Hz Fan rated current 85 3AC 110V -10% to 3AC 500V +10% 0.24 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) 1.1 I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 839 1020 1827 2890 3550 Minimum load A 10 10 15 15 15 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C Upper limit temperature with current derating C Cooling air requirement m /h 3 570 1400 2400 Sound pressure level dBA 73 Storage and transport temperature C 0 to 40 forced-cooled 1) 50 88 -25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 3500m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 30 30 45 85 137 Explanation at end of list of tables 30 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 360A converters, 3AC 110V to 500V Order No. Description 6SG7076-0EB60-0 6SG7076-0EB60-0-Z Z=H70 Rated supply voltage power section Rated frequency V 3AC 110V -10% to 3AC 500V +10% Hz 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V Fan rated supply voltage V 3 AC 400 15% 50Hz 3 AC 460 10% 60Hz - Fan rated current A 0.24 - Overload capability 360 130 2AC 380 (-25%) to 460 (+15% ) In=1A or 1AC 190 (-25%) to 230 (+15% ) In=2A (- 35% for 1min) 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 1300 450 Minimum load A 10 10 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C Upper limit temperature with current derating C Cooling air requirement m /h 3 570 - Sound pressure level dBA 73 - Storage and transport temperature C 0 to 40 forced-cooled 0 to 45 self-cooled 1) 50 - 25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 3500m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 30 29 Explanation at end of list of tables SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 31 Description 360A converters, 3AC 200V to 690V Order No. 03.2015 6SG7076-0KB60-0 6SG7076-0KB60-0-Z Z=H70 Rated supply voltage power section Rated frequency V 3AC 200 V -10% to 3AC 690 V +10% Hz 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V 360 130 2AC 380 (-25 %) to 460 (+15 % ) or 1AC 190 (-25 %) to 230 (+15 % ) (- 35 % for 1 min) In=1 A In=2 A Fan rated supply voltage V 3 AC 400 15 % 50 Hz 3 AC 460 10 % 60 Hz - Fan rated current A 0.24 - Overload capability 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 1400 500 Minimum load A 10 10 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C Upper limit temperature with current derating C Cooling air requirement m /h 3 570 - Sound pressure level dBA 73 - Storage and transport temperature C 0 to 40 forced-cooled 0 to 45 self-cooled 1) 50 - 25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 3500m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 45 44 Explanation at end of list of tables 32 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Description 42A to 125A controllers, 3AC 110V to 500V (H78) Order No. 6SG70 . . - 0EB60 - 0-Z ...Z=H78 50 Rated supply voltage power section Rated frequency V Hz Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V Rated supply voltage for fans V Overload capability 52 55 60 62 65 3AC 110V -10% to 3AC 500V +10% 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. 42 55 70 80 100 125 2AC 380 (-25%) to 460 (+15% ) In=1A or 1AC 190 (-25%) to 230 (+15% ) In=2A (- 35% for 1min) - - DC 24 V internal 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 205 230 288 322 365 445 Minimum load A 3 6 6 6 7 7 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C +65 Cooling air requirement m /h 3 - 100 Sound pressure level dBA - 40 Storage and transport temperature C -25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 5000m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 16 16 16 16 17 17 Explanation at end of list of tables SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 33 Description 03.2015 150A to 700A converters, 3AC 110V to 500V (H78) Order No. 6SG70 . . - 0EB60 - 0-Z ...Z=H78 70 Rated supply voltage power section Rated frequency V Hz Rated current of A Rated electronics supply voltage V Rated supply voltage for fans V 72 76 80 50 / 60 Hz Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65 Hz. 150 200 250 365 475 700 2AC 380 (-25%) to 460 (+15% ) In=1A or 1AC 190 (-25%) to 230 (+15% ) In=2A (- 35% for 1min) 3 AC 400 15% 50Hz A Overload capability 85 3AC 110V -10% to 3AC 500V +10% 3 AC 400 10% 50Hz 3 AC 460 10% 60Hz 3 AC 460 10% 60Hz Fan rated current 82 0,24 20 s duration: then 70 s duration: then 60 s duration: (cycle time 150 s) 1,1 I = 2*In I = In I=0A Power loss at rated current (approx.) W 595 731 895 1280 2146 2865 Minimum load A 10 10 10 15 15 15 Operational ambient temperature at rated current C 1400 2400 +65 Cooling air requirement m /h 3 570 Sound pressure level dBA 73 Storage and transport temperature C 88 -25 to +70 Installation altitude above sea level 1000 m at rated current 2) max. 3500m with voltage and current reduction Environmental class DIN IEC 60721-3-3 3K3 Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 IP00 Dimensions Weight (approx.) See dimension drawings kg 30 30 30 45 85 137 Explanation at end of list of tables 34 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Description 1) Load values as a function of coolant temperature (refer to P077 in Section 11) Ambient temperature Change in load values (percentage reduction "a") or coolant temperature in devices with self-cooling in devices with enhanced air cooling +40C +45C +50C +55 C 0% 0% -6% - 12 % -0% -5% - 10 % operation not permitted 2) Load values as a function of installation altitude (refer to P077 in Section 11) Percentage load "b" b1 % 100 80 67% 60 40 20 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 m Installation altitude Curve b1: Reduction factor of load values at installation altitudes above 1000 m Permitted continuous current Operating the converter continuously at the rated supply current In is permitted. The limit temperature of the thyristors will be reached. It is not possible to accelerate out of this operating state, i.e. to increase the current! The current should therefore be reduced before accelerating so the converter can cool down. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 35 Description 3.6 3.7 03.2015 Applicable standards EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods, second environment / Category C3 EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General requirements Certification ISO 9001: The products referred to in this document are manufactured and operated in accordance with DIN ISO 9001 (Certificate Register No.: 257-0). Ship-building: Certificate No. Germanischer Lloyd 26 072 - 05 HH Lloyd's Register 06 / 20053 American Bureau of Shipping 06-HG195136-1-PDA Det Norske Veritas E-10356 Information on the necessary measures can be found in the CD-ROM "SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 documentation" - order number 6SG7000-0CD00 (from issue 04 onwards) or in the Internet at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24063215 3.8 36 Abbreviations CB Communications board PKW Parameter ID value PZD Process data TB Technology board ZSW Status word NC not connected SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 4 Shipment, unpacking Shipment, unpacking SIMOTRAS HD converters are packed in the production works according to the relevant ordering data. A product packing label is attached to the box. Protect the package against severe jolts and shocks during shipment, e.g. when setting it down. Carefully observe the information on the packaging relating to transportation, storage and proper handling. The SIMOTRAS HD device can be installed after it has been unpacked and the shipment checked for completeness and/or damage. The packaging materials consist of cardboard and corrugated paper and can be disposed of according to locally applicable waste disposal regulations. If you discover that the converter has been damaged during shipment, please inform your shipping agent immediately. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 37 Shipment, unpacking 38 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 5 Installation Installation CAUTION Failure to lift the converter in the correct manner can result in bodily injury and/or property damage. The converter must be lifted using suitable equipment and under the instruction of appropriately qualified personnel. To preclude the risk of deformation damage to the housings of D400 / 680 - 900 Mre converters, the lifting lugs used to raise them must not be subjected to any horizontal forces. The user is responsible for installing the converter, motor, transformer as well as other equipment according to safety regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE), as well as all other relevant national or local regulations regarding cable dimensioning and protection, grounding, isolating switch, overcurrent protection, etc. The converter must be installed in accordance with the relevant safety regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE), as well as all other relevant national and local regulations. It must be ensured that the grounding, cable dimensioning and appropriate short-circuit protection have been implemented to guarantee operational safety and reliability. Possible lifting method for D400 / 900 Mre converters SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 39 Installation Cubicle mounting of D400 / 900 Mre converters a 03.2015 s * These converters are supplied with 2 fixing angles a. These can be bolted to the SIMOTRAS HD unit by means of the supplied M6 hexagon-head screws (3 per angle) to assist cubicle mounting. * The unit can then be supported by 2 further angles s (not included in scope of supply) in the control cubicle. * The converters must be bolted to the cubicle rear panel in 4 places. 5.1 Dimension drawings NOTICE A clearance of at least 100 mm must be left above and below the converter in order to ensure an unrestricted cooling air intake and outlet. The converter may overheat if this clearance is not provided! 40 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 270 283 with door 100 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 129 150 83,5 12,5 350 15 T1 U2 25 XT 38.5 L1 U1 T2 V1 X1 37 T2 V2 48 V3 L2 V1 V6 37 T3 W2 48 V2 5W1 L3 W1 T3 V5 X2_4 X2_3 X2_2 X2_1 230 265 Front view, door removed 17.5 366 1) Minimum space required for air circulation, ensure there is an adequate supply of cooling air Door with electronics box Side view (without side panel) 03.2015 Installation D400 / 60 - 180 Mre converters 9. 385 100 1) 41 42 100 1) 1) Minimum space required for air circulation, ensure there is an adequate supply of cooling air Door with electronics box 35 306 V1 V3 V2 V6 V5 318 with door Side view (without side panel) 585 39 U1 L1 T2 47.5 U2 T1 X1 V2 T2 47.5 V1 L2 47.5 W2 T3 47.5 X2_4 X2_3 X2_2 X2_1 W1 L3 T3 5W1 19 602 120 139 160 174 136 XT 230 268 Front view, door removed Installation 03.2015 D400 / 225 - 360 Mre converters 10 135 98 625 10 100 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 for M10 100 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 40 Lifting lug O20 50 T3 T2 360 275 V1 V3 V2 V6 V5 Side view (without side panel) 142 150 for M8 660 33 30 205 30 V2/T2 V1/L2 30 W2/T3 W1/L3 8 19 677 119 30 U2/T1 U1/L1 268 230 Front view, door removed 1) Minimum space required for air circulation, ensure there is an adequate supply of cooling air Door 03.2015 Installation D400 / 525 Mre and D500 / 360 Mre converters 700 10 111 12 100 1) 43 44 Lifting lug O20 100 1) 740 V2 V3 V1 V5 V6 153 150 56 30 25 188 U2/T1 U1/L1 320 30 fur M12 V2/T2 V1/L2 320 406 Front view, door removed 30 W2/T3 W1/L3 43 8 Front view with door 1) Minimum space required for air circulation, ensure there is an adequate supply of cooling air for M10 780 757 50 T1 T2 360 Side view (without side panel) Installation 03.2015 D400 / 680 Mre converters 10 15 17.5 1001) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 4U1 4V1 4W1 2) 160 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 840 433 W2/T3 235 158 Lifting lug O22 260 63,5 122,5 V16 V13 V11 F131 F132 V14 316 U2/T1 T2 F111 F112 360 450 40 T3 for M12 V25 V22 F151 F152 for M10 880 855 30 Cable duct 10 2) Remove transportation plate before start-up by undoing the six M6 hexagon-head screws! 35 1) Minimum free space required for air circulation, customer connection and replacement of fan. Ensure there is an adequate supply of cooling air 45 Front view, door removed 63 205 40 U1/L1 T2 347 for M12 40 40 40 47 W1/L3 V15 V23 V1/L2 V12 T3 F121 F122 V26 F161 F162 View of rear thyristor level for M12 30 Customer connections V2/T2 500 Side view (without side panel) 03.2015 Installation D400 / 900 Mre converters 150 1) 45 Installation 5.2 Mounting options 5.2.1 Terminal expansion board CUD2 03.2015 * Remove electronics board CUD1 from the electronics box by undoing the two fixing screws a. * Attach the 3 supplied hexagon-head studs at position s on the CUD1 electronics board. * Position board CUD2 in such a way that the two plug connectors d are properly contacted. The two plug connectors must be positioned such that the short pin ends are inserted in the socket connectors of the CUD1 and the long pin ends in the socket connectors of the CUD2. * Secure board CUD2 in position using the supplied screws and retaining elements s. * Insert electronics board CUD1 into electronics box and tighten up the two fixing screws a again as instructed. 46 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 5.2.2 Installation Optional supplementary boards Note The listed optional boards have not been officially released and may only be used in consultation with the appropriate Siemens department. WARNING Safe operation is dependent upon proper installation and start-up by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings contained in these operating instructions. PCBs may be replaced only by properly qualified personnel. PCBs must not be removed or inserted when the power supply is connected. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. NOTICE PCBs contains electrostatically sensitive devices. Before touching a PCB, the person carrying out the work must himself be electrostatically discharged. The simplest way of doing this is to touch an electrically conductive earthed object, e.g. socket outlet earth contact. 5.2.2.1 Local bus adapter (LBA) for mounting optional supplementary boards Optional supplementary boards can be installed only in conjunction with the LBA option. If an LBA is not already fitted in the SIMOTRAS HD converter, one must be installed in the electronics box to accommodate the optional board. How to install an LBA local bus adapter in the electronics box: Undo the two fixing screws on the CUD1 board and pull board out by special handles. Push LBA bus extension into electronics box (see picture on right for position) until it engages. Insert CUD1 board in left-hand board location again and tighten fixing screws in handles. Location 2 (Optionen) Location 3 (Optionen Location 1 (CUD1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 47 Installation 03.2015 5.2.2.2 Mounting of optional supplementary boards 1 3 2 F D G E CUDx Supplementary boards are inserted in the slots of the electronics box. Option LBA (local bus adapter) is required to fit supplementary boards. The designations of the board locations or slots are shown in the adjacent diagram. Arrangement of board locations 1 to 3 and slots D to G in electronics box Note Supplementary boards may be inserted in any slot subject to the following restrictions: Slot 3 must not be used until slot 2 is already occupied. A technology board must always be installed in board location 2 of the electronics box. If a technology board is used in conjunction with one communication board, then the communication board must be fitted in slot G (miniature-format boards, for example CBP2 and CBC) or slot 3 (large-format board SCB1). It is not possible to operate boards EB1, EB2, SLB and SBP in conjunction with a technology board. The data of large-format boards are always output under slot E or slot G, i.e. the software version of a technology board, for example, is displayed in r060.003. In addition to the LBA, miniature-format boards (for example CBP2 and CBC) also require an ADB (adapter board, support board). Due to their very compact physical dimensions, these boards must be inserted in an ADB before they can be installed in the electronics box. A total of two supplementary boards of the same type can be used (e.g. 2 EB1s), but only 1 SBP and 1 SLB may be installed. For information about starting up supplementary boards, please refer to Section 7.10 "Starting up optional supplementary boards". 48 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 6 Connections Connections WARNING The converters are operated at high voltages. Disconnect the power supply before making any connections! Only qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices contained in the operating instructions as well as erection, installation, operating and maintenance instructions should be allowed to work on these devices. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. The converter might sustain serious or irreparable damage if connected incorrectly. Voltage may be present at the power and control terminals even when the motor is stopped. The snubber capacitors continue to carry hazardous voltage for up to 2 minutes after isolation from the supply. For this reason, the converter must not be opened for at least two minutes after switch-off. When working on the open converter, remember that live parts are exposed. The unit must always be operated with the standard front covers in place. The user is responsible for ensuring that the motor, SIMOTRAS converter and other devices are installed and connected up in accordance with the approved codes of practice of the country concerned and any other regional or local codes that may apply. Special attention must be paid to proper conductor sizing, fusing, grounding, isolation and disconnection measures and to overcurrent protection. These converters contain hazardous rotating machinery (fans) and control rotating mechanical components (drives). Death, serious bodily injury or substantial property damage may occur if the instructions in the relevant operating manuals are not observed. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation, proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 49 50 Brake checkback signal Electrical Stop 39 37 36 71 230V~ 78 ES2 79 77 ES1 Ack. 76 VE2 VE1 P24_S from terminal 34 Lifting gear overload Ack. button 74 High- 75 73 FK2 speed notch 72 FK1 1 2 3 4 5 M P10 N10 Setpoint U608 FR FR FK P665 Fault processing SIMOTRAS HD Acknowledge U605 Zero delay angle U663 Reduction of n controller start pulse P661 Enable pulse Valid travel command P654 Ramp-function generator Control word 1 bit 3 Setpoint reduction U607 & Acknowledgement ST sNo faults signal 3 ST Start pulse Speed controller 100% 4 = Current limiting Electronics power supply ~ 5U1 5W1 5N1 <5> Brake control S1 87 88 S2 89 90 S3 91 92 S4 93 94 85 86 103 104 30 28 26 27 31 29 Current control Converter fan 4U1 4V1 4W1 5 Actual speed value Limit switch Pre-limit switch Master switch Mechanical Stop 34 P24_S 38 84 83 82 81 2 230V~ k01 <1> MS G 90 0 15V <4> M <3> IG Gating unit Actual current value sensing 6 n Brake T1 M 3~ T2 V2 V1 U1 U2 <6> L2 L1 7 Load ST PE <2> 22 23 Motor temperature monitoring sNo faults signal 110 109 s <6> Power section connection <5> Converter fan connection <4> Terminal 26 supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply. <3> Analog tacho or pulse encoder G = analog tacho IG = pulse encoder <2> KTY84 or PTC connection for motor temperature monitoring <1> Signal from safety chain for brake control T3 W2 W1 L3 8 6.1 MS <1> 1 Connections 03.2015 Block diagram with suggested connection Control logic for rotor contactors Drive-specific (crane) control SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 q73 q47 n> 14 13 14 13 230V ~ 1 Fuse monitoring circuit on SIMOTRAS power section 34 5U1 38 5W1 K01 5U1 Enable P24_S Acknowledge signal Electronics 5W1 84 NC 5N1 "Ready" signal <2> 4 6 Q2 5 U1 V1 W1 L1 L2 L3 2 3 13 14 I> I> I> SIMOTRAS HD Power section Q1 1 5 22 21 Q 6 Brake control Converter fan 4V1 83 5N1 Electronics <1> Q73 4 4U1 82 81 MCB Centrifugal brake operator Centrifugal switch oder 3 4W1 k01 Crane switch <1> Electronics power supply 230 V ~ <2> Electronics power supply 400 V ~ 1AC 50-60Hz 230V 3AC 50-60Hz 110 - 500V 3AC 50-60Hz 400V 2 46 86 85 47 230V ~ Q47 7 2 I> 1 4 I> 3 M 3~ U V K71 k01 k7 22 21 K7 k71 Centrifugal W brake operator PE 6 14 I> 5 13 8 03.2015 Connections 51 52 230V~ Master switch 230V~ SIMOTRAS HD Note: A relay with hard gold plated contacts should be used. <1> e.g. input coupling element SIEMENS order no. 3TX7002-2BF02 72 Travel command 1 72 Travel command 1 SIMOTRAS HD 71 73 Travel command 2 71 P24_S Power Interface 74 41 40 73 Setpoint stage S3 Setpoint stage S2 Travel command 2 <1> <1> 44 CUD2 Notch / Setpoint stage S4 Power Interface M P10 N10 Setpoint Master switch (see also Section 8, Sheet G13) 4 stage master switch 74 High-speed notch 1 2 3 4 5 CUD1 Master switch with setpoint potentiometer Connection of Master Switch Connections 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Drive-specific (crane) control Connections The drive-specific (crane) control is integrated in the SIMOTRAS HD converter. It is made up of the freely assignable function blocks (technology software S00). The freely assignable function blocks are shown in Section 8, sheets B100 to B216. In the factory settings for the relevant parameters, these function blocks are connected to the drive-specific (crane) control as shown in Section 8, sheets K1 to K18. The drive-specific (crane) control has been designed to simplify the switchover between the master switch with setpoint potentiometer and the 4-stage master switch: U251 = 0: U251 = 1 Master switch with setpoint potentiometer 4 stage master switch The control functions can be entered via the terminals or PROFIBUS (SINEC L2 DP). If a T300 technology board and/or a CBP board is inserted, the control functions are automatically entered from the T300 or from PROFIBUS. The terminals 36, 37, 39 and 72 to 79 have no function. The bit assignments for the control inputs on the PROFIBUS are shown on sheets K4 and K5 in Section 8. The following diagram shows the arrangement of the pre-limit switches and the limit switches, together with the direction of the travel command as required for operating the crane control. FK1 FK2 ES1 ES2 VE1 FK1: Travel command 1 VE1: Pre-limit switch 1 ES1: Limit switch 1 VE2 FK2: Travel command 2 VE2: Pre-limit switch 2 ES2: Limit switch 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 53 Connections 6.2 03.2015 Installation instructions for proper EMC installation of drives Note These installation instructions do not purport to handle or take into account all of the equipment details or versions or to cover every conceivable operating situation or application. If you require more detailed information, or if special problems occur, which are not handled in enough detail in this document, please contact your local Siemens office. 6.2.1 Fundamental principles of EMC 6.2.1.1 What is EMC EMC stands for "electromagnetic compatibility" and defines the capability of a piece of equipment to operate satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing electromagnetic disturbances that would adversely affect other items of equipment in its vicinity. Thus, different items of equipment must not adversely affect one another. 6.2.1.2 Noise radiation and noise immunity EMC is dependent on two characteristics of the equipment/units involved, i.e. radiated noise and noise immunity. Items of electrical equipment can either be fault sources (transmitters) and/or noise receivers. Electromagnetic compatibility exists if the fault sources do not adversely affect the function of the noise receivers. An item of equipment can be both a noise source and a noise receiver. For example, the power section of a converter must be regarded as a noise source and the control section as a noise receiver. 6.2.1.3 Limit values Electrical drives are governed by Product Standard EN 61800-3. According to this standard, it is not necessary to implement all EMC measures for industrial supply networks. Instead, a solution adapted specifically to the relevant environment can be applied. Accordingly, it may be more economical to increase the interference immunity of a sensitive device rather than implementing noise suppression measures for the converter. Thus, solutions are selected depending on their cost-effectiveness. SIMOTRAS HD converters are designed for industrial applications (industrial low-voltage supply system, i.e. a system that does not supply domestic households). Noise immunity defines the behaviour of a piece of equipment when subjected to electromagnetic disturbance. The Product Standard regulates the requirements and assessment criteria for the behaviour of equipment in industrial environments. The converters in this description comply with this Standard (Section 6.2.2.3). 54 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections 6.2.1.4 Using SIMOTRAS HD in an industrial environment In an industrial environment, equipment must have a high level of noise immunity whereas lower demands are placed on noise radiation. SIMOTRAS HD converters are components of an electrical drive system in the same way as contactors and switches. Properly qualified personnel must integrate them into a drive system consisting, at least, of the converter, motor cables and motor. In most cases fuses will also be required. Limit values can only be maintained if these components are installed and mounted in the correct way. In order to limit the mains-borne radiated noise according to limit value "A1", the appropriate radio interference suppression filter is required in addition to the converter itself. Without an RI suppression filter, the noise radiated by a SIMOTRAS HD converter exceeds limit value "A1" as defined by EN55011. If the drive forms part of a complete installation, it does not initially have to fulfil any requirements regarding radiated noise. However, EMC legislation requires the installation as a whole to be electromagnetically compatible with its environment. If all control components in the crane system have noise immunity for industrial environments, it is not necessary for each drive to meet limit value "A1" in its own right. 6.2.1.5 Non-grounded supply systems Non-grounded supply systems (IT systems) are used in a number of industrial sectors in order to increase plant availability. In the event of a ground fault, no fault current flows so that the plant can still operate. When RI suppression filters are installed, however, a ground fault does cause a fault current to flow, resulting in shutdown of the drives and, in some cases, destruction of the suppression filter. For this reason, the Product Standard does not define limit values for these supply systems. From the economic viewpoint, RI suppression should, if required, be implemented on the grounded primary side of the supply transformer. For the use of RFI suppression filters in non-grounded networks (IT systems) choose filter types compatible for IT systems. Note: The voltage is detected via high-resistance resistor chains (1.510 k for 575-V-units; 1.810 k for 690-V-units). This resistance with respect to ground must be taken into account during the project work. 6.2.1.6 EMC planning If two units are not electromagnetically compatible, you can either reduce the noise radiated by the noise source, or increase the noise immunity of the noise receiver. Noise sources are generally power electronics units with a high power consumption. To reduce the radiated noise from these units, complex, costly filters are required. Noise receivers are predominantly control equipment and sensors including evaluation circuitry. Increasing the noise immunity of less powerful equipment is generally easier and cheaper. In an industrial environment, therefore, it is often more cost-effective to increase noise immunity rather than reduce radiated noise. For example, in order to adhere to limit value class A1 of EN 55011, the noise suppression voltage at the mains connection may be max. 79 dB (V) between 150 kHz and 500 kHz and max. 73 dB (V) (9 mV or 4.5 mV) between 500 kHz and 30 MHz. In industrial environments, the EMC of the equipment used must be based on a well-balanced mixture of noise radiation and noise immunity. The most cost-effective RI suppression measure is the physical separation of noise sources and noise receivers, assuming that it has already been taken into account when designing the machine/plant. The first step is to define whether each unit is a potential noise source (noise radiator or noise receiver). Noise sources are, for example, PLCs, transmitters and sensors. Examples of noise receivers are PLCs, encoders and sensors. Components in the control cabinet (noise sources and receivers) must be physically separated, if necessary through the use of metal partitions or metal enclosures for individual components. Figure 1 shows an example component layout in a control cabinet. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 55 Connections 6.2.2 03.2015 Proper EMC installation of drives (installation instructions) 6.2.2.1 General Since drives can be operated in a wide range of differing environments and the electrical components used (controls, switched-mode power supplies, etc.) can differ widely with respect to noise immunity and radiation, any mounting/installation guideline can only represent a practical compromise. For this reason, EMC regulations do not need to be implemented to the letter, provided that measures are checked out on a case by case basis. In order to guarantee electromagnetic compatibility in your cabinets in rugged electrical environments and fulfil the standards specified by the relevant regulatory bodies, the following EMC regulations must be observed when designing and installing cabinets. Rules 1 to 10 generally apply. Rules 11 to 15 must be followed to fulfil standards governing radiated noise. 6.2.2.2 Rules for proper EMC installation Rule 1 All the metal components in the cabinet must be conductively connected over a large surface area with one another (not paint on paint!). Serrated or contact washers must be used where necessary. The cabinet door should be connected to the cabinet through the shortest possible grounding straps (top, center, bottom).. Rule 2 Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical hours counters, etc. in the cabinet, and, if applicable, in adjacent cabinets, must be provided with quenching elements, for example, RC elements, varistors, diodes. These devices must be connected directly at the coil. Rule 3 1) Signal cables should enter the cabinet at only one level wherever possible. Rule 4 Unshielded cables in the same circuit (incoming and outgoing conductors) must be twisted where possible, or the area between them kept as small as possible in order to prevent unnecessary coupling effects. Rule 5 2) Connect spare conductors to the cabinet ground (ground ) at both ends to obtain an additional shielding effect. Rule 6 Avoid any unnecessary cable lengths in order to reduce coupling capacitances and inductances. Rule 7 Crosstalk is kept low if cables are routed close to the cabinet ground. For this reason, wiring should not be routed freely in the cabinet, but as close as possible to the cabinet frame and mounting panels. This applies equally to spare cables. Rule 8 Signal and power cables must be routed separately from one another (to prevent noise from being coupled in). A minimum 20 cm clearance should be maintained. If the encoder cables and motor cables cannot be routed separately, then the encoder cable must be decoupled by means of a metal partition or installation in a metal pipe or duct. The partition or metal duct must be grounded at several points. Rule 9 The shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground at both ends (source and destination). If there is poor potential bonding between the shield connections, an additional potential bonding cable of at least 10 mm must be connected in parallel to the shield to reduce the 2) shield current. Generally speaking, the shields can be connected to the cabinet housing (ground ) at several points. The shields may also be connected at several locations outside the cabinet. Foil-type shields should be avoided. Their shielding effect is poorer by a factor of 5 as compared to braided shields. 56 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Rule 10 The shields of analog signal cables may be connected to ground at both ends (conductively over a large area) if potential bonding is good. Potential bonding can be assumed to be good if all metal parts are well connected and all the electronic components involved are supplied from the same source. The single-ended shield connection prevents low-frequency, capacitive noise from being coupled in (e.g. 50 Hz hum). The shield connection should then be made in the cabinet. In this case, the shield may be connected by means of a sheath wire. The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor (X174:22 und X174:23) must be shielded and connected to ground at both ends. Rule 11 The RI suppression filter must always be mounted close to the suspected noise source. The filter must be mounted over the largest possible area with the cabinet housing, mounting plate, etc. Incoming and outgoing cables must be routed separately. Rule 12 To ensure adherence to limit value class A1, the use of RI suppression filters is obligatory. Additional loads must be connected on the line side of the filter. The control system used and the other wiring in the cubicle determines whether an additional line filter needs to be installed. Rule 13 Unshielded motor cables may be used in SIMOTRAS HS drive systems. The line supply cable must be routed at a distance of at least 20 cm from the motor cables (stator, rotor). Use a metal partition if necessary. Footnotes: 1) Signal cables are defined as: Digital signal cable: Analog signal cable.: Pulse encoder cables e.g. + 10 V setpoint cable Serial interfaces, e.g. PROFIBUS-DP 2) The term "Ground" generally refers to all metallic, conductive components which can be connected to a protective conductor, e.g. cabinet housing, motor housing, foundation grounder, etc. Cabinet design and shielding: The cabinet design illustrated in Figure 1 is intended to make the user aware of EMC-critical components. The example does not claim to include all possible cabinet components and their respective mounting possibilities. Details which influence the noise immunity/radiation of the cabinet and are not absolutely clear in the overview diagram are described in Figures 1a - 1d. Figures 2a -2d show details of different shield connection techniques with ordering source information. Arrangement of RI suppression filters: Section 6.2.2.3 shows how RI suppression filters are arranged in the SIMOTRAS HD system. The specified sequence for installing the filters must be observed. Fuses for semiconductor protection are selected according to Section 6.4. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 57 Connections 03.2015 Control transformer for fan s SIMOTRAS HD Fig. 1c or 1d Connecting shields Circuit-breakers Fig. 1e (Main contactor) Circuit breaker Electronic mains filter Fig. 1b Converter filter 3AC Shielding bus Connecting terminals electronics, aux. operation control cable Fuse-links Shielding bus Fuse-links Main switch Connecting terminals Cable duct Shielding bus Fig. 1a Cable clamp bar Customer connection mains 3AC Customer connection stator 3AC Customer connection electronics, fan Pulse encoder PE conductor (location not critical) Fig. 1: 58 Example of a cabinet design with a SIMOTRAS HD SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Cable duct Do not use shield rail as strain relief Cable clamping bar Cable clamping bar Connect to cabinet housing at both ends in conductive, large-surface connection! Shield at plant end as well (e.q. on pulse encoder) Shield connection according to the following variants 1,2,3 and 4. Fig. 1a: Shield at cable entry point to cabinet Data line (e.g. PROFIBUS-DP) Data line (e.g. Impulsgeber) Analog signal line Terminals Connect to cabinet housing at both ends in a conductive, large-area connection! Shield at the plant end as well (e.g. on polse encoder) Fig. 1b: Shielding in the cabinet SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 59 X1 XT XP X2_1 X2_2 X2_3 03.2015 X2_4 Connections X161 X171 X162 X172 X163 X173 X164 X174 X175 Fig. 1c: Connecting shields on a SIMOTRAS HD D400 / 60-280 Mre converter XP X2_1 X2_2 X2_3 X2_4 X1 XT Fig. 1d: Connecting shields on a SIMOTRAS HD D400 / 900 Mre converter 60 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Fig. 1e: Line filter for SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 electronics power supply Note: Rule 12 in Section 6.2.2.2 shows why it is necessary to install a line filter. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 61 Connections 03.2015 Shield connections: Variant 1: Variant 2: Fig. 2a: Terminal on copper busbar, max. cable diameter 15 mm Fig. 2b: Terminal on copper busbar, max. cable diameter 10 mm Important ! The conductor might be damaged if the terminal screw is over-tightened. Note: Note: Connecting terminals: 5 mm busbar thickness Order No. 8US1921-2AC00 10 mm busbar thickness Order No. 8US1921-2BC00 Terminals: Order No. 8HS7104, 8HS7104, 8HS7174, 8HS7164 62 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Variant 3: Variant 4: Fig. 2c: Fig. 2d: Clamp and metallic mating piece on a cable clamping rail Metallized tubing or cable ties on a bare metal comb-type/serrated rail SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 63 Connections 03.2015 6.2.2.3 Arrangement of components for converters Arrangement of filters 230V Line voltage 400V 1) 3) 2) NC 5N1 5U1 5W1 Power supply input either 230V or 400V 5N1 5U1 5W1 U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 Stator SIMOTRAS HD converter U2/T1 V2/T2 W2/T3 M 3~ 1) The filter for the electronics power supply is dimensioned for 1.1 A. 2) The filter for the stator circuit is dimensioned for the rated motor current. 3) The filter for the electronics power supply is dimensioned for 2 A. 6.2.2.4 RI suppression filters Suggested types (depending on rated current): - B84143G*R110 - B84143B*S020...S024 from EPCOS http://de.tdk.eu/ 64 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections 6.3 Parallel connection of converters 6.3.1 Circuit diagram showing parallel connection of SIMOTRAS converters 3AC 50-60Hz 110-500V 3AC 50-60Hz, 400V NC NC NC 1) 1) L1 L2 L3 4U1 4V1 4W1 5N1 5W15U1 Fan Fan Power supply SIMOTRAS-converter (Slave) CUD1 34 37 38 CUD2 X165 X166 3) 4U1 4V1 4W1 5N1 5W15U1 V2 T2 W2 T3 Power supply 34 37 38 2) CUD2 X165 X166 1) V2 T2 W2 T3 34 37 38 2) 3) Power supply SIMOTRAS-converter (Slave) CUD1 U2 T1 L1 L2 L3 4U1 4V1 4W1 5N1 5W15U1 Fan SIMOTRAS-converter (Master) CUD1 U2 T1 L1 L2 L3 CUD2 X165 X166 U2 T1 V2 T2 3) W2 T3 2) M 3~ 1) The same phase sequence is required between U1(L1) / V1(L2) / W1(L3). 2) The same phase sequence is required between U2(T1) / V2(T2) / W2(T3). 3) The converters are connected by means of an (8-pin) shielded Patch cable of type UTP CAT5 according to ANSI/EIA/TIA 568, such as those used in PC networking. A standard 5 m cable can be ordered directly from Siemens (order number: 6RY1707-0AA08). (n-1) cables are needed to connect n converters in parallel. The bus terminator must be activated (U805=1) on the converter at each end of the bus. Caution: Parallel connections may only be made between converters with the same current rating! The terminal expansion option (CUD2) is required for each converter in a parallel connection. A maximum of 6 converters can be connected in parallel. When several converters are connected in parallel, the master unit should be positioned in the center to allow for signal transit times. Maximum length of paralleling interface cable between master and slave converters at each end of bus: 15m. For the purpose of current distribution, separate commutating reactors of the same type are required for each SIMOTRAS converter. Current distribution is determined by the differential reactor tolerance. A tolerance of 5% or better is recommended for operation without derating (reduced current). Open-loop and closed-loop connections (rotor contactor, brake, tachometer, etc.) are only to be connected to the master (in accordance connecting suggestion in section 6.1). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 65 Connections 6.3.2 03.2015 Parameterization of SIMOTRAS converters for parallel connection Master Slaves U800 = 1 Paralleling interface active U803 = 0 U804.01 = 30 U804.02 = 31 U804.03 = 167 U800 = 2 Paralleling interface active Use master firing pulses U804.01 = 32 status word 1 "N+1 mode" not active control word 1 control word 2 Actual speed value U805 = 1 (bus termination) 0 (no bus termination) on the two end units (at both physical ends of the bus cable) on all other units U806.01 = 12 master for one slave 13 master for 2 slaves 14 master for 3 slaves 15 master for 4 slaves 16 master for 5 slaves Set U806.02 like U806.01 U806.01 = 2 U806.01 = 2 and 3 U806.01 = 2, 3 and 4 U806.01 = 2,3,4 and 5 U806.01 = 2,3,4,5 and 6 Set U806.02 like U806.01 Set P083 depending on the source of the actual speed value P083 = 4 P609 = 6023 Freely connected actual speed value Use actual speed value of master P635.F = 167 Use actual speed value of master as setpoint P100 = Rated motor current Number of SIMOTRAS units Set P648, P649 depending on the source of the control word P100 = 1 slave 2 slaves 3 slaves 4 slaves 5 slaves Rated motor current Number of SIMOTRAS units P648 = 6021 P649 = 6022 Use control word 1 from master Use control word 2 from master P820.01 = 23 P820.02 = 24 P820.03 = 31 Suppress fault message F023 Suppress fault message F024 Suppress fault message F031 P821.01 = 23 P821.02 = 24 P821.03 = 31 Suppress alarm A023 Suppress alarm A024 Suppress alarm A031 For further details about the operating principle of parallel connections between SIMOTRAS converters, please refer to Section 8, Function Diagrams, Sheet G195 (paralleling interface). Note: All control commands (travel command 1, etc.) must be connected to a group of parallel-connected SIMOTRAS converters via the master device. 66 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 X14 X11 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 T2 X11 T2 V1/L2 W2/T3 X25 T3 W1/L3 X22 K1 K2 G1 G2 K1 K2 G1 G2 X16 A A X13 K AK K AK V2 C98043-A7020 X23-1 X23-2 X26-1 X26-2 X13-1 X13-2 X16-1 X16-2 X11-1 X11-2 X14-1 X14-2 23 26 13 16 11 14 1 a K U2 / T1 K1 G1 AK L T2 K K2 A b 1 K1 G1 2 G2 V2 / T2 V1 l k K AK 3 2 A V3 K2 1 K1 G1 K AK K1 K2 V6 10 A K 4 C98043-A7021 6 1 2 G2 1 G1 AK L T3 K K2 c 2 G2 A V2 l k 1 c K1 G1 2 G2 a b K2 V5 A W2 / T3 K AK 2 G2 X3-3 X3-2 X3-1 X3-4 15 12 25 22 X1-79 X1-78 X1-77 X1-76 X1-75 X1-74 X1-73 X1-72 X1-71 XT-104 XT-103 1 S3 S4 X2_1-93 S4 S3 X2_1-92 S2 X2_1-91 S2 X2_2-90 S1 X2_2-89 S1 Root X2_2-88 X2_1-94 270V to A7009 - X101 Tacho ground Tacho X2_2-87 X2_3-86 X2_3-85 X2_3-84 X2_3-83 X2_4-82 X2_4-81 X2_4-110 X2_4-109 Tacho B601 B600 X101 2 F2 F1 M1A M1A 3 5N1 5W1 5U1 XP AC 190 to 230V F2 F1 M1A M1A 1 or 5N1 5W1 5U1 2 AC 380 to 460V NC 3 C98043-A7020 X15-2 X15-1 X12-2 X12-1 X25-2 X25-1 X22-2 X22-1 B602 B603 XP R76 U2/T1 U1/L1 V2/T2 V1 AK V3 V5 AK AK V6 K K X6 X7 + X91-1 W1 / L3 User programmable relay outputs see Section 6.1 K A G2 G1 K2 K1 A X15 A X12 G2 G1 K2 K1 X23 G2 G1 K2 K1 X26 142 to 180A converters T3 W1/L3 X25 X22 X13 X16 V1/L2 W2/T3 G1 K1 G2 K2 A A G1 K1 G2 K2 K AK M X75-1 X75-2 X92-1 + X91-2 X75-3 X75-4 M V1 / L2 User programmable inputs see Section 6.1 X14 V2 K AK V3 U2/T1 U1/L1 V2/T2 V1 AK K AK V5 AK V6 K K R100 X92-2 - E301 U1 / L1 R75 A K2 G2 K1 G1 A K2 G2 K1 G1 K2 G2 K1 G1 A X12 X15 X26 X23 Arrangement of thyristor modules 60 to 112A converters Cables at connection ends marked as shown E302 Not present on 60A and 78A 6.4 G (Gate) cables yellow K (Cathode) cables red a = CU rails 20 x 3 b = CU rails 20 x 5 c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9 All cables Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless specified otherwise 03.2015 Connections Power connections D400 / 60 - 180 Mre converter (order no. 6SG7050 - 6SG7065) see technical data in Section 3.4 See Section 6.1 67 68 U2/T1 V1/L2 W2/T3 T3 W1/L3 C98043-A7020 X23-1 X23-2 X26-1 X26-2 X13-1 X13-2 X16-1 X16-2 X11-1 X11-2 23 26 13 16 11 1 K1 G1 U2 / T1 a K AK L 1 3 2 K1 G1 2 G2 V2 / T2 A b K2 V1 l K A V3 K2 2 G2 1 c 10 K1 G1 c 4 C98043-A7021 6 1 AK K K1 3 2 AK 1 G1 K A 2 G2 K2 V2 A l k 1 K1 G1 2 G2 4 C98043-A7021 1 V6 K2 K AK L T3 a K2 V5 b A W2 / T3 6 10 K AK 2 G2 X3-3 X3-2 X3-1 X3-4 15 12 25 22 2 1 X1-79 X1-78 X1-77 X1-76 X1-75 X1-74 X1-73 X1-72 X1-71 XT-104 XT-103 270V to A7009 - X101 S3 S4 S4 X2_1-94 S3 X2_1-93 S2 X2_1-91 X2_1-92 S2 X2_2-90 S1 X2_2-89 S1 X2_2-88 Root Tacho ground Tacho X2_2-87 X2_3-86 X2_3-85 X2_3-84 X2_3-83 X2_4-82 X2_4-81 X2_4-110 X2_4-109 Tacho B601 B600 F2 F1 M1A M1A X101 3 F2 F1 M1A M1A XP AC 190 to 230V 5N1 5W1 5U1 1 or 5N1 5W1 5U1 2 AC 380 to 460V NC 3 C98043-A7020 X15-2 X15-1 X12-2 X12-1 X25-2 X25-1 X22-2 X22-1 B602 B603 XP R76 V2/T2 T2 X25 X22 V2 X13 X16 A K K1 G1 G2 K2 V3 AK AK V5 K1 G1 G2 K2 A K AK V6 K X6 X7 14 k W1 / L3 User programmable relay outputs see Section 6.1 U1/L1 AK V1 AK K A K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 A X12 X15 X26 X23 X14-1 X14-2 X75-1 X75-2 K T2 V1 / L2 User programmble inputs see Section 6.1 K A K2 G2 G1 K1 X14 X11 R100 X75-3 X75-4 E301 fan U1 / L1 R75 Arrangement of thyristor modules Cables at connection ends marked as shown G (Gate) cables yellow K (Cathode) cables red a = CU rails 30 x 5 b = CU rails 35 x 5 c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9 All cables Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless specified otherwise 3~ M 4U1 4V1 4W1 Connections 03.2015 D400 / 225 -360 Mre converter (order no. 6SG7070 - 6SG7076) see technical data in Section 3.4 See Section 6.1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 V2/T2 T2 V1/L2 W2/T3 T3 X15 X12 V5 X23 X26 A K AK K1 G1 G2 K2 V6 V2 K1 G1 G2 K2 A K AK AK W1/L3 Back row Front row C98043-A7020 X23-1 X23-2 X26-1 X26-2 X13-1 X13-2 X16-1 X16-2 X11-1 X11-2 23 26 13 16 11 1 K1 G1 U2 / T1 a K AK K2 A 1 K1 G1 2 G2 V2 / T2 V1 l R10 K AK X99 X95 b R12 A V3 K2 X90 b 1 K2 2 G2 A X91 V2 l k X96 K2 V6 A K R13 R14 X93 K AK K1 C98043-A7011-L7 K1 G1 X92 2 G2 1 G1 AK L T3 K b b X97 R15 1 K1 G1 2 G2 a K2 a V5 A W2 / T3 K AK 2 G2 X3-3 X3-2 X3-1 X3-4 15 12 25 22 Tacho B601 B600 1 S1 S2 X2_2-89 S4 S4 X2_1-94 S3 X2_1-92 X2_1-93 S3 X2_1-91 S2 S1 X2_2-88 X2_2-90 270V to A7009 - X101 Root Tacho ground Tacho X2_2-87 X2_3-86 X2_3-85 X2_3-84 X2_3-83 X2_4-82 X2_4-81 X2_4-110 X2_4-109 X1-79 X1-78 X1-77 X1-76 X1-75 X1-74 X1-73 X1-72 X1-71 XT-104 XT-103 X101 2 F2 F1 M1A M1A 3 F2 F1 M1A M1A XP AC 190 to 230V 5N1 5W1 5U1 1 or 5N1 5W1 5U1 2 AC 380 to 460V NC 3 C98043-A7020 X15-2 X15-1 X12-2 X12-1 X25-2 X25-1 X22-2 X22-1 B602 B603 XP R76 U2/T1 V1 V3 K X6 X7 14 L T2 k W1 / L3 User programmable relay outputs see Section 6.1 U1/L1 AK K AK K A K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 A X22 X25 X16 X13 X14-1 X14-2 X75-1 X75-2 K V1 / L2 User programmable inputs see Section 6.1 A K2 G2 G1 K1 X14 X11 R100 X75-3 X75-4 E301 fan U1 / L1 R75 Arrangement of thyristor modules Cables at connection ends marked as shown G (Gate) cables yellow K (Cathode) cables red a = CU rails 60 x 5 b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9 All cables Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless specified otherwise 3~ M 4U1 4V1 4W1 03.2015 Connections D400 / 525 -680 Mre converter (order no. 6SG7080 - 6SG7082) see technical data in Section 3.4 See Section 6.1 69 70 R100 22 25 1 3 1 2 3 4 V22 V16 V14 V1 V25 V2 V13 V3 V11 F111 a l k L T3 K V6 V26 3 V15 V5 V23 V12 a 2 1 4 3 2 1 W2/T3 1 3 1 l 4 3 X3-3 X3-2 k 15 12 23 26 B601 B600 C98043-A7020 X15-2 X15-1 X12-2 X12-1 X23-2 X23-1 X26-2 X26-1 B602 B603 R76 V2/T2 L T2 K X3-1 X3-4 a W1/L3 R75 U2/T1 a 3 1 1 2 13 3 4 3 3 4 14 16 1 1 2 11 E301 fan V1/L2 XP 1 Root X1-71 S2 S3 S3 S4 X2_2-90 X2_1-91 X2_1-92 X2_1-93 S4 S2 X2_2-89 X2_1-94 S1 X2_2-88 X2_2-87 X2_3-86 X2_3-85 X2_3-84 X2_3-83 X2_4-82 X2_4-81 X2_4-110 X2_4-109 X1-79 X1-78 X1-77 X1-76 X1-75 X1-74 X1-73 S1 Tacho ground XT-104 X1-72 Tacho 270V to A7009 - X101 to A7009 - X101 XT-103 X101 2 F2 F1 M1A M1A 3 F2 F1 M1A M1A XP AC 190 to 230V 5N1 5W1 5U1 1 or 5N1 5W1 5U1 2 AC 380 to 460V NC 3 User programmable relay outputs see Section 6.1 X6 X22-1 X22-2 X25-1 X25-2 X16-1 X16-2 X13-1 X13-2 X14-1 X14-2 X11-1 X11-2 3~ M U1/L1 User programmable inputs see Section 6.1 X7 C98043-A7020 Cables at connection ends marked as shown G (Gate) cables yellow K (Cathode) cables red a = CU rails 60 x 10 All cables Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless specified otherwise 4U1 4V1 4W1 Connections 03.2015 D400 / 900 Mre converter (order no. 6SG7085) see technical data in Section 3.4 See Section 6.1 F131 F121 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Arrangement of thyristor blocks V26 V12 V23 V15 V14 V16 V22 V11 V13 V25 Rear level Front level SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 71 72 U2/T1 V1/L2 W2/T3 T3 X15 X12 X23 X26 A K V5 V2 K1 G1 G2 K2 V6 AK AK K K1 G1 G2 K2 A K AK V3 W1/L3 Back row Front row C98043-A7022 X23-1 X23-2 X26-1 X26-2 X13-1 X13-2 X16-1 X16-2 X11-1 X11-2 23 26 13 16 11 1 K1 G1 U2 / T1 a K AK L K2 A 1 K AK C98043A7011-L3 K1 G1 2 G2 V2 / T2 V1 l b X95 X92 A V3 K2 2 G2 b 1 K1 AK K X96 X93 K1 G1 1 G1 K K2 X97 X94 V6 A K AK L T3 K2 2 G2 A b V2 l k a 1 b K1 G1 2 G2 K2 V5 a A W2 / T3 K AK 2 G2 X3-3 X3-2 X3-1 X3-4 15 12 25 22 2 1 Tacho B601 B600 S3 S4 S4 X2_1-92 X2_1-93 X2_1-94 S2 S3 X2_1-91 X2_2-90 S2 S1 X2_2-89 S1 X2_2-88 Root Tacho ground Tacho 270V X2_2-87 X2_3-86 X2_3-85 X2_3-84 X2_3-83 X2_4-82 X2_4-81 X2_4-110 X2_4-109 X1-79 X1-78 X1-77 X1-76 X1-75 X1-74 X1-73 X1-72 X1-71 XT-104 XT-103 to A7009 - X101 F2 F1 M1A M1A X101 3 F2 F1 M1A M1A XP AC 190 to 230V 5N1 5W1 5U1 1 or 5N1 5W1 5U1 2 AC 380 to 460V NC 3 C98043-A7022 X15-2 X15-1 X12-2 X12-1 X25-2 X25-1 X22-2 X22-1 B602 B603 XP R76 V2/T2 T2 K AK X6 X7 14 k W1 / L3 User programmable relay outputs see Section 6.1 U1/L1 AK K V1 K2 G2 G1 K1 X14 X11 A K2 G2 G1 K1 K2 G2 G1 K1 A X22 X25 X16 X13 X14-1 X14-2 X75-1 X75-2 K T2 V1 / L2 User programmable inputs see Section 6.1 A R100 X75-3 X75-4 E301 fan U1 / L1 R75 Arrangement of thyristor modules Cables at connection ends marked as shown G (Gate) cables yellow K (Cathode) cables red a = CU rails 60 x 5 b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9 All cables Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless specified otherwise 3~ M 4U1 4V1 4W1 Connections 03.2015 D500 / 360 Mre converter (order no. 6SG7076-0KB60) see technical data in Section 3.4 See Section 6.1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 6.5 Connections Fuses For technical data, configuring data and dimension drawings, please refer to Catalog BETA, Section 4. Converter Order No. Rated current of Line fuses 3 Order No. Standard Option H78 A A 6SG7050-0EB60 60 42 3NE1820-0 80 / 690 6SG7052-0EB60 78 55 3NE1021-0 100 / 690 6SG7055-0EB60 98 70 3NE1022-0 125 / 690 6SG7060-0EB60 112 80 3NE1224-0 160 / 690 6SG7062-0EB60 142 100 3NE1224-0 160 / 690 6SG7065-0EB60 180 125 3NE1225-0 200 / 690 6SG7070-0EB60 225 150 3NE1227-0 250 / 690 6SG7072-0EB60 285 200 3NE1331-0 350 / 690 6SG7076-0EB60 360 250 3NE1332-0 400 / 690 6SG7080-0EB60 525 365 3NE1435-0 560 / 690 6SG7082-0EB60 680 475 3NE3340-8 900 / 690 6SG7085-0EB60 900 700 6RY1702-0BA01 1) 1250 / 660 Rated current/ voltage A/V 1) Fuses are included in converter, external semiconductor fuses are not needed. Converter Order No. Rated current Line fuses 3 Order No. A Rated current/ voltage A/V 6SG7076-0KB60 360 3NE1332-0 400 / 690 6SG7076-0KB60 with Option H70 130 3NE1224-0 160 / 690 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 73 Connections 6.6 03.2015 Terminal arrangement Electronics module SIMOTRAS HD C98043-A7001 (CUD1) 34 35 36 37 38 39 46 47 48 54 X171 56 57 58 59 60 X172 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 X173 X107 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22 23 24 X174 12 13 14 15 16 17 X175 X109 C98043-A7001 74 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Module C98043-A7006 (CUD2) 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 X161 61 62 63 64 65 X162 44 45 40 41 42 43 50 51 52 53 X163 8 9 10 11 18 19 20 21 204 205 X164 C98043-A7006 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 75 Connections 03.2015 5W1 91 92 93 94 109 110 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 X2_4 X2_3 X2_2 X2_1 5N1 XP 5U1 Module C98043-A7020, C98043-A7022 76 X1 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 XT 103 104 C98043-A7020 C98043-A7022 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections 6.7 Terminal assignments 6.7.1 Overview of terminal connections on the C98043-A7001 (CUD1) electronics module 1 2 Main setpoint 3 4 M P10 1% / 10 mA N10 1% / 10 mA U/I 5 # 6 Analog input U/I 7 # 22 Temperature sensor KTY84 / PTC 23 24 34 35 36 Binary inputs M X174 P24_S 1) Closed-loop control Open-loop control 37 38 26 Pulse encoder Power supply Track 2 + + - Zero + marker - 27 28 57 Rx+/Tx+ 58 Rx-/Tx- 59 M X172 D D M A M A M M Serial interface 2 60 12 I-ist M X171 56 Tx- M RS485 # 39 Track 1 + Tx+ 13 14 15 Analog outputs 16 17 X175 P15 M 200mA max. 46 M 29 30 31 M P24 32 47 48 Binary outputs 54 X171 33 X173 C98043-A7001 1) Total for P24_S max. 200 mA 6.7.2 Overview of terminal connections on the optional C98043-A7006 (CUD2) terminal expansion module 210 X161 P24_S 1) 211 Binary inputs 213 214 215 216 217 Temperature sensor KTY84 / PTC 204 9 10 11 62 + Rx+/Tx+ 63 Rx-/Tx- 64 M 65 45 40 41 X164 D # D X164 M # M # 18 A A M M X164 19 20 21 Analog outputs 50 P24_S 1) M M M 42 P24 43 X163 Serial interface 3 X162 M 44 Binary inputs 61 Tx- M RS485 205 8 Analog inputs Tx+ 212 M SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 51 52 Binary outputs 53 X163 C98043-A7006 77 Connections 6.7.3 03.2015 Terminal description WARNING The converter might sustain serious or irreparable damage if connected incorrectly. The power cables and/or busbars must be secured mechanically outside the converter. Power section Terminal type: D400 / 60 -180 Mre converters U1, V1, W1: Through-hole for M8 (3x20 copper bus) U2, V2, W2: Through-hole for M8 (5x20 copper bus) D400 / 225 -360 Mre converters U1, V1, W1: Through-hole for M10 (5x30 copper bus) U2, V2, W2: Through-hole for M10 (5x35 copper bus) D400 / 525 -680 Mre converters Through-hole for M12 (5x60 copper bus) D400 / 900 Mre converters U1, V1, W1: Through-hole for M12 (10x60 copper bus) U2, V2, W2: Through-hole for M12 (10x50 copper bus) D500 / 360 Mre converters Through-hole for M12 (5x60 copper bus) The converters are designed for a permanent power supply connection according to DIN VDE 0160 Section 6.5.2.1. PE conductor connection: Minimum cross-section 10mm2. (see Section 5.1 for connection options). The connection cross-sections must be determined according to the applicable regulations, e.g. DIN VDE 100 Part 523, DIN VDE 0276 Part 1000. Note Operation on an IT power supply system is possible without any modifications of the converter. Function Supply input Terminal U1 (L1) V1 (L2) W1 (L3) PE conductor Motor connection 78 Connection values/Remarks see technical data in Section 3.4 U2 (T1) V2 (T2) W2 (T3) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Electronics power supply Terminal type: Type 49 plug-in terminal Maximum cross-section 1.5mm2, finely stranded Connection Function Incoming supply 400V NC or Incoming supply 230V Terminal XP Connection values/Remarks (-25%) to 460V (+15%); In=1A (- 35% for 1min) Internal fusing using F1, F2 on the C98043-A7020 / A7022 module external fuse protection 6A, characteristic C recommended 1 2 3 5U1 5W1 5N1 2AC 380V 1 2 3 5U1 5W1 5N1 1AC 190V (-25%) to 230V (+15%); In=2A (- 35% for 1min) Internal fusing using F1, F2 on the C98043-A7020 / A7022 module external fuse protection 6A, characteristic C recommended Note In the case of line voltages which exceed the tolerance range specified in Section 3.4, the electronics supply voltage and converter fan connection must be adjusted by means of transformers to the permissible value stated in Section 3.4. It is essential to use an isolating transformer for rated line voltages in excess of 460V. The rated supply voltage for the power section is to be set in parameter P078 (index 001). Fan (for forced-cooled converters 225A) Terminal type: DFK-PC4 plug-in terminal (screw-type) Maximum connection cross-section 4mm2 , finely stranded The insulation on the supply cables must be taken up to the terminal housing. Function Terminal Incoming supply 4U1 4V1 4W1 Connection values/Remarks 3AC 400V to 460V For further details, see technical data in Section 3.4 PE conductor Fan can be switched via external contactor relay 3TH2031-0FB4 (Siemens), triggered by CUD1 module, terminals X171 / 46, 47 CAUTION The converter might overheat if the incorrect phase sequence is connected (incorrect direction of rotation of fan). Check: Check that the fan is rotating in the direction of the arrow! Caution: Rotating parts can cause physical injuries! SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 79 Connections 03.2015 Open-loop and closed-loop control section Terminal type: X171 to X175 Plug-in terminal (screw-type) Maximum connection cross-section 1.5mm2 XT, X1, X2_1 to X2_4 MSTB2.5 plug-in terminal Maximum connection cross-section 2.5mm2 Analog inputs - setpoint inputs, reference voltage (see also Section 8, sheet G113) Function Terminal X174 Reference M P10 N10 1 2 3 Select input main setpoint + main setpoint - 4 5 Select input analog 1 + analog 1 - 6 7 Connection values/Remarks 1% at 25C (stability 0.1% per 10K); 10mA short-circuit-proof Input type (signal type) parameterizable: - Differential input 10V; 150k - Current input 0 - 20mA; 300 or 4 - 20mA; 300 Resolution can be parameterized up to approx. 555V (14bit) Common mode suppression: 15V Analog inputs - actual speed inputs, tacho inputs (see also Section 8, sheet G113) Function Terminal XT Tacho connection 8V to 270V Ground analog M 103 104 Connection values/Remarks 270V; >143k Pulse encoder input (see also Section 8, Sheet G145) Function Terminal X173 Supply (+13,7V to+15,2V) 26 Ground pulse encoder M Track 1 Positive terminal 27 28 29 Negative terminal Track 2 Positive terminal Negative terminal Zero marker Positive terminal Negative terminal Connection values/Remarks 200mA; short-circuit-proof (electronic protection) Overload response: Fault message F018 Warning signal A018 Load: 5.25mA at 15V (w/o switching losses, see below for cable, cable length, shield connection) 30 31 Switching hysteresis: See below Pulse/pause ratio: 1:1 32 33 Level of input pulses: See below Track offset: Table 1 see below Pulse frequency: Table 2 see below Cable length: See below Characteristic data of pulse encoder evaluation electronics Level of input pulses: Encoder signals (symmetrical and asymmetrical) up to a max. 27V differential voltage can be processed by the evaluated electronics. 80 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Electronic adaptation of evaluation electronics to signal voltage of encoder: Connections - Rated input voltage range 5V (P142=0): Low level: Differential voltage <0.8V High level: Differential voltage >2.0V Hysteresis: >0.2V Common-mode control range: 10V - Rated input voltage range 15V (P142=1): Low level: Differential voltage <5.0V High level: Differential voltage >8.0V Restriction: See switching frequency Hysteresis: >1V Common-mode control range: 10V If the pulse encoder does not supply symmetrical encoder signals, then its ground must be routed as a twisted-pair lead with every signal cable and connected to the negative terminals of track 1, track 2 and the zero marker. Switching frequency: The maximum permitted frequency of the encoder pulses is 300kHz. To ensure correct evaluation of the encoder pulses, the minimum distance Tmin between two encoder signal edges (tracks 1 and 2) specified in the table must be observed: Table 1: Differential voltage Tmin 2) 1) Rated input voltage 15V 5V 2V >2,5V 630ns 380ns Rated input voltage 15V 15V 8V 10V >14V 630ns 430ns 380ns 1) Differential voltage at terminals of evaluation electronics 2) The phase error LG (deviating from 90), which may occur as the result of encoder and cable, can be calculated from Tmin : LG= (90 - fp * Tmin * 360) LG = phase error fp = pulse frequency Tmin = minimum distance between edges This formula applies only if the encoder pulse ratio is 1:1. If the pulse encoder is incorrectly matched to the encoder cable, disturbing cable reflections will be produced at the receive end. These reflections must be damped so that the encoder pulses can be correctly evaluated. The limit values listed in the table below must be maintained to ensure that the resultant power loss in the adapting element of the evaluation electronics is not exceeded. Table 2: fmax Differential voltage 3) 50kHz 100kHz 150kHz 200kHz 300kHz Up to 27V Up to 22V Up to 18V Up to 16V Up to 14V 3) Differential voltage of encoder pulses at no load (approximate encoder power supply voltage) Cable, cable length, shield connection: The encoder cable capacitance must be recharged at each encoder edge change. The RMS value of this current is proportional to the cable length and the pulse frequency and must exceed the current specified by the encoder manufacturer. A suitable cable as recommended by the encoder manufacturer must be used. The maximum cable length must not be exceeded. Generally, a twisted cable pair with common pair shield is sufficient for each track. Crosstalk between the cables is thus reduced. The shielding of all pairs protects against noise pulses. The shield must be connected to the shield bar of the SIMOTRAS converter over the largest possible surface area. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 81 Connections Temperature sensor inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G185) Function Terminal X174 Motor temperature Connection of temperature sensor 22 23 Ground analog M 24 03.2015 Connection values/Remarks Sensor acc. to P490 index 1 The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must be shielded and connected to ground at both ends. Analog outputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G115) Function Terminal X175 Actual current Ground analog M Select output Ground analog M Select output Ground analog M 12 13 analog 1 analog 2 14 15 16 17 Connection values/Remarks 0. . .10V corresponds to 0. . .200% Converter rated current Max. load 2mA, short-circuit-proof 0. . . 10V, max. 2mA short-circuit proof Resolution 11bit Binary inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G110) Function Terminal X171 Supply for binary inputs (output) 34 Ground digital M 35 Select input binary 1 Power On / Shutdown 1 = power on 0 = shutdown 36 37 Enable operation 1 = enable controller 0 = disable controller 38 Select input 39 binary 2 Connection values/Remarks 24V DC, short circuit proof max. load 200mA (terminals 34, 44, and 210 combined), internal supply with respect to internal ground Overload response: Error signal F018 Warning signal A018 H signal: +13V to +33V L signal: - 33V to +3V or terminal open 8.5mA at 24V Binary outputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G112) Function Terminal X171 Select output Ground M binary 1 Select output Ground M binary 2 82 46 47 48 54 Connection values/Remarks H signal: +20V to +26V L signal: 0 to +2V Short-circuit-proof 100mA Internal snubber circuit (free-wheeling diode) Overload response: Error signal F018 Warning signal A018 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Serial interface 1 (G-SST1) RS232 (9-pin SUBMIN D connector) X300 Use a shielded connecting cable! Ground shield at both ends! Con. pin X300 Function 1 2 3 4 5 Housing earth Receive cable to RS232 (V.24) standard Send and receive cables to RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output Input: Reserved for later use 6 7 8 9 5 V voltage supply for OP1S Send cable to RS232 (V.24) standard Send and receive cables to RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output Ground Cable length: Ground Up to 15m according to EIA Standard RS232C Up to 30 m capacitive load, max. 2.5nF (cable and receiver) A serial connection to a PLC or PC can be made using connector X300 on the PMU, allowing the converter to be controlled and operated from a central control centre or room. Serial interface 2 (G-SST2) RS485 Function Terminal X172 TX+ TXRX+/TX+ 56 57 58 RX-/TX- 59 M 60 Cable length: Connection values/Remarks RS485, 4-wire send cable, positive differential input RS485, 4-wire send cable, negative differential input RS485, 4-wire receive cable, positive differential input, 2-wire send/receive cable, positive differential input RS485, 4-wire receive cable, negative differential input, 2-wire send/receive cable, negative differential input Ground For transmission rate =187.5kBd 600m For transmission rate =93.75kBd 1200m The following must be observed: DIN 19245 Part 1 The potential difference between the data reference potentials M of all interfaces must not exceed -7V / +12V. If this cannot be guaranteed, then equipotential bonding must be provided Activation of interface 1 or 2: - Set the baud rate in parameter P783 or P793. - Set the protocol in parameter P780 or P790.. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 83 Connections Control inputs (see also Section 6.1 and Section 8, Sheets G117 and G118) Function Terminal X1 LED Connection values/Remarks LS - Control voltage connection Common connection for control inputs 71 Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Travel command 1" - FK1 for crane control 72 H72 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Travel command 2" - FK2 for crane control 73 H73 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for Notch) 74 H74 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Pre-limit switch 1" - VE1 75 H75 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Pre-limit switch 2" - VE2 76 H76 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Limit switch 1" - LS1 77 H77 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for "Limit switch 2" - LS2 78 H78 230V AC / 8 mA Control input In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the input for the Acknowledge key) 79 H79 230V AC / 8 mA 84 03.2015 230V AC / 8 mA SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Control outputs (electrically isolated relay outputs) (see also Section 8, Sheets G112 and G119) Function Control output In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the output "No fault" Control output In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the output "No fault" Function Control output In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the output "Acknowledgement" Control output In the factory setting, the parameter is wired as the output "Brake contactor" Function S1 - "Rotor contactor stage 1" Relay signal "Switch rotor contactor S1" S2 - "Rotor contactor stage 2" Relay signal "Switch rotor contactor S2" Function S3 - "Rotor contactor stage 3" Relay signal "Switch rotor contactor S3" S4 - "Rotor contactor stage 4" Relay signal "Switch rotor contactor S4" SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Terminal X2_4 109 110 81 82 LED Connection values/Remarks H109 Load capability: =250V AC, 4A; cos=1 =250V AC, 2A; cos=0,4 H81 =30V DC, 2A Terminal X2_3 83 84 LED Connection values/Remarks H83 85 86 H85 Load capability: =250V AC, 4A; cos=1 =250V AC, 2A; cos=0,4 =30V DC, 2A Terminal X2_2 87 88 LED Connection values/Remarks H87 89 90 H89 Load capability: =250V AC, 4A; cos=1 =250V AC, 2A; cos=0,4 =30V DC, 2A Terminal X2_1 91 92 LED Connection values/Remarks H91 93 94 H93 Load capability: =250V AC, 4A; cos=1 =250V AC, 2A; cos=0,4 =30V DC, 2A 85 Connections 03.2015 Options: Terminal expansion (C98043-A7006) Terminal type: Plug-in terminal (screw-type) Max. connection cross-section 1.5mm2 Binary inputs, fault and alarm messages (see also Section 8, Sheet G186) Function Terminal X161 Supply for binary inputs (output) 210 Binary input Binary input Binary input Binary input 211 212 213 214 Ground for binary inputs Ground for binary inputs M 215 216 217 Connection values/Remarks 24V DC, short circuit proof with respect to internal ground max. load 200mA (terminals 34, 44, and 210 combined), Overload response: Error signal F018 Warning signal A018 H signal: +13V to +33V L signal: - 33V to +3V or terminal open Input resistance = 2.8 k can be isolated from internal ground (open wire jumper between terminals 216 and 217) Binary inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G111) Function Terminal X163 Supply for binary inputs (output) 44 Ground digital M 45 Select input Select input Select input Select input binary 2 binary 3 binary 4 binary 5 40 41 42 43 Connection values/Remarks 24V DC, short circuit proof max. load 200mA (terminals 34, 44, and 210 combined), internal supply with respect to internal ground Overload response: Error signal F018 Warning signal A018 H signal: +13V to +33V L signal: - 33V to +3V or terminal open 8.5mA at 24V Binary outputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G112) Function Select output Ground M Select output Ground M 86 Terminal X163 binary 3 binary 4 50 51 52 53 Connection values/Remarks H signal: +20V to +26V L signal: 0 to +2V Short-circuit-proof 100mA Overload response: Error signal F018 Warning signal A018 Internal snubber circuit (free-wheeling diode) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connections Analog inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G114) Function Select input Ground analog Select input Ground analog Terminal X164 analog 2 8 9 10 11 analog 3 Connection values/Remarks 10V, 52k Resolution: 10bit Common mode suppression: 15V Analog outputs, temperature sensor input (see also Section 8, Sheets G116 and G185) Function Terminal X164 Select output analog 3 Ground analog M Select output analog 4 Ground analog M Temperature sensor input 18 19 20 21 204 205 Connection values/Remarks 0. . . 10V, max. 2mA short-circuit proof Resolution 11bit Sensor acc. to P490 Index 2 The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must be shielded and connected to ground at both ends. Serial interface 3 (G-SST3) RS485 Function Terminal X162 TX+ TXRX+/TX+ 61 62 63 RX-/TX- 64 M 65 Cable length: Connection values/Remarks RS485, 4-wire send cable, positive differential input RS485, 4-wire send cable, negative differential input RS485, 4-wire receive cable, positive differential input, 2-wire send/receive cable, positive differential input RS485, 4-wire receive cable, negative differential input, 2-wire send/receive cable, negative differential input Ground For transmission rate =187.5kBd 600m For transmission rate =93.75kBd 1200m The following must be observed: DIN 19245 Part 1 The potential difference between the data reference potentials M of all interfaces must not exceed -7V / +12V. If this cannot be guaranteed, then equipotential bonding must be provided. Activate interface 3: - Set the baud rate in parameter P803. - Set the protocol in parameter P800. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 87 Connections 88 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7 Start-up 7.1 General safety information for start-up DANGER Before commencing with start-up on the converters, make sure that the transparent terminal cover is mounted in the correct position (see Section 5.1). NOTICE Before handling any boards (in particular, the A7001 electronics board), please make sure that your body is electrostatically discharged to protect electronic components against high voltages caused by electrostatic charges. The simplest way of doing this is to touch a conductive, grounded object (e.g. bare metal cabinet component immediately beforehand). PCBs must not be allowed to come into contact with highly insulating materials (e.g. plastic foil, insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic fibres). PCBs may only be set down on electrically conducting surfaces. WARNING Hazardous voltages and rotating parts (fans) are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. A hazardous voltage may be present at the signalling relays in the customer installation. The converters must not be connected to a supply with residual current device (RCD) or a residual current monitor (RCM) Type AC or A (EN61800-5-1 sect. 4.3.10 or appendix G) since, in the event of a fault to frame or ground, the fault current may contain a DC component that will either prevent or hinder a higher-level e.l.c.b. from tripping. In this case, all loads connected to this e.l.c.b. have no protection either. The converters may only be connected to RCD/RCM, Type B. Only qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices contained in the operating instructions as well as erection, installation, operating and maintenance instructions should be allowed to work on these devices. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation, proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance. The converter is at a hazardous voltage level even when the power section is disconnected from the power supply. The gating board (board mounted directly to lower part of housing) has many circuits at hazardous voltage levels. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work, all converter power sources must be disconnected and locked out. These instructions do not claim to list all of the measures required to ensure safe and reliable operation of the converter. For special applications, additional, supplementary information or instructions might be required. If problems do occur and you feel in any way uncertain, please contact your local Siemens office or representative. The use of unauthorized parts in the repair of this converter and handling of the equipment by unqualified personnel can give rise to hazardous conditions which may cause death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. All safety notices contained in this instruction manual and attached to the converter itself must be carefully observed. Please read the safety information given in Section 1 of this instruction manual. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 89 Start-up 7.2 03.2015 Operator control panels The basic converter is equipped with a simple operator panel (PMU) as standard. 7.2.1 Simple operator control panel (PMU "Parameterization Unit") The simple operator control panel is mounted in the converter door and consists of a 5-digit, 7segment display with three status display LEDs and three parameterization keys below. All adjustments and settings that need to be undertaken for the purpose of start-up can be made on the simple control panel. Run Ready Fault X300 * P-key - Switches over between parameter number (parameter mode), parameter value (value mode) and index number (index mode) on indexed parameters. - Acknowledges active fault messages. - P and UP keys to switch a fault message and alarm to the background (see Section 10, Fault Messages and Alarms) - P and DOWN key to switch a fault message and alarm from the background back to the foreground display on the PMU (see Section 10, Fault Messages and Alarms) * UP key (s) - Selects a higher parameter number in parameter mode. When the highest number is displayed, the key can be pressed again to return to the other end of the number range (i.e. the highest number is thus adjacent to the lowest number). - Increases the selected and displayed parameter value in value mode. - Increases the index in index mode (for indexed parameters) - Accelerates an adjustment process activated with the DOWN key (if both keys are pressed at the same time). * DOWN key (d) - Selects a lower parameter number in parameter mode. When the lowest number is displayed, the key can be pressed again to return to the other end of the number range (i.e. the lowest number is thus adjacent to the highest number). - Decreases the selected and displayed parameter value in value mode. - Decreases the index in index mode (for indexed parameters) - Accelerates an adjustment process activated with the UP key (if both keys are pressed at the same time). 90 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up LED displays Run green LED LED illuminated in "Torque direction active" state (MI, MII, M0). (see r000 in Section 11) Ready yellow LED LED illuminated in "Ready" state (o1 .. o7). (see r000 in Section 11) Fault red LED LED illuminated in "Fault signal present" state (o11) (see r000 in Section 11 and Faults and Alarms (Section 10)) LED flashing 7.2.2 An alarm is active (see Faults and Alarms in Section 10). User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S) The optional, user-friendly, operator control panel with plaintext display is mounted in the special location provided in the converter door. This location provides a connection to the serial basic converter interface SST1. Parameters can be selected directly through input of the parameter number via the keyboard of the OP1S. The following interrelationships apply: Basic converter parameter Technology board parameter Displayed number Number to be keyed in on OP1S rxxx, Pxxx (0)xxx Uxxx, nxxx 2xxx Hxxx, dxxx 1xxx Lxxx, cxxx 3xxx If the UP or DOWN key on the OP1S is used to select adjacent parameter numbers, then any missing numbers in the range of basic converter parameters are skipped. This automatic skipping over missing numbers does not work for technology board parameters. In this case, the numbers of existing parameters must be entered directly. The OP1S switches to Operating display a few seconds after initialization. By pressing the <P> key, you can switch from the operating display to the Basic menu in which you can either select "Free access" to all parameters or a variety of functions. Details of these functions can be found in the function diagram "OP1S operating display" (Section 8, Sheet Z123) and the OP1S operating instructions. The converter parameters can be set in "Free access" status. You can return to the operating status display by pressing the <R> key (several times if necessary). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Operating display <P> <R> Basic menu <P> <R> Free access 91 Start-up 03.2015 The following values are displayed in the operating display of the SIMOTRAS 6SG70. st 1 line Actual motor current value r019 nd # Actual speed controller value r025 rd * Speed setpoint r028 2 line 3 line th 4 line Bus addr. 0 Operating state r059 Control bits from OP1S operator panel: (see also function diagram "OP1S operating display" (Section 8, Sheet Z123) and the OP1S operating instructions) Data are exchanged between the OP1S and SIMOTRAS 6SG70 converter via the G-SST1 interface (RS485) and USS protocol. The OP1S operator panel transfers the following control bits in process data word 1 in the USS message: Key on OP1S Function Bit in PZD word1 (connector K2001) Binector *) ON key / OFF key (I / 0) ON / OFF1 Bit 0 B2100 Reset Acknowledge Bit 7 B2107 Jog Inching Bit 8 B2108 Reverse Enable positive direction of rotation Bit 11 B2111 Enable negative direction of rotation Bit 12 B2112 Increase key Increase motorized potentiometer Bit 13 B2113 Decrease key Decrease motorized potentiometer Bit 14 B2114 *) These binectors (control bits) are available for all control tasks (when parameterized accordingly), but are not normally used with SIMOTRAS 6SG70 converters. 7.3 Parameterization procedure Parameterization is the process of changing setting values (parameters) via the operator panel, activating converter functions or displaying measured values. Parameters for the basic converter are called P, r, U or n parameters. Parameters for an optional supplementary board are called H, d, L or c parameters. The basic unit parameters are displayed first on the PMU, followed by the technology board parameters (if such a board is installed). It is important not to confuse the parameters of the S00 technology software of the basic unit with the parameters of an optional supplementary board (e.g. T300). Depending on how parameter P052 is set, only some parameter numbers (see Section 11, Parameter List) are displayed. 7.3.1 Parameter types Display parameters are used to display current quantities such as the main setpoint, setpoint/actual value difference of speed controller, etc. The values of display parameters are readonly values and cannot be changed. Setting parameters are used to both display and change quantities such as the rated motor current, thermal motor time constant, speed controller P gain, etc. Indexed parameters are used to both display and change several parameter values which are all assigned to the same parameter number. 92 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.3.2 Start-up Parameterization at the simple operator control panel After the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, the PMU is either in the operating display state and indicating the current operating status of the SIMOTRAS 6SG70 (e.g. o7.0), or in the fault/alarm display state and indicating a fault or alarm (e.g. F021). Operational states are described under parameter r000 in Section 11 and the fault and alarm messages in Section 10. 1. To reach the parameter number level from the operating display state (e.g. o7.0), press the P key and then the <Up> or <Down> key to select individual parameter numbers 2. To reach the parameter index level (for indexed parameters) from the parameter number level, press P and then the <Up> or <Down> key to select individual indices. If you press P when a non-indexed parameter is displayed, you go directly to the parameter value level. 3. To reach the parameter value level from the parameter index level (for indexed parameters), press P. 4. On the parameter value level, you can change the setting of a parameter value by pressing the <Up> or <Down> key. Note Parameters can be altered only if the following conditions are fulfilled: - The appropriate access authorization is set in key parameter P051, e.g. "40" (see Section 11, "Parameter List"). - The converter is the correct operational state. Parameters with characteristic "offline" cannot be changed when the converter is in the "Run" (online) state. To change parameters with this characteristic, switch the converter to the o1.0 status ("Ready"). The values of display parameters can never be changed (read only). 5. Manual shifting If the 5 existing digits on the 7-segment display are not sufficient to display a parameter value, the display first shows just 5 digits (see Fig. 7.1). To indicate that digits are concealed to the right or left of this "window", the right-hand or left-hand digit flashes. By pressing the <P>+<Down> or <P>+<Up> key, you can shift the window over the remaining digits of the parameter value. As an orientation guide, the position of the right-hand digit within the overall parameter value is displayed briefly during manual shifting. Example: Parameter value "208.173" "208.17" is displayed when the parameter is selected. After pressing P and the DOWN key, 1 is displayed briefly folst lowed by "08,173". The rightmost digit 3 is the 1 digit of the parameter value. After pressing P and the UP key, 2 is displayed briefly folnd lowed by "208,17". The rightmost digit 7 is the 2 digit of the parameter value. Fig. 7.1 6 5 4 3 2 1 P + P + Shifting the PMU display for parameter values with more than 4 digits 6 5 4 3 2 1 6. Press the P key to return to the parameter number level from the parameter value level. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 93 Start-up 03.2015 Tables 7.1 and 7.2 below show an overview of displays which may appear on the PMU: Display parameters Setting parameters Table 7.1 Basic unit Technology Basic unit Technology Parameter number Index Parameter value e. g. e. g. e. g. or or or or Display of visualization and setting parameters on the PMU Actual value Parameter value not (currently) possible Alarm Fault Display Table 7.2 Status displays on the PMU Note Parameters are described in the Parameter List in Section 11 and faults and alarms in Section 10. 7.4 Restore factory setting Restore parameter value to default (factory) setting. The "Restore to default" function can be executed if a defined basic setting is to be established, e.g. in order to carry out a complete new start-up operation. Note When the "Restore to default" function is activated, all parameters set for a specific installation are overwritten (deleted). We therefore recommend that all old settings be read out beforehand with DriveMonitor and stored on a PC or programmer. "Restore to default" must be followed by a completely new start-up operation or else the converter will not be "ready" with respect to safety. Execution of function: 1. Set parameter P051 = 21 2. Transfer parameter values to the non-volatile memory. The parameter values are stored in non-volatile storage (EEPROM) so that they will still be available when the converter is switched off. This operation takes at least 5 s (but may also last several minutes). The number of the parameter currently being processed is displayed on the PMU during the process. The electronics power supply must remain connected while this operation is in progress. 94 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.5 Start-up Notes to be read before switching on DANGER Make sure that no persons, machines or other objects are endangered when the drive unit is started up! This should also cover the possibility of a malfunction. Malfunctions or faults may occur as the result of connections becoming loose over time due to the vibration of machines or the switching of power contactors. You should therefore check the connections in your cubicle. Frequent causes of malfunctions and faults are incorrect settings or carelessness during the startup procedure. It is often only a minor factor that causes a malfunction. The following tasks should be completed before starting the converter for the first time: 1. The SIMOTRAS HD must be disconnected from the power supply on all poles. 2. Check the connections, the protective measures and the converter earth. 3. Check the supply voltage in the power section (max. 500 V AC). 4. Check the control voltage (max. 250 V AC). 5. Connect and set the motor protection element (motor protection switches, motor protection relays), if PTC connected - check thermistor detector. 6. Check supply voltage to the three phase asynchronous motor (star or delta connection). 7. Check converter connector is securely connected. 8. Check the motor shaft moves freely with the brake released. 9. Rotation of the motor in either direction must not cause any damage. 10. Ensure that no persons are within the drive operating area. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 95 Start-up 7.6 03.2015 Start-up procedure WARNING The converter is at a hazardous voltage level even when the line contactor is open. The gating board (board mounted directly to lower part of housing) has many circuits at hazardous voltage levels. Non-observance of the safety instructions given in this manual can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Note The start-up procedure described below applies in situations where the SIMOTRAS HD converter is connected to the system in accordance with the suggested connection plan. If this is not the case, additional or other measures may be required in certain instances. 7.6.1 Access authorization P051 . . . Key parameter 0 Parameter cannot be changed 40 Parameter can be changed P052 . . . Selection of parameters to be displayed 0 Only parameters that are not set to default are visible 3 All parameters are visible P927 . . . Enter an odd number if parameters are to be entered via CB (PROFIBUS) 7.6.2 Adjustment of converter rated currents The rated converter current must be adjusted by the setting in parameter P076.001 (in %) if: max . motor current < 0,5 rated converter current 7.6.3 Adjustment to actual converter supply voltage P078.001 7.6.4 Rated RMS value of actual voltage applied in SIMOTRAS HD (in Volts) Input of motor data The motor data as given on the motor rating plate must be entered in parameters P100 and P114. P100 Rated motor current (in amps) P114 Thermal time constant of motor (in minutes) P490.001 Temperature sensor on terminals 22/23 for monitoring the motor temperature 0 No temperature sensor 1 KTY84 2 PTC thermistor with Rn=600 1) 1) 3 PTC thermistor with Rn=1200 1) 4 PTC thermistor with Rn=1330 1) 5 PTC thermistor with Rn=2660 1) PTC thermistor according to DIN 44081 / 44082 with specified R at rated response temperature. When a PTC thermistor is selected as the temperature sensor, it is not necessary to set parameters P491 and P492 (alarm and trip temperatures). These two temperatures are predetermined by the type of PTC thermistor installed. Whether an alarm or fault is output when the operating point of the PTC thermistor is reached depends on how the relevant input is parameterized (P493.F or P494.F). P491 Alarm temperature (factory setting = 20C) 96 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.6.5 Start-up Actual speed sensing data 7.6.5.1 Operation with pulse encoder (often present when retrofitting existing systems) P083 = 2: The actual speed is supplied by the pulse encoder (K0040) P140 = 1. Pulse encoder type 1 Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 Track 1 X173 28, 29 Track 2 X173 30, 31 P141 Number of pulses of pulse encoder (pulses per revolution) P142 = 1: Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals NOTICE Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch over the supply voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and 27). Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply. P143 Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation (in pulses/rev) The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of 100%. 7.6.5.2 Operation with analog tacho (used in new systems) P083 = 1: The actual speed is supplied from the "Main actual value" channel (K0013) (terminals XT.103, XT.104) P741 7.6.6 Setting of tachometer voltage at maximum speed (approx. 8V to +270.00V) Speed setpoint data 7.6.6.1 Operation with analog setpoint (U251=0) P700 = 0: Voltage input (+-10V) 1: Current input (0 to 20 mA) 2: Current input (4 to 20 mA) P401 Normalization speed setpoint that must be attained under control by master switch (in %). with lifting gear: approx. 60% with travel gear: up to 100% Note: Limit value for zero-delay angle (U628), see also Section 7.6.14 7.6.6.2 Operation with 4 stage master switch (U251=1) 7.6.7 U251=1: Use setpoint of 4-stage master switch U665 U666 U667 U668 speed setpoint in "slow" stage speed setpoint in "medium" stage speed setpoint in "fast" stage speed setpoint in "full" stage factory setting 10% factory setting 25% factory setting 40% factory setting 100% Selection of basic technological functions Current limits P171 P172 System current limit in torque direction I (in% of P100) System current limit in torque direction II (in% of P100) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 97 Start-up 7.6.8 03.2015 Setting the current controller loop Formula: The factory setting for the current controller parameter can normally be left as it is: P155 = Kp = 0.2 P156 = Tn = 20 ms Optimizing the current controller: With the motor fully braked, enter the current setpoint increments and record the step response from the current controller loop. Rotor stage S1 is active * Fully brake the motor and interrupt the supply voltage to the brake contactor. * P084 = 2 (current-controlled operation) current setpoint from square wave generator (P500 = 203, factory setting) * Parameterize square wave generator: P480 = 20,0 % (step level 1) P481 = 1.0 s (duration of step) P482 = 10.0 % (step level 2) P483 = 1.0 s (duration of step) * Enter first setpoint stage from master switch (i.e. a travel command). * Trace the stator current on the actual current value output (X175 terminals 12 and 13, 5V is the rated current for the SIMOTRAS HD) using an oscilloscope. The oscillogram will display the step response of the current controller loop. Current setpoint t Actual current value t * The following settings affect the current controller loop: P155 Controller gain Kp P156 Reset time Tn The control response becomes "softer" if a longer reset time is set. * Move master switch to zero position (i.e. cancel travel command). * Following current controller optimization: P084 = 1 (reset to operation under closed-loop speed control) * Reconnect power supply to brake contactor. 98 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.6.9 Start-up Checking direction of rotation of the motor * Enter first setpoint stage from master switch (i.e. a travel command). * If the drive accelerates or is running at maximum speed: Reverse the phase sequence of the motor output or the polarity of the tachometer connection. * For lifting gear: positive setpoint = mechanical "Lift" direction of rotation negative setpoint = mechanical "Lower" direction of rotation For travel gear: positive setpoint = forwards / right, negative setpoint = backwards / left If this is not the case, reverse the phase sequence of the motor output and the polarity of the tachometer connection * Set speed setpoint to medium speed, e. g. nset = +5V = +50% (lift) * Check the actual lifting speed using parameter r025 (display +50%). 7.6.10 Setting the speed control loop Formula: The following settings will normally produce a stable control response: P225 Controller gain Kp = 3 to 10 P226 Reset time Tn = 0.150 to 0.500 s Optimizing the speed control loop: Enter the speed setpoint steps without a ramp-function generator and record the step response for the speed control loop. * Parameterize square wave generator: P480 = 5.0 % (step level 1) P481 = 2.0 s (duration of step) P482 = 0.0 % (step level 2) P483 = 2.0 s (duration of step) P625 = 203 (use square wave generator instead of the setpoint from the master switch) Rotor stage S1 is active * Enter first setpoint stage from master switch (i.e. a travel command). * Trace the actual speed value (X175 terminals 14 and 15) on an oscilloscope. The oscillogram will display the step response of the speed control loop. Speed setpoint t Actual speed value t Fig. 7.6.10.1 Step response of speed control loop without ramp-function generator, ideal shape * The following settings affect the speed control loop: P225: Controller gain Kp Setting too low a gain results in an inaccurate speed correction to the setpoint (remaining SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 99 Start-up 03.2015 control deviation) Setting too high a gain may result in speed instability. The drive will tend to vibrate. Increase the gain using P225 until the first signs of instability occur, then slightly reduce the value of P225. P226: Reset time Tn The control response becomes "sharper" by shortening the reset time. P200: Smoothing of actual speed value (tachometer voltage) factory setting: 10 ms. Excessive smoothing can produce instability in the speed control loop. * After optimizing the speed controller, reset to master switch setpoint P625=170 * Other: P158: Smoothing of current setpoint (speed controller output) P157 = 0: Smoothing (P158) only active following torque direction reversal P157 = 1 Smoothing (P158) always active P227: Droop The speed controller is not inflexible, i.e. it does permit small deviations to the setpoint as the load increases. At a load level that produces the rated converter current, a control deviation according to the percentage set in P227 will be permitted Speed setpoint ramp e.g. 50 % nset (K0190) HR...Acceleration ramp Time 0 Actual speed value curve z.B. 50 % nact (K0167) Time 0 Fig. 7.6.10.2 Step response of speed control loop with ramp-function generator 7.6.11 Setting the ramp times of the ramp-function generator * Increase the speed setpoint in stages. * Set the ramps for the ramp-function generator to provide optimum drive acceleration. Set the transition roundings for the ramp-function generator such that there are no jerking motions when reaching or leaving the setpoint. 100 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Clockwise/ Lift P306 P306 P305 +nset (K0190) P303 P304 P306 P306 P305 0 P305 Time P306 P306 P304 P303 P306 P306 P305 Ant-clockwise / Lower Fig. 7.6.11.1 Setting the ramp times of the ramp-function generator Ramp times in closed-loop control range Ramp times in open-loop control range P303: P304: P305: P306: P307: P308: P309: P310: Ramp-up time Ramp-down time Lower transition rounding Upper transition rounding Ramp-up time Ramp-down time Lower transition rounding Upper transition rounding 7.6.12 Setting the brake control The following actions take place after specifying a travel command: 1. The firing pulse and the controller are enabled 2. The "Release brake" signal is output 3. The ramp-function generator starts to ramp up * P087 (with a negative value) can be used to delay the "Release brake" signal in relation to the enabling of the firing pulse and the controller until the motor has definitely been excited and torque has developed. * Parameter P319 can be used to delay the ramping up of the ramp-function generator in relation to the enabling of the firing pulse and the controller using until the brake has definitely been released (no start-up with brake still closed). Controller enable and firing pulse enable t "Release brake" signal (B0250) Output of rampfunction generator with delayed enable (K0190) Delay until brake is released t P087 P319 t Delay Fig. 7.6.12.1 Time characteristic following input of travel command SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 101 Start-up 03.2015 Setting information: * Set the delay time using parameter P319 so that the setpoint is not enabled via the rampfunction generator until the brake has actually been released. Caution: If the value of P319 is too low, the drive will run against the brake for a while! If the value of P319 is too high, there will be an unnecessarily long delay after the master switch is activated! The following actions take place after cancelling a travel command: 1. The ramp-function generator input is set internally to 0, i.e. the ramp-function generator begins to ramp down. 2. If the actual speed falls below the value n_min (P370), the "Release brake" signal is cancelled. 3. The firing pulse and the controller are disabled using the delay time P088 (e.g. until the brake has definitely been closed) Zero position of master switch Travel command (B0160) Actual speed value (K0167) t P370 t "Release brake" signal (B0250) t Controller enable and firing pulse enable t P088 Fig. 7.6.12.2 Time characteristic following cancellation of travel command Setting information: * Use parameter P370 to set the minimum speed at which the brake should be closed (factory setting 5%). * Use parameter P088 to set the delay time so that the firing pulses are only disabled after the brake has actually been closed (delayed controller shut-off). Caution: If the value of P088 is too low, there may be a load slump because the load can no longer be held electrically and the mechanical brake has not yet closed completely. This results in a brief slump in the load in the case of suspended loads! 102 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.6.13 Setting the start pulse for the speed controller Lifting gear: In the case of lifting gear, the I component of the speed controller command cannot start from a value of zero when "Release brake" is entered, but from a fixed setting value that is selected to prevent the slumping of a suspended load when the brake is released. The basis for this can be either a constant load or the result of an existing load measurement can be fed into the SIMOTRAS HD converter using an analog input. In addition, the start pulse for the lowering operation can be reduced using U652. Constant start pulse Load measurement /variable start pulse Lifting: U651: Setting value for I component of speed controller Lifting: U655: Selection of connector via which an existing load measurement is to be fed into the SIMOTRAS HD converter Lowering: U652: Reduction factor for the setting value used in lifting for the I component of the speed controller Overhead travel gear: For overhead travel gear in the open air which is subjected to strong winds, it may on occasion be prudent not to let the I component of the speed controller start at zero when "Release brake" is entered, but at a setting value. Setting the I component also acts as the breakaway torque. Clockwise: U651: Setting value for I component of speed controller for clockwise rotation (factory setting 0%) Anti-clockwise: U656 = 453: Use setting value in U653 U653: Setting value for I component of speed controller for anti-clockwise rotation (U653=value in U651) 7.6.14 Setting of limit value for closed-loop/open-loop operation * Determine switchover threshold for closed-loop and open-loop operation according to control characteristics (Section 3.3.6 and 3.3.7) and enter as values in parameters U628 (value) and U629 (hysteresis) for lifting gear: U628 = 60% for travel gear: U628 = up to 95% * With the master switch fully open and speed U628 is reached, the SIMOTRAS HD receives the "Zero delay angle" command. The SIMOTRAS HD then outputs the full output voltage if outside the setpoint reduction range. * Setpoint and actual value monitoring (F031) is not active in open-loop operation. Overspeed monitoring (F038) is always active. Actual speed value (K0166) Open-loop operation U628 Closed-loop operation t Fig. 7.6.14.1 Time characteristic when switching over to open-loop operation SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 103 Start-up 03.2015 7.6.15 Setting the rotor contactor stepping Specifying limit values for switching over the rotor contactors (see Section 3.3.6 and 3.3.7): On every control characteristic curve (in other words at a particular rotor resistance), the maximum possible torque reduces as the speed increases. As a result, the converter switches to the next rotor stage at the speed where the maximum possible torque is just 100% in order to receive an appropriate acceleration torque (switchover points S2, S3 and S4 in Fig. 7.6.15.1) see also Section 6.1 Block diagram n Full load curve Lift Switch over to next torque characteristic Switchover point S4 S3 S2 Current limit % 100 Activation of rotor contactors: 80 Stage 4 Stage 3 60 40 Stage 2 20 Stage 1 (Start-up stage) 100 0 0 20 40 60 80 120 140 160 180 % M Mzus. -20 -40 -60 Switchover point S1b (see Section 7.6.16) -80 Y Counter-torque stage -100 Full load curve Switchover point S1a (see Section 7.6.16) Lower Fig. 7.6.15.1 Rotor contactor switching cycle * with increasing speed: U634 Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 2 is to be connected U636 Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 3 is to be connected U638 Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 4 is to be connected * with decreasing speed: U638 (- U639 hysteresis) Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 4 is to be disconnected U636 (- U637 hysteresis) Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 3 is to be disconnected U634 (- U635 hysteresis) Value at which the rotor contactor for stage 2 is to be disconnected 104 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up n Actual speed value (K0167) U638 (S4) U638 (- U639)*) (S4) U636 (S3) U636 (- U637)*) (S3) U634 (S2) U634 (- U635)*) (S2) *) Hysteresis Control output S2 (B0528) Control output S3 (B0530) Control output S4 (B0532) Fig. 7.6.15.2 t S2 t S3 t S4 t Time characteristic of rotor contactor stepping Preventing current peaks during rotor stage stepping: * To prevent excessive stator current values occurring when switching in the next rotor contactor, it is desirable, at the same time as the contactor is switched in, to reduce the I component of the speed controller by roughly the same proportion by which the rotor resistance is also reduced. This enables the rotor current to be held at about the same value as before the switchover, despite the fact that the rotor resistance will now be lower. Setting instructions: U641 Reduction when connecting stage 1: R (stage 1) / R (counter-torque stage) U642 Reduction when connecting stage 2: R (stage 2) / R (stage 1) U643 Reduction when connecting stage 3: R (stage 3) / R (stage 2) U644 Reduction when connecting stage 4: R (stage 4) / R (stage 3) U641 = 80.0% Example: Quotient = 0.8 = Increasing rotor contactor service life: Off-load switching is recommended to increase the service life of the rotor contactors. * U640.001: Pick-up time of rotor contactors (zero current interval) * U640.002: Drop-out time of rotor contactors (zero current interval) A disadvantage of off-load switching of rotor contactors: there is a torque-free interval, and this may lead to a deviation in the speed. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 105 Start-up 03.2015 7.6.16 Counter-torque operation and premature switching over from counter-torque stage to start-up stage Counter-torque operation means that an electrical phase in opposition to the mechanical speed is applied to the running motor in order to brake the drive. The rotor resistance stage is connected to the greatest resistance during this process. The counter-torque stage is left once the drive has been braked to zero speed (switchover point S1a in Fig. 7.6.15.1). If rotor stage S1 is connected before the speed reaches zero (switchover point S1b in Fig. 7.6.15.1), the control range indicated by Mzus in Fig. 7.6.15.1 is gained. The most common operating condition, where the response outlined above occurs, is the following: Lifting gear with a large load: The load is lowered at the maximum speed (power lowering). The master switch is set to "zero position" or "Lift". A delay torque must now be applied in addition to the torque required to hold the load (e.g. 95% at rated load). When the drive is in counter-torque mode (i.e. the load is still being lowered), the delay torque becomes smaller as the speed reduces. If changeover takes place from the counter-torque stage to the start-up stage at a specific negative speed, the torque range designated Mzus in the diagram above is achieved. * The value at which the early switchover from the counter-torque stage to the start-up stage in the "Delay lowering" operating condition occurs is set using parameter U630. Lift Master switch setpoint (K0198) t Lower n t Actual speed value (K0167) U630 S1 Control output S1 (B0526) Counter-torque stage Y resistance Fig. 7.6.16.1 106 t Premature switchover to start-up stage S1 t Time characteristic for premature connection of start-up stage S1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.6.17 Setting the ramp-down monitoring function When the travel command is cancelled, SIMOTRAS HD will brake the drive electrically. The SIMOTRAS HD cancels the "Release brake" signal when the speed drops to below a minimum value (P370). A time stage is started at the beginning of the braking operation. If the time stage elapses before the minimum speed has been reached, a fault message (F023) is activated (and the firing pulses are disabled immediately and the "Release brake" signal cancelled) * The time stage (U441) should be set to the value "parameterized ramp-down time + short safety time (e.g. 10% of the ramp-down time)". Travel command (B0160) t U441 Monitoring time Output of ramp-function generator (K0190) t "Release brake" signal (B0250) t Brake contactor must drop out within specified monitoring time Fig. 7.6.17.1 Time characteristic of ramp-down monitoring 7.6.18 Setting up setpoint/actual value monitoring The setpoint/actual value monitoring system constantly checks whether or not the actual speed is deviating from the setpoint speed (according to the ramp-function generator). A time stage (P390) is started if the response threshold (P388) for the setpoint/actual value monitoring system is exceeded. The time stage is reset if the speed value does not drop below the response threshold again before the time stage elapses. Fault message F031 is activated when the time stage elapses. In the controlled range, the setpoint/actual value monitoring system is not active. When switching back to the controlled range, a delay time (P387) will be running. The monitoring system will be active again after the delay time has elapsed. * The following settings affect the setpoint/actual value monitoring system: P388 Response threshold P390 Time taken for time stage to activate the fault message F031 P387 Delay time when changing back from open-loop to closed-loop range SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 107 Start-up 03.2015 7.6.19 Setting the setpoint reduction when pre-limit switches are activated * Specify a full setpoint with the master switch. * Remove control input VE1 or VE2 = "Pre-limit switch". * When the pre-limit switches are activated, the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally. * The reduction factor is set using parameter U608. * The reduction of the setpoint when the pre-limit switches are activated applies to both directions of rotation. +n Speed setpoint from master switch 0 (K0198) -n t U608 Speed setpoint according to ramp-function generator (K0190) +n -n Control input VE1 = pre-limit switch 1 7.6.20 VE1 t t Control input VE2 = pre-limit switch 2 Fig. 7.6.19.1 U608 ES1 Control input ES1 = limit switch 1 Control input ES2 = limit switch 2 t 0 VE2 t ES2 t Time characteristic of speed setpoint when pre-limit switches are activated Documentation of setting values * Read out parameters with DriveMonitor (see Section 15 "DriveMonitor") or * Document parameters If P052=0, only parameters that are not set to the default setting are displayed on the operator control panel. 108 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 7.7 Start-up SIMOTRAS HD troubleshooting table Fault A fault or alarm message is pending No current, although controller enabled Drive accelerates uncontrollably Drive does not achieve rated speed Drive does not achieve rated speed when the machine is warm Tried everything, fault not found Possible cause See Section 10 Remedy See Section 10 Not all enable conditions have Evaluate operating state display on parameter r000 (see Section been met 11) Tachometer not connected Check the cabling for the taCoupling defective or not pre- chometer, Check the coupling between sent. tachometer and motor to make sure it is functioning correctly. Tachometer voltage has incor- Reconnect tachometer (swap rect polarity terminals 103 and 104) Actual speed value calibrated Check P741 and P140 to P143 incorrectly Rotor resistance levels have * Check rotor resistance taps changed due to the increase * Check rotor contactor stepin temperature ping values (U634, U636, U638) Contact the relevant sales partner or your "authorized control centre" (see Section 14) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 109 Start-up 7.8 03.2015 Data for existing drive A Customer/system Type of drive Lifting gear Trolley travel gear Crane travel gear Slewing gear Vertical Other Other Movement of the lifting machine Slewing Horizontal -1 Speed ms min. speed rpm Rated speed rpm max. speed rpm Acceleration ramp Clockwise/lifting s Deceleration ramp Clockwise/lifting s Acceleration ramp Anti-clockwise/lowering s Deceleration ramp Anti-clockwise/lowering s Switching frequency Operating mode Change in rotational direction: Switching ops./hour % (to DIN EN 60034-1) under load e.g. S3-40 % from standstill Weight of drive Empty: kg Under load: kg Motor data Manufac. Speed Motor type Frequency Rated power kW Torque Connection / 110 Power factor rpm Hz cos phi Nm Stator voltage V Rotor voltage V Stator current A Rotor current A SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Characteristic sheet: Customer/system Braking / Lift [%] n Driving / Lift 180 160 140 120 100 2,0 0 80 60 1,6 0,4 40 20 1,2 -180 -140 -100 -60 0,8 M -20 20 60 100 -20 0,8 180 140 [%] 1,2 -40 -60 0,4 1,6 -80 -100 0 2,0 -120 -140 -160 -180 Driving / Lower R S= k Control range: % UST = V UL = V k= /Phase IST = A IL A selected: k' = /Phase S= R k Braking / Lower Char. rotor res.: = Slip [s] at 100% M Resistance [R] R=s*k k= UL IL 3 Threshold speed Stage 4 /phase + % to S4 Stage 3 / phase + % to S3 Stage 2 / phase + % to S2 Stage 1 / phase - % to S1 Counter-torque stage /phase SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 111 Start-up 7.9 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD - QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS (Copy of carton supplied with this operating manual) Requirements: Factory settings in place, connected according to suggested connection on the reverse side. Access authorization P051 = 40 all parameters can be modified Motor data P100 P114 P490.001 Rated motor current (in amps) Thermal time constant of motor (in minutes) (Factory setting: 10 min) (0 ... monitoring switched off) Type of temperature sensor on terminal 22/23 (factory setting: 1) 0 .. no temperature sensor present 1 .. KTY84 P491 Alarm temperature (factory setting = 20C) 4 .. PTC with Rn = 1330 Ohm: when R < Rn: B0184 = 0, when R > Rn: B0184 = 1 Speed sensing with analog tachometer (displayed on r002) P083 = 1 P741 Tachometer connected to terminals 103 and 104 Tachometer voltage at maximum speed (approx. 8 V to +270.00) (factory setting: 60.00 V) Speed sensing with pulse encoder (displayed on r024) P083 = 2 P140 = 1 P141 P142 P143 Pulse encoder connected to terminals 28/29 and 30/31 Pulse encoder has two pulse traces that are displaced by 90 (factory setting: 1) Number of pulses of pulse encoder (factory setting: 250 pulses per revolution) 0 .. Pulse encoder outputs 5V signals 1 .. Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals (factory setting: 1) Maximum speed (rpm) (factory setting: 1450 rpm) Speed setpoint normalization P401 U628 Speed setpoint that must be attained under control by master switch (factory setting: 60 %) for lifting gear: approx. 60%, for travel gear: approx. 100% Threshold for zero delay angle setting Current limits (actual current value displayed on r019) P171 P172 For torque direction I (as % of P100) (factory setting: +200 %) For torque direction II (as % of P100) (factory setting: -200 %) Current controller P155 P156 Controller gain Kp (factory setting: 0.2) Reset time Tn (factory setting: 0.02 s) Speed controller P225 P226 P200 Controller gain Kp (factory setting: 3.0) Reset time Tn (factory setting: 0.2 s) Smoothing of actual speed value (factory setting: 10 ms) Ramp-function generator Ramp times for closed-loop operation P303 Ramp-up time (factory setting: 10 s) P304 Ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s) P305 Lower transition rounding (factory setting: 0 s) P306 Upper transition rounding (factory setting: 0 s) Ramp times for open-loop operation P307 Ramp-up time (factory setting: 10 s) P308 Ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s) P309 Lower transition rounding (factory setting: 0 s) P310 Upper transition rounding (factory setting: 0 s) Start pulse for speed controller U651 U652 Start pulse for clockwise movement (= lifting) (as % of P100) (factory setting: 0 %) Start pulse reduction factor for anti-clockwise movement (= lowering) (factory setting: 50 %) Rotor contactor stepping U634 U636 U638 U630 Speed at which the rotor contactor for stage 2 is switched in (factory setting: 50%) Speed at which the rotor contactor for stage 3 is switched in (factory setting: 75%) Speed at which the rotor contactor for stage 4 is switched in (factory setting: 90%) Speed at which the rotor contactor for stage 1 is prematurely switched in when in "Delay lowering" mode (counter-torque operation) (factory setting: -1%) Ramp-down monitoring U441 When the travel command is cancelled, the motor must have reached its minimum speed (P370) within the time specified here, otherwise the fault message F023 is activated (factory setting: 10.5 s) (Recommended value: highest of P304 + 10% and P308 + 10%) Setpoint reduction with pre-limit switch U608 112 When approaching a pre-limit switch, the speed setpoint is multiplied by the value specified here (factory setting: 15%) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 74 High- Brake checkback signal Electrical Stop 39 37 36 71 78 ES2 230V~ 77 ES1 79 76 VE2 VE1 75 73 FK2 speed notch 72 1 2 3 4 5 M P10 N10 ST sNo faults signal U608 FR FR FK P665 Fault processing SIMOTRAS HD Acknowledge U605 Zero delay angle U663 Reduction of n controller start pulse P661 Enable pulse Valid travel command P654 3 Ramp-function generator Control word 1 bit 3 Setpoint reduction U607 & Acknowledgement 2 Setpoint 34 P24_S 38 84 83 82 81 FK1 P24_S from terminal 34 Lifting gear overload Ack. button Limit switch Pre-limit switch Master switch Mechanical Stop ST Start pulse Speed controller 100% 4 = Current limiting Electronics power supply ~ 5U1 5W1 5N1 <5> Brake control S1 87 88 S2 89 90 S3 91 92 S4 93 94 85 86 103 104 30 28 26 27 31 29 Current control Converter fan 4U1 4V1 4W1 5 Actual speed value Ack. MS <1> 1 230V~ k01 <1> MS G 90 0 15V <4> M <3> IG Gating unit Actual current value sensing 6 n Brake T1 M 3~ T2 V2 V1 U1 U2 <6> L2 L1 7 Load ST PE <2> 22 23 Motor temperature monitoring sNo faults signal 110 109 s <6> Power section connection <5> Converter fan connection <4> Terminal 26 supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply. <3> Analog tacho or pulse encoder G = analog tacho IG = pulse encoder <2> KTY84 or PTC connection for motor temperature monitoring <1> Signal from safety chain for brake control T3 W2 W1 L3 8 03.2015 Start-up Control logic for rotor contactors Drive-specific (crane) control 113 Start-up 7.10 03.2015 Starting up optional supplementary boards For information about installing boards, please see Section 5.2.2, Optional supplementary boards. This section also contains details on the number of supplementary boards that can be installed and in which slots they may be inserted. The basic converter automatically detects all installed supplementary boards during power-up. All communications-related settings must be made by means of parameters. The function diagrams in Section 8 show a general overview of the parameters provided for this purpose. If two boards of the same type (e.g. two EB1s) are installed in a converter, the slots in which they are installed determine the parameter settings. The board in the slot with the lower slot letter is the st st nd 1 board (e.g. the 1 EB1) of this particular type and the board with the higher letter the 2 board nd (e.g. 2 EB1). st nd The 1 board is parameterized via index 1 and the 2 board via index 2 of the corresponding parameter (e.g. to define the signal type of the analog inputs of boards of type EB1, parameter st nd U755.001 is used for the 1 EB1 and parameter U755.002 for the 2 EB1). Note The listed optional boards have not been officially released and may only be used in consultation with the appropriate Siemens department. 7.10.1 Sequence of operations for starting up the T300 technology board Note Freely configurable technology boards T300 are guaranteed to operate correctly (board runup and data exchange with the SIMOTRAS 6SG70). The user, however, must bear responsibility for ensuring that the system is properly configured. 1 Disconnect the power supply and insert the board in location 2. 2 Power up the system again to gain access to the parameters of the technology board (d and H parameters, as well as c and L parameters if programmed). The process data are interconnected at the basic converter end by means of the appropriate connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagram Z110) For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to G183. If a communication board is used in addition to a technology board, then data are exchanged with the basic converter via the technology board. The basic converter cannot directly access the data of the communication board. The connections of the transfer data are then determined by the configuration or parameter settings of the technology board. If a technology board is mounted in location 2, then only one communication board (CBP2, CBC, ...) may be installed in slot G. Other boards are not supported. 114 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.10.2 Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards (CBP2) 1 Switch off the power supply and insert the board or adapter with board. For board mounting instructions, see Section 5, Mounting Optional Supplementary Boards. 2 The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for st st nd nd the 1 communication board (1 CB) and index 2 for the 2 communication board (2 CB): - U712 PPO type, definition of the number of words in the parameter and process data section of the telegram (required only if the PPO type cannot be set via PROFIBUS-DP master) - U722 Telegram failure time for process data (0 = deactivated) The DP master configuring data determine whether the slave (CBP2) must monitor telegram traffic with the master. If this monitoring function is activated, the DP master passes a time value (watchdog time) to the slave when the link is set up. If no data are exchanged within this period, the slave terminates the process data exchange with the SIMOTRAS HD converter. The latter can monitor the process data as a function of U722 and activate fault message F082. 3 - P918 Bus address - P927 Parameterization enable (need only be set if parameters are to be assigned via PROFIBUS) - The process data of the 1 or 2 communication board are connected by means of the appropriate connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111) For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to G183. st nd Turn the electronics supply voltage off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to transfer the values of parameters U712, U722 and P918 to the supplementary board. Note This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary board that has already been started up. WARNING Note the setting of parameter U722. In the factory setting of U722 (monitoring deactivated) the drive continues to run with the last received setpoints in case of a PROFIBUS failure and can only be stopped by an OFF signal from the terminal. For details, see Section 11, Parameter list. The CBP2 (Communication Board PROFIBUS) serves to link drives and higher-level automation systems via the PROFIBUS-DP. For the purpose of PROFIBUS, it is necessary to distinguish between master and slave converters. Masters control the data traffic via the bus and are also referred to as active nodes. There are two classes of master: DP masters of class 1 (DPM1) are central stations (e.g. SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 or SIMADYN D) which exchange data with slaves in predefined message cycles. DPM1s support both a cyclic channel (transmission of process data and parameter data) and an acyclic channel (transmission of parameter data and diagnostic data). DP masters of class 2 (DPM2) are programming, configuring or operator control/visualization devices (e.g. DriveMonitor) which are used in operation to configure, start up or monitor the installation. DPM2s support only an acyclic channel for transferring parameter data. The contents of the data frames transferred via these channels are identical to the structure of the parameter section (PKW) as defined by the USS specification. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 115 Start-up 03.2015 The following diagram shows the services and channels supported by a CBP: DriveMonitor (Class 2 master) CPU (Class 1 master) MSCY_C1 Cyclic channel PPO PKW Job/ response PZD Setpoint/ actual values MSAC_C1 Acyclic channel DS 0 DS 100 Diagnosis PKW Job/ response Parameter channel MSAC_C2 Acyclic channel PKW Job/ response PZD Setpoint/ actual values Process data channel Slaves (e.g. CBP2) may only respond to received messages and are referred to as passive nodes. PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) combines high baud rates (to RS485 standard) with simple, lowcost installation. The PROFIBUS baud rate can be selected within a range of 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud and is set for all devices connected to the bus when the bus system is started up. The bus is accessed according to the token-passing method, i.e. permission to transmit for a defined time window is granted to the active stations (masters) in a "logical ring". The master can communicate with other masters, or with slaves in a subordinate master-slave process, within this time window. PROFIBUS-DP (Distributed Peripherals) predominantly utilizes the master-slave method and data is exchanged cyclically with the drives in most cases. The user data structure for the cyclic channel MSCY_C1 (see picture above) is referred to as a Parameter Process(data) Object (PPO) in the PROFIBUS profile for variable-speed drives. This channel is also frequently referred to as the STANDARD channel. The user data structure is divided into two different sections which can be transferred in each telegram: PZD section The process data (PZD) section contains control words, setpoints, status words and actual values. PKW section The parameter section (PKW - Parameter ID Value) is used to read and write parameter values. When the bus system is started up, the type of PPO used by the PROFIBUS master to address the drive is selected. The type of PPO selected depends on what functions the drive has to perform in the automation network. Process data are always transferred and processed as priority data in the drive. Process data are "wired up" by means of connectors of the basic unit (drive) or via technology board parameters, if these are configured. Parameter data allow all parameters of the drive to be accessed, allowing parameter values, diagnostic quantities, fault messages, etc. to be called by a higher-level system without impairing the performance of the PZD transmission. 116 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up A total of five PPO types are defined: PKW section PKE IND 1st word 2nd word PZD section PWE 3rd word 4th word PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 STW HSW HIW 1 ZSW 1 PZD 10 1st word 10th word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word 5th word 6th word 7th word 8th word 9th word PPO1 PPO2 PPO3 PPO4 PPO5 PKW: Parameter ID value IND: PZD: Process data PWE: Parameter value Index ZSW HSW: Main setpoint PKE: Parameter identifier STW: ISW: Control word Status word Main actual value The acyclic channel MSCY_C2 (see diagram above) is used exclusively for the start-up and servicing of DriveMonitor. 7.10.2.1 Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS: The PKW mechanism (with PPO types 1, 2 and 5 and for the two acyclic channels MSAC_C1 and MSAC_C2) can be used to read and write parameters. A parameter request job is sent to the drive for this purpose. When the job has been executed, the drive sends back a response. Until it receives this response, the master must not issue any new requests, i.e. any job with different contents, but must repeat the old job. The parameter section in the telegram always contains at least 4 words: Parameter identifier PKE Index IND Parameter value 1 PWE1 (H word) Paramter value 2 PWE2 (L word) Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 7.10.7, "Structure of request/response telegrams", and in the PROFIBUS profile "PROFIBUS Profile, Drive technology" of the user's organization PROFIBUS International (http://www.profibus.com). The parameter identifier PKE contains the number of the relevant parameter and an identifier which determines the action to be taken (e.g. "read value"). The index IND contains the number of the relevant index value (equals 0 in the case of nonindexed parameters). The IND structure differs depending on the communication mode: - Definition in the PPOs (structure of IND with cyclical communication via PPOs) - Definition for acyclical channels MSAC_C1 and MSAC_C2 (structure of IND with acyclical communication) The array subindex (referred to simply as "subindex" in the PROFIBUS profile) is an 8-bit value which is transferred in the high-order byte (bits 8 to 15) of the index (IND) when data are transferred cyclically via PPOs. The low-order byte (bits 0 to 7) is not defined in the DVA profile. The low-order byte of the index word is used in the PPO of CBP2 to select the correct number range (bit7 = Page Select bit) in the case of parameter numbers of > 1999. In the case of acyclical data traffic (MSAC_C1, MSAC_C2) the number of the index is transferred in the low-order byte (bits 0 to 7). Bit 15 in the high-order byte is used as the Page Select bit. This assignment complies with the USS specification. Index value 255 (request applies to all index values) is meaningful only for acyclical transmission via MSAC_C1. The maximum data block length is 206 bytes with this transmission mode. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 117 Start-up 03.2015 The parameter value PWE is always transferred as double word (32-bit value) PWE1 and PWE2. The high-order word is entered as PWE1 and the low-order word as PWE2. In the case of 16-bit values, PWE1 must be set to 0 by the master. Example (acyclical data traffic): Read parameter P101.004 (for details, see Section 7.10.7, "Structure of request/response telegrams"): Request identifier PKE = 0x6065 (request parameter value (array) P101), Index IND = 0004h = 4d Parameter value PWE1 = PWE2 = 0 SIMOTRAS HD response: Response identifier PKE = 0x4065, Index IND = 0004h = 4d Value of P101.004 = 0190h = 400d (PWE1 = 0, because it is not a double word parameter) Rules for job/response processing: A job or a response can only ever refer to one parameter. The master must send the job repeatedly until it receives an appropriate response from the slave. The master recognizes the response to the job it has sent by analyzing the response identifier, the parameter number, the parameter index and the parameter value. The complete job must be sent in one telegram. The same applies to the response. The actual values in repeats of response telegrams are always up-to-date values. If no information needs to be fetched via the PKW interface (but only PZD) in cyclic operation, then a "No job" job must be issued. PROFIBUS devices have a variety of difference performance features. In order to ensure that all master systems can correctly address each supplementary board, the characteristic features of each board are stored in a separate device master file (GSD). You need file <siem8045.gsd> for CBP2. The appropriate file can be chosen in the selection menu for the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES files in later versions of the configuring tool. The device master file can also be purchased in the Industry online support at ID109474928. The communication boards can only be operated on a non-Siemens master as a DP standard slave, the corresponding GSD file containing all necessary information for this mode. Detailed information about communication via PROFIBUS can be found in Section 8.2 of the compendium for SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Motion Control (Industry online support, ID23660019). The description in this document is fully applicable in every respect, except that the specified parameter numbers differ from those used on the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70. 7.10.2.2 Diagnostic tools: LED displays of CBP2 (flashing LEDs mean normal operation): Red LED Yellow LED Green LED 118 Status of CBP2 Communication between SIMOTRAS HD and CBP2 Communication between CBP2 and PROFIBUS SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up As a start-up support tool, the PROFIBUS board supplies data which can be displayed in n732.001 st nd to n732.032 (1 CB) or n732.033 to n732.064 (2 CB). The values of the indices are as follows: Index Meaning for CBP2 001/033 CBP_Status Bit0: "CBP Init", CBP is being initialized or waiting to be initialized by the basic unit (not set in normal operation) Bit1: "CBP Online", CBP is selected by basic unit (set in normal operation) Bit2: "CBP Offline", CBP not selected by basic unit (not set in normal operation) Bit3: Illegal bus address (P918) (not set in normal operation) Bit4: Diagnostic mode activated (U711 <> 0) (not set in normal operation) Bit8: Incorrect identifier bytes transferred (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master) (not set in normal operation) Bit9: Incorrect PPO type (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master) (not set in normal operation) Bit10: Correct configuring data received from PROFIBUS_DP Master (set in normal operation) Bit12: Fatal error detected by DPS Manager software (not set in normal operation) Bit13: Program in endless loop in main.c (loop can only be exited by a Reset) Bit15: Program in communications online loop (loop can only be exited through re-initialization by basic unit) 002/034 SPC3_Status Bit0: Offline/Passive Idle (0=SPC3 is operating in normal mode (offline) 1=SPC3 is operating in Passive Idle) Bit2: Diag flag (0=diagnostic buffer has been picked up by master 1= diagnostic buffer has not been picked up by master) Bit3: RAM Access Violation, memory access >1.5kB (0=no address violation, 1=for addresses > 1536 bytes, 1024 is subtracted from address and access made to the new address) Bit4+5: DP state (00=Wait_Prm, 01=Wait_Cfg, 10=Data_Ex, 11=not possible) Bit6+7: WD state (00=Baud search, 01=Baud_Control, 10=DP_Control, 11=not possible) Bit8-11: Baud rate (0000=12MBd, 0001=6MBd, 0010=3MBd, 0011=1,5MBd, 0100=500kBd, 0101=187.5kBd, 0110=93.75kBd, 0111=45.45kBd, 1000=19.2kBd, 1001=9.6kBd) Bit12-15: SPC3-Release (0000=Release 0) 003/035 SPC3_Global_Controls Bits remain set until the next DP global command Bit1: 1=Clear_Data message received Bit2: 1=Unfreeze message received Bit3: 1=Freeze message received Bit4: 1=Unsync message received Bit5: 1=Sync message received 004/036 L byte: No. of received error-free messages (DP Standard only) H byte: Reserved 005/037 L byte: "Timeout" counter H byte: Reserved 006/038 L byte: "Clear Data" counter H byte: Reserved 007/039 L byte: "Heartbeat counter error" counter H byte: Reserved 008/040 L byte: No. bytes for special diagnosis H byte: Reserved 009/041 L byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 2 H byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 3 010/042 L byte: Mirroring of P918 (CB bus addr.) H byte: Reserved 011/043 L byte: "Re-config. by CUD" counter H byte: "Initialization runs" counter 012/044 L byte: Error ID DPS manager error H byte: Reserved SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 119 Start-up 03.2015 Index Meaning for CBP2 013/045 L byte: PPO type found H byte: Reserved 014/046 L byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier ref" 015/047 H byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier act" 016/048 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, pos. ack. counter H byte: Reserved 017/049 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, neg. ack. counter H byte: Reserved 018/050 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, pos. ack. counter H byte: Reserved 019/051 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, neg. ack. counter H byte: Reserved 020/052 L byte: DP/T:GET DB99 pos. ack. counter H byte: DP/T:PUT DB99 pos. ack. counter 021/053 L byte: DP/T:GET DB100 ps. ack. counter H byte: DP/T:PUT DB100 ps. ack. counter 022/054 L byte: DP/T:GET DB101 ps. ack. counter H byte: DP/T:PUT DB101 ps. ack. counter 023/055 L byte: DP/T service neg. acknow. counter H byte: DP/T:Application association pos. acknow. counter 024/056 Reserved 025/057 Date of creation: Day, month 026/058 Date of creation: Year 027/059 Software version (Vx.yz, display x) 028/060 Software version (Vx.yz, display yz) 029/061 Software version: Flash-EPROM checks. 030/062 Reserved 031/063 Reserved 032/064 Reserved Fault and alarm messages: For details about fault messages, see Section 10. Fault F080 An error occurred as board CBP2 was being initialized, e.g. incorrect value of a CB parameter, incorrect bus address or defective module. Fault F081 The heartbeat counter (counter on CBP2) which is monitored by SIMOTRAS HD for "signs of life" from the board has not changed for at least 800 ms. Fault F082 Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel. st nd Alarm A081 (1 CB) or alarm A089 (2 CB) The identifier byte combinations transmitted by the DP master in the configuration telegram do not match the permitted identifier byte combinations (configuring error on DP master) Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary. 120 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up st Alarm A082 (1 CB) or alarm A090 (2nd CB) No valid PPO type can be determined from the configuration telegram from the DP master. Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary. st nd st nd st nd Alarm A083 (1 CB) or alarm A091 (2 CB) No user data, or only invalid data, are being received from the DP master. Effect: The process data are not transferred to the basic unit. When the telegram failure monitoring function is active (U722 set to value other than 0), this disturbance generates fault message F082 with fault value 10. Alarm A084 (1 CB) or alarm A092 (2 CB) The exchange of data between the communication board and DP master has been interrupted (e.g. cable break, bus connector removed or DP master switched off). Effect: When the telegram failure monitoring function is active (U722 set to value other than 0), this disturbance generates fault message F082 with fault value 10. Alarm A085 (1 CB) or alarm A093 (2 CB) Error in the DPS software of the communication board. Effect: Fault message F081 is generated. nd Alarm A086 (1st CB) or alarm A094 (2 CB) Failure of heartbeat counter detected by SIMOTRAS HD master. Effect: Interruption in communication with PROFIBUS. st nd st nd Alarm A087 (1 CB) or alarm A095 (2 CB) DP slave software has detected serious fault, fault number in diagnostic parameter n732.08. Effect: Total communication failure (secondary fault F082). Alarm A088 (1 CB) or alarm A096 (2 CB) At least 1 configurable internode transmitter is not yet active or has failed again (for details, see diagnostic parameter n732). Effect: If a transmitter is not yet active, the associated setpoints are set to "0" as an alternative. If an internode transmitter fails again, transmission of the setpoints to the SIMOTRAS HD may be interrupted depending on the setting of U715 (with secondary fault F082). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 121 Start-up 03.2015 7.10.3 Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC) 1 With the power supply switched off, insert the board with adapter board (ADB) into the slot. For board mounting instructions, see Section 5, Mounting Optional Supplementary Boards. 2 The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for st st nd nd the 1 communication board (1 CB) and index 2 for the 2 communication board (2 CB): st Exception: In parameter U721, i001 to i005 are applicable to the 1 CB and i006 to i010 to nd the 2 CB (indices 3 to 5 and 8 to 10 are reserved). The meaning of the parameters also differs depending on the setting of U721, i.e. CANLayer 2 (U721=0) and CANopen (U721=1): CAN-Layer 2 CANopen U711 Basic identifier for PKW Request/PKW Response 1st Receive-PDO U712 Basic identifier for PZD Receive 2nd Receive-PDO U713 Basic identifier for PZD Send 3rd Receive-PDO U714 Number of PZD for PZD Send 4th Receive-PDO U715 Updating rate for PZD Send 1st Transmit-PDO U716 Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Broadcast 2nd Transmit-PDO U717 Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Multicast 3rd Transmit-PDO U718 Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Internode 4th Transmit-PDO U719 Basic identifier for PKW Request-Broadcast Response to Life Time Event U720 Baud rate when U721.002 or U721.007 = 0: 0=10kbit/s, 1=20kbit/s, 2=50kbit/s, 3=100kbit/s, 4=125kbit/s, 5=250kbit/s, 6=500kbit/s, 7=Reserved, 8=1Mbit/s Baud rate when U721.002 or U721.007 = 0: 0=10kbit/s, 1=20kbit/s, 2=50kbit/s, 3=100kbit/s, 4=125kbit/s, 5=250kbit/s, 6=500kbit/s, 7=Reserved, 8=1Mbit/s U721.01 or U721.06 0 = Functionality according to Layer 2 of ISO-OSI- 1 = Functionality according to Layer 7 of ISO-OSI7 Layer Model 7 Layer Model (CANopen) U721.02 or U721.07 Bus timing (this should not be changed) Bus timing (this should not be changed) U722 Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated) Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated) P918 Bus address (node ID) Bus address (node ID) P927 Parameterizing enable (required only in cases where parameter values must be altered via the CAN Bus) Parameterizing enable (required only in cases where parameter values must be altered via the CAN Bus) st nd The process data of the 1 or 2 communication board are connected by means of the appropriate connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111) For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to G183. 3 Turn the electronics supply voltage off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to transfer the values of parameters U711 to U721 and P918 to the supplementary board. Note: The initialization process may interrupt the communication link to a supplementary board which is already operational. Note This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary board that has already been started up. The CAN (Controller Area Network) fieldbus is being used increasingly for industrial applications in spite of its limited network length (max. 40 m with a data transmission rate of 1 Mbaud). 122 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Data are transferred by means of telegrams. Each data message, the so-called COBs (Communication Objects), has its own individual identifier and contains a maximum of 8 bytes of user data. The CBC board uses the Standard Message Format with 11-bit identifier. Simultaneous use by other nodes of Extended Message Format with 29-bit identifiers is tolerated, but messages with this format are not evaluated. Nodes on the bus determine from the identifier which telegrams apply to them. The COBs to be sent and received by each node must be defined before data transmission commences. The identifiers also determine bus accessing priority. Low identifiers gain faster access to the bus, i.e. they have higher priority then high identifiers. Errored telegrams can be reliably detected by means of a number of interactive error detection mechanisms. A transmission is automatically repeated when errors are detected. The figure below shows a diagram of the CAN architecture model that is oriented toward the ISOOSI-7 layer reference model. The CBC supports the functionalities provided by layers 2 and 7 of this model. Functionality according to layer 2 The user data from the user software (as COBs on byte level) must be transferred directly to layer 2 (see also the examples of PZD and PKW data exchange given further down). Functionality according to layer 7 (CANopen) Process data are exchanged rapidly by means of so-called PDOs (Process Data Objects) analogous to the transmission method used for layer 2. Parameter data are exchanged by means of so-called SDOs (Service Data Objects). CAN protocol Device net Communication profile CIA DS 301 Application layer CIA CAL DS 201 .. 205, 207 CANopen CAL Device net specification includes: - Device profile - Communication profile - Application layer Device profile Application Layer 7 Layer 3-6 Communication Layer 2 Layer 1 Data link layer ISO-DIS 11898 Physical layer, electrical Physical layer, mechanical CIA DS 102-1 Device Net ODVA 7.10.3.1 Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2 User data are exchanged between the CAN master and the CAN boards on the drives, i.e. the slaves. User data are categorized as either process data (control and status information, setpoints and actual values) or data which relate to parameters. Process data (PZDs) are time-critical and therefore processed faster by the drive (every 3.3 ms at system frequency of 50 Hz) than the non-time-critical PKW data (parameter identifier value), which is processed by the drive every 20 ms. All settings required to operate the communication board are made in drive parameters (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111). Process data (PZD) are categorized as either data received by the drive (control words and setpoints: PZD Receive) or data transmitted by the drive (status words and actual values: PZD Send). A maximum of 16 PZDs can be transferred in either direction; these are divided into COBs with 4 data words each by the communication board. In other words, 4 COBs are required to transfer 4 PZD words, with each COB requiring its own separate identifier. Identifiers are assigned in the CB parameters as shown in the following diagram: SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 123 Start-up 03.2015 PZD Receive 1 (setpoints 1 to 4) Node address of drive (P918) x4 + +1 Basic identifier for parameterizing PZD Receive (U712) +2 +3 PZD Receive 2 (setpoints 5 to 8) PZD Receive 3 (setpoints 9 to 12) PZD Receive 4 (setpoints 13 to 16) Example of PZD Receive: P918 = 1 U712 = 96 This settings assigns identifier 100 to the first 4 receive PZDs, identifier 101 to the second 4 receive PZDs, etc. PZD Send 1 (actual values 1 to 4) Node address of drive (P918) x4 + +1 Basic identifier for PZD send (U713) +2 +3 PZD Send 2 (actual values 5 to 8) PZD Send 3 (actual values 9 to 12) PZD-Send 4 (actual values 13 to 16) Example of PZD Send: P918 = 1 U713 = 196 This setting assigns identifier 200 to the first 4 send PZDs, identifier 201 to the second 4 send PZDs, etc. How received data are utilized by the drive or which data are to be sent by the drive is determined by connectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111). 3 different modes of COB transmission can be selected in CB parameter 5 (U715): U715 = 0 Actual values are transmitted only on request (Remote Transmission Requests) U715 = 1 to 65534 Actual values are transmitted after the set time [ms] or on request (Remote Transmission Requests) U715 = 65535 Actual values are transmitted if the values have changed (event) or on request (Remote Transmission Requests). This option should only be used in cases where values seldom change so as to prevent excessive bus loading. Structure of a telegram for PZD data exchange: The telegram consists of the following data words: Identifier ID Process data word 1 PZD1 Process data word 2 PZD2 Process data word 3 PZD3 Process data word 4 PZD4 ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization. PZDx are process data words 124 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Example of a PZD setpoint telegram: Using the receive identifier of the above example Receive identifier 1. Setpoint 2. Setpoint 3. Setpoint 4. Setpoint 100d 40063d 8192d 123d 0d 0064h 9C7Fh 2000h 007Bh 0h control word 1 speed setpoint 50% Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the setpoint data appear as follows (data field length = 8 bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round): Identifier Data field 64 00 7F 9C 00 20 7B 00 00 00 ID PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 The following functions are also available, each allowing a maximum of 16 process data to be transferred: PZD Receive Broadcast This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to all slaves on the bus simultaneously. With this option, an identical identifier must be set on all slaves utilizing the function. This common identifier is set in CB parameter 6 (U716). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in U716 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in U716+1, etc. PZD Receive Multicast This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to a group of slaves on the bus simultaneously. With this option, all slaves within the group using the function must be set to an identical identifier. This group identifier is set in CB parameter 7 (U717). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in U717 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in U717+1, etc. PZD Receive Internode This function is used to receive setpoints and control words from another slave, allowing PZDs to be exchanged between drives without intervention by a CAN master. For this purpose, the identifier of PZD Receive Internode on the receiving slave must be set to the identifier of PZD Send on the transmitting slave. This identifier is set in CB parameter 8 (U718). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in U718 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in U718+1, etc. Notes regarding PZD transmission: Control word 1 must always be transferred as the first PZD word for setpoints. If control word 2 is needed, then it must be transferred as the fourth PZD word. Bit 10 (control by PLC) must always be set in control word 1 or else the drives will not accept setpoints and control words. The consistency of process data can only be guaranteed within a COB. If more than 4 data words are needed, these must be divided among several COBs. Since drives accept the data asynchronously, the data transferred in several COBs may not always be accepted and processed in the same processing cycle. For this reason, interrelated data should be transferred within the same COB. If this is not possible, data consistency can be assured by means of control word bit 10 (control by PLC), i.e. by setting the bit to "off" in the first COB to temporarily prevent the drive from accepting the data from the communications board. The remaining data are then transmitted. Finally, a COB containing a control word bit 10 set to "on" is transmitted. Since a drive can accept up to 16 PZDs simultaneously from the communication board, data consistency is assured. Since a variety of different functions can be used to transfer PZDs simultaneously, data are overlayed in the drive. For example, the first PZD from PZD Receive and PZD Receive Broadcast are always interpreted as the same control word 1. For this reason, care should be taken to ensure that data are transferred in meaningful combinations. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 125 Start-up 03.2015 Two CAN identifiers are required for the purpose of processing parameters, i.e. one CAN identifier for PKW Request (parameter request job to drive) and one CAN identifier for PKW Response (parameter response by drive). These assignments are made in CB parameters as shown in the following diagram: Node address of drive (P918) PKW Request + x2 Basic identifier for parameterizing (U711) +1 PKW Response Example of PKW data exchange: P918 = 1 U711 = 298 This setting assigns identifier 300 to the parameter job (request) and identifier 301 to the parameter response. Structure of a telegram for PKW data exchange: The telegram consists of the following data words: Identifier ID Parameter identifier PKE Parameter index IND Parameter value 1 PWE1 Parameter value 2 PWE2 ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization. PKE contains the request or response ID and the parameter number Request or response ID Parameter number PNU Bit 0 to bit 10 contain the number of the parameter concerned. Bit 12 to bit 15 contain the request or response ID. The index IND contains the value 0 for unindexed parameters, for indexed parameters it contains the corresponding index value. Bit15 also has a special function as the page select bit for parameter numbers greater than 1999. The index value 255 means that the request concerns all indices of the parameter in question. For a change request, the parameter values must then be passed on for all indices of the parameter. Because a COB can only contain up to 4 data words (8 bytes) of net data, use of this request is only possible for parameters with (up to ) 2 indices. In the other direction, the drive supplies all index values in the response telegram to a read request. Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 7.10.7, "Structure of request/response telegrams". Example of a PKW request: Changing the parameter value of the indexed parameter P301.02 (in the RAM) to -95.00%. The example telegram therefore contains the following values: Request identifier Request code Parameter number Index Parameter value 126 300d 7d 301d 2d 9500d 012Ch 7h 012Dh 0002h DAE4h For use of the IDs of the example above "Change parameter value (array word)" => PKE = 712Dh SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the transmit data appear as follows (data field length = 8 bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round): Identifier Data field 2C 01 2D 71 02 00 E4 DA ID PKE IND PWE1 00 00 The following transfer function is also available: PKW Request Broadcast A parameter job (request) is processed simultaneously by all slaves on the bus. The node address is not used to generate the CAN identifier because this must be set identically on all slaves utilizing the PKW Request Broadcast function. This common identifier is set in CB parameter 9 (U719). The corresponding parameter response is made with the CAN identifier for PKW Response described above. Notes regarding PKW transmission: The length of the job and the response is always 4 words. Jobs which apply to all indices of a parameter (e.g. "Request all indices") are not possible. As a general rule, the low-order byte (in words) or the low-order word (in double words) is transferred first. SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 does not use double word parameters itself, these jobs can only be executed where access is available to technology board parameters (e.g. T400). The CBC does not respond to a parameter request job until the drive data are available. This normally takes 20 ms. The response times will be longer only if change (write) jobs including storage of the value in the EEPROM are received from other sources (e.g. serial basic converter interface), resulting in a delay in job execution. In certain system states (e.g. initialization states), parameter processing is greatly delayed or does not take place at all. The master may not issue a new parameter request job until any current parameter job has been acknowledged. 7.10.3.2 Description of CBC with CANopen Introduction to CANopen CANopen is a standardized application for distributed, industrial automation systems based on CAN and the CAL communication standard. CANopen is a standard of CAN in Automation (CiA) and was in widespread use shortly after it became available. CANopen can be regarded in Europe as the definitive standard for the implementation of industrial CAN-based system solutions. CANopen is based on a so-called "communication profile" which specifies the underlying communication mechanisms and their definition [CiA DS-301]. The main types of device deployed for automating industrial systems, such as digital and analog input/output modules [CiA DS-401], drives [CiA DS-402], control panels [CiA DS-403], controllers [CiA DS-404], PLCs [CiA DS-405] or encoders [CiA DS-406], are described in so-called "device profiles". These profiles define the functionality of standard equipment of the relevant type. A central componentof the CANopen standard is the definition of device functionality using an "Object Directory" (OD). This object directory is subdivided into two sections, one which contains general information about the device, such as identification, manufacturer's name, etc. and the communication parameters, and the other describing the scope of device functions. An entry ("object") in the object directory is identified by means of a 16-bit index and an 8-bit subindex. The "application objects" of a device, such as input and output signals, device parameters, device functions or network variables, are made accessible in standardized form via the network by means of the entries in the object directory. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 127 Start-up 03.2015 Similar to other field bus systems, CANopen employs two basic data transmission mechanisms: The rapid exchange of short process data via so-called "process data objects" (PDOs) and the accessing of entries in the object directory via so-called "service data objects" (SDOs). Process data objects are generally transferred either event-oriented, cyclically or on request as broadcast objects without an additional protocol overhead. SDOs are used mainly to transmit parameters during the device configuring process and generally for the transmission of longer data areas. A total of 8 bytes of data can be transferred in a PDO. The assignment between application objects and a PDO (transfer object) can be set by means of a structure definition ("PDO mapping") stored in the OD and is thus adaptable to the individual operating requirements of a device. SDOs are transmitted as a confirmed data transfer with two CAN objects in each case between two network nodes. The relevant object directory entry is addressed through the specification of index and subindex. Messages of unrestricted length can be transferred in principle. The transmission of SDO messages involves an additional overhead. Standardized, event-oriented, high priority alarm messages ("Emergency Messages") are available for signaling device malfunctions. The functionality required for the preparation and coordinated starting of a distributed automation system corresponds to the mechanisms defined under CAL Network Management (NMT); this also applies to the "Node Guarding" principle underpinning the cyclical node monitoring function. Identifiers can be entered directly into the data structures of the object directory to assign CAN message identifiers to PDOs and SDOs; predefined identifiers can be used for simple system structures. Functionality of CBC with CANopen The CBC with CANopen supports only minimal boot-up as defined in communication profile CiaA DS-301 (Application Layer and Communication Profile). Up to four Receive PDOs and four Transmit PDOs are available. Parameters U711 to U714 can be programmed to select the mapping and communication properties of the Receive PDOs and parameters U715 to U718 to set the mapping and communication properties of the Transmit PDOs. Dynamic mapping, i.e. changing the assignment between the objects from the object directory and a PDO in operation, is not supported by the CBC. Transmission type and identifier of the communication objects (PDO, SDO, SYNC, EMCY and Node Guarding Object) can, however, be set via SDOs in operation. These settings override the settings of the CP parameters and are erased when the supply voltage is switched off. One server SDO is available. Another available communication object is the SYNC object. Using a synchronization message, the CAN master can synchronize the transmission and reception of PDOs for the whole network ("synchronous PDOs"). The EMCY object (Emergency Object) is implemented. This telegram is used to signal all faults and alarms generated in the SIMOTRAS HD system via the CAN Bus. The network functionality is monitored via the Node Guarding Telegram with which the master addresses the slaves cyclically. Each slave must individually respond to this telegram within a parameterizable time frame. If the master does not receive a response to its request, the communication link to the slave must be malfunctioning in some way (e.g. cable break, bus connector removed, etc.). If the slave does not receive a Node Guarding Telegram from the master within a particular time period (Life Time Event), it can assume that there is error in the communication link. The reaction of the slave to this event can be parameterized in parameter U719. Canopen modes Velocity Mode (speed control) and Profile Torque Mode (torque control), both in accordance with CiA DS-401 (Device Profile for Drives and Motion Control), and the manufacturerspecific Current Mode (current control) are implemented. 128 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Requirements for operating the CBC with CANopen To be able to operate the CBC with CANopen, the following two conditions must be fulfilled: - SIMOTRAS HD firmware, V1.9 and later - CBC firmware, V2.2 and later To be able to operate the individual CANopen profiles, certain parameter settings must be made in the SIMOTRAS HD. 7.10.3.3 Diagnostic tools: LED displays on the CBC (flashing LEDs indicate normal operation): Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Status of CBC Communication between SIMOTRAS HD and CBC Communication between CBC and CAN Bus LED Status red yellow green flashing flashing flashing flashing off on CBC waiting for commencement of initialization by SIMOTRAS HD flashing on off CBC waiting for end of initialization by SIMOTRAS HD flashing flashing off No PZD data exchange via CAN Bus flashing on on CBC defective Normal operation SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 129 Start-up 03.2015 Diagnostic parameter n732: Indices i001 to i032 apply to a CBC as the first communication board; indices i033 to i064 apply to a CBC as the second communication board. Value n732.001 or n732.033 0 Meaning No fault Fault F080/fault value 5 is displayed under fault conditions: Fault values for CAN layer 2: 1 2 5 7 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 35 36 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Incorrect address on CAN Bus (P918 / slave address) Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request (U711) Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request-Broadcast (U719) Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive (U712) Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Transmit (U713) PZD transmit length = 0 (U714) PZD transmit length > 16 , i.e. too long (U714) Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Broadcast (U716) Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Multicast (U717) Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Internode (U718) Invalid baud rate (U720) Incorrect CAN protocol type (U721) PKW Request-Broadcast (U719) without PKW Request (U711) Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PKW Broadcast Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Transmit Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Broadcast Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Multicast Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Internode Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Transmit Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Broadcast Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Transmit Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Broadcast Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Multicast Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Internode Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Broadcast Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Multicast Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive Internode Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Multicast and PZD Receive-Internode Fault values for CANopen: 1 23 35 257 258 273 274 513 514 529 530 769 770 785 786 1025 1026 1041 1042 1092 Incorrect bus address (P918) Invalid baud rate (U720) Incorrect CAN protocol type (U721) Invalid mapping of 1st Receive PDO (U711) Invalid transmission type of 1st Receive PDO (U711) Invalid mapping of 1st Transmit PDO (U715) Invalid transmission type of 1st Transmit PDO (U715) Invalid mapping of 2nd Receive PDO (U712) Invalid transmission type of 2nd Receive PDO (U712) Invalid mapping of 2nd Transmit PDO (U716) Invalid transmission type of 2nd Transmit PDO (U716) Invalid mapping of 3rd Receive PDO (U713) Invalid transmission type of 3rd Receive PDO (U713) Invalid mapping of 3rd Transmit PDO (U717) Invalid transmission type of 3rd Transmit PDO (U717) Invalid mapping of 4th Receive PDO (U714) Invalid transmission type of 4th Receive PDO (U714) Invalid mapping of 4th Transmit PDO (U718) Invalid transmission type of 4th Transmit PDO (U718) Invalid Life Time Event or incorrect basic unit parameterized (U719) n732.002 or n732.034 Number of correctly received PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON n732.003 or n732.035 Number of PZD telegrams lost since Power ON Telegrams will be lost if the CAN Bus master sends PZD telegrams faster than they can be processed by the slave. Irrelevant for CANopen Irrelevant for CANopen 130 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Value Meaning n732.004 or n732.036 Counter of Bus Off states since Power ON (alarm A084) n732.005 or n732.037 Counter of Error Warning states since Power ON (alarm A083) n732.006 or n732.038 Status of the CAN controller n732.007 or n732.039 Number of errors occurring during reception of PCD frames n732.008 or n732.040 Type of error occurring during reception of PCD frames n732.009 or n732.041 Value of error occurring during reception of PCD frames n732.010 or n732.042 Number of correctly transmitted PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON n732.011 or n732.043 Number of errors during transmission of PZD telegrams PZD telegrams cannot be transmitted when the bus is overloaded n732.012 or n732.044 Type of error occurring during transmission of PCD frames n732.013 or n732.045 Value of error occurring during transmission of PCD frames n732.014 or n732.046 Number of correctly processed PKW requests and responses since Power ON n732.015 or n732.047 Number of PKW request processing errors, e.g. owing to bus overload or missing responses from CUD1 (see below for error type) n732.016 or n732.048 Irrelevant for CANopen Irrelevant for CANopen Irrelevant for CANopen Irrelevant for CANopen 0 9 11 12 Type of PKW request processing error: No error Error transmitting the PKW response (while waiting for a free channel) Timeout waiting for the PKW response from the CUD1 Timeout waiting for a free channel (bus overload) Irrelevant for CANopen n732.017 or n732.049 Value of error occurring while processing PKW requests n732.018 or n732.050 Number of lost PKW requests n732.026 or n732.058 Software version of CBC (e.g. "12" = version 1.2, see also r060) n732.027 or n732.059 Software identifier (extended software version identifier, see also r065) n732.028 or n732.060 Date of generation of CBC software Day (H byte) and month (L byte) n732.029 or n732.061 Date of generation of CBC software Year Irrelevant for CANopen SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 131 Start-up 03.2015 Fault and alarm messages: Detailed information about fault messages can be found in Section 10. Fault F080 An error occurred during initialization of the CBC board, e.g. incorrect setting of a CB parameter, incorrect bus address or defective board. Fault F081 The heartbeat counter (counter on CBC) which is monitored by SIMOTRAS HD for "signs of life" from the board has not changed for at least 800 ms. Fault F082 Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel Alarm A083 (Error Warning) Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary board has exceeded the alarm limit. Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the errored telegrams contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be activated as a function of the telegram failure time set in U722. No fault message is generated for PKW data. Alarm A084 (Bus Off) Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary board has exceeded the fault limit. Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the errored telegrams contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be activated as a function of the telegram failure time set in U722. No fault message is generated for PKW data. 132 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.10.4 Procedure for starting up the SIMOLINK board (SLB) 1 Disconnect the power supply and insert adapter board (ADB) containing SLB in a location. Please remember to insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3. . 2 The SLBs must be connected up using fiber optics in such a manner as to avoid long distances between two units (max. 40m with plastic fiber optics and max. 300 m with glass fiber optics). Please also note that the transmitter (in center of SLB) on one unit is connected to the receiver (at corner of SLB) on the next unit. These connections must be made on all units until they are linked in a closed circuit. 3 The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for st st nd nd the 1 SIMOLINK board (1 SLB) and index 2 for the 2 SIMOLINK board (2 SLB) (the nd use of a 2 SLB is planned for future software versions): - U740 Node address (address 0 identifies the dispatcher) Node addresses must be assigned consecutively unless a SIMOLINK master is being used. - U741 Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated) - U742 Transmitter power The output of the fiber optic transmitter module can be set on each active bus node. - U744 Reserved for SLB selection (leave at 0 setting) - U745 Number of channels (telegrams) used per node The SLB with dispatcher function assigns the same number of channels to all nodes - U746 Traffic cycle time In contrast to converters of the SIMOVERT series, the line-synchronous SIMOTRAS HD converter cannot be synchronized with the cycle time of the SIMOLINK bus in order to minimize the data interchange time. The user data in the telegrams are exchanged cyclically (6x per mains period, i.e. every 3.3 ms at 50 HZ) between the SIMOTRAS HD converter and the SLB, irrespective of the cycle time on the bus (U746). A shorter cycle time still means, however, that the data are transferred more quickly after they have been made available by the converter or more up-to-date information for the converter. U745 and U746 together determine the number of addressable nodes (this can be checked with diagnostic parameter n748.4 in the converter with the dispatcher board). No. of addressable nodes = ( U746[s] + 3.18s 1 - 2 ) 6.36s U745 The number of nodes serves only to check whether data can be exchanged with the values set in U745 and U746. These parameters must otherwise be corrected. A maximum of 201 nodes (dispatcher and 200 transceivers) can be connected to the SIMOLINK bus. Node addresses 201 to 255 are reserved for special telegrams and others. Consequently, with 8 channels per node, a bus cycle can be a maximum of 6.4 ms in duration. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 133 Start-up 03.2015 4 Process data are connected to the SIMOLINK board through assignment of the corresponding connectors and/or binectors to telegram addresses and channel numbers (see Section 8, Sheet Z122). Example: U749.01 = 0.2 means that the values of node 0 / channel 2 are read as word1 (K7001) and word2 (K7002) U740.01 = 1 U751.01 = 32 U751.02 = 33 means that node 1 in channel 0 transmits status word 1 (K0032) as word1 and status word 2 (K0033) as word2 Changes to the settings of the receive data parameters do not take effect until the electronics power supply is switched on again. Note Changing parameters U740, U745, U746 and U749 causes re-initialization, resulting in an interruption in communication with all drives linked to the SIMOLINK bus SIMOLINK (Siemens Motion Link) is a digital, serial data transmission protocol which uses fiber optics as a transmission medium. The SIMOLINK drive link has been developed to allow a fast, cyclic exchange of process data (control information, setpoints, status information and actual values) via a closed ring bus. Parameter data cannot be transferred via SIMOLINK. SIMOLINK consists of the following components: SIMOLINK Master Active bus node as interface to higher-level automation systems (e.g. SIMATIC M7 or SIMADYN) SIMOLINK Board (SLB) Active bus node as interface for drives on SIMOLINK SIMOLINK Switch Passive bus node with switching function between two SIMOLINK ring busses. The separating filter and concentrator are identical in terms of hardware, but perform different functions. Separating filters are used to reverse the signal flow, e.g. in order to link the nodes on one ring bus to another ring bus after the failure of their master. Concentrators allow ring segments to be star-connected to form a complete ring. Fiber optic cables Transmission medium between the SIMOLINK nodes. Glass or plastic fiber optic cables can be used. The permissible maximum distances between adjacent nodes in the ring differs depending on the type of fiber optic used (plastic: max 40m, glass: max. 300m). SIMOLINK is a closed fiber optic ring. One of the nodes on the bus has a dispatcher function (SIMOLINK master or SLB parameterized as the dispatcher). This dispatcher node is identified by node address 0 and controls communication on the bus. Using SYNC telegrams, it supplies the common system clock cycle for all nodes and sends telegrams in ascending sequence of telegram addresses and channel numbers in the task table. The task table contains all telegrams which are transmitted cyclically in normal data interchange. When an SLB is employed as the dispatcher, the task table is configured solely on the basis of drive parameters. The following restrictions apply as compared to the use of a SIMOLINK master as the dispatcher: Flexible address lists with gaps in address sequence are not allowed on the bus. Addresses are assigned consecutively to the nodes, starting with address 0. The number of telegrams (channels) used per node is identical for all nodes. It is not possible to use application-specific special data. All other active bus nodes apart from the dispatcher are transceivers. These simply forward telegrams (with updated contents in some cases) along the bus. 134 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Active bus nodes receive and/or send telegrams (SIMOLINK master, dispatcher, transceivers). Passive bus nodes simply forward received telegrams along the bus without changing their contents (separating filters, concentrators). A separate address is assigned to each active bus node; the dispatcher is always assigned node address 0. A maximum of 8 telegrams can be transferred per active node. The number of telegrams used per node is a parameterizable quantity. Telegrams are identified by the node address and distinguished by their channel number of between 0 and 7, with 2 data words transferred as user data in each telegram. The first channel number starts with 0 and is counted in ascending sequence. Telegram Word0 Word1 Application Flags Channel number Node address The assignment between connector values to be transferred and individual telegrams and channels is also parameterized (see Section 8, Sheet Z122). Transmission of double-word connectors: The values of double-word connectors can be transmitted in the first four channels (selected with U749.01 to U749.04 in the receive direction or with U751.01 to U751.08 in the transmission direction). In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K7001 and K7002 to KK7031). These double-word connectors can be connected to other function blocks in the usual way. For details of how to connect with double-word connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection, " The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors ". In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word connector at two contiguous indices of selection parameter U751. Examples: KK9498 U751 (0) 9498 KK9498 9498 K0401 401 K0402 402 KK9498 U751 (0) 9498 KK9499 9499 K0401 401 K0402 402 .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 L-Word H-Word 2x the same KK - number Word Word H-Word H-Word 2 different KKs ! Word Word Apart from these data, a SIMOLINK master can also send special telegrams with applicationspecific data (addresses 201 to 204 and channel number 0). An SLB as dispatcher does not support these special telegrams. If a transceiver stops receiving telegrams due to an interruption, it automatically transmits special telegram "Time Out". The transmission rate is 11 Mbits/s. The data telegrams are transmitted in direct succession, followed by a SYNC telegram and a pause telegram, within one bus cycle. Transferring the data telegrams without pauses ensures a higher data throughput. At a data transmission rate of 11 Mbit/s, the transmission time for one telegram is 6.36s. Bus cycle ... SYNC Break Data telegrams SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 135 Start-up 03.2015 The assignment of telegrams to nodes is determined by the type of SIMOLINK application, i.e. peer-to-peer functionality or master-slave functionality. When an SLB is configured as the dispatcher, only the peer-to-peer functionality is available. Peer-to-peer functionality In this mode, there is no defined logical master for distributing information. The drives have equal status in logical terms and exchange data with one another via the ring bus. One node (SLB) specifies the bus cycle in its dispatcher role to keep the transmission alive. All nodes receive and/or send user data. Dispatcher and transceivers can read any telegram, but may only write information in the telegrams specifically assigned to them (node address = address in telegram). Master-slave functionality A logical master (e.g. SIMATIC) supplies all nodes with information on the one hand and, on the other, specifies the bus clock cycle (dispatcher function). All other nodes behave as described above under peer-to-peer functionality, i.e. they receive and/or send user data, but are only permitted to read or write telegrams containing their address. In contrast to peer-to-peer functionality, the restrictions described above (no gaps in address sequence, uniform number of used channels, no special data) do not apply. The master has its own 8 channels for transferring data, but can also use telegrams with the address and channel numbers of the transceivers for its data transmissions. Note An external 24V power supply to the SIMOLINK modules ensures that communication with the other bus nodes continues if a device fails. However, this power supply does not prevent the short interruption in communication when the device is switched on again when establishing communication is forced. 136 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.10.5 Procedure for starting up expansion boards (EB1 and EB2) 1 Remove connector X480 from the EB1 board for safety reasons. A short circuit could otherwise occur should the signal direction of the bidirectional binary inputs/outputs be incorrectly parameterized (see also point 3). This risk of short circuits does not exist on EB2 boards. 2 The analog inputs on the EB1 can be used either as current or voltage inputs, the mode being selected by setting jumpers (X486, X487, X488) appropriately (see Function Diagrams, Section 8). The same applies to EB2 (X498); on this board, the analog output can also be configured as a current or voltage source (X499). 3 Parameterize the desired functions for the inputs and outputs (see Function Diagrams, Section 8). If you wish to operate a bidirectional binary input/output on an EB1 as an input, please note that the output circuit must be deactivated in the corresponding parameter (e.g. U769.01=0). A short circuit will otherwise occur if the signal levels of the external input and output signals are opposed. Switch off the device. 4 With the power supply disconnected, insert the adapter board with expansion board in a location. Please remember to insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3. 5 EB1 boards only: Plug connector X480 back into board. Expansion boards EB1 and EB2 expand the range of terminals on the basic converter. A total of 2 EB1 boards and 2 EB2 boards may be installed in one SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70. The EB1 and/or EB2 are plugged into adapter (carrier) boards (ADB). 2 boards may be mounted on each ADB. The EB1 provides the following expansion terminals: 3 binary inputs 4 bidirectional binary inputs/outputs 1 analog input for differential signal (current or voltage input) 2 analog inputs (single ended), can also be used as binary inputs 2 analog outputs 1 connector for external 24 V voltage supply to binary outputs The EB2 provides the following expansion terminals: 2 binary inputs 1 connector for external 24 V voltage supply to binary outputs 1 relay output with changeover contacts 3 relay outputs with NO contacts 1 analog input for differential signal (current or voltage input) 1 analog output (current or voltage output) For further details, see Section 8, function diagrams for expansion boards EB1 and EB2. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 137 Start-up 03.2015 7.10.6 Procedure for starting up the pulse encoder board (SBP) 1 Set the switches (for encoder supply and bus terminating resistors) on the SBP board: If one pulse encoder is connected to one SBP board, then the three switches for bus terminating resistors must be switched to ON. If one pulse encoder is connected to several SBP boards, then the three switches for bus terminating resistors must be switched to ON only on the last SBP. The fourth switch connects and disconnects the supply voltage for the encoder. (Caution: Switch open means supply voltage connected) 2 Disconnect power supply and insert adapter with board into location. Please remember to insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3. 3 Connect the terminals on strips X400, X401 on the pulse encoder board to the appropriate terminals on the encoder (for circuit example, refer to operating instructions for pulse encoder board). When connecting unipolar signals, one earth connection for all signals on terminal 75 (CTRL-) is sufficient. However, with very long cables or where there are high levels of radiated noise, it is advisable to bridge terminals 69, 71 and 75 (A-, B- and CTRL-) and connect them to the encoder ground. The zero track of the pulse encoder is not evaluated by SIMOTRAS HD and need not therefore be connected. The terminals designated coarse pulse1, coarse pulse2 and fine pulse2 can be used as digital inputs for any function (see Function Diagrams in Section 8, Sheet Z120) 4 Please make the following settings: - U790 Voltage level of inputs B 0: HTL unipolar C 1: TTL unipolar D 2: HTL differential input E 3: TTL/RS422 differential input - U791 Level of encoder supply F 0: 5V voltage supply G 1: 15V voltage supply - U792 - U793 Pulse encoder resolution Type of pulse encoder H 0: Encoder with A/B track (two tracks displaced by 90 degrees) I 1: Encoder with separate forward and reverse track - U794 Reference speed (For further details, see Section 11, description of parameters U790- U794) The pulse encoder board SBP (Sensor Board Pulse) supports commercially available pulse encoders with pulse frequencies up to 410kHz. The voltage level of the encoder signals can be parameterized. TTL or HTL level pulses, bipolar or unipolar, can be used. A voltage supply for 5V and 15V encoders is provided on the board. Evaluation of a temperature sensor is not supported on SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 converters. 138 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up 7.10.7 Structure of request/response telegrams There is no basic difference between the useful data area in the request and response telegrams for PROFIBUS and CAN Bus. There are differences, for example, in the protocol frame and in the sequence in which H and L bytes are transmitted. The structures shown here are those of a SIMOTRAS HD, i.e. the values are displayed in the same way as they would be for parameters n733 and n735, for example. The structure of the protocol frame and the transmission sequence of bytes are therefore described where necessary in the sections containing the start-up description for the appropriate board. Each request and each response basically comprises three areas apart from the telegram frame with header and trailer: Header Parameter identifier PKE Index IND Parameter value PWE Trailer The parameter identifier (PKE) contains a request or response identifier (i.e. type of request or response) and the number of the addressed parameter. The spontaneous signaling bit SPM (bit11) is not used on the SIMOTRAS HD master. Header Task/ response identifier Parameter identifier PKE SPM Index IND Parameter value PWE Trailer Parameter number (PNU) Bits 0 to 10 contain the number of the parameter specified in the request. Owing to the length restriction of the bit field (11 bits), a parameter number (PNU) higher than 1999 must be converted to another code for use in the parameter identifier; the Page Select Bit in the index is used for this purpose: Parameter area Basic unit Technology board Displayed number Pxxx, rxxx Uxxx, nxxx Hxxx, dxxx Lxxx, cxxx Input on OP1S 0 - 999 2000 - 2999 1000 - 1999 3000 - 3999 PNU in parameter identifier 0 - 999 0 - 999 1000 - 1999 1000 - 1999 Page Select Bit (index bit 15) 0 1 0 1 In the case of a request, for example, which specifies parameter U280 (2280), therefore, PNU = 280 must be entered in the parameter identifier and bit 15 set in the index. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 139 Start-up 03.2015 Bits 12 to 15 contain the request identifier or the associated response identifier as shown in the following list: Request identifier Meaning Response identifier 0 No request 0 1 Request parameter value (word or double word) 1 or 2 2 Modify parameter value (word) 1 3 Modify parameter value (double word) 2 4 Request descriptive element 3 5 Reserved - 6 Request parameter value (array) (word or double word) 4 or 5 7 Modify parameter value (array - word) 4 8 Modify parameter value (array-double word) 5 9 Request number of array elements 6 10 Reserved - 11 Modify parameter value (array-double word) and store in EEPROM 5 12 Modify parameter value (array-word) and store in EEPROM 4 13 Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM 2 14 Modify parameter value (word) and store in EEPROM 1 15 Request text 15 positive negative 7 or 8 If the drive has been unable to process the request, it does not return the associated response identifier, but error identifier 7 (or 8) instead. In this case, an error code defining the error in more detail as shown in the following list is returned as a parameter value: Error code 140 Meaning 0 Illegal parameter number (PNU) No PNU specified 1 Parameter value cannot be modified Visualization parameter 2 Lower or upper value limit violated 3 Faulty subindex 4 Parameter is not indexed (no array) 5 Incorrect data type 6 Parameter value can only be reset 7 Descriptive element cannot be modified 8 PPO Write (acc. to "Information Report") is not available 9 Parameter description is not available 10 Incorrect access level 11 No parameterizing enable (P927) 12 Keyword missing 13 Text cannot be read cyclically 15 No text 16 PPO Write missing 17 Incorrect operating state 19 Value cannot be read cyclically 101 Parameter number currently deactivated 102 Channel not wide enough Key parameter P051 incorrectly set SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Start-up Error code Meaning 103 PKW number incorrect Applies only to serial interfaces 104 Illegal parameter value Applies to BiCo selection parameters 105 Indexed parameter 106 Request not implemented in drive 107 Text cannot be modified 108 Incorrect number of parameter values Applies to "Change all indices" request The index IND contains a "0" for non-indexed parameters; a 8-bit long index value is entered (in the low-order byte) for indexed parameters. Bit 15 (Page Select bit) has a special function. This is used to identify parameter numbers higher than 1999 (see above for details of recoding parameter numbers). Exception: In the case of cyclical PROFIBUS services, the L and H byte sequence is reversed (see "Start-up of PROFIBUS boards"). Header Parameter identifier PKE Bit 15 Index IND Index, H byte Parameter value PWE Trailer Index, L byte An index value of 255 means that the request applies to all indices of the relevant parameter. In the case of a modification request, the parameter values for all indices of the parameter must be transferred. Conversely, the drive supplies all index values in its response to a read request. The parameter value PWE is treated like a double word (PWE1 and PWE2). The high word is set to 0 when a single word is transferred. Header Parameter identifier PKE Index IND PWE1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Parameter value PWE Trailer PWE2 141 Start-up 03.2015 7.10.8 Transmission of double-word connectors for technology and communication modules In the receive direction, the values of two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a single double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K3002 and K3003 to KK3032). These double-word connectors can themselves be connected to other function blocks in the usual way. For details of how to connect double-word connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection, " The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors ". In the transmit direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word connector in two contiguous indices of the selection parameter. Example: U734 K0032 32 KK9498 9498 KK9498 9498 K0401 401 U734 K0032 142 32 KK9498 9498 KK9499 9499 K0401 401 .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 Word L-Word H-Word 2x the same KK - number Word Word H-Word H-Word 2 different KKs ! Word SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 8 Function diagrams Function diagrams General Key to symbols Basic functions G101 Hardware configuration Inputs and outputs G110 Binary inputs terminals 36 to 39 (CUD1) G111 Binary inputs terminals 40 to 43 (CUD2) G112 Binary outputs terminals 46/47 and 48/54 (CUD1) Binary outputs terminals 50/51 and 52/53 (CUD2) Relay output terminals 109/110 G113 Analog inputs terminals 4/5, 6/7 (CUD1), and 103/104 G114 Analog inputs terminals 8/9 and 10/11 (CUD2) G115 Analog outputs terminals 12/13, 14/15, and 16/17 (CUD1) G116 Analog outputs terminals 18/19 and 20/21 (CUD2) G117 Control inputs terminals 71 to 75 G118 Control inputs terminals 76 to 79 G119 Control outputs terminals 81 to 94 Setpoint generation G120 Fixed values Fixed control bits Constant fixed values and control bits G121 Connector and binector displays G124 Connector selector switch G125 Evaluation of a 4-step master switch G126 Motorized potentiometer G127 Fixed setpoint G128 Oscillation / square-wave generator G129 Inching setpoint G130 Crawling setpoint / terminal 37 G135 Setpoint processing G136 Ramp-function generator (1) G137 Ramp-function generator (2) Internal control G140 Brake control Actual speed value G145 Pulse generator evaluation Controllers G150 Starting pulse - speed controller G151 Speed controller (1) G152 Speed controller (2) G153 Friction compensation Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) G160 Torque limitation, speed limit controller G161 Current limitation G162 Closed-loop current control G163 Auto-reversing stage, gating unit Serial interfaces G169 Serial interfaces: connector-type converters G170 USS interface 1 (PMU) G171 USS interface 2 (CUD1) G172 USS interface 3 (CUD2) G173 Peer-to-peer interface 2 (CUD1) G174 Peer-to-peer interface 3 (CUD2) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 143 Function diagrams 03.2015 Program structure G175 Data sets Control words, status words G180 Control word 1 G181 Control word 2 G182 Status word 1 G183 Status word 2 Miscellaneous G185 Temperature sensor inputs (CUD2) G186 Binary inputs, terminals 211 to 214 (CUD2) G187 Messages (1) G188 Messages (2) G189 Fault memory G195 Paralleling interface Freely assignable function blocks (technology software S00) B100 Table of contents B101 Startup of the freely assignable function blocks Monitoring B110 Voltage monitor for electronics power supply Fixed values B110 100 Fixed values Alarm, fault messages B115 32 Fault message triggers 8 Alarm message triggers Connector / binector converters B120 3 Connector / binector converters B121 3 Binector / connector converters Mathematical functions B125 15 Adders / subtractors 4 Sign inverters 2 Switchable sign inverters B130 12 Multipliers B131 6 Dividers 3 High-resolution multipliers / dividers B135 4 Absolute-value generators with filter Limiters, limit-value monitors B134 3 Limiters B135 3 Limiters B136 3 Limit-value monitors with filter B137 4 Limit-value monitors without filter B138 3 Limit-value monitors without filter Processing of connectors B139 4 Averagers B140 4 Maximum selections 4 Minimum selections B145 2 Tracking / storage elements 2 Connector memories B150 10 Connector changeover switches High-resolution blocks B151 2 limit-value monitors (for double connectors) 2 connector-type converters 2 adders/subtractors (for double connectors) 144 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function diagrams Position/positional deviation acquisition, Root extractor B152 1 Position/positional deviation acquisition B153 1 Root extractor Control elements B155 3 Integrators 3 DT1 elements B156 4 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) B157 4 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) B158 2 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) Characteristics B160 9 Characteristic blocks B161 3 Dead zones 1 Setpoint branching Ramp-function generator B165 1 Simple ramp-function generator Controllers B170 1 Technology controller B180... 10 PI controllers B189 Velocity / speed calculators, variable torque B190 1 Velocity / speed calculator 1 Speed / velocity calculator B191 1 Calculation variable inertia Multiplexers for connectors B195 3 Multiplexer Counter B196 1 16-bit software counter Logical functions B200 2 Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 B205 28 AND elements with 3 inputs each B206 20 OR elements with 3 inputs each 4 EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each B207 16 Inverters 12 NAND elements with 3 inputs each B210 14 RS flipflops B211 4 D flipflops B215 6 Timers (0.000...60.000s) B216 4 Timers (0.00...600.00s) 5 Binary signal selector switches SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 145 Function diagrams 03.2015 Optional supplementary boards Z100 Z110 Z111 Z112 Z113 Z114 Z115 Z116 Z117 Z118 Z119 Z120 Z121 Z122 Z123 Z124 Z130 Z131 Z135 Z136 Z140 Z141 Z145 Z146 Z150 Z151 Z155 Z156 Table of contents st Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1 communications board (CB) nd Data exchange with the 2 communications board (CB) st 1 EB1: Analog inputs st 1 EB1: Analog outputs st 1 EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs nd 2 EB1: Analog inputs nd 2 EB1: Analog outputs nd 2 EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs st 1 EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs nd 2 EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs SBP pulse encoder evaluation SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting OP1S operator panel Interfaces: connector-type converters SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs Drive-specific (crane) control (see also Section 6.1) K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 K18 146 Binary inputs, terminals 36 to 39 Control inputs terminals 71 to 75 Control inputs terminals 76 to 79 Control word 1 Control word 2 Transmit data Control outputs Enable, overload lifting gear Travel command, electrical stop, overtemperature Brake control Enable brake, enable ramp-function generator, starting aid limit switch Setpoint processing Setpoint selection Setpoint reduction on reaching a pre-limit switch Ramp-down monitoring Brake monitoring Fault acknowledgement, high-speed step Limit-value monitor SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P046 (0) B B B B P697.B (1) B P818 (1) B 6 B0161 K0040 B0202 KK9498 K0401 r045.02 .01 .02 .03 .04 P462.F(10,00s) 0,01...300,00s Ramp-up time (see also Section 9.1) 3 Selection of binectors via "indexed" parameter Factory setting in parentheses Setting range = all binector numbers Selected binectors for each index can be specified Selection of a binector Factory setting in parentheses ".B" = Parameter in BICO data set Setting range = all binary numbers Selected binector can be specified in symbol Selection of a binector Factory setting in parentheses Setting range = all binector numbers Selected binector can be specified in symbol Identifier for a freely assignable function block (Number of function block) Binector assigned to a fixed quantity (i.e. not optional) Connector assigned to a fixed quantity (i.e. not optional) Binector (freely connectable binary signal) Double-word connector (freely connectable 32-bit value) Connector (freely connectable 16-bit value) Display parameter Parameter number = r045 .02 = index 2 of parameter Setting parameter Factory setting in parentheses ".F"= parameter in a function parameter set 0.00...300.00s = setting range Key to symbols 2 4 [G152.1] P510 (0) KK FS .01 141 .02 0 x x x KK9498 K0401 KK9498 7 8 P044 K 9498 U181 KK 401 U181 (0) KK9498 y y y y (Word) = HIGH word of x (KK9498) y - LOW word = 0 y - HIGH word = x (K0401) y - LOW word = LOW word of x (KK9498) y - HIGH word = HIGH word of x (KK9498) - 000 - Reference to another sheet in function diagrams, destination symbol [Sheet.Column] Selection of a double-word connector Factory setting in parentheses Setting range = all connector numbers Selected connector can be specified in symbol Selection of connectors via "indexed" parameter Factory settings differ for each index Setting range = all connector numbers Selected connectors for each index can be specified in symbol Selection of connectors via "indexed" parameter Factory setting in parentheses Setting range = all connector numbers Selected connectors for each index can be specified in symbol Selection of a connector Factory setting in parentheses Setting range = all binector numbers Selected connector can be specified in symbol Selection of binectors via "indexed" parameter Factory settings differ for each index Setting range = all binector numbers Selected binectors for each index can be specified in symbol 6 Selection of double-word connectors: K P601 K K P606 (9) K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 FS .01 500 .02 510 .03 1 P510 (2) K U320 B B B 5 03.2015 Function diagrams Key to symbols 147 148 r069 r070 r071 r072 MLFB (order number) Converter rated supply voltage Converter rated current P078 Reduction of converter rated supply voltage Serial number P077 Total thermal reduction factor r068 P076 Reduction of converter rated current Options according to rating plate P075 Control word for power section Definition of SIMOTRAS power section Hardware configuration 2 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 U910.002 U910.003 U910.004 U910.005 Select / deselect slots 4 Creation date of software .001 Year .002 Month .003 Day .004 Hour .005 Minute r061 .001 CUD .002 Slot D .003 Slot E .004 Slot F .005 Slot G r060 r064.001 r064.005 r064.004 Software version r063.001 r063.005 r063.004 r064.003 7 Board in location 1 Board in slot G Board in slot F Board in slot E Board in slot D Software .001 Converter firmware .002 Boot sector r062 Checksum r065.001 r065.005 r065.004 r065.003 r065.002 r064.002 r063.002 r063.003 Software identifiers Board compatibility 6 Board code 5 8 1 - G101 - E D F G 2 3 Arrangement of board locations 1 to 3 and slots D to G in electronics box CUDx 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Basic functions Sheets G100 to G200 Sheet G101 Hardware configuration SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 CUD1 Binary inputs (1) 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 39 38 37 36 35 34 X171 3 M M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V P24_S 4 1 1 1 1 K0020 r010 5 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 B0017 IRES (to sheet "Pulse encoder evaluation") [G145.2] B0016 B0015 Enable operation (to sheet "Control word 1") [G180.2] B0014 B0013 36 214 213 212 211 Switch-on/Shutdown (to Sheet "Crawling setpoint / Terminal 37") [G130.1] B0012 B0011 B0010 7 Display of terminal states on 7-segment display 6 - G110 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G110 Binary inputs terminals 36 to 39 149 150 2 CUD2 Binary inputs (2) 1 43 42 41 40 45 44 X163 3 M M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V P24_S 4 1 1 1 1 [G145.2] 6 B0025 B0024 B0023 B0022 B0021 B0020 B0019 B0018 [K13.1] [K13.1] Enable counter for zero markers (to sheet "Pulse encoder evaluation") Terminal states shown in 7 segment display (see block diagram "Binary inputs (1)" 5 7 - G111 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G111 Binary inputs terminals 40 to 43 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P774 (0) B P773 (0) B CUD2 CUD1 P772 (0) B P771 (252) B Binary outputs 1 T ON/OFF delay T 1 0 r011 4 <1> <1> <1> <1> K0021 <1> output transistor is conductive when log. "1": Inverting 1 P770.04 (0) 1 P778 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 1 0 Inverting T ON/OFF delay T P770.03 (0) 1 0 P777 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 1 Inverting T ON/OFF delay T P770.02 (0) 1 P776 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 1 0 Inverting T U619.B(107) B P770.01 (0) 3 ON/OFF delay T P775 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 2 H109 5 P24 "No fault" signal M M M M 6 53 52 51 50 X163 54 48 47 46 X171 110 109 X2_4 8 109 110 52 48 46 - G112 - 50 r011 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G112 Binary outputs terminals 46/47, 48/54, 50/51 and 52/53 Relay output terminals 109/110 151 152 104 103 XT u 10V i 20mA 7 6 Analog select input 1 X174 Analog input main actual value CUD1 4 i 20mA 5 PowerInterface u 10V Analog select input main setpoint CUD1 X174 M 2 1 0 8 - 270V 2 1 0 2 2 1 0 Signal type P710 (0) D D A D 100% 100% 100% Open circuit (i 2mA) K0010 * 100% P701 Normalization Offset P701.F(100,0) P702 (0,00) 0 1 2 Open circuit (i 2mA) K0014 * 100% P711 Normalization Offset P711.F(100,0) P712 (0,00) K0012 Offset P742 (0,00) 1 = "Fault F047" B0051 5 -1 -1 P713 (0) -1 -1 P743 (0) -1 -1 P703 (0) 0% 0% 0% Signal type Normalization Offset 4 1 = "Fault F046" B0050 Resolution P717 (12Bit) A 10V =100% 20mA=100% HardwareSmoothing 1ms 1ms Signal type P700 (0) A 10V =100% 20mA=100% HardwareSmoothing 1ms Resolution P707 (12Bit) Kxxxx -100% ... +100% 0 ... +100% 0 ... +100% I ---20...+20mA 4 ... 20mA U 3 -10V ... +10V ----- Normalization P741.F (60,00) 2 1 0 Analog inputs (1) 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 1 0 -1 1 0 1 0 Sign reversal -1 P714 (0) B Sign reversal P744 (0) B Sign reversal -1 P704 (0) B 6 Filtering Filter time [ms] P715 (0) Filtering Filter time [ms] P745 (0) Filtering Filter time [ms] P705 (0) 0% P716 (1) B 0% P746 (1) B 0% P706 (1) B 7 r003 r002 Switch in analog input 1 0 Switch in analog input 1 0 Switch in analog input 1 0 r001 K0011 K0015 [G151.1] K0013 [K12.2] - G113 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G113 Analog inputs terminals 4/5, 6/7, and 103/104 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 9 u 10V 11 10 Analog select input 3 u 10V 8 Analog select input 2 X164 CUD2 (to ground) Analog inputs (2) 1 2 Hardwaresmoothing 1ms 10V = 100% Hardwaresmoothing 1ms 10V = 100% 3 A A D D K0018 * 100% P731 Normalization Offset P731.F(100,0) P732 (0,00) K0016 * 100% P721 Normalization Offset P721.F(100,0) P722 (0,00) 4 -1 -1 P733 (0) -1 -1 P723 (0) 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 1 0 1 0 Sign reversal -1 P734 (0) B Sign reversal -1 P724 (0) B 6 Filtering Filter time [ms] P735 (0) Filtering Filter time [ms] P725 (0) 0% P736 (1) B 0% P726 (1) B 7 Switch in analog input 1 0 Switch in analog input 1 0 r005 r004 - G114 - K0019 K0017 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G114 Analog inputs terminals 8/9 and 10/11 153 154 2 (nact) P755 (167) K [G152.3] (nset) 2 -1 2 -1 0 1 3 -1 P756 (0) 0 1 3 -1 P751 (0) Analog outputs (1) P750 (170) K [G136.8] 1 3 Filter time (0...10000ms) P757 (0) Filter time (0...10000ms) P752 (0) r007 r006 internal actual current value 4 x x 0 1 2 3 K0027 x y [V] = * P758 100% Normalization -200,00...+199,99V P758 (10,00) K0026 x y [V] = * P753 100% Normalization -200,00...+199,99V P753 (10,00) -1 -1 P749 (0) 5 y y Offset -10,00...+10,00V P759 (0,00) Offset -10,00...+10,00V P754 (0,00) D D 1ms A A 6 M M M 17 16 15 14 13 12 Uout [V] = Uout [V] = X175 7 * Normalization [V] + Offset [V] 10V = 200% Converter rated current - G115 - * Normalization [V] + Offset [V] Analog output 2 100% K0027 Analog output 1 100% K0026 Iact 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G115 Analog outputs terminals 12/13, 14/15, and 16/17 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P765 (0) K P760 (0) K CUD2 2 -1 2 -1 0 1 3 -1 P766 (0) 0 1 3 -1 P761 (0) Analog outputs (2) 2 3 Filter time (0...10000ms) P767 (0) Filter time (0...10000ms) P762 (0) r009 r008 4 x x x * P763 100% K0029 y [V] = x * P768 100% Normalization -200,00...+199,99V P768 (10,00) K0028 y [V] = Normalization -200,00...+199,99V P763 (10,00) 5 y y Offset -10,00...+10,00V P769 (0,00) Offset -10,00...+10,00V P764 (0,00) D D A A 6 M M 21 20 19 18 Uout [V] = Uout [V] = X164 7 * normalization [V] + offset [V] - G116 - * normalization [V] + offset [V] Analog output 4 100% K0029 Analog output 3 100% K0028 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G116 Analog outputs terminals 18/19 and 20/21 155 156 2 L1S AC 230V Control inputs (1) 1 LS L2S 75 74 73 72 71 X1 3 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC H75 H74 H73 H72 4 K0500 n600 1 1 1 1 5 B0507 B0506 B0505 B0504 B0503 B0502 B0501 B0500 7 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display 6 72 - G117 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G117 Control inputs terminals 71 to 75 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 Control inputs (2) 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 79 78 77 76 X1 3 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC H79 H78 H77 H76 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display: see Sheet "Control inputs (1)" (G117) 4 1 1 1 1 5 B0515 B0514 B0513 B0512 B0511 B0510 B0509 B0508 6 7 - G118 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G118 Control inputs terminals 76 to 79 157 158 K0167 nact 2 Voltage in power section Filter time U627.F(0) [G136.3] K0192 x & 1 0 0 1 1 x0 x0 B0171 B0170 Ready 0 1 U633.F (5,0) (0,1...10,0%) n-ist M II [G163.6] M II [G163.6] U632.F (1,0) (0,0...100,0%) MI [G163.6] [G163.6] MI n-ist U621.B(107) B & 1 & 1 U623.B(9361) B U622.B(9367) [K17.7] B 3 U631.F (5,0) (0,1...10,0%) 0 1 U630.F (-1,0) (0,0...-100,0%) Control outputs Operating state o7 1 1 H87 H85 1 H83 1 H81 1 4 B0527 B0526 B0525 B0524 B0523 B0522 B0521 B0520 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 S1 Rotor contactor stage 1 X2_2 Brake contactor Acknowledgement signal X2_3 "No fault" signal X2_4 5 U639.F (5,0) (0,1...50,0%) 0 1 U638.F (90,0) (10,0...100,0%) U637.F (5,0) (0,1...50,0%) 0 1 U636.F (75,0) (10,0...100,0%) U635.F (5,0) (0,1...50,0%) 0 1 U634.F (50,0) (10,0...100,0%) 6 8 & & & H93 1 H91 1 H89 1 93 94 89 90 B0533 B0532 B0531 B0530 B0529 B0528 91 92 94 93 92 91 90 89 87 88 81 82 - G119 - Rotor contactor stage 4 S4 Rotor contactor stage 3 S3 X2_1 Rotor contactor stage 2 S2 X2_2 85 83 86 84 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display (parameter n620) The logical states of the control outputs are also output at connector K501 and display parameter n620. 7 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G119 Control outputs terminals 81 to 94 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P411.F (0,00) P410.F (0,00) P409.F (0,00) P408.F (0,00) P407.F (0,00) P406.F (0,00) P405.F (0,00) P404.F (0,00) P403.F (0,00) P402.F (0,00) K0411 K0410 K0409 K0408 K0407 K0406 K0405 K0404 K0403 K0402 K0401 P416.F (0) P415.F (0) P414.F (0) P413.F (0) K0416 K0415 K0414 K0413 K0412 setting range -32768 to +32767 P412.F (0) 5 fixed values 3 setting range -199.99 to +199.99% 2 11 fixed values P401.F (0,00) 1 4 P428.F (0) P427.F (0) P426.F (0) P425.F (0) P424.F (0) P423.F (0) P422.F (0) B0428 B0427 B0426 B0425 B0424 B0423 B0422 B0421 8 fixed control bits P421.F (0) 5 6 8 1 0 -150,00% -50,00 % 150,00 % 50,00 % -200,00% -100,00 % 200,00 % 100,00 % 0,00 % B0001 B0000 K0008 K0007 K0006 K0005 K0004 K0003 K0002 K0001 K0000 - G120 - Constant fixed values and control bits 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G120 Fixed values, fixed control bits, constant fixed values and control bits 159 1 160 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 r043.02 r043.07 r043.06 r043.05 r043.04 r043.03 3 P042 (0) K K .01 .02 300 ms 300 ms Anzeige in % (-200,0 bis 199,9 %) r041.02 r041.01 High-resoluion connecor displays wih filering K K K K P044 (0) K K K r043.01 Anzeige in % (-200,0 bis 199,9 %) Connecor displays 2 5 K K U044 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 n045.05 P046 (0) B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 7 K K U046 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 n047.05 n047.04 n047.03 n047.02 n047.01 Anzeige hexadezimal (0000h bis FFFFh) 6 r045.04 r045.03 r045.02 r045.01 Binecor displays n045.04 n045.03 n045.02 n045.01 Anzeige dezimal (-32768 bis 32767) 4 - G121 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G121 Connector and binector displays SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function diagrams K0231 1 0 1 0 1 1 .03 .01 .02 P457 (0) K K K .01 .02 P458 (0) B B K .01 .02 P455 (0) K K .03 .01 .02 P456 (0) B B Connector selector switch 1 2 3 4 0 5 0 K0230 6 7 8 - G124- Sheet G124 Connector selector switch SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 161 162 2 3 SR U660 (9063) B Setpoint stage S4 Travel command 1 B SL S4 U664 (9083) B Setpoint stage S3 U661 (9064) S3 U663 (20) B Setpoint stage S2 Travel command 2 S2 U662 (18) B 4 5 0 n1 n2 n3 n4 U665 SL / SR e.g. 20% Slow S2 Medium e.g. 50% U666 Output signal = K510 Speed setpoint in 4 stages 0 1 S3 0 1 U667 Fast e.g. 80% S4 0 1 0% 0 1 =1 -1 6 0 1 Input signals = Control commands from master switch = Activation of setpoint stages Full e.g. 100% U668 U665(10,00%) U666(25,00%) U667(40,00%) U668(100,00%) Evaluation of a 4-stage master switch 1 Setpoint of 4-stage master switch K0510 7 - G125 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G125 Evaluation of a 4-step master switch SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Increase motorized potentiometer from control word 1 Bit13 [G180.6] Decrease motorized potentiometer from control word1 Bit14 [G180.6] (Capacitor symbolizes value memory) 1 0 1 P469.F(-100,00%) P468.F(+100,00%) (-199,99...+199,99%) (-199,99...+199,99%) MOP min. MOP max. P461.F (0) K Automatik setpoint 11 10 01 00 Motorized potentiometer 1 P471.B (0) B Manual/Automatic Clockwise /Counterclockwise 0 1 0 0 1 P470.B (0) B * -1 * -1 1 Set motorized potentiometer P472.B (0) B P466.F (0) K Setting value K0242 0 ... No storage of output value : K240 is set to 0 in all operating states of > o5 The starting point after ON is specified by P467 (MOP starting value) 1 ... Non-volatile storage of output value : K240 remains stored in all operating states P473.F (0) 5 0 ... The motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is bypassed in automatic mode (effect as for P462 and P463 = 0) 1 ... The motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is effective in the manual and automatic modes 4 P460.F (1) Motorized potentiometer operating mode 3 1 0 x P467.F(0,0) (-199,9...+199,9%) MOP Starting value Ramp-function generator with permanent memory y dy/dt P462.F(10,00s) P463.F(10,00s) (0,01...300,00s) (0,01...300,00s) Acceleration time Decelerartion time 6 1 y=x y=0 K0240 K0241 P465.F(0) (0 or 1) 8 - G126 - Acceleration/deceleration completed B0241 Output = 0 B0240 Setpoint from motorized potentiometer 0 60 1 P464.F(10,00s) (0,01...300,00s) Time difference 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G126 Motorized potentiometer 163 1 164 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 [K13.7] P433.F(9215) K Select setpoint P431 (0) K K K K K K K K P430 (0) B B B B B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 1 Select fixed setpoint 1 from control word2 [G181.5] Select inject fixed setpoint 1 3 Select fixed setpoint 0 from control word 2 [G181.5] Fixed setpoint 2 0 1 0 1 & P432.08 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 5 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & & P432.01 P432.02 P432.03 P432.04 P432.05 P432.06 P 432.07 4 1 1 6 0 1 K0209 K0204 [G128.2] to Sheet "Ramp-function generator" [G136.3] Bypass ramp-function generator 7 - G127 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G127 Fixed setpoint SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [G127.7] K P484.F(209) Setpt.2 P482.F P481.F Zeit1 P481 P480 P482 P483.F Zeit2 P483 t Square-wave generator % Setpt.1 P480.F Oscillation/square wave generator 2 P485.B (0) B Oscillation Oscillation setpoint 5 0 1 K0203 6 K0208 [G129.1] 7 - G128 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G128 Oscillation, square-wave generator 165 1 166 [G128.6] P438.F(208) K P436 (0) K K K K K K K K Select setpoint P435 (0) B B B B B B B B Select injection of inching setpoint Inching, bit 1 from control word 1 [G180.6] Inching, bit 0 from control word 1 [G180.6] .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 Inching setpoint 2 1 1 0 1 0 1 & P437.08 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & & P437.01 P437.02 P437.03 4 P437.04 P437.05 P437.06 P437.07 3 5 =1 1 1 0% 1 0 0 1 ON command [G130.7] from ON/OFF1 (from sheet "Crawling setpoint") [G136.3] & to sheet "Ramp-function generator" Bypass ramp-function generator 6 7 K0207 K0202 [G180.2] [G130.2] On command from INCH (to control word 1) - G129 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G129 Inching setpoint SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P444.B (0) B SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 & .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 1 1 Select crawling setpoint P441 (0) .01 K .02 K .03 K .04 K .05 K .06 K .07 K .08 K P440 (0) B B B B B B B B Select injection of crawling setpoint 1 1 2 P443.F(207) K [G129.7] Selection for shutdown U617 (0...1) Switch-on/shutdown from terminal 37 (from Sheet "Binary inputs 1") [G110.5] P654.B(9358) B [K9.8] Selection for Switch-on/shutdown 1 1 1 R D Q 0 1 <1> 0 1 Level/Edge P445 <1> Flipllops reset when P445=0 R D Q <1> 3 1 .... 4 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & 0 1 & & P442.01 P442.02 P442.03 P442.04 P442.05 P442.06 P442.07 P442.08 0 1 6 Crawling setpoint/terminal 37 5 1 1 0 1 7 [G180.2] [G136.3] [G129.6] [G180.2] K0206 K0201 - G130 - [G135.1] Switch on command for CRAWLING (to control word 1) to Sheet "ramp-function generator" Bypass ramp-function generator to Sheet "Inching setpoint" Switch on command of ON/OFF1 (to control word 1) 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G130 Crawling setpoint / terminal 37 167 168 2 P323.F (1) K P645.F (0) K Additional setpoint P322.F (1) K P644.F(206) [G130.8] K Main setpoint r029 P321.F (100,00) (-300,00...300,00 %) .01 <1> .02 <1> .03 <1> .04 <1> K0198 .01 .02 .03 .04 Maximum K0197 K0196 Minimum 3 <1> When P643.0x=9, the limit selected via P642.0x acts with inverted sign as a negative limit P643 (9) K K K K P320.F (100,00) (-300,00...300,00 %) K K K K P642 (2) Setpoint processing 1 K0195 4 U607.B(9382) B 1 0 K0194 6 P635.F(194) K -1 0% Enable negative direction of rotation from control word 1 [G180.6] Enable positive direction of rotation from control word 1 [G180.6] [K14.6] U608.F (15,00%) 5 11 10 01 00 K0193 no direction of rotation enabled B0210 7 - G135 - [G136.1] to ramp-function generator input 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G135 Setpoint processing SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Enable RFG tracking Select bypass rampfunction generator & 0 ON delay T P647.B (1) B P641.B (0) B P646.B (1) B 0 1 r028 Run B0104 [G182.6] Set ramp-function generator Setting value x P317.F(0) & RFG tracking 4 1 r315.1 Ramp-up time Ramp-up time P303.F P307.F P311.F Bypass ramp-function generator from sheets "Fixed setpoint", "Inching setpoint", "Crawling setpoint" [G127.6] [129.6] [130.7] 1 [G180.6] B0211 K0192 Setpoint 1 3 Enable changeover of starting integrator .01 .02 Enable ramp-function generator from control word 1 (with "0"-Signal: y=0) P640.B (0) B P639 (0) K K B0104 [G182.6] Enable setpoint from control word 1 [G180.6] B0160 [G180.8] Valid travel command Operating state - -, I or II 0% P319.F (0,50) (0,00...10,00 s) 0 0 RFG output K0190 [G136.8] 1 from starting integrator control (see P302) RFG setting 3 This changeover to RFG settings 2 and 3 has priority over the input of RFG setting 3 by the starting integrator control RFG-setting 2 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 Ramp-function generator [G180.6] start from control word 1 RFG input [G135.7] 1 K0193 P638.B (0) B [K18.8] P637.B(9175) B P636 (1) K K K K K K Ramp-function generator (1) 1 Lower transition rounding P305.F P309.F P313.F r315.3 P295.F Overshoot P302.F Starting integrator P318.F Set RFG on shutdown 6 7 n-act - n-act + r315.4 Upper transition rounding dv/dt y=0 y Ramp-function generator setting 2 3 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 60 1 B0209 B0208 B0207 KK0047 1 B0541 B0540 K0190 RFG active to status word 1 [G182.2] ramp-down ramp-up eceleration distance U629.F (5,0) (0,1...10,0%) 0 1 Effective parameters 8 - G136 - [G136.1] [G137.3] [G153.4] P303 - P306 P311 - P314 P307 - P310 K0191 Time difference [s] P542.F U628.F (55,0) (10,0...199,9%) r027 P330.F(0) 0 1 P298.F Upper transition rounding P297.F Lower transition rounding P296.F Ramp-down time Effective times for emergency stop (OFF3): Upper transition rounding P306.F ... RFG setting 1 [s] P310.F ... RFG setting 2 [s] P314.F ... RFG setting 3 [s] r316 RFG status see sheet G137 Lower transition rounding Control parameter r315.2 Ramp-down time Parameter selection Ramp-down time P304.F P308.F P312.F 5 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G136 Ramp-function generator (1) 169 1 170 Limitation after RFG [G136.8] 3 P634 K K Ramp-function generator (2) 2 Maximum Minimum .01 <1> .02 <1> .03 <1> .04 <1> .01 .02 .03 .04 5 Lowest positive setpoint limit Highest negative setpoint limit K0182 P301.F(-105,00%) negative setpoint limit Limitation after RFG has responded B0206 [G152.1][G188.1] Speed setpoint K0170 K0183 K0181 positive setpoint limit P300.F(105,00%) <1> When P633.0x = 9, the positive limit selected via P632.0x acts with inverted sign as negative limit P633 (9) K K K K FS .01 190 .02 0 P632 (6) K K K K 4 6 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 7: 15: 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ramp-function generator enable Ramp-function generator start Setpoint enable & /OFF1 Set ramp-function generator Track ramp-function generator Bypass ramp-function generator Ramp-down Ramp-up 7 15 Display of RFG status on r316 7 0 - G137 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G137 Ramp-function generator (2) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Brake control 1 = n<nmin B0164 Operation B0104 OFF1 or OFF3 from the sequence control from control word 1 [G180.6] [G188.5] [G182.6] Automatic restart (see footnote 1) 2 1 1 P080 1 2 3 1 & & 4 T Footnote 2: A negative value in P087 means that the signal "Open brake" is delayed with respect to the enable for the firing pulses for the thyristor. Only this case is shown in this function diagram. 0 P087 (0.00) (-10.00...0.00 s) [see footnote 2] Brake opening time Footnote 1: The signal "automatic restart" is generated by the sequence control. If the voltage at the power section fails briefly in the "operating" state (see P086) (and if automatic restart is selected, i.e. P086 > 0), the "operating" signal goes to log. "0" and the "automatic restart" signal to log. "1" during this time. This causes the brake to remain open during this short time without torque. 1 1 5 Q Q T 0 P088 (0.0) (0.0...10.0 s) Delayed firing pulse disable Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) 7 Firing pulse disable (1 = firing pulse disabled) Close brake B0250 Open brake B0255 6 - G140 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G140 Brake control 171 172 2 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 X163 40 CUD2 Enable counter for zero markers (1 = enable) X171 39 CUD1 Reset position counter (dependent on setting in parameter P450) (0 = reset) Zero marker Track 2 Track 1 Pulse encoder supply 26 X173 CUD1 M M 5V 24V M 5V 24V 3 COMP X>Y COMP X>Y COMP X>Y [G111.5] see also Sheet "Binary inputs 2" 1 5V/15V (0/1) P142 Adjustment to pulse encoder supply see also Sheet "Binary inputs 1" [G110.5] IRES P15 200mA max. Pulse encoder evaluation 1 & 3 2 1 0 P453.B (1) B 1 & P148.F Pulse encoder monitoring ON/OFF P452.B (0) B P141 No. of encoder pulses Reset position counter P450.F P140 Pulse encoder type 0 Aut.switchover of multiple evaluation P145.F Pulse encoder evaluation Multiple evalution of encoder signals P144.F 4 5 P451.F Position counter hysteresis <3> Position counter 0=enable 1=reset (K0042, K0043, K0046:=0) <4> Counter for zero markers 0=reset (K0044:=0) 1=enable <4> <3> B0052 P147.F Measuring time Position sensing P143.F Maximum speed Speed measurement Automatic switchover of measuring time P146.F 6 K0040 Actual speed value from pulse encoder in rpm 1 = "Fault F048" with fault value 1 K0048 [G151.1] Actual speed value from pulse encoder Status register K0912 K0041 Number of pulses K0911 Measuring time Position <2> No. of zero markers Position HIGH <1> - G145 - <2> Value range 8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH <1> Value range FF80 0000H to 007F FFFFH (= -8388608 to +8388607 dec) KK0046 K0044 K0043 Position LOW <1> Overflow B0054 K0042 Underflow B0053 1 = "Fault F048" with fault value 2 Pulse encoder faulty Fault in speed measurement with pulse encoder n024.001 r024 8 Raw data of pulse encoder evaluation K0910 7 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G145 Pulse generator evaluation SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 <1> U651.F (0,00%) K0451 U655 (451) <1> K Starting pulse - speed controller 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U653.F (0,00%) <1> U652.F (50,00%) 4 K0453 K0452 FK2 [K4.6] U656 (452) <1> K U657.B(9064) B 5 1 0 K0454 [G152.5] 7 8 - G150 - <1> 100% corresponds to 100% of the rated current of the motor (P100) Rated converter current (r072.002) Rated motor current (P100.F) 6 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G150 Starting pulse - speed controller 173 174 2 P553.F (0) K 0% 4 3 2 1 y r025 P556.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) Adap.point 1 P225.F (3,00) (0,10 ... 200,00) n contr. Kp2 x P083.F 0 P550.F (3,00) (0,10 ... 200,00) n contr. Kp1 Adaptation of the P gain P609 (0) K Actual value from pulse encoder K0040 [G145.7] K0013 [G113.8] Main actual value Selection of actual speed value Speed controller (1) 1 y S1 SK U645.F S2 S3 S4 U646.F U647.F U648.F U649.F P559.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) Adap.point 2 x [G152.4] [G152.1] P555.F (0) K 5 y I comp. n contr. P630 (162) K 0% 1 0 Adap.point 2 Enable droop from control word 2 [G181.5] Adap.point 1 x P554.F (0) K y y K0176 [G152.3] - G151 - [G152.6] Speed controller integration time to Sheet Speed controller 2 y 8 dn(droop) n contr. Tn(act) r218 -1 P560.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) Adap.point 2 x P563.F(-100,00) (-199,99...0,00%) P557.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) Adap.point 1 P226.F (0,200) (0,010 ... 10,000) n contr. Tn2 P551.F (0,200) (0,010 ... 10,000) n contr. Tn1 x 7 P562.F(100,00) (0,00...199,99%) n contr. droop Kp (act) r217 P561.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) 6 Adaptation of the integration time [G152.6] Speed controller P gain to Sheet Speed controller 2 n contr. Kp(act) r219 x P558.F (0,00) (0,00 ... 100,00 %) P227.F (0,0) (0,0 ... 10,0) n contr. droop Kp2 P552.F (0,0) (0,0 ... 10,0) n contr. droop Kp1 Droop (with adaptation) 4 Factor for Kp in counter-torque operation (SK) and rotor stages S1 to S4 K0166 K0167 3 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G151 Speed controller (1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 n(set,limit) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 n(act) P627 (178) K [G152.2] [G152.2] P629 (177) K -1 [G152.1] [G152.1] K0169 K0168 K0178 n(act,filter) P203.F (1) (1...140Hz) Resonant frequency K0177 n(act,filter) P201.F (1) (1...140Hz) Resonant frequency K0179 [G152.1] [G153.1] n(act, smooth) P623 (179) K dn [G151.3] Absolute actual speed value P698.B (1) B K0166 0 r023 5 B A B<A Hysteresis P221.F & Track I component from Sheet "torque limitation" P696.B (0) B Switchover to P controller Enable speed controller from control word 2 and sequencing control [G163.6] B0204 [G160.7] B0212 P234.F (1) 0...1 0=set P component to zero Tn [G181.5] Kp Speed controller P gain from Sheet Speed controller 1 [G151.5] Stop I component when current limitation, torque limitation, speed limiting controller active Stop I component Control command for brake P695.B(9361) [K11.8] B P631 (454) K 6 Speed controller integration time from Sheet Speed controller 1 [G151.8] P224.F (1) 0...3 Control word for speed controller I component P230.F (0) 0...10000 ms Setting period of I-comp.n contr. Contr. dev. P620 (165) K 1 I component setting value [G150.7] K0165 1 Switchover speed P222.F Fast stop P624 (0) K 4 Master/slave drive from control word 2: Make I component follow on slave drive so that M(set, n contr.) = M(set, limit) and set speed setpoint = actual speed value (K0179) [G181.5] P229.F (0) [G151.8] P621 (176) K 3 n(set, smooth) P622 (174) K K0174 r026 Smooth. n(act) P200.F (0) (0...10000ms) P206.F (0) P205.F (0) (0 ... 100ms) (0 ... 1000ms) T1 Tv P204.F (0) (0...3) quality P628 (179) K [G152.3] n(act) 1 0 Fast stop P202.F (0) (0...3) quality P626.F(167) K [G151.3] n(act) P625.F(170) K [G137.5] 0% P228.F (0) (0 ... 10000 ms) Smooth. n(set) Speed controller (2) 1 r219 r218 K0171 [G153.7] P502 (0) K K0160 K0161 K0162 K0164 B0205 8 1 0% 0 K0148 - G152 - P223.F (0) M(set,n contr.) [G160.1] P component I component Speed controller setpoint/act. val. deviation Friction and moment of inertia compensation 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G152 Speed controller (2) 175 176 n controller setpoint [G152.3] 1 FS .01 179 .02 0 -P530 -100% P520 P521 0% Friction characteristic P520.F to P530.F 3 100% P530 4 n K0174 [G152.8] K0164 Setp./act. val. diff. [G152.4] n controller setpoint Threshold P543.F P541.F P540.F dv/dt * P542 from ramp-function generator [G136.6] K0152 K0150 K0191 P619 (191) K Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) P519 K K Friction compensation 2 Filter time (0...10000ms) P546.F (0) 5 0% P697.B (1) B K0172 0 1 Enable dv/dt injection K0173 6 [G152.7] K0171 7 - G153 - Friction moment and moment of inertia compensation 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G153 Friction compensation, Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 A SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 B>A & B0111 [G182.7] 2 <2> for these parameters: 100% corresponds to motor rated current (P100) <1> When P606.0x = 9, the positive limit selected via P605.0x acts with inverted sign as a negative limit .01 <1> .02 <1> .03 <1> .04 <1> .05 <1> P172.F(-100,0%) <2> Emergency stop M(set, n contr.) [G152.8] K0148 2 1 P084 (1) P171.F(100,0%) <2> P503.F(100%) P606 (9) K K K K K P501.B (0) K P500.B(203) K P607.B(148) K M(set, n contr.) P605 (2) K K K K K Torque limit changeover P694.B (0) B B [G152.3] K0166 Absolute actual speed Changeover speed P184.F (0,00) 1 0 P181.F <2> 1 0 P183.F <2> 1 P100.F ________ Maximum r072.002 1 0 K0147 Maximum r022 <2> Minimum P100.F ________ Minimum r072.002 1 <2> P182.F Master/slave drive from control word 2 (0 = master, 1 = slave) [G161.1] [G181.5] 0 <2> P180.F 3 K0145 y x K0144 5 K0192 [K17.3] x x y 0 1 | n-act | > U628 [G187.2] Sign of n-act = sign of RFG input 0 1 y2 y1 x 0 1 y1 y 8 B0201 x K0136 - G160 - Torque setpoint K0134 [G161.1] K0140 Mlimit1(act) Mlimit2(act) Limit controller active K0137 1 B0193 Neg. speed limit reached B0192 Pos. speed limit reached Track n controller I component to Sheet "Speed controller" [G152.6] B0212 "Zero delay angle" command y2 Speed limiting controller & U614 (100ms) Switch on y +199% 7 P515.F (3,00) (0,10...200,00) Kp P513.F (-105,0) P512.F (105,0) (-199,9...0,0 %) (0,0...199,9 %) n(max,neg. DR) n(max,pos. DR) (n-act) P511 (4) K U628.F (55,0%) Threshold for open-loop range U628.F (55,0%) K0166 | n-act | 6 P510 (2) K P509 (167) K -200% FS .01 141 .02 0 x U605.B(9368) B P601 K K K0167 Actual speed value RFG input [G136.3] Lower torque limit active B0203 r021 <2> K0141 B0202 Upper torque limit active K0143 Torque limitation 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G160 Torque limitation, speed limit controller 177 178 B0161 Shutdown FS .01 1 .02 1 .03 1 .04 1 .05 1 .06 2 .07 2 K0147 FS .03 134 .04 0 P604 (9) K K K K K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 9=neg. signal effective acc. to P603.xx [G160.3] P601 K K Setpoint before current limitation P603 K K K K K K K Emergency stop B0111 [G182.7] [G180.8] 2 Min. Max. neg. current limit P172.F ) (-100,0%) K0133 pos. current limit P171.F ) (100,0%) 1 Current limitation 1 P100.F ________ r072.002 P100.F ________ r072.002 Max. Max. Min. Min. 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 4 P174 (1) 0 1 P077 -1 Maximum Minimum I2t monitoring of power section P075 5 K0132 y Highest pos.current limit "-Ia_limit" x K0131 Lowest pos.current limit "+Ia_limit" 6 x 1 K0120 [G162.1] Current setpt. B0200 Current limitation active B0195 Neg. current limit reached B0194 Pos. current limit reached 8 - G161 - ) With these parameters, 100% corresponds to the rated motor current (P100) y 7 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G161 Current limitation SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P158.F Acceleration time for reduced gearbox stressing or current setpoint integrator K0120 K0109 P601 K K B0190 K0103 FS .05 125 .06 0 K0117 P602 (117) K Pulsating current Average value over 6 current peaks *) Conducting angle Average value over 6 current peaks K0114 K0107 Average value over 1 current peak *) The following applies with these parameters or connectors: 100% corresponds to the rated motor current (P100) [G161.8] K0125 Switchover between reduced gearbox stressing and current setpoint integrator P157.F Current setpoint Internal actual current value r019*) Absolute actual current 3 K0116 Closed-loop current control 1 [G163.1] K0119 r020*) 4 Setpoint Actual value Filter time P166 (40ms) K0118 P191.F (0) (0...10000ms) Filter time K0115 P175.F(1) K P176.F(1) K 5 Kp Tn P156.F P167 (45) Limiting of precontrol when P153 = 2 or 3 and no "zero delay-angle setting" (arccos) Precontrol Precontrol control word P153.F P154.F 0=Reset I comp. Current controller P164.F 0=Reset P comp. + - P155.F 6 I comp. 8 K0121 K0102 [G163.1] - G162 - from sheet "Auto-reversing stage, gating unit" I component :=0 [G163.3] output P comp. K0112 K0110 set/actual diff. K0111 Current controller K0113 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G162 Closed-loop current control 179 180 2 [G162.7] [G162.4] K0102 K0119 x y=x2 y 0 1 P159 P159 Switchover threshold P159.F 3 B0161 B0111 Fast stop FS 102 0 0 0 Shutdown K0102 P600 K K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 I component :=0 to sheet "Closed-loop current control": P174 (1) Auto-reversing stage, gating unit 1 K0106 1 = Torque direction I 1 = Torque direction II B0231 B0232 B0202 B0203 Upper torque limitation B0201 Lower torque kimitation active B0200 K0101 Current limitation 1 Limiting controller 0 P168 (15/firing pulse) Maximum change to firing angle 1 = No torque direction B0230 [G162.7] 1 5 0 = No torque direction 1 = Torque direction I 2 = Torque direction II Required torque direction 4 P160.F 1 180 0 B0204 r018 P160 Additional zero current interval P826.ii Correction of zero crossings = P152.F Filtering of line frequency correction Gating unit MII 1 MII 2 MII 3 MII 4 MII 5 MII 6 MI 1 MI 2 MI 3 MI 4 MI 5 MI 6 - G163 - 1 = Torque direction II active 1 = Torque direction I active B0221 B0222 Enabled torque direction for parallel drive torque direction II enabled B0220 torque direction I enabled [G119.3] 8 M II [G119.3] MI 7 Limiting active to speed controller [G152.6] K0100 Auto-reversing stage I=0 - signal 6 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G163 Auto-reversing stage, gating unit SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K2002 K2003 K2004 K2005 K2006 K2007 K2008 K2009 K2010 K2011 K2012 K2013 K2014 K2015 K2016 LOW HIGH K2001 USS interface 1 (G170) KK2045 KK2044 KK2043 KK2042 KK2041 KK2040 KK2039 KK2038 KK2037 KK2036 KK2035 KK2034 KK2033 KK2032 KK2031 LOW HIGH K6003 K6016 K6015 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K6013 K6014 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K6012 K6011 K6010 K6009 K6008 K6007 K6006 K6005 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K6002 K6004 LOW HIGH K6001 KK6095 KK6094 KK6093 KK6092 KK6091 KK6090 KK6089 KK6088 KK6087 KK6086 KK60085 KK6084 KK6083 KK6082 LOW HIGH K9003 K9016 K9015 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K9013 K9014 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K9012 K9011 K9010 K9009 K9008 K9007 K9006 K9005 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K9002 K9004 LOW HIGH K9001 Peer-to-peer interface 3 (G174) 7 Peer-to-peer interface 2 (G173) 6 USS interface 3 (G172) KK6081 5 USS interface 2 (G171) Serial interfaces: connector-type converters 2 KK9095 KK9094 KK9093 KK9092 KK9091 KK9090 KK9089 KK9088 KK9087 KK9086 KK9085 KK9084 KK9083 KK9082 KK9081 - G169 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G169 Serial interfaces: connector-type converters 181 182 +5V M M Submin D 9 5 8 Rx-/Tx- 3 Rx+/Tx+ 2 RxD 7 TxD 6 1 4 + M 0 1 0 1 P785.001 (0) RS485 RS232 Bus terminator 2 USS On/Off Telegram monitoring time Slave address Baud rate Length of process data Length of parameter data USS diagnostic parameter Enable parameterization P780 (2) P787 (0,000s) P786 (0) P783 (6) P781 (2) P782 (127) r789 P927 Parameters for USS interface P785.002=1: Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K2001 to K2016 or to binectors B2100 to 2915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. <1> P785.002=0: Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC". PMU X300: G-SST1 USS interface 1 1 P788 (2030) B 1s Bit 15 K K2003 ... K K2002 K K2014 K2015 K2016 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 15 K K2013 Word 13 1 = "Fault F011" Fault message trigger B2031 B2415 B2515 B2615 B2715 B2815 B2400 B2500 B2600 B2700 B2800 B U116 (0) B 0 .16 0 .14 0 .15 See also connector type converter on sheet G169 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.9.1 B2915 B2315 B2300 B2900 B2215 B2200 B2100 K K .11 0 0 .12 0 .13 .10 .09 .16 K K2012 Word 12 B2030 K K2011 Word 11 .01 0 K K2010 B2115 Word 8 0 K K2009 Word 9 Word 10 Bit 0 Word 7 .08 0 K K2008 Word 8 K K2007 Word 7 0 Binector / connector converter Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 13 Word 12 Word 11 Word 9 Word 10 Word 6 Word 5 0 .06 0 .07 K K2006 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 Word 6 33 .04 0 .05 FS 32 .01 .02 167 0 .03 K K P784 K K2001 Process Data to USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Transmit data K2005 every 16 bits r811.01 to .16 7 Word 5 r810.01 to .16 Parameter processing r811.17 r811.18 r811.19 r811.20 6 K2004 <1> 5 r810.17 r810.18 r810.19 r810.20 4 Word 4 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Process data from USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Receive data 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" 1 1 3 1 - G170 - K2020 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G170 USS interface 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Rx+/Tx+ Rx-/Tx- 58 59 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 0 1 M 0 1 + K K K K K K K K K6009 K6010 K6011 K6012 K6013 K6014 K6015 K6016 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 USS On/Off Telegram monitoring time Slave address Baud rate Length of process data Length of parameter data USS diagnostic parameter Enable parameterization P790 (0) P797 (0,000s) P796 (0) P793 (6) P791 (2) P792 (127) r799 P927 P798 (6030) B 1s K K6008 Word 8 1 = "Fault F012" Fault message trigger B6031 B6030 K K6007 Word 7 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" Bit 15 K K6006 Word 6 P795.002=1: Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K6001 to K6016 or to binectors B6100 to 6915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. Parameters for USS interface ... K K6005 Word 5 B6315 B6415 B6515 B6615 B6715 B6815 B6300 B6400 B6500 B6600 B6700 B6800 B U117 (0) B 0 .16 0 .14 0 .15 0 .11 0 .12 0 .13 0 .09 0 .10 0 .07 0 .08 0 .05 0 .06 0 .03 33 .04 FS 32 .01 167 .02 .16 .01 r813.01 to .16 See also connector type converter on sheet G169 7 Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 13 Word 12 Word 11 Word 9 Word 10 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 0 Process data to USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Transmit data Binector / connector converter 15 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.9.1 B6915 B6215 B6200 B6900 B6115 B6100 Bit 0 K K6004 K K6002 Word 4 P794 K K6001 P795.001 (0) every 16 bits Parameter processing r813.17 r813.18 r813.19 r813.20 6 K <1> r812.01 to .16 r812.17 r812.18 r812.19 r812.20 5 K6003 Word 1 Process data from USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Receive data 4 Word 2 Word 3 1 3 RS485 Bus terminator 2 <1> P795.002=0: Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC". M Tx- 57 60 Tx+ 56 X172 CUD1 G-SST2 USS interface 2 1 1 - G171 - K6020 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G171 USS interface 2 183 184 Rx-/Tx- 63 64 + M 0 1 0 1 RS485 P805.001 (0) Bus terminator 2 1 Enable parameterization P927 P801 (2) Length of parameter data Length of process data P803 (13) USS diagnostic parameter Baud rate P806 (0) r809 Slave address P807 (0,000s) P802 (127) USS On/Off Telegram monitoring time P800 (0) Parameters for USS interface P805.002=1: Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K9001 to K9016 or to binectors B9100 to 9915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. <1> P805.002=0: Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC". M Rx+/Tx+ 62 65 Tx- 61 G-SST3 Tx+ X162 CUD2 USS interface 3 1 P808 (9030) B 1s ... Bit 15 K K K K K K K K9006 K9007 K9008 K9009 K9010 K9011 K9012 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 K9016 Word 16 1 = "Fault F013" Fault message trigger B9031 B9030 K K9015 Word 15 B9315 B9300 B9715 B9815 B9915 B9800 B9900 B U118 (0) B 0 .16 0 .14 0 .15 0 .11 0 .12 0 .13 0 .09 0 .10 0 .07 0 .08 0 .05 0 .06 0 .03 33 .04 FS 32 .01 167 .02 .16 .01 r815.01 to .16 See also connector type converter on sheet G169 Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 13 Word 12 Word 11 Word 9 Word 10 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 0 Process data to USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Transmit data Binector / connector converter 15 7 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.9.1 B9615 B9700 B9515 B9600 B9500 B9415 B9215 B9200 B9400 B9115 B9100 Bit 0 K K9014 Word 14 K K9013 Word 13 K K K9005 Word 5 K K9004 Word 4 P804 K K K9001 K9003 every 16 bits K r814.01 to .16 Parameter processing r815.17 r815.18 r815.19 r815.20 6 K9002 <1> 5 r814.17 r814.18 r814.19 r814.20 4 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Process data from USS interface Word 4: Param.Value High Word Word 3: Param.Value Low Word Word 2: Param.Index Word 1: Param.-ID (PKE) USS parameter data Receive data 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" 3 1 - G172 - K9020 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G172 USS interface 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Tx- Rx+/Tx+ Rx-/Tx- 58 59 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 + M 0 1 0 1 Bus terminator 0 1 <2> 0 1 <1> 4 Telegram monitoring time Baud rate No. of words (1...5) Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter P793 (6) P791 (2) r799 1s 6 B6031 B6030 P798 (6030) B B6515 1 = "Fault F012" Fault signal trip B6415 B6500 B6315 B6300 B6400 B6215 B6200 Bit 15 B6115 K B 7 .16 .01 0 to following drive Word 5 Word 4 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Transmit data Binector / connector converter 15 r813.01 to .05 FS .01 32 .02 167 .03 0 .04 33 .05 0 U117 (0) B K6005 Word 5 ... K6004 Word 4 Bit 0 B6100 K6003 to preceding drive K K6002 Word 2 Word 3 K K K6001 Word 1 every 16Bits P794 K r812.01 to .05 See also connector type converter on sheet G169 <2> Binector = 0: Telegram sign-of-life-monitoring is not active 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" 5 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.9.2 Receive data <1> Binector = 0: Output drivers are high resistance P797 (0,000s) Peer-to-peer On/Off P790 (0) P816 (1) B P817 (1) B Enable data send 3 Enable data receive P795.001 (0) RS485 Parametes for peer-to-peer interface : M Tx+ 57 G-SST2 56 60 2 Peer-to-peer interface 2 X172 CUD1 1 - G173 - K6020 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G173 Peer-to-peer interface 2 185 186 Tx- Rx+/Tx+ Rx-/Tx- 63 64 + M 0 1 0 1 Bus terminator P805.001 (0) RS485 3 0 1 <2> 0 1 <1> K9003 K9004 K9005 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Telegram monitoring time Baud rate No. of Words (1...5) Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter P803 (13) P801 (2) r809 1s B9031 B9030 P808 (9030) B B9315 B9415 B9515 B9400 B9500 1 = "Fault F013" Fault signal trip B9215 Bit 15 B9115 K K K K B 7 .16 .01 0 to following drive Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 Transmit data Binector / connector converter 15 r815.01 to .05 FS .01 32 .02 167 .03 0 .04 33 .05 0 U118 (0) B P804 K B9300 ... 6 B9200 Bit 0 B9100 K9002 from preceding drive K9001 Word 2 every 16Bits Word 1 r814.01 to .05 See also connector type converter on sheet G169 <2> Binector = 0: Telegram sign-of-life monitoring is not active 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" 5 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.9.2 4 Receive data <1> Binector = 0: Output drivers are high resistance Enable Data receive P818 (1) B P819 (1) B Enable data send P807 (0,000s) Peer-to-peer On/Off P800 (0) Parameters for peer-to-peer interface: M Tx+ 62 G-SST3 61 X162 65 2 Peer-to-peer interface 3 CUD2 1 - G174 - K9020 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G174 Peer-to-peer interface 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P057 (012) 011...121 Copy Bico data set P055. (012) (011...143) Copy function data set Data sets 2 Source data set (1/2) Target data set (1/2) Source data set (1...4) Target data set (1...4) 3 Bico data set from control word 2 [G181.5] Function data set bit 1 from control word 2 [G181.5] Function data set bit 0 from control word 2 [G181.5] 4 6 Index 1 Index 2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ... Parameter number Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 K0034 Note: The applicable parameters are identified by the code ".B" K0035 Note: The applicable parameters are identified by the code ".F" r056 active function data set 7 r058 active Bico data set Index 4 Switchover between function parameters Switchover between binector and connector parameters xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ... Parameter number 5 - G175 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G175 Data sets 187 188 2 <1> Pulse generator 150ms 1 1 & & & Bit 10 is displayed in connector K0030 and parameter r650 when control word 1 is input in word mode. It is not, however, functional. The mode of functioning of bit 10 is shown on Sheets G170, G171, G172, Z110 and Z111 Fault acknowledgement via PMU P667.B (0) B P666.B (0) B P665.B(9367) [K17.7] B P660.B (1) B P659.B (1) B P658.B (1) B P657.B (1) B P656.B (1) B P655.B (1) B Operating enable (term.38) (from Sheet "Binary inputs 1") [G110.5] U618 (0) (0...1) P661.B(9350) B [K8.7] Switch-on command from INCHING [G129.7] (from sheet "Inching setpoint") Switch-on command from CRAWL [G130.7] (from sheet "Crawling setpoint") Switch-on commmand from ON/OFF1 (from sheet "Crawling setpoint [G130.7] / Terminal 37") Control word 1 1 5 0 =>1 edge Acknowledge Bit 7 Bit 14 P674.B (0) B Bit 15 Bit 13 P673.B (0) B P675.B (1) B Bit 12 P672.B (1) B 0=External fault 1 (F021) 1=No external fault 1=Decrease motorized potentiometer 1=Increase motorized potentiometer 1=Enable negative direction of rotation 0=Negative direction of rotation disabled 1=Enable positive direction of rotation 0=Positive direction of rotation disabled to sheet "Motorized potentiometer" [G126.2] to sheet "Motorized potentiometer" [G126.2] 6 5 14 13 1 & P360.01 (0ms) (0...10000ms) to sheet "Setpoint processing" [G135.6] to sheet "Setpoint processing" [G135.6] 1=Control by PLC 0=No control by PLC Bit 10 Bit 11 to sheet "Inching setpoint" [G129.2] 1=Inching bit 1 Bit 9 P key (PMU) to sheet "Ramp-function generator" [G136.1] to sheet "Ramp-function generator" [G136.2] to sequencing control 7 15 12 4 3 11 2 B0179 B0161 Bit0 Bit8 - G180 - Fault F021 External fault 1 1 B0160 [G136.1] 1 10 9 8 Display of control word 1 (r650) on 7-segment display 7 to sheet "Ramp-function generator" [G136.3] to sequencing control to sequencing control, to brake control [G140.3] to sequencing control to sheet "Inching setpoint" [G129.2] <1> K0030 Control word 1 to sequencing control, to brake control [G140.3] r650 6 1=Inching bit 0 Bit 8 1=Enable setpoint 0=Disable setpoint 1=Ramp-function generator start 0=Ramp-function generator stop 1=Enable ramp-function generator 0=Set ramp-function generator to 0 1=Enable, enable pulses 0=Pulse disable 0=OFF3, fast stop 1=operating condition 0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts to standstill 1=operating condition 0=OFF1, shutdown via ramp-function generator followed by pulse disable 1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) Meaning Bit 6 P671.B (1) B P669.B (0) B P668.B (0) B P664.B (1) B Bit 5 P663.B (1) B Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit No. Bit 4 P648.B (9) K Terminals 37 and 38 are always active. They are ANDed with bit 0 or bit 3. P662.B(9381) [K11.7] B 1 4 When P648 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are effective) When P648 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are not effective) 3 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G180 Control word 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 P686.B (1) B P687.B (0) B P688.B (1) B P689.B (1) B P690 (0) B P691.B (0) B Main contactor check-back signal 0=Select Bico data set 1 1=Select Bico data set 2 0=External alarm 2 (A022) 1=No external alarm 2 0=External alarm 1 (A021) 1=No external alarm 1 0=Master drive (speed control) 1=Slave drive (torque control) 0=External fault 2 (F022) 1=No external fault 2 1=Enable speed controller 0=Speed controller disabled Bit 25 P685.B (1) B to sequencing control to sheet "Data sets" [G175.4] to sheets "Torque limitation" and "Speed controller (2)" [G160.2] [G152.4] to sheet "Speed controller (2)" [G152.6] to sheet "Speed controller (1)" [G151.6] Spare Bit 23 1=Enable speed controller droop 0=Speed controller droop disabled Spare Bit 22 Bit 24 to sheet "Fixed setpoint" [G127.2] Select fixed setpoint 1 Bit 21 P684.B (1) B to sheet "Fixed setpoint" [G127.2] Select fixed setpoint 0 Bit 20 Spare Bit 19 P681.B (0) B Spare Bit 18 P680.B (0) B to sheet "Data sets" [G175.4] Select function data set bit 1 K0031 Control word 2 Bit 17 P677.B (0) B r651 5 to sheet "Data sets" [G175.4] Meaning 4 Select function data set bit 0 Bit 16 Bit No. P676.B (0) B P649.B (9) K When P649 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are effective) When P649 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are not effective) Control word 2 1 22 30 21 29 20 28 19 27 7 18 26 P360.04 (0ms) (0...10000ms) P360.03 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 17 25 Alarm A022 External alarm 2 Alarm A021 External alarm 1 Fault F022 External fault 2 Display of control word 2 (r651) on 7-segment display 23 31 P360.02 (0ms) (0...10000ms) 6 Bit16 Bit24 - G181 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G181 Control word 2 189 190 B0102 B0104 B0106 B0108 B0110 B0112 B0114 B0116 B0120 B0122 B0124 B0126 B0128 1 = Ready to operate (pulses disabled) 0 = Not ready to operate 1 = Run (output terminals energized) 0 = Pulses disabled 1 = Fault is active (pulses disabled) 0 = No fault is active 0 = OFF2 applied 1 = No OFF2 applied 0 = OFF3 applied 1 = No OFF3 applied 1 = Switch-on inhibit 0 = No switch-on inhibit (converter can be switched on) 1 = Alarm is active 0 = No alarm is active 0 = Setpoint/actual value deviation detected 1 = No setpoint/actual value deviation detected 1 = PZD control requests (always 1) 1=Actual value comparison setpoint (P373) 0=Actual value < comparison setpoint (P373) 1 = Undervoltage fault (F006) 0 = No undervoltage fault is active 1 = Request to energize main contactor 0 = Request not to energize main contactor 1 = Ramp-function generator active 0 = Ramp-function generator not active 1 = Positive speed setpoint 0 = Negative speed setpoint Spare Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 from fault processing rom sequencing control from sequencing control from sequencing control from alarm processing from sheet "Signals (1)" [G187.7] from sequencing control from sheet "Signals (1)" [G187.7] from fault processing from sequencing control from ramp-function generator [G136.5] from sheet "Signals (2)" [G188.4] from sequencing control from sequencing control from sequencing control Bit 1 r652 B0100 5 1 = Ready to switch on 0 = Not ready to switch on 4 Bit 0 3 Meaning 2 Bit No. Status word 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K0032 Status word 1 6 B0129 B0127 B0125 B0123 B0121 B0117 B0115 B0113 B0111 B0109 B0107 B0105 B0103 B0101 6 7 5 13 12 4 3 11 2 10 [K7.3] [K17.6] Display of status word 1 (r652) on 7-segment display 14 15 7 Bit0 Bit8 - G182 - 1 9 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G182 Status word 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 B0138 B0140 B0142 B0144 B0146 B0148 B0150 B0152 1 = External fault 1 active (F021) 0 = No extern fault 1 active 1 = External fault 2 active (F022) 0 = No external fault 2 active 1 = External alarm active (A021 or A022) 0 = No external alarm active 1 = Power section overload alarm active (A039) 0 = No overload alarm active 1 = Power section overtemperature fault active (F067) 0 = No overtemperature fault active 1 = Power section overtemperature alarm active (A067) 0 = No overtemperature alarm active 1 = Motor overtemperature alarm active (A029) 0 = No motor overtemperature alarm active 1 = Motor overtemperature fault active (F029) 0 = No motor overtemperature fault active spare 1 = Motor locked fault active (F035) 0 = No motor locked fault active spare spare spare Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 from sequencing control from sequencing control from sequencing control from alarm processing from fault processing from alarm processing from alarm processing from alarm processing B0156 B0136 0 = Overspeed (A038 and F038) 1 = No overspeed Bit 18 K0033 from sheet "Signals (2)" [G188.5] from fault processing 6 Status word 2 Spare r653 Bit 17 5 Spare 4 Bit 16 3 Meaning 2 Bit Nr. Status word 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B0157 B0153 B0151 B0149 B0147 B0145 B0143 B0141 B0139 B0137 22 30 21 29 20 28 19 27 18 26 [K9.3] [K9.3] [K9.3] Display of status word 2 (r653) on 7-segment display 23 31 7 Bit16 Bit24 - G183 - 17 25 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G183 Status word 2 191 192 2 23 PTC KTY84 <5> 205 204 X164 PTC KTY84 <5> 22 X174 CUD2 CUD1 3 0,6 s 0,6 s PTC trip temperature <2> P491.F Alarm temperature K0052 Motor temperature 2<1> Trip temperature P492.F <2> P491.F Alarm temperature PTC trip temperature K0051 5 1 1 1 1 <5> Use a shielded cable and connect it to ground at both ends <2> The trip temperature being used depends on the type of PTC thermistor. <1> Parameter r012 and connector K0051 / K0052 only provide reliable values when a KTY84 is selected. If a PTC thermistor is selected, r012 and K0051 / K0052 always output the value 0. 2 1 <4> Trip temperature P492.F Motor temperature 1 <1> <1> r012.02 2 1 <3> <4> 1...KTY84 (P490.02=1) 2...PTC thermistor (P490.02=2,3,4,5) # Select temperature sensor P490.02 4 <1> r012.01 <3> 1...KTY84 (P490.01=1) 2...PTC thermistor (P490.01=2,3,4,5) # Select temperature sensor P490.01 Temperature sensor inputs 1 B0185 Alarm motor temperature 2 Fault motor temperature 2 B0184 Alarm motor temperature 1 Fault motor temperature 1 6 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 P494.F 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 P493.F 1 1 7 1 = "Fault F029" - G185 - Motor temperature fault 1 = "Alarm A029" Motor temperature alarm 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G185 Temperature sensor inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 +24V SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 X161 2 M CUD2 Binary inputs (3) 1 P24_S M + M + M + M + 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display - see block diagram "Binary inputs (1)" (G110) 3 4 B0047 B0046 B0045 B0044 B0043 B0042 B0041 B0040 Operating state < o6 0 0 0 10s ON delay T & 2s ON delay T 10s ON delay T 5 0 40s ON delay T 6 B0183 B0182 B0181 B0180 0 1 2 P498.F 0 1 2 P497.F 0 1 2 P496.F 0 1 2 P495.F 7 1 = "Fault F028" 1 = "Alarm A028" 1 = "Fault F027" 1 = "Alarm A027" 1 = "Fault F026" 1 = "Alarm A026" 1 = "Fault F025" 1 = "Alarm A025" - G186 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G186 Binary inputs, terminals 211 to 214 193 194 [G160.6] B0540 [G136.6] n(act) P591 (167) K P590 (174) K n(set, smooth) 2 P592 (167) K n(act) P597 (167) K n(act) P596 (174) K n(set, smooth) | n-act | > U628 Setpoint in open-loop range Signals (1) 1 & 0% 0 OFF delay T P387.F (2,0) 3 1 0 4 P374.F (3,00) (0,00...199,99%) n(comp.hyst.) 0 1 P373.F (100,00) (0,00...199,99%) n(comp.) P377.F (1,00) (0,00...199,99%) Setp./act.val. hyst. 0 1 P376.F (3,00) (0,00...199,99%) Setp./act.val. dev. (perm.) P389.F (1,00) (0,00...199,99%) Setpt/Act hyst. 0 1 P388.F (5,00) (0,00...199,99%) Setpt./Act.dev. (perm.) 5 OFF delay T T T OFF delay 0 P375.F (3,0) (0,0...100,0 s) Comparison (time) OFF delay 0 P378.F (3,0) (0,0...100,0 s) Setp./act.val. dev. (time) 0 P390.F (1,0) (0,0...100,0 s) Setpt./Act.dev. (time) 6 1 [G182.2] Comparison setpoint reached to status word 1, bit 10 B0173 B0172 Setpoint/act. value deviation 2 0 = "Alarm A031" 0 = "Fault F031" [G182.2] Setpoint/actual value deviation in status word 1.Bit 8 7 - G187 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G187 Messages (1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Signals (2) 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P595 (167) K n(act) P594 (170) K n(set) P593 (167) K n(act) 2 0 1 0 1 P370.F (5,00) (0,00...199,99%) OFF shutdown speed 4 0 1 P380.F (120,0) (0,0...199,9%) n(max. pos. rot.) 1 5 & B0165 B0164 n<nmin Overspeed to status word 2, bit 18 [G183.2] 1 = "Alarm A038" 1 = "Fault F038" OFF1 or OFF3 from sequencing control Positive speed setpoint to status word 1, bit14 [G182.2] P371.F (0,50) (0,00...199,99%) OFF shutdown speed (hyst.) P381.F (-120,0) (-199,9...0,0%) n(max. neg. rot.) 3 0 Delay T P088 (1,00) (0,00...10,00 s) Comparison (time) 6 Firing pulse disable (1 = Zundimpulse gesperrt) 7 - G188 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet G188 Messages (2) 195 196 Operation from sequencing control K0311 Hours run r048 LOW byte: Current alarm number HIGH byte: Current fault number <1> K0801: Hours run meter 2 Fault trip from sequencing control Fault memory 1 K9811 K0801 <1> K9814 6. acknowledged fault Fault No. r947.49 Fault value .50 .51 .52 .53 .54 .55 .56 Fault time (hours run) 7. acknowledged fault r947.57 Fault value .58 .59 .60 .61 .62 .63 .64 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. K9818 r947.33 Fault value .34 .35 .36 .37 .38 .39 .40 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. r949.57 .58 .59 .60 .61 .62 .63 .64 r049.08 r949.33 .34 .35 .36 .37 .38 .39 .40 r049.05 5. acknowledged fault r947.41 Fault value .42 .43 .44 .45 .46 .47 .48 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. K9816 K9815 r947.17 Fault value .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. K9813 7 2. acknowledged fault r949.09 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 r049.02 6 1. acknowledged fault K9817 r949.49 .50 .51 .52 .53 .54 .55 .56 r049.07 K9812 r947.09 Fault value .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. 5 4. acknowledged fault r949.25 .26 .27 .28 .29 .30 .31 .32 r049.04 r949.01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 r049.01 4 3. acknowledged fault r947.25 Fault value .26 .27 .28 .29 .30 .31 .32 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. Current fault r947.01 Fault value .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 Fault time (hours run) Fault No. 3 r949.41 .42 .43 .44 .45 .46 .47 .48 r049.06 r949.17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 r049.03 - G189 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet G189 Fault memory SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Rx-/Tx- Rx+/Tx+ 0 1 Rx-/Tx- Rx+/Tx+ 0 1 Rx-/Tx- Rx+/Tx+ 0 1 Rx-/Tx- Rx+/Tx+ 0 1 Bus termintor U805 (0) Telegrm monitoring time Dignostic prmeter Disply ctive slves (see right) U807 (0,100s) n809 n810 1 = "Fult F014" Fult signl trip Bus dress U806 (2) U808(6040) B On/Off Operting mode for prllel connection U803 (0) RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 2 U800 (0) Prmeters for prlleling interfce: CUD2 X166 X165 1 B6041 B6040 1 1 = ctive PrllelingMster B0225 1s 1 = "Telegrm monitoring timeout" CLK to slves CLK from Mster U806 (2) Mster (12...16) / Slve (2...6) 2..6 12..16 Internl summtion firing pulse 1 from slve 6 from slve 5 from slve 4 from slve 3 from Slve 2 from mster from mster 4 16Bit K6054 K6063 K6064 K6065 Word 4 Word 5 K6062 K6061 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Bit 0 B6620 K6055 K6053 Word 4 Word 5 K6052 Word 3 K6051 Word 2 n812.21 to .25 16Bit K6045 Word 5 Word 1 K6044 Word 4 Bit 0 B6520 K6043 Word 3 n812.16 to .20 K6042 K6041 Word 2 16Bit ... ... Bit 15 B6635 Bit 15 B6535 B6622 [G195.6] Word 1 B6422 B6522 K6035 Bit 0 B6420 K6034 Word 5 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 & 7 15 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 0 8 Prlleling slve: (i.e. when U800 = 2): Segment 2 ... ON: Dt for slve with ddress 2 re ok 3 ... ON: Dt for slve with ddress 3 re ok 4 ... ON: Dt for slve with ddress 4 re ok 5 ... ON: Dt for slve with ddress 5 re ok 6 ... ON: Dt for slve with ddress 6 re ok 8 ... ON: Slve funktion ctive 9 ... ON: Firing pulses of mster re used 15.. OFF n810: Prlleling mster: (i.e. when U800 = 1) Segment 2 ... ON: Slve with ddress 2 responding 3 ... ON: Slve with ddress 3 responding 4 ... ON: Slve with ddress 4 responding 5 ... ON: Slve with ddress 5 responding 6 ... ON: Slve with ddress 6 responding 8, 9 ... OFF 15.. ON: Mster function ctive 1 - G195 - 1 to next drive 1 F044 Indices .06 to .10 of U804 re ctivted on the mster nd the stndby mster when the "mster" function is trnsferred to the stndby mster U800 <> 0 Operting stte <o1.0 U806 >10 B6322 B6623 B6222 Word 4 B6423 B6523 B6323 B6223 [G195.6] [G195.6] [G195.6] [G195.6] [G195.6] [G195.6] [G195.6] 8 Trnsmit dt n813.01 ... .05 Word1 bit2 = Run bit3 = Fult .10 .09 .08 .07 .06 K6033 Bit 15 B6435 Bit 15 B6335 K K K K K .05 .04 K6032 ... ... Bit 15 B6235 K K .03 .02 .01 Word 3 Bit 0 B6320 K6025 K6024 K6023 K6022 K6021 ... Firing pulse K K U804 (0) K 7 Word 2 16Bit 16Bit Bit 0 B6220 0 1 2 U800 (0) 6 [G195.6] [G195.6] n812.11 to .15 n812.06 to .10 n812.01 to .05 Imp., Internl firing pulse 5 K6031 Word 1 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 Receiving dt Torque direction, thyristor selection Summtion firing pulse Prlleling interfce 3 03.2015 Sheet G195 Paralleling interface Function diagrams 197 198 2 3 4 5 NOTICE 6 7 8 Fixed values Voltage monitor for electronics power supply Alarm message triggers Fault message triggers Connector/binector converter Binector/connector converter Adders/subtracters Sign inverters Switchable sign inverters Multipliers Dividers High-resolution multipliers/dividers Absolute-value generator with filtering Limiters Limiters Limit-value monitors with filtering Limit-value monitors without filtering Limit-value monitors without filtering Averagers Maximum selections Minimum selections Tracking/storage elements Connector memories Connector changeover switches 2 2 2 limit-value monitors (for double connectors) connector-type converters adders/subtracters (for double connectors) High-resolution blocks 4 4 4 2 2 15 Processing of connectors 3 3 3 4 3 Limiters, limit-value monitors 15 4 2 12 6 3 4 Mathematical functions 3 3 Connector/binector converter 8 32 Alarm, fault messages 1 Monitoring 100 Fixed values Startup of the technology software Content B151 B151 B151 B139 B140 B140 B145 B145 B150 B134 B135 B136 B137 B138 B125 B125 B125 B130 B131 B131 B135 B120 B121 B115 B115 B110 B110 B101 Sheet Position/positional deviation acquisition Root extractor Integrators DT1 elements Derivative/delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) Characteristic blocks Dead zones Setpoint branching Simple ramp function generator Technology controller PI controllers Velocity/speed calculator Speed/velocity calculator Calculation of variable inertia Multiplexers 2 28 20 4 16 12 14 4 10 5 Decoders/demultiplexers binary to 1 from 8 AND elements with 3 inputs each OR elements with 3 inputs each EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each Inverters NAND elements with 3 inputs each RS flipflop D flipflop Timers Binary signal selector switches 16-bit software counter Logic functions 1 Counter 3 Multiplexer for connectors 1 1 1 Velocity/speed controller, variable moment of inertia 1 10 Controllers 1 Ramp function generator 9 3 1 Characteristics 3 3 10 Control elements 1 1 Content B200 B205 B206 B206 B207 B207 B210 B211 B215, B216 B216 B196 B195 B190 B190 B191 B170 B180 - B189 B165 B160 B161 B161 B155 B155 B156 - B158 B152 B153 Sheet - B100 - Some of the freely assignable function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available Contents of the freely assignable function blocks (technology software S00) 1 Function diagrams Freely assignable function blocks Sheets B100 to B216 03.2015 Sheet B100 Table of contents SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sampling time 1 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 2 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 4 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 20 ms (not firing-pulse-synchronous) Block is not calculated SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 = function block number <2> <1> <1> <1> 299 300 . . U952.99 U952.100 . . . . U951.99 U951.100 U952.01 U952.02 199 200 201 202 . . U950.99 U950.100 U951.01 U951.02 . . 99 100 101 102 . . Function block No. Setting with parameter 1 U950.01 2 U950.02 The execution sequence of the function blocks and their activation can also be made automatic: 3. Automatic setting U969 = 1: Restore standard sequence U960, U961, and U962 are set to the factory setting = 2: Set optimum sequence U960, U961, and U962 are set in such a way that as few deadtimes as possible occur = 3: Set standard setting of the sampling times. U950, U951, and U952 are set to the factory setting! = 4: Automatic activation/deactivation U950, U951, and U952 are set in such a way that the unwired function blocks are deselected and the wired function blocks are selected (activated), if they are not yet selected. The time slice 10 (sampling time 20 ms) is set for all function blocks not previously activated, unchanged for all previously activated function blocks. The execution sequence of the function blocks can be defined with parameters U960, U961, and U962. 2. Execution sequence - B101 - The sampling times must be chosen in such a way that the maximum processor load (n009.02) is indicated on average as <90%. 287 <2> All function blocks for which a time slice <20 is set are activated <1> T0 = Mean distance between 2 firing pulses T0 = 3.33 ms at 50 Hz line frequency T0 = 2.78 ms at 60 Hz line frequency Time slice 1 2 4 10 20 5 time slices are available: For each function block, it is necessary to define in which "time slice" (i.e. with which sampling time) it is processed. (Note: In the factory setting of the parameters, all existing function blocks are activated) Some of the freely assignable function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available 1. Setting and activating the sampling times NOTICE Startup of the freely assignable function blocks 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B101 Startup of the freely assignable function blocks 199 1 200 U099 (0) U099 (0) U099 (0) U099 (0) U099 (0) U099 (0) .98 .99 .100 .01 .02 .03 K9598 K9501 100 fixed values 2 K9599 K9502 K9600 K9503 3 4 6 7 POWER OFF POWER ON 10ms 100ms B9051 B9050 POWER ON Voltage monitor for electronics power supply 5 - B110 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B110 Voltage monitor for electronics power supply, fixed values SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 U104 (0) B U105 (0) B U105 (0) B U106 (0) B U106 (0) B U107 (0) B U107 (0) B U104 (9552) .01 B SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 = "Alarm A054" 1 = "Alarm A034" 1 = "Alarm A053" 1 = "Alarm A033" 1 = "Alarm A020" 1 = "Alarm A024" 1 = "Alarm A019" 1 = "Alarm A023" 259 9 258 8 257 7 256 6 *) 3 5 .05 .06 .07 .08 FS .01 9582 .02 0 .03 0 .04 0 U101 (0) B B B B U101 B B B B .05 .06 .07 .08 FS .01 9580 .02 0 .03 0 .04 0 U100 (0) B B B B U100 B B B B 1 = F020 fault value 1 1 = F020 fault value 2 1 = F020 fault value 3 1 = F020 fault value 4 1 = F024 fault value 1 *) 1 = F024 fault value 2 1 = F024 fault value 3 1 = F024 fault value 4 1 = F019 fault value 3 1 = F019 fault value 4 1 = F019 fault value 1 1 = F019 fault value 2 1 = F023 fault value 3 1 = F023 fault value 4 1 = F023 fault value 1 *) 1 = F023 fault value 2 32 fault message triggers 4 *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available 8 alarm message triggers 1 287 3 286 2 6 U103 (0) B B B B U103 (0) B B B B U102 (0) B B B B U102 (0) B B B B .05 .06 .07 .08 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .01 .02 .03 .04 1 = F054 fault value 3 1 = F054 fault value 4 1 = F054 fault value 1 1 = F054 fault value 2 1 = F034 fault value 1 1 = F034 fault value 2 1 = F034 fault value 3 1 = F034 fault value 4 1 = F053 fault value 1 1 = F053 fault value 2 1 = F053 fault value 3 1 = F053 fault value 4 1 = F033 fault value 1 1 = F033 fault value 2 1 = F033 fault value 3 1 = F033 fault value 4 7 - B115 - 289 5 288 4 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B115 Fault message triggers, alarm message triggers 201 202 U112 (0) K U110 (9210) K 1 3 15 15 15 14 6 7 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 1 9 Bit0 Bit8 11 n011 <1> - B120 - *) B9068 8 B9069 0 B9070 1 B9071 2 B9072 3 B9073 4 B9074 5 B9075 6 B9076 7 B9077 8 B9078 9 B9079 10 <1> 7 segment display of bit fields on n010, n011 and n012 15 7 Bitfield 2 Connector/binector converter 2 B9080 11 B9081 12 B9082 13 B9083 14 6 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available U111 (9211) K 5 *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the 12 <1> n012 *) B9084 10 n010 <1> B9052 B9085 0 B9086 1 B9087 2 B9088 3 B9089 4 B9090 5 B9091 6 B9092 7 B9093 8 B9094 9 B9095 10 B9096 11 B9097 12 B9098 13 B9099 14 Bitfield 3 Connector/binector converter 3 4 B9053 0 B9054 1 B9055 2 B9056 3 B9057 4 B9058 5 B9059 6 B9060 7 B9061 8 B9062 9 B9063 10 B9064 11 B9065 12 B9066 13 B9067 14 Bitfield 1 Connector/binector converter 1 3 connector/binector converter 2 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B120 Connector / binector converters SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FS .01 9170 .02 9173 .03 136 139 .04 .05 141 .06 143 .07 145 .08 147 .09 149 .10 151 .11 153 .12 9361 .13 157 .14 0 .15 9381 .16 211 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 15 15 U115 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 FS 0 0 14 0 0 12 0 514 0 0 0 500 502 510 512 0 U113 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 1 14 14 13 13 12 12 10 9 8 7 6 10 9 8 7 6 Bit field 6 Binector/connector converter 3 11 3 4 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 <1> n013 <1> n015 K9115 *) 15 K9113 *) 13 3 Binector/connector converter Bit field 4 Binector/connector converter 1 11 2 U114 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B FS 0 0 0 0 0 0 506 508 0 0 0 0 16 10 0 504 5 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 Bit field 5 Binector/connector converter 2 11 5 4 3 2 7 15 6 14 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 <1> 7 segment display of bit fields on n013, n014 and n015 1 9 Bit0 Bit8 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available 14 7 1 *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the 15 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 6 0 <1> n014 - B121 - K9114 *) 14 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B121 Binector / connector converters 203 204 2 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 U126 (0) K K K U127 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 U123 (0) K K K U125 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 U122 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 U121 (0) K K K U124 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 U120 (0) K K K 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 K9127 K9126 K9125 K9124 K9123 K9122 K9121 K9120 15 adders / subtractors 1 U122 (0) K K K U121 (0) K K K .04 .05 .06 .04 .05 .06 .04 .05 .06 .01 .02 .03 U131 (0) K K K U120 (0) K K K .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 U130 (0) K K K U129 (0) K K K U128 (0) K K K 3 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 K9134 K9133 K9132 K9131 K9130 K9129 K9128 4 U138 (0) K U137 (0) K U136 (0) K U135 (0) K x x x x y = -x -1 y = -x -1 y = -x -1 y = -x -1 y y y y 4 sign inverters 5 38 K9138 37 K9137 36 K9136 35 K9135 7 U142 (0) K U143 (0) B U140 (0) K U141 (0) B x x y = -x -1 y = -x -1 y y 1 0 1 0 2 switchable sign inverters 6 - B125 - K9141 41 K9140 40 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B125 Adders / subtractors, sign inverters SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .01 x1 .02 x2 .01 x1 .02 x2 U152 (0) K K U153 (0) K K x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% y y y y 53 K9153 52 K9152 51 K9151 50 K9150 factory setting to the drive-specific (crane) control logic and is therefore not freely available *) This function block is wired through its parameter .01 x1 .02 x2 FS .01 x1 9229 .02 x2 401 U151 (0) K K U150 K K 12 multipliers 2 *) 3 U153 (0) K K U152 (0) K K U151 (0) K K U150 (0) K K 4 .03 x1 .04 x2 .03 x1 .04 x2 .03 x1 .04 x2 .03 x1 .04 x2 x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% y y y y 296 K9436 294 K9434 292 K9432 290 K9430 5 6 U153 (0) K K U152 (0) K K U151 (0) K K U150 (0) K K .05 x1 .06 x2 .05 x1 .06 x2 .05 x1 .06 x2 .05 x1 .06 x2 x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% x1 * x2 100% 7 y y y y 297 K9437 295 K9435 293 K9433 291 K9431 - B130 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B130 Multipliers 205 1 206 .01 x1 .02 x2 .01 x1 .02 x2 U146 (1) K K U147 (1) K K x1 *100% x2 x1 *100% x2 x1 *100% x2 y y y With division by 0 (x2 = 0): when x1 > 0: y = +199.99% when x1 = 0: y = 0.00% when x1 < 0: y = -199.99% .01 x1 .02 x2 U145 (1) K K 6 dividers 2 47 K9147 46 K9146 45 K9145 U147 (1) K K U146 (1) K K U145 (1) K K 3 .03 x1 .04 x2 .03 x1 .04 x2 .03 x1 .04 x2 x1 * 100% x2 x1 * 100% x2 x1 * 100% x2 y y y 4 44 K9144 43 K9143 42 K9142 5 7 .01 x1 .02 x2 .03 x3 .01 x1 .02 x2 .03 x3 .01 x1 .02 x2 .03 x3 x4= x1 * x2 x4= x1 * x2 x4= x1 * x2 With division by 0 (x3 = 0): when x4 > 0: y = +199.99% when x4 = 0: y = 0.00% when x4 < 0: y = -199.99% U157 (1) K K K U156 (1) K K K U155 (1) K K K y= x4 / x3 y= x4 / x3 y= x4 / x3 x2 y y y x3 57 K9157 56 K9156 55 K9155 y 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 40% 50% 80% -200% -200% -200% -200% x1 Examples: x4 (32Bit) x4 (32Bit) x4 (32Bit) - B131 - 8 3 high-resolution multipliers / dividers 6 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B131 Dividers, High-resolution multipliers / dividers SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U180.02 (100,00) U178.02 (100,00) U176.02 (100,00) K K9175 -1 K K9178 -1 K K K9260 K9261 -1 U179 K K K9177 U177 K K U175 K K9174 3 limiters 3 FS .04 0 .05 9260 .06 9261 FS .04 0 .05 9177 .06 9178 FS .04 0 .05 9174 .06 9175 4 B- x B+ B- x B+ B- x B+ B- y B- y B- y 214 B+ 213 B+ 212 B+ x x x X<B- y X>B+ X<B- y X>B+ X<B- y X>B+ 5 B9296 B9295 B9159 B9158 B9157 B9156 K9262 K9179 K9176 6 7 - B134 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B134 Limiters 207 1 208 3 U169 (0) K U166 (0) K U163 (0) K U160 (0) K 2 -1 2 -1 2 -1 2 -1 0 1 3 -1 U170 (0) 0 1 3 -1 U167 (0) 0 1 3 -1 U164 (0) 0 1 3 -1 U161 (0) Filter time 0...10000ms U171 (0) Filter time 0...10000ms U168 (0) Filter time 0...10000ms U165 (0) Filter time 0...10000ms U162 (0) K9163 63 K9162 62 K9161 61 K9160 60 4 absolute-value generators with filter 2 4 U180 (100,00) U178 (100,00) U176 (100,00) K9172 K9171 K9169 K9168 K K9166 -1 -1 K K -1 U179 K K K U177 K K U175 K K9165 3 limiters 5 FS .01 0 .02 9171 .03 9172 FS .01 0 .02 9168 .03 9169 FS .01 0 .02 9165 .03 9166 6 B- x B+ B- x B+ B- x B+ B- y B- y B- y 67 B+ 66 B+ 65 B+ x x x 7 X<B- y X>B+ X<B- y X>B+ X<B- y X>B+ B9155 B9154 B9153 B9152 B9151 B9150 - B135 - K9173 K9170 K9167 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B135 Absolute-value generators with filter, limiters SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 71 U189 K K 70 U185 K K FS .01 0 .02 9183 FS .01 0 .02 9181 Filter time 0...10000ms U191 (0) <1> Example: -50% < -40% K9183 U190 (0,00) K9181 U186 (0,00) Filter time 0...10000ms U187 (0) B A U192 K9182 B A U188 K9180 3 limit-value monitors with filter 1 0 0 B 0 0 0 U188 U188 B U192 B U192 U192/2 B B U192 U188 U188/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U192 (0,00) B 0 Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U188 (0,00) 3 A A A A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B 4 B9165 B9164 B9163 B9162 B9161 B9160 K9185 U194 (0,00) 5 72 U193 K K FS .01 0 .02 9185 Filter time 0...10000ms U195 (0) 6 B A U196 K9184 B 0 0 0 U196 U196 B U196 U196/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U196 (0,00) 7 A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B B9168 B9167 B9166 - B136 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B136 Limit-value monitors with filter 209 210 2 3 74 U200 K K 73 U197 K K *) FS .01 9187 .02 167 *) FS .01 167 .02 9186 B A B A U202 U199 0 0 B 0 0 0 U199 B U202 B U202 U202/2 B B U202 U199 U199/2 B B Hysteresis 0.00...100.00 U202 (0.00) B 0 U199 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the K9187 U201 (-75.00) K9186 U198 (75.00) Hysteresis 0.00...100.00 U199 (0.00) 4 Limit-value monitor without filtering 1 A A A A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B B9174 B9173 B9172 B9171 B9170 B9169 4 K9189 U207 (0.00) U204 (0.00) 5 76 U206 K K 75 U203 K K K9188 FS .01 0 .02 9189 *) FS .01 401 .02 166 B A B A U208 U205 0 0 B 0 0 0 U205 U205 B U208 B U208 U208/2 B B U208 U205 U205/2 B B Hysteresis 0.00...100.00 U208 (0.00) B 0 Hysteresis 0.00..100.00 U205 (0.00) 7 <1> Example: -50% < -40% 6 A A A A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B - B137 - B9180 B9179 B9178 B9177 B9176 B9175 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B137 Limit-value monitors without filter SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 78 U213 K K 77 U210 K K FS .01 0 .02 9191 FS .01 0 .02 9190 B A B A <1> Example: -50% < -40% K9191 U214 (0,00) K9190 U211 (0,00) U215 U212 0 0 B 0 0 0 U212 U212 B U215 B U215 U215/2 B B U215 U212 U212/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U215 (0,00) B 0 Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U212 (0,00) 3 limit-value monitors without filter 1 A A A A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B B9186 B9185 B9184 B9183 B9182 B9181 4 K9192 U217 (0,00) 5 79 U216 K K FS .01 0 .02 9192 6 B A U218 B 0 0 0 U218 U218 B U218 U218/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U218 (0,00) 7 A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B - B138 - B9189 B9188 B9187 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B138 Limit-value monitors without filter 211 1 212 U172 (0) K U172 (0) K .02 .01 4 averagers 2 x x averaging over n values n Number of values for averaging U173.02 (1) averaging over n values n Number of values for averaging U173.01 (1) 3 y y 17 16 K9456 K9455 4 U172 (0) K U172 (0) K 5 .04 .03 x x averaging over n values n Number of values for averaging U173.04 (1) averaging over n values n Number of values for averaging U173.03 (1) 6 y y 19 18 K9458 K9457 7 - B139 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B139 Averagers SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 .01 .02 .03 x1 x2 x3 MAX y SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .01 .02 .03 x1 x2 x3 MIN y y = minimum of x1, x2, x3 (e.g. -50% lower than -40%) U221 (0) K K K Minimum selection y = maximum of x1, x2, x3 (e.g. -40% greater than -50%) U220 (0) K K K Maximum selection 1 K9194 81 K9193 80 U221 (0) K K K U220 (0) K K K 3 .04 .05 .06 .04 .05 .06 x1 x2 x3 x1 x2 x3 MIN MAX y y 174 K9463 177 K9460 4 U221 (0) K K K U220 (0) K K K .07 .08 .09 .07 .08 .09 5 x1 x2 x3 x1 x2 x3 MIN MAX y y K9464 178 K9461 175 6 U221 (0) K K K U220 (0) K K K .10 .11 .12 .10 .11 .12 7 x1 x2 x3 x1 x2 x3 MIN MAX y y - B140 - K9465 179 K9462 176 8 03.2015 Sheet B140 Maximum selections, minimum selections Function diagrams Sheet B145 Tracking / storage elements, connector memories 213 1 214 3 .01 .02 .03 x RESET (y=0) STORE y Priority: 1. RESET 2. TRACK 3. STORE 82 K9195 <1> Power On Mode U224 (0) 4 U226 (0) B B B U225 (0) K 5 RESET (y=0) SET (y=x) 84 K9197 <2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply POWER ON <2> U228 (0) K U229 (0) B 2 connector-memories POWER ON <2> U230 (0) K .01 .02 .03 U231 (0) B <1> Power On Mode: U224/U227=0: No "non-volatile" storage: Zero appears at output when voltage recovers U224/U227=1: "Non-volatile" storage: When power is disconnected or fails, the current output value is stored and output again when voltage is reconnected/recovers. U223 (0) B B B U222 (0) K TRACK 1 y=x freeze y 2 tracking / storage elements 2 RESET (y=0) STORE RESET (y=0) SET (y=x) x TRACK 1 y=x freeze y 6 y 85 K9198 Priority: 1. RESET 2. TRACK 3. STORE 83 K9196 <1> Power On Mode U227 (0) 7 - B145 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 FS .01 9113 .02 3001 FS .01 9114 .02 3003 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FS .01 11 .02 3002 FS .01 1 .02 3 FS .01 9150 .02 9213 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 K9214 94 K9213 93 K9212 92 K9211 91 K9210 90 *) *) *) *) *) drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the U248 K K U249 (9083) B U246 K K U247 (9064) B U244 K K U245 (3110) B U242 K K U243 (3110) B U240 K K U241 (3110) B 15 Connector selector switches 2 .01 .02 .01 .01 .02 U256 (0) K K U259 (0) B U258 (0) K K .01 .01 .02 U254 (0) K K U257 (0) B .01 .01 .02 U252 (0) K K U255 (0) B .01 FS .01 9214 .02 510 .01 U253 (0) B U250 K K U251 (0) B 4 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 K9219 99 K9218 98 K9217 97 K9216 96 K9215 95 5 *) U258 (0) K K .03 .04 .02 .03 .04 U256 (0) K K U259 (0) B .02 .03 .04 .02 .03 .04 U257 (0) B U254 (0) K K U255 (0) B U252 (0) K K .02 .03 .04 U250 (0) K K U253 (0) B .02 U251 (0) B 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 7 K9269 229 K9268 199 K9267 198 K9266 197 K9265 196 - B150 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B150 Connector changeover switches 215 216 2 3 .03 .04 69 .01 .02 B A B A 0 0 0 U182.01 B U182.02 B 0 0 0 U182.02 U182.02 B A A A U182.02 U182.02/2 B B A A A U182.01 U182.01/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U182.02 (0,00) B U182.01 Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U182.01 (0,00) U182.01 <1> Example: -50% < -40% U181 (0) KK KK U181 (0) KK KK 68 A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B Limit-value monitors (for double-word connectors) High-resolution blocks 1 4 B9685 B9684 B9683 B9682 B9681 B9680 5 .03 LOW .04 HIGH .01 LOW .02 HIGH KK9499 299 KK9498 298 U132 (0) KK KK KK U132 (0) KK KK KK .04 .05 .06 .01 .02 .03 49 48 Adders / subtractors (for double-word connectors) U098 (0) K K U098 (0) K K Connector-type converters 6 K9493 KK9492 K9491 KK9490 7 - B151 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B151 High-resolution blocks SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Position 2 Set value Set Position 2 Reset Position actual value 2 Position 1 Set value Set Position 1 Reset Position actual value 1 .01 .02 .03 .04 .02 U672 (9472) .02 KK U671 (0) B B U670 (0) KK U672 (9471) .01 KK U671 (0) B B U670 (46) .01 KK 1 POWER ON <2> 0 U674 1 0 POWER ON <2> 1 <1> U674.F(10000) * U673 transformation ratio U673.F(10000) <1> 0 0 1 RESET y=initial value <3> SET (y=x) Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET <3> RESET y=initial value SET (y=x) Position/positional deviation acquisition 1 54 U671 (0) B B U676 (9474) KK U675 (0) B 5 .05 .06 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 6 POWER ON <2> Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET RESET (y=0) SET (y=x) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) U677 (0) .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 KK9474 KK9473 KK9472 KK9471 The output connectors are calculated by the following formula: KK9471 = 65536*U677.002 + U677.001 KK9472 = 65536*U677.004 + U677.003 KK9473 = 65536*U677.006 + U677.005 KK9474 = 65536*U677.008 + U677.007 That makes high-resolution setting possible. 7 Fixed values for set values <3> Initial value is dependent on U678 = 0: Initial value = 0 = 1: Initial value is set such that on POWER ON KK9481 or KK9482 assumes whatever its setting value was before the electronics supply was disconnected. <2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply <1> U873 must be set less than or equal to U674 (otherwise F058 is output with fault value 14) KK9482 Positional deviation U672 (9473) .03 KK Set value Set Positional deviation Reset Offset positional deviation Subtract offset positional deviation KK9481 4 - B152 - K9484 KK9483 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B152 Position/positional deviation acquisition 217 U680 (9483) KK 58 Root extractor 2 3 U682 0 U681 Threshold U681 (1) U683.001 U683.002 Definition of the root function x value y value U683.001 U684.001 U684.001 218 U684.002 1 5 U681 U682 Hysteresis U682 (1) Output Input Definition of the maximum gradient x value y value U683.002 U684.002 4 7 8 1 B9687 B9686 K9485 U683.002 and U684.002: Setting of the maximum gradient With parameter U683.002 you can define at which input value the limitation straight line will take on value U684.002. - B153 - U683.001 and U684.001: Setting of the magnitude of the root function With parameter U683.001 you can define at which input value the output of the root function will take on value U684.001. Parameters: 6 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B153 Root extractor SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 x y Setting value Set integrator Stop .01 integrator .02 x U272 (0) K 1 y t y 0 t y K9220 100 3 U267 (0) K U266 (0) B B U264 (0) K -1 103 K9224 K9223 U275 (0) K s (transfer function: G(s) = Tv * ------------ ) 1 + s T1 Tn Derivative action time (Tv) Filter time (T1) (0...1000ms) (0...1000ms) U273 (0) U274 (0) 3 DT1 elements U263 (0) K U262 (0) B B U260 (0) K 2 Integral-action time (Tn) (10...65000ms) U261 (10) 3 integrators 1 x x y 1 0 y t y Derivative action time (Tv) Filter time (T1) (0...1000ms) (0...1000ms) U276 (0) U277 (0) Setting value Set integrator Tn t Integral-action time (Tn) (10...65000ms) U265 (10) Stop .01 integrator .02 4 -1 104 y 5 K9226 K9225 K9221 101 U278 (0) K K U271 (0) U270 (0) B B U268 (0) K 6 x y 1 Tn 0 t y t y Derivative action time (Tv) Filter time (T1) (0...1000ms) (0...1000ms) U279 (0) U280 (0) Setting value Set integrator Stop .01 integrator .02 x Integral-action time (Tn) (10...65000ms) U269 (10) 7 y -1 105 - B155 - K9228 K9227 K9222 102 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B155 Integrators, DT1 elements 219 220 2 .01 .01 U551 (1) K .02 U550 (0) K .02 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.02 (100ms) U550 (0) K Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.01 (100ms) U551 (1) K Tv Tv 4 LEAD / LAG blocks 1 .01 .02 Filter time 1...10000ms U554.02 (100ms) U553 (1) K Filter time 1...10000ms U554.01 (100ms) U553 (1) K T1 T1 3 271 270 K9401 K9400 4 U551 (1) K .03 .03 U551 (1) K .04 U550 (0) K .04 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.04 (100ms) U550 (0) K Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.03 (100ms) 5 Tv Tv .03 .04 Filter time 1...10000ms U554.04 (100ms) U553 (1) K Filter time 1...10000ms U554.03 (100ms) U553 (1) K 6 T1 T1 273 272 K9403 K9402 G(s) = 8 - B156 - 1 + sTv --------1 + sT1 Transfer function: 7 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B156 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 .05 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .05 U551 (1) K .06 U550 (0) K .06 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.06 (100ms) U550 (0) K Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.05 (100ms) U551 (1) K Tv Tv 4 LEAD / LAG blocks 1 .05 .06 Filter time 1...10000ms U554.06 (100ms) U553 (1) K Filter time 1...10000ms U554.05 (100ms) U553 (1) K T1 T1 3 275 274 K9405 K9404 4 U551 (1) K .07 .07 U551 (1) K .08 U550 (0) K .08 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.08 (100ms) U550 (0) K Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.07 (100ms) 5 Tv Tv .07 .08 Filter time 1...10000ms U554.08 (100ms) U553 (1) K Filter time 1...10000ms U554.07 (100ms) U553 (1) K 6 T1 T1 277 276 K9407 K9406 G(s) = 8 - B157 - 1 + sTv --------1 + sT1 Transfer function: 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B157 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) 221 1 222 U551 (1) K 3 .09 U551 (1) K .10 U550 (0) K .10 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.10 (100ms) .09 Derivative action time 0...10000ms U552.09 (100ms) U550 (0) K 2 LEAD / LAG blocks 2 Tv Tv .09 .10 Filter time 1...10000ms U554.10 (100ms) U553 (1) K Filter time 1...10000ms U554.09 (100ms) U553 (1) K 4 T1 T1 279 278 K9409 K9408 5 6 G(s) = 1 + sTv --------1 + sT1 Transfer function: 7 - B158 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B158 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 x 23 y1 x x10 +200% 10 U282.01 to .10 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y y K9229 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 x x U281.02 (0) K U281.03 (0) K 23 y y1 x10 +200% 10 U282.21 to .30 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y10 x y y 281 K9410 U284.03 (0) K U284.02 (0) K x x 1 -200% x1 23 y y1 K9411 23 y y1 x x10 +200% 10 U285.21 to .30 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y10 x x10 +200% 10 Y values U286.11 to .20 (0) y10 x 5 x10 +200% Y values U286.21 to .30 (0) x10 +200% x y1 10 Y values U283.21 to .30 (0) y1 10 23 y U285.01 to .10 (0) X values 1 x -200% x1 y10 Y values U286.01 to .10 (0) U285.11 to .20 (0) X values 23 y U284.01 (0) K 4 U282.11 to .20 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y10 280 drive-specific (crane) control logic and is therefore not freely available Y values U283.11 to .20 (0) 3 106 *) *) This function block is wired through its parameter factory setting to the U281.01(9212) K y10 Y values U283.01 to .10 (0) 9 characteristic blocks 1 y y y K9413 283 K9412 282 K9230 107 U287.03 (0) K U287.02 (0) K U287.01 (0) K 6 x x x 23 y y1 23 y1 23 y1 x x10 +200% 10 U288.21 to .30 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y Y values U289.21 to .30 (0) y10 x x10 +200% 10 U288.11 to .20 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y Y values U289.11 to .20 (0) y10 x x10 +200% 10 U288.01 to .10 (0) X values 1 -200% x1 y10 Y values U289.01 to .10 (0) 7 y y y - B160 - K9415 285 K9414 284 K9231 108 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B160 Characteristic blocks 223 1 224 x x U294 (0) K x U292 (0) K K U290 (0) y z y z -z y z Dead zone z U295 (0,00) -z Dead zone z U293 (0,00) -z Dead zone z U291 (0,00) x x x 3 dead zones 2 y y y 3 K9234 111 K9233 110 K9232 109 4 5 U296 (0) K x y U299 -U298 100% -U297 x Maximum speed U298(100,00) U299 (0,00) Hysteresis -100% U297 U298 Minimum speed U297(0,00) y 7 Setpoint branching 6 K9235 112 - B161 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B161 Dead zones, Setpoint branching SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FS .01 0 .02 0 .03 1 1 freeze y TH 1 0 y=0 1 0s TR POWER ON <2> 1 = Enable simple ramp-function generator 0 = Reset simple ramp-function generator Stop simple ramp-function generator x 0 0s y=x y Q B9191 B9190 K9236 0 = Ramp-function generator initial run Priority: 1. S (SET) 2. R (RESET) S R 113 6 <2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply <1> When U301.01 = 9191, the ramp-function generator operates only once after it has been enabled (edge log. "0" to "1") U301 B B B U300 (0) K 5 Ramp-up time Ramp-down time U302 (0,00) U303 (0,00) Bypass simple ramp-function generator <1> Simple ramp-function generator 2 7 - B165 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B165 Simple ramp-function generator 225 226 1 0 n017 n016 X X2 K9240 1 0 K9241 U502.F (0) <1> K9244 + - Kp-factor Y U483.F(0) 1 0 4 U505 (0) K U506 (0) B U500 (0) B 0 K9245 1 K9246 K9242 Setting value for I component Set I component Kp 1 Tn 0 1000 1 U494.F (3,000) x K9249 U508.F (100,0) U507 (1) K U509 (9252) K U510.F (100,0) Stop I component U495.F(0) 6 U503.F (1) U504.F (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component technology controller U488.F (3,00) U499.F (-100,00) 114 5 Enable technology controller D component U482.F(0,000) U498.F (100,00) Droop injection U496 (0) B 0% U497.F(0,0) Technology controller Filter time U481.F(0,00s) 1000 1 n018 3 <1> 0 = D component acts only in actual-value channel 1 = Normal PID controller: D component is applied for control deviation K9243 0% X 0% 1 0 Setpoint U490.F U491.F (0,00) (100,00) 0,00...200,00% Tresholds X1 2 Filter time [s] U487.F(0,00) Y1 Y2 Y Kp adaptation U485.F (0,00) .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 Inject additional setpoint U486 (0) B Setpoint U484 (0) K K K K U480 (0) K K K K Actual value Kp-factors 0,10...30,00 U492.F U493.F (1,00) (1,00) U489 (0) K 1 K9248 K9247 7 y * -1 n019 U512.F (100,0) U511 (1) K I component P component - B170 - Controller at output limit B9499 K9251 Negative limit K9253 K9254 Technology controller output K9250 Positive limit K9252 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B170 Technology controller SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .01 .01 Filter time U535.01 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 260 .01 .11 .21 .31 .41 K9300 X .01 1 = set I component <4> .11 1 = set output <2> .01 setting value for I component .11 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 1 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .01 .01 Kp PI-controller U537.01 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9303 K9302 K9301 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9305 Positive limit K9306 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9670 Negative limit K9307 Controller at output limit B9650 - B180 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9304 PI-controller output B9660 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.01 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9307) U544 (9306) .01 K .01 U543.01 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9305) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.01 (1) U541.01 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.01 (3,000 s) 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B180 PI controller 1 227 228 .02 .02 Filter time U535.02 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 261 .02 .12 .22 .32 .42 K9310 X .02 1 = set I component <4> .12 1 = set output <2> .02 setting value for I component .12 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 2 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .02 .02 Kp PI-controller U537.02 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9313 K9312 K9311 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9315 Positive limit K9316 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9671 Negative limit K9317 Controller at output limit B9651 - B181 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9314 PI-controller output B9661 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.02 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9317) U544 (9316) .02 K .02 U543.02 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9315) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.02 (1) U541.02 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.02 (3,000 s) 4 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B181 PI controller 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .03 .03 Filter time U535.03 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 262 .03 .13 .23 .33 .43 K9320 X .03 1 = set I component <4> .13 1 = set output <2> .03 setting value for I component .13 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 3 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .03 .03 Kp PI-controller U537.03 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9323 K9322 K9321 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9325 Positive limit K9326 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9672 Negative limit K9327 Controller at output limit B9652 - B182 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9324 PI-controller output B9662 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.03 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9327) U544 (9326) .03 K .03 U543.03 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9325) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.03 (1) U541.03 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.03 (3,000 s) 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B182 PI controller 3 229 230 .04 .04 Filter time U535.04 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 263 .04 .14 .24 .34 .44 K9330 X .04 1 = set I component <4> .14 1 = set output <2> .04 setting value for I component .14 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 4 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .04 .04 Kp PI-controller U537.04 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9333 K9332 K9331 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9335 Positive limit K9336 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9673 Negative limit K9337 Controller at output limit B9653 - B183 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9334 PI-controller output B9663 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.04 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9337) U544 (9336) .04 K .04 U543.04 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9335) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.04 (1) U541.04 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.04 (3,000 s) 4 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B183 PI controller 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .05 .05 Filter time U535.05 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 264 .05 .15 .25 .35 .45 K9340 X .05 1 = set I component <4> .15 1 = set output <2> .05 setting value for I component .15 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 5 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .05 .05 Kp PI-controller U537.05 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9343 K9342 K9341 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9345 Positive limit K9346 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9674 Negative limit K9347 Controller at output limit B9654 - B184 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9344 PI-controller output B9664 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.05 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9347) U544 (9346) .05 K .05 U543.05 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9345) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.05 (1) U541.05 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.05 (3,000 s) 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B184 PI controller 5 231 232 .06 .06 Filter time U535.06 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 265 .06 .16 .26 .36 .46 K9350 X .06 1 = set I component <4> .16 1 = set output <2> .06 setting value for I component .16 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 6 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .06 .06 Kp PI-controller U537.06 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9353 K9352 K9351 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9355 Positive limit K9356 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9675 Negative limit K9357 Controller at output limit B9655 - B185 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9354 PI-controller output B9665 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.06 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9357) U544 (9356) .06 K .06 U543.06 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9355) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.06 (1) U541.06 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.06 (3,000 s) 4 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B185 PI controller 6 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .07 .07 Filter time U535.07 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 266 .07 .17 .27 .37 .47 K9360 X .07 1 = set I component <4> .17 1 = set output <2> .07 setting value for I component .17 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 7 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .07 .07 Kp PI-controller U537.07 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9363 K9362 K9361 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9365 Positive limit K9366 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9676 Negative limit K9367 Controller at output limit B9656 - B186 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9364 PI-controller output B9666 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.07 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9367) U544 (9366) .07 K .07 U543.07 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9365) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.07 (1) U541.07 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.07 (3,000 s) 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B186 PI controller 7 233 234 .08 .08 Filter time U535.08 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 267 .08 .18 .28 .38 .48 K9370 X .08 1 = set I component <4> .18 1 = set output <2> .08 setting value for I component .18 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 8 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .08 .08 Kp PI-controller U537.08 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9373 K9372 K9371 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9375 Positive limit K9376 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9677 Negative limit K9377 Controller at output limit B9657 - B187 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9374 PI-controller output B9667 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.08 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9377) U544 (9376) .08 K .08 U543.08 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9375) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.08 (1) U541.08 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.08 (3,000 s) 4 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B187 PI controller 8 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 .09 .09 Filter time U535.09 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 268 .09 .19 .29 .39 .49 K9380 X .09 1 = set I component <4> .19 1 = set output <2> .09 setting value for I component .19 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 9 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .09 .09 Kp PI-controller U537.09 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9383 K9382 K9381 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9385 Positive limit K9386 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9678 Negative limit K9387 Controller at output limit B9658 - B188 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9384 PI-controller output B9668 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.09 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9387) U544 (9386) .09 K .09 U543.09 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9385) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.09 (1) U541.09 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.09 (3,000 s) 4 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B188 PI controller 9 235 236 .10 .10 Filter time U535.10 (0 ms) U534 (1) K 269 .10 .20 .30 .40 .50 K9390 X .10 1 = set I component <4> .20 1 = set output <2> .10 setting value for I component .20 setting value for PI-controller output U533 (0) K K 0 = disable PI-controller <1> 1 = freeze I component <5> 1 = freeze output <3> 1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6> 1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7> 2 U532 (0) B B Set PI-controller U531 (0) B B B B B T1 PI-controller 10 Enable PI-controller U530 (0) K 1 .10 .10 Kp PI-controller U537.10 (3,00) U536 (1) K U538 (1) K 3 0 1 0 0 1 Tn Y K9393 K9392 K9391 * -1 6 1 7 8 K9395 Positive limit K9396 1 1 + sTn --------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1 sTn B9679 Negative limit K9397 Controller at output limit B9659 - B189 - Priority: 1. disable PI-controller 2. set output 3. freeze output 4. set I component 5. freeze I component 6. freeze I component in pos. direction 7. freeze I component in neg. direction Controller at neg. output limit K9394 PI-controller output B9669 Controller at pos. output limit G(s) = Transfer function: <5> freeze I component: P component active I component is frozen output = P component + I component <6> freeze I component in pos. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is positive, I component is frozen output = P component + I component <7> freeze I component in neg. direction: P component active if controller input (X) is negative, I component is frozen output = P component + I component U545.10 (100,0) Stop I component in neg.direction and limit it to negative limit (K9397) U544 (9396) .10 K .10 U543.10 (100,0) U542 (1) K Stop I component in pos.direction and limit it to positive limit (K9395) I component P component 5 <1> disable PI-controller: P component = 0 I component = 0 output = 0 <2> set output: P component active I component = setting value - P component output = setting value <3> freeze output: P component active I component = frozen output - P component output is frozen <4> set I component: P component active I component = setting value output = P component + I component U540.10 (1) U541.10 (1) 0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I component component 1 sTn 0 Kp U539.10 (3,000 s) 4 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B189 PI controller 10 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U516 (0) K U515 (0) K 3 U517 (0) K Diameter Min. diameter (10,0...6553,5mm) U518.F (6500,0) Setpoint velocity (-32,768...32,767 m/s) n022 Normalization U523 (1638) (10...60000mm) Normalization U522 (16,38) (0,01...327,67m/s) Actual speed n020 Velocity / speed calculator 2 v set n act 115 U519.F (1,00) Gear ratio i Rated speed U520.F (1450) n rated vset i nset = ----------------- 100% D p nrated Velocity-speed calculator D 5 D p nrated nact vact = ----------------- -------i 100% Speed-velocity calculator 4 nset v act Setpoint speed n023 Actual velocity (-32,768...32,767 m/s) n021 6 Normalization U521 (16,38) (0,01...327,67m/s) 7 K9257 K9256 - B190 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B190 Velocity / speed calculator 237 1 238 U525 (1) K K K K .01 .02 .03 .04 Variable inertia 2 U529 (1,00) (0,10...100,00) Normalization of max. diameter U528 (10000) (10...60000mm) Normalization diameter of sleeve U527 (10000) (10...60000mm) Normalization diameter U526 (10000) (10...60000mm) 3 K Dmax DCore D 4 D4 - DCore4 JV = ------------------ * K Dmax4 Variable inertia 116 5 6 JV K9258 7 - B191 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B191 Calculation variable inertia SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .04 .05 .06 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 U310 (0) B B B U311 (0) K K K K K K K K U310 (0) B B B U312 (0) K K K K K K K K 3 Multiplexers 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 B3 B2 B1 B3 B2 B1 3 Y Y K9451 87 K9450 86 4 U313 (0) K K K K K K K K U310 (0) B B B 5 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .07 .08 .09 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 B3 B2 B1 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Y B3 B2 B1 6 Y K9452 88 7 - B195 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B195 Multiplexer 239 1 240 3 K9442 K9443 K9444 Maximum counter value 0...65535 U315.02 (65535) Counter setting value 0...65535 U315.03 (0) Counter start value 0...65535 U315.04 (0) K K K U316 K 9444 9443 9442 POWER ON from sheet B110 Start value Setting value <2> <2> Note: The sampling time and sequence of the upstream signal processor must also be taken into account <3> Example: The counter operates in the time slice 1 max. counting frequency = 300 Hz <1> 4 <2> The start and setting values are limited to the range (minimum value..maximum value) .04 .03 Maximum value Minimum value FS .01 9441 .02 Enable counter 1 B Set counter .04 .05 0 B Stop counter 0 B Count down 0 .03 Count up <3> .02 FS .01 0 B U317 B <1> The counter is set to the start value after POWER ON K9441 Minimum counter value 0...65535 U315.01 (0) Priority: 1. Enable counter 2. Set counter 3. Stop counter 4. Count up / down Maximum counting frequency = 1 / scanning time 16-bit software counter 2 1 1 & & 5 Underflow Overflow (Binary code) OUT Underflow Overflow Count down Count up Counter output 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 3 4 7 3 2 7 7 6 5 4 3 B9291 B9290 2 Binary output 0...65535 n314 Example: Minimum value = 2, Maximum value = 7 Set counter to start value Set counter to setting value Set counter to minimum value DOWN UP 89 6 7 7 6 5 4 K9445 - B196 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B196 16-bit software counter SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 3 4 118 U318 (0) B B B SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 B9255 B9256 B9257 Q5 /Q5 Q6 /Q6 Q7 /Q7 B9267 B9266 B9265 B9264 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9254 Q4 /Q4 B9263 /Q0 /Q1 /Q2 /Q3 /Q4 /Q5 /Q6 /Q7 B9253 Q3 /Q3 B9262 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B9252 Q2 /Q2 B9261 B9260 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 B9251 B9250 Q1 /Q1 Q0 /Q0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 i0 i1 i2 i2-i1-i0 .01 .02 .03 2 decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 2 119 U319 (0) B B B 5 .01 .02 .03 i0 i1 i2 6 Q7 /Q7 Q6 /Q6 Q5 /Q5 Q4 /Q4 Q3 /Q3 Q2 /Q2 Q1 /Q1 Q0 /Q0 B9277 B9276 B9275 B9274 B9273 B9272 B9271 B9270 7 B9287 B9286 B9285 B9284 B9283 B9282 B9281 B9280 - B200 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B200 Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 241 242 2 3 FS .01 9081 .02 250 .03 9456 FS .01 9063 .02 9065 .03 9551 FS .01 9064 .02 9066 .03 1 FS .01 9057 .02 151 .03 145 FS .01 149 .02 9451 .03 9452 FS .01 9354 .02 9355 .03 1 U321 B B B U322 B B B U323 B B B U324 B B B U325 B B B U326 B B B & & & & & & & U328 B B B U329 B B B U330 B B B U331 B B B U332 B B B U333 B B B 121 *) 122 *) *) *) *) 126 *) B9356 B9355 125 B9354 124 B9353 123 B9352 B9351 B9350 U327 B B B 120 *) FS .01 9064 .02 9075 .03 9551 FS .01 9063 .02 9074 .03 1 FS .01 255 .02 9381 .03 1 FS .01 9065 .02 9066 .03 9551 FS .01 9470 .02 9456 .03 1 FS .01 9380 .02 9553 .03 170 FS .01 9356 .02 9367 .03 1 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the FS .01 14 .02 9054 .03 1 U320 B B B 28 AND elements, each with 3 inputs 1 & & & & & & & B9363 133 B9362 132 B9361 131 B9360 130 B9359 129 B9358 128 B9357 127 4 U340 (1) B B B *) .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 FS .01 9382 .02 9083 .03 1 U339 (1) B B B U338 B B B *) FS .01 9456 .02 105 .03 9059 FS .01 9361 .02 9080 .03 1 FS .01 250 .02 9455 .03 1 FS .01 9454 .02 9361 .03 1 *) U337 B B B U336 B B B U335 B B B U334 B B B *) *) *) *) 5 & & & & & & & B9370 140 B9369 139 B9368 138 B9367 137 B9366 136 B9365 135 B9364 134 6 *) *) *) *) *) U347 (1) B B B U346 (1) B B B U345 (1) B B B U344 (1) B B B U343 (1) B B B U342 (1) B B B U341 (1) B B B .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 7 & & & & & & & - B205 - B9377 147 B9376 146 B9375 145 B9374 144 B9373 143 B9372 142 B9371 141 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B205 AND elements SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FS .01 9063 .02 9064 .03 0 U354 B B B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9386 156 B9385 155 B9384 154 *) B9383 153 *) B9382 152 *) B9381 U363 (0) B B B U362 (0) B B B U361 (0) B B B U360 (0) B B B U359 (0) B B B U358 (0) B B B 151 *) B9380 U357 (0) B B B 150 *) .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the .01 .02 .03 FS .01 9365 .02 9366 .03 0 U353 B B B U356 (0) B B B FS .01 9362 .02 9363 .03 0 U352 B B B .01 .02 .03 FS .01 9554 .02 9360 .03 0 U351 B B B U355 (0) B B B FS .01 9352 .02 9353 .03 0 U350 B B B 20 OR elements, each with 3 inputs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9393 163 B9392 162 B9391 161 B9390 160 B9389 159 B9388 158 B9387 157 4 U369 (0) B B B U368 (0) B B B U367 (0) B B B U366 (0) B B B U365 (0) B B B U364 (0) B B B .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9399 169 B9398 168 B9397 167 B9396 166 B9395 165 B9394 164 6 8 U373 (0) B B U372 (0) B B U371 (0) B B U370 (0) B B .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 =1 =1 =1 =1 - B206 - B9198 173 B9197 172 B9196 171 B9195 170 4 EXCLUSIVE OR elements, each with 2 inputs 7 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B206 OR elements, EXCLUSIVE OR elements 243 244 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9457 187 B9456 186 B9455 *) 185 *) B9454 184 *) B9453 183 *) B9452 182 *) B9451 181 *) B9450 180 *) 2 U395 (0) B U394 (0) B U393 (0) B U392 (0) B U391 (0) B U390 (0) B U389 (0) B U388 (0) B 3 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the U387 (0) B U386 (9384) B U385 (9080) B U384 (9358) B U383 (9356) B U382 (189) B U381 (186) B U380 (9081) B 16 Inverters 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B9465 195 B9464 194 B9463 193 B9462 192 B9461 191 B9460 190 B9459 189 B9458 188 4 6 7 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 & & & & & & B9475 205 B9474 204 B9473 203 B9472 202 B9471 201 B9470 200 *) U411 (1) B B B U410 (1) B B B U409 (1) B B B U408 (1) B B B U407 (1) B B B U406 (1) B B B drive-specific (crane) control logic and is therefore not freely available *) This function block is wired through its parameter factory setting to the U405 (1) B B B U404 (1) B B B U403 (1) B B B U402 (1) B B B .01 .02 .03 FS .01 9065 .02 9066 .03 9551 U401 (1) B B B U400 B B B .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 12 NAND elements, each with 3 inputs 5 & & & & & & - B207 - B9481 211 B9480 210 B9479 209 B9478 208 B9477 207 B9476 206 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B207 Inverters, NAND elements SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FS .01 9450 .02 9351 FS .01 9453 .02 9357 FS .01 9359 .02 9360 .01 .02 .01 .02 POWER ON <1> U419 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U418 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U417 B B POWER ON <1> U416 B B POWER ON <1> U415 B B 1 1 1 1 1 Q Q RESET (Q=0) Q RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q Q RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q Q RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q Q RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q SET (Q=1) 14 RS flipflops 2 B9559 219 B9558 B9557 218 B9556 B9555 217 B9554 B9553 216 B9552 B9551 215 B9550 *) *) *) 3 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the 1 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 POWER ON <1> U424 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U423 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U422 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U421 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U420 (0) B B 4 1 1 1 1 1 RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5 B9569 224 B9568 B9567 223 B9566 B9565 222 B9564 B9563 221 B9562 B9561 220 B9560 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 .01 .02 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) 7 B9577 228 B9576 B9575 227 B9574 B9573 226 B9572 B9571 225 B9570 <1> from voltage monitoring of electronics power supply POWER ON <1> U428 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U427 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U426 (0) B B POWER ON <1> U425 (0) B B 6 - B210 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet B210 RS flipflops 245 1 246 .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 1 1 D D Q Q Q Q RESET (Q=0) STORE SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) STORE SET (Q=1) 3 B9493 231 B9492 B9491 230 B9490 <1> from voltage monitoring of electronics power supply POWER ON <1> U431 (0) B B B B POWER ON <1> U430 (0) B B B B 4 D flipflops 2 4 .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 POWER ON <1> U433 (0) B B B B POWER ON <1> U432 (0) B B B B 5 1 1 D D Q Q Q Q RESET (Q=0) STORE SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) STORE SET (Q=1) 6 B9497 233 B9496 B9495 232 B9494 7 Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET 3. STORE - B211 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B211 D flipflops SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 T T 3 2 1 0 Mode 1 = Reset 3 2 1 0 Mode U445 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T U444 (0,500) (0,000...60,000s) 1 = Reset T Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T O OFF delay ON delay T O T U441 (10,500) (0,000...60,000s) U442 (0) 2 1 1 B9581 B9580 *) B9583 B9582 241 *) 240 3 drive-specific (crane) control logic and are therefore not freely available *) These function blocks are wired through their parameter factory setting to the U443 (9383) .01 B .02 B U440 (9364) .01 B .02 B 6 timers 1 U449 (0) B B U446 (0) B B .01 .02 .01 .02 T Mode 1 = Reset 3 2 1 0 Mode U451 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T 3 2 1 0 1 = Reset U450 (0,000) (0,000...60,000s) T Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T U447 (0,000) (0,000...60,000s) U448 (0) 4 5 1 1 243 242 B9587 B9586 B9585 B9584 U455 (0) B B U452 (0) B B 6 .01 .02 .01 .02 T 1 = Reset 3 2 1 0 Mode U457 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T 3 1 = Reset U456 (0,000) (0,000...60,000s) T 2 1 0 Mode U454 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T U453 (0,000) (0,000...60,000s) 7 1 1 245 244 - B215 - B9591 B9590 B9589 B9588 8 03.2015 Sheet B215 Timers (0.000...60.000s) Function diagrams 247 248 U461 (0) B B .01 .02 .01 .02 2 T 3 1 = Reset 3 2 1 0 Mode U463 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T U462 (0,00) (0,00...600,00s) 1 = Reset T 2 1 0 Mode U460 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay O T T U459 (0,00) (0,00...600,00s) 4 timers U458 (0) B B 1 1 1 247 246 B9595 B9594 B9593 B9592 3 U467 (0) B B U464 (0) B B .01 .02 .01 .02 4 1 = Reset T 3 3 2 1 0 Mode U469 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T U468 (0,00) (0,00...600,00s) 1 = Reset T 2 1 0 Mode U466 (0) Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay O T T U465 (0,00) (0,00...600,00s) 5 1 1 249 248 B9599 B9598 B9597 B9596 6 8 U474 (0) B B B U473 (0) B B B U472 (0) B B B U471 (0) B B B U470 (0) B B B .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 .01 .02 .03 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 - B216 - B9486 254 B9485 253 B9484 252 B9483 251 B9482 250 5 binary signal selector switches 7 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet B216 Timers (0.00...600.00s), Binary signal selector switches SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 4 5 6 Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communication board (CB) Data exchange with the 2nd communication board (CB) 1st EB1 analog inputs 1st EB1 analog outputs 1st EB1 bidirectional inputs/outputs, digital inputs 2nd EB1 analog inputs 2nd EB1 analog outputs 2nd EB1 bidirectional inputs/outputs, digital inputs 1st EB2 analog input, digital inputs, relay outputs 2nd EB2 analog input, digital inputs, relay outputs SBP pulse encoder evaluation SIMOLINK board configuration, diagnosis SIMOLINK board receiving, transmitting OP1S operator panel Interfaces: connector-type converters SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs Content Z110 Z111 Z112 Z113 Z114 Z115 Z116 Z117 Z118 Z119 Z120 Z121 Z122 Z123 Z124 Z130 Z131 Z135 Z136 Z140 Z141 Z145 Z146 Z150 Z151 Z155 Z156 Sheet Function diagram SIMOTRAS 6SG70 - Contents of optional supplementary boards 1 7 - Z100 - 8 03.2015 Optional supplementary boards Sheets Z100 to Z156 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Function diagrams Sheet Z100 Table of contents 249 250 from supplementary board Bit 10 must be set in word 1 of the receive data to ensure that the process data are accepted as valid data. Control word 1 must therefore be transferred as the first PZD word. 0 3 4 See also connector type converter on sheet Z124 K3005 K3006 K3007 K3008 K3009 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 K3014 K3015 K3016 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 B3031 B3030 .16 K3013 Word 13 B K3012 Word 12 B3035 K3011 5 0 B3515 B3615 B3715 B3815 B3915 B3500 B3600 B3700 B3800 B3900 K3020 B3415 B3400 Binector / connector converter B3315 B3215 B3300 B3200 Bit 15 B3115 ... B3100 Bit 0 K3010 Word 10 Word 11 15 K3004 Word 4 .01 K3003 K3001 Word 3 every 16 bits K3002 U728 (0) B n733.01 to .16 Word 1 <1> Word 2 Receive data Fault message trigger 1 = "Fault F082" (fault value 10) 1s 1 = "Fault delay timeout" For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.10.7 T Fault delay time U722.03 (0 ms) 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" Message monitoring time U722.01 (0 ms) Message monitoring for received process data: When bit 10 ("control by PLC") = 0, the other bits of word 1, as well as words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K3001 to K3016 or to binectors B3100 to 3915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. <1> 2 6 Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 13 Word 11 Word 12 Word 10 Word 9 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Transmit data 7 Initialize link to supplementary boards Valid for the following configurations: - CB only - TB only - CB after TB (CB in slot G) - 2 CBs (for CB with the lower slot letter) Enable parameterization - Z110 - Display parameter response (PKW) to TB Bus address P918 Index.01 P927 Display parameter response (PKW) to CB Display parameter job (PKW) from TB n739 Index.09-.12 Display parameter job (PKW) from CB n738 Index.09-.12 n739 Index.01-.04 CB or TB diagnosis n738 Index.01-.04 CB parameter 11 CB parameters 1 to 10 8 to supplementary board n732 Index.01-.32 U721 Index.01-.05 U711-U720 Index.01 U710 Index.01 Parameters for the 1st CB board U734 FS .01 K 32 .02 167 K .03 9115 K .04 K 0 .05 0 K .06 0 K .07 0 K .08 0 K .09 0 K .10 0 K .11 0 K .12 0 K .13 0 K 0 .14 K 0 .15 K .16 0 K n735.01 to .16 Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communications board (CB) 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z110 Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communications board (CB) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 from supplementary board Bit 10 must be set in word 1 of the receive data to ensure that the process data are accepted as valid data. Control word 1 must therefore be transferred as the first PZD word. 3 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 0 See also connector type converter on sheet Z124 K8013 K8014 K8015 K8016 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 0 K8012 Word 12 B8031 B8030 .16 B8215 B8315 B8415 B8515 B8615 B8715 B8815 B8915 B8200 B8300 B8400 B8500 B8600 B8700 B8800 B8900 K8020 B8115 B8100 Binector / connector converter 15 K8011 Word 10 Word 11 B K K8010 .01 K K8009 Word 9 U729 (0) B K K8008 Word 8 B8035 K K8007 Word 7 Bit 15 K K8006 Word 6 ... K K8005 Word 5 Bit 0 K K8004 Word 4 K K K K K K K K Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 13 Word 12 Word 11 Word 10 Word 9 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 2 Word 1 Transmit data 7 CB parameters 1 to 10 CB parameter 11 CB or TB diagnosis U721 Index.06-.10 n732 Index.33-.64 Enable parameterization P927 - 2 CBs (for CB with the higher slot letter) - Z111 - Bus address P918 Index.02 Valid for the following configurations: Display parameter response (PKW) to CB n739 Index.05-.08 Display parameter job (PKW) from CB Initialize link to supplementary boards n738 Index.05-.08 8 to supplementary board U711-U720 Index.02 Parameters for the 2nd CB board .16 .15 .14 .13 .12 .11 .10 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02 .01 n735.17 to .32 6 U710 Index.02 U736 (0) K K8003 K8001 Word 3 every 16 bits K8002 Fault message trigger 1 = "Fault F082" (fault value 10) 1s 1 = "Fault delay timeout" For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.10.7 T Fault delay time U722.04 (0 ms) 1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout" Message monitoring time U722.02 (0 ms) n733.17 to .32 Word 2 Word 1 <1> Receive data 5 Sheet Z111 Data exchange with the 2 nd Message monitoring for received process data: When bit 10 ("control by PLC") = 0, the other bits of word 1, as well as words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K8001 to K8016 or to binectors B8100 to 8915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. <1> 2 Data exchange with the 2nd communications board (CB) 1 03.2015 Function diagrams communications board (CB) 251 252 2 3 50 i 20mA 51 2 3 20mA 10V 1 X488 - Digital inputs 24V + 24V 54 53 Analog inputs 10V 10V 10V 52 1 AI3 1 AI2 2 2 X487 X486 A D 13 bits + sign 10V=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s D Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.3 (0,00) * 100% U756.3 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.3(100,0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.2 (0,00) * 100% U756.2 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.2(100,0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.1 (0,00) * 100% 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U758.3 (0) -1 -1 U758.2 (0) -1 -1 U758.1 (0) 1 0 1 0 Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.2 (0) Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.1 (0) 7 0% 1 0 Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.3 (0) 0% 1 0 K5103 B5102 - Z112 - B5103 Digital input n762.3 Analog input connection 1 0 K5102 K5101 8 Digital input n762.2 Analog input connection U761.3 (1) B High at input (voltage at term. 53 > 8V) Sign reversal -1 U759.3 (0) B 1 0 n762.1 Analog input connection U761.2 (1) B 0% U761.1 (1) B High at input (voltage at term. 52 > 8V) Sign reversal -1 U759.2 (0) B Sign reversal -1 U759.1 (0) B 6 st 10V 3 10V 3 A 13 bits + sign 10V=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s also usable as digital inputs D U756.1 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.1(100,0) 4 B5101 Open circuit (|i| 2mA) A 13 bits + sign 10V =100% 20mA=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s 1st EB1: Analog inputs (to ground) u 10V AI1 Signal type (0/1=10V/20mA) U755.1 (0) 1st EB1: Analog input 1 (differential input) 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z112 1 EB1: Analog inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U763.2 (0) K U763.1 (0) K 0 1 2 3 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U764.2 (0) -1 -1 U764.1 (0) 1st EB1: Analog outputs 2 3 Time constant (0...10000ms) U765.2 (0) Time constant (0...10000ms) U765.1 (0) n768.2 n768.1 4 x x 100% * U766.1 K5105 y [V] = 100% x * U766.2 Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U766.2 (10,00) K5104 y [V] = x Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U766.1 (10,00) 5 y y Offset -10,00...+10,00V U767.2 (0,00) Offset -10,00...+10,00V U767.1 (0,00) A D A 11 bits + sign D 11 Bit + VZ 6 M AO2 AO1 Uout [V] = 49 48 47 Uout [V] = 7 * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] 100% K5105 Sheet Z113 1 EB1: Analog outputs st - Z113 - * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] -10V...+10V -10V...+10V 100% K5104 8 03.2015 Function diagrams 253 254 24V Outputs 1 Out Inputs 44 42 41 40 46 45 DIO2 DI3 DI2 DI1 DIO4 DIO3 DIO1 In 43 39 38 2 22 21 20 2 6 25 24 23 5 In In Out In Out In U769.4 (0) B U769.3 (0) B U769.2 (0) B 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 1 1 1 1st EB1: 3 digital inputs 24V 5V Out Out In Out U769.1 (0) B Outputs B5117 B5116 B5115 B5114 B5113 B5112 1 1 1 1 1st EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs / outputs 4 B5111 B5110 B5109 B5108 B5107 B5106 B5105 B5104 Inputs 6 8 46 45 44 43 42 41 - Z114 - 40 Display of terminal states in n770.1 on the PMU Example: Terminal 45 = input => U769.3=0 If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an input, the corresponding output must be set to "0" (transistor blocked)! NOTICE 7 st K5106 n770.1 Out/In M_external 3 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z114 1 EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 - Digital inputs 24V + 24V 2 3 20mA 10V 1 X488 54 53 52 1 AI3 1 AI2 2 2 10V 3 10V 3 X487 X486 A D A D 13 bits + sign 10V=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s 10V=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s also usable as digital inputs Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.6 (0,00) * 100% U756.6 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.6(100,0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.5 (0,00) * 100% U756.5 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.5(100,0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U757.4 (0,00) * 100% U756.4 B5201 Open circuit (|i| 2mA) D 13 bits + sign 10V =100% 20mA=100% Analog inputs (to ground) i 20mA 51 Analog inputs 10V 10V 10V 2nd EB1: u 10V A 13 bits + sign 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U758.6 (0) -1 -1 U758.5 (0) -1 -1 U758.4 (0) 1 0 1 0 Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.5 (0) Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.4 (0) 7 0% 1 0 Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U760.6 (0) 0% 1 0 K5203 B5202 - Z115 - B5203 Digital input n762.6 Analog input connection 1 0 K5202 K5201 8 Digital input n762.5 Analog input connection U761.6 (1) B High at input (voltage at Kl. 53 > 8V) Sign reversal -1 U759.6 (0) B 1 0 n762.4 Analog input connection U761.5 (1) B 0% U761.4 (1) B High at input (voltage at term. 52 > 8V) Sign reversal -1 U759.5 (0) B Sign reversal -1 U759.4 (0) B 6 nd 50 Hardware smoothing 220 s Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U756.4(100,0) 4 Sheet Z115 2 AI1 Signal type (0/1=10V/20mA) U755.2 (0) 2nd EB1: Analog input 1 (differential input) 1 03.2015 Function diagrams EB1: Analog inputs 255 1 256 U763.4 (0) K U763.3 (0) K 0 1 2 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U764.4 (0) -1 -1 3 3 Time constant (0...10000ms) U765.4 (0) Time constant (0...10000ms) U765.3 (0) n768.4 n768.3 4 x x 100% * U766.3 K5205 y [V] = 100% x * U766.4 Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U766.4 (10,00) K5204 y [V] = x Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U766.3 (10,00) 5 y y Offset -10,00...+10,00V U767.4 (0,00) Offset -10,00...+10,00V U767.3 (0,00) A D A 11 bits + sign D 11 bits + sign 6 M AO2 AO1 Uout [V] = 49 48 47 Uout [V] = 7 * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] 100% K5205 - Z116 - * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] -10V...+10V -10V...+10V 100% K5204 8 Sheet Z116 2 nd U764.3 (0) 2nd EB1: Analog outputs 2 Function diagrams 03.2015 EB1: Analog outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 24V Out SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Inputs 21 DI2 DI3 41 42 22 20 2 6 25 2 4 23 DI1 DIO4 DIO3 DIO2 DIO1 40 46 45 44 In 43 39 38 2 K5206 n770.2 Out/In M_external 3 5 In In Out In Out In U769.8 (0) B U769.7 (0) B U769.6 (0) B 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 1 1 1 2nd EB1: 3 digital inputs 24V 5V Out Out In Out U769.5 (0) B Outputs B5217 B5216 B5215 B5214 B5213 B5212 1 1 1 1 2nd EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs / outputs 4 B5211 B5210 B5209 B5208 B5207 B5206 B5205 B5204 Inputs 6 8 46 45 44 43 42 41 - Z117 - 40 Display of terminal states in n770.2 on the PMU Example: Terminal 45 = input => U769.7=0 If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an input, the corresponding output must be set to "0" (transistor blocked)! NOTICE 7 Sheet Z117 2 nd Outputs 1 03.2015 Function diagrams EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs 257 258 24V u i 2 3 4 2 3 X498 DI1 DI2 54 21 20 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U784.1 (0) 1 1 B5125 B5124 B5123 B5122 y [V] = K5112 x 100% x n773.1 K5113 45 43 41 39 54 1 D A U I 53 U774 (0) B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 25 24 23 22 Iout = -20...+20mA Uout = -10V...+10V 100% K5112 K5111 8 X499 1 2 3 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 AO - Z118 - 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 38 39 48 47 * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] n782.1 Analog input connection 1 0 7 Uout [V] = 0% U781.1 (1) B 1st EB2: 4 relay outputs * U786.1 y Smoothing 9 bits + sign Offset -10,00...+10,00V U787.1 (0,00) Sign reversal -1 0 Time constant 0...10000ms U780.1 (0) 6 st M_external 24V 5V 24V 5V n788.1 0 1 2 3 U779.1 (0) B Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U786.1 (10,00) -1 -1 U778.1 (0) 5 Display of terminal states in n773.1 on the PMU Smoothing Time constant (0...10000ms) U785.1 (0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U777.1 (0,00) * 100% B5121 1st EB2: 2 digital inputs M_external P24_aux M_external U783.1 (0) K D U776.1 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U776.1(100,0) Open circuit (|i| 2mA) A 11 bits + sign 10V =100% 20mA=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s 1st EB2: Analog output 20mA 10V 1 AI Signal type (0/1=10V/20mA) U775.1 (0) 1st EB2: Analog input (differential input) 53 52 51 50 49 10V 20mA 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z118 1 EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 24V i 2 3 4 DI1 DI2 54 21 20 -1 -1 0 1 2 3 U784.2 (0) M_external 24V 5V 24V 5V 1 1 B5225 B5224 B5223 B5222 n788.2 y [V] = K5212 x 0 1 2 3 100% x n773.2 K5213 45 43 41 39 54 1 0 D A U I 53 U774 (0) B B B B .05 .06 .07 .08 25 24 23 22 Iout = -20...+20mA Uout = -10V...+10V 100% K5212 K5211 8 X499 1 2 3 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 AO - Z119 - 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 38 39 48 47 * Standardization [V] + Offset [V] n782.2 Analog input connection 1 0 7 Uout [V] = 0% U781.2 (1) B 2nd EB2: 4 Relay outputs * U786.2 y 9 bits + sign Smoothing Time constant 0...10000ms U780.2 (0) 6 Offset -10,00...+10,00V U787.2 (0,00) Sign reversal -1 U779.2 (0) B Standardization -200,00...+199,99V U786.2 (10,00) -1 -1 U778.2 (0) 5 Display of terminal states in n773.2 an der PMU Smoothing Time constant (0...10000ms) U785.2 (0) Offset -100,00...100,00% U777.2 (0,00) * 100% B5221 2nd EB2: 2 digital inputs M_external P24_aux M_external U783.2 (0) K D U776.2 Standardization -1000,0...1000,0 U776.2(100,0) Open circuit (|i| 2mA) A 11 Bit + VZ 10V =100% 20mA=100% Hardware smoothing 220 s 2nd EB2: Analog output X498 Signal type (0/1=10V/20mA) U775.2 (0) 20mA 10V 1 AI 53 52 51 50 49 3 2nd EB2: Analog inputs (differential input) 2 Sheet Z119 2 nd u 10V 20mA 1 03.2015 Function diagrams EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs 259 260 2 Control track Zero pulse Track B Track A Power supply Pulse encoder 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 X401 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 X400 B7003 B7002 B7001 B7000 4 Fine pulse 2 Control track Number of lines 100...20000 U792 (1024) <2> Coarse pulse 2 <2> Coarse pulse 1 Pulse encoder evaluation Caution This option may only be used with the written approval of the relevant SIEMENS department! CTRL - = M CTRL + Zero pulse - Zero pulse + Track B - Track B + Track A - Track A + <2> Fine pulse 2 u 3 Encoder type Voltage level U793=0: A/B track U790.01: A/B, CTRL track U793=1: Forward/reverse tracks U790.02: Zero pulse <2> Coarse pulse 2 Coarse pulse 1 Ground coarse/fine - Vss + Vss +5/15V Supply voltage U791 = 0: 5V U791 = 1: 15V SBP pulse encoder evaluation 1 1 5 0 <1> Position acquisition 2 1 0 n024.02 n795 <1> 0=Enable position counter (KK0036) 1=Reset (KK0036:=0) <2> The signals "coarse pulse 2" and "fine pulse 2" are only routed to binectors B7002 and B7003 in the SIMOTRAS. They have no other function. & & Reset position counter U796 Speed measurement Reference speed 50.0...6500.0 U794 (500,0) 6 KK0036 B0056 B0055 K0038 K0039 7 - Z120 - Position value range: 8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH Overflow Underflow Speed actual value in rpm Speed actual value 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z120 SBP pulse encoder evaluation SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 <1> <1> 2 5 0 Telegram failure 1 = "Fault F015" Fault message trigger 6,36 s = time for 1 telegram 7 Starting alarm B7050 1 = "Alarm A015" Alarm message trigger "SIMOLINK starting" alarm B7040 Time out SLB diagnosis i001: No. of error-free synchronizing telegram i002: No. of CRC errors n748 i003: No. of timeout errors i004: last accessible bus address i005: Address node transmitting the special "timeout" telegram i006:Implemented bus cycle time i007: Number of re-configurations i008: reserved ... i016:reserved 6 Caution This option may only be used with the written approval of the relevant SIEMENS department! Module address = 0 Module address = 0 SLB diagnosis Dispatcher specific section Monitoring is activated after the first valid telegram B7030 T Fault delay U753 (0,0) 0,0...100,0 s Dispatcherspecific section General section SLB configuration 4 SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis 3 U746 + 3,18 s 1 f: No. of addressed nodes = ( ---------------------- - 2) * -------6,36 s U745 SLB cycle time U746.01 (1,20) 1,00...6,50ms U745.01 (3) 1...8 f Selection of active SLB 1 = 0...15m 2 = 15...25m 3 = 25...40m Cable length U742.01 (3) Transmit power SLB node address U740.01 (0) 0...200 Telegram monitoring time U741.01 (0 ms) 0...6500ms SLB channel selection 1 - Z121 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z121 SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis 261 262 Receive RxD E Receive data 4 5 Bit 15 K7014 K7015 K7016 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 K7108 K7107 K7106 K7105 K7104 K7103 K7102 K7013 Word 13 Word 1 Word 2 K K7012 K7101 ... K K7011 B7515 B7500 B7815 B7915 B7800 B7900 B7715 B7415 B7400 B7615 B7315 B7300 B7700 B7215 B7200 B7600 B7115 B7100 Bit 0 K K7010 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 See also connector type converter on sheet Z124 K K K K K K K7009 K K K K K7008 K7007 K7006 K7005 K7004 K K K7002 K7003 K K7001 Word 9 16 bits each U751 (0) .16 .15 .14 .13 .12 .11 .10 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02 .01 n752.01 to .16 6 Word 16 Word 15 Word 14 Word 12 Word 13 Word 11 Word 9 Word 10 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 2 Word 3 Word 1 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 0 Transmit data 7 E Caution This option may only be used with the written approval of the relevant SIEMENS department! SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting n750.01 to .16 3 Word 8 Word 7 Word 6 Word 5 Word 4 Word 3 Word 1 Word 2 <1> Special data can only be transmitted by the SIMOLINK Master <1> Special data U749.08 U749.07 U749.06 U749.05 U749.04 U749.03 U749.02 U749.01 U749.xx: Parameter value = Address.ChannelNumber (before/after decimal point.) 2 For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.10.4 "Procedure for starting up SIMOLINK boards" O SIMOLINK 1 O TxD - Z122 - Transmit SIMOLINK 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z122 SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 U049.005 U049.003 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U049.001 I Positive direction of rotation Negative direction of rotation Raise motor pot. <1> Lower motor pot. <1> B2108 B2111 B2112 B2113 B2114 Jog <1> This key works only when the OP1S is in the "Operational display" state Inching 1 B2107 Reset Jog 7 0 1 4 +/- 2 5 8 9 Reset 3 6 Sign key Reset key - Z123 - 0 to 9: Numerical keys Key for the operating level switchover Lower key O Reversing key OFF key P 8 LC Display (4 lines x 16 characters) Raise key Fault Run 7 I 6 ON key Inching (Jog) key Active node (=Bus address P786) 5 0.0V 00 # 25.00% 25.00% * Torque direc. 1 6.0% ON / OFF1 (B2100 must also be connected to bit 1 or 2 in control word 1 for OFF2 or OFF3.) Acknowledge <1> B2100 O 4 OP operation. display U049.002 1st line on left OP operation. display FS=19: 1st line on right display of r019 (no signification) Motor current act. value The control commands from the OP1S panel are transferred via word 1 in the USS protocol and can be wired up to other functions via the binectors below (see also Section 7.2.2). OP operation.display OP operation.display 2nd line 3rd line FS=25: FS=28: display of r025 display of r028 Speed setpoint Speed controller act. value U049.004 OP1S operator panel OP operation display 4th line FS=59: display of r059 Operating state 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z123 OP1S operator panel 263 1 264 3 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K3003 K3004 K3005 K3006 K3007 K3008 K3009 K3010 K3011 K3012 K3013 K3014 K3015 K3016 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K3002 K3001 KK3045 KK3044 KK3043 KK3042 KK3041 KK3040 KK3039 KK3038 KK3037 KK3036 KK3035 KK3034 KK3033 KK3032 KK3031 Technology board / 1st communications board (Z110) 4 5 K8016 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K8014 K8015 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH K8013 K8012 K8011 K8010 K8009 K8008 K8007 K8006 K8005 K8004 K8003 K8002 K8001 KK8045 KK8044 KK8043 KK8042 KK8041 KK8040 KK8039 KK8038 KK8037 KK8036 KK8035 KK8034 KK8033 KK8032 KK8031 2nd communications board (Z111) Interfaces: connector-type converters 2 K7108 K7107 K7106 K7105 K7104 K7103 K7102 K7101 K7008 K7007 K7006 K7005 K7004 K7003 K7002 K7001 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH SIMOLINK board (Z122) 6 7 KK7137 KK7136 KK7135 KK7134 KK7133 KK7132 KK7131 KK7037 KK7036 KK7035 KK7034 KK7033 KK7032 KK7031 - Z124 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z124 Interfaces: connector-type converters SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 <1> B7 Binary input 5 ~ ~ 24V DC ~ ~ 24V Supply for the SCI1 board Binary input 10 A2 A9 A10 A11 A1 B9 B10 B11 A8 A7 A6 Binary input 9 Supply for binary inputs (optional) A5 Binary input 8 =external supply of binary inputs A4 A3 Binary input 7 <1> B6 Binary input 4 =Supply of binary inputs via SCI1 <1> B5 Binary input 3 Binary input 6 B4 Binary input 2 B8 B3 Binary input 1 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs 1 M P24 Reference point for binary inputs 6 to 10 Reference point for binary inputs 1 to 5 X427 4 n699.01 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2 0 5 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B4129 B4128 B4127 B4126 B4125 B4124 B4123 B4122 B4121 B4120 SCI slave 1 7 B4109 B4108 B4107 B4106 B4105 B4104 B4103 B4102 B4101 B4100 - Z130 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z130 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs 265 266 2 3 <1> B7 Binary input 5 ~ ~ 24V DC ~ ~ 24V Supply for the SCI1 board Binary input 10 A2 A9 A10 A11 A1 B9 B10 B11 A8 A7 A6 Binary input 9 Supply for binary inputs (optional) A5 Binary input 8 = external supply of binary inputs A4 A3 Binary input 7 <1> B6 Binary input 4 = Supply of binary inputs via SCI1 <1> B5 Binary input 3 Binary input 6 B4 Binary input 2 B8 B3 Binary input 1 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs 1 M P24 Reference point for binary inputs 6 to 10 Reference point for binary inputs 1 to 5 X427 4 n699.05 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2 0 5 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B4229 B4228 B4227 B4226 B4225 B4224 B4223 B4222 B4221 B4220 SCI slave 2 7 B4209 B4208 B4207 B4206 B4205 B4204 B4203 B4202 B4201 B4200 - Z131 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z131 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U698 (0) B B B B B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 n699.09 SCB1 with SCI1as slave 1: binary outputs 1 4 5 X427 X429 B2 B1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Binary output 8 100 mA short-circuit-proof Binary output 7 Binary output 6 Binary output 5 Binary output 4 Binary output 3 Binary output 2 Binary output 1 7 - Z135 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z135 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs 267 268 2 3 U698 (0) B B B B B B B B .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 n699.13 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs 1 4 5 X427 X429 Binary output 7 Binary output 6 Binary output 5 Binary output 4 Binary output 3 Binary output 2 Binary output 1 7 Binary output 8 B2 100 mA short-circuit-proof B1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 - Z136 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z136 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 ~ ~ 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Supply of SCI2 board 24V DC ~ ~ 24V Supply for binary inputs (optional) <1> B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A10 A11 A12 B10 B11 B12 <1> B9 B1 1 Binary input X437 X437 M P24 5V 24V <1> 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V Reference point for binary inputs 1 to 8 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs 1 B4127 B4126 B4125 B4124 B4123 B4122 B4121 B4120 = external supply of binary inputs B4107 B4106 B4105 B4104 B4103 B4102 B4101 B4100 SCI slave 1 =Supply of binary inputs via the SCI2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Binary input Reference point for binary inputs 9 to 16 5 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 29 28 n699.01 215 214 213 212 211 210 X437 6 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B4135 B4134 B4133 B4132 B4131 B4130 B4129 B4128 - Z140 - B4115 B4114 B4113 B4112 B4111 B4110 B4109 B4108 SCI slave 1 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z140 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs 269 270 ~ ~ 2 3 Supply for the SCI2 board 24V DC ~ ~ 24V Supply for binary inputs (optional) <1> B5 B6 5 6 A10 A11 A12 B10 B11 B12 <1> B9 B8 B4 4 8 B3 3 B7 B2 2 7 B1 1 Binary input X437 X437 M P24 5V 24V <1> 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V 5V 24V Reference point for binary inputs 1 to 8 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs 1 B4227 B4226 B4225 B4224 B4223 B4222 B4221 B4220 =external supply of binary inputs B4207 B4206 B4205 B4204 B4203 B4202 B4201 B4200 SCI slave 2 =Supply of binary inputs via SCI2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Binary input Reference point for binary inputs 9 to 16 5 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 29 28 n699.05 SCB1/SCI process data 215 214 213 212 211 210 X437 6 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B4235 B4234 B4233 B4232 B4231 B4230 B4229 B4228 - Z141 - B4215 B4214 B4213 B4212 B4211 B4210 B4209 B4208 SCI slave 2 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z141 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 B B B B U698 (0) B B B B B B B B .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 210 211 n699.09 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs 1 4 X439 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Binary output 7 Binary output 6 Binary output 5 Binary output 4 Binary output 3 Binary output 2 Binary output 1 5 6 M P24 X438 7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 - Z145 - Auxiliary voltage M for binary outputs Auxiliary voltage P24 VDC Binary output 12 Binary output 11 Binary output 10 Binary output 9 Binary output 8 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z145 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs 271 272 2 3 B B B B U698 (0) B B B B B B B B .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 210 211 n699.13 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs 1 4 X439 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Binary output 7 Binary output 6 Binary output 5 Binary output 4 Binary output 3 Binary output 2 Binary output 1 5 6 M P24 X438 7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 - Z146 - Auxiliary voltage M for binary outputs Auxiliary voltage P24 VDC Binary output 12 Binary output 11 Binary output 10 Binary output 9 Binary output 8 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z146 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 I 20mA U 10V 5 4 4 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X428 HardwareSmoothing 1ms HardwareSmoothing 1ms HardwareSmoothing 1ms D D A D 12 bits + sign A 12 bits + sign A 12 bits + sign 4 Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.03(0) Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.02(0) Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.01(0) 5 Smoothing 0...15 U691.03(2) <2> Smoothing 0...15 U691.02(2) <2> Smoothing 0...15 U691.01(2) <2> n699.04 n699.03 n699.02 6 -10 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V - 0 1 2 K4103 K4102 K4101 Analog input 3 Analog input 2 Analog input 1 SCI Slave 1 8 - Z150 - -20 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA Current input Kl. X428.5, .8, .11 <2> Smoothing time constant T = 2 ms * 2U691 Voltage input Kl. X428.3, .6, .9 7 U690 <1> Signal type Changes to parameters U690, U691 or U692 do not take effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0). <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.03(0) <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.02(0) <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.01(0) -10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof +10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z150 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs 273 274 2 3 I 20mA U 10V 5 4 4 3 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X428 HardwareSmoothing 1ms HardwareSmoothing 1ms HardwareSmoothing 1ms D D A D 12 bits + sign A 12 bits + sign A 12 bits + sign 4 Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.06(0) Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.05(0) Offset -20,00...20,00V U692.04(0) 5 Smoothing 0...15 U691.06(2) <2> Smoothing 0...15 U691.05(2) <2> Smoothing 0...15 U691.04(2) <2> n699.08 n699.07 n699.06 6 -10 ... 10 V 0 ... 10 V - 0 1 2 K4203 K4202 K4201 Analog input 3 Analog input 2 Analog input 1 SCI Slave 2 8 - Z151 - -20 ... 20 mA 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA Current input Kl. X428.5, .8, .11 <2> Smoothing time constant T = 2 ms * 2U691 Voltage input Kl. X428.3, .6, .9 7 U690 <1> Signal type Changes to parameters U690, U691 or U692 do not take effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0). <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.06(0) <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.05(0) <1> Signal type 0...2 U690.04(0) -10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof +10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z151 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 n699.12 n699.11 x x x x * U694.01 100% x * U694.02 100% y [V] = x * U694.03 100% Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.03 (10,00) y [V] = Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.02 (10,00) y [V] = y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.03 (0,00) y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.02 (0,00) y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.01 (0,00) 4 D D D A A A 5 U I I I Iout = -20 ... 20 mA U Iout = -20 ... 20 mA U Iout = -20 ... 20 mA Changes to parameters U694 or U695 do not take effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0). U693.03(0) K U693.02(0) K U693.01(0) K n699.10 Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.01 (10,00) SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs 1 M M M X428 6 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 Analog output 3 Analog output 2 Analog output 1 7 - Z155 - 8 03.2015 Function diagrams Sheet Z155 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs 275 276 2 3 n699.16 n699.15 x x x x * U694.04 100% x * U694.05 100% y [V] = x * U694.06 100% Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.06 (10,00) y [V] = Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.05 (10,00) y [V] = y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.06 (0,00) y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.05 (0,00) y Offset -100,00...+100,00V U695.04 (0,00) 4 D D D A A A 5 U I I I Iout = -20 ... 20 mA U Iout = -20 ... 20 mA U Iout = -20 ... 20 mA Changes to parameters U694 or U695 do not take effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0). U693.06(0) K U693.05(0) K U693.04(0) K n699.14 Gain -320,00...+320,00V U694.04 (10,00) SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs 1 M M M X428 6 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 Analog output 3 Analog output 2 Analog output 1 7 - Z156 - 8 Function diagrams 03.2015 Sheet Z156 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Drive-specific (crane) control, Sheets K1 to K18 Function diagrams see also Section 6.1 The drive-specific (crane) control is made up of the freely-assignable function blocks (S00 technology software, Sheets B100 to B216). In the factory settings for the relevant parameters, these function blocks are connected to the drive-specific (crane) controls. Explanations for Sheet K4, control word 1 and Sheet K5, control word 2 The control signals are assigned via the binector/connector and the connector/binector converters. The assignment should not be changed as technology boards are being used. Depending on the "control by PLC" bit (binector B3110), the sources for the two control words are selected automatically. for Sheet K6, transmit data Status word 1 is assigned by default to the actual speed value. The signals generated in the internal drive control unit for the technology board and the PLC are transmitted in status word 2. for Sheet K8, enable, overload lifting gear The "mechanical stop" signal (emergency stop, centrifugal switch, emergency limit switch) immediately disables the controller and firing pulse. This terminal signal also needs to be connected during operation via the interface in order to switch the converter off if it is no longer reacting to the interface signals. On lifting gear drives, a measurement device is used to monitor the permissible load to be lifted and to prevent an overload being lifted. If an overload occurs, the status is saved. If the overload is lowered, the master switch will be in the zero position (no travel command) and the brake is closed, the saved overload signal is acknowledged automatically. for Sheet K9, travel command, electrical stop, overtemperature The travel command is enabled in direction 1 if the limit switch in this direction is not being approached, or if, in addition, there is no overload for lifting gear. The travel command is enabled in direction 2 if the limit switch in this direction is not being approached. Overtemperature in the machine, motor, activation of the fan monitor or a LOW signal on the binary input "electrical stop" (motor fan, thermistor relay protective switches) disables the general travel command. This cancels the speed setpoint, slows the drive electrically and closes the brake. Acknowledgement is only possible once the fault has been eliminated; an alarm message is displayed at the same time for Sheet K10, brake control A travel command is issued by activating the master switch, the converter is enabled (enabling of speed control, firing pulse) and the `Release brake' signal is issued. Enabling of the setpoint can be delayed to prevent movement against the brake, which will still be closed for a time. The drive then accelerates to the specified speed setpoint. If the master switch is returned to the zero position, the drive is delayed and closes the brake with the zero speed signal. The firing pulses are disabled after the delay period for the controller disable has elapsed. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 277 Function diagrams 03.2015 for Sheet K11, enable ramp-function generator, brake If the drive moves to one of the limit switches, the control logic disables the ramp-function generator. The brake closes at the same time and additional electrical braking is applied because of the delayed controller disable. With the master switch in the zero position (no travel command), disabling of the ramp-function generator is cancelled and movement in the opposite direction (see Sheet K9, travel command) out of the limit switch area is possible again. If an overload occurs whilst lifting, the control logic disables the ramp-function generator immediately and the brake closes straight away. Because of the delayed shutdown of the controller enable function, electrical braking is also applied and the load is held until the brake is closed This prevents the load dropping during the time it takes for the brake to close. It will not be possible to lift a load if an overload signal is active (see Sheet K9, travel command). If the master switch is moved to the zero position (no travel command), disabling of the ramp-function generator is cancelled and the load can be lowered with a reduced pre-limit switch speed, lowering is always possible. If there is no overload signal, lifting will be possible again. for Sheet K12, setpoint processing The speed setpoint can be specified using the main setpoint analog input (terminals 4/5, 10V) or via the CBP interface (word 2). A switch causes an automatic switchover to the interface when the "control by PLC" bit is set. The signal characteriser allows the setpoint to be specified very accurately for low speeds using a linear setpoint potentiometer or a linear interface setpoint. Small deflections of the master switch do not then produce large values (proportional to the deflection angle of the master switch), but much smaller setpoint values. The maximum value for the controlled speed range can be set using the multiplier. for Sheet K13, setpoint selection The "High speed notch" signal causes the speed setpoint to be switched from the variable master switch setpoint (closed-loop speed control range) to the zero delay angle setting. The polarity of the 100% setpoint is controlled using the travel command. It is possible to switch to a stepped speed input using the selector switch. The travel command for directions 1 and 2 specifies the polarity and the setpoint for the first stage. The other setpoint stages are controlled using three other binary inputs. for Sheet K14/G135, pre-limit switch, setpoint reduction The pre-limit switch function means that the limit switch is only approached at low speed. When passing a pre-limit switch in the direction of the limit switch, the machine is switched to the speed setpoint, which is multiplied by a value smaller than one (0.1 = 10%) and therefore limited to this value. If the pre-limit switch range is left in the opposite direction, the control logic (the travel command passes back over the pre-limit switch that was approached) makes the limit ineffective so maximum speed can be used again. for Sheet K15, ramp-down monitoring If the drive is running at maximum speed and the master switch is quickly moved to the zero position, the drive must slow down immediately and the brake close after the specified ramp-down time has elapsed. When a fault occurs, the drive may not follow the travel command setpoint and the brake may not close. In this case, the monitoring time elapses and triggers a fault message and shutdown (time period: ramp-down time + 0.5s) for Sheet K16, brake monitoring The drive brake is controlled by the internal brake control system. A brake feedback signal (e.g. brake position limit switch/brake contactor feedback contact) is used to monitor whether or not the brake is also actually following the control signal. The system monitors brake releasing and closing. In the event of a fault, a me278 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function diagrams chanical stop is carried out by means of the logic, i.e. an instantaneous shut-down is triggered and a fault message is initiated. for Sheet K17, fault acknowledgement, high-speed step If the converter is shutdown as the result of a fault signal, the fault can only be acknowledged when the fault is no longer active, the converter is not in Run mode and the master switch is in the zero position (no travel command present). The master switch signal for open-loop operation only takes effect when the actual speed value has reached the high-speed threshold and as long as the pre-limit switch area has not been entered. High-speed mode becomes active again on moving away from the pre-limit switch area. for Sheet K18, limit-value monitor Two limit-value monitors output a control signal depending on the current direction of rotation and speed. If the speed exceeds a threshold value, the flag bit is set to zero. A safety circuit can be implemented in an external control unit in connection with pre-limit monitoring limit switches. A limit-value monitor issues the signal for switching over the ramp-up times used in the open-loop and closed-loop ranges. for Sheet G150, start pulse, speed controller The speed controller starts from a defined value, not 0. With lifting gear, this prevents the load dropping as the movement starts. A lower start pulse can be used if starting off in a lowering direction. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 279 280 2 <1> If a SINEC L2-DP bus system is in use, terminal 38 will be active Brake checkback signal <1> Mechanical Stop Electrical Stop Overload 39 38 37 36 35 34 X171 3 M M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V M 5V 24V P24_S 4 1 1 1 1 K0020 r010 5 41 40 39 Electr. Stop (term.37) [K4.1] Mech. Stop (term.38)[K4.1] [K8.5] B0017 B0016 Brake checkback signal (term.39) IRES (see Sheet "Pulse encoder evaluation") B0015 B0014 38 37 36 (to Sheet "Crawling setpoint/Terminal 37") [G130.1] [K5.1] 42 214 213 212 211 [K5.1] [G145.2] Operating enable (to Sheet "Control word 1") [G180.2] B0013 B0012 43 Overload (term.36) Switch-on/Shutdown B0011 B0010 7 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display 6 8 - K1 - Sheet K1 CUD1 Binary inputs (1) 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Binary inputs, terminals 36 to 39 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Pre-limit switch 1 High-speed/Notch Travel command 2 Travel command 1 L1S LS L2S 75 74 73 72 71 X1 3 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC H75 H74 H73 H72 4 K0500 n600 1 1 1 1 5 B0507 B0506 B0505 B0504 B0503 B0502 B0501 B0500 7 78 77 76 75 74 VE1 (term.75) [K5.1] High-speed/Notch (term.74) [K5.1] FK2 (term.73) [K4.1] FK1 (term.72) [K4.1] 79 73 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display 6 72 8 - K2 - Sheet K2 AC 230V Power interface Control inputs (1) 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Control inputs, terminals 71 to 75 281 282 2 Acknowledge button Limit switch 2 Limit switch 1 Pre-limit switch 2 79 78 77 76 X1 3 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC 230V AC 5V DC H79 H78 H77 H76 Terminal states shown in 7 segment display - see Sheet "Control inputs (1)" 4 1 1 1 1 5 B0515 B0514 B0513 B0512 B0511 B0510 B0509 B0508 Ack. (term.79) [K4.1] ES2 (term.78) [K4.1] ES1 (term.77) [K4.1] VE2 (term.76) [K5.1] 6 7 8 - K3 - Sheet K3 Power interface Control inputs (2) 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Control inputs, terminals 76 to 79 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 FS 0 0 14 0 0 12 0 514 0 0 0 500 502 510 512 0 15 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 2 14 13 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 6 7 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 14 6 15 7 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 7 segment display of bit fields at n010, n011 and n012 14 15 1 9 1 9 12 10 9 8 7 6 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 5 4 2 4 K3001 3 CBP board/word 1; STW1 [Z110.4] Bit fild 4 Binector/connector converter 1 11 3 1 0 K9113 10 U110 (9210) K n013 13 15 B3110 K9210 90 Control word 1 Reset [K17.6] ES1 [K9.1][K11.2] FK2 [K9.1][K13.1][K13.2][K14.3][K17.2][G150.5] ES2 [K9.1][K11.2] Mech.Stop [K8.5] - K4 - Electr.Stop [K9.3] FK1 [K9.1][K13.1][K14.3][K17.2] PLC required n010 8 B9052 B9053 0 B9054 1 B9055 2 B9056 3 B9057 4 7 B9058 5 B9059 6 B9060 7 B9061 8 B9062 9 B9063 10 B9064 11 B9065 12 1 0 control by PLC [Z110.5] Bit field 1 Connector/binector converter 1 FS .01 9113 .02 3001 B9066 13 U240 K K U241 (3110) B B9067 14 6 CBP board/word 1 Bit10 Control word 1 5 Sheet K4 7 segment display of bit fields at n013, n014 and n015 U113 B B Mech. Stop (term.38) B [K1.5] B B Elec. Stop (term.37) B [K1.5] B [K3.6] Ack. (term.79) B B B B [K2.6] FK1 (te.72) B [K2.6] FK2 (te.73) B [K3.6] ES1 (te.77) B [K3.6] ES2 (te.78) B B Control inputs 03.2015 Function diagrams Control word 1 283 284 1 [K2.6] 15 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 14 13 12 6 7 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 14 6 15 7 5 13 4 12 3 11 2 10 7 segment display of bit fields at n010, n011 and n012 14 15 7 segment display of bit fields at n013, n014 and n015 1 9 1 9 If the Lifting Gear Overload function is not being used, U114.14 must be set =1 (B0001). Notch/High speed (term.74) Checkback Brake (te.39) [K1.5] [K1.5] Overload (te.38) FS 0 0 0 0 0 0 506 508 0 0 0 0 16 10 0 504 2 10 9 8 7 6 Bit0 Bit8 Bit0 Bit8 5 4 4 K3003 3 CBP board/word 3; STW2 [Z110.4] Bit field 5 Binector/connector converter 2 11 3 2 1 0 K9114 11 U111 (9211) K n014 14 15 6 K9211 91 Notch/High speed [K14.3] - K5 - Control word 2 [K16.2] [K13.1][K13.4][K17.2] [K8.2] Brake checkback signal Lifting gear overload VE1 VE2 [K14.3] n011 B9068 8 B9069 0 B9070 1 B9071 2 B9072 3 B9073 4 B9074 5 B9075 6 B9076 7 B9077 8 B9078 9 B9079 10 B9080 11 B9081 12 1 0 control by PLC [Z110.5] 7 Bit field 2 Connector/binector converter 2 FS .01 9114 .02 3003 B9082 13 B9083 14 U242 K K U243 (3110) B B3110 CBP board/word 1 Bit10 Control word 2 5 Sheet K5 [K2.6] VE1 (te.75) [K3.6] VE2 (te.76) U114 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B Control inputs Function diagrams 03.2015 Control word 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 no pre-limit switch [K11.7] Enable ramp-function generator Enable setpoint [G136.3] Control command for brake U115 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 15 FS .01 9170 .02 9173 .03 136 .04 139 .05 141 .06 143 .07 145 .08 147 .09 149 .10 151 .11 153 .12 9361 .13 157 .14 9382 .15 9381 .16 211 Status word 2 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 Bit field 6 Binector/connector converter 3 11 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 n015 K9115 9115 K 32 167 FS K [Z110.5] K0167 6 [G152.3] nact 14 5 U734 K 4 Status word 1 [K18.4] Limit value 1 [K18.4] Limit value 2 [G182.6] Transmit data 3 K0032 2 .03 .02 .01 7 Word 3 Word 1 Word 2 Transmit data 8 - K6 - Sheet K6 [K14.7] [K11.8] 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Transmit data 285 1 286 U623.B(9361) B Control command for brake B9361 B0107 [K11.8] U621.B(107) B B0107 U622.B(9367) B No fault [G182.7] U619.B(107) B 4 B9367 No fault [G182.7] 3 H85 H83 H81 H109 5 86 85 84 83 No fault No fault Brake Acknowledgement signal X2_3 82 81 110 109 X2_4 6 7 8 - K7 - Sheet K7 [K17.7] Ack. signal output Control outputs 2 Function diagrams 03.2015 Control outputs SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Close brake [K17.5] No travel command [K10.6] 3 U321 B B B FS .01 9081 .02 250 .03 9456 U380 (9081) B Enable, Lifting gear overload 2 1 & Mech. Stop (te. 38) Mech. Stop B9351 121 B9450 180 [K1.5] [K4.8] 4 FS .01 9450 .02 9351 U320 B B B POWER ON U415 B B 5 1 FS .01 14 .02 9054 .03 1 RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) & 6 Q Q B9551 215 B9550 B9350 120 7 No overload [K9.1][K11.2][K14.3] [G180.1] Enable control word 1, Bit 3 (P661) 8 - K8 - Sheet K8 [K5.6] Lifting gear overload 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Enable, lifting gear overload 287 288 FK2 ES2 Electr. Stop FS .01 9064 .02 9066 .03 1 U323 B B B motor alarm [K17.7] Fault ack. U382 (189) B U381 (186) B No heatsink overtemperature alarm Converter fan alarm I2t [G183.7] [G183.7] No power section overload alarm [G183.7] No motor overtemperature alarm [K4.7] [K4.6] [K4.6] FS .01 9063 .02 9065 .03 9551 U322 B B B 1 1 2 & & 182 B9452 181 B9451 B9353 123 B9352 122 4 5 6 FS .01 9352 .02 9353 .03 0 FS .01 9057 .02 151 .03 145 FS .01 149 .02 9451 .03 9452 Alarm A067 Alarm A037 U325 B B B Alarm A067 U324 B B B Alarm A029 Alarm A039 U350 B B B & & 1 FS .01 9453 .02 9357 B9355 125 B9354 124 POWER ON U416 B B B9380 150 FS .01 9354 .02 9355 .03 1 Q RESET (Q=0) U326 B B B 1 Q SET (Q=1) & B9553 216 B9552 B0170 B9356 126 Travel command, Electrical Stop, Overtemperature 3 U328 B B B U327 B B B & FS .01 9356 .02 9367 .03 1 U383 (9356) B FS .01 9380 .02 9553 .03 170 7 1 & [G130.1][K15.1] Travel command (STW1, Bit 0) (P654) B9357 127 B9453 183 Alarm A023 - K9 - Electrical Stop Overtemperature [K15.2] B9358 128 8 Sheet K9 [K4.6] FK1 [K4.6] ES1 No overload [K8.7] 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Travel command, electrical stop, overtemperature SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 B0160 Run B0104 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 = n<nmin B0164 OFF1 or OGG3 from sequencing control [G188.5] Automatic restart (see Note 1) [G182.6] Enable setpoint from control word 1 [G180.8] Valid travel command 2 1 1 2 P080 1 & 3 1 & & 0 Note 2: A negative value in P087 indicates that the "Release brake" signal is delayed following the enable for the thyristor firing pulses. This is the scenario depicted in this function diagram. T P087.F (0,0) (-10,0...0,0 s) [see Note 2] Brake release time Brake control 4 Priority: 1. RESET 2. SET RESET (Q=0) SET (Q=1) Q Q B0255 T 0 6 Close brake B0250 Release brake P088.F (0,0) (0,0...10,0 s) Delayed disable of firing pulse 1 0 ON delay T P319.F (0,05) (0,00...10,00 s) 5 Disable firing pulse (1 = firing pulse disabled) [K8.2][K16.4] [K11.6] Enable setpoint [G136.2] 7 - K10 - 8 Sheet K10 Note 1: The "Automatic Restart" signal is generated by the sequencing control. If the power section voltage fails briefly when in "Run" (see P086) (and automatic restart is selected, i.e. P086 >0), the "Run" signal goes into log. "0" and the "Automatic restart" goes into log. "1" for the duration of the power failure. This causes the brake to remain released during this short torque-free period. 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Brake control 289 290 3 U330 B B B U400 B B B FS .01 9065 .02 9066 .03 9551 FS .01 9065 .02 9066 .03 9551 B9470 & B9360 130 No travel command [K17.5] & 200 FS .01 9359 .02 9360 FS .01 9470 .02 9456 .03 1 4 POWER ON U417 B B B B B U329 Enable brake Enable ramp-function generator Starting aid limit switch 2 1 & Q Q SET (Q=1) RESET (Q=0) B9359 129 5 B9555 217 B9554 Release brake [K10.6] U351 B B B 6 1 FS .01 255 .02 9381 .03 1 FS .01 9554 .02 9360 .03 0 U331 B B B & B9381 151 7 B9361 131 - K11 - [K6.2][G180.3] Enable rampfunction generator STW1, Bit 4 (P662) Control command for brake [K6.2][K7.4] [K15.3][K16.4] [G152.5] 8 Sheet K11 [K4.6] ES1 [K4.6] ES2 No overload [K8.7] 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Enable brake, enable ramp-function generator, starting aid limit switch SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 5 4 [Z110.5] Word 2 [Z110] [G113] Analog input main setpoint SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 K3002 K0011 control by PLC 2 U244 K K FS .01 11 .02 3002 U245 (3110) B 1 0 Setpoint processing 3 K9212 92 U281.01(9212) K 4 x -200% x1 y y1 U282.01 to .10 X values y10 Y values U283.01 to .10 5 P401 x10 +200% x y K0401 K9229 106 6 U150 K K FS .01 x1 9229 .02 x2 401 7 x1 * x2 100% y 50 K9150 - K12 - [K13.4] Speed setpoint 8 Sheet K12 CBP board/word 1 Bit10 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Setpoint processing 291 292 FK1 FK2 [K4.6] [K4.6] Notch/High speed [K5.6] Setpoint stage S3 (Kl.41) [G111.6] S4 SR U664 (9083) B U660 (9063) B B SL S3 U663 (20) B U661 (9064) S2 K0001 K0003 U246 K K 1 0 3 93 K9213 4 U248 K K FS .01 9150 .02 9213 U249 (9083) B 0 1 0 1 0 1 U665(10,00%) U666(25,00%) U667(40,00%) U668(100,00%) FS .01 1 .02 3 U247 (9064) B U662 (18) B 100,00 % -100,00 % [K4.6] FK2 Speed setpoint Setpoint stage S2 (Kl.40) [G111.6] [K12.8] 2 0% 0 1 1 0 =1 5 94 -1 K9214 0 1 U250 K K .01 FS .01 9214 .02 510 U251 (0) B 6 Setpoint of 4 stage master switch K0510 1 0 95 K9215 7 - K13 - Setpoint [G127.2] (P433) 8 Sheet K13 [K5.6] High speed notch Setpoint selection 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Setpoint selection SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1 [K8.7] 4 5 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [K4.6] FK2 [K5.7] VE2 No overload FK1 VE1 FS .01 9063 .02 9074 .03 1 FS .01 9064 .02 9075 .03 9551 U332 B B B U333 B B B & & B9363 133 B9362 132 U352 B B B FS .01 9362 .02 9363 .03 0 Setpoint reduction on reaching a pre-limit switch 3 1 B9382 152 6 [K6.2] [G135.5] [K17.2] No pre-limit switch 7 - K14 - 8 Sheet K14 [K4.6] [K5.7] 2 03.2015 Function diagrams Setpoint reduction on reaching a pre-limit switch 293 294 [K9.6] 1 U104 (9552) .01 B Control command for brake release [K11.8] U384 (9358) B 3 U334 B B B FS .01 9454 .02 9361 .03 1 Electrical Stop/Overtemperature 1 = "Alarm A023" B9454 184 & 6 Ramp-down monitoring 2 B9364 134 4 U440 (9364) B T Pulse generator ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay T O T 3 2 1 0 6 Mode U441 (10,500) (0,000...60,000s) U442 (0) U441 = Ramp-down time + 0.5s 5 1 240 B9581 B9580 U100 (9580) .01 B 7 - K15 - Ramp-down monitoring 1 = "Fault F023" 2 8 Sheet K15 Travel command [K9.8] 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Ramp-down monitoring SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Brake checkback signal [K5.6] SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 U385 (9080) B If brake monitoring is not used, U443 must be set=0 [K11.8] Control command for brake Close brake 3 1 Brake monitoring 2 U443 (9383) B B9455 185 FS .01 9361 .02 9080 .03 1 U336 B B B & & Pulse generator T 5 3 2 1 0 Mode U445 (0) ON/OFF delay T T OFF delay O T ON delay O T T U444 (0,500) (0,000...60,000s) FS .01 250 .02 9455 .03 1 U335 B B B 4 1 241 B9366 136 B9365 135 B9583 B9582 FS .01 9365 .02 9366 .03 0 U101 (9582) .01 B U353 B B B 6 3 B9383 153 Brake monitoring fault 1 = "Fault F024" 1 7 - K16 - 8 Sheet K16 [K10.6] 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Brake monitoring 295 [G182.7] 296 [K4.6] FK1 [K4.6] FK2 No pre-limit switch Notch/high speed [K5.6] [K14.6] FS .01 9063 .02 9064 .03 0 U338 B B B FS .01 9382 .02 9083 .03 1 High-speed step [K4.7] Reset U354 B B B & 1 Fault acknowledgement 2 3 B9368 138 B9384 154 1 B9456 186 5 High-speed step/zero delay angle (U605) [G160.5] U386 (9384) B 4 U337 B B B FS .01 9456 .02 105 .03 9059 [K8.2][K11.3] No travel command 6 & B9367 137 7 Fault ack. [K9.6] Ack. signal output [K7.4] - K17 - (U622) STW1, Bit 7 Acknowledge (P665) [G119.3][G180.1] 8 Sheet K17 No operation (pulse disabled) 1 Function diagrams 03.2015 Fault acknowledgement, high-speed step SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 nact [G152.3] K9187 U201 (-75,00) U198 (75,00) K9186 74 U200 K K 73 U197 K K FS .01 9187 .02 167 FS .01 167 .02 9186 B A B A Limit-value monitor 2 U202 U199 0 0 B 0 0 0 U199 U199 B U202 B U202 U202/2 B B U202 U199 U199/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U202 (0,00) B 0 Hysteresis 0,00...100,00 U199 (0,00) 3 A A A A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B A=B A<B <1> |A|<B B9174 B9173 B9172 B9171 B9170 B9169 4 K0401 Limit value 2 ZSW2 Bit 1 [K6.2] [G152.3] |nact| P401 Limit value 1 ZSW2 Bit 0 [K6.2] 5 75 U203 K K FS .01 401 .02 166 B A 6 U205 B 0 0 0 U205 U205 B U205 U205/2 B B Hysteresis 0,00..100,00 U205 (0,00) 7 A A A A=B A<B <1> |A|<B B9177 B9176 B9175 - K18 - [G136.1] RFG setting 2 (P637) 8 Sheet K18 [G152.3] nact 1 03.2015 Function diagrams Limit-value monitor 297 Function diagrams 298 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9 Function descriptions Function descriptions Note The converter functions available can be found in the function diagrams (block diagrams) in Section 8. Section 9 is not intended to be a complete description of these functions, but is aimed at explaining in more detail individual features which could not be shown graphically in sufficient detail in the figures, and to explain their applications using examples.... 9.1 General explanations of terms and functionality Function blocks Although the illustrated function blocks have been implemented in digital form (as software modules), the function diagrams can be "read" in a similar way to the circuit diagrams of analog equipment. Configurability The converter is characterized by the optional configurability of the function blocks provided. "Optional configurability" means that the connections between individual function blocks can be selected by means of parameters. Connectors All output variables and important computation quantities within the function blocks are available in the form of "connectors" (e.g. for further processing as input signals to other function blocks). The quantities accessed via connectors correspond to output signals or measuring points in an analog circuit and are identified by their "connector number" (e.g. K0003 = connector 3). Special cases: K0000 to K0008 are fixed values with signal levels corresponding to 0, 100, 200, 100, -200, 50, 150, -50 and -150%. K0009 is assigned to different signal quantities. Which signal quantity it actually refers to is dependent on the selector switch (parameter) at which connector number 9 is set. A description can be found under the relevant parameter number in the Parameter List. If the Parameter List or block diagram does not contain any reference to a special function in relation to selection of connector K0009, then the selector switch (parameter) concerned must not be set to "9". The internal numerical representation of connectors in the software is generally as follows: 100% corresponds to 4000 hexadecimal = 16384 decimal. The resolution is 0.006% (step change). Connectors have a value range of -200% to +199.99%. For a list of available connectors, please refer to Section 12. Example: The data received via peer-to-peer 2 are available at connectors K6001 to K6005 (Section 8, Sheet G173) G-SST2 1 X172 0 56 Tx+ 57 Tx- 58 Rx+/Tx+ 59 Rx-/Tx- 60 M r812.01 to .05 Receive data RS485 Word 1 Word 2 K6001 1 Word 3 K6003 0 Word 4 K6004 Word 5 K6005 K6002 Double-word connectors (SW 1.9 and later) Double-word connectors are connectors with a 32-bit value range (i.e. LOW word and HIGH word with a double-word value range of 00000000Hex to FFFFFFFFHex). -100 % to +100 % corresponds to connector values of C0000000 Hex to 40000000 Hex (= -1073741824 to +1073741824 decimal). This means that the value range in the upper 16 bits SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 299 Function descriptions 03.2015 (HIGH word) of a double-word connector is the same as for a "normal" connector (C000 Hex to 4000 Hex or -16384 to +16384 decimal for -100 % to +100 %). The extra 16 bits in the LOW word as compared to a "normal connector" afford, therefore, an improved resolution of the connector value by a factor of 65536. For information about how to use double-word connectors see also the section in "The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors" below. Double-word connector symbol in function diagrams: KK9498 Binectors All binary output quantities and important binary output signals of the function blocks are available as "Binectors" (connectors for binary signals). Binectors can assume states log. "0" and log."1". The quantities accessed via binectors correspond to output signals or measuring points in a digital circuit and are identified by their "Binector number" (e. g. B0003 = binector 3). Special cases: B0000 = Fixed value log."0" B0001 = Fixed value log."1" A list of available binectors can be found in Section 12. Example: The status of terminal 36 is available at B0010 and, in inverted form, at binector B0011 (Section 8, Sheet G110) 24V 36 B0010 5V M 1 B0011 Selection switches, connections (see also Section "Data sets") The inputs of function blocks are defined at "selection switches" by setting the appropriate selection parameters. The input is defined by entering the number of the connector or binector to be applied as the input quantity in the parameter for the relevant selection switch. Representation in function diagrams (examples): P750 (0) K Selection of a connector Parameter number = P750, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0%) P704 (0) B Selection of a binector Parameter number = P704, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0) P613 (1) K K K K P611 K K K K FS 277 0 0 0 P046 (0) .01 B .02 B .03 B .04 B 300 Selection of connectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices) Parameter number = P613, factory setting = 1 (i. e. fixed value 100%; this factory setting applies to all the indices of P613) .01 .02 .03 .04 .01 .02 .03 .04 Selection of connectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices) Parameter number = P611 Factory setting for index .01 = 277 (i. e. connection with connector K0277) Factory setting for indices .02 to .04 = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0%) Selection of binectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices) Parameter number = P046, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0, this factory setting applies to all the indices of P046) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions U181 (0) KK Selection of a double-word connector (SW 1.9 and later) Parameter number = U181, factory setting = 0 (i.e. fixed value 0%) The selected setting can be entered in the empty field (fields). The value in brackets next to the parameter number is the factory setting of the selection parameter. The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors (SW 1.9 and later): KK9498 U181 (0) KK9498 Double-word connector to double-word connector selection: K0401 U181 KK 401 Connector to double-word connector selection: KK9498 P044 K 9498 Double-word connector to connector selection: U751 (0) .01 L K 9498 .02 H K 9498 There are exceptions in the selection of transmission data for the serial interfaces and in the transmission of optional expansion modules (technology and communications modules, SIMOLINK module): If the same double-word connector is entered in two contiguous indices of the selection parameter, the entire value (the LOW and HIGH word) will be used. U751 (0) If different double-word connectors are entered in two contiguous indices of the selection parameter, in both cases only the HIGH word of the two double-word connectors will be used. KK9498 KK9498 KK9498 KK9499 K 9498 K 9499 The double word for subsequent processing comprises: LOW word = LOW word of double-word connector (KK9498) HIGH word = HIGH word of double-word connector (KK9498) The double word for subsequent processing comprises: LOW word = 0 HIGH word = selected connector (K0401) HIGH word of the double-word connector (KK9498) is connected to another block, the LOW word of the double-word connector (KK9498) is not used .01 H .02 H SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 301 Function descriptions 03.2015 Examples: Some examples of how to handle connectors and binectors are given below. Example 1: As a function of the status of terminal 36 (B0010 - see Section 8, Sheet G110), analog selectable input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) must be made available, either with the correct sign or inverted sign, at the function block output (= connector K0015). This output value must then be injected as an additional setpoint and output simultaneously at analog output terminal 14. The following settings need to be made to create the correct links: 1. P714 = 10: Selects binector B0010 (status of terminal 36) as the control signal for sign reversal. The setting for parameter P716 remains on 1 (= fixed value 1, as supplied). This means the analogue input is always connected. Section 8, Sheet G113: P714 (0) B 10 P713 (0) -1 3 -1 2 P716 (1) B Filter time [ms] P715 (0) 0 -1 1 0 r003 0% 0 K0015 1 1 Sign reversal Filtering Enabling of analog input 2. P645 = 15: Applies connector K0015 to the additional setpoint input when the setpoint is processed Section 8, Sheet G135: r029 Main setpoint P644.F(206) K0194 K K0198 K0197 Maximum P643 (9) K K K K .01 <1> .02 <1> .03 <1> .04 <1> P321.F (100,00) (-300,00...300,00 %) Additional setpoint P645.F (0) K 15 3. P750 = 15: Applies connector K0015 to the input of the function block for the analog output terminal 14. This example of K0015 illustrates how it is possible to apply a connector as an input signal to any number of function blocks. Section 8, Sheet G115: P751 (0) P750 (0) K 15 -1 3 -1 2 Filter time (0...10000ms) P752 (0) 1 0 302 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Example 2: Function descriptions The contents of connectors K0401 and K0402 must be output on the connector displays (parameter r043) The following settings need to be made to create the correct links: st P044.index.01 = 401: Links connector K0401 to the 1 connector display nd P044.index.02 = 402: Links connector K0402 to the 2 connector display Section 8, Sheet G121: r043.01 P044 (0) .01 K 401 .02 K 402 .03 K .04 K .05 K .06 K .07 K r043.03 r043.02 r043.05 r043.04 r043.07 r043.06 The following values are now displayed in parameter r043: r043.index.02:Contents of connector K0401 r043.index.02:Contents of connector K0402 r043.index.03: 0 to r043.index.07: 0 Parameter P044.index.03 to .07 remain at the works setting (0) (value in brackets next to parameter number) in this example, i. e. the contents of connector K0000 (=fixed value 0) are displayed on r043.index.03 to .07. Setting parameters (see also Section "Data sets") In addition to the parameters that are used to select a signal (connector, binector), there are also parameters which define an operating mode or the parameter value of some function. Representation in function diagrams: Apart from parameter numbers, the function diagrams may also contain the factory setting, function and value range of parameters as supplementary information. P109 (0) P462.F(10.00s) (0.01...300.00s) Ramp-up time Examples: Setting parameter Parameter number = P109, factory setting = 0 Setting parameter in function parameter set (".F" after parameter number) Parameter number = P462, factory setting = 10.00s Value range = 0.01...300.00s Parameter for setting ramp-up time P700 in function diagram Sheet G113 defines the signal type of the analog input (voltage input 10V, current input 0...20mA, current input 4...20mA). P705 in function diagram Sheet G113 determines the filter time for the analog input (adjustable in ms). Parameters P520 to P530 in Section 8, Sheet G153 determine the shape of the friction characteristic. P465 in Section 8, Sheet G126 determines whether the time settings must be multiplied by a factor of 1 or 60. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 303 Function descriptions Data sets See also Section "Switch over parameter sets" 03.2015 Switch over function parameters (function data sets): 4 different sets of some parameters (function parameters) are available and can be selected by means of the "Switch over function parameters" function. The switchover operation is controlled by control word 2 (bits 16 and 17, see Section 8, Sheet G181 and G175). Index .01, .02, .03 or .04 of these parameters is operative depending on the status of the control bit. The parameters of this parameter set are identified by an ".F" next to the parameter number in the function diagrams and by "FDS" under the parameter number in the tabulated parameter list. The parameters belonging to the function parameter set must not be confused with other parameters which, by chance, also have 4 indices. The latter parameters are not affected by the "Switch over function parameters" function. Switch over binector and connector parameters (Bico data sets): 2 different sets of some selection switches are available and can be selected by means of the "Switch over binector and connector parameters" function. The switchover function is controlled by control word 2 (bit 30, see Section 8, Sheet G181 and G175). The status of the control bit determines whether index.01 or index .02 of the parameter is operative. The parameters of the Bico data set are identified by a ".B" next to the parameter number in the function diagrams and by "BDS" under the parameter number in the tabulated parameter list. The parameters belonging to the Bico data set must not be confused with other parameters which, by chance, also have 2 indices. The latter parameters are not affected by the "Switch over binector and connector parameters" function. Display parameter The values of certain signals can be output using display parameters (r parameters, n parameters). Connector displays (Section 8, Sheet G121) can be used to link all connectors with display parameters so that they can be displayed. Representation in function diagrams: Apart from the parameter number, the function diagrams may also include a function description for the parameter as supplementary information. RFG status r316 Display parameter Parameter number = r316 Display of RFG (ramp-function generator) status 9.2 Computation cycles, time delay Functions associated with analog inputs, analog outputs, binary inputs, binary outputs and interfaces, as well as function blocks associated with the motorized potentiometer, setpoint generation, ramp-function generator and closed-loop speed and current controls, are called up and calculated in synchronism with the firing pulses (i.e. every 3.333 ms at a line frequency of 50 Hz). The parameter settings are processed in a further computation cycle with a cycle time of 20ms. With regard to the transfer of parameter values via interfaces, it is important to remember that some transferred parameters must be converted to this 20 ms cycle before they can be applied, for example, in the firing pulse cycle. 304 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9.3 Function descriptions Commands for switch on, shutdown and disabling of the firing pulses Note The commands described here for switch on, shutdown and disabling of the firing pulses are part of the command specified using "control word 1" (see Section 8, function diagram Sheet G180) The Switch on/Shutdown (ON/OFF1)" and "enable operation" commands are controlled by default by the crane control contained in the SIMOTRAS HD or by the external safety monitoring system ("mechanical stop") (see Section 6.1). The commands "Disconnect voltage (OFF2)" and "Fast stop (OFF3)" are not used in standard applications. 9.3.1 Switch-on / shutdown (ON / OFF1): terminal 37 - control word 1, bit 0 The "Shutdown" command causes the controlled braking of the drive unit to a standstill, disabling of the firing pulse and dropout of any line contactor present if controlled by binector B0124. The switch on command (bit 0 in control word 1) is formed from the logical operations: - ON / OFF1 from the crane control (see Section 6.1), applied by P654=9360 - "Switch-on / Shutdown" signal from terminal 37 (ext. "electrical stop") - Bit 0 on the connector selected via P648 - Switch on commands from INCH and CRAWL See also Section 8 function diagrams, Sheets G130 and G180. Operating modes: U617 = 0: Signal from terminal 37 not active, ON command comes from the crane control U617 = 1: AND operation between terminal 37 and ON from the crane control (ON only if both are log. 1). External "Electrical stop" via terminal 37 P648 = 9: The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. Bit 0 on the connector selected via P648 is not active. The ON command is created depending on U617 (see above). P648 9: The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. The ON command is created depending on U617 (see above). In addition, the signal generated there is ANDed with bit 0 of the connector selected via P648 (ON only if both signals are log. "1"). P445 = 0: The ON command is level-triggered. The ON command is created depending on U617 and P648 (see above): 1=ON, 0=OFF P445 = 1: The ON command is edge-triggered. The ON command created depending on U617 is saved at the 0 1 transition. The binector selected in P444 must be in the log. "1" state. The memory and thus the OFF command is reset when this binector switches to the log. "0" state. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 305 Function descriptions Sequence of operations for switching on drive: 1. 2. 3. 03.2015 Enter the "Switch-on" command (e.g. via terminal "Switch-on/shutdown") The converter exits operating state 07 Any "line contactor" present will pull in if controlled via B0124 If "Enable operation" signal is applied: 5. 6. 7. With a positive brake release time (P087), output a "Release holding or operating brake" signal (binector B0250 = 1) and wait for P087 to run down in operating state o1.0, with a negative brake release time (P087 negative), go to step 6 immediately, brake remains closed (binector B0250 = 0) Ramp-function generator, n and I controllers are enabled When a negative brake release time (P087) has run down, output signal "Release holding or operating brake" (binector B0250 = 1). Sequence of operations for shutting down drive: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Enter the "Shutdown" command (e.g. via terminal "Switch-on / shutdown") Decelerate along ramp-function generator ramp Wait until n < nmin (P370, P371) Output signal "Close holding or operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0) Wait for brake closing time (P088) to run down Input iset = 0 Ramp-function generator and n controller are disabled The pulses are disabled when I = 0 Any "line contactor" present will drop out if controlled via B0124 The converter reaches operating state o7.0 or higher On Switch-on/Shutdown Shutdown Controller enabled Internal controller enable Controller not enabled Setpoint enabled Internal setpoint enable Setpoint =0 n > nmin n < n min (P370,P371) P319 n < nmin Setpoint reached Actual speed value Setpoint reached Brake control signal (holding brake) Close brake Release brake P088 P087 P087 Brake release time(negative in this case) P088 Brake closing time P319 Delay of setpoint enable - When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached for the first time, an internal interlock is activated which prevents the drive from attempting to brake again if the motor is turned by external forces. The n < nmin signal then disappears again. - Changing the parameter setting between level and edge triggering affects the "Switch-on", "Shutdown" and "Crawl" commands. - The "Switch-on" and "Crawl" commands are applied alternately when edge triggering is selected, i.e. a "Switch-on" edge at terminal 37 cancels a "Crawl" function triggered beforehand, and a "Crawl" edge at a binector selected in P440 cancels an active "Switch-on" edge. - The converter cannot be restarted automatically after a brief failure of the electronics power supply when edge triggering is selected. 306 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9.3.2 Function descriptions Operating enable: terminal 38 - control word 1, bit 3 The command "No enable operation" causes the fastest possible disabling of the firing pulses, but no drop out of any line contactor present, if controlled using binector B0124. The enable operation command (bit 3 control word 1) is formed from the logical operations : Enable from the crane control (see Section 6.1), applied via P661=9382 and "Enable operation" signal from terminal 38 with crane drive control as described in Section 6 or Bit 3 on the connector selected via P648 See Section 8, Sheet G180. - Operating modes: U618 = 0: Signal from terminal 38 not active, enable comes from the crane control U618 = 1: AND operation between terminal 38 and enable from the crane control (enable only if both are log. 1). P648 = 9: The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. Bit 3 on the connector selected via P648 is not active. The operating enable command is generated from the AND operation between the enable signal from terminal 38 and the binector selected in P661 (see Section 8, Sheet G180). P648 9: The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 3 on this connector is ANDed with the enable operation signal as for the log. AND signal with P648=9. To ensure that the "Operating enable" function can be activated, the conditions defined in the following diagram must be fulfilled: P648 Via P648 as control word selected connector bit 3 P661.B (9382) B Operating enable (from te.38) U618 (0...1) =9 / 1 9 & Control word 1 bit 3 1 = Enable, pulse enable 0 = Pulse disable & 1 Sequence of operations for enabling operation (if a switch-on command is applied): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the "Enable operation" command With a positive brake release time (P087), output a "Release holding or operating brake" signal (binector B0250 = 1) and wait for P087 to run down in operating state o1.0, with a negative brake release time (P087 negative), go to step 3 immediately, brake remains closed (binector B0250 = 0) Ramp-function generator, n and I controllers are enabled Converter reaches operating state I, II or - - When a negative brake release time (P087) has run down, output signal "Release holding or operating brake" (binector B0250 = 1). Sequence of operations for cancellation of operating enable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Cancel "Enable operation" command Disable ramp-function generator, n and I controllers Enter Iset = 0 The pulses are disabled when I = 0 Output signal "Close operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 2) The converter reaches operating state 0.10 or higher Drive coasts to a standstill (or is braked by the operating brake) When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached, the signal "Close holding brake" is output (binector B0250, when P080 = 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 307 Function descriptions 9.3.3 03.2015 OFF2 (voltage disconnection): control word 1, bit 1 The "voltage disconnection" command causes the fastest possible disabling of the firing pulses, and drop out of any line contactor present, if controlled using binector B0124. The OFF2 signal is low active (log."0" state = voltage disconnection). The following operating modes are possible: P648 = 9: The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. OFF2 is generated from the AND operation between the binectors selected with P655, P656 and P657 (see Section 8, Sheet G180). P648 9: The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 1 of this then controls the OFF2 function. Sequence of operations for "Disconnect voltage": 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 9.3.4 Input "Disconnect voltage" command Disable ramp-function generator, n and I controllers Iset = 0 is applied The pulses are disabled when I = 0 Output signal "Close operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 2) Converter reaches operating state o10.0 or higher Any "line contactor" present will drop out if controlled via B0124 Drive coasts to a standstill (or is braked by the operating brake) When n < nmin (P370, P371) has been reached, the "Close holding brake" signal is output (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 1) OFF3 (Fast stop): control word 1, bit 2 The "fast stop" command causes the fastest possible braking of the drive to a standstill and then disabling of the firing pulses and drop out of any line contactor present, if controlled using binector B0124. The OFF3 signal is LOW active (log."0" state = fast stop). The following operating modes are possible: P648 = 9: The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. OFF3 is generated from the AND operation between the binectors selected with P658, P659 and P660 (see Section 8, Sheet G180). P648 9: The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 2 of this then controls the OFF3 function. Sequence of operations for "Fast stop": 1. 2. 3. 4. Input "Fast stop" command (e.g. binary input wired up to "Fast stop") Ramp-function generator is disabled Enter nset = 0 up to SW 1.84: Decelerate along current limit from SW 1.90: Decelerate along reversal ramp acc. to P296, P297, P298 (plugging) 5. Wait until n < nmin (P370, P371) 6. Output signal "Close operating or holding brake" (binector B0250 = 0) 7. Wait for brake closing time (P088) to run down 8. Enter Iset = 0 9. Ramp-function generator and n controller are disabled 10. The pulses are disabled when I = 0 11. Any "line contactor" present will drop out if controlled via B0124 12. Converter reaches operating state o9.0 or higher 308 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Sequence of operations for cancellation of "Fast stop": 1. 2. 3. Stop applying "Fast stop" command Enter the "Shutdown" command (e.g. via terminal "Switch-on / shutdown") Converter exits operating state o8 On Switch-on/Shutdown Shutdown No fast stop External fast stop Fast stop No fast stop Internal fast stop Internal fast stop Controller enable Internal controller enable Controller not enabled Setpoint enabled Internal setpoint enable Setpoint =0 n > n min n < n min (P370,P371) P319 n < n min Setpoint reached Actual speed value Setpoint reached Brake control signal (holding brake) Close brake Release brake P087 P088 P087 Brake release time(negative in this case) P088 Brake closing time P319 Delay of setpoint enable - The "Fast stop" command need only be applied as a short pulse (> 10 ms). It is then stored internally. The memory can be reset only by applying the "Shutdown" command ("0" signal on the terminal). - All "Fast stop" commands are ANDed by the SIMOTRAS converter, i.e. all commands must be set to "No fast stop" before the function can be deactivated. - When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached for the first time, an internal interlock is activated which prevents the drive from attempting to brake again if the motor is turned by external forces. The n < nmin signal then disappears again. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 309 Function descriptions 9.4 03.2015 Commands for specifying setpoints Note The commands described here for specifying setpoints are not used for standard applications. 9.4.1 Inching See also Section 8, function diagram Sheet G129 The INCHING function can be preset via the binectors selected with indices .01 to .08 of parameter P435 or via bits 8 and 9 of control word 1. When the control word option is used, the following operating modes are possible (see also function diagram, Sheet G180): P648 = 9: The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected in P668 and P669 determine bits 8 and 9 of control word 1 and thus the input of the INCH command. P648 9: The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bits 8 and 9 of this control the INCHING input. The "inching" function can only be executed when "Shutdown" ("0" signal on terminal 37) and "enable operation" ("1" signal on terminal 38) are applied. The "Inch" command is input when one or several of the named sources (binectors, bits in control word) change to the log. "1" state. In this case, a setpoint selected in parameter P436 is assigned to each source. An inching setpoint of 0 is applied if the inch command is input by two or more sources simultaneously. Parameter P437 can be set to define for each possible inch command source (binector, bit in control word - logic operation, see block diagram in Section 8) whether or not the ramp-function generator must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates with ramp-up/down times of 0. Sequence of operations for entering Inching command: If "Inch" is specified, any "line contactor" which may be used is switched on (if controlled using B0124) and the inching setpoint is applied (procedure as for "Switch on / Shutdown"). Sequence of operations for cancellation of Inching: After the "Inch" command has been cancelled, the sequence of operations commences in the same way as for "Shutdown". After n < nmin has been reached, the controllers are disabled and the line contactor opened after a parameterizable delay (P085) of between 0 and 60 sec. if controlled via B0124 (operating state 07.0 or higher). The drive remains in operating state 01.3 while the parameterizable delay period (max. 60.0 s) runs down. 310 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9.4.2 Function descriptions Crawl See also Section 8, function diagram Sheet G130 The "Crawling" function can be activated in operating state 07 and, with "Operation enabled", in the Run state. The "Crawl" command is entered when one or several of the binectors selected in P440 switches to the log. "1" state. A setpoint selected in parameter P441 is assigned to each binector. If the "Crawl" command is entered via several binectors, the setpoint values are added (limited to 200%). Parameter P442 can be set to define for each possible crawl command source (binector) whether or not the ramp-function generator must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates with ramp-up/down times of 0. Level / edge P445 = 0: Level-triggered Binector selected in P440 = 0: No crawl Binector selected in P440 = 1: Crawl P445 = 1: Edge-triggered The input of "Crawl" is stored when the binector state changes from 0 1 (see Section 8, Sheet 130). The binector selected in P444 must be in the log. "1" state at the same time. The memory is reset when this binector switches to the log. "0" state. Sequence of operations for entering Crawl command: If "Crawl" is specified in operating condition o7, any "line contactor" used (if controlled via B0124) is switched on and the crawling setpoint applied via the ramp-function generator. If the "Crawl" command is entered in the "Run" state, the drive decelerates from the operating speed to the crawling setpoint via the ramp-function generator. Sequence of operations for cancellation of Crawling: With "Crawling" active, but no "Switch-on" command applied: If all bits which activate the "Crawling" function switch to log. "0", the controllers are disabled after n < nmin is reached and any line contactor present is de-energized if controlled via B0124 (operating state o7.0 or higher). With "Crawling" active from "Run" operating state: If all bits which activate the "Crawling" function switch to log. "0" and if the conditions for the "Run" operating state are still fulfilled, then the drive accelerates from the set crawling speed to the operating speed via the ramp-function generator. See also Section 9.3.1 (Switch on / Shutdown) with regard to edge triggering and automatic restart. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 311 Function descriptions 9.4.3 03.2015 Fixed setpoint See also Section 8, function diagram Sheet G127 The "Fixed setpoint" function can be activated in the "Run" state with the "Enable controllers" signal applied. The "Fixed setpoint" function can be input via the binectors selected via indices .01 to .08 of parameter P430 and via bits 4 and 5 of control word 2 (= bits 20 and 21 of complete control word) (see function diagram in Section 8 for logic operation). When the control word method is used, the following operating modes are possible (see also Section 8, Sheet G181): P649 = 9: The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected via P680 and P681 determine bits 4 and 5 of control word 2 (= bits 20 and 21 of complete control word), and thus input of the "Fixed setpoint" function. P649 9: The connector selected via P649 is used as control word 2. Bits 4 and 5 of this word control the input of "Fixed setpoint". The "Fixed setpoint" function is input when one or several of the named sources (binectors, bits in control word) switch to the log. "1" state. In this case, a setpoint selected in parameter P431 is assigned to each source. If "Fixed setpoint" is input via several sources simultaneously, the associated setpoints are added (limited to 200%). Parameter P432 can be set to define for each possible fixed setpoint source (binector, bit in control word - logic operation, see block diagram in Section 8) whether or not the ramp-function generator must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates with ramp-up/down times of 0. Sequence for entering Fixed setpoint function: The fixed setpoint is injected instead of the main setpoint. Sequence for cancellation of Fixed setpoint function: When all the possible sources for injecting the fixed setpoint (binectors, bits in control word) have changed back to log. "0", the setpoint selected in parameter P433 (main setpoint) is switched through again. 9.5 Ramp-function generator See also Section 8, function diagram Sheet G136 Note The following conditions must be fulfilled for the ramp-function generator to work: - Ramp-function generator enable = 1 (control word 1.bit 4 = 1) - Enable setpoint = 1 312 (control word 1.bit 6 = 1) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9.5.1 Function descriptions Definitions Ramp-up = Acceleration from low, positive to high, positive speeds (e.g. from 10% to 90%) or from low, negative to high, negative speeds (e.g. from -10% to -90%) Ramp-down = Deceleration from high, positive to low, positive speeds (e.g. from 90% to 10%) or from high, negative to low, negative speeds (e.g. from -90% to -10%) On transition from negative to positive speeds, e.g. -10% to +50%: From -10% to 0 = ramp-down and From 0 to +50% = ramp-up and vice versa Ramp-up time refers to the time required by the ramp-function generator to reach the 100% output value, with a lower and upper transition rounding of 0 and a step change in the input quantity from 0 to 100% or from 0 to -100%. The rate of rise at the output is the same in response to smaller step changes in the input quantity. Ramp-down time refers to the time required by the ramp-function generator to reach the 0% output value, with a lower and upper transition rounding of 0 and a step change in the input quantity from 100% to 0 or from -100% to 0. The rate of rise at the output is the same in response to smaller step changes in the input quantity. 9.5.2 Operating principle of ramp-function generator K0190 K0192 HLZ RLZ RLZ 100% HLZ AR/2 AR/2 ER/2 t ER/2 AR/2 RFG setpoint (K0192) RFG output (K0190) -100% K0191 (dv/dt) AR ER AR 1) AR ER AR 2) AR AR 3) t dy/dt (K0191) HLZ ... Ramp-up time (P303, P307, P311), RLZ ... Ramp-down time (P304, P308, P312) AR ... Lower transition rounding (P305, P309, P313), ER ... Upper transition rounding (P306, P310, P314) 1) Transition from the ramp-down gradient to the ramp-up gradient 2) A transition from the lower rounding to upper rounding takes place before the maximum ramp-down gradient is reached 3) The ramp-function generator input step means that only the final part of the upper transition rounding is performed SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 313 Function descriptions 9.5.3 03.2015 Control signals for ramp-function generator The ramp-function generator operating mode can be preset by the following control signals: Ramp-function generator start (control word 1.bit 5): 1 = Setpoint is injected at ramp-function generator input 0 = Ramp-function generator is stopped at current value (generator output is injected as generator input). Enable setpoint (control word 1.bit 6): 1 = Setpoint enabled at ramp-function generator input 0 = Ramp-function generator setting 1 is activated and 0 applied at the input (generator output is reduced to 0) Set ramp-function generator: 1 = The ramp-function generator output is set to the setting value (selected in P639) Enable ramp-function generator (control word 1.bit 4): 0 = Ramp generator disabled, generator output is set to 0 1 = Ramp-function generator enabled Ramp-up integrator operation (parameter P302): See below and Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P302 Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator (select via P646): See below Ramp-function generator settings 2 and 3 See below Ramp-function generator tracking ON (parameter P317): See below and Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P317 Set ramp-function generator on shutdown (parameter P318): See Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P318 Bypass ramp-function generator: 1 = Ramp-function generator operates with ramp-up/ramp-down time of 0 The function is controlled via the binector selected in P641. The ramp generator can also be bypassed in INCHING, CRAWLING and INJECTION OF FIXED SETPOINT modes. 9.5.4 Ramp-function generator settings 1, 2 and 3 Selection via binectors selected in parameters P637 and P638 Status of binector selected by parameter Ramp function generator setting Effective runup time Effective rundown time Effective lower transition rounding Effective upper transition rounding P637 P638 0 0 1 P303 P304 P305 P306 1 0 2 P307 P308 P309 P310 0 1 3 P311 P312 P313 P314 1 1 Not permitted, activates fault message F041 (selection not clear) The ramp-function generator settings preset via the binectors selected in P637 and P638 have priority over the generator setting specified via the ramp-up integrator. 314 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions The selection parameter for the switchover to RFG setting 2 is set to 129 in the factory setting (binector B0129: 0=positive speed setpoint / hoist, 1=negative speed setpoint / lower). Thus, switching takes place automatically to RFG setting 1 for hoisting and to RFG setting 2 for lowering. 9.5.5 Ramp-up integrator The ramp-up integrator is activated by setting P302 = 1, 2 or 3. After an "ON" command ("Switchon", "Inching", "Crawling"), ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied until the ramp-function generator output reaches the required setpoint for the first time. The remaining sequence of operations is controlled by the "Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator" function (binector selected in P646). Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator = 1: As soon as the ramp-function generator output reaches the required setpoint for the first time after the "ON" command, the ramp generator setting selected in P302 is activated automatically. Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator = 0: Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) remains active after the generator output has reached its setpoint until the "Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator" function is switched to 1. The ramp generator setting then changes to that selected in P302. When the enable signal for ramp-up integrator switchover is cancelled ( 0), ramp-function generator setting 1 is activated again and, with a new enable command ( 1), this setting continues to remain active until the generator output has reached its setpoint again. The ramp generator setting selected in P302 is then activated again. When a "Shutdown" command is given, the drive is shut down according to setting 1. Note: Activation of "Ramp-function generator setting 2" (P307 to P310, selected in P637), or "Rampfunction generator setting 3" (P311 to P314, selected in P368), has priority over the generator setting selected by means of the "Ramp-up integrator" function. 9.5.6 Ramp-function generator tracking The ramp-function generator output (K0190) is limited to the following values when ramp-function generator tracking is activated: -IA, lim it 1.25 + nact < Kp nact + IA, limit - IA, limit Kp RFG output < +IA, lim it 1.25 + nact Kp Actual speed value (K0167) Lowest positive current limit (K0131) Lowest negative current limit (K0132) Effective speed controller gain However, if the value added to nact were to correspond to less than 1%, then +1% or -1% would be added. The purpose of the "Ramp-function generator tracking" function is to ensure that the ramp generator value cannot deviate excessively from the actual speed value once the current limit has been reached. Note: When ramp-function generator tracking is selected, the filter time for the speed setpoint should be set to a low value in P228 (preferably to 0). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 315 Function descriptions 9.5.7 03.2015 Limitation after ramp-function generator Since the input signal can be freely selected, this limiter stage can be used completely independently of the ramp-function generator. A special feature of this limiter is that the lower limit can also be set to positive values and the upper limit to negative values (see P300 and P301). This type of limit setting then acts as a lower limit (minimum value) for the ramp generator output signal in the other sign direction. Example: P632.01-04 = 1 (= 100.00%) P300 = 100.00 (%) P301 = 10.00 (%) P633.01-04 = 9 (= -100.00%) results in a limitation of the value range for K0170 to between +10.00% and +100.00% 9.5.8 Velocity signal dv/dt (K0191) This signal specifies the change in the ramp-function generator output K0190 in the time period set in P542. 9.6 Speed controller See also Section 8, function diagram Sheet G151 and G152 Control signals for speed controller The control signals for "Enable speed controller droop", "Enable speed controller" and "Switch over master/slave drive" are supplied by control word 2. The following operating modes are possible (see also Section 8, Sheet G181): P649 = 9: The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected in P684, P685 and P687 determine bits 8, 9 and 11 of control word 2 (= bits 24, 25 and 27 of complete control word), and thus the functions "Enable speed controller droop", "Enable speed controller" and "Switch over master/slave drive". P649 9: The connector selected in P649 is used as control word 2. Bits 8, 9 and 11 control the functions "Enable speed controller droop", "Enable speed controller" and "Switch over master/slave drive". Enable speed controller: 0 = Disable controller, controller output (K0160) = 0, P component (K0161) = 0, I component (K0162) = value of connector selected in P631 1 = Enable controller Enable droop: 0 = Droop is not active 1 = Droop is active Switch over master/slave drive: 0 = Master drive 1 = Slave drive When "Slave drive" is selected, the I component of the speed controller is made to "track" such that M(set, n contr.) = M(set, limit.), the speed setpoint is set to equal the actual speed (K0179) (enable tracking with P229). Set I component (selection of control signal via parameter P695): When 0 1 signal transition of selected binector, the I component is set to the setting value (selected in parameter P631) 316 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Stop I component (selection of control signal via parameter P696): 0 = I component enabled 1 = Stop I component Limitation active: This signal is in the log. "1" state when the upper or lower torque limitation is violated, the speed limiting controller is active, the current limitation is active or when the firing angle reaches the limit. In this case, the I component of the speed controller is stopped. Switch over to P controller: The P controller function is activated (I component = 0) when the speed drops to below the changeover value. Enabling of function via P698 D component in actual value channel or setpoint/actual value deviation channel As a basis for selecting the correct derivative action time, it is necessary to calculate the maximum possible rate of rise at the derivative action element input, i.e. the period of time required by the input signal to change from 0 to 100% at this maximum rate of rise. The derivative action time should preferably be set to a shorter value than this period. 9.7 Switch on auxiliaries The function acts as a switch-on command for auxiliaries (e.g. motor fan). The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal is available at binector B0251 and inverted on B0256: B0251 log. "0" state = Auxiliaries OFF log. "1" state = Auxiliaries ON To act as the auxiliaries drive signal, this binector must be "wired up" to a binary output, e.g. by setting P771 to 252 for connection to output terminals 46 / 47 (see Section 8, Sheet G112, for other possible settings). The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal switches to "high" at the same time as the "Switch on" command. The converter then waits in operating state o6.0 for a parameterizable delay period (P093). Any "line contactor" used will then be activated if controlled via B0124 When the "Shutdown" command is entered, the firing pulses are disabled when n < nmin is reached and any line contactor used drops out (if controlled via B0124). The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal switches to "low" after a parameterizable delay period (P094). However, if the "Switch on" command is entered again before this delay has expired, then the converter does not stay in operating state o6.0, but any line contactor used is closed immediately instead (if controlled via B0124). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 317 Function descriptions 9.8 03.2015 Switch over parameter sets See also in Section 9.1 under heading "Data sets" WARNING Parameter sets can be switched over while the converter is in operation (online). As a result, depending on the setting of the control bits when the motor is running, the configuration or functions may be altered in such a way as to produce dangerous operating conditions. For this reason, we strongly recommend that a "basic" parameter set containing all basic parameter settings is created first and then copied into the other parameter sets (using P055 or P057) . The intentional changes vis-a-vis the "basic" version should then be entered in each parameter set. The "Switch over parameter sets" function affects function parameters (identified by an ".F" next to parameter number in block diagrams in Section 8) and Bico parameters (identified by a ".B" next to parameter number in block diagrams in Section 8). The following operating modes are possible (see also Section 8, Sheet G181): P649 = 9: The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected in P676 and P677 determine bits 0 and 1 of control word 2 (= bits 16 and 17 of complete control word), and thus the input of the function data set. The binector selected in P690 determines bit 14 of control word 2 (= bit 30 of complete control word), and thus the input of the Bico data set. P649 9: The connector selected in P649 is used as control word 2. Bits 0 and 1 of control word 2 (bits 16 and 17 of complete control word) control the input of the function data set. Bit 14 (= bit 30 of complete control word) controls the input of the Bico data set. Control word Active function data set Bit 16 Bit17 (active index) 0 0 1 1 0 2 0 1 3 1 1 4 Control word Active Bico data set Bit30 (active index) 0 1 1 2 Caution: When the "Switch over parameter sets" function is activated, a time delay of up to 25ms may occur before the newly selected parameter set actually becomes operative. For information about copying parameter sets, please see Section 11 (Parameter List), parameters P055 and P057. 318 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 9.9 Function descriptions Serial interfaces The SIMOTRAS 6SG70 converter is equipped with the following serial interfaces: - G-SST1 (serial interface 1) Connector X300 on board A7005 (operator panel) USS(R) protocol provided for the purpose of connection the OP1S operator panel - G-SST2 (serial interface 2) Terminal strip X172 (terminals 56 to 60) on board A7001 USS(R) and peer-to-peer protocol, parameterizable Additionally if board A7006 (terminal expansion) is installed: - G-SST3 (serial interface 3) Terminal strip X162 (terminals 61 to 65) USS(R) and peer-to-peer protocol, parameterizable Interface hardware The hardware of G-SST1 is designed to operate in RS232 and RS485 standard / two-wire mode, and G-SST2 and G-SST3 in RS485 standard / two and four-wire mode. For connectors and terminal assignments, see Section 8, Sheets G170 to G174. The maximum cable length for a peer-to-peer connection from the transmitter to the last receiver connected to the same transmission output is 1000 m. The same maximum cable length applies to the bus cable of a USS connection. The maximum cable length is only 500 m for both types of connection if a baud rate of 187500 bd is selected. USS: A maximum of 32 nodes can be connected in the bus configuration (i.e. 1 master and max. 31 slaves). The bus connector must be activated on the two bus nodes which form each end of the bus circuit. Peer-to-peer: Up to 31 other drives can be connected in parallel to the transmit cable of one drive. With a "parallel connection", the bus connector must be activated on the last connected drive. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 319 Function descriptions 9.9.1 03.2015 Serial interfaces with USS(R) protocol Specification for the USS(R) protocol: Order No. E20125-D0001-S302-A1 The SIEMENS USS(R) protocol is implemented in all digital converter devices supplied by SIEMENS. It can be used to provide a point-to-point or bus-type link to a master station. Any mixture of converter types can be connected up to the same bus line. The USS protocol makes it possible to access all relevant process data, diagnostic information and parameters of the SIMOTRAS converter. The USS protocol is a pure master-slave protocol. In this case, a converter device can only ever function as slave. Converter devices will transmit a telegram to the master only if they have received one from it first. In other words, converters linked via the USS protocol cannot exchange data directly with one another (they can do this only via a peer-to-peer link). Useful data which can be transferred via the USS protocol Sheets G170 to G172 in Section 8 show how useful data can be interconnected and list the parameters relevant for configuring USS interfaces. If parameters need to be read and/or written via the USS interface, then "Parameter data length" (P782, P792, P802) must be set to 3, 4 or 127 (select setting 4 only if double word parameters need to be transferred). If parameters do not need to be transferred, the "Parameter data length" must be set to 0. The number of process data words to be transferred is basically identical for the transmit and receive directions and can be set in "Process data length" (P781, P791, P801). Numeric representation "100% equals 4000h = 16384d" applies to all connectors. Transfer of double-word connectors: In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K2002 and K2003 to KK2032). These double-word connectors can be connected in the usual way to other function blocks. For details of how to connect with doubleword connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection "The following rules apply to the selection of doubleword connectors". In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word connector at two contiguous indices of the selection parameter. Examples: K0032 KK9498 KK9498 K0401 K0032 KK9498 KK9499 K0401 P784 K 32 .01 K 9498 .02 K 401 .04 K 9498 P784 K 32 K 9498 K 9499 K 401 .03 .01 .02 .03 .04 Word L-Word H-Word Word Word H-Word H-Word 2 different double-word connectors Word Numeric representation of parameter numbers and values on serial interfaces The mode of numeric representation of a parameter value is determined by the parameter "type" assigned to each parameter in the Parameter List. The different types of parameter are explained at the beginning of the list. Parameters are always transmitted in the form specified in the "Value range" column of the Parameter List; any decimal point, however, is omitted (example: display value 123.45 the number 12345d = 3039h is transferred via the serial interface). Diagnostics and monitoring functions for USS interfaces All transmitted and received useful data words can be checked (directly at the internal software transfer point from/to USS driver) by means of display parameters r810 / r811, r812 / r813 or r814 / r815. 320 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Diagnostic parameters r789, r799 or r809 provide information about the chronological distribution of errored and error-free telegrams, as well as the nature of any communication errors that have occurred. A watchdog can be set in P787, P797 or P807 which can initiate a shutdown on faults (F011, F012 or F013) in the case of timeout. By connecting binectors B2031, B6031 or B9031 to the fault message triggers (using P788=2031 / P798=6031 / P808=9031), it is possible to acknowledge these fault messages even if the fault is active continuously, thereby ensuring that the drive can still be operated manually after the USS interface has failed. Important ! The serial interfaces for the USS protocol are parameterized with the same parameters used to configure the peer-to-peer protocol, although the setting ranges are different in some cases (see Notes for relevant parameters in Parameter List, Section 11). USS protocol: Brief start-up guide for 6SG70 converters G-SST1 RS232 / RS485 G-SST1 RS485 for connection of an OP1S G-SST2 / G-SST3 RS485 Select USS protocol P780 = 2 P780 = 2 P790 / P800 = 2 Baud rate P783 = 1 to 13, corresponding to 300 to 187500 baud P783 = 6 (9600 Bd) or 7 (19200 Bd) The baud rate setting must be identical for every node in bus operation P793 / P803 = 1 to 13, corresponding to 300 to 187500 baud No. of process data (PZD No.) (applies to Receive and Send) P781 = 0 to 16 P781 = 2 P791 / P801 = 0 to 16 PZD assignment for control word and setpoints (received process data) All received process data are taken to connectors and must be wired up as required If the control bits from the OP1S are to be used: Word 1 (connector K2001): Meaning of control bit from OP1S, see Sec. 7.2.2 Word 2 (connector K2002): Not used All received process data are taken to connectors and must be wired up as required No. of PKW P782 = 0: No PKW data 3 / 4: 3 / 4 PKW data words 127: Variable data length for slave master P782 = 127 variable data length P792 / P802 = 0: No PKW data 3 / 4: 3 / 4 PKW data words 127: Variable data length for slave master PZD assignment for actual values (transmitted process data) Selection of transmitted values via P784 Word 1: P784.i01=32 (stat. word 1 K0032) Word 2: P784.i02=0 Selection of transmitted values via P794 / P804 Node address P786 = 0 to 30 P786 = 0 to 30 Every node must have its own, unique address for bus operation P796 / P806 = 0 to 30 Telegram failure time P787 = 0.000 to 65.000s P787 = 0.000s P797 / P807 = 0.000 to 65.000s Bus terminator P785 = 0: bus terminator OFF 1: bus terminator ON P785 = 0: bus terminator OFF 1: bus terminator ON P795 / P805 = 0: bus terminator OFF 1: bus terminator ON Bus / point-to-point communication RS232: Only point-to-point operation possible RS485: Bus operation possible Bus operation possible Bus operation possible 2-wire / 4-wire transmission via RS485 interface 2-wire operation is selected automatically 2-wire operation is selected automatically 2-wire operation is selected automatically Cable Connector assignments, see Sect. 6.6 or Sheet 170 in Sect. 8 See operating instructions for OP1S operator panel Connector assignments, see Sect. 6.6 or Sheets G171, G172 in Sect. 8 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 321 Function descriptions Connection example for a USS bus 03.2015 Master (Bus terminating resistors activated) Slave 1 (Bus terminating resistors deactivated) Slave 2 (Bus terminating resistors deactivated) Slave n (n<=31)) (Bus terminating resistors activated) SIMATIC S5 6SG70 6SG70 6SG70 Rx Rx Rx CP524 with RS485 module ...0AA43 Tx Tx Tx (Bridge X3: 20-18 --> 2-wire cable) Rx Tx 14 12 10 X3 4 150 8 64 X3 + 11 SUB-D connector 15-pole 1) + 59 + 59 + 58 + 58 + 59 + 58 2) 1)The interface cable shields should be connected at low impedance directly to the converters on the converter or cabinet ground (e.g. using a clamp). 2) Twisted-pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 qmm; in the case of longer cable runs, an equipotential bonding conductor should be used to ensure that the difference of the frame potentials between the connected units remains below 7V. 9.9.2 Serial interfaces with peer-to-peer protocol The term "Peer-to-peer link" refers to a "Link between partners of equal status". In contrast to the classic master/slave bus system (e.g. USS and PROFIBUS), the same converter can function as both the master (setpoint source) and the slave (setpoint receiver) in a peer-to-peer link. Signals can be transferred in fully digital form from one converter to another via the peer-to-peer link, for example: - Velocity setpoints - Torque setpoints - Acceleration setpoints (dv/dt) - Control commands Useful data which can be transferred via the peer-to-peer link Sheets G172 and G174 show how useful data can be interconnected and list the parameters relevant for configuring peer-to-peer links. Any connectors can be parameterized as transmit data (numeric representation: 100% equals 4000h = 16384d). Parameters cannot be transferred via the peer-to-peer link. Transfer of double-word connectors: In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K6001 and K6002 to KK6081). These double-word connectors can be connected in the usual way to other function blocks. For details of how to connect with doubleword connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection "The following rules apply to the selection of doubleword connectors". In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word connector at two contiguous indices of the selection parameter. 322 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Examples: P794 KK9498 KK9498 K0401 K0402 KK9498 KK9499 K0401 K0402 P794 .01 K 9498 .02 K 9499 .03 K 401 .04 K 402 H-Word H-Word K 9498 .01 K 401 .03 K 9498 .02 K 402 .04 L-Word H-Word Word Word 2 different double-word connectors Word Word Diagnostics and monitoring functions for peer-to-peer link All transmitted and received useful data words can be checked (directly at the internal software transfer point from/to peer driver) by means of display parameters r812 / r813 or r814 / r815. Diagnostic parameters r799 or r809 provide information about the chronological distribution of errored and error-free telegrams, as well as the nature of any communication errors that have occurred. A watchdog can be set in P797 or P807 which can initiate a shutdown on faults (F012 or F013) in the case of timeout. By connecting binectors B6031 or B9031 to the fault message triggers (using P798=6031 / P808=9031), it is possible to acknowledge these fault messages even if the fault is active continuously, thereby ensuring that the drive can still be operated manually after the peer-topeer interface has failed. Important ! The serial interfaces for the peer-to-peer protocol are parameterized with the same parameters used to configure the USS protocol, although the setting ranges are different in some cases (see Notes for relevant parameters in Parameter List, Section 11). Peer-to-peer communication, 4-wire operation Serial linking of converter to converter (partners of equal status). The signal flow can pass through the drives, for example, in a series connection. In this case, each drive forwards the data after processing only to the next drive (classic setpoint cascade). Brief start-up guide for 6SG70 converters G-SST2 RS485 G-SST3 RS485 Select peer-to-peer protocol P790 = 5 P800 = 5 Baud rate P793 = 1 to 13 corresponding to 300 to 187500 baud P803 = 1 to 13 corresponding to 300 to 187500 baud No. of process data (PZD No.) (applies to Receive and Send) P791 = 1 to 5 P801 = 1 to 5 PZD assignment for control word All received process data are taken to connectors and setpoints and must be wired up as required (received process data) All received process data are taken to connectors and must be wired up as required No. of PKW No parameters can be transferred No parameters can be transferred PZD assignment for actual values (transmitted process data) Selection of transmitted values via P794 (indices .01 to .05) Selection of transmitted values via P804 (indices .01 to .05) Telegram failure time P797 = 0.000 to 65.000s P807 = 0.000 to 65.000s Bus terminator P795 = 0: bus terminator OFF 1: bus terminator ON (depending on type of link) P805 = 0: bus terminator OFF 1: bus terminator ON (depending on type of link) 2-wire / 4-wire transmission via RS485 interface "4-wire" operation is automatically selected "4-wire" operation is automatically selected Cable Terminal assignments, see Section 6.6 or Sheet G173 in Section 8 Terminal assignments, see Section 6.6 or Sheet G174 in Section 8 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 323 Function descriptions Examples of peer-to-peer links Drive 1 (Activate bus terminating resistors when using data feedback) Drive 2 (Bus terminating resistors activated) 6SG70 Tx Rx + 59 Drive 3 (Bus terminating resistors activated) 6SG70 Rx - 03.2015 6SG70 Tx - + 56 57 + 58 59 6SG70 Rx + - + 58 Drive n n=any number (Bus terminating resistors activated) Tx Rx + 57 - + 56 + 58 59 Tx + 57 - + 56 - + 58 59 57 + 56 2) Data feedback 3) Type of peer connection "Series connection" Each drive receives its setpoint from the preceding drive (classical setpoint cascade) 1) The interface cable shields should be connected at low impedance directly to the converters on the converter or cabinet ground (e.g. using a clamp). 2) Twisted-pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 qmm; in the case of longer cable runs, an equipotential bonding conductor should be used to ensure that the difference of the frame potentials between the connected units remains below 7V. 3) Optional data feedback that drive 1 uses to monitor the operation of the entire peer-to-peer network. Drive 1 Drive 2 (Bus terminating resistors activated) Drive 3 (Bus terminating resistors deactivated) Drive n (n <= 32) (Bus terminating resistors activated) 6SG70 6SG70 6SG70 6SG70 Rx Tx Rx 59 + 58 Rx + + - Tx 57 - + 56 1) 59 + 58 57 Tx Rx + + + 56 59 - + 58 57 Tx + 56 59 + 58 57 + 56 2) Type of peer connection "Parallel conenction" Up to 31 drives receive identical setpoints from drive 1 1) The interface cable shields should be connected at low impedance directly to the converters on the converter or cabinet ground (e.g. using a clamp). 2) Twisted-pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 qmm; in the case of longer cable runs, an equipotential bonding conductor should be used to ensure that the difference of the frame potentials between the connected units remains below 7V. 324 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Bus terminating resistors activated Bus terminating resistors deactivated Bus terminating resistors deactivated Bus terminating resistors activated 6SG70 6SG70 6SG70 6SG70 Enable Transmit transmit=1 data Enable transmit=0 Rx 0 Rx 1 0 Tx 59 + + 58 57 Rx 1 0 Tx - + 56 1) Enable transmit=0 59 + + 58 57 + 56 Enable transmit=0 Rx 1 0 1 Tx Tx 59 + + 58 57 + 56 59 + + 58 57 + 56 2) Type of peer connection "Bus connection" Up to 31 drives receive identical setpoints from a drive. The transmitting drive is selected with "Enable transmit" = 1. "Enable transmit" must be = 0 for all other drives. 1) The interface cable shields should be connected at low impedance directly to the converters on the converter or cabinet ground (e.g. using a clamp). 2) Twisted-pair cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 qmm; in the case of longer cable runs, an equipotential bonding conductor should be used to ensure that the difference of the frame potentials between the connected units remains below 7V. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 325 Function descriptions 9.10 03.2015 Thermal overload protection of motor (I2t monitoring of motor) The I2t monitoring function is parameterized in parameters P100, P113 and P114. If these parameters are adapted correctly, the motor is protected against overloading (not all-round motor protection). Adaptation A time constant Tmotor in minutes for the I2t monitoring function must be entered in parameter P114. P114: P113, P100: The permissible continuous current of the motor must be defined by parameters P100 and P113. The permissible continuous current is the product of the calculation P113 * P100. Warning characteristic / switch-off characteristic If the motor is loaded constantly, for example, with about 125% of the permissible continuous motor current, then alarm A037 is triggered after a time constant (P114) has elapsed. If the load is not reduced, then the drive is shut down when the switch-off characteristic is reached and fault message F037 displayed. Warning/switch-off times for other loads can be calculated from the diagram. Alarm message triggering by motor I2t monitoring function This diagram shows how long it takes for an alarm message to be triggered if, after a long preloading period (> 5 * T_th), a new constant load value is injected abruptly. T_th = P114 .. thermal time constant of motor Load current / permissible continuous current (P100 x P113) 2,5 0% preloading 20% preloading 40% preloading 60% preloading 80% preloading 2 0% preloading 1,5 1 80% preloading 0,5 0 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 Tim e / therm al tim e constant of m otor 326 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Function descriptions Fault message triggering by motor I2t monitoring function This diagram shows how long it takes for a fault message to be triggered if, after a long preloading period (> 5 * T_th), a new constant load value is injected abruptly. T_th = P114 .. thermal time constant of motor Load current / permissible continuous current (P100 x P113) 2,5 0% preloading 20% preloading 40% preloading 60% preloading 80% preloading 2 0% preloading 1,5 1 80% preloading 0,5 0 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 Tim e / therm al tim e constant of m otor Note When the electronics power supply fails for longer than 2 s, the calculated motor preloading value is lost. When the supply is reconnected, the system assumes that the connected motor has not been loaded at all! If the converter is switched on again (e.g. with "Automatic restart function") within 2 s of the electronics power supply failing, then the last calculated l2t value of the motor is applied. The I2t monitoring function reproduces only a rough thermal image of the motor, i.e. it does not provide all-round motor protection. If P114 (Tmotor) is set to zero, then the I2t monitoring function is deactivated. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 327 Function descriptions 9.11 03.2015 Automatic restart The "Automatic restart" function is controlled by the setting in parameter P086: P086 = 0 P086 = 0.1s to 2.0s No automatic restart "Automatic restart" in seconds The purpose of the "Automatic restart" function is to prevent the SIMOTRAS converter from switching immediately to the "FAULT" state, but allow it to return to the "Run" state after the elimination of certain fault conditions such as brief failures in supply voltages, brief undervoltage or overvoltage, excessively high or low line frequencies. The appropriate fault message is output only if one of the following fault conditions prevails continuously for longer than the "Automatic restart time" set in P086 (maximum time delay within which fault condition must be eliminated for "Automatic restart"): F001 Failure of electronics supply in operation (5U1, 5W1) F004 Phase failure in the supply to the power section (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) F006 Undervoltage in the supply to the power section F007 Overvoltage in the supply to the power section F008 Mains frequency below 45Hz F009 Mains frequency above 65Hz When one of the fault conditions associated with faults F004, F006, F008, F009 is active and the automatic restart time delay is still running, the converter dwells in operating state 04.0. Failures in the electronics supply lasting up to several 100 ms are bridged by the back-up power supply. With longer failures, the failure time is measured by measuring the voltage across one "discharge capacitor" and, if the failure has not lasted as long as the "Restart time" set in P086, the converter restarted again immediately provided that the corresponding control signals (e.g. "Switchon", "Operating enable") are still applied. When the "Switch-on", "Shutdown" and "Crawl" functions are edge-triggered (see P445 = 1), the converter cannot be restarted automatically after the power supply backup has been used. 328 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Status description of some bits of status word ZSW1 Bit 6 Starting lockout Bit 5 (Low active) Fast stop (OFF3) Bit 4 (Low active) Voltage disconnection (OFF2) Bit 3 Fault Bit 2 Run Bit 1 Ready Bit 0 Ready for switch-on 9.12 Function descriptions Operating state M0, MI or MII (=Run) Code I ,II ,- - Wait for operating enable (=READY) o1 Reserved o2 Test phase o3 Waiting for voltage o4 Reserved o5 Wait state prior to switch on of line contactor o6 Waiting for switch-on (=READY) o7 Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout o8 Fast stop (OFF3) o9 Voltage disconnection (OFF2) o10 Fault o11 Electronics not initialised o12 I II -- 0 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 329 Function descriptions 330 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 10 Faults / alarms Faults and alarms When a fault or alarm message is activated, it is displayed both on the simple operator control panel (PMU) and on the OP1S user-friendly operator control panel (see also Section 7.2, Operator control panels). An alarm stops being displayed immediately the cause of the alarm signal has been eliminated. A fault message must be cancelled by pressing the P key on the PMU or Reset key on the OP1S (panel must be in "Operational display" status) as soon as the cause has been eliminated. Note Setting parameters when fault or alarm message is active On the PMU: You can shift an active fault message or alarm "to the background" by pressing the P key and Higher key simultaneously on the PMU. If you do not press any key on the PMU within a 30 s period, the fault message or active alarm in the background is automatically displayed again. You can fetch a message back to the foreground earlier by pressing the P key and Lower key simultaneously on the PMU when the parameter number level is selected. On the OP1S: You can set parameters normally even if a fault message or alarm is active. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 331 Faults / alarms 10.1 03.2015 Fault messages 10.1.1 General information about faults Fault message display: On the PMU: F (fault) and a three-digit number. The red LED (Fault) lights up. On the OP1S: On bottom line of operational display: The red LED (Fault) lights up. Only one current fault message can be displayed at a time, i.e. other simultaneously active faults are ignored. Many fault messages can only occur in certain operating states. (see list of fault messages) The system responses to a fault are as follows: * The stator current is reduced, the firing pulses are disabled and the SIMOTRAS unit switches to operating state o11.0 (fault) * Fault message is displayed on the operator panel (PMU, OP1S) * B0106 ( = status word 1, bit 3) is set and B0107 cancelled (see also alarm bits for special faults such as undervoltage, overtemperature, external faults, etc.) * The following parameters are refreshed: r047 fault diagnostic memory (The displayed values are decimal. For bit-serial evaluation, the values must be converted from decimal to binary notation, e.g. to be able to determine the relevant terminal in the case of F018) r049 Fault time r947 fault memory, see also r947 in Section 11, Parameter List r949 fault value (The displayed values are decimal. For bit-serial evaluation, the values must be converted from decimal to binary notation, e.g. to be able to determine the relevant terminal in the case of F018) P952 number of faults A text is also displayed for each individual fault in parameter r951 (fault text list). can, for example, be displayed on the OP1S. These texts If a fault is not acknowledged before the electronics supply voltage is switched off, then fault message F040 will be displayed when the supply is next switched on. 10.1.2 List of fault messages Note Further information about the causes of fault messages When a fault message is activated, values providing more information about the fault cause are stored in parameter r047. Where the values can be interpreted by the user, they are included in the following list of fault messages. The value in r047.001 is referred to as the "fault value". This is also stored in r949 which also contains the fault values belonging to older fault messages. The values in r047 are overwritten when the next fault message occurs. Values for r047 which are not included in the list below can help a SIEMENS specialist to locate a fault cause. For this reason, all indices of parameter r047 should be read out whenever a fault message occurs, even if the meaning of the individual indices of parameter r047 is not specified for every fault message listed below. Please note: Before you contact SIEMENS with any query regarding a fault message, please make a note of the contents of all indices of parameter r047. 332 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) 10.1.2.1 Supply faults F001 Failure of electronics power supply (active in all operating states) Failure of the electronics supply voltage (terminals 5U1, 5W1, 5N1) in "RUN" state for longer than the "restart" time set in parameter P086 or the electronics are operating on undervoltage. Possible fault causes: F002 F004 * Line contactor has opened in "RUN" state * Brief supply failure * Supply voltage too low Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 Electronics supply voltage in "RUN" has been interrupted for longer than setting in P086 i002 Duration of actual supply failure in 1/10 seconds 2 Supply failure prewarning responds periodically - 3 Supply failure prewarning is active for longer than 1.28 s Anti-clockwise field on power connections (U1, V1, W1) (active in all operating states) - Phase failure on power connections (U1, V1, W1) (active in operating states of o4) The supply voltage RMS value, calculated from the area of each supply half-wave (rectified average value * peak factor), must be greater than the response value for phase failure monitoring P353 P078.001 100% The distance between two identical supply zero passages of a phase must not exceed 450 degrees. If one of these two conditions remains unfulfilled for longer than the "restart time" set in P086, a fault message is activated. After switch-on, the converter waits in operating states o4 and o5 together for a period not exceeding the setting in P089 for voltage to appear at the power terminals before activating the fault message. Possible fault causes: * Parameter P353 is incorrectly set * Line contactor has opened in operation * Fuse has blown in incoming power section supply * Interruption in a thyristor firing pulse cable (auxiliary cathodes at connectors X12, X14, X16 are voltage carriers). Fault value: 1 2 3 4 5 6 F006 Voltage failure has occurred in supply (U1, V1, W1) (when P086=0) Delay time set in parameter P089 has expired in operating state o4 Fuse has blown in power section Voltage failure has lasted longer than period set in P086 (if this is >0) 2-phase current (e.g. because a phase is missing); check incoming power section supply and cabling for the motor The "Main contactor checkback" (control word 2 bit 31) [see also P691] did not switch to "1" before the time set in P095 ran out, or switched back to "0" during operation [V1.8 and later]. Undervoltage (active in operating states of o4) The voltage at terminals U1, V1 or W1 is lower than the response threshold for longer than the "restart time" set in P086 and the delay time according to P361 has expired. Response threshold for supply voltage: P351 P078.001 (1+ ) 100% Possible causes of fault * Line undervoltage * Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P351, P078) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 333 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 i002 Number of phase that has activated fault message 0 ... Phase UV 1 ... Phase VW 2 ... Phase WU i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384) Undervoltage has occurred (when P086=0) 4 F007 03.2015 Undervoltage persists for longer than time set in parameter P086 (if this is set to >0) Overvoltage (active in operating states of o4) - The voltage at terminals U1, V1 or W1 is higher than the response threshold (for longer than the "restart time" set in P086) and the delay time according to P362 has expired. Response threshold for supply voltage: P352 P078.001 (1+ ) 100% Possible causes of fault * Line overvoltage * Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P352, P078) Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 i002 Number of phase that has activated fault message 0 ... Phase UV 1 ... Phase VW 2 ... Phase WU i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384) Overvoltage has occurred Overvoltage persists for longer than time set in parameter P086 (if this is >0) Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency acc. to parameter P363 (active in operating states of o5) 4 F008 This fault message is activated if the line frequency is less than the minimum line frequency (for longer than the "restart time" set in parameter P086). Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (minimum line frequency) is 45Hz. Fault value: F009 1 Line frequency < minimum line frequency 4 Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if this is >0) Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency acc. to parameter P364 (active in operating states of o5) This fault message is activated if the line frequency is greater than the maximum line frequency (for longer than the "restart time" set in parameter P086). Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (maximum line frequency) is 65Hz Fault value: 1 4 334 Line frequency > maximum line frequency Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if >0) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) 10.1.2.2 Interface error F011 Telegram failure at GSST1 when P780 = 2: USS telegram failure at G-SST1 (active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states) After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P787. Possible causes of fault F012 * Cable break * Error in USS master Telegram failure at GSST2 when P790 = 2: USS telegram failure at G-SST2 (active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states) After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797. Possible causes of fault * Cable break * Error in USS master when P790 = 4 or 5 Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST2 (active in operating states of o6) After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797. Possible causes of fault F013 * Break in connecting cable * EMC interference on connecting cable * P797 is set too low Telegram failure at GSST3 when P800 = 2 USS telegram failure to G-SST3 (active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states) After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807. Possible causes of fault * Cable break * Error in USS master when P800 = 4 or 5: Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST3 (active in operating states of o6) After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807. Possible causes of fault * Break in connecting cable * EMC interference on connecting cable * P807 is set too low SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 335 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F014 03.2015 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Telegram failure at paralleling interface (active when U800 = 1 or 2 from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states) [V2.1 and later] After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter U807. Possible fault causes F015 * Interruption in connecting cable * EMC interference on connecting cable * U807 is set too low Telegram failure on one SIMOLINK board (active when U741 > 0 as soon as the first valid telegram is received) After receipt of one valid telegram, no further valid telegrams have arrived within the period set in parameter U741. Possible causes of fault * Break in connecting cable * Parameter setting change during telegram exchange (for parameters see Section 11 "Configuration of SIMOLINK board) * U741 is set to low Fault value: F016 1 Telegram failure on 1st SLB 2 Reserved Hardware fault on expansion board EB1 F017 1 Fault on first EB1 2 Fault on second EB1 Hardware fault on expansion board EB2 Fault value: Fault value: F018 1 Fault on first EB2 2 Fault on second EB2 Short circuit or overloading of binary outputs (active in all operating states) Possible causes of fault * Short circuit or overload at terminals 46, 48, 50 or 52 and 26 or 34 Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 i002 Bit 8 = 1: Bit 9 = 1: Bit 10 = 1: Bit 11 = 1: Bit 12 = 1: Bit 13 = 1: Short circuit or overload at binary outputs Overload at terminal 46 Overload at terminal 48 Overload at terminal 50 Overload at terminal 52 Overload at terminal 26 (15 V output) Overload at terminal 34, 44 or 210 (24 V output) 10.1.2.3 External faults, fault messages from free function blocks F019 Fault message from free function block FB286 (active in all operating states) Fault value: 1 2 336 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.005 is in the state log."1" the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.006 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.007 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.008 is in the state log."1" SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F020 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Fault message from free function block FB287 (active in all operating states) Fault value: F021 1 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.005 is in the state log."1" 2 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.006 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.007 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.008 is in the state log."1" External fault 1 (active in all operating states) Bit 15 control word 1 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 001. F022 F023 External fault 2 (active in all operating states) Bit 26 control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 002. Ramp-down monitoring, fault message from free function block FB2 (active in all operating states) Fault value: F024 1 The travel command has been cancelled but the minimum speed (P370) has not been reached within the period specified in U441. For further details, see the description of the crane control in Section 8, Sheet K15 2 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.002 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.003 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.004 is in the state log."1" Brake fault, fault message from free function block FB3 (active in all operating states) Fault value: 1 A brake fault has been detected. There was no feedback signal for "Brake Open" or "Brake Closed" within the monitoring time (U444). For further details, see the description of the crane control in Section 8, Sheet K16 2 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.002 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.003 is in the state log."1" F025 4 the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.004 is in the state log."1" External fault 5 (active in operating states of o3 if P495=2) F026 A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 211 for more than 10s. External fault 6 (active in operating states of o6 if P496=2) F027 A log. "1" signal has been on terminal 212 for more than 2s. External fault 7 (active in operating states of <o6 if P497=2) F028 A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 213 for more than 40s. External fault 8 (active in operating states of o6 if P498=2) A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 214 for more than 10s. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 337 Faults / alarms Fault 03.2015 Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) 10.1.2.4 Fault messages from motor sensors F029 Motor overtemperature (active in all operating states) Selection via P493=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23) or P494=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205) When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205): The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the value set in parameter P492. When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 204 / 205): The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the response value of the selected PTC thermistor. Fault value: 1 2 Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23 Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205 10.1.2.5 Drive faults F031 Speed controller monitoring (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The monitor responds when the difference between the connectors selected in P590 and P591 (factory setting: Setpoint/actual value difference of speed controller) exceeds the limit set in parameter P388 for longer than the time set in parameter P390. Possible causes of fault * Control loop interrupted * Incorrect tachometer polarity * Controller is not optimized * P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized 10.1.2.6 External faults F033 Fault message from free function block FB4 (active in all operating states) Fault value: F034 1 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.001 is in the state log."1" 2 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.002 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.003 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.004 is in the state log."1" Fault message from free function block FB5 (active in all operating states) Fault value: 338 1 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.001 is in the state log."1" 2 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.002 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.003 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.004 is in the state log."1" SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) 10.1.2.7 Drive faults F035 Drive blocked (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the time set in parameter P355: * Positive or negative current limit reached * Stator current is greater than 1% of converter rated DC current * The actual speed value is less than 0.4% of maximum speed Possible causes of fault F036 * Drive blocked No stator current can flow (active in operating states of - -, I, II) This monitoring function responds if the firing angle is at 0 for more than 500 ms and the stator current is less than 1% of the converter rated DC current. Possible causes of fault F037 * Break in motor cable 2 I t motor monitor has responded (active in operating states of - -, I, II) This monitoring function responds when an I2t value is reached which corresponds to the final temperature at 110% of the rated motor current. Possible causes of fault * F038 Parameter P114 is incorrectly set * Drive has been operating for too long at >110% of rated motor current Overspeed (active in operating states of - -, I, II) This fault message is activated if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P380) or negative (P381) threshold by 0.5%. Possible causes of fault F039 * Lower current limit has been input * Current-controlled operation * P512, P513 are set too low * Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed 2 I t power section monitor has responded (active in operating states of - -, I, II) This monitoring function responds if the calculated I2t value of the power section reaches the permissible value for the power section concerned (see also P075). Possible causes of fault * Drive has been operating at overload for too long * Parameter P075 is incorrectly set * Parameter P077 is incorrectly set SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 339 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F040 03.2015 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Electronics supply disconnected in active fault status (active in all operating states) This fault message is activated if the electronics power supply has been disconnected, even though a fault was displayed and not yet acknowledged. Possible causes of fault * Not all fault messages have been acknowledged Fault value: F041 Last active fault message Ambiguous selection of parameter set or ramp-function generator (active in all operating states) * Check whether ramp-function generator parameter set 1 or 2 or 3 (parameters P303 to P314) is clearly selected. If parameter sets 2 and 3 are selected simultaneously for more than 0.5s, then fault message F041 is displayed. While the parameter set selection is ambiguous, the system continues to apply the last clearly identified ramp-function generator parameters. Possible causes of fault * P676 or P677 (selection of binectors which determine the active function data set in control word 2, bits 16 and 17) is incorrectly set * P637 or P638 (selection of binectors which determine ramp-function generator setting) is incorrectly set Fault value: F044 3 Ambiguous selection of ramp-function generator parameter set A slave connected to the paralleling interface is not operating [V2.1 and later] (active when U800 = 1 or 2 and U806>10 (master) after receipt of the first valid protocol in operating states - -, I, II) Fault value: 1 2 F046 A fault message is active on a slave i00x = Status word 1 from slave x A slave is not in operation (e.g. because its enable input is set to "0") Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty (active in operating states of o6) This fault message is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing. Possible causes of fault * F047 Open circuit in supply cable * P700 is incorrectly set Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) faulty (active in operating states of o6) This fault message is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing. Possible causes of fault * Open circuit in supply cable * P710 is incorrectly set 10.1.2.8 External faults F053 Fault message from free function block FB288 (active in all operating states) Fault value: 340 1 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.005 is in the state log."1" 2 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.006 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.007 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.008 is in the state log."1" SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F054 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Fault message from free function block FB289 (active in all operating states) Fault value: 1 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.005 is in the state log."1" 2 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.006 is in the state log."1" 3 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.007 is in the state log."1" 4 the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.008 is in the state log."1" 10.1.2.9 Start-up faults F056 Important parameter is not set (active in operating states of o6) This fault message is activated if certain parameters are still set to 0. Fault value: F058 1 Speed controller actual value selection in P083 is still set to 0 2 Rated motor current in P100 is still set to 0.0 Parameter settings are not consistent (active in operating states of o6) Inconsistent values have been set in mutually dependent parameters. Fault value: 4 F060 The first threshold for P gain adaptation of the speed controller set in parameter P556 is higher than the second threshold setting in parameter P559 5 P557 is set to greater than P560 6 P558 is set to greater than P561 7 If P083=1 (analog tachometer), then P746 may not equal 0 (main actual value is not connected) 8 If P083=2 (pulse encoder), then P140 may not equal x0 (no pulse encoder installed) 10 P090 (stabilization time for supply voltage) >P086 (time for automatic restart) 11 P090 (stabilization time for supply voltage) >P089 (waiting time in state o4 or o5) 12 P445=1 is set (switch-on, shutdown and crawl act as a pushbutton) although no binector is parameterized as a shutdown button (P444=0) 14 Parameter U673 > U674 (this setting is not permitted; see function diagram B152) Current total processor utilization (n009.i001, K9990) > 99.0% (active in all operating statuses) The function blocks of the technology software, option S00 will not be calculated until this fault code has been acknowledged. The current total processor utilization can be reduced by using the function U969 = 4. 10.1.2.10 Internal faults F062 Fault in parameter memory (active in all operating states) Software monitoring of correct functioning of the EEPROM module (non-volatile memory) on the A7009 board. The EEPROM values contains all data which must be protected in the case of a power failure (i.e. parameter values and process data which must remain stored during power failures). The following are monitored: * Connection between the A7001 electronics board and the EEPROM on the A7009 backplane wiring assembly * Whether the parameter values stored on the EEPROM are within the permissible value range * Whether data are being correctly stored on the EEPROM. For this purpose, values are read and checked for correctness after they are transferred to the module * Whether the checksum of the non-volatile process data in the EEPROM is correct Possible causes for all fault types: Excessive EMC-related interference (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 341 Faults / alarms 03.2015 Fault Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Fault value: 1 r047 Index 002 to 016: Connection to EEPROM is faulty Possible causes of fault * A7001 electronics board is defective 2 * A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective * Plug-in connection X109 is defective i002 Number of faulty parameter i003 Index of faulty parameter i004 Faulty parameter value Parameter value is outside permissible value range Possible causes of fault * "Restore to default value" has never been executed with this software (e.g. after software replacement) * A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective Possible remedy: * Acknowledge fault, execute "Restore to default value" and start up the drive again 3 i002 Address of fault memory location i003 Faulty value in EEPROM i004 Correct parameter value Parameter value cannot be stored on EEPROM Possible causes of fault * A7001 electronics board is defective 11 12 13 20 * A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective * Plug-in connection X109 is defective Checksum of non-volatile data (part 1) is not correct Checksum of non-volatile data (part 2) is not correct Checksum of non-volatile data (part 3) is not correct Checksum of configuring table of parameter values is not correct i002 Calculated checksum i003 Checksum found in EEPROM Possible causes of fault * Defective EEPROM * F063 "Restore to default value" has never been executed with this software (e.g. after software replacement) Possible remedy: * Acknowledge fault, execute "Restore to default value" and start up the drive again! Check interference suppression measures and improve if necessary. In the case of fault value 20, the factory setting is restored automatically Errors in compensation data of analog inputs and outputs (active in all operating states) This function monitors whether the factory-set compensation data for the analog inputs and outputs are plausible Possible fault cause: * 342 Defective A7001 or A7006 electronics board Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 11 Incorrect number of words in compensation values for analog inputs and outputs of A7001 i002 Incorrect number of words 12 Checksum error in compensation values for analog inputs and outputs of A7001 i002 Calculated checksum i003 Errored checksum 13 Incorrect value among compensation values for analog inputs and outputs of A7001 i002 Incorrect value 23 Incorrect value among compensation values for analog inputs and outputs of A7006 i002 Incorrect value SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F064 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) Watchdog timer has initiated a reset (active in all operating states) An internal microprocessor hardware counter monitors whether the program for calculating the firing pulses runs at least once every 14 ms (program is executed on average every 2.7 to 3.3 ms). If this is not the case, the counter initiates a reset. F064 is then output. Possible causes of fault * A7001 electronics board is defective Excessive EMC-related interference (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections) Illegal microprocessor status (active in all operating states) * F065 An internal microprocessor hardware function monitors the microprocessor for illegal operating states. Possible causes of fault * A7001 electronics board is defective Excessive EMC-related interference (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections) Converter cooling faulty (active in operating states of o13) * F067 The heatsink temperature monitoring function is activated 6s after connection of the electronics supply. (The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050) Fault value: F068 r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 Heatsink temperature > permissible heatsink temperature i002 Measured heatsink temperature (16384 .. 100C) depending on the MLFB and the Z-Option (e.g. Z=H78) 2 Heatsink temperature sensor is defective i003 Measured ADC value 3 Converter fan is defective Analog measuring channel faulty (main setpoint, main actual value or analog select input) (active in all operating states) Hardware monitoring of measuring circuits Possible causes of fault * A7001 module defective * Measuring circuit saturated (input voltage at terminals 4 and 5 or 6 and 7 higher than approx. 11.3V) Fault value: F069 1 Measuring channel for main setpoint / analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 4 and 5) 2 Measuring channel for main actual value faulty (terminals 103 and 104) 3 Measuring channel for analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 6 and 7) MLFB data are faulty (active in all operating states) Possible causes of fault * Excessive EMC-related interference (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections) * A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 MLFB code number (r070) = MLFB code number (r070) is illegal i002 Incorrect MLFB code number 2 MLFB data checksum error - 3 Works number checksum error - 4 Number of words of MLFB data is incorrect - SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 343 Faults / alarms Fault 03.2015 Description No. Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) 10.1.2.11 Communication errors with supplementary boards F070 SCB1: Serious initialization error (active in all operating states) SCB1 and SCI cannot power up correctly (see diagnostic parameter n697 for details) Fault value: F073 12 No connection to slave 1 22 No connection to slave 2 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 1 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F074 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 1 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F075 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 1 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F076 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 2 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F077 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 2 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F078 SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 2 (active in all operating states) The cause of the fault may be a cable break F079 SCB1: Telegram failure (active in all operating states) Check function of SCB1 (activity LEDs) and connection to SCI slaves (fiber optics) F080 Error in initialization of a CB/TB board Possible causes for fault values 1 and 6: * CB/TB board is defective * CB/TB board is not correctly inserted * CB/TB board is taking too long to run up (e.g. due to very complex TB board configuration) Fault value: F081 1 The "Heartbeat counter" of the CB/TB has not started to count within 20 s 2 The product version of the installed CT/TB board is not compatible with the SIMOTRAS HD converter 5 Parameters P918, U711 to U721 are not correctly set or not accepted after a change by means of U710 = 0 setting. (The meanings of these parameters are defined in the manual for the relevant CB board, see also function diagrams, Section 8, Sheets Z110 and Z111) 6 The initialization run for a CB/TB board has not been completed within 40 s CB/TB heartbeat error CB/TB has not incremented the monitoring counter for a period of 800 ms Possible causes of fault 344 * CB/TB board is defective * CB/TB board is not correctly inserted r047 Index 002 to 016: i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB i002 Code number of slot containing incompatible board: 2 Slot D 3 Slot E 4 Slot F 5 Slot G 6 CB when configuration includes TB i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Fault Description No. F082 Cause as a function of fault value (r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error) Further information (r047.002 to r047.016) CB/TB message timeout or error in data exchange Possible causes of fault * CB/TB PZD message timeout (with fault value 10) * Excessive EMC-related interference (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections) * CB/TB board is defective * CB/TB board is not correctly inserted Fault value: r047 Index 002 to 016: 1 Fault in alarm channel from CB to basic unit i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB 2 Fault in alarm channel from TB to basic unit 3 Fault in fault channel from TB to basic unit 5 Fault in parameter job channel from CB to basic unit i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB 6 CB Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to i015 Code number of board: 1 1. TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB 7 Fault in parameter job channel from TB to basic unit 8 TB Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to 10 CB/TB process data failure (message timeout period set in U722) 11 Fault in parameter job channel from PMU to TB 12 Fault in parameter response channel from TB to PMU 15 Fault in setpoint channel from CB/TB to basic unit i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB 16 Fault in actual value channel from basic unit to CB/TB i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB i015 Code number of board: 1 TB or 1st CB 2 2nd CB 10.1.2.12 Fault messages from supplementary boards F101 to F147 This group of fault messages is activated by supplementary boards Please refer to the operating manual of the relevant supplementary board for explanation of the fault messages and fault values SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 345 Faults / alarms 10.2 03.2015 Alarm messages Alarm message display: On the PMU: A (Alarm) and a three-digit number. The red LED (Fault) flashes. On the OP1S: On bottom line of operational display: The red LED (Fault) flashes. An alarm message cannot be acknowledged, but disappears automatically when the cause has been eliminated. Several alarm messages can be active at the same time, these are then displayed in succession. Many alarm messages can only occur in certain operating states. (see list of alarm messages) The system responses to an alarm are as follows: * Alarm message is displayed on the operator panel (PMU, OP1S) * B0114 ( = status word 1, bit 7) is set and B0115 is cancelled (see also special alarm bits in status word 2, e.g. for an external alarm, overload, etc.) * The corresponding bit in one of the alarm words r953 (K9801) to r960 (K9808) is set Alarm Description No. A015 A018 Simolink start (active in all operating states) Although the board has been initialized, it cannot yet exchange telegrams (parameters have not yet been correctly configured on all nodes or the boards have not yet been linked via fiber optics to form a closed ring). Short circuit at binary outputs (active in all operating states) A019 Hardware monitoring function to check for short circuit at one of the binary select outputs (see also F018 and r011). Alarm message from free function block FB256 (active in all operating states) A020 The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.002 is in the state log."1" Alarm message from free function block FB257 (active in all operating states) A021 The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.002 is in the state log."1" External alarm 1 (active in all operating states) A022 Bit 28 control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 003. External alarm 2 (active in all operating states) A023 Bit 29 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 004. Electrical stop / overtemperature (active in all operating states) A024 The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.001 is in the state log."1". See crane control Section 8, Sheet K15 Alarm message from free function block FB7 (active in all operating states) A025 The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.001 is in the state log."1" External fault 5 (active in all operating states o3 if P495=1) A026 A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 211 for more than 10s. External fault 6 (active in all operating states o6 if P496=1) A log. "1" signal has been on terminal 212 for more than 2s. 346 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Faults / alarms Alarm Description No. A027 External fault 7 (active in all operating states < o6 if P497=1) A028 A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 213 for more than 40s. External fault 8 (active in all operating states o6 if P498=1) A029 A log. "0" signal has been on terminal 214 for more than 10s. Motor overtemperature (active in all operating states) Selection via P493=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 22 / 23) or P494=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 204 / 205) When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205): The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the values set in parameter P492. A031 When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 204 / 205): The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the trip value of the selected PTC. Speed controller monitoring (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The monitor responds when the difference between the connectors selected in P590 and P591 (factory setting: Setpoint/actual value difference of speed controller) exceeds the limit set in parameter P388 for longer than the time set in parameter P390. Possible causes of fault * Control loop interrupted * Controller is not optimized A033 * P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized Alarm message from free function block FB8 (active in all operating states) A034 The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state Alarm message from free function block FB9 (active in all operating states) A035 The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state Drive blocked (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the time set in parameter P355: * Positive or negative current limit reached * A036 A037 A038 Stator current is greater than 1% of converter rated DC current * The actual speed value is less than 0.4% of maximum speed No stator current can flow (active in operating states of - -, I, II) This monitoring function responds if the firing angle is at 0 for more than 500 ms and the stator current is less than 1% of the converter rated DC current. I2t motor monitor has responded (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The alarm is activated when the calculated I2t value of the motor reaches the value which corresponds to the final temperature at 100% of permissible continuous motor current (= P113*P100). Overspeed (active in operating states of - -, I, II) The monitoring function responds if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P512) or negative (P513) threshold by 0.5%. Possible causes * Lower current limit has been input * Current-controlled operation * P512, P513 are set too low * Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 347 Faults / alarms Alarm 03.2015 Description No. A039 A044 A046 A047 A049 A050 I2t value of power section too high (active in all operating states) This alarm is activated if the permissible I2t value for the relevant power section is reached. At the same time, the current limit is set to P077 * 100% of the converter rated current. This limit is not cancelled again until the setpoint drops below 100% of the converter rated current. See also Fault F039 and Parameter P075. An alarm is active on one slave connected to the paralleling interface [V2.1 and later] (active in all operating states) Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty (active in operating states of o6) This alarm is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA. Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) faulty (active in operating states of o6) This alarm is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA. SCB1: No SCI slave connected (active in all operating states) SCB1: Not all required SCI slaves are available (active in all operating states) A053 The SCI slave required to perform the parameterized functions is not available Alarm message from free function block FB258 (active in all operating states) A054 The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state Alarm message from free function block FB259 (active in all operating states) A060 A067 The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state Current total processor utilization (n009.i001, K9990) > 95.5% (active in all operating states) Converter cooling faulty (active in all operating states) The heat sink temperature is higher than the permissible value - depending on the MLFB and the Z-Option (e.g. Z=H78) The monitoring function is activated 6s after the electronics supply is connected. A081 to A088 (The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050) CB alarm of 1st CB (active in all operating states o11) The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used. For further information, refer to Section 7.10, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description. A089 to A096 CB alarm of 2nd CB (active in all operating states o11) A097 to A128 TB alarms (active in operating states o11) 348 The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used. For further information, refer to Section 7.10, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description. For more information about TECH BOARD alarms, please refer to Operating Instructions or Configuring Guide of the relevant board. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 11 Parameter list Parameter list Overview Range of parameter numbers Function r000 Operating display r001 - P050 General visualization parameters P051- r059 Access authorization levels r060 - r065 Definition of SIMOTRAS converter P068 - P078 Definition of SIMOTRAS power section P080 - P096 Setting values for converter control P100 - P114 Definition of motor P140 - P147 Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder P152 - P165 Closed-loop current control, auto-reversing stage, gating unit P171 - P191 Current limitation, torque limitation P200 - P234 Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P563) P295 - P319 Ramp-function generator P320 - P323 Setpoint processing P330 Ramp-function generator P351 - P364 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits P370 - P390 Setting values for limit-value monitors P401 - P416 Settable fixed values P421 - P428 Fixed control bits P430 - P445 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints) P450 - P453 Position sensing with pulse encoder P455 - P458 Connector selector switches P460 - P473 Motorized potentiometer P480 - P485 Oscillation P490 - P494 Temperature sensor inputs P495 - P498 Binary inputs P500 - P503 Configuring of torque shell input P509 - P515 Speed limiting controller P519 - P530 Friction compensation P540 - P546 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) P550 - P563 Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P234) P590 - P597 Input quantities for signals P600 - P647 Configuring of closed-loop control P648 - P691 Control word, status word P694 - P698 Further configuring measures P700 - P746 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs) P749 - P769 Analog outputs P770 - P778 Binary outputs P780 - P819 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter P820 - P821 Deactivation of monitoring functions r824 - r829 Compensation values P831 - P899 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S P918 - P927 Profile parameters r947 - P952 Fault memory r953 - r960 Visualization parameters: Alarms r964 Device identification r967 - r968 Visualization parameters: Control and status word P970 - r999 Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters U005 - U007 Password protection, key/lock mechanism n009 Processor utilization SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 349 Parameter list 03.2015 Range of parameter numbers Function n024 - U098 Miscellaneous U116 - U118 Binector / connector converter for the serial interfaces n600 - U629 Control inputs, control outputs, setpoint reduction U630 - U649 Rotor stage stepping U651 - U657 Start pulse, speed controller U660 - U668 Evaluation of a four-stage master switch U690 - n699 Configuration of SCB1 with SCI U710 - n739 Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3 U740 - U753 Configuration of the SIMOLINK board U755 - n770 Configuration of the EB1 expansion board U773 - n788 Configuration of the EB2 expansion board U790 - U796 Configuration of the SBP pulse encoder board U800 - n813 Configuration of paralleling interface U845 - U909 Parameters for DriveMonitor U910 Slot deactivation U911 - n949 Parameters for DriveMonitor n953 - n959 Parameters for DriveMonitor U979 Parameter access for experts n980 - n999 List of existing and modified U and n parameters Parameters for technology software in the basic converter, S00 option ("freely assignable function blocks") Range of parameter numbers Function n010 - n023 Displays U099 Settable fixed values U100 - U107 Triggering of faults and alarms U110 - U115 Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters U120 - U171 Mathematical functions U172 - U173 Processing of connectors (averager) U175 - U218 Limiter, limit-value monitors U220 - U259 Processing of connectors U260 - U299 Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching U300 - U303 Simple ramp-function generator U310 - U313 Multiplexer n314 - U317 Counter U318 - U411 Logic functions U415 - U474 Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches U480 - U512 Technology controller U515 - U523 Velocity/speed calculators U525 - U529 Variable moment of inertia U530 - U545 PI controller U550 - U554 Closed-loop control elements U670 - U677 Position/positional deviation acquisition U680 - U684 Root extractor U950 - U952 Sampling times U960 - U969 Altering the processing sequence of function blocks 350 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list Overview of abbreviations Example: PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P520 1) * Friction at 0% speed 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1%4) Setting as % of converter rated DC current or converter rated torque FDS 2) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.0 5) Type: O2 3) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 20 Online6) 8) 9) (G153) 10) 1) An under the parameter number means that the parameter requires confirmation, i.e. the altered value * does not take effect until the P key is pressed. 2) Abbreviation indicating that the parameter belongs to a data set (refers only to indexed parameters) (see Section 9.11 "Switch over parameter sets") FDS BDS Parameter belongs to the function data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets") Parameter belongs to the BICO data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets") 3) Specification of parameter type O2 Unsigned 16-bit value I2 Signed 16-bit value O4 Unsigned 32-bit value I4 Signed 32-bit value V2 Bit-coded quantity L2 Nibble-coded quantity 4) Setting steps for access via PKW mechanism 5) Factory setting 6) Minimum setting required (P052) to allow display of the relevant parameter Minimum access level required (P051) to allow modification of the relevant parameter Online: The parameter can be changed in all converter operating states Offline: The parameter can only be changed in converter operating states of o1.0 8) S00 Parameter belongs to the technology software in the basic converter, S00 option 9) The "OP parameter number" (i.e. the number to be entered via the OP1S operator panel) is specified in brackets in the "PNU" column for all parameters which are not "P parameters" or "r parameters": e.g. (2010) under n010 or (2100) under U100. 10) The parameter is shown in the specified function diagram in Section 8 (here G153). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 351 Parameter list PNU 11.1 r000 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Operating status display Operating status display Status display, fault and alarm messages -I II o1 o1.0 o1.1 o1.2 o1.3 o1.4 o1.5 o1.6 Torque direction M0, MI or MII (=RUN) No torque direction active Torque direction I active (MI) Torque direction II active (MII) Waiting for operating enable (=READY) Brake release delay time running. Waiting for operating enable at terminal 38. Waiting for operating enable via binector (acc. to selection in P661) or control word, bit 3 (acc. to selection in P648) Inching command cancellation delay time running. Reserved Reserved Reserved o2 o2.0 Wait for setpoint > P091.002 If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-actual| (K0166) are less than P091.002, the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into state o2.0. [SW 2.0 and later] o3 o3.0 o3.1 o3.2 o3.3 Test phase Reserved Waiting for completion of line symmetry check. Waiting for a contactor in the motor circuit to pick up Waiting for "Main contactor checkback" (control word 2 bit 31, see P691) [SW 1.8 and later] o4 o4.0 Waiting for voltage (motor) Waiting for voltage at power terminals U1, V1, W1 The voltage and frequency must be within the range specified with parameters P351, P352, P353, P363 and P364. See also P078.001. NOTE The system dwells in state o4 for no more than a time set in parameter P089. The appropriate fault message is output if the corresponding conditions are still not fulfilled at the end of this period. o5 Reserved o6 o6.0 o6.1 Wait status before the line contactor is closed Waiting for auxiliaries to be switched on (delay in P093) Waiting for a setpoint P091 to be applied to the ramp-function generator input (K0193) o7 o7.0 o7.1 Waiting for switch-on command (=READY TO SWITCH ON) Waiting for switch-on command via terminal 37. Waiting for switch-on command via binector (acc. to selection in P654) or control word, bit 0 (acc. to selection in P648). Waiting for internal shutdown to be cancelled through input of an external shutdown command Waiting for completion of "Restore factory settings" operation. Reserved Wait for completion of "Read in parameter set" operation. Wait for completion of "Load MLFB" operation. (performed at factory) reserved for firmware download for optional supplementary modules [SW 2.0 and later] o7.2 o7.3 o7.4 o7.5 o7.6 o7.9 352 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description o8 o8.0 o8.1 o9 o9.0 o9.1 o9.2 o9.3 o10 o10.0 o10.1 o10.2 o10.3 o10.4 o10.5 o10.6 See Change (Access / Status) Fast stop (OFF3) Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P658) or control word, bit 2 (acc. to selection in P648). Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P659). Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P660). Fast stop is stored internally (memory can be reset by cancelling FAST STOP command and entering SHUTDOWN). Voltage disconnection (OFF2) Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P655) or control word, bit 1 (acc. to selection in P648). Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P656). Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P657). Reserved Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST1 (only if telegram failure time monitoring is set with P787 0) Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST2 (only if telegram failure time monitoring is set with P797 0) Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST3 (only if telegram failure time monitoring is set with P807 0) Fault = Fxxx Fault message is displayed, red LED lights up. o12 o12.1 o12.2 o12.3 o12.9 Electronics initialization in progress Basic converter electronics initialization in progress Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 2 Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 3 Restructuring of parameters in non-volatile storage after software update (takes approx. 15s) o13 o13.0 Software update in progress Waiting for arrival of start command from HEXLOAD PC routine (press the DOWN key to abort this status and start a RESET) Deletion of Flash EPROM in progress Display of address currently being programmed The Flash EPROM has been successfully programmed (a RESET is performed automatically after approx. 1 second) Programming of the Flash EPROM has failed (press UP key to return to operating state o13.0) o13.3 No. indices Factory setting Type Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout through input of SHUTDOWN command (OFF1). Reserved o11 o11.0 o13.1 xxxxx o13.2 Value range [Unit] Steps o14 Loading of boot sector in progress (this operation is performed only in factory) o15 Electronics not connected to voltage Dark display: Waiting for voltage at terminals 5U1, 5W1 (electronics supply voltage). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 353 Parameter list PNU 11.2 03.2015 Description No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) -200.0 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 General visualization parameters r001 Display of terminals 4 and 5 (main setpoint) (G113) r002 Analog input, terminals 103 and 104 (main actual value) (G113) r003 Analog input, terminals 6 and 7 (selectable input 1) (G113) r004 Analog input, terminals 8 and 9 (selectable input 2) (G114) r005 Analog input, terminals 10 and 11 (selectable input 3) (G114) r006 Analog output, terminals 14 and 15 (G115) r007 Display of output value before normalization and offset (G115) r008 Display of output value before normalization and offset (G116) r009 Display of output value before normalization and offset (G116) r010 Display of output value before normalization and offset (G110) Value range [Unit] Steps Analog output, terminals 16 and 17 Analog output, terminals 18 and 19 Analog output, terminals 20 and 21 Display of status of binary inputs Representation on operator panel (PMU): Segment ON: Segment OFF: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 Corresponding terminal is activated (HIGH level is applied) Corresponding terminal is not activated (LOW level is applied) Segment or bit 0 ........ Terminal 36 1 ........ Terminal 37 (switch-on) 2 ........ Terminal 38 (operating enable) 3 ........ Terminal 39 4 ........ Terminal 40 5 ........ Terminal 41 6 ........ Terminal 42 7 ........ Terminal 43 8 ........ Terminal 211 9 ........ Terminal 212 10 ........ Terminal 213 11 ........ Terminal 214 12 ........ (not used) 13 ........ (not used) 14 ........ (not used) 15 ........ (not used) 354 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description r011 Display of status of binary outputs (G112) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 -58 to +^318 [C] 1C Ind: 2 Type: I2 P052 = 3 -47 to +200 [C] 1C 0.0 to 200.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: 2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0.0 to 2800.0 [V] 0.0V Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 0.00 to 120.00 [Hz] 0.01Hz 0.00 to 180.00 [degrees] 0.01 degrees -400.0 to 400.0 [% of P100] 0.1% of P100 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 0.0 to 300.0 [% of P100] 0.1% of P100 -400.0 to 400.0 [%] 0.1% (see column on left) -400.0 to 400.0 [%] 0.1%(see column on left) Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Segment ON: Corresponding terminal is activated (HIGH level is applied) or overloaded or short-circuited Segment OFF: Corresponding terminal is not activated (LOW level is applied) or not overloaded or not shortcircuited Display of status of binary output terminals: Segment or bit 0 .... Terminal 46 1 ..... Terminal 48 2 ..... Terminal 50 3 ..... Terminal 52 7 ..... Terminal 109/110 Display of overloading of binary outputs: Segment or bit 8 .... Terminal 46 9 ..... Terminal 48 10 ... Terminal 50 11 ... Terminal 52 12 ... Terminal 26 (15V output) 13 ... Terminal 34, 44 or 210 (24V output) r012 (G185) Motor temperature Display of motor temperature when a KTY 84 temperature sensor is connected (P490.x=1). A value of "0" is always output in r012 when a PTC thermistor or no temperature sensor is installed. i001: i002: r013 Motor temperature 1 (sensor at terminals 22 / 23) Motor temperature 2 (sensor at terminals 204 / 205) Heatsink temperature Display of heatsink temperature r014 Temperature rise i001: i002: r015 Calculated motor temperature rise (see P114) Calculated thyristor temperature rise (see P075) Display of line voltage (generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to sinusoidal voltage, average over 3 line-to-line voltages) r017 Display of line frequency r018 Display of firing angle (G163) r019 Display of actual motor current value (G162) The internal actual motor current value is displayed (arithmetic average between 6 current peaks) r020 Display of the absolute value of motor current setpoint (G162) r021 Display of torque setpoint after torque limitation (G160) 0.1% of rated motor torque Steps: 1 = r022 Display of torque setpoint before torque limitation (G160) 0.1% of rated motor torque Steps: 1 = SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 355 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 r023 Display of speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation (G152) r024 Display of actual speed value from pulse encoder (G145) r025 Display of actual speed controller value (G151) r026 Display of speed controller setpoint (G152) r027 Display of ramp-function generator output (G136) r028 Display of ramp-function generator input (G136) r029 Display of main setpoint before limitation (G135) r040 Display of limitations: -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 Type: I2 P052 = 3 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Representation on operator panel (PMU): Segment ON: Segment OFF: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Corresponding limitation is reached Corresponding limitation is not reached Segment or bit 0 ........ Reserved 1 ........ Reserved 2 ........ W limit reached 3 ........ Negative current limit reached (K0132) 4 ........ Negative maximum speed reached (P513) Speed limiting controller responds (B0201) 5 ........ Negative torque limit reached (B0203) 6 ........ Neg. limitation at ramp generator output reached . (K0182) 7 ........ Neg. limitation at ramp generator input reached . (K0197) 8 ........ Reserved 9 ........ Reserved 10 ........ G limit reached 11 ........ Positive current limit reached (K0131) 12 ........ Positive maximum speed reached (P512) Speed limiting controller responds (B0201) 13 ........ Positive torque limit reached (B0202) 14 ........ Pos. limitation at ramp generator output reached . (K0181) 15 ........ Pos. limitation at ramp generator input reached . (K0196) Note: This parameter has the same bit assignments as connector K0810. Connector and binector displays r041 (G121) High-resolution connector display: i001: i002: Display of connector selected in P042.01 Display of connector selected in P042.02 The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8, Sheet G121) P042 * (G121) 356 High-resolution connector display: i001: i002: Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.01 Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.02 The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8, Sheet G121) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r043 Connector display: -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1% (G121) P044 * (G121) r045 (G121) P046 * (G121) r047 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: Display of connector selected in P044.01 Display of connector selected in P044.02 Display of connector selected in P044.03 Display of connector selected in P044.04 Display of connector selected in P044.05 Display of connector selected in P044.06 Display of connector selected in P044.07 Connector display: i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: Selection of connector displayed in r043.01 Selection of connector displayed in r043.02 Selection of connector displayed in r043.03 Selection of connector displayed in r043.04 Selection of connector displayed in r043.05 Selection of connector displayed in r043.06 Selection of connector displayed in r043.07 Binector display: i001: i002: i003: i004: Selection of binector displayed in r045.01 Selection of binector displayed in r045.02 Selection of binector displayed in r045.03 Selection of binector displayed in r045.04 Display of fault diagnostic memory Provides more detailed information about the cause of a fault after activation of a fault message (see Section 10). i001 i002 ... i016 (G189) Display of time (hours) in which drive has been operating in states I, II or - -. All times of approx. 0.1 s are included in the count. r049 Fault time (G189) Display of time at which the current fault, and the last 7 acknowledged faults, were activated. Current fault 1st acknowledged fault 2nd acknowledged fault 3rd acknowledged fault 4th acknowledged fault 5th acknowledged fault 6th acknowledged fault 7th acknowledged fault P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 Ind: 4 Type: O2 P052 = 3 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 16 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 65535 [hours] 1 hour Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 65535 [hours] 1 hour Ind: 8 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 0 Online hours hours hours hours hours hours hours hours Language Language of plaintext display on optional OP1S operator panel and in DriveMonitor PC service routine 0: 1: Ind: 7 FS=0 Type: L2 Word 16 (fault number) Hours run P050 * All connector numbers 1 Word 1 (fault value) Word 2 r048 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Display of binector selected in P046.01 Display of binector selected in P046.02 Display of binector selected in P046.03 Display of binector selected in P046.04 Binector display: i001: i002: i003: i004: No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 7 Type: I2 German English SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 357 Parameter list PNU 11.3 P051 * P053 * P054 358 Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) see Column 2 Ind: None FS=40 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 0 Online 0, 1, 3 Ind: None FS=3 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 0 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 0 Online 0, 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 0 Online Access authorization levels Key parameters 0 6 7 9 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 P052 * 03.2015 Description No access authorization Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor) Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor) Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor) Restore factory settings All parameters are reset to their defaults (factory settings). Parameter P051 is then automatically reset to factory setting "40". Do not set Do not set Do not set Do not set Do not set Do not set Do not set Access authorization to parameter values for authorized service personnel Selection of display parameters 0 0 Display only parameters that are not set to original factory settings 1 Display only parameters for simple applications 3 Display all parameters used Control word for the permanent memory [SW 1.7 and later] Disabling or enabling write accesses to the permanent memory i001: Disabling or enabling write accesses to the parameter memory 0 Only save parameter P053 in the permanent memory; parameter changes are active immediately but the changed values are only stored temporarily and are lost when the electronics supply voltage is switched off 1 Save all parameter values in the permanent memory i002: Disabling or enabling write accesses to the memory of the nonvolatile process data 0 Do not save nonvolatile process data in the permanent memory 1 Save all nonvolatile process data in the permanent memory If the nonvolatile process data are not stored (P053.002=0), data are lost when the electronics supply of the SIMOTRAS HD is switched off, i.e. they have the value 0 after the electronics supply is switched on again: K0240: Setpoint of the motor potentiometer K0309: Motor heating K0310: Thyristor heating K9195: Output of the 1st tracking/storage element K9196: Output of the 2nd tracking/storage element OP1S - Background lighting 0 ON continuously 1 ON when panel is in use SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P055 * Copy function data set 012 to 143 1 (G175) This parameter allows parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be copied to parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4. This function is applicable only to parameters with 4 indices in the function data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.8, and Section 8, Sheet 175). 0xy Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy operation. 1xy The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1, 2, 3 or 4) are copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1, 2, 3 or 4) (parameter set x remains unchanged, the original contents of parameter set y are overwritten). x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4) of the source and target parameter sets. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=012 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline The copy operation is started by switching P055 over into parameter mode when P055=1xy. During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are displayed on the operator panel (PMU). At the end of the copy operation, P055 is reset to P055=0xy. r056 Display of active function data set 1 to 4 1 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 (G175) P057 * Copy Bico data set 012 to 121 1 Ind: None FS=012 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline (G175) This parameter allows parameter set 1 or 2 to be copied to parameter set 1 or 2. This function is applicable only to parameters with 2 indices in the Bico data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.8, and Section 8, Sheet 175). 0xy Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy operation. 1xy The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1 or 2) are copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1 or 2) (parameter set x remains unchanged, the original contents of parameter set y are overwritten). x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1 or 2) of the source and target parameter sets. The copy operation is started by switching P057 over into parameter mode when P057=1xy. During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are displayed on the operator panel (PMU). At the end of the copy operation, P057 is reset to P057=0xy. r058 Display of active Bico data set 1 to 2 1 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 (G175) r059 Display of operating state 0.0 to 14.5 0.1 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 0.0 to 9.9 0.1 Ind: 5 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 5 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 2 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Meaning as for r000 11.4 Definition of SIMOTRAS converter r060 Software version (G101) Converter software release r061 Creation date of software (G101) r062 (G101) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: CUD Slot D (board location 2) Slot E (board location 2) Slot F (board location 3) Slot G (board location 3) Year Month Day Hour Minute Checksum i001: i002: Converter firmware checksum Boot sector checksum SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 359 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r063 Board code (G101) Identification code of boards mounted in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box. 1 3 2 D G E CUDx F No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 5 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Ind: 5 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 5 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Designation of locations 1 to 3 and slots D to G in electronics box i001: Board in location 1 75: CUD1 76: CUD1 + CUD2 i002: Board in slot D (upper slot of location 2) 111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later] 131 to 139: Technology board 141 to 149: Communications board 151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB) i003: Board in slot E (lower slot of location 2) 111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later] 131 to 139: Technology board 141 to 149: Communications board 151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB) i004: Board in slot F (upper slot of location 3) 111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later] 141 to 149: Communications board 151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB) i005: Board in slot G (lower slot of location 3) 111: Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later] 141 to 149: Communications board 151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB) r064 Board compatibility (G101) Compatibility identifier of boards in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box. The compatibility identifier is bit-coded. To ensure the compatibility of a board, it must have a "1" setting at the same bit location of the parameter value as the CUD (in location 1 / index i001). Indices: i001: Compatibility identifier of board in location 1 i002: Compatibility identifier of board in slot D i003: Compatibility identifier of board in slot E i004: Compatibility identifier of board in slot F i005: Compatibility identifier of board in slot G Example: Index Value i001 253 i002 002 i003 001 Bit representation 0000 0000 1111 1101 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0001 Compatible with CUD no yes r065 Software identifiers (G101) Additional software version identifiers of boards in locations 1, 2 and 3 of electronics box for internal purposes. Indices: i001: Software identifier of board in location 1 i002: Software identifier of board in slot D i003: Software identifier of board in slot E i004: Software identifier of board in slot F i005: Software identifier of board in slot G 360 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU 11.5 Parameter list Description Options according to rating plate (G101) 0 No option 1 Option L04 (low voltage) 2 3 4 H78 (65Celsius) 5 H78 + L04 6 7 SIMOTRAS serial number (G101) No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: None Type: 02 P052 = 3 Ind: 16 Type: L2 P052 = 3 0 to 73 1 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 1000 [V] 1V 0.0 to 6553.5 [A] 0.1A Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 2 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Definition of SIMOTRAS power section r068 r069 Value range [Unit] Steps i001: 1st and 2nd places of serial number i002: 3rd and 4th places of serial number i003: 5th and 6th places of serial number i004: 7th and 8th places of serial number i005: 9th and 10th places of serial number i006: 11th and 12th places of serial number i007: 13th and 14th places of serial number i008 to i015: 0 i016: Checksum for serial number The serial number ASCII code is displayed in this parameter. The number is output in plaintext on the OP1S panel. r070 MLFB (order number) for SIMOTRAS (G101) The corresponding MLFB is displayed in encoded form in this parameter. The MLFB is displayed in plaintext on the OP1S panel. r071 Converter rated supply voltage (G101) r072 Converter rated supply voltage as specified on rating plate (G101) P075 * (G101) (G161) Converter rated current i001: Converter rated current as specified on rating plate i002: Actual converter rated current as set in parameter P076.001 Control word for power section Selection of operating characteristics of thermal monitor (I2t monitoring) of power section 0 Dynamic overload capability is not permitted The motor current is limited to P077 * r072.001. 1 Dynamic overload capability is permitted, alarm A039 The motor current is limited to P077 * 2 * r072.001 as long as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the permitted value. If the temperature exceeds the permitted value, the SIMOTRAS HD protects itself by reducing the current limit to P077 * r072.001. Alarm A039 is output at the same time. The motor current setpoint limit is not increased to P077 * 2 * r072.001 (alarm A039 also disappears) until the calculated thyristor temperature has dropped below the limit value again and the motor current setpoint is lower than the converter rated current (r072.001). 2 Dynamic overload capability is permitted, fault F039 The motor current is limited to P077 * 2 * r072.001 as long as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the permitted value. Fault message F039 is output if the permissible temperature limit is exceeded. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 361 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P076 * Reduction of converter rated current see Column 2 i001: For the purpose of achieving a close match between the converter and motor, the converter rated current is reduced to the value entered here. The following values can be set: 10.0%*), 20.0%, 33.3%, 40.0%, 50.0%, 60.0%, 66.6%, 70.0%, 80.0%, 90.0% and 100.0% *) for use by works engineers only i002: irrelevant (G101) P077 Total thermal reduction factor (G101) (G161) The factor set in this parameter effects a reduction in the motor current limit (as defined by the setting in P075). No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=100.0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.50 to 1.00 0.01 Ind: None FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 10 to r071 [V] 1V Ind: 2 FS=r071 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 2 Ind: None FS=2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline The converter must be derated in the following instances: - Operation at high ambient temperatures: If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (on naturally air-cooled converters) or 40C (on converters with forced air-cooling), the possible load capability of the converter decreases as a consequence of the maximum permissible thyristor junction temperature by percentage reduction "a" as specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in a temperature reduction factor of ktemp = (100 - a) / 100 - Installation altitudes of over 1000m above sea level: In this case, the lower air density and thus less effective cooling reduce the possible load capability of the converter to the percentage load "b1" specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in an installation altitude reduction factor of kaltitude = b1 / 100 P077 must be set as follows: P077 = ktemp * kaltitude Note: A general reduction in the converter rated current (through appropriate setting of parameter P076.001) can be included in this calculation. P078 (G101) Reduction of converter rated supply voltage i001: i002: Rated input voltage Irrelevant The rated voltage value of the power system actually used to supply the power section must be set in this parameter. This setting acts as the reference for the undervoltage, overvoltage and phase failure monitoring functions (see also P351, P352 and P353) as well as for connectors K0285 to K0289, K0291, K0292, K0301, K0302, K0303 and K0305 11.6 P080 * Setting values for converter control Control word for brake control 1 The brake is a holding brake When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled and the "Voltage disconnection" command is input, the "Close brake" command is not input until n<nmin (P370, P371) is reached. 2 The brake is an operating brake When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled and the "Voltage disconnection" is input, the "Close brake" command is input immediately, i.e. while the motor is still rotating. (G140) 362 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P083 * Selection of actual speed value 0 to 4 1 FDS (G151) P084 * (G160) P085 0 Actual speed value is not yet selected (fixed value 0%) 1 Actual speed value supplied by "Main actual value" channel (K0013) (terminals XT.103, XT.104) 2 Actual speed value supplied by "Actual speed from pulse encoder" channel (K0040) 3 Do not set! 4 Actual speed value is wired up freely (selected in P609) Selection of closed-loop speed / current or torque control 1 Operation under closed-loop speed control 2 Operation under closed-loop current / torque control: the setpoint supplied by the ramp-function generator output is input as a current or torque setpoint (speed controller is bypassed Wait period after cancellation of inching command After an inching command has been cancelled, the drive dwells in operating state o1.3 for the time period set in this parameter with the controllers disabled. This wait period does not commence until n<nmin (P370, P371) is reached. If a new inching command is input within this period, then the drive switches to the next operating state (o1.2 or lower). However, if the time runs out without a new inching command being entered, then the drive switches to operating state o7 (see also Section 9). P086 Voltage failure period for automatic restart If the voltage fails (F001, F004) at one of the terminals U1, V1, W1, 5U1, or 5W1, or if it drops below a certain threshold (F006 undervoltage) or exceeds a certain threshold (F007 overvoltage), or its frequency is too low (F008 frequency < P363) or too high (F009 frequency > P364), then the corresponding fault message is activated only if the fault condition has not been eliminated within the "Automatic restart" period set in this parameter. The gating pulses and controllers are disabled while the fault conditions are present. The converter waits in operating state o4 or is in o13. Setting this parameter to 0.00s deactivates the "Automatic restart" function. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 2 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.0 to 60.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: None FS=10.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 10.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: None FS=0.20 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: None FS=2.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online NOTE: Setting values higher than 2.00s are effective only in relation to the voltages at terminals U1, V1and W1. A "restart time" of 2.00 s is operative in this case for the voltage at terminals 5U1 and 5W1 (electronics power supply). P087 Brake release time (G140) -10.00 to -0.01 s The "Release brake" command is delayed in relation to enabling of the gating pulses for thyristors and controllers (i.e. operating state I, II or --) by the delay time set in this parameter. During this period, the motor rotates against the closed brake. This setting is useful, for example, for vertical loads. 0.00 to +10.00 s When a "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is input with "Operating enable", the drive dwells in operating state o1.0 for the delay period set in this parameter; the internal controller enabling signal, and thus enabling of the thyristor gating pulses, do not take effect until the delay period has elapsed so as to give the holding brake time to open. P088 Brake closing time (G140) (G187) When the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is cancelled, or when the "Switch-on" command is not applied, or when the "Fast stop" command is input, the internal controller disabling signal, and thus the thyristor gating pulse disabling signal, is not actually activated after n<nmin has been reached until the time delay set in this parameter has elapsed. During this period, the drive continues to produce a torque (operating state I, II or - -), so as to give the holding brake enough time to close. P089 Maximum wait time for voltage to appear at power section 0.0 to 60.0 [s] When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or 0.1s "Crawling" command is applied, the converter dwells in operating state o4 until voltage appears at the power section. The corresponding fault message is activated if no power section voltage is detected within the period specified by this parameter (response threshold for function which checks for voltage at power section, see parameter P353). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 363 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P090 Stabilization time for line voltage 0.01 to 1.00 [s] 0.01s When the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is applied, or after a phase failure has been detected in the mains supply with active "Automatic restart" function (P086>0), the converter dwells in operating state o4 until voltage appears at the power section. Line voltage is not assumed to be applied to the power terminals until the amplitude, frequency and phase symmetry have remained within the permissible tolerance for a period exceeding the setting in this parameter. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.02 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 FS= i001: 199.99 i002: 0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 120.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: None FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 6500.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: None FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 1.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 60.0 [min] 0.1min Ind: None FS=4.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 6553.0 [A] 0.1A Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.50 to 2.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.0 to 80.0 [min] 0.1min Ind: 4 FS=10.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Caution: The setting in P090 must be lower than the settings in P086 (except when P086=0.0) and P089! P091 Setpoint threshold i001: i002: P093 Threshold for function "Switch on only if setpoint is low" The converter can be switched on only if a setpoint |K0193| P091.001 is applied to the ramp-function generator input. If the applied setpoint is higher, the converter dwells in state o6 after "switch-on" until the absolute setpoint value is P091.001. Threshold for function "Automatic pulse disable if setpoint is low" [SW 2.0 and later] If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-act| (K0166) are less than P091.002, the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into state o2.0. Pick-up delay for line contactor Pick-up of the line contactor is delayed in relation to "Switch on auxiliaries" by the time delay set in this parameter. P094 Switch-off delay for auxiliaries Switch-off of the auxiliaries is delayed in relation to dropout of the line contactor by the time delay set in this parameter. P095 Pick-up time for a contactor in the motor circuit If the output (terminals U2, V2, W2) is switched through to the motor via a contactor, and if this contactor is controlled by the relay output terminals 109 and 110, then the gating pulses may not be enabled until the contactor has safely picked up. For this purpose, it may be necessary to parameterize an additional delay time for the pick-up operation. The timer set in P095 commences during a pick-up operation when the converter reaches operating state o4. If the timer has still not run down by the time the converter exits state o4, then the converter dwells in state o3.2 until the timer has finished. During the time period set in P095, the "Main contactor checkback" signal must also switch to "1" if this function is activated (see P691). Otherwise the converter dwells in state o3.3 until the timer has finished and fault message F004 is then output with fault value 6. P096 Run-on time for the converter fan After the drive has stopped (an operating state 7.0 is reached), the fan continues to run until the power section has cooled down. This parameter can be used to set the minimum run-on time. 11.7 P100 * FDS P113 * FDS Definition of motor Rated motor current (acc. to motor rating plate) 0.0 Parameter not yet set Continuous current factor torque control / current control This parameter defines the current to be permitted as a continuous current by the I2t motor monitoring function without activation of alarm message A037 or fault message F037. This current is the product of calculation P113 * P100. P114 FDS 364 Thermal time constant of motor (see Section 9.10) 0.0 I2t monitoring deactivated SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU 11.8 Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder The following types of pulse encoder can be used (type selection in P140): 1. Pulse encoder type 1 Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker) Track 1 X173 28, 29 Track 2 X173 30, 31 Zero marker X173 32, 33 2. Heidenhain ROD Teldix Rotaswitch Series 26 Pulse encoder type 1a Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker). The zero marker is converted internally to a signal in the same way as on encoder type 1. Track 1 X173 28, 29 Track 2 X173 30, 31 Zero marker X173 32, 33 360 225 60 Hubner OG9DN, POG9DN Teldix Rotaswitch Series 25 Honeywell HDM Series Internal zero marker 3. Pulse encoder type 2 Encoder with one pulse track per direction of rotation (with/without zero marker). Clockwise Anti-clockwise Track 1 X173 28, 29 Track 2 X173 30, 31 Zero marker X173 32, 33 4. Pulse encoder type 3 Encoder with one pulse track and one output for direction of rotation (with/without zero marker). Clockwise Track 1 X173 28, 29 Track 2 X173 30, 31 Zero marker X173 32, 33 Anti-clockwise Pulse output Direction of rotation Zero marker SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 365 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Notes on selecting a pulse encoder (number of pulses): The lowest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation: n min [ U / min] = 21973 1 X P141 Formula applies with a nominal measuring time of 1 ms when P146=0 and P147=0 The following applies: X = 1 for 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=0) 2 for 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=1) 4 for 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=2) see also "Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses" Lower speeds are interpreted as n=0. The frequency of the pulse encoder signals at terminals 28 and 29 or 30 and 31 must not be higher than 300 kHz. The highest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation: n max [ U / min] = 18000000 P141 When selecting a pulse encoder, therefore, it is important to ensure that the lowest possible speed 0 is significantly higher than nmin and the highest possible speed does not exceed nmax. IM >> IM 21973 X n min [ U / min] Equations for selection of pulses per revolution IM of pulse encoder 18000000 n max [ U / min] Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses: The setting for single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses is applicable for both the speed and position sensing functions. 1x evaluation: Only the rising edges of one pulse track are evaluated (applies to all encoder types). 2x evaluation: The rising and falling edges of one pulse track are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1, 1a and 2). 4x evaluation: The rising and falling edges of both pulse tracks are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1 and 1a) See parameters P450 and P451 for position sensing function P140 Selection of pulse encoder type * See beginning of this Section for pulse encoder types 0 (G145) 1 2 3 4 Number of pulses of pulse encoder (G145) P142 Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage (G145) 0 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 32767 [pulses/rev] 1 pulse/rev 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=250 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not selected Pulse encoder type 1 Pulse encoder type 1a Pulse encoder type 2 Pulse encoder type 3 P141 * 0 to 4 1 Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals Matching of internal operating points to signal voltage of incoming pulse encoder signals. NOTICE Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch over the supply voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and 27). Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply. 366 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P143 Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation FDS (G145) The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of 100% = rated motor speed. 1.0 to 6500.0 [rev/min] 0.1rev/min No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1450.0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Control parameters for speed sensing with pulse encoder P144 to P147: P144 and P147 determine the basic setting for actual speed sensing by means of pulse encoder (single or multiple evaluation of pulse encoder signals and nominal measuring time) and thus also define the lowest possible measurable speed (minimum speed). P145 and P146 can be used in special cases to extend the measurable speed range down to even lower speeds, on the basis of the minimum speed defined by the settings in P144 and P147. P144 FDS (G145) Multiple evaluation of encoder signals 0 1 2 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a, 2) 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a) 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Note: In contrast to the 1x evaluation method, 2x or 4x evaluation reduces the minimum measurable speed by a factor of 2 or 4 respectively, but may produce an "unsteady" actual speed value on encoders with unequal pulse/pause ratio or without an exact 90 displacement between encoder signals. P145 FDS (G145) Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low speeds - switchover of multiple evaluation 0 Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder signals OFF (i.e. P144 is always active) 1 Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder signals ON (i.e. when P144 = 0, 2x evaluation is selected for low speeds and 4x evaluation for very low speeds. When P144 = 1, 4x evaluation is selected for low speeds) As opposed to P145 = 0, this setting reduces the minimum measurable speed by up to a factor of 4. Caution: Switching over the multiple evaluation method for encoder pulses also affects the position sensing function in the measuring channel. For this reason, this setting may not be used in conjunction with positioning operations. Connectors K0042 to K0044 are inoperative when P145 = 1. P146 FDS (G145) Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low speeds - switchover of measuring time 0 Automatic switchover of measuring time OFF (i.e. P147 is always active) 1 Automatic switchover of measuring time ON This setting extends the measuring time for low speeds (based on the measuring time set in P147, i.e. when P147 = 0, the nominal measuring time is switched over to 2 ms for low speeds and to 4 ms for very low speeds. When P147 = 1, the nominal measuring time is switched over to 4 ms for low speeds) Caution: When P146=1, the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by up to a factor of 4 as opposed to a 0 setting. However, this setting results in a longer actual speed sensing delay in the extended minimum speed range. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 367 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P147 * Nominal measuring time of pulse encoder signal evaluation 0 to 20 [ms] 1 FDS (G145) 0 Nominal measuring time 1 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized measurement 1 Nominal measuring time 2 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized measurement (produces "steadier" actual speed value than setting 0) 2 Nominal measuring time 4 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized measurement (for drives with high moment of inertia, produces "steadier" actual speed value than setting 0) 12 Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms, asynchronous measurement 13 ... Nominal measuring time 0.3 ms, asynchronous measurement 20 Nominal measuring time 1 ms, asynchronous measurement Note: 12 to 20 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms to 1 ms reduces dead time in the actual speed value channel, but "less steady" actual speed value than achieved with setting 0 to 2 [can be set only in SW 1.9 and later] Caution: When P147=1 or 2 the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by a factor of 2 or 4 respectively as opposed to 0 or 12 to 20. However, these settings increase the actual speed sensing delay. For this reason, P200 should be parameterized to at least 5ms before optimizing the speed controller. 11.9 P152 * FDS (G163) P153 * FDS (G162) P154 * FDS (G162) P155 FDS (G162) P156 FDS (G162) P157 * FDS Closed-loop current control, auto-reversing stage, gating unit Line frequency correction The internal line synchronization for the gating pulses derived from the power terminals is averaged over the number of line periods set in this parameter. In operation on "weak" power supplies with unstable frequencies, for example, on a diesel-driven generator (isolated operation), this parameter must be set lower than for operation on "constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve a higher frequency correction speed. Control word for precontrol 0 1 2 3 Precontrol disabled, precontrol output=180 Precontrol active Precontrol active Precontrol active [SW 1.7 and later] Note: With P153 = 2 or 3 and if no "zero delay-angle setting", the output of the precontrol is limited to P167. Set current controller I component to zero 0 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P controller) 1 Controller I component is active Current controller P gain Proportional gain of current controller Current controller reset time Control word for current setpoint integrator 0 (G162) Reduced gearbox stressing The integrator is active only after a change in torque direction (acts as ramp-function generator for current setpoint only until the output reaches the setpoint at the integrator input for the 1st time after a change in torque direction). Ind: 4 FS=20 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.01 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.20 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.020 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 4 FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.001 to 10.000 [s] 0.001s 0 to 1 1 1 P158 FDS (G162) 368 Current setpoint integrator The integrator is always active (acts as ramp-function generator for the current setpoint) Ramp-up time for current setpoint integrator (reduced gearbox stressing) 1 to 20 Period of an acceleration ramp with a setpoint step change from 0% to 100% at r072.002. 0.000 to 1.000 [s] 0.001s SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P159 Switchover threshold for auto-reversing stage (G163) I 0 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.000 to 2.000 [s] 0.001s Ind: 4 FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] Ind: 4 FS=40 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 165 [] Ind: 4 FS=45 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 179 [] Ind: 4 FS=15 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% of n controller output Required torque direction FDS No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=5.00 Type: O2 Speed controller output II P159 P159 P160 Additional torque-free interval FDS (G163) P164 * Additional torque-free interval for torque direction change in 4Q operation. FDS (G162) Set current controller P component to zero 0 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I controller) 1 Controller P component is active P166 Filter time for precontrol FDS (G162) P167 The precontrol input signal is applied via a filtering element FDS (G162) P168 With P153 = 2 or 3 and if no "zero delay-angle setting", the output of the precontrol is limited to P167. FDS (G163) The change of the firing angle from one firing instant to the next is limited. Minimum firing angle Maximum change to firing angle 11.10 Current limitation, torque limitation P171 FDS (G160) (G161) P172 FDS (G160) (G161) P174 * (G161) (G163) System current limit in torque direction I 0.0 to 300.0 [% of P100] 0.1% of P100 Ind: 4 FS=200.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online System current limit in torque direction II -300.0 to 0.0 [% of P100] 0.1% of P100 Ind: 4 FS=-200.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P175 * FDS (G162) P176 * FDS (G162) P180 Source for variable P gain [SW 1.8 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Control word root generator 0 Root generator not active recommended for current-controlled operation (P084=2) 1 Root generator active The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the current controller after multiplication with P155. Source for variable Integration time [SW 1.8 and later] The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the current controller after multiplication with P156. Positive torque limit 1 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 [%] FS=300.00 0.01% of rated motor Type: I2 torque P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Negative torque limit 1 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 [%] FS=-300.00 0.01% of rated motor Type: I2 torque P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Positive torque limit 2 -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 [%] FS=300.00 0.01% of rated motor Type: I2 torque P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FDS (G160) P181 FDS (G160) P182 FDS (G160) If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 =1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 369 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description P183 Negative torque limit 2 FDS If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 =1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1. P184 Threshold speed for torque limits FDS If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694 =1) and the speed (K0166) is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter P184, then torque limit 2 (P182, P183) is activated in place of torque limit 1 (P180, P181). (G160) Value range [Unit] Steps P191 Filter time for setpoint for current controller FDS Filtering of the current setpoint at the input of the current controller. The purpose of this filter is to decouple the current precontrol from the current controller. (G162) [SW 1.9 and later] No. indices Factory setting Type -300.00 to 300.00 Ind: 4 [%] FS=-300.00 0.01% of rated motor Type: I2 torque See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 120.00 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms 1 to 140 [Hz] 1Hz 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=10 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 140 [Hz] 1Hz 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1000 [ms] 1ms 0 to 100 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 10.0 [%] 0.1% 0.010 to 10.000 [s] 0.001s 0.10 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=2.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.11 Speed controller further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P563 Setting values for speed controller - actual value/setpoint processing P200 FDS (G152) P201 FDS (G152) P202 FDS (G152) P203 FDS (G152) P204 FDS (G152) Filter time for actual speed controller value Filtering of the actual speed value by means of a PT1 element. Band-stop 1: Resonant frequency Band-stop 1: Quality 0 1 2 3 Quality = 0.5 Quality = 1 Quality = 2 Quality = 3 Band-stop 2: Resonant frequency Band-stop 2: Quality 0 1 2 3 Quality = 0.5 Quality = 1 Quality = 2 Quality = 3 P205 FDS (G152) P206 FDS (G152) D element: Derivative-action time r217 Indication of the active droop of the speed controller [SW 1.7 and later] D element: Filter time (G152) r218 (G151) (G152) r219 (G151) (G152) Indication of the active integration time of the speed controller [SW 1.7 and later] P221 Speed controller: Hysteresis for speed-dependent PI/P controller switchover [SW 1.9 and later] FDS (G152) 370 Display of effective P gain of speed controller See P222 for further details. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P222 Speed controller: Speed-dependent switchover threshold for PI / P controller 0.00 to 10.00 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed FDS (G152) 0.00 Automatic switchover from PI to P controller deactivated. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.10 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.010 to 10.000 [s] 0.001s Ind: 4 FS=0.200 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online > 0.00 Depending on the actual speed (K0166), the PI controller switches over to a P controller if the speed drops below the threshold set in parameter P222. The integrator is not switched in again (with value of 0) until the actual speed is > P222 + P221. This function allows the drive to be stopped without overshoot using a zero setpoint with the controllers enabled. This function is active only if the binector selected in P698 is in the log. "1" state. Setting values for speed controller P223 * FDS (G152) P224 * FDS (G152) Control word for speed controller precontrol 0 1 Speed controller precontrol disabled Speed controller precontrol acts as torque setpoint (is added to n controller output) Control word for speed controller I component 0 1 2 3 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P controller) Controller I component is active The I component is stopped when a torque or current limit is reached Controller I component is active The I component is stopped when a torque limit is reached Controller I component is active The I component is stopped only when 199.99% is reached P225 Speed controller P gain FDS See also setting values for "Speed controller adaptation" function (P550 to P559). (G151) See also U645 to U649 for factors relating to the speed controller P gain. P226 FDS (G151) Speed controller reset time Speed controller droop Function: A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the speed controller (acts on summation point of setpoint and actual value). P227 Speed controller droop 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40 A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% deviation in the speed from the 0.1% Type: O2 Online FDS setpoint at a 100% controller output (100% torque or current setpoint) ("softening" of closed-loop control). (G151) See also P562, P563, P630 and P684 P228 Filter time for speed setpoint FDS Filtering of setpoint by means of a PT1 element. It may be useful to parameterize lower values when the ramp-function generator is in use. (G152) P229 * FDS (G152) Control of I component tracking for slave drive 0 1 On a slave drive, the I component of the speed controller is made to follow such that M(set, ncontr.) = M(set, limit), the speed setpoint is set to the actual speed value Tracking deactivated P230 Setting period of speed controller integrator FDS After a positive edge at the binector set in P695, the integrator of the speed controller is set to the instantaneous value of the connector set in P631. If a time of > 0 is set on P230, this setting operation is not performed just once, but the speed controller integrator is set continually to the setting value for the parameterized time period. (G152) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 371 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P234 Set speed controller P component to zero 0 to 1 1 FDS (G152) 0 1 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I controller) Controller P component is active No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01 s Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.12 Ramp-function generator (see also Section 8, Sheet G136 and Section 9) See P639 and P640 for ramp-function generator setting parameters P295 FDS Mode for rounding the ramp-function generator 0 (G136) [SW 1.9 and later] If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up (or ramp-down), acceleration (deceleration) is aborted and initial rounding of the deceleration (acceleration) process begins immediately. The setpoint is not increased (decreased) any further, but the signal at the ramp-function generator output has a breakpoint (i.e. a step change in the acceleration rate). 0 to 1 Ramp generator output Ramp generator input 1 If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up or ramp-down, acceleration/deceleration gradually changes to deceleration/acceleration. The setpoint increases/decreases further, but there is no breakpoint in the signal at the generator output (i.e. there is no step change in the acceleration rate). Ramp generator output Ramp generator input P296 FDS (G136) Ramp-down time of ramp generator with emergency stop (OFF3) [SW 1.9 and later] When the "Emergency stop" command is issued, the drive must normally brake down to 0 speed along the current limit. If the mechanical design of the drive makes this option impermissible or undesirable, then a value of > 0 can be set here. In this case, the drive brakes along the deceleration ramp programmed here when the "Emergency stop" command is issued. see also parameter P330 P297 FDS (G136) P298 FDS (G136) 372 Lower transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop (OFF3) [SW 1.9 and later] see also parameter P330 Upper transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop (OFF3) [SW 1.9 and later] see also parameter P330 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation) The effective limitations are: Upper limit: Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632 Lower limit: Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633 Note: P300 FDS (G137) P301 FDS (G137) P302 * FDS (G136) The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative setpoint limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative value. Positive limitation at ramp-function generator output -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 [%] FS=105.00 P051 = 40 0.01% Type: I2 Offline Negative limitation at ramp-function generator output -200.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 [%] FS=-105.00 P051 = 40 0.01% Type: I2 Offline Select ramp-function generator / ramp-up integrator mode 0 to 3 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 1 FS=0 P051 = 40 0 Normal ramp-function generator operation: Type: O2 Offline Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied. When a binary selectable input parameterized as "Rampfunction generator setting 2" (P307 to P310)" (selected in P637) or "Ramp-function generator setting 3" (P311 to P314)" (selected in P638), generator setting 2 or 3 is applied as appropriate. 1 Ramp-up integrator operation: When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function generator setting 1 is switched over to a ramp-up/down times=0 2 Ramp-up integrator operation: When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 2 (P307 to P310) 3 Ramp-up integrator operation: When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 3 (P311 to P314) Ramp-function generator parameter set 1 (see also parameter P330) P303 FDS (G136) P304 FDS (G136) P305 FDS (G136) P306 FDS (G136) Ramp-up time 1 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 is selected via the binector parameterized in P638. P311 Ramp-up time 3 0.00 to 650.00 FDS [s] (G136) 0.01s P312 Ramp-down time 3 0.00 to 650.00 FDS [s] (G136) 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ramp-down time 1 Lower transition rounding 1 Upper transition rounding 1 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (see also parameter P330) Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 is selected via the binector parameterized in P637. P307 FDS (G136) P308 FDS (G136) P309 FDS (G136) P310 FDS (G136) Ramp-up time 2 Ramp-down time 2 Lower transition rounding 2 Upper transition rounding 2 Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (see also parameter P330) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 373 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P313 FDS (G136) P314 FDS (G136) Lower transition rounding 3 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s 0.00 to 100.00 [s] 0.01s Upper transition rounding 3 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.00 to 10.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=0.50 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -300.00 to 300.00 [%] 0.01% -300.00 to 300.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Displays r315 (G136) r316 (G136) Display of effective times i001: i002: i003: i004: 0.00 to 650.00 / 10.00 [s] 0.01s Display of effective ramp-up time Display of effective ramp-down time Display of effective lower transition rounding Display of effective upper transition rounding Display of ramp-function generator status Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Segment: 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 15 P317 * FDS (G136) P318 * FDS (G136) RFG enable RFG start Setpoint enable & /OFF1 Set RFG RFG tracking Bypass RFG Ramp-down Ramp-up Ramp-function generator tracking 0 1 Ramp-function generator tracking is not active Ramp-function generator tracking is active Set ramp-function generator output This parameter determines how the ramp-function generator output is set at the commencement of a "Shutdown" process: 0 The ramp-function generator output is not set at the commencement of a "Shutdown" process" 1 At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the actual speed value K0167 (actual speed value K0167 is "unfiltered") 2 At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the actual speed value K0179 (value is filtered by PT1 in P200, other filters may also be active) (setting may not be used in conjunction with P205 > 0) During a "Shutdown" process, the limitation at the ramp-function generator output is not effective. P318 must be set to 1 or 2 to prevent any (temporary) excess speed during "Shutdown" when the generator output is limited. P319 FDS (G136) Delay time for enabling ramp-function generator 11.13 Setpoint processing P320 FDS (G135) P321 FDS (G135) 374 Multiplier for main setpoint Multiplier for additional setpoint SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P322 * Source for multiplier for main setpoint FDS (G135) P323 * FDS (G135) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for multiplier for additional setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -90 to 0 [%] 1% of P078.001 Ind: 4 FS=-80 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 99 [%] 1% of P078.001 Ind: 4 FS=40 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 10 to 100 [%] 1% of P078.001 Ind: 4 FS=20 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 600.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: 4 FS=0.5 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.14 Ramp-function generator P330 * FDS (G136) Factor for ramp-function generator times [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 1 1 Selection of a factor for the values set in parameters P296, P297, P298, P303 to P314 and P542 (ramp-function generator times). 0 1 Factor = 1 Factor = 60 i.e. effective ramp-function generator times = values set in [minutes] instead of in [seconds] 11.15 Setting values for monitoring functions and limits Setting values for monitoring functions P351 Threshold for undervoltage trip FDS If the line voltage exceeds a specific value and does not return to the permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault message F006 is activated. The drive dwells in operating state o4 while the line undervoltage persists. P352 Source for overvoltage trip FDS If the line voltage exceeds a specific value and does not return to the permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault message F007 is activated. P353 Response threshold for phase failure monitoring FDS If the line voltage drops below the permissible value in operating states of o4 and does not return to an "acceptable" value within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault message F004 is activated. The drive dwells in operating state o4 for the period that the line voltage remains below the threshold and during the subsequent voltage stabilization period set in P090. When a switch-on command is entered, the converter dwells in operating state o4 for a maximum delay period set in P089 until the voltages in all phases exceed the threshold set in this parameter before fault message F004 is activated. P355 Stall protection time FDS F035 is activated if the conditions for the "Stall protection" fault message are fulfilled for longer than the period set in P355. When P355=0.0, the "Drive blocked" monitoring function (F035) is deactivated and alarm A035 is likewise suppressed. P360 Response delay for external faults and alarms The fault message or alarm is not activated on the converter until the appropriate input or corresponding control word bit (as selected in P675, P686, P688 or P689) has been in the LOW state for at least the time period set in this parameter (see also Section 8, Sheets G180 and G181). (G180) (G181) i001: i002: i003: i004: Delay for external fault 1 Delay for external fault 2 Delay for external alarm 1 Delay for external alarm 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 375 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description P361 Delay time for the undervoltage monitoring FDS Activation of the fault message F006 (line undervoltage) is delayed by the time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses are output! Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only begins after the time set here has elapsed. P362 Delay time for the overvoltage monitoring FDS Activation of the fault message F007 (line overvoltage) is delayed by the time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses are output! Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only begins after the time set here has elapsed. P363 Threshold for the minimum line frequency FDS Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.7 and later] [SW 1.7 and later] 0 to 60000 [ms] 1ms No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 60000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=10000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=45.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=65.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=5.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=0.50 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed 0.0 to 100.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=3.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 23.0 to 60.0 [Hz] If the line frequency falls below the value set here and does not rise above it 0.1 Hz again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F008 is activated. As long as the line frequency is below the value set here, the drive is kept in operating state o4. [values < 45.0 Hz can be set in SW 1.9 and later] NOTE Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz is available on request. P364 FDS Threshold for the maximum line frequency [SW 1.8 and later] 50.0 to 110.0 [Hz] If the line frequency rises above the value set here and does not fall below it 0.1 Hz again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F009 is activated. As long as the line frequency is above the value set here, the drive is kept in operating state o4. NOTE Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz is available on request. 11.16 Setting values for limit-value monitors (see also Section 8, Sheet G187 and G188) n < nmin signal P370 Speed threshold nmin FDS Speed threshold for n < nmin limit-value monitor. (G188) Note: This threshold also affects the sequence of control operations at "shutdown", "fast stop", cancellation of "Inch" or "Crawl" command (see section 9). P371 Hysteresis for n < nmin signal FDS (G188) This value is added to the response threshold if n < nmin is active. n < ncomp. signal P373 Speed threshold ncomp. FDS (G187) P374 Speed threshold for n < ncomp. signal FDS (G187) P375 FDS (G187) This value is added to the response threshold if n < ncomp. is active. 376 Hysteresis for < ncomp. signal (n < ncomp. signal) OFF delay for n < ncomp. signal SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FD=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: 4 FS=3.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1% of maximum speed -199.9 to 0.0 [%] 0.1% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=120.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=-120.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: 4 FS=2.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed 0.0 to 100.0 [s] 0.1s Ind: 4 FS=5.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=1.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=60.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Setpoint/actual value deviation 2 P376 Permissible setpoint/actual value deviation 2 FDS (G187) P377 Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation 2 signal FDS (G187) P378 FDS (G187) [SW 1.9 and later] [SW 1.9 and later] This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value deviation signal is active Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 2 [SW 1.9 and later] Overspeed P380 Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation FDS (G188) P381 Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation FDS (G188) Setpoint/actual value deviation P387 OFF delay FDS (G187) If the system leaves the state "Setpoint in the controlled range", the system waits for the time set here until the setpoint/actual value comparison for the "setpoint/actual deviation" signal (status word 1 bit 8)becomes active again Permissible deviation between setpoint and actual value P388 FDS (G187) P389 FDS (G187) Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation signal P390 FDS (G187) Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value deviation signal is active 11.17 Settable fixed values Function: P401 FDS (G120) P402 FDS (G120) P403 FDS (G120) P404 FDS (G120) P405 FDS (G120) P406 FDS (G120) P407 FDS (G120) P408 FDS (G120) P409 FDS (G120) The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified connector K401 fixed value is applied to connector K0401 K402 fixed value is applied to connector K0402 K403 fixed value is applied to connector K0403 K404 fixed value is applied to connector K0404 K405 fixed value is applied to connector K0405 K406 fixed value is applied to connector K0406 K407 fixed value is applied to connector K0407 K408 fixed value is applied to connector K0408 K409 fixed value is applied to connector K0409 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 377 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P410 FDS (G120) P411 FDS (G120) P412 FDS (G120) P413 FDS (G120) P414 FDS (G120) P415 FDS (G120) P416 FDS (G120) K410 fixed value -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -32768 to 32767 1 is applied to connector K0410 K411 fixed value is applied to connector K0411 K412 fixed value is applied to connector K0412 K413 fixed value -32768 to 32767 1 is applied to connector K0413 K414 fixed value -32768 to 32767 1 is applied to connector K0414 K415 fixed value -32768 to 32767 1 is applied to connector K0415 K416 fixed value -32768 to 32767 1 is applied to connector K0416 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.18 Fixed control bits Function: P421 FDS (G120) P422 FDS (G120) P423 FDS (G120) P424 FDS (G120) P425 FDS (G120) P426 FDS (G120) P427 FDS (G120) P428 FDS (G120) 378 The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified binector B421 fixed bit is applied to binector B0421 B422 fixed bit is applied to binector B0422 B423 fixed bit is applied to binector B0423 B424 fixed bit is applied to binector B0424 B425 fixed bit is applied to binector B0425 B426 fixed bit is applied to binector B0426 B427 fixed bit is applied to binector B0427 B428 fixed bit is applied to binector B0428 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 1 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.19 Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints) (see also Section 8, Sheets G127, G129 and G130) Fixed setpoint Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P431 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional fixed setpoint (K0204, K0209) via the binectors selected in P430, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P432 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection. If fixed setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P433 is applied to K0209. P430 * (G127) Source for fixed-setpoint injection Selection of binector to control injection of the fixed setpoint ("1" state = inching setpoint injected). All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=9215 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P431 * (G127) Source for fixed setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the fixed setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P432 * Bypassing the ramp-function generator when the fixed setpoint is injected (G127) Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed when the fixed setpoint is injected. The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the binector selected via an index of P430 and the setting in the same index of P432 produces a log. "1" P433 * Source for standard setpoint FDS (G127) Selection of the connector to be applied if fixed-setpoint injection is not selected 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Inching setpoint Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P436 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an inching setpoint (K0202, K0207) via the binectors selected in P435, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P437 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection. If more than one inching setpoint is injected, an output value corresponding to inching setpoint = 0% is applied. If inching setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P438 is applied to K0207. P435 * (G129) Source for injection of inching setpoint Selection of binector to control injection of the inching setpoint ("1" state = inching setpoint injected). All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P436 * (G129) P437 * (G129) Source for inching setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the inching setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed when the inching setpoint is injected. The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the binector selected via an index of P435 and the setting in the same index of P437 produces a log. "1" SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 379 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P438 * Source for standard setpoint All connector numbers 1 FDS (G129) Selection of the connector to be applied if inching-setpoint injection is not selected No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=208 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Crawling setpoint Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P441 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional crawling setpoint (K0201, K0206) via the binectors selected in P440, indices .01 to .08. P445 can be set to define whether the setpoint must be applied when the selected binectors have reached the log. "1" state ("level" when P445=0) or in response to a 0 1 transition ("edge" when P445=1). When setpoint injection in response to a 0 1 transition is selected, the setpoint injection function is reset when the binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state. P442 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection. Note: The level/edge selection performed using P445 also applies to the switch-on command of terminal 37 or the crane control. If crawling setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P443 is applied to K0206. P440 * (G130) P441 * (G130) P442 * (G130) P443 * FDS (G130) P444 * BDS (G130) P445 * (G130) Source for injection of crawling setpoint Selection of binector to control injection of the crawling setpoint. Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=207 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for crawling setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the crawling setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed when the crawling setpoint is injected. The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the binector selected via an index of P440 and the setting in the same index of P442 produces a log. "1" Source for standard setpoint Selection of the connector to be applied if crawling-setpoint injection is not selected 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for standstill command Selection of the binector to control the standstill operation (OFF1) or resetting of crawling setpoint injection when P445=1 (log. "0" state = reset). 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Selection of level/edge for switch-on/crawling Selection to define whether ON command must be input via terminal 37 or the crane control and the crawling setpoint injected in response to a log. "1" level or to a 0 1 transition 0 1 380 All binector numbers 1 ON with log. "1" state at terminal 37 and injection of crawling setpoint with binectors selected in P440 in log. "1" state ON in response to 0 1 transition at terminal 37 and injection of crawling setpoint in response to 0 1 transition of binectors selected in P440 With this setting, the ON command or injection command for the crawling setpoint is stored. The memory is reset when the binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.9 and later] All connector numbers Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 1. 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for control of connector selector switch 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.9 and later] All connector numbers Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 2. 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for control of connector selector switch 2 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.20 Position sensing with pulse encoder See parameters P140 to P147 for pulse encoder definition P450 * FDS (G145) Resetting of position counter 0 Reset position counter OFF 1 Reset position counter with zero marker 2 Reset position counter with zero marker when LOW signal is applied to terminal 39 3 Reset position counter when LOW signal is applied to terminal 39 Note: Counter resetting with P450 = 2 and 3 is executed in the hardware and is not affected by how the binectors controlled by terminal 39 are interconnected P451 * FDS (G145) P452 * BDS (G145) P453 * BDS (G145) Position counter hysteresis 0 Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal OFF 1 Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal ON (the first pulse encoder input pulse after a change in rotational direction is not counted) Source for "Reset position counter" command [SW 1.9 and later] Selection of binector to control resetting of the position counter. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for "Enable zero marker counter" command [SW 1.9 and later] Selection of binector to control enabling of the zero marker counter 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.21 Connector selector switches (see also Section 8, Function Diagram Sheet G124) P455 * (G124) P456 * (G124) P457 * (G124) P458 * (G124) Source for inputs of connector selector switch 1 [SW 1.9 and later] Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 1. All binector numbers 1 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for inputs of connector selector switch 2 [SW 1.9 and later] Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 2. All binector numbers 1 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 381 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.01 to 300.00 [s] 0.01s 0.01 to 300.00 [s] 0.01s 0.01 to 300.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -199.9 to 199.9 [%] 0.1% -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: I2 Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=-100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.22 Motorized potentiometer (see also Section 8, Sheet G126) P460 Control word for motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator 0 to 1 * 1 0 The motorized potentiometer ramp generator is bypassed in AuFDS tomatic mode (same effect as for P462 and P463 = 0.01, i.e. the generator output is made to follow the automatic setpoint with(G126) out delay) 1 P461 * FDS (G126) Motorized potentiometer ramp generator is active in Manual and Automatic modes Source for setpoint in Automatic mode Selection of the connector to be applied as the Automatic setpoint to the ramp-function generator in the motorized potentiometer 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P462 FDS (G126) P463 FDS (G126) P464 Ramp-up time for motorized potentiometer FDS Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, i.e. on K0241 the change in the output quantity (K0240) is output within the time set in P464, multiplied by the factor set in P465 (unit of time setting is [s] if P465=0 or [min] if P465=1) (G126) Ramp-down time for motorized potentiometer Time difference for dy/dt Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a ramp-up time of P462=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0% to y=100% takes 5s. - A time difference dt of P464=2s is set. - A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0241 since the dy within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%.. P465 * FDS (G126) P466 * FDS (G126) Factor of expansion for motorized potentiometer The effective ramp-up time, ramp-down time or time difference for dy/dt is the product of the time setting in parameter P462, P463 and P464 respectively, multiplied by the factor set in this parameter. 0 1 Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 1 Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 60 Source for motorized potentiometer setting value Selection of the connector to be injected as the motorized potentiometer setting value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P467 FDS (G126) P468 FDS (G126) Motorized potentiometer starting value P469 FDS (G126) Setpoint for "Lower motorized potentiometer" P470 * Source for clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover BDS (G126) 382 Starting value of motorized potentiometer after ON when P473 = 0 Setpoint for "Raise motorized potentiometer" Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Raise motorized potentiometer" Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Lower motorized potentiometer" Selection of binector to control "Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover" ("0" state = clockwise). 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P471 * Source for manual/automatic switchover All binector numbers 1 BDS (G126) P472 * BDS (G126) P473 * FDS Selection of binector to control "Manual/automatic switchover" ("0" state = manual). No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for set motorized potentiometer Selection of binector to control "Set motorized potentiometer" ("0" to "1" transition = set motorized potentiometer). 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Storage of output value 0 No storage of output value: The output is set to 0 in all operating states of >o5. The starting point after ON is determined by P467 (MOP starting value). 1 Non-volatile storage of output value: The output value remains stored in all operating states and after voltage disconnection or failure. The last value stored is output again after voltage recovery/reconnection. (G126) 11.23 Oscillation Function: Parameters P480 to P483 define the waveshape of a rectangular signal (oscillation setpoint K0203). The value set in P480 determines the signal level for the time period set in P481 and the value set in P482 the signal level for the time period set in P483. Oscillation: Selected in P485. The free-running rectangular signal is switched through to the output K0208. P480 Oscillation setpoint 1 -199.9 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 [%] FS=5.0 P051 = 40 0.1% of maximum Type: I2 Online FDS (G128) speed P481 Oscillation time 1 0.1 to 300.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 FDS [s] FS=2.0 P051 = 40 (G128) 0.1s Type: O2 Online P482 Oscillation setpoint 2 -199.9 to 199.9 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 [%] FS=-0.0 P051 = 40 0.1% of maximum Type: I2 Online FDS (G128) speed P483 Oscillation time 2 0.1 to 300.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 FDS [s] FS=2.0 P051 = 40 (G128) 0.1s Type: O2 Online P484 Source for standard setpoint All connector numInd: 4 P052 = 3 * bers FS=209 P051 = 40 Selection of connector to be injected as the output value when the "Oscilla- 1 Type: L2 Offline FDS tion" function is not selected (G128) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P485 * BDS (G128) Source for oscillation selection Selection of binector to control activation of the "Oscillation" function (log. "1" state = oscillation active) All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 383 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.24 Temperature sensor inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G185) WARNING The encoders for measuring and monitoring the motor temperature must be safely isolated from the power circuit. P490 (G185) Selection of temperature sensor for monitoring of motor temperature i001: i002: Temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23: Temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205: 0 to 5 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 200 [C] 1C Ind: 4 FS=20 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Settings: 0 1 2 3 4 5 No temperature sensor KTY84 PTC thermistor with R=600 PTC thermistor with R=1200 PTC thermistor with R=1330 PTC thermistor with R=2660 1) 2) 1) 2) 1) 2) 1) 2) 1) PTC thermistor according to DIN 44081 / 44082 with specified R at rated response temperature, 1330 on Siemens motors (setting 4 must be selected). When a PTC thermistor is selected as the temperature sensor, it is not necessary to set parameters P491 and P492 (alarm and trip temperatures). These two temperatures are predetermined by the type of PTC thermistor installed. Whether an alarm or fault is output when the operating point of the PTC thermistor is reached depends on how the relevant input is parameterized (P493.F or P494.F). 2) Rn = resistance at switching point when R < Rn: B0184 or B0185 = 0 when R > Rn: B0184 or B0185 = 1 P491 FDS (G185) Monitoring of motor temperature: Alarm temperature P492 FDS (G185) Monitoring of motor temperature: Trip temperature Operative only when P490.x=1. 0 to 200 [C] 1C P493 * Motor temperature 1 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23): Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 3 1 FDS Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor KTY64: (G185) Operative only when P490.x=1. 0 1 2 3 Monitoring deactivated Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and fault message (F029) at temperature > P492 Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor 0 1 2 3 384 Monitoring deactivated Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is reached Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is reached Illegal setting SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P494 * Motor temperature 2 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205): Tripping of alarm or fault message 0 to 3 1 FDS Motor temperature grasped with KTY84 0 Monitoring deactivated 1 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 2 Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492 3 Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and fault message (F029) at temperature > P492 Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor 0 Monitoring deactivated 1 Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is reached 2 Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is reached 3 Illegal setting (G185) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS=203 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.25 Binary inputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G186) P495 Alarm A025 / Fault F025 from terminal 211 * 0 Terminal 211 is not scanned: no tripping of alarm or fault mesFDS sage (G186) P496 * FDS (G186) P497 * FDS (G186) P498 * FDS (G186) 1 Terminal 211 is scanned: alarm (A025) if 0 signal 2 Terminal 211 is scanned: fault message (F025) if 0 signal Alarm A025 / Fault F026 from terminal 212 0 Terminal 212 is not scanned: no tripping of alarm or fault message 1 Terminal 212 is scanned: alarm (A026) if 1 signal 2 Terminal 212 is scanned: fault message (F026) if 1 signal Alarm A027 / Fault F027 from terminal 213 0 Terminal 213 is not scanned: no tripping of alarm or fault message 1 Terminal 213 is scanned: alarm (A027) if 0 signal 2 Terminal 213 is scanned: fault message (F027) if 0 signal Alarm A028 / Fault F028 from terminal 214 0 Terminal 214 is not scanned: no tripping of alarm or fault message 1 Terminal 214 is scanned: alarm (A028) if 0 signal 2 Terminal 214 is scanned: fault message (F028) if 0 signal 11.26 Configuring of torque shell input P500 * BDS (G160) P501 * BDS (G160) Source for torque setpoint for slave drive All connector numbers Selection of the connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a slave 1 drive 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for additional torque setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the additional torque setpoint All connector numbers 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 385 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P502 * Source for value to be added to speed controller output (G152) Selection of connector to be injected as the value to be added to the speed controller output (in addition to friction and moment of inertia compensation) All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -300.00 to 300.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P503 FDS (G160) Multiplier for torque setpoint in slave mode 11.27 Speed limiting controller (see also Section 8, Sheet G160) The output of the speed limiting controller comprises a positive (K0136) and a negative (K0137) torque limit. These limits are applied to the torque limitation. P509 * (G160) Source for input quantity (n-act) of speed limiting controller P510 * Source for pos. torque limit of speed limiting controller (G160) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque limitation 1 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=2 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=4 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P511 * (G160) Source for neg. torque limit of speed limiting controller Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque limitation 2 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P512 FDS (G160) Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1% of rated speed Ind: 4 FS=105.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P513 FDS (G160) Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation -199.9 to 0.0 [%] 0.1% of rated speed Ind: 4 FS=-105.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P515 FDS (G160) P gain of speed limiting controller 0.10 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.28 Friction compensation (see also Section 8, Sheet G153) Parameters P520 to P530 are the motor current and torque setpoint required for a stationary input signal (factory setting: speed controller actual value K0179) of 0%, 10% to 100% of the maximum value (in steps of 10%). These parameters are intermediate points along the friction curve. Depending on P170 (0 or 1) they are either a current or a torque setpoint. The intermediate points are interpolated linearly during which the output of the friction compensation assumes the sign of the input signal. P530 is specified by the friction compensation even for input signals >100% of the maximum signal. During operation in both directions we recommend leaving P520 at 0.0% in order to avoid current vibration at 0% of the input signal. 386 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P519 * Source for input signal of the friction compensation [SW 2.0 and later] All connector numbers 1 (G153) Selection of the input signals that are added and led to the input of the friction compensation. i001 i002 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS= i001: 179 i002: 0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 650.00 [s] 0.01s Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 650.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Input signal, with sign Input signal with absolute value generator Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. P520 Friction at 0% speed FDS (G153) P521 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P522 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P523 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P524 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P525 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P526 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P527 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P528 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P529 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) P530 Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque FDS (G153) Setting as % of converter rated current or rated torque Friction at 10% speed Friction at 20% speed Friction at 30% speed Friction at 40% speed Friction at 50% speed Friction at 60% speed Friction at 70% speed Friction at 80% speed Friction at 90% speed Friction at 100% speed and higher 11.29 Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) (see also Section 8, Sheet G153) P540 Acceleration time FDS (G153) The acceleration time is the time which would be necessary to accelerate the drive with 100% converter rated current from 0% to 100% of maximum speed (where no friction is present). It is a measure of the moment of inertia on the motor shaft. P541 P gain of acceleration FDS (G153) Proportional gain for "SAD-dependent acceleration" function (see also parameter P543) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 387 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P542 Time difference for dy/dt of ramp-function generator FDS Ramp-function generator: Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, i.e. at K0191, the change in the output quantity of the ramp-function generator (K0190) is output within the period set in P542 0.01 to 300.00 [s] 0.01s (G136) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.01 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% of maximum speed Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a ramp-up time of P311=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0% to y=100% takes 5s. - A time difference dt of P542=2s is set. - A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0191 since the dy within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%.. (see also parameter P330) P543 Threshold for SAD-dependent acceleration FDS With respect to the SAD-dependent acceleration function, only the component of the speed controller setpoint/actual value difference which has an absolute value in excess of the threshold set in this parameter is switched through (see also parameter P541). (G153) Output (value to be multiplied by value in P541) 199.99% -200.00% Negative threshold (-P543) Input (setpoint/actual difference) Positive threshold (P543) 199.99% -200.00% P546 FDS (G153) 388 Filter time for compensation of moment of inertia SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.30 Speed controller (see also Section 8, Sheet G151) further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P234 Speed controller adaptation The parameters of the speed controller (Kp, Tn, droop) can be altered as a function of any connector to adapt the speed controller optimally to a changing controlled system. The diagrams below show the active P gain, the active Integration time and the active droop depending on the value of the set connector. Adaptation of the P gain: KP P550 P225 Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input Adaptation of the integration time: P556 P559 selected in P553 Tn P551 P226 Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input P557 Adaptation of the droop: P560 selected in P554 St P552 P227 Threshold 1 Threshold 2 Input P558 P561 selected in P555 For parameter pairs P225/P550, P226/P551 and P227/P552 all values can be set completely mutually independently, e.g., P550 does not have to be greater than P225. The above diagrams show only the effect of the individual parameters. Threshold 1 must always be set smaller than threshold 2, otherwise the fault message F058 is activated. P550 P gain in adaptation range 0.10 to 200.00 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 FDS 0.01 FS=3.00 P051 = 40 Maximum value of KP if influencing quantity threshold 1 (G151) Type: O2 Online P551 Integration time in the adaptation range [SW 1.7 and later] 0.010 to 10.000 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 FDS [s] FS=0.200 P051 = 40 Value of Tn, if Influencing quantity Threshold 1 (G151) 0.001s Type: O2 Online P552 Droop in the adaptation range [SW 1.7 and later] 0.0 to 10.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 FDS [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40 Value of droop, if Influencing quantity Threshold 1 (G151) 0.1% Type: O2 Online P553 Source for influencing quantity for adaptation All connector numInd: 4 P052 = 3 * bers FS=0 P051 = 40 Selection of the connector to be injected as the influencing quantity for 1 Type: L2 Offline FDS adaptation of the n controller P gain (G151) P554 * FDS (G151) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for the Influencing quantity of the Tn-adaptation [SW 1.7 and later] Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for adaptation of the n controllers integration time All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 389 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P555 * Source for the Influencing quantity of the droop adaptation [SW 1.7 and later] Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for adaptation of the n controllers droop FDS (G151) P556 FDS (G151) P557 FDS (G151) P558 FDS (G151) P559 FDS (G151) P560 FDS (G151) P561 FDS (G151) 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Adaptation of n controller P gain: Threshold 1 Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later] Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later] Adaptation of n controller P gain: Threshold 2 Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later] Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later] All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% -199.99 to 0.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS=-100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=174 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Speed controller - speed droop limitation P562 FDS (G151) P563 FDS (G151) Positive speed droop limitation Negative speed droop limitation 11.31 Input quantities for signals (see also Section 8, Sheets G187 and G188) P590 Source for setpoint of "nset = nact signal 1" * Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the set(G187) point/actual value deviation signal. P591 * (G187) P592 * (G187) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for actual value of "n-set = n-act signal 1" Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the setpoint/actual value deviation signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for actual value of "n < ncomp. signal" n < ncomp. signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < ncomp. signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. 390 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P593 * Source for actual value of "n < nmin signal" (G188) P594 * (G188) n < nmin signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < nmin signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for input quantity of "Polarity signal" Polarity signal of speed setpoint: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the polarity signal of the speed setpoint. All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=170 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=174 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS= i001: 102 i002: 0 i003: 0 i004: 0 Typ: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P595 * (G188) Source for actual value of "Overspeed signal" Overspeed signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the overspeed signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P596 * (G187) Source for setpoint of "nset = nact signal 2" [SW 1.9 and later] Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the setpoint/actual value deviation signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P597 * (G187) Source for actual value of "nset = nact signal 2" [SW 1.9 and later] Setpoint/actual value deviation signal: Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the setpoint/actual value deviation signal. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. 11.32 Configuring of closed-loop control Setting values for configuring of torque shell P600 * (G163) Source for gating unit input i001 to i004: Selects which connectors are applied as the gating unit input . All four values are added. Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 391 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P601 * Source for current controller setpoint All connector numbers 1 (G160) (G161) (G162) i001,i002 Speed limiting controller: Selection of connectors to be injected as input quantities for the speed limiting controller. Both values are added. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 6 FS= i001: 141 i002: 0 i003: 134 i004: 0 i005: 125 i006: 0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=117 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 7 FS= i001: 1 i002: 1 i003: 1 i004: 1 i005: 1 i006: 2 i007: 2 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline i003,i004 Current limitation: Selection of connectors to be injected as current controller setpoint (before current limitation). Both values are added. i005,i006 Current control: [SW 1.8 and later] Selection of which connectors are connected as the current controller setpoint (before current controller). The two values are added. The magnitude is formed from the value selected with index 6. Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P602 * (G162) P603 * (G161) Source for actual current controller value Selection of connector to be injected as current controller actual value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for variable current limit in torque direction I i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit in torque direction I Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171 i005 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque direction I with Fast Stop or Shutdown Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171 i006 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit in torque direction I Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] i007 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque direction I with Emergency Stop or Shutdown Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. 392 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P604 * Source for variable current limit in torque direction II (G161) All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 7 FS=9 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 5 FS=2 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 5 FS=9 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=148 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit in torque direction II Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172 i005 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque direction II with Fast Stop or Shutdown Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172 i006 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit in torque direction II Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] i007 Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque direction II with Emergency Stop or Shutdown Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] Settings: 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = value as set in parameter P603.ixx (-1) 10 = connector K0010 etc. P605 * (G160) Source for variable positive torque limit Torque limitation: Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable positive torque limit i001..i004 Normalization: 100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive system torque limit according to Ia=P171 i005 Normalization: 100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P606 * (G160) Source for variable negative torque limit Torque limitation: Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable negative torque limit i001..i004 Normalization: 100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative system torque limit according to Ia=P172 i005 Normalization: 100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 [can be set in SW 1.9 and later] 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = value as set in parameter P605 (-1) 10 = connector K0010 etc. P607 * BDS (G160) Source for torque setpoint for master drive Torque limitation: Selection of connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a master drive 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 393 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=191 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Speed controller P609 * (G151) Source for actual speed controller value Selection of connector to be injected as the actual speed controller value when P083=4 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Configuring of injection of acceleration value P619 * (G153) Source for acceleration injection value Selection of connector to be applied as the acceleration injection value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Speed controller Speed controller, setpoint/actual value deviation Function: The connectors selected in parameters P621 and P622 are added and those selected in P623 and 624 subtracted P620 Source for speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation All connector numInd: None * bers FS=165 Selection of connector to be injected as the control deviation 1 Type: L2 (G152) P621 * (G152) P622 * (G152) P623 * (G152) P624 * (G152) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for speed controller setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for speed controller setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for actual speed controller value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for actual speed controller value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=176 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=174 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=179 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=170 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Speed controller: Filtering of setpoint and actual value, band-stop filters P625 * FDS (G152) P626 * FDS (G152) 394 Source for speed controller setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for speed setpoint filtering 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for actual speed controller value Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for actual speed value filtering 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P627 * Source for input of D element All connector numbers 1 (G152) P628 * (G152) P629 * (G152) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=178 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for band-stop filter 1 All connector numbers Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 1 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Ind: None FS=179 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for band-stop filter 2 Ind: None FS=177 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None FS=162 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for the D element 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. All connector numbers Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 2 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Speed controller droop P630 * (G151) Source for influencing quantity for speed droop Selection of connector to be injected as the influencing quantity All connector numbers 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Setting the speed controller I component Function: When the binector selected in P695 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I component of the speed controller is set to the value of the connector selected in P631. With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I component. P631 Source for setting value for speed controller integrator All connector numInd: None P052 = 3 * bers FS=454 P051 = 40 Selection of connector to be injected as the setting value for the I compo1 Type: L2 Offline nent (G152) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Setting values for configuring the setpoint processing function and ramp-function generator Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation) (see also Section 8, Sheet G136) The effective limitations are: Upper limit: Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632 Lower limit: Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633 Note: P632 * (G137) The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative setpoint limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative value. Source for variable positive limitation at ramp-function generator All connector numInd: 4 P052 = 3 output bers FS=6 P051 = 40 1 Type: L2 Offline Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable positive limitation at the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation). 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P633 * Source for variable negative limitation at ramp-function generator output (G137) Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation at the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation). All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=9 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = value as set in parameter P632 (-1) 10 = connector K0010 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 395 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P634 * Source for limitation input at ramp-function generator output All connector numbers 1 (G137) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS= i001: 190 i002: 0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=194 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers Selection of connector to be injected as the reduction signal for the ramp- 1 function generator times i001 acts on ramp-up and ramp-down time (P303, P304) i002 acts on lower and upper transition roundings (P305, P306) i003 acts on ramp-up time (P303) i004 acts on ramp-down time (P304) i005 acts on lower transition rounding (P305) i006 acts on upper transition rounding (P306) Ind: 6 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9175 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Selection of connectors which must be added up to provide the limitation input at the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation). 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P635 * FDS (G135) P636 * (G136) Source for ramp-function generator setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the ramp-function generator setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for reduction signal for ramp-function generator times 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P637 * BDS (G136) Source for selection of "Ramp-function generator setting 2" Selection of binector to control switchover to "Ramp-function generator setting 2". With a log. "1" signal at the binector, ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (P307 - P310) is selected. This function has a higher priority than the ramp-up integrator function. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P638 * BDS (G136) Source for selection of "Ramp-function generator setting 3" Selection of binector to control switchover to "Ramp-function generator setting 3". With a log. "1" signal at the binector, ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (P311 - P314) is selected. This function has a higher priority than the ramp-up integrator function. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P639 * (G136) Source for ramp-function generator setting values Selection of connectors to be injected as the ramp-function generator setting values. i001 i002 Setting value for the ramp-function generator output when the binector selected via P640 has the log. "1" signal Setting value for the ramp-function generator output when the drive is not in the "Run" state (B0104=0) and the binector selected via P640 has the log. "0" signal 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P640 * BDS (G136) 396 Source for selection of "Set ramp-function generator" Selection of binector to control the "Set ramp-function generator" function 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P641 * Source for selection of "Bypass ramp-function generator" All binector numbers 1 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=2 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=9 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=206 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P647 * Source for enable signal for ramp-function generator tracking All binector numbers [SW 2.1 and later] 1 BDS Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function generator tracking function. Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline BDS (G136) P642 * (G135) Selection of binector to control the "Bypass ramp-function generator" function 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for variable positive limitation of main setpoint Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable positive limitation of the main setpoint. The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices is applied as the limit. Note: Negative values at the selected connectors result in a negative maximum value at the output of the limitation. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P643 * (G135) Source for variable negative limitation of main setpoint Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation of the main setpoint. The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices is applied as the limit. Note: Positive values at the selected connectors result in a positive minimum value at the output of the limitation. 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = value as set in parameter P642 (-1) 10 = connector K0010 etc. P644 * FDS (G135) P645 * FDS (G135) P646 * BDS (G135) (G136) Source for main setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as the main setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for additional setpoint Selection of connector to be injected as an additional setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for enable signal for ramp-up integrator switchover Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function integrator switchover function. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 397 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 11.33 Control word, status word Selection of sources of control words 1 and 2 P648 * BDS (G180) P649 * BDS (G181) Source for control word 1 Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 1. 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = parameters P654 to P675 are effective (every individual bit of control word 1 is input by a binector) 10 = connector K0010 etc. Source for control word 2 Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 2. 0 = connector K0000 ... 8 = connector K0008 9 = parameters P676 to P691 are effective (every individual bit of control word 2 is input by a binector) 10 = connector K0010 etc. Display of control words 1 and 2 r650 Display of control word 1 (G180) Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the status word Segment ON: Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state r651 Display of control word 2 (G181) Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the status word Segment ON: Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state Display of status words 1 and 2 r652 Display of status word 1 (G182) Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the status word Segment ON: Segment OFF: 398 Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r653 Display of status word 2 (G183) Representation on operator panel (PMU): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the status word Segment ON: Segment OFF: Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state The following parameters are used to select the binectors (some of which are gated with one another or with other signals) to be applied to the individual bits of the control word. The settings of all these parameters are as follows: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. The functions and logic operations are also shown on Sheets G180 and G181 in Section 8. Control word 1 P654 * BDS (G130) P655 * BDS (G180) P656 * BDS (G180) P657 * BDS (G180) P658 * BDS (G180) P659 * BDS (G180) P660 * BDS (G180) P661 * BDS (G180) P662 * BDS (G180) P663 * BDS (G180) P664 * BDS (G180) P665 * BDS (G180) Source for control word 1, bit0 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9358 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline rd All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline nd All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9350 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9381 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9367 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline (0=OFF1, 1=ON; ANDed with terminal 37) 1. 3rd source for control word 1, bit1 nd rd (0=OFF2; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit1) 2. 3rd source for control word 1, bit1 (0=OFF2; ANDed with 1st and 3rd sources for bit1) 3. 3rd source for control word 1, bit1 st nd (0=OFF2; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit1) 1. 3rd source for control word 1, bit2 nd rd (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit2) 2. 3rd source for control word 1, bit2 st (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 3 sources for bit2) 3. 3rd source for control word 1, bit2 st (0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit2) Source for control word 1, bit3 (0=pulse disable, 1=enable; ANDed with terminal 38) Source for control word 1, bit4 (0=set ramp-function generator to zero, 1=enable ramp-function generator) Source for control word 1, bit5 (0=ramp-function generator stop, 1=ramp-function generator start) Source for control word 1, bit6 (0=enable setpoint, 1=disable setpoint) 1. 3rd source for control word 1, bit7 nd rd (01 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 2 and 3 sources for bit7) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 399 Parameter list PNU Description P666 * BDS (G180) P667 * BDS (G180) P668 * BDS (G180) P669 * BDS (G180) P671 * BDS (G180) P672 * BDS (G180) P673 * BDS (G180) P674 * BDS (G180) P675 * BDS (G180) 2. 3rd source for control word 1, bit7 03.2015 Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline st rd All binector numbers 1 st nd All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline (01 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 1 and 3 sources for bit7) 3. 3rd source for control word 1, bit7 (01 transition=acknowledge; ORed with 1 and 2 sources for bit7) Source for control word 1, bit8 (1=inching bit0) Source for control word 1, bit9 (1=inching bit1) Source for control word 1, bit11 (0=pos. direction of rotation disabled, 1=pos. direction of rotation enabled) Source for control word 1, bit12 (0= neg. direction of rotation disabled, 1= neg. direction of rotation enabled) Source for control word 1, bit13 (1=raise motorized potentiometer) Source for control word 1, bit14 (1=lower motorized potentiometer) Source for control word 1, bit15 (0=external fault, 1=no external fault) Control word 2 P676 * BDS (G181) P677 * BDS (G181) P680 * BDS (G181) P681 * BDS (G181) P684 * BDS (G181) P685 * BDS (G181) P686 * BDS (G181) P687 * BDS (G181) 400 Source for control word 2, bit16 (select function data set bit 0) Source for control word 2, bit17 (select function data set bit 1) Source for control word 2, bit20 (select fixed setpoint 0) Source for control word 2, bit21 (select fixed setpoint 1) Source for control word 2, bit24 (0=n controller speed droop disabled, 1=enabled) Source for control word 2, bit25 (0=n controller disabled, 1=n controller enabled) Source for control word 2, bit26 (0=external fault 2, 1=no external fault 2) Source for control word 2, bit27 (0=master drive, speed control, 1=slave drive, torque control) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P688 * Source for control word 2, bit28 All binector numbers 1 BDS (G181) P689 * BDS (G181) P690 * (G181) P691 * BDS (G181) (0=external alarm 1, 1=no external alarm 1) Source for control word 2, bit29 (0=external alarm 2, 1=no external alarm 2) Source for control word 2, bit30 (0=select Bico data set 1, 1=select Bico data set 2) Source for control word 2, Bit31 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9361 i002: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers 1 Main contactor checkback signal: (0 = main contactor dropped out, 1 = main contactor picked up) This control input is intended as a means of looping an auxiliary contact of the main contactor into the device control. During the Power ON routine, this signal must switch to "1" within the time period set in P095. If it does not, or it disappears during operation, fault message F004 with fault value 6 is activated. P691 = 0: Bit 31 of control word 2 is inoperative. (This setting of P691 is always active, regardless of whether control word 2 is input in word mode [P649 <> 9] or bit mode [P649 = 9]) P691 = 1: Bit 31 of control word 2 is inoperative. (This setting of P691 is active only when control word 2 is input in bit mode, i.e. when P649 = 9) P691 >= 2: The function of bit 31 of control word 2 has an effect in the case of P649=9. 11.34 Further configuring measures P694 * Source for selection of enabling command for "Torque limit switchover" BDS Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the "Torque limit switchover" function (1=enable, see also P180 to P183) (G160) P695 * BDS (G152) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for selection of "Set speed controller I component" function Selection of binector to control the "Set I component" function 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. When the binector selected in P695 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I component of the speed controller is set to the value of the connector selected in P631. With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I component. P696 * BDS (G152) Source for selection of "Stop speed controller I component" function Selection of binector to control the "Stop I component" function 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. When the binector selected in P696 changes to the log. "1" state, the I component of the speed controller is stopped. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 401 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P697 * Source for selection of enabling of dv/dt injection All binector numbers 1 BDS (G153) Selection of binector to control enabling of dv/dt injection (state "1" = enable) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P698 * Source for selection of enabling command for speed-dependent speed controller PI / P function switchover BDS Selection of binector to control enabling of the speed-dependent PI / P controller switchover function (see also P222 (G152) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 All binector numbers 1 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.35 Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs) (see also Section 8, Sheets G113 and G114) Analog input terminals 4 / 5 (main setpoint) P700 * (G113) Signal type of "Main setpoint" analog input 0 = Voltage input 0 to 10 V 1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA 2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA P701 Normalization of "Main setpoint" analog input FDS This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (G113) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: Y X .. Input voltage in volts P701 [%] = 10 V X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X With a current input: Y X .. Input current in mA P701 [%] = 20 mA X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X P702 Offset for "Main setpoint" analog input (G113) P703 * Mode of signal injection at "Main setpoint" analog input (G113) P704 * (G113) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main setpoint" analog input Selected binector in "1" state = sign reversal Filtering time for "Main setpoint" analog input (G113) P706 * Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard 402 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P705 (G113) 0 to 2 1 Source for enabling of "Main setpoint" analog input Selected binector in "1" state = enabled 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P707 * Resolution of "Main setpoint" analog input 11 to 14 [Bit] 1 bit (G113) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=12 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Offset for "Analog selectable input 1" -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 1" 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline The voltage applied to the analog input is converted to a digital value (A/D conversion) for further processing. The method used calculates an average value of the input voltage over a specific measuring time. The A/D conversion process produces a scale for the voltage range of 0 to 10V, the number of steps (divisions) along this scale can be set in P707 (i.e. the smallest possible differentiable change in the input voltage (quantization) can be set in this parameter). The number of scale steps or intervals is referred to as "Resolution". The resolution is normally specified in bits: 11 bits means 2 * 2048 scale divisions 12 bits means 2 * 4096 scale divisions 13 bits means 2 * 8192 scale divisions 14 bits means 2 * 16384 scale divisions The following applies: The higher the resolution, the longer the averaging time and thus also the delay period between the application of an analog step change and the earliest possible moment of availability of the digital value for further processing. For this reason, it is important to find a compromise between the resolution and delay period. Param. value Resolution better than Quantization Delay period 11 12 13 14 11 bits 12 bits 13 bits 14 bits 4.4 mV 2.2 mV 1.1 mV 0.56 mV 0.53 ms 0.95 ms 1.81 ms 3.51 ms If the analog input is operating as a current input (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA), the above applies analogously. Analog input terminals 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1) P710 * (G113) Signal type of "Analog selectable input 1" 0 = Voltage input 0 to 10 V 1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA 2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA P711 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 1" FDS This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (G113) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: Y P711 [%] = 10 V X With a current input: P711 [%] = 20 mA P712 X .. Input voltage in volts Y .. % value which is generated for input current X Y X X .. Input current in mA Y .. % value which is generated for input current X (G113) P713 * (G113) P714 * (G113) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 1" Selected binector in "1" state = sign reversal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 403 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P715 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 1" (G113) P716 * Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms All binector numbers 1 (G113) P717 * (G113) Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 1" Selected binector in "1" state = enabled No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 10 to 14 [Bit] 1 bit Ind: None FS=12 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Resolution of "Analog selectable input 1" See P707 Analog input terminals 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2) P721 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 2" FDS This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (G114) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: Y X .. Input voltage in volts P721 [%] = 10 V X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X With a current input: Y X .. Input current in mA P721 [%] = 20 mA X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X P722 Offset for "Analog selectable input 2" (G114) P723 * Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 2" (G114) P724 * (G114) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 2" Selected binector in "1" state = sign reversal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P725 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 2" (G114) P726 * Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard (G114) 404 Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 2" Selected binector in "1" state = enabled 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -270.00 to 270.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: 4 FS=60.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Analog input terminals 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3) P731 Normalization of "Analog selectable input 3" FDS This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (G114) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: Y X .. Input voltage in volts P731 [%] = 10 V X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X With a current input: Y X .. Input current in mA P731 [%] = 20 mA X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X P732 Offset for "Analog selectable input 3" (G114) P733 * Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 3" (G114) P734 * (G114) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 3" Selected binector in "1" state = sign reversal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P735 Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 3" (G114) P736 * Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard (G114) Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 3" Selected binector in "1" state = enabled 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Analog input terminals 103 / 104 (main actual value) P741 Normalization for "Main actual value" FDS (G113) Rated value of input voltage at nmax (=tachometer voltage at maximum speed) This parameter defines the maximum speed when P083=1. P742 Offset for "Main actual value" analog input (G113) P743 * Mode of signal injection at "Main actual value" analog input (G113) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted P744 * Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main actual value" analog input (G113) Selected binector in "1" state = sign reversal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P745 Filtering time for "Main actual value" analog input (G113) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 405 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P746 * Source for enabling of "Main actual value" analog input All binector numbers 1 (G113) Selected binector in "1" state = enabled No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=170 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.36 Analog outputs (see also Section 8, Sheets G115 and G116) Analog output terminals 12 / 13 (actual current display) P749 * Control word for terminal 12 (actual current display) 0 Output with correct sign (positive voltage: Current in torque direction MI) (negative voltage: Current in torque direction MII) 1 Output of absolute value (positive voltage only) 2 Output with sign, inverted (positive voltage: Current in torque direction MII) (negative voltage: Current in torque direction MI) 3 Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only) (G115) Analog output, terminal 14 / 15 P750 * (G115) P751 * (G115) Source for output value at analog output 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Mode of signal injection at analog output 1 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted P752 Filtering time for analog output 1 (G115) P753 Normalization of analog output 1 (G115) y [V ] = x P753 100 % x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) P754 Offset for analog output 1 (G115) Analog output, terminal 16 / 17 P755 * (G115) P756 * (G115) P757 (G115) 406 Source for output value at analog output 2 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Mode of signal injection at analog output 2 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Filtering time for analog output 2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P758 Normalization of analog output 2 (G115) y [V ] = x P758 100 % -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) P759 Offset for analog output 2 (G115) Analog output, terminal 18 / 19 P760 * (G116) P761 * (G116) Source for output value at analog output 3 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Mode of signal injection at analog output 3 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted P762 Filtering time for analog output 3 (G116) P763 Normalization of analog output 3 (G116) y [V ] = x P763 100 % x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) P764 Offset for analog output 3 (G116) Analog output, terminal 20 / 21 P765 * (G116) P766 * (G116) Source for output value at analog output 4 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Mode of signal injection at analog output 4 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted P767 Filtering time for analog output 4 (G116) P768 Normalization of analog output 4 (G116) y [V ] = x P768 100 % x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) P769 Offset for analog output 4 (G116) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 407 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=252 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: None FS=2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.37 Binary outputs (see also Section 8, Sheet G112) P770 Control word for binary selectable outputs * i001: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is not inverted 1 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is inverted (G112) i002: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is not inverted 1 P771 * (G112) Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is inverted i003: 0 1 Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is not inverted Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is inverted i004: 0 1 Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is not inverted Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is inverted Source for output value at binary output terminal 46 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P772 * Source for output value at binary output terminal 48 P773 * Source for output value at binary output terminal 50 (G112) P774 * (G112) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for output value at binary output terminal 52 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P775 Delay for output value at binary output 1 (G112) The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched through to the output) P776 Delay for output value at binary output 2 (G112) The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched through to the output) P777 Delay for output value at binary output 3 (G112) The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched through to the output) P778 Delay for output value at binary output 4 (G112) The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched through to the output) 11.38 Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter G-SST 1 (RS485 / RS232 on X300) (see also Section 8, Sheet G170 and Section 9) P780 * (G170) 408 Selection of protocol for G-SST1 basic converter interface 0 2 8 9 Setting has no function USS protocol for factory purposes For internal factory test purposes 0, 2, 8, 9 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P781 * (G170) Number of process data for G-SST1 0 to 16 1 When P790 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=2 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0, 3, 4, 127 1 Ind: None FS=127 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 13 1 Ind: None FS=6 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 16 FS= i001: 32 i002: 167 i003: 0 i004: 33 i005-i016: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 30 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline When USS protocol (P780=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements 0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol 1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number applies to transmission and receipt) The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at connectors (K2001 to K2016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at binectors for "internal wiring" purposes. The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected in parameters P784.01 to P784.16. P782 * (G170) Length of parameter jobs for G-SST1 This parameter is functional only when P780=2 (USS protocol). 0 3, 4 127 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol. 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3 or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of parameter values). Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length P783 * (G170) Baud rate for G-SST1 P784 * (G170) Source for transmit data for G-SST1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 56700 baud 93750 baud 187500 baud Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data to the USS master via USS interface 1. i001: i002: ... i016: Selection for word 1 Selection for word 2 Selection for word 16 Applicable settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P785 (G170) Options for G-SST1 i001: i002: P786 * (G170) 0 = Bus terminator OFF 1 = Bus terminator ON 0 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does not function as "Control by PLC". 1 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does function as "Control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1st receive word, as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors K2001 to K2016, or to binectors B2100 to B2915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. USS bus address for G-SST1 This parameter is functional only when P780=2 (USS protocol). Address via which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 409 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P787 Telegram failure time for G-SST1 (G170) The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P780=2 (USS protocol) is selected. 0.000 to 65.000 [s] 0.001s No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None FS=2030 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.000 No time monitoring 0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message is activated. Fault message F011 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this time period. Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). P788 * (G170) Source for triggering of message F011 2030, 2031 Selection of binector which must trigger message F011 when it switches to log. "1" 2030 = binector B2030 2031 = binector B2031 r789 (G170) Diagnostic information for G-SST1 Free-running counter, overflow at 65535 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: Number of error-free telegrams Number of errored telegrams: Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error Number of byte frame errors Number of overrun errors Parity error STX error: Start interval before STX not observed, telegram residual transfer time not observed, delay time of LGE character too long, erroneous STX, i.e. 02 Violation of telegram residual transfer time Block check error Incorrect telegram length: With P782=3 or 4 only: The length of the received telegram is P781 + P782 (Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed even when this error has been detected) Timeout error: No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the setting in P787. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is received. G-SST 2 (RS485 on X172) (see also Section 8, Sheets G171 and G173 and Section 9) P790 * (G171) (G173) 410 Selection of protocol for G-SST2 basic converter interface 0 2 5 6 9 Setting has no function USS protocol "Peer-to-peer" communication For internal factory test purposes For internal factory test purposes 0, 2, 5, 6, 9 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P791 * (G171) (G173) Number of process data for G-SST2 0 to 16 1 When P790 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=2 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0, 3, 4, 127 1 Ind: None FS=127 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 13 1 Ind: None FS=6 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 16 FS= i001: 32 i002: 167 i003: 0 i004: 33 i005-i016: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements 0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol 1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number applies to transmission and receipt) The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at binectors for "internal wiring" purposes. The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected in parameters P794.01 to P794.16. When peer-to-peer (P790= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words 0 Illegal setting 1...5 Number of transferred words 6...16 Illegal setting P792 * (G171) Length of parameter jobs for G-SST2 This parameter is functional only when P790=2 (USS protocol). 0 3, 4 127 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol. 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3 or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of parameter values). Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length P793 * (G171) (G173) Baud rate for G-SST2 P794 * (G171) (G173) Source for transmit data for G-SST2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 56700 baud 93750 baud 187500 baud Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic converter interface 3 When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: i001: i002: ... i016: Selection for word 1 Selection for word 2 Selection for word 16 When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected: i001: i002: ... i005: Selection for word 1 Selection for word 2 i006: ... i016: Not in use Selection for word 5 Not in use Applicable settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 411 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P795 Options for G-SST2 0 to 1 1 (G171) (G173) i001: i002: 0 = Bus terminator OFF 1 = Bus terminator ON 0 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does not function as "Control by PLC". 1 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does function as "Control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1st receive word, as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors K6001 to K6016, or to binectors B6100 to B6915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values P796 * (G171) USS bus address for G-SST2 P797 Telegram failure time for G-SST2 (G171) (G173) The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P790=2 (USS protocol) or P790=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected. This parameter is functional only when P790=2 (USS protocol). Address via which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 30 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.000 to 65.000 [s] 0.001s Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 6030, 6031 Ind: None FS=6030 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.000 No time monitoring 0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message is activated. Fault message F012 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this time period. Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the following minimum setting values for P797 are recommended: Baud rate as set in P793: 300 600 1200 2400 4800 baud baud baud baud baud Recommended minimum value for P797: 0.520s 0.260s 0.140s 0.080s 0.040s Note: If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P797>P086 (on the communication partner) is meaningful. P798 * (G171) (G173) Source for triggering of message F012 Selection of binector which must trigger message F012 when it switches to log. "1" 6030 = binector B6030 6031 = binector B6031 412 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description r799 Diagnostic information for G-SST2 (G171) (G173) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 10 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 0, 2, 5, 9 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 16 1 Ind: None FS=2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0, 3, 4, 127 1 Ind: None FS=127 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Free-running counter, overflow at 65535 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: Number of error-free telegrams Number of errored telegrams: Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error Number of byte frame errors Number of overrun errors Parity error STX error: Start interval before STX not observed, telegram residual transfer time not observed, delay time of LGE character too long, erroneous STX, i.e. 02 Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only) Block check error Incorrect telegram length: With P792=3 or 4 only: The length of the received telegram is P791 + P792 (Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed even when this error has been detected) Timeout error: No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the setting in P797. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is received. G-SST 3 (RS485 on X162) (see also Section 8, Sheets G172 and G174 and Section 9) P800 * (G172) (G174) Selection of protocol for G-SST3 basic converter interface P801 * (G172) (G174) Number of process data for G-SST3 0 2 5 9 Setting has no function USS protocol "Peer-to-peer" communication For internal factory test purposes When P800 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements 0 No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol 1...16 Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number applies to transmission and receipt) The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at binectors for "internal wiring" purposes. The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected in parameters P804.01 to P804.16. When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected: Number of transferred words 0 Illegal setting 1...5 Number of transferred words 6...16 Illegal setting P802 * (G172) Length of parameter jobs for G-SST3 This parameter is functional only when P800=2 (USS protocol). 0 3, 4 127 No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol. 3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3 or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of parameter values). Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 413 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P803 * (G172) (G174) Baud rate for G-SST3 1 to 13 1 P804 * (G172) (G174) Source for transmit data for G-SST3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 2400 baud 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 38400 baud 56700 baud 93750 baud 187500 baud Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic converter interface 3 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=13 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 16 FS= i001: 32 i002: 167 i003: 0 i004: 33 i005-i016: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 30 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: i001: i002: ... i016: Selection for word 1 Selection for word 2 Selection for word 16 When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected: i001: i002: ... i005: Selection for word 1 Selection for word 2 i006: ... i016: Not in use Selection for word 5 Not in use Applicable settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. P805 (G172) (G174) P806 * (G172) 414 Options for G-SST3 i001: i002: 0 = Bus terminator OFF 1 = Bus terminator ON 0 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does not function as "Control by PLC". 1 = Bit 10 of the 1st receive word does function as "Control by PLC", i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1st receive word, as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors K9001 to K9016, or to binectors B9100 to B9915. All these connectors and binectors retain their old values. USS bus address for G-SST3 This parameter is functional only when P800=2 (USS protocol). Address via which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps P807 Telegram failure time for G-SST3 0.000 to 65.000 [s] 0.001s (G172) (G174) The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P800=2 (USS protocol) or P800=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None FS=9030 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0.000 No time monitoring 0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message is activated. Fault message F013 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this time period. Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the following minimum setting values for P807 are recommended: Baud rate as set in P803: 300 600 1200 2400 4800 baud baud baud baud baud Recommended minimum value for P807: 0.520s 0.260s 0.140s 0.080s 0.040s Note: If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P807>P086 (on the communication partner) is meaningful. P808 * (G172) (G174) Source for triggering of message F013 Selection of binector which must trigger message F013 when it switches to log. "1" 9030, 9031 9030 = binector B9030 9031 = binector B9031 r809 Diagnostic information for G-SST3 Free-running counter, overflow at 65535 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: Number of error-free telegrams Number of errored telegrams: Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error Number of byte frame errors Number of overrun errors Parity error STX error: Start interval before STX not observed, telegram residual transfer time not observed, delay time of LGE character too long, erroneous STX, i.e. 02 Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only) Block check error Incorrect telegram length: With PP802=3 or 4 only: The length of the received telegram is P801 + P802 (Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed even when this error has been detected) Timeout error: No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the setting in P807. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is received. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 415 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r810 Receive data on G-SST1 0000 to FFFF H 1 (G170) r811 (G170) r812 (G171) (G173) Display of data received via USS interface 1 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Ind: 20 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 20 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 20 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 Transmit data on G-SST1 Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 1 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 20 Type: L2 Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 Receive data on G-SST2 When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Display of data received via USS interface 2 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected: Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 2 i001: ... i005 i006: ... i020 r813 (G171) (G173) Receive data word 1 Receive data word 5 Not in use Not in use Transmit data on G-SST2 When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 2 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected: Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 2 i001: ... i005 i006: ... i020 416 Transmit data word 1 Transmit data word 5 Not in use Not in use SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r814 Receive data on G-SST3 (G172) (G174) When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: 0000 to FFFF H 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 20 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 0000 to FFFF H 1 Ind: 20 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Display of data received via USS interface 3 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected: Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 3 i001: ... i005 i006: ... i020 r815 (G172) (G174) Receive data word 1 Receive data word 5 Not in use Not in use Transmit data on G-SST3 When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 3 i001: ... i016 i017: ... i020: Display process data word 1 Display process data word 16 Display parameter data word 1 Display parameter data word 4 When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected: Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 3 i001: ... i005 i006: ... i020 Transmit data word 1 Transmit data word 5 Not in use Not in use Peer-to-peer interfaces: Enable transmission and receipt of telegrams: If transmission on a peer-to-peer interface is disabled, the associated output drivers are connected to high impedance. If reception is disabled on a peer-to-peer interface, then the telegram failure monitoring function is deactivated. P816 * (G173) Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data reception enabling command P817 * Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data transmission enabling command (G173) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P818 * (G174) Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data reception enabling command P819 * (G174) Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data transmission enabling command 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 417 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.39 Deactivation of monitoring functions WARNING If monitoring functions are deactivated, there may be a risk to the safety of operating personnel or of substantial property damage if a fault or error actually occurs! P820 * Deactivation of fault messages P821 * Deactivation of alarms The numbers of all fault messages to be deactivated must be entered in this parameter. Fault numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be entered for any unused indices of the parameter. The numbers of all alarm messages to be deactivated must be entered in this parameter. Alarm numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be entered for any unused indices of the parameter. 0 to 147 1 Ind: 99 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 147 1 Ind: 99 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 -100 to 100 * 1.333 [s] 1.333s Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 3 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 16 Type: O2 P052 = 3 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 68 Type: O2 P052 = 3 11.40 Compensation values r824 A7006 compensation values These data contain compensation values for the analog section of electronics board A7006 P826 Correction of natural commutation timing (G163) If there is a variation in the current peak value (in spite of a constant firing angle), it can be corrected by offsetting the firing angle reference time of the appropriate line phase in parameter P826. One line phase (UV, UW, VW, VU, WU, WV) is assigned to each parameter index (i001 to i006). Increasing the parameter setting by a value of 1 corresponds to an increase of 1.333 s in the firing angle (0.024 degrees at 50Hz line frequency), consequently reducing the current peak in the appropriate line phase. Caution: Even an asymmetrical system causes variations in the magnitude of current peaks. However, the system asymmetry may also change. r827 Internal diagnosis i001: i002: i003: r828 Number of write access operations to EEPROM Number of Page-Write access operations to EEPROM Counter for DUAL-PORT RAM timeouts MLFB data These data contain details about the power section design (model) r829 A7001 compensation values These data contain compensation values for the analog section of electronics board A7001 11.41 Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S P831 to r849 r850 to P899 418 Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor P052 = 3 These parameters are settings for the data exchange between DriveMonitor and the SIMOTRAS converter. They must not be changed! Parameters for the OP1S P052 = 3 These parameters are settings for the data exchange between OP1S and the SIMOTRAS converter. They must not be changed! SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 200 1 Ind: 2 FS=3 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 127 1 Ind: None FS=6 Type: V2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.42 Profile parameters P918 (Z110) (Z111) P927 * (G170) (G171) (G172) (Z110) (Z111) CB bus address Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards Note: The validity of the bus address is monitored by the communication board. (Bus addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for Master stations on PROFIBUS boards and must not therefore be set for other purposes). If the value is not accepted by the COM BOARD, fault F080 is displayed with fault value 5 Parameterization enable Enabling of interfaces for parameterization. A parameter value can only be altered via an enabled interface. 0: 1: 2: 4: 8: 16: 32: 64: None Communications board (CB) Parameterizing unit (PMU) G-SST1 serial interface and OP1S Reserved Technology board (TB) G-SST2 serial interface G-SST3 serial interface Setting information: Every interface has a numeric code. The number for one specific interface, or the sum of various numbers assigned to several interfaces, must be entered in this parameter in order to enable the relevant interface(s) for use as a parameterization interface. Example: Factory setting value 6 (=4+2) means that the PMU and G-SST1 interfaces are enabled for parameterization purposes. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 419 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 64 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 64 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 11.43 Fault memory, alarm parameters r947 (G189) Fault memory Display of fault messages generated in response to 8 recent faults. A fault value and fault time is assigned to each fault number (see Section 10 for details of fault numbers and fault values). The interrelationship between the associated parameters is shown in the diagram below. The fault numbers of the last (maximum 8) fault events are stored under the indices of parameter P947. r947.001 displays the fault number of the current (still not acknowledged) fault, index 9 displays the number of the most recent acknowledged fault, index 17 the fault number of the second most recent acknowledged fault, etc. An entry of "0" means that no "earlier" fault has occurred. Since only one fault message can be stored with respect to any fault event on the SIMOTRAS 6SG70, only indices 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49 and 57 are relevant. A fault value is assigned to each fault number in the corresponding index of parameter r949. This provides further information about the nature of the fault. In addition, the fault time (the current reading of the hours run counter as the fault occurred (r048)), is stored for each fault in r049. The data for the current (not yet acknowledged) fault are stored as the "Hours run counter reading" in index 1. The data for earlier, already acknowledged faults are stored under the following indices. r947 Fault number Index 1 Index 9 Index 17 r949 (G189) r951 420 r949 Fault value current Index 1 0 0 1st ack'ed Index 2 0 0 2nd ack'ed Index 3 0 0 3rd ack'ed Index 4 0 0 4th ack'ed Index 5 0 0 5th ack'ed Index 6 0 0 6th ack'ed Index 7 0 0 7th ack'ed Index 8 current 1st ack'ed current r049 Fault time [h] 1st ack'ed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2nd ack'ed 2nd ack'ed ... ... Plaintext information about the fault numbers is available under the corresponding index of parameter r951. Fault value Fault value of faults, allows more detailed diagnosis for a variety of parameters. The fault values are stored in the same indices as the associated fault numbers (r947) - see parameter r947. Fault text 0 to 65535 1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r952 Number of faults 0 to 65535 1 Settings: 0 Deletes the entire fault memory (r947, r949 and r049) by resetting to 0 Note: P952 cannot be reset while a fault is pending >0 Display of the faults stored in the fault memory (r947, r949 and r049) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 11.44 Visualization parameters: Alarms r953 Alarm parameter 1 Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A001 to A016). If one of the alarms between 1 and 16 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. 16 15 8 7 14 13 12 11 10 9 6 5 4 3 2 1 See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms r954 Alarm parameter 2 Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A017 to A032). If one of the alarms between 17 and 32 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms r955 Alarm parameter 3 Parameter alarms 3 If one of the alarms between 33 and 48 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. r956 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 Alarm parameter 4 Parameter alarms 4 If one of the alarms between 49 and 64 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. r957 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Alarm parameter 5 Parameter alarms 5 If one of the alarms between 65 and 80 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 421 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description r958 Alarm parameter 6 Value range [Unit] Steps Parameter alarms 6 (CB alarms) If one of the alarms between 81 and 96 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. r959 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Alarm parameter 7 Parameter alarms 7 (TB alarms 1) If one of the alarms between 97 and 112 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: 6 Typ: O2 P052 = 1 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 r960 98 97 Alarm parameter 8 Parameter alarms 8 (TB alarms 2) If one of the alarms between 113 and 128 is generated, the corresponding segment in the display lights up. 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 11.45 Device identification r964 Parameters for device identification on the PROFIBUS [SW 2.0 and later] 0 to 65535 1 Display parameters to support overview and diagnosis of all nodes on the PROFIBUS-DP during and after commissioning (coding according to PROFIBUS profile V3) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Display of the manufacturer of the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70: SIEMENS = 42 Display of device type: SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 = 4120 Display of the software version of the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 (see r060.001) Display of year of generation of the software of the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70: y y y y (see r061.001) Display of the month and day of generation of the software of the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70: d d m m (see r061.003 and r061.002) Display of the controlled axes of the SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70: 1 11.46 Visualization parameters: Control and status word r967 Display of control word 1 Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0-15) Identical to r650 (control word 1) r968 Display of status word 1 Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15) Identical to r652 (status word 1) 422 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 11.47 Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters P970 * Restore factory setting Reset parameters to factory setting (default) 0: 1: Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original values (factory setting). The parameter is then set automatically to 1. No parameter reset Note: Function can also be selected by setting P051=21. P971 * EEPROM transfer r980 List of existing parameter numbers, start Transfer of parameter values from RAM to EERPROM on switchover from 0 to 1. It takes approximately 15s to process all values. The PMU remains in value mode for this period. Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence. Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further parameter numbers in the 0 to 999 range. The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under index 101. See also r989 r981 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r982 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r983 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r984 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r985 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r986 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r987 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r988 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation See r980. r989 List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note 860 = r860 (TECH BOARD installed) 2980 = n980 See also r980. r990 List of modified parameter numbers, start Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence. Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further modified parameters in the 0 to 999 range. The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under index 101. See also r999. r991 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 423 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps r992 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r993 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r994 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r995 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r996 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r997 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r998 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation See r990. r999 List of modified parameter numbers, continuation Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note 2990 = n990 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 101 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 See also r990. 11.48 Password protection, key/lock mechanism Key/lock mechanism To prevent unintended parameterization of the devices and to protect the know-how stored in the parameterization, you can restrict access to the (basic converter) parameters and define your own passwords (=pairs of numbers that you can choose). This done in parameters: * U005 key and * U006 lock. If U005 and U006 are parameterized differently, it is only possible to access the following parameters: * All visualization parameters (rxxx, nxxx) * All parameters that can be changed with P051 = 0 (See parameter list) * All "user parameters" (see Parameter U007) All other parameters neither be read nor altered. Only when U005 and U006 are parameterized to the same values, are these restrictions removed again. When using the key-lock-mechanism you should follow this procedure: 1. Program the den lock parameter U006 in both parameter indices with your specific password. 2. Set Parameter P051 to the value 0. This activates the password you have just set (in U006). After that, P051 can be set to 40 again and the password protection remains active. Examples: Lock Key Result U006.1 = 0 (factory setting) U006.2 = 0 U005.1 = 0 (factory setting) U005.2 = 0 The key and lock are parameterized identically, all parameters are accessible U006.1 = 12345 U006.2 = 54321 U005.1 = 0 U005.2 = 0 The key and lock are parameterized differently, only the visualization parameters, the parameters that can be altered with P051=0, and the "user parameters" are accessible U006.1 = 12345 U006.2 = 54321 U005.1 = 12345 U005.2 = 54321 The key and lock are parameterized identically, all parameters are accessible NOTE: If you forget or lose your password, you can only regain access to all parameters by restoring the factory setting (P051=21). U005 (2005) * Key U006 (2006) * Lock 424 [SW 1.7 and later] Parameter for entering the keys for the key/lock mechanism [SW 1.7 and later] Parameter for entering the password for the key/lock mechanism 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 0 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U007 (2007) * Numbers of the user parameters [SW 1.7 and later] Parameters for entering the numbers of those parameters that are to be accessible if the key and lock are set differently. NOTE: 0 to 999 2000 to 2005 2008 to 2999 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 100 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 6 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Parameters U000 to U999 must be entered as 2000 to 2999 11.49 Processor utilization n009 (2009) Processor utilization This parameter is particularly relevant as regards the selection of function blocks of technology software in the basic unit (option S00) and the definition of the time slices in which these function blocks are processed (see also Section 8, Function Diagram B101 and parameters U950 to U952). i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Current total processor utilization (=K9990) Extrapolated total processor utilization for line frequency = 65Hz (=K9991) Current total processor utilization by programs in time slice 10 (=K9992) Current total processor utilization by programs in time slice 4 (=K9993) Current total processor utilization by programs in time slice 2 (=K9994) Current total processor utilization by programs in time slice 1 (=K9995) 11.50 Display parameters for technology functions with S00 Connector/binector converters n010 (2010) S00 Connector/binector converter 1 (bit field 1) S00 (B120) n012 (2012) S00 (B120) Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 FB 11 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 FB 12 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 FB 13 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment display (B120) n011 (2011) FB 10 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Segment ON: Bit (binector) = log. "1" state Segment OFF: Bit (binector) = log. "0" state Connector/binector converter 2 (bit field 2) As for n010 Connector/binector converter 3 (bit field 3) As for n010 Binector/connector converters n013 (2013) S00 Binector/connector converter 1 (bit field 4) Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment display (B121) n014 (2014) S00 (B121) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Segment ON: Bit = log. "1" state Segment OFF: Bit = log. "0" state Binector/connector converter 2 (bit field 5) As for n013 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 FB 14 425 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description n015 (2015) Binector/connector converter 3 (bit field 6) S00 (B121) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 FB 15 As for n013 Technology controller n016 (2016) S00 (B170) n017 (2017) S00 (B170) n018 (2018) S00 (B170) n019 (2019) Actual value display FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Setpoint display FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Display of effective Kp factor FB 260 0.00 to 30.00 0.01 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Display of technology controller output FB 260 -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Display of actual speed FB 261 -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Display of actual velocity FB 261 -32768 to 32767 [m/s] 0.001 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Display of setpoint velocity FB 261 -32768 to 32767 [m/s] 0.001 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 Display of setpoint speed FB 261 -200.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 -32768 to 32767 [rpm] 1 Ind: 2 Type: I2 P052 = 2 S00 (B170) Velocity/speed calculator n020 (2020) S00 (B190) n021 (2021) S00 (B190) n022 (2022) S00 (B190) n023 (2023) S00 (B190) 11.51 Miscellaneous n024 (2024) (G145) (Z120) U040 U041 (2040) (2041) 426 Display of the speed actual value in rpm i001: i002: [SW 2.0 and later] Display of the speed actual value from the pulse generator input of basic device X173 Display of speed actual value from tacho module SBP Reserved for later use [SW 2.0 and later] P052 = 3 These parameters must not be changed by the user! SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description n042 Warning memory (2042) Warning memory for flagging warnings that have occurred since the electronics supply voltage was last switched on. The contents of the warning memory are lost when the electronics supply voltage is switched off and can be deleted with U043. Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 8 Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 2 0 to 1 1 Ind: none FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 5 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online -32768 to 32767 1 Ind:5 Type: I2 P052 = 3 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 5 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online 0000h to FFFFh 1 Ind:5 Type: L2 P052 = 3 [SW 2.0 and later] The warnings are displayed in bit code as for r953 to r960 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: Display of warnings 1 to 16 Display of warnings 17 to 32 Display of warnings 33 to 48 Display of warnings 49 to 64 Display of warnings 65 to 80 Display of warnings 81 to 96 Display of warnings 97 to 112 Display of warnings 113 to 128 See Section 10.2 for the meaning of the individual warnings U043 * (2043) U044 (2044) * (G121) n045 (2045) (G121) U046 (2046) * (G121) n047 (2047) (G121) Deleting the warning memory [SW 2.0 and later] Settings: 0 Deletes the entire warning memory n042 by resetting it to 0. Subsequently the parameter is automatically set back to value 1. 1 Not active Connector display, decimal [SW 2.0 and later] Selects those connectors whose value is to be displayed as a decimal with n045 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.01 Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.02 Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.03 Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.04 Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.05 Connector display, decimal [SW 2.0 and later] Decimal display with sign of the values of the connectors selected with U044. In the case of double-word connectors the H word is displayed. i001: Display of the connector selected with U044.01 i002: Display of the connector selected with U044.02 i003: Display of the connector selected with U044.03 i004: Display of the connector selected with U044.04 i005: Display of the connector selected with U044.05 Connector display, hexadecimal [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of connectors whose value is to be displayed as a hexadecimal value with n047l i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.01 Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.02 Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.03 Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.04 Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.05 Connector display, hexadecimal [SW 2.0 and later] Hexadecimal display of values of connectors selected with U046. In the case of double-word connectors the H word is displayed. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: Display of the connector selected with U046.01 Display of the connector selected with U046.02 Display of the connector selected with U046.03 Display of the connector selected with U046.04 Display of the connector selected with U046.05 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 427 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U049 OP1S operating display (2049) Function parameter for selecting parameters whose values must be included in the operating display of the optional OP1S convenience operator panel. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.9 and later] No. indices Factory setting Type Ind:5 FS= i001: 19 i002: 38 i003: 25 i004: 28 i005: 59 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 100 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS= i001: 9580 i002: 0 i003: 0 i004: 0 i005: 0 i006: 0 i007: 0 i008: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3999 1 1st line on left 1st line on right 2nd line (actual value), visualization parameter only 3rd line (setpoint) 4th line Connector type converters 2 connectors are converted into one double word connector. U098 Operands for 1st connector type converter (result = KK9498) FB 298 Operands for 2nd connector type converter (result = KK9499) FB 299 (2098) * [SW 1.9 and later] S00 i001: Source for the low word of output connector KK9498 i002: Source for the high word of output connector KK9498 (B151) i003: i004: Source for the low word of output connector KK9499 Source for the high word of output connector KK9499 Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. 11.52 Settable fixed values U099 (2099) S00 (B110) Fixed value [SW 1.8 and later] The values set in Index .001 to .100 are connected to connectors K9501 to K9600 11.53 Triggering of faults and alarms U100 (2100) * S00 (B115) Source for the activation of F023 and F019 Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F023 or F019 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: F023 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 2) SW 1.8 and later: i001: F023 with fault value 1 (FB 2) i002: F023 with fault value 2 i003: F023 with fault value 3 i004: F023 with fault value 4 i005: F019 with fault value 1 (FB 286) i006: F019 with fault value 2 i007: F019 with fault value 3 i008: F019 with fault value 4 428 FB 2, FB 286 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U101 (2101) * S00 Source for the activation of F024 and F020 (B115) U102 (2102) * S00 (B115) U103 (2103) * S00 (B115) U104 (2104) * S00 (B115) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 3, FB 287 Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F024 or F020 on log. "1" No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 8 FS= i001: 9582 i002: 0 i003: 0 i004: 0 i005: 0 i006: 0 i007: 0 i008: 0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9552 i002: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: F024 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 3) SW 1.8 and later: i001: F024 with fault value 1 (FB 3) i002: F024 with fault value 2 i003: F024 with fault value 3 i004: F024 with fault value 4 i005: F020 with fault value 1 (FB 287) i006: F020 with fault value 2 i007: F020 with fault value 3 i008: F020 with fault value 4 Source for the activation of F033 and F053 FB 4, FB 288 Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F033 or F053 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: F033 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 4) SW 1.8 and later: i001: F033 with fault value 1 (FB 4) i002: F033 with fault value 2 i003: F033 with fault value 3 i004: F033 with fault value 4 i005: F053 with fault value 1 (FB 288) i006: F053 with fault value 2 i007: F053 with fault value 3 i008: F053 with fault value 4 Source for the activation of F034 and F054 FB 5, FB 289 Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F034 or F054 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: F034 (without Fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 5) SW 1.8 and later: i001: F034 with fault value 1 (FB 5) i002: F034 with fault value 2 i003: F034 with fault value 3 i004: F034 with fault value 4 i005: F054 with fault value 1 (FB 289) i006: F054 with fault value 2 i007: F054 with fault value 3 i008: F054 with fault value 4 Source for the activation of A023 and A019 FB 6, FB 256 Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A023 or A019 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: A023 (FB 6) SW 1.8 and later: i001: A023 i002: A019 (FB 6) (FB 256) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 429 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U105 (2105) * S00 Source for the activation of A024 and A020 (B115) U106 (2106) * S00 (B115) U107 (2107) * S00 (B115) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 7, FB 257 Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A024 or A020 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: A024 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 (FB 7) SW 1.8 and later: i001: A024 (FB 7) i002: A020 (FB 257) Source for the activation of A033 and A053 FB 8, FB 258 Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A033 or A053 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: A033 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 (FB 8) SW 1.8 and later: i001: A033 (FB 8) i002: A053 (FB 258) Source for the activation of A034 and A054 FB 9, FB 259 Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A034 or A054 on log. "1" 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Up to SW 1.7: A034 (FB 9) SW 1.8 and later: i001: A034 i002: A054 (FB 9) (FB 259) 11.54 Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters U110 (2110) * S00 (B120) U111 (2111) * S00 (B120) U112 (2112) * S00 (B120) 430 Source for connector/binector converter 1 FB 10 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9210 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 11 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9211 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 12 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector which must be converted to binectors B9052 (bit 0) to B9067 (bit 15) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for connector/binector converter 2 Connector which must be converted to binectors B9068 (bit 0) to B9083 (bit 15) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for connector/binector converter 3 Connector which must be converted to binectors B9084 (bit 0) to B9099 (bit 15) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U113 (2113) * S00 Source for binector/connector converter 1 (B121) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 13 All binector numbers 1 FB 14 All binector numbers 1 FB 15 All binector numbers 1 Binectors which must be converted to connector K9113 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. U114 (2114) * S00 (B121) Source for binector/connector converter 2 Binectors which must be converted to connector K9114 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. U115 (2115) * S00 (B121) Source for binector/connector converter 3 Binectors which must be converted to connector K9115 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 16 FS= i001: 0 i002: 0 i003: 14 i004: 0 i005: 0 i006: 12 i007: 0 i008: 514 i009: 0 i010: 0 i011: 0 i012: 500 i013: 502 i014: 510 i015: 512 i016: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 16 FS= i001: 0 i002: 0 i003: 0 i004: 0 i005: 0 i006: 0 i007: 506 i008: 508 i009: 0 i010: 0 i011: 0 i012: 0 i013: 16 i014: 10 i015: 0 i016: 504 Type: L2 Ind: 16 FS= i001: 9170 i002: 9173 i003: 136 i004: 139 i005: 141 i006: 143 i007: 145 i008: 147 i009: 149 i010: 151 i011: 153 i012: 9361 i013: 157 i014: 9382 i015: 9381 i016: 211 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.55 Binector/connector converter for serial interfaces U116 (2116) * (G170) Source for binector/connector converter for GSST1 Binectors which must be converted to connector K2020 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) All binector numbers 1 Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 431 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U117 (2117) * (G171) (G173) Source for binector/connector converter for GSST2 All binector numbers 1 Binectors which must be converted to connector K6020 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Settings: U118 (2118) * (G172) (G174) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for binector/connector converter for GSST3 All binector numbers 1 Binectors which must be converted to connector K9020 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st 2nd binector (bit 0) binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. U119 (2119) * Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor This parameter is a setting for the exchange of process data between DriveMonitor and the SIMOTRAS converter. It must not be changed! 11.56 Mathematical functions Adder / subtractor The 3 operands of a function block are selected by 3 indices each of a parameter. U120 to U131: The connectors selected via indices i001 and i002 are added, the connector selected via index i003 is subtracted. U120 to U122 [SW 1.8 and later]: The connectors selected via indices i004 and i005 are added, the connector selected via index i006 is subtracted. The result is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated. U120 (2120) * S00 (B125) U121 (2121) * S00 (B125) U122 (2122) * S00 (B125) U123 (2123) * S00 (B125) 432 Operands for 1st adder / subtractor (result = K9120) FB 20 Operands for 13th adder / subtractor (result = K9132) (SW 1.8 and later) FB 32 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 2nd adder / subtractor (result = K9121) Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9133) [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 3rd adder / subtractor (result = K9122) Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9134) [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 4th adder / subtracter (result = K9123) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. FB 21 FB 33 FB 22 FB 34 FB 23 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U124 (2124) * S00 (B125) U125 (2125) * S00 (B125) U126 (2126) * S00 (B125) U127 (2127) * S00 (B125) U128 (2128) * S00 (B125) U129 (2129) * S00 (B125 U130 (2130) * S00 (B125) U131 (2131) * S00 (B125) Operands for 5th adder / subtracter (result = K9124) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 24 All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 FB 25 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 26 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 27 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 28 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 29 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 30 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 31 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 6th adder / subtracter (result = K9125) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 7th adder / subtracter (result = K9126) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 8th adder / subtracter (result = K9127) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 9th adder / subtracter (result = K9128) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 10th adder / subtracter (result = K9129) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 11th adder / subtracter (result = K9130) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 12th adder / subtracter (result = K9131) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Adders / subtracters for double word connectors The 3 operands of a function block are selected in each case via the three indices of a parameter. The result is switched to a double word connector and a connector. The double word connector is limited to between -200.00 and +199.99%. The connector is limited to between -0.003052 and +0.003052% (= value range of LOW word of a double word connector = 200% / 65536) U132 (2132) * S00 (B151) Operands for 1st adder / subtracter Operands for 2nd adder / subtracter FB 48 FB 49 [SW 1.9 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 1st adder / subtracter: result = KK9490 and K9491 2nd adder / subtracter: result = KK9492 and K9493 i001: i002: i003: Addition value for 1st adder/subtracter Addition value for 1st adder/subtracter Subtraction value for 1st adder/subtracter i004: i005: i006: Addition value for 2nd adder/subtracter Addition value for 2nd adder/subtracter Subtraction value for 2nd adder/subtracter Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 433 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Sign inverters The contents of the connector selected in the parameter are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to the specified connector. U135 (2135) * S00 (B125) U136 (2136) * S00 (B125) U137 (2137) * S00 (B125) U138 (2138) * S00 (B125) Source for 1st sign inverter (result = K9135) FB 35 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 36 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 37 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 38 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for 2nd sign inverter (result = K9136) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for 3rd sign inverter (result = K9137) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for 4th sign inverter (result = K9138) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Switchable sign inverters The contents of the connector entered in the parameter for selection of a source is switched through, depending on the state of the binector entered in the parameter for control bit selection, as an unchanged value (when control bit = 0) or as a negated value (two's complement, when control bit = 1). The result is applied to the specified connector. U140 (2140) * S00 (B125) U141 (2141) * S00 (B125) U142 (2142) * S00 (B125) U143 (2143) * S00 (B125) Source for 1st switchable sign inverter FB 40 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 40 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 41 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 41 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Result = K9140 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Control bit for 1st switchable sign inverter 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for 2nd switchable sign inverter Result = K9141 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Control bit for 2nd switchable sign inverter 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Divider The two operands (x1, x2) for each divider are selected via 2 indices each of the parameter: Index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2 Index i003 = x1, index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later] Formula: y = x1 100% x2 For division by 0 (x2=0) the following applies: for x1 > 0: y = +199.99% for x1 = 0: y = 0.00% for x1 < 0: y = -200.00% y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated. U145 Operands for 1st divider (result = K9145) Operands for 4th divider (result = K9142) (2145) * 0 = Connector K0000 S00 1 = Connector K0001 (B131) etc. 434 FB 45 FB 42 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U146 (2146) * S00 (B131) Operands for 2nd divider (result = K9146) Operands for 5th divider (result = K9143) FB 46 FB 43 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 3rd divider (result = K9147) Operands for 6th divider (result = K9144) FB 47 FB 44 U147 (2147) * S00 (B131) Value range [Unit] Steps 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Multipliers The two operands (x1, x2) for each multiplier are selected via 2 indices of the parameter each: Index i001 = x1, Index i002 = x2 Index i003 = x1, Index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later] Index i005 = x1, Index i006 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later] Formula: y = x1 x 2 100% y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated. U150 (2150) * S00 (B130) U151 (2151) * S00 (B130) U152 (2152) * S00 (B130) U153 (2153) * S00 (B130) Operands for 1st multiplier (result = K9150) Operands for 5th multiplier (result = K9430) Operands for 9th multiplier (result = K9431) FB 50 FB 290 FB 291 All connector numbers 1 Operands for 2nd multiplier (result = K9151) Operands for 6th multiplier (result = K9432) Operands for 10th multiplier (result = K9433) FB 51 FB 292 FB 293 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS= i001: 9229 i002: 401 i003: 0 i004: 0 i005: 0 i006: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 3rd multiplier (result = K9152) Operands for 7th multiplier (result = K9434) Operands for 11th multiplier (result = K9435) FB 52 FB 294 FB 295 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Operands for 4th multiplier (result = K9153) Operands for 8th multiplier (result = K9436) Operands for 12th multiplier (result = K9437) FB 53 FB 296 FB 297 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. High-resolution multipliers/dividers The three operands are selected via the three indices of the parameter i.e. index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2, index i003 = x3 Equations: x 4( 32 bit ) = x1 x 2 , y = x 4 x1 x 2 = x3 x3 Applicable for division by 0 (x2=0): When x1 > 0: y = +199.99% When x1 = 0: y = 0.00% When x1 < 0: y = -200.00% y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the specified connector. U155 (2155) * S00 (B131) U156 (2156) * S00 (B131) Operands for 1st multiplier/divider (result = K9155) FB 55 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 56 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Operands for 2nd multiplier/divider (result = K9156) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 435 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U157 (2157) * S00 (B131) Operands for 3rd multiplier/divider (result = K9157) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 57 All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 FB 60 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Signal injection mode for 1st abs.-value generator with filter FB 60 0 Injection of signal with correct sign 1 Injection of absolute value of signal 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted 3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Filter time for 1st abs.-value generator with filter 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 60 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Absolute-value generator with filter U160 (2160) * S00 (B135) U161 (2161) * S00 (B135) U162 (2162) Source for input quantity for 1st abs.-value generator with filter 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. S00 (B135) U163 (2163) * S00 (B135) U164 (2164) * S00 (B135) Source for input quantity for 2nd abs.-value generator with filter FB 61 Signal injection mode for 2nd abs.-value generator with filter FB 61 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline U165 (2165) 0 Injection of signal with correct sign 1 Injection of absolute value of signal 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted 3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Filter time for 2nd abs.-value generator with filter 0 to 3 1 FB 61 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline U166 (2166) * S00 (B135) U167 (2167) * S00 (B135) Source for input quantity for 3rd abs.-value generator with filter FB 62 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 62 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline U168 (2168) Filter time for 3rd abs.-value generator with filter FB 62 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input quantity for 4th abs.-value generator with filter FB 63 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Signal injection mode for 4th abs.-value generator with filter FB 63 0 Injection of signal with correct sign 1 Injection of absolute value of signal 2 Injection of signal with sign, inverted 3 Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Filter time for 4th abs.-value generator with filter 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 63 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. S00 (B135) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Signal injection mode for 3rd abs.-value generator with filter 0 1 2 3 Injection of signal with correct sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted S00 (B135) U169 (2169) * S00 (B135) U170 (2170) * S00 (B135) U171 (2171) S00 (B135) 436 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.57 Processing of connectors Averager [SW 1.8 and later] U172 (2172) * S00 (B139) U173 (2173) S00 (B139) FB 16, FB 17, FB 18, FB 19 Source for input signal i001: i002: i003: i004: 1st averager 2nd averager 3rd averager 4th averager 1st averager 2nd averager 3rd averager 4th averager All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] 1 to 100 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online (FB 16) (FB 17) (FB 18) (FB 19) Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Number of sampling cycles i001: i002: i003: i004: [SW 1.8 and later] (FB 16) (FB 17) (FB 18) (FB 19) 11.58 Limiters, limit-value monitors Limiters The input variable selected with index i001 or i004 of the 1st parameter is limited to the limit values selected with indices i002 and i003 or i005 and i006 and applied to the specified connector. Violation of the limit values is signaled by means of two binectors. U175 Source for input signal and limits for limiter 1 FB 65 All connector numInd: 6 P052 = 3 (2175) bers FS= P051 = 40 Output = connector K9167 * 1 i001: 0 Offline i001: Input signal S00 i002: 9165 i002: Upper limiting value (L+) (B134) i003: 9166 i003: Lower limiting value (L-) (B135) i004: 0 i005: 9174 Source for input signal and limits for limiter 4 FB 212 i006: 9175 [SW2.0 and later] Type: L2 Output = connector K9176 i004: Input signal i005: Upper limiting value (L+) i006: Lower limiting value (L-) U176 (2176) S00 (B134) (B135) U177 (2177) * S00 (B134) (B135) Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Limit value for limiter i001: i002: FB 65, FB212 Applied to connector K9165 (FB 65) Applied to connector K9174 (FB 212) [SW2.0 and later] Source for input signal and limits for limiter 2 FB 66 Output = connector K9170 i001: Input signal i002: Upper limiting value (L+) i003: Lower limiting value (L-) Source for input signal and limits for limiter 5 Output = connector K9179 i004: Input signal i005: Upper limiting value (L+) i006: Lower limiting value (L-) FB 213 [SW2.0 and later] -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 FS=100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9168 i003: 9169 i004: 0 i005: 9177 i006: 9178 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 437 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U178 (2178) Limit value for limiter S00 (B134) (B135) U179 (2179) * S00 (B134) (B135) i001: i002: See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9171 i003: 9172 i004: 0 i005: 9260 i006: 9261 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 FS=100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 70 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9181 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 70 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 66, FB213 [SW2.0 and later] Source for input signal and limits for limiter 3 FB 67 Output = connector K9173 i001: Input signal i002: Upper limiting value (L+) i003: Lower limiting value (L-) Output = connector K9262 i004: Input signal i005: Upper limiting value (L+) i006: Lower limiting value (L-) S00 (B134) (B135) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=100.00 Type: I2 Applied to connector K9168 (FB 66) Applied to connector K9177 (FB 213) Source for input signal and limits for limiter 6 U180 (2180) Value range [Unit] Steps Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Limit value for limiter i001: i002: Applied to connector K9171 (FB 67) Applied to connector K9260 (FB 214) -199.99 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% FB 214 [SW2.0 and later] FB 67, FB214 [SW2.0 and later] Limit-value monitors for double word connectors U181 (2181) * S00 (B151) U182 (2182) S00 (B151) Source for input signal (A) and operating threshold (B) for 1st limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 68 for 2nd limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 69 [SW 1.9 and later] i001: i002: Input signal for 1st limit-value monitor Operating threshold for 1st limit-value monitor i003: i004: Input signal for 2nd limit-value monitor Operating threshold for 2nd limit-value monitor Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Hysteresis for 1st limit-value monitor for double word connectorsFB 68 Hysteresis for 2nd limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB69 [SW 1.9 and later] i001: i002: Hysteresis for 1st limit-value monitor Hysteresis for 2nd limit-value monitor The hysteresis relates to the HIGH word of the double word connector Limit-value monitor with filter U185 (2185) * S00 (B136) U186 (2186) S00 (B136) 438 Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 1. Limit-value monitor with filter i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9181 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U187 (2187) Filter time for 1st limit-value monitor with filtering FB 70 Hysteresis for 1st limit-value monitor with filtering Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 2. Limit-value monitor with filter S00 (B136) U188 (2188) Value range [Unit] Steps 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 70 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 71 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9183 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 71 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Filter time for 2nd limit-value monitor with filtering FB 71 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 2nd limit-value monitor with filtering FB 71 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 3. Limit-value monitor with filter FB 72 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9185 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 72 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Filter time for 3rd limit-value monitor with filtering FB 72 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 3rd limit-value monitor with filtering FB 72 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 73 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 167 i002: 9186 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 73 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=75.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline S00 (B136) U189 (2189) * S00 (B136) U190 (2190) S00 (B136) U191 (2191) S00 (B136) U192 (2192) i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9183 S00 (B136) U193 (2193) * S00 (B136) U194 (2194) S00 (B136) U195 (2195) S00 (B136) U196 (2196) i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9185 S00 (B136) Limit-value monitor without filter U197 (2197) * S00 (B137) U198 (2198) S00 (B137) Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 1. Limit-value monitor without filter i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9186 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 439 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline U199 (2199) Hysteresis for 1st limit-value monitor without filtering FB 73 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 2. Limit-value monitor without filter FB 74 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9187 i002: 167 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 74 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=-75.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 2nd limit-value monitor without filtering FB 74 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 3. Limit-value monitor without filter FB 75 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 401 i002: 166 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 75 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 3rd limit-value monitor without filtering FB 75 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 4. Limit-value monitor without filter FB 76 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9189 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 76 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 76 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline S00 (B137) U200 (2200) * S00 (B137) U201 (2201) S00 (B137) U202 (2202) i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9187 S00 (B137) U203 (2203) * S00 (B137) U204 (2204) S00 (B137) U205 (2205) i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9188 S00 (B137) U206 (2206) * S00 (B137) U207 (2207) S00 (B137) U208 (2208) S00 (B137) 440 i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9189 Hysteresis for 4th limit-value monitor without filtering SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U210 (2210) * S00 (B138) Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 5. Limit-value monitor without filter U211 (2211) S00 (B138) U212 (2212) Value range [Unit] Steps U214 (2214) S00 (B138) U215 (2215) All connector numbers 1 FB 77 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 5th limit-value monitor without filtering FB 77 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 6. Limit-value monitor without filter FB 78 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9191 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 78 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Hysteresis for 6th limit-value monitor without filtering FB 78 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for 7. Limit-value monitor without filter FB 79 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9192 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 79 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 79 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9190 i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9191 S00 (B138) U216 (2216) * S00 (B138) U217 (2217) S00 (B138) U218 (2218) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 77 S00 (B138) U213 (2213) * S00 (B138) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS= i001: 0 i002: 9190 Type: L2 i001: i002: Input signal Operating point Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Settable operating point for limit-value monitor Applied to connector K9192 Hysteresis for 7th limit-value monitor without filtering S00 (B138) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 441 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.59 Processing of connectors Maximum selection FB 80, FB 174, FB 175, FB 176 The largest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output. U220 Source for maximum selection All connector numInd: 12 (2220) bers FS=0 0 = Connector K0000 * 1 Type: L2 1 = Connector K0001 S00 etc. (B140) i001: i002: i003: P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline x1 Maximum selection 1 (FB 80, Output = K9193) x2 Maximum selection 1 x3 Maximum selection 1 SW 1.8 and later: i004: x1 Maximum selection 2 (FB 174, Output = K9460) i005: x2 Maximum selection 2 i006: x3 Maximum selection 2 i007: i008: i009: x1 Maximum selection 3 (FB 175, Output = K9461) x2 Maximum selection 3 x3 Maximum selection 3 i010: i011: i012: x1 Maximum selection 4 (FB 176, Output = K9462) x2 Maximum selection 4 x3 Maximum selection 4 Minimum selection FB 81, FB 177, FB 178, FB 179 The smallest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output. U221 Source for minimum selection All connector numInd: 12 (2221) bers FS=0 0 = Connector K0000 * 1 Type: L2 1 = Connector K0001 S00 etc. (B140) i001: i002: i003: x1 Minimum selection 1 x2 Minimum selection 1 x3 Minimum selection 1 SW 1.8 and later: i004: x1 Minimum selection 2 i005: x2 Minimum selection 2 i006: x3 Minimum selection 2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline (FB 81, Output = K9194) (FB 177, Output = K9463) i007: i008: i009: x1 Minimum selection 3 x2 Minimum selection 3 x3 Minimum selection 3 (FB 178, Output = K9464) i010: i011: i012: x1 Minimum selection 4 x2 Minimum selection 4 x3 Minimum selection 4 (FB 179, Output = K9465) Tracking/storage elements The tracking/storage elements are storage elements for the parameterized input quantity. The outputs are linked to connectors. Transfer of the input quantity is controlled via the RESET, TRACK and STORE functions: RESET: TRACK: When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to 0.00% (y=0) When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to the input value and then tracks it continuously (y=x). If the TRACK signal switches from "1" to "0", the last value applied to the y output is "frozen" STORE: With a "0" to "1" transition of the controlling binector signal, the output is permanently set to the current input value (y=x). This value then remains stored Priority1. RESET, 2. TRACK, 3. STORE Tracking/storage element 1 U222 (2222) * S00 (B145) 442 Source for input quantity (x) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. FB 82 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U223 (2223) * S00 Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE (B145) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Control word for Power On Mode U224 (2224) * S00 (B145) i001: i002: i003: 0 1 Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 82 All binector numbers 1 FB 82 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 83 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 83 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 83 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline TRACK STORE RESET Volatile storage: Zero appears at output when voltage recovers Non-volatile storage: When the voltage is disconnected or fails, the current output value is stored and then output when the voltage recovers/is reconnected Tracking/storage element 2 U225 (2225) * S00 (B145) U226 (2226) * S00 Source for input quantity (x) (B145) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Control word for Power On Mode U227 (2227) * S00 (B145) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE i001: i002: i003: 0 1 TRACK STORE RESET Volatile storage: Zero appears at output when voltage recovers Non-volatile storage: When the voltage is disconnected or fails, the current output value is stored and then output when the voltage recovers/is reconnected Connector memories The connector memories are memory elements for the input quantities selected via the parameters. The outputs are linked to connectors. While the SET input is in the log. "1" state, output quantity y tracks input quantity x continuously. If the SET input changes state from log. "1" to log. "0", the current value of x is stored and output continuously at y. Output (y) = 0 is set on POWER ON. Connector memory 1 U228 (2228) * S00 (B145) U229 (2229) * S00 (B145) Source for input quantity (x) FB 84 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 84 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 85 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 85 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal SET 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Connector memory 2 U230 (2230) * S00 (B145) U231 (2231) * S00 (B145) Source for input quantity (x) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal SET 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 443 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9113 i002: 3001 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=3110 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9114 i002: 3003 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=3110 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS= i001: 11 i002: 3002 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=3110 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS= i001: 1 i002: 3 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=9064 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9150 i002: 9213 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=9083 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switches Depending on the state of the control signal, one of the two input quantities is applied to the output (connector): Control signal = 0: The input quantity selected in index i001 is applied to the output Control signal = 1: The input quantity selected in index i002 is applied to the output Connector changeover switch 1 (output = K9210) U240 (2240) * S00 (B150) U241 (2241) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities FB 90 All connector numbers 1 FB 90 All binector numbers 1 FB 91 All connector numbers 1 FB 91 All binector numbers 1 FB 92 All connector numbers 1 FB 92 All binector numbers 1 FB 93 All connector numbers 1 FB 93 All binector numbers 1 FB 94 All connector numbers 1 FB 94 All binector numbers 1 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switch 2 (output = K9211) U242 (2242) * S00 (B150) U243 (2243) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switch 3 (output = K9212) U244 (2244) * S00 (B150) U245 (2245) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switch 4 (output = K9213) U246 (2246) * S00 (B150) U247 (2247) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switch 5 (output = K9214) U248 (2248) * S00 (B150) U249 (2249) * S00 (B150) 444 Source for input quantities 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS= i001: 9214 i002: 510 i003: 0 i004: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switches 6 and 11 U250 (2250) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities Output 6 = Connector K9215 i001: 1st input signal i002: 2nd input signal Output 11 = Connector K9265 i003: 1st input signal i004: 2nd input signal U251 (2251) * S00 (B150) FB 95 and FB 196 Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal i001: i002: Switchover for output 6 Switchover for output 11 [SW2.0 and later] FB 95 and FB 196 [SW2.0 and later] Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Connector changeover switches 7 and 12 U252 (2252) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities Output 12 = Connector K9266 i003: 1st input signal i004: 2nd input signal U253 (2253) * S00 (B150) FB 96 and FB 197 Output 7 = Connector K9216 i001: 1st input signal i002: 2nd input signal Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal i001: i002: Switchover for output 7 Switchover for output 12 [SW2.0 and later] FB 96 and FB 197 [SW2.0 and later] Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Connector changeover switches 8 and 13 U254 (2254) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities Output 8 = Connector K9217 i001: 1st input signal i002: 2nd input signal Output 13 = Connector K9267 i003: 1st input signal i004: 2nd input signal U255 (2255) * S00 (B150) FB 97 and FB 198 Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal i001: i002: Switchover for output 8 Switchover for output 13 [SW2.0 and later] FB 97 and FB 198 [SW2.0 and later] Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc.. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 445 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Connector changeover switches 9 and 14 U256 (2256) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities Output 9 = Connector K9218 i001: 1st input signal i002: 2nd input signal Output 14 = Connector K9268 i003: 1st input signal i004: 2nd input signal U257 (2257) * S00 (B150) FB 98 and FB 199 Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal i001: i002: Switchover for output 9 Switchover for output 14 [SW2.0 and later] FB 98 and FB 199 [SW2.0 and later] Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Connector changeover switches 10 and 15 U258 (2258) * S00 (B150) Source for input quantities Output 15 = Connector K9269 i003: 1st input signal i004: 2nd input signal U259 (2259) * S00 (B150) FB 99 and FB 229 Output 10 = Connector K9219 i001: 1st input signal i002: 2nd input signal Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for control signal i001: i002: Switchover for output 10 Switchover for output 15 [SW2.0 and later] FB 99 and FB 229 [SW2.0 and later] Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. 11.60 Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching Integrator 1 (output = K9220) U260 (2260) * S00 (B155) U261 (2261) S00 (B155) 446 Source for input quantity FB 100 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 100 10 to 65000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Integral-action time SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U262 (2262) * S00 Source for control signals (B155) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 100 i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state) i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the value entered in parameter U263) All binector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Settings: U263 (2263) * S00 (B155) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for setting value FB 100 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 101 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Integral-action time FB 101 10 to 65000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Source for control signals FB 101 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 101 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 102 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Integral-action time FB 102 10 to 65000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=10 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Source for control signals FB 102 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Integrator 2 (output = K9221) U264 (2264) * S00 (B155) U265 (2265) S00 (B155) U266 (2266) * S00 (B155) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state) i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the value entered in parameter U267) Settings: U267 (2267) * S00 (B155) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for setting value 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Integrator 3 (output = K9222) U268 (2268) * S00 (B155) U269 (2269) S00 (B155) U270 (2270) * S00 (B155) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. i001 Source for "Stop integrator" signal (integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state) i002 Source for "Set integrator" signal (when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the value entered in parameter U271) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 447 Parameter list PNU Description U271 (2271) * S00 (B155) Source for setting value 03.2015 Value range [Unit] Steps FB 102 All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 FB 103 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Derivative-action time FB 103 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Filter time FB 103 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 104 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Derivative-action time FB 104 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Filter time FB 104 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 105 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Derivative-action time FB 105 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Filter time FB 105 0 to 1000 [ms] 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline DT1 element 1 (output = K9223, inverted: K9224) U272 (2272) * S00 (B155) U273 (2273) S00 (B155) U274 (2274) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. S00 (B155) DT1 element 2 (output = K9225, inverted: K9226) U275 (2275) * S00 (B155) U276 (2276) S00 (B155) U277 (2277) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. S00 (B155) DT1 element 3 (output = K9227, inverted: K9228) U278 (2278) * S00 (B155) U279 (2279) S00 (B155) U280 (2280) S00 (B155) 448 Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Characteristic blocks The curve of the characteristics can be defined by 10 points each: Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): x values for FB 106, FB 107, FB 108 associated y values SW1.8 and later: Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): x values for FB 280, FB 282, FB 284 associated y values Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): x values for FB 281, FB 283, FB 285 associated y values for x = -200.00% up to x value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the x values gilt: y = value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the y values for x = x value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the x values to x = 200.00% gilt: y = value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the y values The distance between two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99% otherwise deviations from the required shape of the characteristic can arise. Characteristic block 1 (output = K9229) Characteristic block 4 (output = K9410) [SW1.8 and later] Characteristic block 5 (output = K9411) [SW1.8 and later] U281 (2281) * S00 Source for input quantity (B160) Up to SW 1.7: Selected connector = input quantity for FB106 U282 (2282) S00 (B160) 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. SW 1.8 and later: i001 Input quantity i002 Input quantity i003 Input quantity x values i001 i002 ... i010 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point FB 106 FB 280 FB 281 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9212 i002: 0 i003: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 30 FS= i001:-100.00 i002: -70.00 i003: -60.00 i004: -40.00 i005: -20.00 i006: 20.00 i007: 40.00 i008: 60.00 i009: 70.00 i010: 100.00 i011-i030: 0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 30 FS= i001:-100.00 i002: -50.00 i003: -35.00 i004: -20.00 i005: -6.00 i006: 6.00 i007: 20.00 i008: 35.00 i009: 50.00 i010: 100.00 i011-i030: 0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online for FB106 for FB280 for FB281 for FB106 for FB106 10th characteristic point for FB106 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB280 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB280 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB280 U283 (2283) S00 (B160) i021 i022 ... i030 y values i001 i002 ... i010 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB281 for FB281 10th characteristic point for FB281 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB106 for FB106 10th characteristic point for FB106 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB280 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB280 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB280 i021 i022 ... i030 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB281 for FB281 10th characteristic point for FB281 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 449 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Characteristic block 2 (output = K9230) Characteristic block 6 (output = K9412) [SW1.8 and later] Characteristic block 7 (output = K9413) [SW1.8 and later] U284 (2284) * S00 Source for input quantity (B160) up to SW 1.7: Selected connector = input quantity for FB107 U285 (2285) S00 (B160) 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. SW 1.8 and later: i001 input quantity i002 input quantity i003 input quantity x values i001 i002 ... i010 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point See Change (Access / Status) FB 107 FB 282 FB 283 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 30 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 30 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online for FB107 for FB282 for FB283. for FB107 for FB107 10th characteristic point for FB107 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB282 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB282 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB282 U286 (2286) S00 (B160) i021 i022 ... i030 y values i001 i002 ... i010 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB283 for FB283 10th characteristic point for FB283 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB107 for FB107 10th characteristic point for FB107 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB282 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB282 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB282 i021 i022 ... i030 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB283 for FB283 10th characteristic point for FB283 Characteristic block 3 (Output = K9231) Characteristic block 8 (Output = K9414) [SW1.8 and later] Characteristic block 9 (Output = K9415) [SW1.8 and later] U287 (2287) * S00 Source for input quantity (B160) up to SW 1.7: Selected connector = input quantity for FB108 450 All connector numbers 1 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. SW 1.8 and later: i001 Input quantity i002 Input quantity i003 Input quantity FB 108 FB 284 FB 285 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline for FB108 for FB284 for FB285 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U288 (2288) x values i001 i002 ... i010 S00 (B160) 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB108 for FB108 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 30 FS=0.00 Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 30 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 10th characteristic point for FB108 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB284 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB284 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB284 U289 (2289) i021 i022 ... i030 y values i001 i002 ... i010 S00 (B160) 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB285 for FB285 10th characteristic point for FB285 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB108 for FB108 10th characteristic point for FB108 SW 1.8 and later: i011 1st characteristic point for FB284 i012 2nd characteristic point for FB284 ... i020 10th characteristic point for FB284 i021 i022 ... i030 1st characteristic point 2nd characteristic point for FB285 for FB285 10th characteristic point for FB285 Dead zones The component of the input quantity (x) whose absolute value exceeds the threshold for the dead zone is applied to the output (y). Dead zone 1 (output = K9232) U290 (2290) * S00 (B161) U291 (2291) Source for input quantity FB 109 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 109 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 110 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 110 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 111 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 111 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Dead zone S00 (B161) Dead zone 2 (output = K9233) U292 (2292) * S00 (B161) U293 (2293) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Dead zone S00 (B161) Dead zone 3 (output = K9234) U294 (2294) * S00 (B161) U295 (2295) Source for input quantity 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Dead zone S00 (B161) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 451 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Setpoint branching (output = K9235) The input quantity is weighted with 2 parameters: Parameter U297 determines the output value with an input = 0% Parameter U298 determines the output value with an input = +100% -U297 and -U298 apply in the case of negative input values. The hysteresis set in parameter U299 is applied for transitions from negative to positive input values and vice versa U296 Source for input quantity FB 112 All connector numInd: None (2296) bers FS=0 0 = connector K0000 * 1 Type: L2 1 = connector K0001 S00 etc. (B161) U297 Minimum speed FB 112 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: None (2297) [%] FS=0.00 0.01 Type: O2 S00 (B161) U298 (2298) S00 (B161) U299 (2299) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Maximum speed FB 112 0.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: None FS=100.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis FB 112 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online S00 (B161) 11.61 Simple ramp-function generator Please note: The output (y) = 0 is set in response to "Set simple ramp-function generator to zero" and POWER ON The output (y) is frozen at the current value in response to "Stop simple ramp-function generator" The ramp-up and ramp-down times are set to zero in response to "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" Ramp-up integrator: The simple ramp-function generator contains a flip-flop whose output is set to log. "0" (ramp generator initial run) after POWER ON or when the ramp-function generator has been enabled. When the ramp-function generator output reaches a value corresponding to the input quantity (y=x) for the first time, the flip-flop output switches to log. "1" and remains in this state until the next enabling command. This output is linked to binector B9191. By parameterizing U301, index i001=919, it is possible to apply this binector to the "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" function and thus to implement a ramp-up integrator function. U300 (2300) * S00 (B165) U301 (2301) * S00 (B165) Source for input quantity FB 113 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 113 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 0 i002: 0 i003: 1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signals i001 i002 i003 Source for "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" signal Source for "Stop simple ramp-function generator" signal Source for "Reset / enable simple ramp-function generator" signal (0 = reset to zero, 1 = enable) Settings: U302 (2302) S00 (B165) U303 (2303) S00 (B165) 452 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Ramp-up time FB 113 0.00 to 300.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ramp-down time FB 113 0.00 to 300.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) [SW 1.8 and later] All binector numbers 1 Ind: 9 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.62 Multiplexer FB86 = 1st multiplexer (output = K9450) FB87 = 2nd multiplexer (output = K9451) FB88 = 3rd multiplexer (output = K9452) Function: An input quantity is connected through to the output depending on the control bits: U310 (2310) * S00 (B195) U311 (2311) * S00 (B195) U312 (2312) * S00 (B195) U313 (2313) * S00 (B195) B3 B2 B1 Output y 0 0 0 X0 0 0 1 X1 0 1 0 X2 0 1 1 X3 1 0 0 X4 1 0 1 X5 1 1 0 X6 1 1 1 X7 Source for control bits for the multiplexer 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: Control bit B1 Control bit B2 Control bit B3 for 1st multiplexer i004: i005: i006: Control bit B1 Control bit B2 Control bit B3 for 2nd multiplexer i007: Control bit B1 for 3rd multiplexer i008: Control bit B2 i009: Control bit B3 Source for input quantities for 1st multiplexer 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001 Input quantity X0 i002 Input quantity X1 i003 Input quantity X2 i004 Input quantity X3 i005 Input quantity X4 i006 Input quantity X5 i007 Input quantity X6 i008 Input quantity X7 Source for input quantities for 2nd multiplexer 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001 Input quantity X0 i002 Input quantity X1 i003 Input quantity X2 i004 Input quantity X3 i005 Input quantity X4 i006 Input quantity X5 i007 Input quantity X6 i008 Input quantity X7 Source for input quantities for 3rd multiplexer 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001 i002 i003 i004 i005 i006 i007 i008 Input quantity X0 Input quantity X1 Input quantity X2 Input quantity X3 Input quantity X4 Input quantity X5 Input quantity X6 Input quantity X7 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 453 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) FB 89 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 65535 Ind: None Type: O2 P052 = 3 Fixed values for setting/limiting inputs of software counter FB 89 [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 4 FS= i001: 0 i002: 65535 i003: 0 i004: 0 Type: O2 Ind: 4 FS= i001: 9441 i002: 9442 i003: 9443 i004: 9444 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.63 Counters Software counter n314 (2314) S00 (B196) U315 (2315) * S00 (B196) U316 (2316) * S00 (B196) U317 (2317) * S00 (B196) FB 89 Display of output of software counter i001: i002: i003: i004: Minimum value Maximum value Setting value Start value Source for setting/limiting inputs of software counter i001: i002: i003: i004: All connector numbers 1 FB 89 [SW 1.9 and later] All binector numbers 1 Ind: 5 FS= i001: 0 i002: 0 i003: 0 i004: 0 i005: 1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 118 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 119 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Minimum value Maximum value Setting value Start value Settings: 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for control signals of software counter i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: FB 89 [SW 1.9 and later] Positive edge: Count up Positive edge: Count down Stop counter Set counter Enable counter P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.64 Logic functions Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 U318 (2318) * S00 Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 1 (B200) Settings: U319 (2319) * S00 (B200) i001 i002 i003 Source for input signal, bit 0 Source for input signal, bit 1 Source for input signal, bit 2 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 2 i001 i002 i003 Source for input signal, bit 0 Source for input signal, bit 1 Source for input signal, bit 2 Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 454 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) AND elements with 3 inputs each The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ANDed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified binector. U320 Source for input signals, AND element 1 (output = B9350) FB 120 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3 (2320) 1 FS= P051 = 40 i001 Source for input 1 * i001: 14 Offline i002 Source for input 2 S00 i002: 9054 i003 Source for input 3 (B205) i003: 1 Type: L2 Settings: U321 (2321) * S00 (B205) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals, AND element 2 (output = B9351) FB 121 All binector numbers 1 FB 122 All binector numbers 1 FB 123 All binector numbers 1 FB 124 All binector numbers 1 FB 125 All binector numbers 1 FB 126 All binector numbers 1 FB 127 All binector numbers 1 FB 128 All binector numbers 1 FB 129 All binector numbers 1 FB 130 All binector numbers 1 As for U320 U322 (2322) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 3 (output = B9352) U323 (2323) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 4 (output = B9353) U324 (2324) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 5 (output = B9354) U325 (2325) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 6 (output = B9355) U326 (2326) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 7 (output = B9356) U327 (2327) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 8 (output = B9357) U328 (2328) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 9 (output = B9358) U329 (2329) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 10 (output = B9359) U330 (2330) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 11 (output = B9360) As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9081 i002: 250 i003: 9456 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9063 i002: 9065 i003: 9551 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9064 i002: 9066 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9057 i002: 151 i003: 145 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 3 FS= i001: 149 i002: 9451 i003: 9452 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9354 i002: 9355 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9356 i002: 9367 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9380 i002: 9553 i003: 170 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9470 i002: 9456 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9065 i002: 9066 i003: 9551 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 455 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U331 (2331) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 12 (output = B9361) U332 (2332) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 13 (output = B9362) U333 (2333) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 14 (output = B9363) U334 (2334) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 15 (output = B9364) U335 (2335) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 16 (output = B9365) U336 (2336) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 17 (output = B9366) U337 (2337) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 18 (output = B9367) U338 (2338) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 19 (output = B9368) U339 (2339) * S00 (B205) U340 (2340) * S00 (B205) U341 (2341) * S00 (B205) U342 (2342) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 20 (output = B9369) 456 Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 133 All binector numbers 1 FB 134 All binector numbers 1 FB 135 All binector numbers 1 FB 136 All binector numbers 1 FB 137 All binector numbers 1 FB 138 All binector numbers 1 FB 139 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 140 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 141 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 142 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 As for U320 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 132 As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 23 (output = B9372) Ind: 3 FS= i001: 250 i002: 9455 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9361 i002: 9080 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9456 i002: 105 i003: 9059 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9382 i002: 9083 i003: 1 Type: L2 All binector numbers 1 As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 22 (output = B9371) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 131 As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 21 (output = B9370) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS= i001: 255 i002: 9381 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9063 i002: 9074 i003: 1 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9064 i002: 9075 i003: 9551 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9454 i002: 9361 i003: 1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U343 (2343) * S00 (B205) U344 (2344) * S00 (B205) U345 (2345) * S00 (B205) U346 (2346) * S00 (B205) U347 (2347) * S00 (B205) Source for input signals, AND element 24 (output = B9373) Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 144 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 145 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 146 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 147 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 26 (output = B9375) As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 27 (output = B9376) As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 28 (output = B9377) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 143 As for U320 Source for input signals, AND element 25 (output = B9374) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 As for U320 OR elements with 3 inputs each The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ORed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified binector. U350 Source for input signals, OR element 1 (output = B9380) FB 150 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3 (2350) 1 FS= P051 = 40 i001 Source for input 1 * i001: 9352 Offline i002 Source for input 2 S00 i002: 9353 i003 Source for input 3 (B206) i003: 0 Type: L2 Settings: U351 (2351) * S00 (B206) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals, OR element 2 (output = B9381) FB 151 All binector numbers 1 FB 152 All binector numbers 1 FB 153 All binector numbers 1 FB 154 All binector numbers 1 FB 155 All binector numbers 1 FB 156 All binector numbers 1 As for U350 U352 (2352) * S00 (B206) Source for input signals, OR element 3 (output = B9382) U353 (2353) * S00 (B206) Source for input signals, OR element 4 (output = B9383) U354 (2354) * S00 (B206) Source for input signals, OR element 5 (output = B9384) U355 (2355) * S00 (B206) U356 (2356) * S00 (B206) Source for input signals, OR element 6 (output = B9385) As for U350 As for U350 As for U350 As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 7 (output = B9386) As for U350 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9554 i002: 9360 i003: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9362 i002: 9363 i003: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9365 i002: 9366 i003: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9063 i002: 9064 i003: 0 Type: L2 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 457 Parameter list PNU Description U357 (2357) * S00 (B206) U358 (2358) * S00 (B206) U359 (2359) * S00 U360 (2360) * S00 (B206) U361 (2361) * S00 (B206) U362 (2362) * S00 (B206) U363 (2363) * S00 (B206) U364 (2364) * S00 (B206) U365 (2365) * S00 (B206) U366 (2366) * S00 (B206) U367 (2367) * S00 (B206) U368 (2368) * S00 (B206) U369 (2369) * S00 (B206) Source for input signals, OR element 8 (output = B9387) 458 03.2015 Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 158 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 159 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 160 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 161 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 162 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 163 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 164 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 165 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 166 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 167 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 168 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 169 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 10 (output = B9389) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 11 (output = B9390) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 12 (output = B9391) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 13 (output = B9392) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 14 (output = B9393) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 15 (output = B9394) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 16 (output = B9395) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 17 (output = B9396) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 18 (output = B9397) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 19 (output = B9398) As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 20 (output = B9399) As for U350 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 157 As for U350 Source for input signals, OR element 9 (output = B9388) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each The input signals selected via the 2 indices of the parameter are combined in an EXCLUSIVE OR (XOR) operation and the result applied to the specified binector. U370 Source for input signals, XOR element 1 (output = B9195) FB 170 All binector numbers Ind: 2 P052 = 3 (2370) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40 i001 Source for input 1 * Type: L2 Offline i002 Source for input 2 S00 (B206) Settings: U371 (2371) * S00 (B206) U372 (2372) * S00 (B206) U373 (2373) * S00 (B206) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals, XOR element 2 (output = B9196) FB 171 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 172 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 173 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 180 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9081 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 181 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=186 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 182 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=189 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 183 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9356 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 184 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9358 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 185 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9080 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 186 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9384 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 187 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U370 Source for input signals, XOR element 3 (output = B9197) As for U370 Source for input signals, XOR element 4 (output = B9198) As for U370 Inverters The input signal is inverted and the result applied to the specified binector. U380 Source for input signal, inverter 1 (output = B9450) (2380) 0 = binector B0000 * 1 = binector B0001 S00 etc. (B207) U381 (2381) * S00 (B207) U382 (2382) * S00 (B207) U383 (2383) * S00 (B207) U384 (2384) * S00 (B207) U385 (2385) * S00 (B207) U386 (2386) * S00 (B207) U387 (2387) * S00 (B207) Source for input signal, inverter 2 (output = B9451) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 3 (output = B9452) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 4 (output = B9453) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 5 (output = B9454) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 6 (output = B9455) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 7 (output = B9456) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 8 (output = B9457) As for U380 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 459 Parameter list PNU Description U388 (2388) * S00 (B207) U389 (2389) * S00 (B207) U390 (2390) * S00 (B207) U391 (2391) * S00 (B207) U392 (2392) * S00 (B207) U393 (2393) * S00 (B207) U394 (2394) * S00 (B207) U395 (2395) * S00 (B207) Source for input signal, inverter 9 (output = B9458) 03.2015 Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 189 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 190 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 191 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 192 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 193 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 194 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 195 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 11 (output = B9460) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 12 (output = B9461) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 13 (output = B9462) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 14 (output = B9463) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 15 (output = B9464) As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 16 (output = B9465) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 188 As for U380 Source for input signal, inverter 10 (output = B9459) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 As for U380 NAND elements with 3 inputs each The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are combined in an NAND operation and the result applied to the specified binector. U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 1 (output = B9470) FB 200 All binector numbers Ind: 3 P052 = 3 (2400) 1 FS= P051 = 40 i001 Source for input 1 * i001: 9065 Offline i002 Source for input 2 S00 i002: 9066 i003 Source for input 3 (B207) i003: 9551 Type: L2 Settings: U401 (2401) * S00 (B207) U402 (2402) * S00 (B207) U403 (2403) * S00 (B207) 460 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals, NAND element 2 (output = B9471) FB 201 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 202 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 203 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 3 (output = B9472) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 4 (output = B9473) As for U400 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U404 (2404) * S00 (B207) U405 (2405) * S00 (B207) U406 (2406) * S00 (B207) U407 (2407) * S00 (B207) U408 (2408) * S00 (B207) U409 (2409) * S00 (B207) U410 (2410) * S00 (B207) U411 (2411) * S00 (B207) Source for input signals, NAND element 5 (output = B9474) Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 205 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 206 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 207 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 208 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 209 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 210 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 211 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 7 (output = B9476) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 8 (output = B9477) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 9 (output = B9478) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 10 (output = B9479) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 11 (output = B9480) As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 12 (output = B9481) As for U400 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 204 As for U400 Source for input signals, NAND element 6 (output = B9475) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=1 Type: L2 11.65 Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches RS flipflops RS flipflops with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1st RESET, 2nd SET). RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON. U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 1 FB 215 All binector numbers Ind: 2 (2415) (outputs: Q = B9550, /Q = B9551) 1 FS= * i001: 9450 i001 Source for SET S00 i002: 9351 i002 Source for RESET (B210) Type: L2 Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. U416 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 2 FB 216 All binector numbers Ind: 2 (2416) (outputs: Q = B9552, /Q = B9553) 1 FS= * i001: 9453 As for U415 S00 i002: 9357 (B210) Type: L2 U417 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 3 FB 217 All binector numbers Ind: 2 (2417) (outputs: Q = B9554, /Q = B9555) 1 FS= * i001: 9359 As for U415 S00 i002: 9360 (B210) Type: L2 U418 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 4 FB 218 All binector numbers Ind: 2 (2418) (outputs: Q = B9556, /Q = B9557) 1 FS=0 * Type: L2 As for U415 S00 (B210) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 461 Parameter list PNU Description U419 (2419) * S00 (B210) U420 (2420) * S00 (B210) U421 (2421) * S00 (B210) U422 (2422) * S00 (B210) U423 (2423) * S00 (B210) U424 (2424) * S00 (B210) U425 (2425) * S00 (B210) U426 (2426) * S00 (B210) U427 (2427) * S00 (B210) U428 (2428) * S00 (B210) Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 5 (outputs: Q = B9558, /Q = B9559) 03.2015 Value range [Unit] Steps All binector numbers 1 FB 220 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 221 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 222 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 223 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 224 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 225 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 226 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 227 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 228 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 7 (outputs: Q = B9562, /Q = B9563) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 8 (outputs: Q = B9564, /Q = B9565) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 9 (outputs: Q = B9566, /Q = B9567) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 10 (outputs: Q = B9568, /Q = B9569) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 11 (outputs: Q = B9570, /Q = B9571) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 12 (outputs: Q = B9572, /Q = B9573) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 13 (outputs: Q = B9574, /Q = B9575) As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 14 (outputs: Q = B9576, /Q = B9577) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 219 As for U415 Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 6 (outputs: Q = B9560, /Q = B9561) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 As for U415 D flipflops D flipflops with RESET (Q=0), SET (Q=1) and STORE (Q=D on transition from 0 to 1) (priority: 1st RESET, 2nd SET, 3rd STORE). RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON. U430 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 1 FB 230 All binector numbers Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2430) (outputs: Q = B9490, /Q = B9491) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40 * Type: L2 Offline i001 Source for SET S00 i002 Source for D (B211) i003 Source for STORE i004 Source for RESET Settings: U431 (2431) * S00 (B211) 462 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 2 (outputs: Q = B9492, /Q = B9493) As for U430 FB 231 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U432 (2432) * S00 (B211) U433 (2433) * S00 (B211) Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 3 (outputs: Q = B9494, /Q = B9495) Value range [Unit] Steps See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 232 All binector numbers 1 FB 233 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 240 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9364 i002: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U430 Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 4 (outputs: Q = B9496, /Q = B9497) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 As for U430 Timer 1 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9580, inverted: B9581) U440 (2440) * S00 (B215) U441 (2441) S00 (B215) U442 (2442) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 1 i001 i002 Source for input signal Source for reset signal for the pulse generator (if U442=3) (in state "1", the pulse generator is set to "0") Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Time for timer 1 FB 240 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: None FS=10.500 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 1 FB 240 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 241 All binector numbers 1 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 2 FB 241 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 9383 i002: 0 Type: L2 Ind: None FS=0.500 Type: O2 Mode for timer 2 FB 241 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 242 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 3 FB 242 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 3 FB 242 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 243 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 1 2 3 ON delay OFF delay ON / OFF delay Pulse generator with positive edge triggering Timer 2 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9582, inverted: B9583) U443 (2443) * S00 (B215) U444 (2444) S00 (B215) U445 (2445) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal for timer 2 As for U440 As for U442 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Timer 3 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9584, inverted: B9585) U446 (2446) * S00 (B215) U447 (2447) S00 (B215) U448 (2448) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal for timer 3 As for U440 As for U442 Timer 4 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9586, inverted: B9587) U449 (2449) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal for timer 4 As for U440 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 463 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U450 (2450) Time for timer 4 FB 243 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Mode for timer 4 FB 243 S00 (B215) U451 (2451) * S00 (B215) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 244 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 5 FB 244 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 5 FB 244 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 245 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 6 FB 245 0.000 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: None FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 6 FB 245 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 246 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 7 FB 246 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 7 FB 246 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 247 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U442 Timer 5 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9588, inverted: B9589) U452 (2452) * S00 (B215) U453 (2453) S00 (B215) U454 (2454) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal for timer 5 As for U440 As for U442 Timer 6 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9590, inverted: B9591) U455 (2455) * S00 (B215) U456 (2456) S00 (B215) U457 (2457) * S00 (B215) Source for input signal for timer 6 As for U440 As for U442 Timer 7 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9592, inverted: B9593) U458 (2458) * S00 (B216) U459 (2459) S00 (B216) U460 (2460) * S00 (B216) Source for input signal for timer 7 As for U440 As for U442 Timer 8 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9594, inverted: B9595) U461 (2461) * S00 (B216) 464 Source for input signal for timer 8 As for U440 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U462 (2462) Time for timer 8 FB 247 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Mode for timer 8 FB 247 S00 (B216) U463 (2463) * S00 (B216) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 248 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 9 FB 248 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 9 FB 248 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 249 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Time for timer 10 FB 249 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Mode for timer 10 FB 249 0 to 3 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 251 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 252 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline As for U442 Timer 9 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9596, inverted: B9597) U464 (2464) * S00 (B216) U465 (2465) S00 (B216) U466 (2466) * S00 (B216) Source for input signal for timer 9 As for U440 As for U442 Timer 10 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9598, inverted: B9599) U467 (2467) * S00 (B216) U468 (2468) S00 (B216) U469 (2469) * S00 (B216) Source for input signal for timer 10 As for U440 As for U442 Binary signal selector switches The control signal (binector) is selected via index i001 of the parameter. Control signal = 0: Binector as set in index i002 is applied to the output Control signal = 1: Binector as set in index i003 is applied to the output U470 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 1 FB 250 (2470) (output = B9482) * i001 Source for control signal S00 i002 Source for output signal when control signal = 0 (B216) i003 Source for output signal when control signal = 1 Settings: U471 (2471) * S00 (B216) U472 (2472) * S00 (B216) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 2 (output = B9483) As for U470 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 3 (output = B9484) As for U470 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 465 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U473 (2473) * S00 (B216) U474 (2474) * S00 (B216) Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 4 (output = B9485) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 253 All binector numbers 1 FB 254 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Filter time for actual value All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Derivative-action time for actual value (D component) FB 114 0.000 to 30.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: 4 FS=0.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 0.00 to 600.00 [s] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 0.10 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online As for U470 Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 5 (output = B9486) As for U470 11.66 Technology controller Technology controller: Actual value U480 (2480) * S00 (B170) U481 (2481) S00 FDS (B170) U482 (2482) S00 FDS (B170) U483 (2483) * S00 FDS (B170) Source for actual value Selection of connectors to be added as the actual value 0.000 = D component deactivated See also U483 Factor for derivative-action time 0 1 Derivative-action time = U482 * 1 Derivative-action time = U482 * 1000 Technology controller: Setpoint U484 (2484) * S00 (B170) U485 (2485) S00 FDS (B170) U486 (2486) * S00 (B170) U487 (2487) Source for setpoint Selection of connectors to be added as the setpoint 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Injectable additional setpoint This parameter setting is added to the setpoint when the binector selected in U486 changes to the log. "1" state Source for control bit for injection of additional setpoint 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Filter time for setpoint S00 FDS (B170) Technology controller: Controller parameters U488 (2488) S00 FDS (B170) 466 P gain SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U489 (2489) * S00 (B170) U490 (2490) Source for input quantity (x) for Kp adaptation S00 FDS (B170) U491 (2491) S00 FDS (B170) U492 (2492) S00 FDS (B170) U493 (2493) S00 FDS (B170) U494 (2494) S00 FDS (B170) U495 (2495) * S00 FDS (B170) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 114 All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 1 (x1) FB 114 0.00 to 200.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 2 (x2) FB 114 0.00 to 200.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=100.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Minimum value (y1) FB 114 0.10 to 30.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 0.10 to 30.00 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 0.010 to 60.000 [s] 0.001 Ind: 4 FS=3.000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Minimum value of Kp factor (y) when x x1 Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Maximum value (y2) Maximum value of Kp factor (y) when x x2 Reset time See also U495 Factor for reset time 0 1 Reset time = U494 * 1 Reset time = U494 * 1000 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Technology controller: Speed droop A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the technology controller (acts on summation point of setpoint and actual value). This loop can be activated and deactivated by settings in parameter U496 (loop can also be deactivated by setting U497 = 0). U496 Source for control bit for speed droop injection FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3 (2496) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40 0 = binector B0000 * Type: L2 Offline 1 = binector B0001 S00 etc. (B170) U497 Speed droop FB 114 0.0 to 60.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2497) [%] FS=0.0 P051 = 40 Example: 0.1 Type: O2 Online S00 A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% reduction in the setpoint at a FDS 100% controller output ("softening" of closed-loop control). (B170) U498 Positive limit for speed droop FB 114 0.00 to 199.99 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2498) [%] FS=100.00 P051 = 40 0.01 Type: O2 Online S00 FDS (B170) U499 (2499) Negative limit for speed droop FB 114 -200.00 to 0.00 [%] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=-100.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 114 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline S00 FDS (B170) Technology controller: Control bits U500 (2500) * S00 (B170) Source for technology controller enabling command 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 467 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U502 (2502) * S00 FDS (B170) U503 (2503) * S00 FDS (B170) U504 (2504) * S00 FDS (B170) PI/PID controller switchover 0 1 1 1 FB 114 Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I controller) Controller P component is active Set I component to zero 0 FB 114 PI controller (D component is applied only in actual-value channel) PID controller (D component is applied for control deviation) Set P component to zero 0 Value range [Unit] Steps FB 114 Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P controller) Controller I component is active No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Technology controller: Set I component When the state of the binector selected in U506 switches from log. "0" to "1", the I component of the technology controller is set to the value parameterized in U505. With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I component. U505 Source for setting value for I component FB 114 All connector numInd: None P052 = 3 (2505) bers FS=0 P051 = 40 0 = connector K0000 * 1 Type: L2 Offline 1 = connector K0001 S00 etc. (B170) U506 Source for control bit "Set I component" FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None P052 = 3 (2506) 1 FS=0 P051 = 40 0 = binector B0000 * Type: L2 Offline 1 = binector B0001 S00 etc. (B170) Technology controller: Output, limitation U507 (2507) * S00 (B170) U508 (2508) S00 FDS (B170) U509 (2509) * S00 (B170) Source for variable positive limit FB 114 After multiplication with U508, the contents of the selected connector act as a positive limit for the technology controller output. All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9252 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Note: If the selected connector contains a negative value, a negative maximum value is applied to the output of this limiter stage. Positive limit for technology controller output FB 114 See also U507 Source for variable negative limit FB 114 After multiplication with U510, the contents of the selected connector act as a negative limit for the technology controller output. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Note: If the selected connector contains a positive value, a positive minimum value is applied to the output of this limiter stage. Note: Connector K9252 contains the positive limiting value with inverted sign generated by U507 and U508. By setting U509=9252 and U510=100.0, therefore, it is possible to set the negative and positive limits symmetrically. 468 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U510 (2510) Negative limit for technology controller output S00 FDS (B170) U511 (2511) * S00 (B170) U512 (2512) S00 FDS (B170) Value range [Unit] Steps FB 114 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: O2 FB 114 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline FB 114 -100.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.01 Ind: 4 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online FB 115 All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 10.0 to 6553.5 [mm] 0.1 Ind: 4 FS=6500.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online See also U509 Source for variable weighting factor for output After multiplication with U512, the contents of the selected connector act as a weighting factor for the technology controller output. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Weighting factor for output See also U511 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.67 Velocity/speed calculator Speed/velocity calculator Function: v _ act = D n _ rated n _ act i 100% v_act Actual velocity D Diameter n_rated Rated speed i Gear ratio n_act Actual speed U515 Source for actual speed (2515) 0 = connector K0000 * 1 = connector K0001 S00 etc. (B190) (n021, U521, K9256) (U517, U518) (U520) (U519) (U515) Velocity/speed calculator Function: n _ set = v _ set i 100% D n _ rated n_set Setpoint speed (n023, K9257) D Diameter (U517, U518, U523) n_rated Rated speed (U520) i Gear ratio (U519) v_set Setpoint velocity (U516, U522) U516 Source for set velocity FB 115 (2516) A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the set velocity * set in U522 S00 (B190) U517 (2517) * S00 (B190) U518 (2518) S00 FDS (B190) 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Source for diameter FB 115 A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the diameter set in U523 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Minimum diameter FB 115 Lower limit for diameter set in U517 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 469 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U519 (2519) Gear ratio (i) FB 115 1.00 to 300.00 0.01 Rated speed (n_rated) FB 115 S00 FDS (B190) U520 (2520) S00 FDS (B190) U521 (2521) S00 (B190) U522 (2522) S00 (B190) U523 (2523) S00 (B190) Normalization for actual velocity Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 100 to 4000 [rev/m] 1 Ind: 4 FS=1450 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 327.67 [m/s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=16.38 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 327.67 [m/s] 0.01 Ind: None FS=16.38 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 [mm] 1 Ind: None FS=1638 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 16384 in K9256 correspond to the actual velocity set here Normalization for set velocity See parameter U516 Normalization for diameter See parameter U517 11.68 Variable moment of inertia FB 115 Calculation of the variable moment of inertia Function: 4 4 D - D Hulse K JV = 4 D max Variable moment of inertia JV D Diameter Diameter of the sleeve DHulse Maximum diameter Dmax K Constant U525 Source for input quantities (2525) 0 = Connector K0000 * 1 = Connector K0001 S00 etc. (B191) i001 i002 i003 i004 U526 (2526) S00 (B191) U527 (2527) S00 (B191) U528 (2528) S00 (B191) U529 (2529) S00 (B191) 470 [SW 1.8 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 [mm] 1 Ind: None FS=10000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 [mm] 1 Ind: None FS=10000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 10 to 60000 [mm] 1 Ind: None FS=10000 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online [SW 1.8 and later] 0.01 to 100.00 0.01 Ind: None FS=1.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Diameter (16384 are equivalent to set diameter U526) Diameter of the sleeve (16384 are equivalent to set diameter U527) Maximum diameter (16384 are equivalent to set diameter U528) Constant (16384 are equivalent to set factor U529) Normalization for diameter See parameter U525 Normalization for diameter of the sleeve See parameter U525 Normalization for maximum diameter See parameter U525 Normalization for constant K See parameter U525 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 50 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 20 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.69 PI controller PI controller 1 = FB260 PI controller 2 = FB261 PI controller 3 = FB262 PI controller 4 = FB263 PI controller 5 = FB264 PI controller 6 = FB265 PI controller 7 = FB266 PI controller 8 = FB267 PI controller 9 = FB268 PI controller 10 = FB269 U530 Source for input quantity (2530) 0 = Connector K0000 * 1 = Connector K0001 S00 etc. (B180... B189) i001: i002: ... i010: [SW 1.8 and later] input quantity input quantity PI controller 1 PI controller 2 input quantity PI controller 10 Enable and setting of the PI controllers U531 (2531) * S00 (B180... B189) U532 (2532) * S00 (B180... B189) Source for control signals (enable PI controller) [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: 0 = Disable controller 0 = Disable controller PI controller 1 PI controller 2 0 = Disable controller PI controller 10 i011: i012: ... i020: 1 = Freeze I component 1 = Freeze I component PI controller 1 PI controller 2 1 = Freeze I component PI controller 10 i021: i022: ... i030: 1 = Freeze output 1 = Freeze output PI controller 1 PI controller 2 1 = Freeze output PI controller 10 i031: i032: ... i040: 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction PI controller 1 PI controller 2 1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction PI controller 10 i041: 1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction i042: 1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction ... i050: 1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction Source for control signals (set PI controller) PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: i011: i012: ... i020: 0 = Set I component 0 = Set I component PI controller 1 PI controller 2 0 = Set I component PI controller 10 0 = Set output 0 = Set output PI controller 1 PI controller 2 0 = Set output PI controller 10 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 471 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U533 (2533) * S00 Source for Setting values (B180... B189) Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: i011: i012: ... i020: Setting value for I component Setting value for I component PI controller 1 PI controller 2 Setting value for I component PI controller 10 Setting value for Output Setting value for Output PI controller 1 PI controller 2 Setting value for Output PI controller 10 All connector numbers 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 20 FS=0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: 10 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.10 to 200.00 0.01 Ind: 10 FS=3.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Filtering of the input signals U534 (2534) * S00 (B180... B189) U535 (2535) S00 (B180... B189) Source for variable filtering time for the input signal [SW 1.8 and later] The content of the selected connector acts as filtering time for the PI controller after multiplication with U535. 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: variable filtering time i002: variable filtering time ... i010: variable filtering time Filtering time for the input signal i001: i002: ... i010: PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 [SW 1.8 and later] filtering time filtering time PI controller 1 PI controller 2 filtering time PI controller 10 Controller parameters U536 (2536) * S00 (B180... B189) U537 (2537) S00 (B180... B189) U538 (2538) * S00 (B180... B189) Source for variable P gain All connector numbers The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the PI controller 1 after multiplication with U537. 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: variable P gain i002: variable P gain ... i010: variable P gain PI controller P gain i001: P gain i002: P gain ... i010: P gain Source for variable Integration time PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 [SW 1.8 and later] PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 [SW 1.8 and later] The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the PI controller after multiplication with U539. 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: 472 [SW 1.8 and later] variable Integration time variable Integration time PI controller 1 PI controller 2 variable Integration time PI controller 10 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U539 (2539) PI controller integration time i001: i002: ... i010: S00 (B180... B189) Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.8 and later] Integration time Integration time PI controller 1 PI controller 2 Integration time PI controller 10 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 10 FS=3.000 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 Ind: 10 FS=100.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS= i001: 9306 i002: 9316 i003: 9326 i004: 9336 i005: 9346 i006: 9356 i007: 9366 i008: 9376 i009: 9386 i010: 9396 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.010 to 10.000 [s] 0.001 Control bits U540 (2540) * S00 Freeze P component (B180... B189) i001: PI controller 1 i002: PI controller 2 ... i010: PI controller 10 Freeze I component U541 (2541) * S00 (B180... B189) 0 1 [SW 1.8 and later] Controller P component frozen (i.e. pure I controller) Controller P component active [SW 1.8 and later] 0 1 Controller I component frozen (i.e. pure P controller) Controller I component active i001: i002: ... i010: PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 Output, Limitation U542 (2542) * S00 (B180... B189) Source for variable positive limit The content of the selected connector acts as the positive limit for the output of the PI controller after multiplication with U543. 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: U543 (2543) S00 (B180... B189) U544 (2544) * S00 (B180... B189) [SW 1.8 and later] PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 Note: If the content of the selected connector has a negative value, this causes a negative maximum value at the output of this limiter stage. Positive limit for the output of the PI controller [SW 1.8 and later] See also U542 Source for variable negative Limit [SW 1.8 and later] The content of the selected connector acts as the negative limit for the output of the technology controller after multiplication with U510. 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: ... i010: PI controller 1 PI controller 2 PI controller 10 Note: If the content of the selected connector has a positive value, this causes a positive minimum value at the output of this limiter stage. Note: Connectors K9306 to K9396 contain for PI controllers 1 to 10 the positive limitation values formed by U542 and U543 with an inverted sign. In this way it is possible to set the negative limitation symmetrically to the positive limitation by setting U544= 9306 to 9396 and U545=100.0. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Type: L2 473 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U545 (2545) Negative limit for the output of the PI controller S00 (B180... B189) Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.8 and later] See also U544 0.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 10 FS=100.0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.70 Closed-loop control elements Derivative / delay elements [SW 1.8 and later} U550 (2550) * S00 (B156) (B157) (B158) U551 (2551) * S00 (B156) (B157) (B158) U552 (2552) S00 (B156) (B157) (B158) U553 (2553) * S00 (B156) (B157) (B158) 474 Source for input quantity FB 270 to FB 279 [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: Input quantity derivative/delay element 1 i002: Input quantity derivative/delay element 2 i003: Input quantity derivative/delay element 3 i004: Input quantity derivative/delay element 4 i005: Input quantity derivative/delay element 5 i006: Input quantity derivative/delay element 6 i007: Input quantity derivative/delay element 7 i008: Input quantity derivative/delay element 8 i009: Input quantity derivative/delay element 9 i010: Input quantity derivative/delay element 10 Source for multiplier for derivative-action time (FB 270) (FB 271) (FB 272) (FB 273) (FB 274) (FB 275) (FB 276) (FB 277) (FB 278) (FB 279) [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: Multiplier i002: Multiplier I003: Multiplier i004: Multiplier i005: Multiplier i006: Multiplier i007: Multiplier i008: Multiplier i009: Multiplier i010: Multiplier Derivative-action time derivative/delay element 1 derivative/delay element 2 derivative/delay element 3 derivative/delay element 4 derivative/delay element 5 derivative/delay element 6 derivative/delay element 7 derivative/delay element 8 derivative/delay element 9 derivative/delay element 10 i001: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 1 i002: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 2 i003: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 3 i004: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 4 i005: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 5 i006: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 7 i008: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 8 i009: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 9 i010: Der.-act.time deriv./delay element 10 Source for multiplier for filtering time (FB 270) (FB 271) (FB 272) (FB 273) (FB 274) (FB 275) (FB 276) (FB 277) (FB 278) (FB 279) [SW 1.8 and later] (FB 270) (FB 271) (FB 272) (FB 273) (FB 274) (FB 276) (FB 277) (FB 278) (FB 279) [SW 1.8 and later] 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier Multiplier derivative/delay element 1 derivative/delay element 2 derivative/delay element 3 derivative/delay element 4 derivative/delay element 5 derivative/delay element 6 derivative/delay element 7 derivative/delay element 8 derivative/delay element 9 derivative/delay element 10 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 Ind: 10 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline (FB 270) (FB 271) (FB 272) (FB 273) (FB 274) (FB 275) (FB 276) (FB 277) (FB 278) (FB 279) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U554 (2554) Filtering time S00 (B156) (B157) (B158) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.8 and later] Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time Filtering time derivative/delay element 1 derivative/delay element 2 derivative/delay element 3 derivative/delay element 4 derivative/delay element 5 derivative/delay element 6 derivative/delay element 7 derivative/delay element 8 derivative/delay element 9 derivative/delay element 10 (FB 270) (FB 271) (FB 272) (FB 273) (FB 274) (FB 275) (FB 276) (FB 277) (FB 278) (FB 279) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 10 FS=100 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9368 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9382 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=15.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1 11.71 Control inputs, control outputs, setpoint reduction n600 (2600) Display of status of control inputs Representation on operator panel (PMU): (G117) 7 Segment ON: Segment OFF: 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 corresponding terminal is activated corresponding terminal is not activated Segment or bit 0 .... Terminal 72 1 ..... Terminal 73 2 ..... Terminal 74 3 ..... Terminal 75 4 ...... Terminal 76 5 ...... Terminal 77 6 ...... Terminal 78 7 ...... Terminal 79 U605 (2605) * (G160) Source for zero delay-angle command 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Setpoint reduction U607 (2607) * BDS (G135) U608 (2608) FDS (G135) Source for activation of the setpoint reduction 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. 0 Setpoint reduction active The Setpoint (before the ramp-function generator) is multiplied by the factor set in parameter U608 1 No setpoint reduction Multiplier for speed setpoint when setpoint reduction is activated U614 (2614) (G160) Ramp-up time for setpoint with zero delay-angle 0 to 1000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U617 (2617) Enable terminal 37 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online (G135) U618 (2618) (G180) 0 terminal 37 inactive 1 terminal 37 active Enable terminal 38 0 1 terminal 38 inactive terminal 38 active SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 475 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U619 (2619) * BDS (G112) n620 (2620) Source for "No fault" signal (terminals 109/110) All binector numbers 1 (G119) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=107 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: None Type: V2 P052 = 3 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=107 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9367 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9361 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Display of status of control outputs Representation on operator panel (PMU): 6 Segment ON: Segment OFF: 5 4 3 2 1 0 corresponding terminal is activated (relay contact closed) corresponding terminal is not activated (relay contact open) Segment or bit 0 ..... "No fault" signal (terminal 81/82) 1 ..... Acknowledgement signal (terminal 83/84) 2 ..... Brake contactor (terminal 85/86) 3 ..... Rotor contactor stage 1 (terminal 87/88) 4...... Rotor contactor stage 2 (terminal 89/90) 5...... Rotor contactor stage 3 (terminal 91/92) 6...... Rotor contactor stage 4 (terminal 93/94) U621 (2621) * BDS (G119) U622 (2622) * BDS (G119) U623 (2623) * BDS (G119) Source for "No fault" signal (terminals 81/82) U627 (2627) FDS (G119) Filter time for actual speed value for switch over of rotor stages 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U628 (2628) FDS (G136) (G160) U629 (2629) FDS (G136) Threshold for "Setpoint in the controlled range" signal 10.0 to 199.9 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=55.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for "Setpoint in the controlled range" signal 0.1 to 10.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Setpoint for premature switch over to controlled torque characteristic - MI 0.0 to -100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=-1.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for premature switch over to controlled torque characteristic - MI 0.1 to 10.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for acknowledgement signal (terminals 83/84) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for brake contactor (terminals 85/86) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.72 Rotor stage stepping U630 (2630) FDS (G119) U631 (2631) FDS (G119) 476 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps 0.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=1.0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U632 (2632) FDS (G119) U633 (2633) FDS (G119) Setpoint for premature switch over to controlled torque characteristic - MII Hysteresis for premature switch over to controlled torque characteristic - MII 0.1 to 10.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U634 (2634) FDS (G119) U635 (2635) FDS (G119) U636 (2636) FDS (G119) U637 (2637) FDS (G119) U638 (2638) FDS (G119) U639 (2639) FDS (G119) Threshold for switch over to rotor contactor stage 2 10.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=50.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for switch over to rotor contactor stage 2 0.1 to 50.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Threshold for switch over to rotor contactor stage 3 10.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=75.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for switch over to rotor contactor stage 3 0.1 to 50.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Threshold for switch over to rotor contactor stage 4 10.0 to 100.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=90.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for switch over to rotor contactor stage 4 0.1 to 50.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 4 FS=5.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U640 (2640) Wait period when switching rotor contactors 0 to 2000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 3 FS= i001: 0 i002: 0 i003: 50 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Switching of rotor contactor 2 when specified actual speed value reaches the controlled range Switching of rotor contactor 3 when specified actual speed value reaches the controlled range Switching of rotor contactor 4 when specified actual speed value reaches the controlled range i 001: i 002: i 003: Pick-up time of rotor contactors Drop-out time of rotor contactors Pick-up time of rotor contactors (see header for parameter U641 ff.) Off-load switching is recommended to increase the service life of the rotor contactors. A disadvantage of off-load switching of rotor contactors: there is a torquefree interval, and this may lead to a deviation in the speed. Whenever a rotor contactor is switched in, the firing pulses are disabled for the time set at index 001 (zero current interval). Whenever a rotor contactor is switched out, the firing pulses are disabled for the time set at index 002 (zero current interval). Preventing current peaks during rotor stage stepping: To prevent excessive stator current values occurring when switching in the next rotor contactor, it is desirable, at the same time as the contactor is switched in (delayed by the time set at U640 index 003), to reduce the I component of the speed controller by roughly the same proportion by which the rotor resistance is also reduced. U641 Factor for I component n controller with rotor stage 1 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2641) [%] FS=50.0 P051 = 40 R (stage 1) / R (counter-torque stage) 0.1% Type: O2 Online FDS U642 Factor for I component n controller with rotor stage 2 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2642) [%] FS=50.0 P051 = 40 R (stage 2) / R (stage 1) 0.1% Type: O2 Online FDS U643 Factor for I component n controller with rotor stage 3 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2643) [%] FS=50.0 P051 = 40 R (stage 3) / R (stage 2) 0.1% Type: O2 Online FDS U644 Factor for I component n controller with rotor stage 4 0.0 to 100.0 Ind: 4 P052 = 3 (2644) [%] FS=50.0 P051 = 40 R (stage 4) / R (stage 4) 0.1% Type: O2 Online FDS SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 477 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps 1 to 1000 [%] 1% No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=100 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online U645 (2645) FDS (G151) U646 (2646) FDS (G151) U647 (2647) FDS (G151) U648 (2648) FDS (G151) U649 (2649) FDS (G151) Factor for P component n controller with counter-torque operation 1 to 1000 [%] 1% Ind: 4 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 1000 [%] 1% Ind: 4 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 1000 [%] 1% Ind: 4 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 1000 [%] 1% Ind: 4 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -100.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=50.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Start pulse lowering -100.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online Source for start pulse All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=451 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=452 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=9064 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9063 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9064 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=18 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline effective P gain for speed controller with counter-torque operation = P225 * U645 Factor for P component n controller with rotor stage 1 effective P gain for speed controller with rotor stage 1 = P225 * U646 Factor for P component n controller with rotor stage 2 effective P gain for speed controller with rotor stage 2 = P225 * U647 Factor for P component n controller with rotor stage 3 effective P gain for speed controller with rotor stage 3 = P225 * U648 Factor for P component n controller with rotor stage 4 effective P gain for speed controller with rotor stage 4 = P225 * U649 11.73 Start pulse, speed controller (see also Section 8, Sheet G150) U651 Start pulse (integrator setting value for the speed controller) (2651) FDS (G150) U652 Multiplier for start pulse when lowering (2652) when start pulse as in U651 is also used for a positive setpoint (lowering) FDS (G150) U653 (2653) FDS (G150) U655 (2655) * (G150) U656 (2656) * (G150) U657 (2657) * BDS (G150) 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for start pulse lowering 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. Source for switch over of start pulse lifting/lowering 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. 11.74 Evaluation of a four-stage master switch (see also Section 8, Sheet G125) U660 Source for travel command 1 (2660) 0 = binector B0000 * 1 = binector B0001 (G125) etc. U661 Source for travel command 2 (2661) 0 = binector B0000 * 1 = binector B0001 (G125) etc. U662 Source for switch over to setpoint stage S2 (2662) 0 = binector B0000 * 1 = binector B0001 (G125) etc. 478 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U663 (2663) * (G125) Source for switch over to setpoint stage S3 All binector numbers 1 U664 (2664) * (G125) U665 (2665) (G125) U666 (2666) (G125) U667 (2667) (G125) U668 (2668) (G125) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for switch over to setpoint stage S4 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Setpoint for setpoint stage S1 Setpoint for setpoint stage S2 Setpoint for setpoint stage S3 Setpoint for setpoint stage S4 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=20 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: None FS=9083 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0.00 to 110.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=10.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0.00 to 110.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 110.00 [%] 0.01% 0.00 to 110.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: None FS=25.00 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=40.00 Type: O2 Ind: None FS=100.00 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS= i001: 46 i002: 0 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: 3 FS= i001: 9471 i002: 9472 i003: 9473 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline -32766 to 32766 1 Ind: 4 FS=10000 Type: I2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline 11.75 Position/positional deviation acquisition U670 (2670) * S00 (B152) Source for actual position values FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of connector whose values are to be used as actual position values. i001: Actual position value 1 i002: Actual position value 2 Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. U671 (2671) * S00 (B152) U672 (2672) * S00 (B152) U673 (2673) * FDS S00 (B152) Source for setting/resetting signal for position acquisition FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of binector whose value is to be used as the setting or resetting signals. i001: Reset actual position value 1 i002: Set actual position value 1 i003: i004: Reset actual position value 2 Set actual position value 2 i005: i006: Reset positional deviation Set positional deviation Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Source for setting values FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of connectors whose values are to be used as setting values i001: Setting value for position 1 i002: Setting value for position 2 i003: Setting value for positional deviation Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Numerator of transformation ratio for actual position value 2 FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] U673 must be less than or equal to U674, otherwise F058 is output with fault value 14 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 479 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U674 (2674) * FDS S00 (B152) U675 (2675) * S00 (B152) Denominator of transformation ratio for actual position value 2 FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 to 32767 1 Source for connecting the positional deviation offset FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] U676 (2676) * S00 (B152) U677 (2677) * S00 (B152) U678 (2678) * S00 (B152) Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=10000 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: none FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline All connector numbers 1 Ind: none FS=9474 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline -32768 to 32767 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: I2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: none FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 online All connector numbers 1 Ind: none FS=9483 Type: L2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Offline 1 to 65535 1 Ind: none FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Online Hysteresis for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor FB 58 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 to 65535 1 Ind: none FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Online x value for root function and gradient 1 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=1000 Type: O2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Online Selection of the binector whose value connects the offset of the positional deviation Settings: 0 = Binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. Source for positional deviation offset FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of the connector whose value is to be used as the offset of the positional deviation Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. Fixed values for position acquisition FB 54 [SW 2.0 and later] i001: LOW word of double-word connector KK9471 i002: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9471 i003: LOW word of double-word connector KK9472 i004: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9472 i005: LOW word of double-word connector KK9473 i006: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9473 i007: LOW word of double-word connector KK9474 i008: HIGH word of double-word connector KK9474 Memory for actual position values: Initial value at POWER ON FB 54 [SW 2.1 and later] 0 Initial value = 0 1 Initial value is set such that on POWER ON KK9481 or KK9482 assumes whatever its setting value was before the electronics supply was disconnected. 11.76 Root extractor U680 (2680) * S00 (B153) Source for the input of the root extractor FB 58 [SW 2.0 and later] Selection of the connector whose value is to be used for the root extractor input. Settings: 0 = Connector K0000 1 = Connector K0001 etc. U681 (2681) S00 (B153) U682 (2682) S00 (B153) U683 (2683) S00 (B153) Operating point for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor FB 58 [SW 2.0 and later] applied to connector KK9483 Definition of input values i001: i002: 480 FB 58 [SW 2.0 and later] Distance between input value of root function and fictitious passage through zero for y value U684.001 x value of gradient for y value U684.002 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U684 (2684) y value for root function and gradient S00 (B153) Definition of output values i001: i002: Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=100.00 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 2 1 Ind:6 FS= 0 Type O2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 15 1 Ind:6 FS= 2 Type O2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online [SW 1.9 and later] -20.00 to 20.00 [V] 0.01V Ind:6 FS= 0 Type I2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online [SW 1.9 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind:6 FS= 0 Type L2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online FB 58 [SW 2.0 and later] 0.01 to 199.99 [%] 0.01 y value of root function for distance U683.001 y value of gradient for x value U683.002 11.77 Configuration of SCB1 with SCI U690 Configuration of analog inputs of SCI1 (2690) Definition of type of input signals (Z150) (Z151) Parameter value Terminals X428/3, 6, 9 0: 1: 2: -10 V ... + 10 V 0 V ... + 10 V [SW 1.9 and later] Terminals X428/5, 8, 11 - 20 mA ... + 20 mA 0 mA ... + 20 mA 4 mA ... + 20 mA Notes: - Only one signal can be processed per input. Voltage or current signals can be evaluated. - Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals. - Only unipolar signals are permitted with settings 1 and 2, i.e. the internal process quantities are also unipolar. - When setting 2 is selected, an input current of < 2 mA causes shutdown on faults (open-circuit monitoring) - The offset compensation for the analog inputs is set in parameter U692. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Slave 1, analog input 1 Slave 1, analog input 2 Slave 1, analog input 3 Slave 2, analog input 1 Slave 2, analog input 2 Slave 2, analog input 3 U691 Smoothing time constant for analog inputs of SCI1 (2691) Formula: (Z150) (Z151) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: T = 2ms * 2 to the power of U691 Slave 1, analog input 1 Slave 1, analog input 2 Slave 1, analog input 3 Slave 2, analog input 1 Slave 2, analog input 2 Slave 2, analog input 3 U692 Offset compensation for analog inputs of SCI1 (2692) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 (Z150) (Z151) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Slave 1, analog input 1 Slave 1, analog input 2 Slave 1, analog input 3 Slave 2, analog input 1 Slave 2, analog input 2 Slave 2, analog input 3 U693 Actual value output via analog outputs of SCI1 (2693) Selection of connectors whose values are to be output (for details, see Operating Instructions for SCI1) (Z155) (Z156) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Slave 1, analog output 1 Slave 1, analog output 2 Slave 1, analog output 3 Slave 2, analog output 1 Slave 2, analog output 2 Slave 2, analog output 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 481 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U694 Gain for analog outputs of SCI1 (2694) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 (Z155) (Z156) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Value range [Unit] Steps Offset compensation for analog outputs of SCI1 (2695) Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online -320.00 to 320.00 [V] 0.01V [SW 1.9 and later] -100.00 to 100.00 [V] 0.01V Ind:6 FS= 0 Type I2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online [SW 1.9 and later] 0 to 65000 [ms] 1ms Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online Slave 1, analog output 1 Slave 1, analog output 2 Slave 1, analog output 3 Slave 2, analog output 1 Slave 2, analog output 2 Slave 2, analog output 3 U695 (Z155) (Z156) [SW 1.9 and later] No. indices Factory setting Type Ind:6 FS= 10.00 Type I2 Slave 1, analog output 1 Slave 1, analog output 2 Slave 1, analog output 3 Slave 2, analog output 1 Slave 2, analog output 2 Slave 2, analog output 3 U696 Telegram failure time for SCB1 (2696) Fault message F079 is displayed if no process data are exchanged with the supplementary board within this delay period. The monitoring function is implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, only setting values which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are meaningful. Settings: 0 1...65000 No time monitoring Permissible time interval between two process data exchange operations before a fault message is output. Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). 482 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description n697 Diagnostic information of SCB1 (2697) Visualization parameter for displaying diagnostic info relating to SCB1. The displayed values overflow at "255" (e.g. the number of telegrams begins at "0" again after "255"). i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: i011: i012: i013: i014: i015: i016: i017: i018: i019: i020: i021: i022: i023: i024: No. indices Factory setting Type Ind:24 Type O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind:24 FS= 0 Type L2 P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online [SW 1.9 and later] Number of error-free telegrams Number of errored telegrams Number of voltage failures on slaves Number of interruptions in fiber-optic connection Number of missing response telegrams Number of search telegrams for slave location ETX error Number of configuration telegrams Highest terminal numbers needed according to PZD connection (parameterization of connectors or binectors) Analog inputs/outputs required according to PZD connection of setpoint channel and actual value output via SCI (parameterization of appropriate connectors) Reserved Reserved SCB1 alarm word Setting defining whether slave no. 1 is needed and type if applicable 0: No slave required 1: SCI1 2: SCI2 Setting defining whether slave no. 2 is needed and type if applicable 0: No slave required 1: SCI1 2: SCI2 SCI board: Initialization error SCB1 generation: Year SCB1 generation: Day and month SCI slave1: Software version SCI slave1: Year of generation SCI slave1: Day and month of generation SCI slave2: Software version SCI slave2: Year of generation SCI slave2: Day and month of generation U698 Binector selection for binary outputs of SCI (2698) Selection of binectors whose states are output via the binary outputs of the SCIs i001: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 1 i002: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 2 i003: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 3 i004: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 4 i005: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 5 i006: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 6 i007: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 7 i008: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 8 i009: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 9 i010: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 10 i011: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 11 i012: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output12 i013: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 1 i014: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 2 i015: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 3 i016: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 4 i017: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 5 i018: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 6 i019: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 7 i020: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 8 i021: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 9 i022: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 10 i023: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 11 i024: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output12 (Z135) (Z136) (Z145) (Z146) Value range [Unit] Steps SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [SW 1.9 and later] 483 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description n699 Display of SCB1/SCI process data (2699) All values in hexadecimal representation (Z130) (Z131) (Z135) (Z136) (Z140) (Z141) (Z145) (Z146) (Z150) (Z151) (Z155) (Z156) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: i010: i011: i012: i013: i014: i015: i016: Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 1.9 and later] No. indices Factory setting Type Ind:16 Type L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 =40 Online SCI slave1, binary inputs SCI slave1, analog input1 SCI slave1, analog input2 SCI slave1, analog input3 SCI slave2, binary inputs SCI slave2, analog input1 SCI slave2, analog input2 SCI slave2, analog input3 SCI slave1, binary outputs SCI slave1, analog output1 SCI slave1, analog output2 SCI slave1, analog output3 SCI slave2, binary outputs SCI slave2, binary outputs SCI slave2, analog output2 SCI slave2, analog output3 11.78 Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3 U710 (2710) * (Z110) (Z111) Initialize link to supplementary boards st i001 Initialization of 1 communications board (in slot with lower ID letter) i002 Initialization of 2nd communications board (in slot with higher ID letter 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online Settings: 0 The link to supplementary boards is re-initialized. After the configuration parameters for supplementary boards have been changed, U710 must be set to 0 so that the new settings can take effect. The parameter is then set automatically to 1. Note: Data transmission is interrupted while initialization is in progress. 1 U711 (2711) * (Z110) (Z111) Deactivated Communications board parameter 1 (CB parameter 1) See documentation for installed COM BOARD. This parameter is relevant only if a communications board is installed. The validity of the setting is monitored by the CB. If the CB rejects the setting, fault message F080 is displayed with fault value 5 Index 1 is used to parameterize the 1st CB (including CB behind TB) and index 2 to parameterize the 2nd CB. U712 (2712) * (Z110) (Z111) U713 (2713) * (Z110) (Z111) U714 (2714) * (Z110) (Z111) U715 (2715) * (Z110) (Z111) 484 Communications board parameter 2 (CB parameter 2) See U711 Communications board parameter 3 (CB parameter 3) See U711 Communications board parameter 4 (CB parameter 4) See U711 Communications board parameter 5 (CB parameter 5) See U711 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U716 (2716) * (Z110) (Z111) U717 (2717) * (Z110) (Z111) U718 (2718) * (Z110) (Z111) U719 (2719) * (Z110) (Z111) U720 (2720) * (Z110) (Z111) U721 (2721) * (Z110) (Z111) U722 (2722) * Communications board parameter 6 (CB parameter 6) 0 to 65535 1 (Z110) (Z111) See U711 Communications board parameter 7 (CB parameter 7) See U711 Communications board parameter 8 (CB parameter 8) See U711 Communications board parameter 9 (CB parameter 9) See U711 Communications board parameter 10 (CB parameter 10) See U711 Communications board parameter 11 (CB parameter 11) See U711 Telegram failure time for CB and TB i001: i002: i003: i004: Telegram failure time for board location 2 Telegram failure time for board location 3 Fault delay time for 1st CB or TB Fault delay time for 2nd CB No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65535 1 Ind: 10 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online 0 to 65000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 2 FS=100 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Online Settings for telegram failure time: 0 1...65500 No time monitoring; must be parameterized for sporadic (acyclic) telegrams Maximum permissible time interval between 2 data exchanges before fault message F082 can be output Settings for fault delay time: 0 1...65499 65500 Instantaneous activation of F082 Fault delay time before F082 is activated. F082 is never activated If no process data are exchanged with the supplementary board for a period in excess of the telegram failure time, fault message F082 is activated as a function of the fault delay time. Monitoring takes place in a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, it is only meaningful to set values that are multiples of 20 ms. U722.001 or U722.002 U722.003 or U722.004 t [ms] last receive telegram B3035 = 1 or B8035 = 1 F082 and B3030 = 1 B3031 = 1 or B8030 = 1 B8031 = 1 Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 485 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description U723 (2723) * Timeout period for technology boards i001: i002: Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=20 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 on-line All binector numbers 1 Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 68 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 32 Type: L2 P052 = 3 [SW 2.1 and later] 20 to 60 [s] Timeout period until F080 fault value 1 (no heartbeat) 1s Timeout period until F080 fault value 6 (delay until initialization is complete). Additional permissible period after expiry of time set in index 001 for completion of initialization. Example U732.001 = 30, U732.002 = 20: When the electronics supply is switched on, F080 fault value 1 is delayed by 30 s and F080 fault value 6 by 30s + 20s = 50s. U728 (2728) * (Z110) Source for binector/connector converter for 1st CB/TB [SW 1.9 and later] Binectors to be converted to connector K3020 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st binector (bit 0) 2nd binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: U729 (2729) * (Z111) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. Source for binector/connector converter for 2nd CB [SW 1.9 and later] Binectors to be converted to connector K8020 i001: i002: ... i016: 1st binector (bit 0) 2nd binector (bit 1) 16th binector (bit 15) Settings: 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc n732 (2732) (Z110) (Z111) CB/TB diagnostics Diagnostic information about an installed communications board (CB) or technology board (TB). i001 - i032: i033 - i064: i065, i066: i067, i068: 1. CB/TB (lower slot ID letter) 2. CB (higher slot ID letter) 1. CB/TB (internal diagnostic data) 2. CB (internal diagnostic data) For detailed information, please refer to operating instructions of relevant CB or TB. n733 (2733) (Z110) (Z111) 486 CB/TB receive data Display of control words and setpoints (process data) that are transferred to the basic converter from a communications board (CB) or technology board (TB). i001: ... i016 i017: ... i032: 1 st process data word from 1st CB/TB 16 th process data word from 1st CB/TB 1 st process data word from 2 nd CB/TB 16 th process data word from 2 nd CB/TB SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U734 (2734) * Transmit data for first CB/TB (lower slot ID letter) (Z110) Value range [Unit] Steps All connector numbers Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1 the first communications board (CB) or technology board (TB). 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in the transmit telegram. i001: i002: ... i016: No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 16 FS= i001: 32 i002: 167 i003: 9115 i004: 0 to i016: 0 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Online Ind: 32 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Online Ind: 12 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 12 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Word 1 PZD section of telegram Word 2 PZD section of telegram Word 16 in PZD section of telegram Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1. n735 (2735) (Z110) (Z111) U736 (2736) * (Z111) Display of transmit data to CB/TB i001: ... i016 i017: ... i032: 1st process data word to 1st CB or TB 0000 to FFFF H 1 16th process data word to 1st CB or TB 1st process data word to 2nd CB 16th process data word to 2nd CB Transmit data for second CB (higher slot letter) All connector numbers Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1 a communications board (CB) with a higher slot ID letter. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in the transmit telegram. i001: i002: ... i016: Word 1 PZD section of telegram Word 2 PZD section of telegram Word 16 in PZD section of telegram Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1. n738 (2738) (Z110) (Z111) Display of PKW job from supplementary boards in locations 2 and 3 i001: ... i004 i005: ... i008: i009: ... i012: st st 1 word of PKW job from 1 CB 4th word of PKW job from 1st CB 1st word of PKW job from 2nd CB 4th word of PKW job from 2nd CB 1st word of PKW job from TB 4th word of PKW job from TB Details refer to "Function diagrams", Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111. n739 (2739) (Z110) (Z111) Display of PKW response to supplementary boards in locations 2 and 3 i001: ... i004 i005: ... i008: i009: ... i012: 1st word of PKW job from 1st CB 4th word of PKW job from 1st CB 1st word of PKW job from 2nd CB 4th word of PKW job from 2nd CB 1st word of PKW job from TB 4th word of PKW job from TB Details refer to "Function diagrams", Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 487 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 200 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 6500 [ms] 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 3 1 Ind: 2 FS=3 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers Ind: None FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 1 to 8 1 Ind: 2 FS=3 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.79 Configuring the SIMOLINK board U740 SLB Node address (2740) Node address of SIMOLINK board (SLB) on bus. The node address defines which telegrams the relevant converter may write to. The node address also defines whether a node is to perform the additional function of dispatcher. * (Z121) 0= Dispatcher (generates telegram circulation) Not 0 = Transceiver Only one node in a SIMOLINK ring may perform the function of dispatcher. Node address 0 may not be assigned to any node if a higher-level PLC is performing the dispatcher function as the SIMOLINK master. When an SLB is selected to operate as dispatcher, all nodes must be assigned consecutive addresses, starting with address 0 for the dispatcher. i001: For first SLB in unit i002: Reserved U741 SLB Telegram failure time (2741) The telegram failure time defines the period within which a valid synchronizing telegram (SYNC telegram) must be received. Failure of any SYNC telegram to arrive within the set period indicates a communications error. The unit activates fault message F015 (see also U753) as a function of U741. * (Z121) 0 = No telegram failure monitoring i001: For first SLB in unit i002: Reserved U742 SLB Transmitter power (2742) Setting of power of fiber optic transmitter * (Z121) 1 = 0m to 15m (length of plastic fiber optic cable) 2 = 15m to 25m (length of plastic fiber optic cable) 3 = 25m to 40m (length of plastic fiber optic cable) Operation at a lower transmitter power increases the service life of the transmitter and receiver modules. Reducing the transmitter power also allows hidden fault sources on the transmission path (e.g. poor contacts on fiber optics) to be detected. i001: For first SLB in unit i002: Reserved U744 SLB Selection of active SLB board (2744) Selection of the active SIMOLINK board (SLB) when two SLBs are installed in one unit. * 0 = binector B0000 1 = Binector B0001 etc. A binector value of 0 means "SLB in low slot is active". A binector value of 1 is reserved for "SLB in high slot is active". U745 SLB No. of channels (2745) Number of channels which dispatcher provides for each transceiver. Together with U746, the number of channels determines the number of addressable nodes. This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher. * (Z121) i001: For first SLB in unit i002: Reserved 488 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U746 SLB Cycle time (2746) The cycle time is the period required for all telegrams to be passed around the SIMOLINK ring. Together with U745, the cycle time determines the number of addressable nodes. This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher. 0.20 to 6.50 [ms] 0.01 * (Z121) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind:2 FS=1.20 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 16 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 8 FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 16 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: 16 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 16 Type: L2 P052 = 3 Ind: None FS=0.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline i001: For first SLB in unit i002: Reserved NOTICE! The values 0.20ms to 0.99ms are reserved and must not be set here. n748 SLB Diagnosis (2748) Visualization parameter which displays diagnostic information for an installed SIMOLINK board (SLB) (Z121) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: ... i016: Number of error-free synchronizing telegrams Number of CRC errors Number of timeout errors Last accessible bus address Address of node sending the special telegram "Timeout" Implemented bus cycle time Number of new configurations Reserved Reserved U749 SLB Read address (2749) Definition of node addresses and channels from which the SLB must read data (a total of 8 channels can be read according to the index entries). The digits before the decimal point in the input value define the node address and those after the point the channel number (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 Sheet Z122). * 0.0 to 200.7 0.1 Example: 2.0 = address 2 channel 0 n750 SLB Receive data (2750) Visualization parameter for data received via the SIMOLINK board (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 Sheet Z122) (Z122) i001: Word 1 PZD section of telegram ... i016: Word 16 in PZD section of telegram U751 SLB Transmit data selection (2751) Selection of connectors whose contents must be transferred as transmit data by the SLB (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 Sheet Z122). * (Z122) All connector numbers 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in the transmit telegram. i001: i002: ... i015: i016: Channel0, low word Channel0, high word Channel7, low word Channel7, high word n752 SLB Display of transmit data (2752) (Z122) U753 Process data transmitted by SLB via SIMOLINK in hexadecimal notation (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 Sheet Z122) SLB Fault delay (2753) * (Z121) Delay in activation of fault message F015 (see also U741) 0 = fault message is activated immediately the telegram failure monitor responds SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 0.0 to 100.0 [s] 0.1 489 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 6 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -100.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 6 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.80 Configuring the EB1 expansion boards U755 Signal type of analog inputs on EB1 (2755) 0 = voltage input 0 to 10 V 1 = current input 0 to 20 mA * (Z112) (Z115) i001: AI1 of the first EB2 i002: AI1 of the second EB2 U756 Normalization of analog inputs on EB1 (2756) This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (Z112) (Z115) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: U 756 [%] = 10 V With a current input: U 756 [%] = 20 mA i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: U757 (2757) (Z112) (Z115) U758 (2758) * (Z112) (Z115) Y X X .. Input voltage in volts Y X X .. Input current in mA Y .. % value which is generated for input current X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 Offset for analog inputs on EB1 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 Mode of signal injection at analog inputs on EB1 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: AI1 of the first EB2 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB2 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 U759 Source for selecting sign reversal of analog inputs on EB1 (2759) Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state = reverse sign) * (Z112) (Z115) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: 490 AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U760 Filtering time for analog inputs on EB1 (2760) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms * (Z112) (Z115) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: Source for enabling of analog inputs on EB1 (2761) Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = enabled) (Z112) (Z115) (2762) (Z112) (Z115) Display of analog inputs on EB1 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 Source for output value at analog outputs on EB1 (2763) Selection of connector whose value must be output at the analog output (Z113) (Z116) (2764) * (Z113) (Z116) U765 (2765) * (Z113) (Z116) U766 (2766) (Z113) (Z116) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 6 Type: I2 P052 = 3 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 4 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V Ind: 4 FS=10.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: U764 Ind: 6 FS=1 Type: L2 AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 U763 * All binector numbers 1 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: n762 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online AI1 of the first EB1 AI2 of the first EB1 AI3 of the first EB1 AI1 of the second EB1 AI2 of the second EB1 AI3 of the second EB1 U761 * No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 6 FS=0 Type: O2 AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 Mode of signal injection at analog outputs on EB1 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted i001: i002: i003: i004: AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 Filtering time for analog outputs on EB1 i001: i002: i003: i004: AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 Normalization of analog outputs on EB1 y [V ] = x U766 100% x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) i001: i002: i003: i004: AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 491 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U767 Offset for analog outputs on EB1 -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V (2767) (Z113) (Z116) n768 (2768) (Z113) (Z116) i001: i002: i003: i004: AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 Display of analog outputs on EB1 i001: i002: i003: i004: AO1 of the first EB1 AO2 of the first EB1 AO1 of the second EB1 AO2 of the second EB1 U769 Source for output values at binary outputs on EB1 (2769) Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 43 - 46. * (Z114) (Z117) No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 4 FS=0.00 Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 4 Type: I2 P052 = 3 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Ind: 2 Type: V2 P052 = 3 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: BO1 of the first EB1 BO2 of the first EB1 BO3 of the first EB1 BO4 of the first EB1 BO1 of the second EB1 BO2 of the second EB1 BO3 of the second EB1 BO4 of the second EB1 n770 Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB1 (2770) Representation on operator panel (PMU): (Z114) (Z117) 6 Segment ON: Segment OFF: 5 4 3 2 1 0 Corresponding terminal is activated (HIGH level is applied) Corresponding terminal is not activated (LOW level is applied) Segment or bit 0 ........ Terminal 40 1 ........ Terminal 41 2 ........ Terminal 42 3 ........ Terminal 43 4 ........ Terminal 44 5 ........ Terminal 45 6 ........ Terminal 46 i001: i002: 492 Terminal states of first EB1 Terminal states of second EB1 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 2 Type: V2 P052 = 3 All binector numbers 1 Ind: 8 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -1000.0 to 1000.0 [%] 0.1% Ind: 2 FS=100.0 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -100.00 to 100.00 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 11.81 Configuring the EB2 expansion boards n773 Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB2 (2773) Representation on operator panel (PMU): (Z118) (Z119) 5 Segment ON: Segment OFF: 4 3 2 1 0 Corresponding terminal is activated (HIGH level is applied) Corresponding terminal is not activated (LOW level is applied) Segment or bit 0 ....... Terminal 53 1 ....... Terminal 54 2 ....... Terminal 39 3 ....... Terminal 41 4 ....... Terminal 43 5 ....... Terminal 45 i001: i002: Terminal states of first EB2 Terminal states of second EB2 U774 Source for output values at binary outputs on EB2 (2774) Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 39 - 46. * (Z118) (Z119) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: BO1 of the first EB2 BO2 of the first EB2 BO3 of the first EB2 BO4 of the first EB2 BO1 of the second EB2 BO2 of the second EB2 BO3 of the second EB2 BO4 of the second EB2 U775 Signal type of analog input on EB2 (2775) 0 = voltage input 0 to 10 V 1 = current input 0 to 20 mA * (Z118) (Z119) U776 i001: AI1 of the first EB2 i002: AI1 of the second EB2 Normalization of analog input on EB2 (2776) This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input. (Z118) (Z119) The following general rule applies: With a voltage input: U 776 [%] = 10 V With a current input: U 776 [%] = 20 mA Y X X .. Input voltage in volts Y X X .. Input current in mA Y .. % value which is generated for input current X Y .. % value which is generated for input current X i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 U777 (2777) (Z118) (Z119) Offset for analog input on EB2 i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 493 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U778 Mode of signal injection at analog input on EB2 0 to 3 1 (2778) * (Z118) (Z119) 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted Source for selection of sign reversal at (2779) Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state = reverse sign) (Z118) (Z119) See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online All binector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline -200.0 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 Type: I2 P052 = 3 All connector numbers 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 3 1 Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 10000 [ms] 1ms Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 U779 * No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=0 Type: O2 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 U780 Filtering time for analog input on EB2 (2780) Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard (Z118) (Z119) i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 U781 Source for enabling of analog inputs on EB2 (2781) Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state = enabled) * (Z118) (Z119) 0 = binector B0000 1 = binector B0001 etc. i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 n782 (2782) Display of analog input on EB2 i001: AI of the first EB2 i002: AI of the second EB2 (Z118) (Z119) U783 Source for output value at analog output on EB2 (2783) Selection of connector whose value must be output at the analog output * (Z118) (Z119) U784 (2784) * (Z118) (Z119) U785 (2785) (Z118) (Z119) 494 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 Mode of signal injection at analog output on EB2 0= 1= 2= 3= Injection of signal with sign Injection of absolute value of signal Injection of signal with sign, inverted Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 Filtering time for analog outputs on EB1 i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U786 Normalization of analog outputs on EB2 (2786) (Z118) (Z119) y [V ] = x U786 100% -200.00 to 199.99 [V] 0.01V No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 2 FS=10.00 Type: I2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -10.00 to 10.00 [V] 0.01V Ind: 2 FS=0.00 Type: I2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.0 to 199.99 [%] 0.01% Ind: 2 Type: I2 P052 = 3 0 to 3 1 Ind: 2 FS=1 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 100 to 20000 1 Ind: None FS=1024 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 50.0 to 6500.0 [rev/min] Ind: None FS=500.0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online -200.00 to 199.99 [%] Ind: None Type: I2 P052 = 3 0 to 2 1 Ind: none FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 2 P051 = 40 Online x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output) y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output with an offset of 0) i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 U787 (2787) (Z118) (Z119) n788 (2788) (Z118) (Z119) Offset for analog output on EB2 i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 Display of analog outputs on EB2 i001: AO of the first EB2 i002: AO of the second EB2 11.82 Configuring the SBP pulse encoder board U790 (2790) * (Z120) Configuration of input level of A/B and CRTL tracks i001: i002: A/B and CRTL track Zero pulse 0: 1: 2: 3: HTL unipolar TTL unipolar HTL differential input TTL/RS422 differential input U791 Configuration of encoder supply voltage (2791) * The supply is subject to a current limit of 250mA Caution: Setting the parameter incorrectly can damage the encoder (i.e. 15 V voltage for an encoder which requires a 5 V supply). (Z120) 0: 1: 5V voltage supply 15V voltage supply U792 Number of pulses per revolution (2792) * (Z120) U793 Number of lines on one track around circumference of disk (2793) * (Z120) Encoder type 0: 1: Encoder with A/B track (two tracks displaced by 90 degrees) Encoder with separate forward and reverse tracks U794 Reference speed (2794) (Z120) When actual speed = reference speed a value of 100% is output in the appropriate diagnostic parameter (n795) and connector n795 Display of actual speed in % of reference speed (2795) (Z120) U796 (2796) * S00 (Z120) Resetting the position counter Setting the type of resetting for position acquisition [SW 2.0 and later] 0 = free-running (no reset) 1 = see function diagram Z120 2 = see function diagram Z120 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 495 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 to 2 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 off-line [SW 2.1 and later] All connector numbers 1 Ind: 10 FS=0 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 0 to 1 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online see column on left Ind: 2 FS=2 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 off-line 11.83 Configuration of paralleling interface Notes about parameterization of the paralleling interface see Chapter 6.3.2 U800 Control word for parallel connection of SIMOTRAS converters (2800) [SW 2.1 and later] * 0: Paralleling interface not active 1: Paralleling interface active (G195) The gating pulses are generated by this SIMOTRAS converter 2: Paralleling interface active The gating pulses of the master are used U803 (2803) * (G195) Operating mode for the parallel connection U804 (2804) * Transmit data on paralleling interface (G195) 0 Standard mode 1 Do not set Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data (master to slaves or slave to master) for the paralleling interface. 0 = connector K0000 1 = connector K0001 etc. This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in the transmit telegram. U805 (2805) (G195) U806 (2806) * (G195) 496 i001: ... i005: Word 1 of telegram i006: ... i010: Do not change the adjusting! Word 5 of telegram Do not change the adjusting! Control word for bus terminator of paralleling interface [SW 2.1 and later] 0: 1: No bus terminator Bus terminator active Address for the parallel connection of SIMOTRAS devices [SW 2.1 and later] i001: i002: Address of the masters or of the slaves Address of the masters or of the slaves (i001 and i002 must be set to the same value) 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Slave device with address 2 Slave device with address 3 Slave device with address 4 Slave device with address 5 Slave device with address 6 Master device for 1 slave device with address 2 Master device for 2 slave devices with addresses 2 and 3 Master device for 3 slave devices with addresses 2, 3 and 4 Master device for 4 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4 and 5 Master device for 5 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description U807 (2807) Telegram failure time on paralleling interface (G195) 0 Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 2.1 and later] No time monitoring 0.001...65.000 Permissible time interval between two data exchange operations before a fault message is output. No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None FS=0.100 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online 6040, 6041 Ind: None FS=6040 Type: L2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 65535 Ind: 9 Type: O2 P052 0 0.000 to 65.000 [s] 0.001s Fault message F014 is displayed if no data are exchanged with the parallelconnected converter within this delay period. The monitoring function is implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, only setting values which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are meaningful. Note: The telegram monitoring function is active * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the electronics power supply * from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout). U808 (2808) * (G195) n809 (2809) (G195) Source for triggering of message F014 [SW 2.1 and later] Selection of binector which must trigger message F014 when it switches to log. "1" 6040 = binector B6040 6041 = binector B6041 Diagnostic information for paralleling interface i001 to i009 = Free-running counter, overflow at 65535 i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: i006: i007: i008: i009: [SW 2.1 and later] Number of error-free telegrams Number of errored telegrams Transmit Error Counter Receive Error Counter Phase Error Counter Baud rate Error Counter Bad BCC Counter Timeout Counter Number of telegrams with unknown identifier SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 497 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description n810 (2810) Diagnostic information for the paralleling interface (G195) Value range [Unit] Steps 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 [SW 2.1 and later] No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: None Type: V2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Unit with active "master" function Segment 0 ........ 1 ........ 2 ........ ON: Slave with address 2 responding 3 ........ ON: Slave with address 3 responding 4 ........ ON: Slave with address 4 responding 5 ........ ON: Slave with address 5 responding 6 ........ ON: Slave with address 6 responding 7 ........ 8 ........ OFF 9 ........ OFF 10 ........ 11 ........ 12 ........ 13 ........ 14 ........ 15 ........ ON: Master function active Unit with "slave" function Segment 0 ........ 1 ........ 2 ........ ON: Data for slave with address 2 are ok 3 ........ ON: Data for slave with address 3 are ok 4 ........ ON: Data for slave with address 4 are ok 5 ........ ON: Data for slave with address 5 are ok 6 ........ ON: Data for slave with address 6 are ok 7 ........ 8 ........ ON: Slave function active 9 ........ ON: Firing pulses of master are used 10 ........ 11 ........ 12 ........ 13 ........ 14 ........ 15 ........ OFF 498 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description n812 (2812) Receive data on paralleling interface (G195) When U806=1 (master) is selected i001 ... i005 i006 ... i010 i011 ... i015 i016 ... i020 i021 ... i025 Value range [Unit] Steps [SW 2.1 and later] 0000 to FFFFH 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 25 Type: L2 See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 5 Type: L2 P052 0 P052 0 Receive data from slave with address 2, word 1 Receive data from slave with address 2, word 5 Receive data from slave with address 3, word 1 Receive data from slave with address 3, word 5 Receive data from slave with address 4, word 1 Receive data from slave with address 4, word 5 Receive data from slave with address 5, word 1 Receive data from slave with address 5, word 5 Receive data from slave with address 6, word 1 Receive data from slave with address 6, word 5 When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected: n813 (2813) (G195) i001 ... i005 Receive data from master, word 1 i006 ... i025 Not in use Receive data from master, word 5 Not in use Transmit data on paralleling interface When U806=1 (master) is selected i001 ... i005 [SW 2.1 and later] 0 to FFFFH Transmit data to slaves, word 1 Transmit data to slaves, word 5 When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected: i001 ... i005 Transmit data to master, word 1 Transmit data to master, word 5 11.84 Parameter for DriveMonitor n845 to n909 (2840 to 2909) These parameters are used by DriveMonitor SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 499 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 0 and 1 1 Ind: 5 FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.85 Slot deactivation U910 (2910) * (G101) Slot deactivation parameter [SW 1.9 and later] Parameter for deactivating supplementary boards, e.g. during start-up or troubleshooting (for details of slot identification codes, see diagram under parameter r063) i001: i002: i003: i004: i005: Slot D Slot E Slot F Slot G 0 1 Board in slot active Board in slot not active The deactivated slot is ignored during the search for installed supplementary boards when the supply voltage is next switched on. Likewise, activation of a slot does not take effect until the supply voltage has been switched off and on again. Note: Slot E can simply be deactivated to conceal a technology board (large format). If a communications board is installed in addition to the technology board, and the technology board is concealed, then the communications board will not be processed either. 11.86 Parameter for DriveMonitor U911 to n949 (2911 to 2949) 500 These parameters are used by DriveMonitor SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 PNU Parameter list Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.87 Technology software S00: Sampling times Sampling times For each function block of the technology software S00, it is necessary to define in which "time slice" (i.e. with which sampling time) it is processed. 5 time slices are available: Time slice 1 2 4 10 20 U950 (2950) * S00 Sampling time . 1 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 2 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 4 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice) 20 ms (not firing-pulse-synchronous ) Block is not calculated T0 = Mean distance between 2 firing pulses T0 = 3.33 ms at 50 Hz line frequency T0 = 2.78 ms at 60 Hz line frequency Selection of time slices for function blocks FB1 to FB100 Index Function block i001 i002 i003 i004 i005 i006 i007 i008 i009 i010 i011 i012 i013 i014 i015 i016 i017 i018 i019 i020 i021 i022 i023 i024 i025 i026 i027 i028 i029 i030 i031 i032 i033 i034 i035 i036 i037 i038 i039 i040 i041 i042 i043 i044 i045 i046 i047 i048 i049 i050 FB1 FB2 FB3 FB4 FB5 FB6 FB7 FB8 FB9 FB10 FB11 FB12 FB13 FB14 FB15 FB16 FB17 FB18 FB19 FB20 FB21 FB22 FB23 FB24 FB25 FB26 FB27 FB28 FB29 FB30 FB31 FB32 FB33 FB34 FB35 FB36 FB37 FB38 FB39 FB40 FB41 FB42 FB43 FB44 FB45 FB46 FB47 FB48 FB49 FB50 Time slice (FS) 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 10 10 1 Index Function block i051 i052 i053 i054 i055 i056 i057 i058 i059 i060 i061 i062 i063 i064 i065 i066 i067 i068 i069 i070 i071 i072 i073 i074 i075 i076 i077 i078 i079 i080 i081 i082 i083 i084 i085 i086 i087 i088 i089 i090 i091 i092 i093 i094 i095 i096 i097 i098 i099 i100 FB51 FB52 FB53 FB54 FB55 FB56 FB57 FB58 FB59 FB60 FB61 FB62 FB63 FB64 FB65 FB66 FB67 FB68 FB69 FB70 FB71 FB72 FB73 FB74 FB75 FB76 FB77 FB78 FB79 FB80 FB81 FB82 FB83 FB84 FB85 FB86 FB87 FB88 FB89 FB90 FB91 FB92 FB93 FB94 FB95 FB96 FB97 FB98 FB99 FB100 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 Time slice (FS) 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 10 20 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ind: 100 FS= see column on left Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 501 Parameter list 03.2015 PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U951 (2951) * S00 Selection of time slices for function blocks FB101 to FB200 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 502 Index Function block i001 i002 i003 i004 i005 i006 i007 i008 i009 i010 i011 i012 i013 i014 i015 i016 i017 i018 i019 i020 i021 i022 i023 i024 i025 i026 i027 i028 i029 i030 i031 i032 i033 i034 i035 i036 i037 i038 i039 i040 i041 i042 i043 i044 i045 i046 i047 i048 i049 i050 FB101 FB102 FB103 FB104 FB105 FB106 FB107 FB108 FB109 FB110 FB111 FB112 FB113 FB114 FB115 FB116 FB117 FB118 FB119 FB120 FB121 FB122 FB123 FB124 FB125 FB126 FB127 FB128 FB129 FB130 FB131 FB132 FB133 FB134 FB135 FB136 FB137 FB138 FB139 FB140 FB141 FB142 FB143 FB144 FB145 FB146 FB147 FB148 FB149 FB150 Time slice (FS) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 1 Index Function block i051 i052 i053 i054 i055 i056 i057 i058 i059 i060 i061 i062 i063 i064 i065 i066 i067 i068 i069 i070 i071 i072 i073 i074 i075 i076 i077 i078 i079 i080 i081 i082 i083 i084 i085 i086 i087 i088 i089 i090 i091 i092 i093 i094 i095 i096 i097 i098 i099 i100 FB151 FB152 FB153 FB154 FB155 FB156 FB157 FB158 FB159 FB160 FB161 FB162 FB163 FB164 FB165 FB166 FB167 FB168 FB169 FB170 FB171 FB172 FB173 FB174 FB175 FB176 FB177 FB178 FB179 FB180 FB181 FB182 FB183 FB184 FB185 FB186 FB187 FB188 FB189 FB190 FB191 FB192 FB193 FB194 FB195 FB196 FB197 FB198 FB199 FB200 Time slice (FS) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 100 FS= see column on left Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U952 (2952) * S00 Selection of time slices for function blocks FB201 to FB300 1, 2, 4, 10, 20 Index Function block i001 i002 i003 i004 i005 i006 i007 i008 i009 i010 i011 i012 i013 i014 i015 i016 i017 i018 i019 i020 i021 i022 i023 i024 i025 i026 i027 i028 i029 i030 i031 i032 i033 i034 i035 i036 i037 i038 i039 i040 i041 i042 i043 i044 i045 i046 i047 i048 i049 i050 FB201 FB202 FB203 FB204 FB205 FB206 FB207 FB208 FB209 FB210 FB211 FB212 FB213 FB214 FB215 FB216 FB217 FB218 FB219 FB220 FB221 FB222 FB223 FB224 FB225 FB226 FB227 FB228 FB229 FB230 FB231 FB232 FB233 FB234 FB235 FB236 FB237 FB238 FB239 FB240 FB241 FB242 FB243 FB244 FB245 FB246 FB247 FB248 FB249 FB250 Time slice (FS) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 20 20 20 20 20 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 Index Function block i051 i052 i053 i054 i055 i056 i057 i058 i059 i060 i061 i062 i063 i064 i065 i066 i067 i068 i069 i070 i071 i072 i073 i074 i075 i076 i077 i078 i079 i080 i081 i082 i083 i084 i085 i086 i087 i088 i089 i090 i091 i092 i093 i094 i095 i096 i097 i098 i099 i100 FB251 FB252 FB253 FB254 FB255 FB256 FB257 FB258 FB259 FB260 FB261 FB262 FB263 FB264 FB265 FB266 FB267 FB268 FB269 FB270 FB271 FB272 FB273 FB274 FB275 FB276 FB277 FB278 FB279 FB280 FB281 FB282 FB283 FB284 FB285 FB286 FB287 FB288 FB289 FB290 FB291 FB292 FB293 FB294 FB295 FB296 FB297 FB298 FB299 FB300 Time slice (FS) 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 100 FS= see column on left Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 11.88 Parameter for DriveMonitor n953 to n959 (2953 to 2959) These parameters are used by DriveMonitor SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 503 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) 11.89 Technology software S00: Altering the processing sequence of function blocks Processing sequence of function blocks The function blocks of the S00 technology software are processed within the computational cycle in the sequence defined in parameters U960 to U962: 1. ... 100. 101. ... 200. 201. etc. Function block with number set in U960 index.001 Function block with number set in U960 index.100 Function block with number set in U961 index.001 Function block with number set in U961 index.100 Function block with number set in U962 index.001 The numbers are parameterized in ascending sequence (1, 2, 3, ...) in the factory setting (standard sequence). Altering the processing sequence: If a new function block number is entered (i.e. moved from another location) in a certain index of parameter U960, U961 or U962, then the new processing sequence is defined such that the function block previously entered in this index will be processed after the newly entered block. The gap which may be left at the old location of the moved (newly entered) function block is closed by shifting the function block numbers behind the space forward by one position. Example 1: Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 90 (analog signal selector switch) will be processed immediately after function block 83 (tracking/storage element): Function block no. 90 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after block 83 (84 in U960.9065) is currently stored. Function block numbers (84 and 85) in the following indices of U960 will be shifted up to the next index automatically. Function block Processing sequence 91 90 U960.Index 068 U960.Index 067 85 84 83 82 81 U960.Index 066 U960.Index 065 U960.Index 064 U960.Index 063 U960.Index 062 Function block Processing sequence 91 85 84 90 U960.Index 068 U960.Index 067 U960.Index 066 U960.Index 065 83 82 81 U960.Index 064 U960.Index 063 U960.Index 062 Example 2: Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 38 (sign inverter) will be processed immediately after function block 45 (divider): Function block number 38 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after function block 45 (46 in U960.i035) is currently stored. The function block numbers stored in the indices immediately above this position shift up by one index, then all numbers immediately above the gap left shift down automatically by one index. Function block 504 Processing sequence 47 U960.Index 036 46 45 41 40 38 U960.Index 035 U960.Index 034 37 U960.Index 030 U960.Index 033 U960.Index 032 U960.Index 031 Function block 47 46 38 45 41 40 37 Processing sequence Function block Processing sequence U960.Index 036 U960.Index 035 U960.Index 034 47 46 38 U960.Index 036 U960.Index 035 U960.Index 034 U960.Index 033 U960.Index 032 U960.Index 031 U960.Index 030 45 41 40 37 U960.Index 033 U960.Index 032 U960.Index 031 U960.Index 030 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description Value range [Unit] Steps U960 (2960) * S00 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology software (1) Numbers of all function blocks U961 (2961) * S00 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology software (2) U962 (2962) * S00 Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology software (3) U969 (2969) * S00 Automatic setting and activation of the execution sequence i001: Number of function block for 1st place in processing sequence i002: Number of function block for 2nd place in processing sequence No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 100 FS= Standard sequence Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Numbers of all function blocks Ind: 100 FS= Standard sequence Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline Numbers of all function blocks Ind: 100 FS= Standard sequence Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 4 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Offline 0 to 2000 1 Ind: None FS=0 Type: O2 P052 = 3 P051 = 40 Online etc. i001: Number of function block for 101st place in processing sequence i002: Number of function block for 102nd place in processing sequence etc. i001: Number of function block for 201st place in processing sequence i002: Number of function block for 202nd place in processing sequence etc. 0 Return 1 Set standard sequence: The numbers of the function blocks are entered in ascending order in Parameters U960, U961 and U962. The parameter is then automatically set to value 0. Set optimum sequence: U960, U961, and U962 are set in such a way that as few deadtimes as possible occur. After that, the parameter is automatically set to value 0 again. Set standard setting of the sampling times. U950, U951, and U952 are set to the factory setting. Automatic activation / deactivation: U950, U951 and U952 are set in such a way that the unwired function blocks are deselected and the wired function blocks are selected (activated), if they are not yet selected. The time slice 10 (sampling time 20 ms) is set for all function blocks not previously activated, the time slice is left unchanged for all previously activated function blocks. In order to ensure that this function also functions correctly for function blocks FB261 to FB269 (PI controllers 2 to 10), the value 0 is to be set for PI controllers 2 to 10 which are not used and this must be done at the corresponding indices U544.i002 to i010 before this function is used. 2 3 4 11.90 Parameter access for experts U979 (2979) * Parameter access for experts 999 [SW 1.9 and later] Parameter access for experts is activated. This means that even Offline parameters can be modified in operation. Notes: The value of this parameter is lost when the electronics power supply is switched off. Parameters can be modified only if both P051 and P052 as well as P927 are set to the correct values. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 505 Parameter list PNU 03.2015 Description Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type See Change (Access / Status) Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 11.91 List of existing and modified U and n parameters n980 (2980) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in the U or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999). The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence. The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under index 101. For example: 2981 = n981 The first 0 to be displayed signals that no further parameter numbers are stored. n981 (2981) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n982 (2982) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n983 (2983) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n984 (2984) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n985 (2985) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n986 (2986) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n987 (2987) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n988 (2988) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n989 (2989) List of existing parameter numbers, continuation n990 (2990) List of modified parameters, continuation See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. See n980. Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in the U or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999). The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence. The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under index 101. For example: 2991 = n991 The first 0 to be displayed signals that there are no further modified parameters. n991 (2991) List of modified parameters, continuation n992 (2992) List of modified parameters, continuation n993 (2993) List of modified parameters, continuation n994 (2994) List of modified parameters, continuation n995 (2995) List of modified parameters, continuation n996 (2996) List of modified parameters, continuation 506 See n990. See n990. See n990. See n990. See n990. See n990. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Parameter list PNU Description n997 (2997) List of modified parameters, continuation n998 (2998) List of modified parameters, continuation n999 (2999) List of modified parameters, continuation See n990. See n990. See n990. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Value range [Unit] Steps No. indices Factory setting Type Ind: 101 Type: O2 See Change (Access / Status) P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 Ind: 101 Type: O2 P052 = 3 507 Parameter list 508 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors 12 List of connectors and binectors 12.1 Connector list Display: The values of connectors can be displayed via parameters r041, r042, r043 and P044. Normalization: The following applies unless stated otherwise: 100% corresponds for currents, to the converter rated current (r072.i002), for voltages, to the converter rated voltage (P078.i001) or, for speeds, to the parameterized maximum speed (P741 or P143). Numeric representation: The following numeric representation applies to all connectors: In the internal software representation, 100% corresponds to the number 4000 hex = 16384 dec. The value range is -200.00% ... +199.99%, corresponding to 8000 hex ... 7FFF hex. The connectors are transferred via the serial interfaces in this internal mode of representation. The following numeric representation applies to all double-word connectors: In the internal software representation, 100% corresponds to the number 4000 0000 hex = 16384*65536 dec. 31 31 The value range is -200.00% ... +199.9999999%, corresponding to -2 dec ... +(2 - 1) dec or 8000 0000 hex ... 7FFF FFFF hex. If a double-word connector is the input of a connector selection parameter, or if a connector is the input of a double-word connector selection parameter, this may be equivalent to division or multiplication by the value 65536. For details of the connection to double-word connectors, see Section 9.1, "The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors". Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet Fixed values K0000 G120 Fixed value 0 Fixed value 100.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0002 Fixed value 200.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0003 Fixed value -100.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0004 Fixed value -200.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0005 Fixed value 50.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0006 Fixed value 150.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0007 Fixed value -50.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0008 Fixed value -150.00% 100% 16384 = G120 K0009 Fixed value 0 or special function specified in each case K0001 Analog inputs K0010 Analog input, terminal 4 / 5 (main setpoint) Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized) 100% 16384 = G113 K0011 Analog input, terminal 4 / 5 (main setpoint) After normalization, offset injection, filtering 100% 16384 = G113 K0012 Analog input, terminal 103 / 104 (main actual value) Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized) 100% 16384 = G113 K0013 Analog input, terminal 103 / 104 (main actual value) After normalization, offset injection, filtering 100% 16384 = G113 K0014 Analog input, terminal 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1) Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized) 100% 16384 = G113 K0015 Analog input, terminal 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1) After normalization, offset injection, filtering 100% 16384 = G113 K0016 Analog input, terminal 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2) Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized) 100% 16384 = G114 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 509 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K0017 Analog input, terminal 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2) After normalization, offset injection, filtering 100% 16384 = G114 K0018 Analog input, terminal 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3) Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized) 100% 16384 = G114 K0019 Analog input, terminal 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3) After normalization, offset injection, filtering 100% 16384 = G114 Binary inputs, binary outputs K0020 Binary inputs, terminals 36 to 43 and 211 to 214 Bit0 = Status of terminal 36 Bit1 = Status of terminal 37 Bit2 = Status of terminal 38 Bit3 = Status of terminal 39 Bit4 = Status of terminal 40 Bit5 = Status of terminal 41 Bit6 = Status of terminal 42 Bit7 = Status of terminal 43 Bit8 = Status of terminal 211 Bit9 = Status of terminal 212 Bit10 = Status of terminal 213 Bit11 = Status of terminal 214 1 1= G110 K0021 Binary outputs, terminals 46 to 52, 109/110 Bit0 = Status of terminal 46 Bit1 = Status of terminal 48 Bit2 = Status of terminal 50 Bit3 = Status of terminal 52 Bit7 = Status of terminal 109/110 1 1= G112 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 = Overload at terminal 46 = Overload at terminal 48 = Overload at terminal 50 = Overload at terminal 52 = Overload at terminal 26 (15V output) = Overload at terminal 34, 44 and/or 210 (24V output) Analog outputs K0026 Analog output, terminal 14 / 15 100% 16384 = G115 K0027 Analog output, terminal 16 / 17 100% 16384 = G115 K0028 Analog output, terminal 18 / 19 100% 16384 = G116 K0029 Analog output, terminal 20 / 21 100% 16384 = G116 Control word, status word K0030 Control word 1 1 1= G180 K0031 Control word 2 1 1= G181 K0032 Status word 1 1 1= G182 K0033 Status word 2 1 1= G183 K0034 Active function data set 1 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 = G175 K0035 Active BICO data set 1 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 = G175 Evaluation of the pulse encoder board SBP KK0036 Position actual value of SBP 1 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 = Z120 K0038 Actual speed value of SBP in rev./min 1 rpm [SW 2.0 and later] 1 = Z120 K0039 Actual speed value from SBP pulse encoder board 510 100% 16384 = Z120 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connector Connectors and binectors Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet Pulse encoder evaluation The pulse encoder evaluation function supplies an actual speed value (K0040 und K0041) and an actual position value (K0042, K0043, K0044, KK0046). The pulses of the pulse encoder are counted according to sign to generate the actual position value (a hardware counter is used for this purpose.) The setting in parameter P144 (multiple evaluation) is also relevant, i.e. when P144 = 0, every positive edge of the first track of the pulse encoder is counted, when P144 = 1, every edge of the first track of the encoder is counted, when P144 = 2, every edge of both tracks of the encoder is counted. When P145 =1 (automatic switchover of multiple evaluation), the position sensor (K0042, K0043, K0044, KK0046) produces invalid data! K0042 and K0043 together form a signed 24-bit actual position value. (value range: FF80 0000H to 007F FFFFH or -223 to +223 -1 ) K0040 Actual speed value from pulse encoder 100% 16384 = G145 K0041 Absolute actual speed value from pulse encoder 100% 16384 = G145 K0042 Actual position value, LOW word LOW word of 24-bit actual position value 1 1= G145 K0043 Actual position value, HIGH word HIGH word of 24-bit actual position value 1 1= G145 K0044 Actual position value, number of zero markers 1 1= G145 KK0046 1 Actual position value [SW 1.9 and later] 1 = Actual position value extended in the software to a 32-bit value (value range: 8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH or -231 to +231 -1 ) G145 KK0047 1 Deceleration distance [SW 1.9 and later] 1 = When setpoint 0 is applied to the ramp-function generator input, the speed setpoint at the generator output is reduced to zero according to the current settings for ramp-down and transition roundings. This double-word connector specifies the requisite deceleration distance as the number of increments of the pulse encoder (defined in parameters P140 ff.). G136 This deceleration distance calculation is correct only on the condition that the parameterized ramp-down time and transition roundings do not change during the braking operation. K0048 Actual speed value from pulse encoder in rpm 1 rpm [SW 2.0 and later] 1 = G145 Heatsink temperature K0050 Heatsink temperature 100C 16384 = Temperature sensor inputs K0051 or K0052 is always set to 0 when a PTC thermistor or no temperature sensor is connected (P490.x 1). K0051 Motor temperature 1 (from sensor to terminal 22 / 23) 100C 16384 = G185 K0052 Motor temperature 2 (from sensor to terminal 204 / 205) 100C 16384 = G185 0 16384 = 0 90 G163 Closed-loop current control, auto-reversing stage, gating unit K0100 Firing angle = 180 -16384 = K0101 Firing angle before limitation 0 16384 = 0 90 G163 = 180 -16384 = K0102 Precontrol value + current controller output (gating unit input) 0 16384 = 0 90 G162 = 180 -16384 = K0103 100% duration of current flow time between 2 firing pulses SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 100% [SW 2.0 and later] 16384 = G162 511 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization K0105 Code of triggered thyristor pair in a thyristor bridge for switching through the corresponding line phase: 0 UV 2 UW 4 VW 6 VU 8 WU 10 WV 1 1= K0106 Requested torque direction K0107 Internal actual current value, signed, averaged over the last 6 current peaks in each case, normalized to rated motor current [SW 1.9 and later] RMS value of stator current, averaged over one line period 0 = No torque direction 1 = Torque direction I 2 = Torque direction II 16384 100% of P100 K0108 = Function diag., Sheet G163 G162 100% 16384 = K0109 Internal signed actual current value, averaged over the last 6 current peaks in each case 100% 16384 = G162 K0110 Current controller output 100% 16384 = G162 K0111 Current controller output, P component 100% 16384 = G162 K0112 Current controller output, I component 100% 16384 = G162 K0113 Current controller, setpoint/actual value deviation 100% 16384 = G162 K0114 Internal signed actual current value, averaged over one firing cycle 100% 16384 = G162 K0115 Current controller actual value 100% 16384 = G162 K0116 Absolute value of internal actual current 100% 16384 = G162 K0117 Internal signed actual current value 100% 16384 = G162 K0118 Current controller setpoint 100% 16384 = G162 K0119 Current controller setpoint before absolute-value generation 100% 16384 = G162 K0120 Current setpoint before reduced gear stressing 100% 16384 = G161 K0121 Precontrol output 0 16384 = 0 90 G162 = 180 -16384 = Current limitation, torque limitation, speed limiting controller K0131 Lowest positive current limit 100% 16384 = G161 K0132 Highest negative current limit 100% 16384 = G161 K0133 Current setpoint before limitation (incl. additional setpoint) 100% 16384 = G161 K0134 Torque setpoint (after speed limiting controller) (= K0140) 100% 16384 = G160 K0136 Speed limiting controller: Active torque limit 1 100% 16384 = G160 K0137 Speed limiting controller: Active torque limit 2 100% 16384 = G160 K0140 Torque setpoint (after speed limiting controller) (= K0134) 100% 16384 = G160 K0141 Torque setpoint (after torque limitation) 100% 16384 = G160 K0143 Upper torque limit 100% 16384 = G160 K0144 Lower torque limit 100% 16384 = G160 K0145 Torque setpoint before limitation (incl. additional setpoint) 100% 16384 = G160 K0147 Torque setpoint before limitation (without additional setpoint) 100% 16384 = G160 K0148 Torque setpoint (from speed controller) 100% 16384 = G152 512 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connector Connectors and binectors Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection) K0150 Component of precontrol for speed controller calculated from d(K0168)/dt * P540 100% 16384 = G153 K0152 Component of precontrol for speed controller calculated from f(K0164) * P541 (= function of speed actual value/setpoint deviation in K0164) 100% 16384 = G153 Speed controller Setpoint processing, ramp-function generator, friction and moment of inertia compensation K0160 Speed controller output 100% 16384 = G152 K0161 P component 100% 16384 = G152 K0162 I component 100% 16384 = G152 K0164 Setpoint/actual value deviation 100% 16384 = G152 K0165 Generation of setpoint/actual value deviation output 100% 16384 = G152 K0166 Selected actual speed value (absolute value) 100% 16384 = G151 K0167 Selected actual speed value (signed) 100% 16384 = G151 K0168 D component output * (-1) 100% 16384 = G152 K0169 D component output 100% 16384 = G152 K0170 Speed setpoint from ramp-function generator after limitation 100% 16384 = G137 K0171 Precontrol for speed controller (friction and moment of inertia compensation) 100% 16384 = G153 K0172 Component of precontrol determined by friction for speed controller 100% 16384 = G153 K0173 Filtered component of precontrol determined by moment of inertia for speed controller 100% 16384 = G153 K0174 Filtering element output for nset filtering 100% 16384 = G152 K0176 Speed droop 100% 16384 = G151 K0177 Band-stop output 1 100% 16384 = G152 K0178 Band-stop output 2 100% 16384 = G152 K0179 Filtering element output for nact filtering 100% 16384 = G152 K0181 Lowest positive setpoint limit 100% 16384 = G137 K0182 Highest negative setpoint limit 100% 16384 = G137 K0183 Speed setpoint before limitation 100% 16384 = G137 K0190 Ramp-function generator output (before speed setpoint limitation) 100% 16384 = G136 K0191 dv/dt (rise in ramp-function generator output in time period set in P542) 100% 16384 = G136 K0192 Effective ramp-function generator input variable 100% 16384 = G136 K0193 Setpoint input for ramp-function generator 100% 16384 = G135 K0194 Total of main setpoint (limited) + additional setpoint 100% 16384 = G135 K0195 Ramp-function generator input before setpoint reduction 100% 16384 = G135 K0196 Effective positive limit for main setpoint 100% 16384 = G135 K0197 Effective negative limit for main setpoint 100% 16384 = G135 K0198 Main setpoint before limitation 100% 16384 = G135 Crawling setpoint, inching setpoint, oscillation, fixed setpoint K0201 Crawling setpoint 100% 16384 = G130 K0202 Inching setpoint 100% 16384 = G129 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 513 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K0203 Oscillation setpoint 100% 16384 = G128 K0204 Fixed setpoint 100% 16384 = G127 K0206 Crawling setpoint: Output value of function block 100% 16384 = G130 K0207 Inching setpoint: Output value of function block 100% 16384 = G129 K0208 Oscillation/square wave generator: Output value of function block 100% 16384 = G128 K0209 Fixed setpoint: Output value of function block 100% 16384 = G127 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= G124 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= G124 Connector selector switches K0230 K0231 Output of connector selector switch 1 Output of connector selector switch 2 Motorized potentiometer K0240 Motorized potentiometer output (setpoint from potentiometer) 100% 16384 = G126 K0241 dy/dt (rise in ramp-function generator output in time period set in P542 + P465) Ramp-function generator input in motorized potentiometer (setpoint) 100% 16384 = G126 100% 16384 = G126 K0242 General connectors K0301 Line voltage U-V P078.001 16384 = K0302 Line voltage V-W P078.001 16384 = K0303 Line voltage W-U P078.001 16384 = K0305 Average line voltage, filtered P078.001 16384 = K0306 Line frequency K0309 Calculated motor temperature rise Normalization: 16384 the overtemperature which is reached at a 50.0Hz 16384 = see Column 2 = K0310 continuous current corresponding to the rated motor current Calculated thyristor temperature rise as % of maximum permissible thyristor temperature rise 100% 16384 = K0311 Hours run [SW 1.9 and later] 1h 1= K0312 Hours run / 10 [SW 2.25 and later] 10h 1= G189 Fixed setpoints K0401 Fixed value 1 (P401) 100% 16384 = G120 K0402 Fixed value 2 (P402) 100% 16384 = G120 K0403 Fixed value 3 (P403) 100% 16384 = G120 K0404 Fixed value 4 (P404) 100% 16384 = G120 K0405 Fixed value 5 (P405) 100% 16384 = G120 K0406 Fixed value 6 (P406) 100% 16384 = G120 K0407 Fixed value 7 (P407) 100% 16384 = G120 K0408 Fixed value 8 (P408) 100% 16384 = G120 K0409 Fixed value 9 (P409) 100% 16384 = G120 K0410 Fixed value 10 (P410) 100% 16384 = G120 K0411 Fixed value 11 (P411) 100% 16384 = G120 K0412 Fixed value 12 (P412) 100% 16384 = G120 K0413 Fixed value 13 (P413) 100% 16384 = G120 514 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K0414 Fixed value 14 (P414) 100% 16384 = G120 K0415 Fixed value 15 (P415) 100% 16384 = G120 K0416 Fixed value 16 (P416) 100% 16384 = G120 Start pulse for speed controller K0451 Fixed setting value 1 for n controller I component 100% of P100 16384 = G150 K0452 Fixed setting value 1 for n controller I component, weighted 100% of P100 16384 = G150 K0453 Fixed setting value 2 for n controller I component 100% of P100 16384 = G150 K0454 Setting value 1 for n controller I component 100% of P100 16384 = G150 Control inputs, control outputs K0500 Binary inputs, terminals 72 to 79 Bit0 = Status of terminal 72 Bit1 = Status of terminal 73 Bit2 = Status of terminal 74 Bit3 = Status of terminal 75 Bit4 = Status of terminal 76 Bit5 = Status of terminal 77 Bit6 = Status of terminal 78 Bit7 = Status of terminal 79 Bit = 0: Input is LOW (not activated) Bit = 1: Input is HIGH (activated) G117 K0501 Binary outputs terminals 81/82 to 93/94 Bit0 = Status of terminal 81/82 Bit1 = Status of terminal 83/84 Bit2 = Status of terminal 85/86 Bit3 = Status of terminal 87/88 Bit4 = Status of terminal 89/90 Bit5 = Status of terminal 91/92 Bit6 = Status of terminal 93/94 Bit = 0: Output relay has not picked up Bit = 1: Output relay has picked up G119 100% 16384 = G125 4 stage master switch K0510 Setpoint of 4-stage master switch General connectors K0800 Operating status (code number) with one decimal place K0801 Latest fault and alarm message Low byte: Latest alarm message If several alarms are active simultaneously, the alarm with the lowest number if displayed here. Value "0" means that no alarm is active. High byte: Latest fault message Value "0" means that no fault is active. K0810 Limitation bits The meaning of these bits is described in Section 11, Parameter List, under parameter r040. G189 Connectors for raw data of pulse encoder evaluation K0910 Measuring time for speed evaluation of pulse encoder 1 corresponds to 41.6666 ns if K0912 = xxxx xx0x (divisor 1:1) 1 corresponds to 83.3333 ns if K0912 = xxxx x01x (divisor 1:2) 1 corresponds to 166.666 ns if K0912 = xxxx x11x (divisor 1:4) This value is always slightly higher than the measuring time set in P147. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 G145 515 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description K0911 Number of pulses during measuring time set in K0910 The speed of the pulse encoder can be calculated from connectors K0910, K0911 and K0912 by the following equation: nact [ rev / s ] = Normalization Function diag., Sheet G145 K 0911 24 000 000 Pulse no. of encoder Meas. time Pulse number of encoder = 1*P141, if K0912 = xx0x xxxx (1x evaluation) Pulse number of encoder = 2*P141, if K0912 = x01x xxxx (2x evaluation) Pulse number of encoder = 4*P141, if K0912 = x11x xxxx (4x evaluation) Meas. time = 1* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx xx0x (divisor 1:1) Meas. time = 2* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx x01x (divisor 1:2) Meas. time = 4* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx x11x (divisor 1:4) K0912 Status of speed evaluation of pulse encoder xxxx xxx0 = asynchronous measurement xxxx xxx1 = (gating-pulse-)synchronized measurement xxxx xx0x = divisor 1:1 xxxx x01x = divisor 1:2 xxxx x11x = divisor 1:4 xxx0 0xxx = pulse encoder type1 (P140 = 1) xxx1 0xxx = pulse encoder type1a (P140 = 2) xxx0 1xxx = pulse encoder type2 (P140 = 3) xxx1 1xxx = pulse encoder type3 (P140 = 4) xx0x xxxx = 1x evaluation x01x xxxx = 2x evaluation x11x xxxx = 4x evaluation 0xxx xxxx = No pulse encoder error 1xxx xxxx = Pulse encoder signal states occurred during the measurement which may not occur on a rotating pulse encoder. They indicate a signal short circuit or an interruption in a pulse encoder signal. When the pulse encoder is stationary or oscillating around one position, signal states of this type are perfectly normal and do not indicate a signal fault. K0960 1.334 s Time interval between averaged line synchronization time reference point 1= and "unfiltered" zero crossing of scanned and software-filtered line voltage in 1.334 s (when P152 = 1 to 20) K0970 Positive line zero crossing of phase U-V (as T1 instant) K0971 Negative line zero crossing of phase W-U (as T1 instant) K0972 Positive line zero crossing of phase V-W (as T1 instant) K0973 Negative line zero crossing of phase U-V (as T1 instant) K0974 Positive line zero crossing of phase W-U (as T1 instant) K0975 Negative line zero crossing of phase V-W (as T1 instant) K0980 Cycle time of the asynchronous part of the firing interrupt (at the C167 processor) and, at the same time, the cycle time of the fastest time slot (time slot 1) at the C163/C165 processor [as of SW2.22] K0981 Filtered C163/C165 total processor utilization K9990, which is also used to control the processor utilization through variation of the cycle time of the asynchronous part of the firing interrupt [as of SW2.22] K0982 Filtered C167 total processor utilization K0990, which is also used to control the processor utilization through variation of the cycle time of the asynchronous part of the firing interrupt [as of SW2.22] K0986 Last line zero crossing used (as T1 instant) K0987 Firing instant (as T1 instant) K0988 Firing pulse cycle time (time difference between current and previous firing instant) in T1 increments of 1.334 s each 516 G145 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description K0989 Information about torque direction and firing angle Normalization Function diag., Sheet Nibble 0 .. K0990 K0991 K0992 K0994 Torque direction 0 = M0 (--) 1 = MI 2 = MII 9 = Reserved Nibble 1 .. Code number for firing angle 1 = Requested firing angle has been implemented 2 = Reserved 3 = Firing angle at 180 4 = Firing angle at 180 5 = Requested firing angle cannot be implemented because of strong pulse compression 6 = Reserved 7 = Reserved 8 = Reserved Nibble 2 .. Code number for requested torque direction 0: Not RUN ( o1.0) 1: Torque direction acc. to current setpoint (==> M0, MI, MII) 2: Reserved 3: Reserved 4: Additional wait time in auto-reversing stage (==> M0) 5: Current has reached 0 (==> M0), phase reversal permitted 6: Current not yet 0 (==>M0), phase reversal not permitted yet 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 9: Reserved A: Wait for rotor contactor to switch (==> M0) B: Reserved C: Reserved D: Reserved E: Reserved F: Reserved Nibble 3 .. Code number for zero current signal [SW 1.9 and later] 0: The "I=0" signal is not evaluated because no change in torque direction is required 1: I <> 0 2: I = 0 for less than 0.1 msec 3: I = 0 for more than 0.1 msec 4: I = 0 for more than 0.6 msec 5: Ia-act (K116) is < 1 % for more than 6 current peaks Current total processor capacity utilization (C167) Projected total processor capacity utilization (C167) for line frequency = 65Hz Current total processor capacity (C167) utilized by background routines Total processor capacity (C167) currently utilized by routines synchronized with firing pulses Serial interface 1 (USS1 on G-SST1) K2001 USS1 receive data, word 1 1 1= G170 K2002 USS1 receive data, word 2 1 1= G170 K2003 USS1 receive data, word 3 1 1= G170 K2004 USS1 receive data, word 4 1 1= G170 K2005 USS1 receive data, word 5 1 1= G170 K2006 USS1 receive data, word 6 1 1= G170 K2007 USS1 receive data, word 7 1 1= G170 K2008 USS1 receive data, word 8 1 1= G170 K2009 USS1 receive data, word 9 1 1= G170 K2010 USS1 receive data, word 10 1 1= G170 K2011 USS1 receive data, word 11 1 1= G170 K2012 USS1 receive data, word 12 1 1= G170 K2013 USS1 receive data, word 13 1 1= G170 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 517 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K2014 USS1 receive data, word 14 1 1= G170 K2015 USS1 receive data, word 15 1 1= G170 K2016 USS1 receive data, word 16 1 1= G170 K2020 Output of binector/connector converter for G-SST1 1 1= G170 KK2031 USS1 receive data, word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2032 USS1 receive data, word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2033 USS1 receive data, word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 G169 KK2034 KK2035 USS1 receive data, word 4 and 5 USS1 receive data, word 5 and 6 KK2036 USS1 receive data, word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= KK2037 USS1 receive data, word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2038 USS1 receive data, word 8 and 9 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2039 USS1 receive data, word 9 and 10 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2040 USS1 receive data, word 10 and 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK2041 USS1 receive data, word 11 and 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 G169 KK2042 KK2043 USS1 receive data, word 12 and 13 USS1 receive data, word 13 and 14 KK2044 USS1 receive data, word 14 and 15 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= KK2045 USS1 receive data, word 15 and 16 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 Process data exchange with 1st CB/TB K3001 K3002 K3003 K3004 K3005 K3006 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6 K3007 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7 1 1= Z110 K3008 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8 K3009 K3010 K3011 K3012 K3013 K3014 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 st 1 1= Z110 1 1= Z110 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 10 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 11 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 12 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 13 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 14 K3015 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 15 K3016 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 16 K3020 KK3031 KK3032 KK3033 KK3034 KK3035 518 st [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 Output of binector/connector converter for 1 CB/TB Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1 and 2 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2 and 3 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3 and 4 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4 and 5 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5 and 6 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description KK3036 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6 and 7 KK3037 KK3038 KK3039 Normalization Function diag., Sheet [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7 and 8 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8 and 9 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9 and 10 KK3040 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 10 and 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK3041 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 11 and 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 st [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK3042 KK3043 KK3044 KK3045 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 12 and 13 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 13 and 14 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 14 and 15 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 15 and 16 SCB1 with SCI1 K4101 SCI, slave 1, analog input 1 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z150 K4102 SCI, slave 1, analog input 2 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z150 K4103 SCI, slave 1, analog input 3 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z150 K4201 SCI, slave 2, analog input 1 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z151 K4202 SCI, slave 2, analog input 2 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z151 K4203 SCI, slave 2, analog input 3 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z151 Expansion boards K5101 1st analog input of 1st plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z112 K5102 2nd analog input of 1st plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z112 K5103 3rd analog input of 1st plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z112 K5104 1st analog output of 1st plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z113 K5105 2nd analog output of 1st plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z113 K5106 Binary inputs and outputs of 1st plugged EB1 1 1= Z114 K5111 Analog input of 1st plugged EB2 100% 16384 = Z118 K5112 Analog output of 1st plugged EB2 100% 16384 = Z118 K5113 Binary inputs and outputs of 1st plugged EB2 1 1= Z118 K5201 1st analog input of 2nd plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z115 K5202 2nd analog input of 2nd plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z115 K5203 3rd analog input of 2nd plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z115 K5204 1st analog output of 2nd plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z116 K5205 2nd analog output of 2nd plugged EB1 100% 16384 = Z116 K5206 Binary inputs and outputs of 2nd plugged EB1 1 1= Z117 K5211 Analog input of 2nd plugged EB2 100% 16384 = Z119 K5212 Analog output of 2nd plugged EB2 100% 16384 = Z119 K5213 Binary inputs and outputs of 2nd plugged EB2 1 1= Z119 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) K6001 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1 1 1= G171, G173 K6002 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2 1 1= G171, G173 K6003 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3 1 1= G171, G173 K6004 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4 1 1= G171, G173 K6005 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5 1 1= G171, G173 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 519 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K6006 USS2 receive data, word 6 1 1= G171 K6007 USS2 receive data, word 7 1 1= G171 K6008 USS2 receive data, word 8 1 1= G171 K6009 USS2 receive data, word 9 1 1= G171 K6010 USS2 receive data, word 10 1 1= G171 K6011 USS2 receive data, word 11 1 1= G171 K6012 USS2 receive data, word 12 1 1= G171 K6013 USS2 receive data, word 13 1 1= G171 K6014 USS2 receive data, word 14 1 1= G171 K6015 USS2 receive data, word 15 1 1= G171 K6016 USS2 receive data, word 16 1 1= G171 K6020 Output of binector/connector converter for G-SST2 1 1= G171, G173 Paralleling interface K6021 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2 1 1= G195 K6022 Word 2 from master / Word 2 from slave with address 2 1 1= G195 K6023 Word 3 from master / Word 3 from slave with address 2 1 1= G195 K6024 Word 4 from master / Word 4 from slave with address 2 1 1= G195 K6025 Word 5 from master / Word 5 from slave with address 2 1 1= G195 K6031 Word 1 from slave with address 3 1 1= G195 K6032 Word 2 from slave with address 3 1 1= G195 K6033 Word 3 from slave with address 3 1 1= G195 K6034 Word 4 from slave with address 3 1 1= G195 K6035 Word 5 from slave with address 3 1 1= G195 K6041 Word 1 from slave with address 4 1 1= G195 K6042 Word 2 from slave with address 4 1 1= G195 K6043 Word 3 from slave with address 4 1 1= G195 K6044 Word 4 from slave with address 4 1 1= G195 K6045 Word 5 from slave with address 4 1 1= G195 K6051 Word 1 from slave with address 5 1 1= G195 K6052 Word 2 from slave with address 5 1 1= G195 K6053 Word 3 from slave with address 5 1 1= G195 K6054 Word 4 from slave with address 5 1 1= G195 K6055 Word 5 from slave with address 5 1 1= G195 K6061 Word 1 from slave with address 6 1 1= G195 K6062 Word 2 from slave with address 6 1 1= G195 K6063 Word 3 from slave with address 6 1 1= G195 K6064 Word 4 from slave with address 6 1 1= G195 K6065 Word 5 from slave with address 6 1 1= G195 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) KK6081 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6082 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 520 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet KK6083 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6084 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4 and 5 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6085 USS2 receive data, word 5 and 6 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6086 USS2 receive data, word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6087 USS2 receive data, word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6088 USS2 receive data, word 8 and 9 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6089 USS2 receive data, word 9 and 10 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6090 USS2 receive data, word 10 and 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6091 USS2 receive data, word 11 and 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6092 USS2 receive data, word 12 and 13 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6093 USS2 receive data, word 13 and 14 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6094 USS2 receive data, word 14 and 15 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK6095 USS2 receive data, word 15 and 16 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 Process data exchange with SIMOLINK K7001 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 1 1 1= Z122 K7002 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 2 1 1= Z122 K7003 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 3 1 1= Z122 K7004 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 4 1 1= Z122 K7005 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 5 1 1= Z122 K7006 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 6 1 1= Z122 K7007 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 7 1 1= Z122 K7008 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 8 1 1= Z122 K7009 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 9 1 1= Z122 K7010 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 10 1 1= Z122 K7011 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 11 1 1= Z122 K7012 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 12 1 1= Z122 K7013 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 13 1 1= Z122 K7014 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 14 1 1= Z122 K7015 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 15 1 1= Z122 K7016 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 16 1 1= Z122 KK7031 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7032 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7033 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7034 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 4 and 5 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7035 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 5 and 6 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7036 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK7037 Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 K7101 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 1 1 1= Z122 K7102 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 2 1 1= Z122 K7103 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 3 1 1= Z122 K7104 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 4 1 1= Z122 K7105 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 5 1 1= Z122 K7106 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 6 1 1= Z122 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 521 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K7107 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 7 1 1= Z122 K7108 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 8 1 1= Z122 KK7131 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7132 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7133 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7134 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 4 and 5 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7135 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 5 and 6 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7136 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 KK7137 Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1 = Z124 Process data exchange with 2nd CB K8001 K8002 K8003 K8004 K8005 K8006 K8007 K8008 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 2 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8 K8009 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9 1 1= Z111 K8010 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 10 K8011 K8012 K8013 K8014 K8015 K8016 K8020 KK8031 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 nd 1 1= Z111 1 1= Z111 Receive data from 2 CB, word 11 Receive data from 2 CB, word 12 Receive data from 2 CB, word 13 Receive data from 2 CB, word 14 Receive data from 2 CB, word 15 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 16 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 1= Z111 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd nd Output of binector/connector converter for 2 CB Receive data from 2 CB, word 1 and 2 KK8032 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8033 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8040 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 10 and 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8041 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 11 and 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8042 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 12 and 13 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8043 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 13 and 14 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8044 nd [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= Z124 KK8034 KK8035 KK8036 KK8037 KK8038 KK8039 522 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4 and 5 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5 and 6 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6 and 7 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7 and 8 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8 and 9 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9 and 10 Receive data from 2 CB, word 14 and 15 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description KK8045 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 15 and 16 [SW 2.0 and later] Normalization Function diag., Sheet 1 1= Z124 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) K9001 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1 1 1= G172, G174 K9002 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2 1 1= G172, G174 K9003 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3 1 1= G172, G174 K9004 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4 1 1= G172, G174 K9005 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5 1 1= G172, G174 K9006 USS3 receive data, word 6 1 1= G172 K9007 USS3 receive data, word 7 1 1= G172 K9008 USS3 receive data, word 8 1 1= G172 K9009 USS3 receive data, word 9 1 1= G172 K9010 USS3 receive data, word 10 1 1= G172 K9011 USS3 receive data, word 11 1 1= G172 K9012 USS3 receive data, word 12 1 1= G172 K9013 USS3 receive data, word 13 1 1= G172 K9014 USS3 receive data, word 14 1 1= G172 K9015 USS3 receive data, word 15 1 1= G172 K9016 USS3 receive data, word 16 1 1= G172 K9020 Output of binector/connector converter for G-SST3 1 1= G172, G174 KK9081 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9082 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9083 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9084 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4 and 5 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9085 USS3 receive data, word 5 and 6 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9086 USS3 receive data, word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9087 USS3 receive data, word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9088 USS3 receive data, word 8 and 9 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9089 USS3 receive data, word 9 and 10 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9090 USS2 receive data, word 10 and 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9091 USS3 receive data, word 11 and 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9092 USS3 receive data, word 12 and 13 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9093 USS3 receive data, word 13 and 14 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9094 USS3 receive data, word 14 and 15 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 KK9095 USS3 receive data, word 15 and 16 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1= G169 Technology software S00: Binector/connector converters Output of binector/connector converter 1 1 FB 13 1 = B3 K9114 Output of binector/connector converter 2 1 FB 14 1 = B3 K9115 Output of binector/connector converter 3 1 FB 14 1 = B3 Output of adder/subtracter 1 100% FB 20 16384 = B125 Output of adder/subtracter 2 100% FB 21 16384 = B125 Output of adder/subtracter 3 100% FB 22 16384 = B125 K9113 Technology software S00: Adders / Subtracters K9120 K9121 K9122 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 523 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description K9123 Output of adder/subtracter 4 100% FB 23 16384 = B125 Output of adder/subtracter 5 100% FB 24 16384 = B125 Output of adder/subtracter 6 100% FB 25 16384 = B125 K9126 Output of adder/subtracter 7 100% FB 26 16384 = B125 K9127 Output of adder/subtracter 8 100% FB 27 16384 = B125 K9128 Output of adder/subtracter 9 100% FB 28 16384 = B125 K9129 Output of adder/subtracter 10 100% FB 29 16384 = B125 K9130 Output of adder/subtracter 11 100% FB 30 16384 = B125 K9131 Output of adder/subtracter 12 100% FB 31 16384 = B125 Output of adder/subtracter 13 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 32 16384 = B125 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 33 16384 = B125 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 34 16384 = B125 Output of sign inverter 1 100% FB 35 16384 = B125 Output of sign inverter 2 100% FB 36 16384 = B125 B125 K9124 K9125 K9132 K9133 K9134 Output of adder/subtracter 14 Output of adder/subtracter 15 Normalization Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Sign inverters, switchable sign inverters K9135 K9136 Output of sign inverter 3 100% FB 37 16384 = K9138 Output of sign inverter 4 100% FB 38 16384 = B125 K9140 Output of switchable sign inverter 1 100% FB 40 16384 = B125 K9141 Output of switchable sign inverter 2 100% FB 41 16384 = B125 K9137 Technology software S00: Dividers, multipliers, high-resolution multipliers/dividers K9142 Output of divider 4 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 42 16384 = B131 K9143 Output of divider 5 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 43 16384 = B131 K9144 Output of divider 6 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 44 16384 = B131 K9145 Output of divider 1 100% FB 45 16384 = B131 K9146 Output of divider 2 100% FB 46 16384 = B131 K9147 Output of divider 3 100% FB 47 16384 = B131 Output of multiplier 1 100% FB 50 16384 = B130 Output of multiplier 2 100% FB 51 16384 = B130 K9152 Output of multiplier 3 100% FB 52 16384 = B130 K9153 Output of multiplier 4 100% FB 53 16384 = B130 K9155 Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 1 100% FB 55 16384 = B131 K9156 Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 2 100% FB 56 16384 = B131 K9157 Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 3 100% FB 57 16384 = B131 Output of absolute-value generator with filter 1 100% FB 60 16384 = B135 K9161 Output of absolute-value generator with filter 2 100% FB 61 16384 = B135 K9162 Output of absolute-value generator with filter 3 100% FB 62 16384 = B135 K9163 Output of absolute-value generator with filter 4 100% FB 63 16384 = B135 Limiter 1: Fixed limiting value 100% FB 65 16384 = B135 Limiter 1: Positive limiting value * (-1) 100% FB 65 16384 = B135 Limiter 1: Output 100% FB 65 16384 = B135 K9150 K9151 Technology software S00: Absolute-value generator with filter K9160 Technology software S00: Limiters K9165 K9166 K9167 524 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description K9168 Limiter 2: Fixed limiting value 100% FB 66 16384 = B135 Limiter 2: Positive limiting value * (-1) 100% FB 66 16384 = B135 Limiter 2: Output 100% FB 66 16384 = B135 K9171 Limiter 3: Fixed limiting value 100% FB 67 16384 = B135 K9172 Limiter 3: Positive limiting value * (-1) 100% FB 67 16384 = B135 K9173 Limiter 3: Output 100% FB 67 16384 = B135 K9174 Limiter 4: Fixed limiting value [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 212 16384 = B134 K9175 Limiter 4: Positive limiting value * (-1) [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 212 16384 = B134 K9176 Limiter 4: Output [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 212 16384 = B134 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 213 16384 = B134 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 213 16384 = B134 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 213 16384 = B134 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Filtered input quantity 100% FB 70 16384 = B136 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Fixed operating point 100% FB 70 16384 = B136 B136 K9169 K9170 K9177 K9178 K9179 Limiter 5: Fixed limiting value Limiter 5: Positive limiting value * (-1) Limiter 5: Output Normalization Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor with filter K9180 K9181 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Filtered input quantity 100% FB 71 16384 = K9183 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Fixed operating point 100% FB 71 16384 = B136 K9184 Limit-value monitor with filter 3: Filtered input quantity 100% FB 72 16384 = B136 K9185 Limit-value monitor with filter 3: Fixed operating point 100% FB 72 16384 = B136 K9182 Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor without filter K9186 Limit-value monitor without filter 1: Fixed operating point 100% FB 73 16384 = B137 K9187 Limit-value monitor without filter 2: Fixed operating point 100% FB 74 16384 = B137 K9188 Limit-value monitor without filter 3: Fixed operating point 100% FB 75 16384 = B137 K9189 Limit-value monitor without filter 4: Fixed operating point 100% FB 76 16384 = B137 K9190 Limit-value monitor without filter 5: Fixed operating point 100% FB 77 16384 = B138 K9191 Limit-value monitor without filter 6: Fixed operating point 100% FB 78 16384 = B138 Limit-value monitor without filter 7: Fixed operating point 100% FB 79 16384 = B138 K9192 Technology software S00: Minimum selection, maximum selection K9193 Minimum selection output 100% FB 80 16384 = B140 K9194 Maximum selection output 100% FB 81 16384 = B140 Technology software S00: Tracking/storage elements K9195 Output of tracking/storage element 1 100% FB 82 16384 = B145 K9196 Output of tracking/storage element 2 100% FB 83 16384 = B145 Technology software S00: Connector memories K9197 Output connector memory 1 100% FB 84 16384 = B145 K9198 Output connector memory 2 100% FB 85 16384 = B145 Output connector changeover switch 1 100% FB 90 16384 = B150 Output connector changeover switch 2 100% FB 91 16384 = B150 K9212 Output connector changeover switch 3 100% FB 92 16384 = B150 K9213 Output connector changeover switch 4 100% FB 93 16384 = B150 K9214 Output connector changeover switch 5 100% FB 94 16384 = B150 Technology software S00: Connector changeover switches K9210 K9211 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 525 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description K9215 Output connector changeover switch 6 100% FB 95 16384 = B150 Output connector changeover switch 7 100% FB 96 16384 = B150 Output connector changeover switch 8 100% FB 97 16384 = B150 K9218 Output connector changeover switch 9 100% FB 98 16384 = B150 K9219 Output connector changeover switch 10 100% FB 99 16384 = B150 Output of integrator 1 100% FB 100 16384 = B155 Output of integrator 2 100% FB 101 16384 = B155 Output of integrator 3 100% FB 102 16384 = B155 Output of DT1 element 1 100% FB 103 16384 = B155 Output of DT1 element 1, inverted 100% FB 103 16384 = B155 K9225 Output of DT1 element 2 100% FB 104 16384 = B155 K9226 Output of DT1 element 2, inverted 100% FB 104 16384 = B155 K9227 Output of DT1 element 3 100% FB 105 16384 = B155 K9228 Output of DT1 element 3, inverted 100% FB 105 16384 = B155 K9216 K9217 Normalization Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Integrators K9220 K9221 K9222 Technology software S00: DT1 elements K9223 K9224 Technology software S00: Characteristic blocks K9229 Output of characteristic block 1 100% FB 106 16384 = B160 K9230 Output of characteristic block 2 100% FB 107 16384 = B160 K9231 Output of characteristic block 3 100% FB 108 16384 = B160 Output of dead zone 1 100% FB 109 16384 = B161 K9233 Output of dead zone 2 100% FB 110 16384 = B161 K9234 Output of dead zone 3 100% FB 111 16384 = B161 100% FB 112 16384 = B161 100% FB 113 16384 = B165 Technology software S00: Dead zones K9232 Technology software S00: Setpoint branching K9235 Setpoint branching output Technology software S00: Simple ramp-function generator K9236 Simple ramp-function generator output Technology software S00: Technology controller K9240 Technology controller, signed actual value 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9241 Technology controller, absolute actual value 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9242 D component 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9243 Technology controller, setpoint 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9244 Technology controller, filtered setpoint 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 Setpoint/actual value deviation 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 Setpoint/actual value deviation after droop 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9247 P component 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9248 I component 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9249 Technology controller output before limitation 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9250 Positive limit for technology controller output 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9245 K9246 526 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description K9251 Negative limit for technology controller output 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 Positive limit for technology controller output * (-1) 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9253 Technology controller output after limitation 100% FB 114 16384 = B170 K9254 100% Technology controller output after multiplication with weighting factor FB 114 16384 = B170 K9252 Normalization Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Speed/velocity calculator, velocity/speed calculator K9256 K9257 Speed/velocity calculator: Actual velocity 100% FB 115 16384 = B190 Velocity/speed calculator: Speed setpoint 100% FB 115 16384 = B190 100% 16384 = B191 Technology software S00: Variable moment of inertia K9258 FB 116 [SW 1.8 and later] Variable moment of inertia (output) Technology software S00: Limiters K9260 Limiter 6: Fixed limiting value [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 214 16384 = B134 K9261 Limiter 6: Positive limiting value * (-1) [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 214 16384 = B134 K9262 Limiter 6: Output [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 214 16384 = B134 Technology software S00: Connector changeover switches K9265 Output connector changeover switch 11 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 196 16384 = B150 K9266 Output connector changeover switch 12 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 197 16384 = B150 K9267 Output connector changeover switch 13 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 198 16384 = B150 K9268 Output connector changeover switch 14 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 199 16384 = B150 K9269 Output connector changeover switch 15 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 229 16384 = B150 Technology software S00: PI controller 1 FB260 [SW 1.8 and later] Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = K9301 P component 100% 16384 = B180 K9302 I component 100% 16384 = B180 K9303 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B180 K9304 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B180 K9305 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B180 K9306 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9305) -1 100% 16384 = B180 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B180 K9300 K9307 Technology software S00: PI controller 2 B180 FB261 [SW 1.8 and later] K9310 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B181 K9311 P component 100% 16384 = B181 K9312 I component 100% 16384 = B181 K9313 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B181 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B181 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B181 K9316 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9315) -1 100% 16384 = B181 K9317 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B181 K9314 K9315 Technology software S00: PI controller 3 FB262 [SW 1.8 and later] K9320 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B182 K9321 P component 100% 16384 = B182 I component 100% 16384 = B182 K9322 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 527 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description Normalization Function diag., Sheet K9323 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B182 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B182 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B182 K9326 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9325) -1 100% 16384 = B182 K9327 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B182 K9324 K9325 Technology software S00: PI controller 4 FB263 [SW 1.8 and later] K9330 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B183 K9331 P component 100% 16384 = B183 I component 100% 16384 = B183 K9333 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B183 K9334 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B183 K9335 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B183 K9336 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9335) -1 100% 16384 = B183 K9337 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B183 K9332 Technology software S00: PI controller 5 FB264 [SW 1.8 and later] K9340 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B184 K9341 P component 100% 16384 = B184 I component 100% 16384 = B184 B184 K9342 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = K9344 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B184 K9345 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B184 K9346 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9345) -1 100% 16384 = B184 K9347 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B184 K9343 Technology software S00: PI controller 6 FB265 [SW 1.8 and later] K9350 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B185 K9351 P component 100% 16384 = B185 K9352 I component 100% 16384 = B185 K9353 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B185 K9354 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B185 K9355 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B185 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9355) -1 100% 16384 = B185 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B185 K9356 K9357 Technology software S00: PI controller 7 FB266 [SW 1.8 and later] K9360 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B186 K9361 P component 100% 16384 = B186 I component 100% 16384 = B186 K9363 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B186 K9364 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B186 K9365 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B186 K9366 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9365) -1 100% 16384 = B186 K9367 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B186 K9362 528 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connector Connectors and binectors Description Technology software S00: PI controller 8 Normalization Function diag., Sheet FB267 [SW 1.8 and later] K9370 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B187 K9371 P component 100% 16384 = B187 K9372 I component 100% 16384 = B187 K9373 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B187 K9374 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B187 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B187 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9375) -1 100% 16384 = B187 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B187 K9375 K9376 K9377 Technology software S00: PI controller 9 FB268 [SW 1.8 and later] Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B188 P component 100% 16384 = B188 K9382 I component 100% 16384 = B188 K9383 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B188 K9384 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B188 K9385 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B188 K9386 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9385) -1 100% 16384 = B188 K9387 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B188 K9380 K9381 Technology software S00: PI controller 10 FB269 [SW 1.8 and later] K9390 Input quantity filtered 100% 16384 = B189 K9391 P component 100% 16384 = B189 K9392 I component 100% 16384 = B189 K9393 Output PI controller before limitation 100% 16384 = B189 Output PI controller after limitation 100% 16384 = B189 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B189 K9396 Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9395) -1 100% 16384 = B189 K9397 Negative limit for the output of the PI controller 100% 16384 = B189 K9394 K9395 Technology software S00: Derivative/delay elements K9400 Derivative/delay element 1 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 270 16384 = B156 K9401 Derivative/delay element 2 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 271 16384 = B156 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 272 16384 = B156 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 273 16384 = B156 B157 K9402 K9403 Derivative/delay element 3 output Derivative/delay element 4 output K9404 Derivative/delay element 5 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 274 16384 = K9405 Derivative/delay element 6 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 275 16384 = B157 K9406 Derivative/delay element 7 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 276 16384 = B157 K9407 Derivative/delay element 8 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 277 16384 = B157 K9408 Derivative/delay element 9 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 278 16384 = B158 K9409 Derivative/delay element 10 output [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 279 16384 = B158 Technology software S00: Characteristic blocks K9410 Output characteristic block 4 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 280 16384 = B160 K9411 Output characteristic block 5 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 281 16384 = B160 K9412 Output characteristic block 6 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 282 16384 = B160 K9413 Output characteristic block 7 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 283 16384 = B160 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 529 Connectors and binectors Connector Description K9414 Output characteristic block 8 K9415 Output characteristic block 9 03.2015 Normalization Function diag., Sheet [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 284 16384 = B160 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 285 16384 = B160 Technology software S00: Multiplier K9430 Output multiplier 5 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 290 16384 = B130 K9431 Output multiplier 6 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 291 16384 = B130 K9432 Output multiplier 7 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 292 16384 = B130 K9433 Output multiplier 8 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 293 16384 = B130 K9434 Output multiplier 9 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 294 16384 = B130 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 295 16384 = B130 B130 B130 K9435 Output multiplier 10 K9436 Output multiplier 11 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 296 16384 = K9437 Output multiplier 12 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 297 16384 = S00 technology software: Software counter K9441 Minimum value for software counter [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FB 89 1 = B196 K9442 Maximum value for software counter [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FB 89 1 = B196 K9443 Setting value for software counter [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FB 89 1 = B196 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FB 89 1 = B196 [SW 1.9 and later] 1 FB 89 1 = B196 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 86 16384 = B195 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 87 16384 = B195 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 88 16384 = B195 K9444 K9445 Start value for software counter Software counter output Technology software S00: Multiplexer K9450 K9451 K9452 Output multiplexer 1 Output multiplexer 2 Output multiplexer 3 Technology software S00: Averagers K9455 Output averager 1 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 16 16384 = B139 K9456 Output averager 2 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 17 16384 = B139 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 18 16384 = B139 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 19 16384 = B139 K9457 K9458 Output averager 3 Output averager 4 Technology software S00: Minimum selections, Maximum selections K9460 Output Maximum selection 2 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 174 16384 = B140 K9461 Output Maximum selection 3 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 175 16384 = B140 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 176 16384 = B140 B140 K9462 Output Maximum selection 4 K9463 Output Minimum selection 2 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 177 16384 = K9464 Output Minimum selection 3 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 178 16384 = B140 K9465 Output Minimum selection 4 [SW 1.8 and later] 100% FB 179 16384 = B140 Technology software S00: position fixed value, position actual value, positional deviation KK9471 Position fixed value1 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 B152 KK9472 Position fixed value2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = KK9473 Position fixed value3 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 KK9474 Position fixed value4 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 KK9481 Position actual value 1 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 KK9482 Position actual value 2 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 530 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description KK9483 Positional deviation K9484 Normalization Positional deviation limited Function diag., Sheet [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 FB 54 1 = B152 [SW 2.0 and later] 100% FB 58 16384 = B153 Technology software S00: root extractor KK9485 Root extractor output S00 technology software: Adders / subtracters for double-word connectors KK9490 K9491 KK9492 K9493 [SW 1.9 and later] 100% FB 48 16384*65536 = B151 st [SW 1.9 and later] 100%/65536 FB 48 16384 = B151 nd [SW 1.9 and later] 100% FB 49 16384*65536 = B151 nd [SW 1.9 and later] 100%/65536 FB 49 16384 = B151 [SW 1.9 and later] 100% FB 298 16384*65536 = B151 [SW 1.9 and later] 100% FB 299 16384*65536 = B151 Output of 1st adder / subtracter Output of 1 adder / subtracter (limited) Output of 2 adder / subtracter Output of 2 adder / subtracter (limited) S00 technology software: Connector type converters KK9498 KK9499 Output of 1st connector type converter nd Output of 2 connector type converter Technology software S00: Fixed values [SW 1.8 and later] Fixed value 1 (U099.01) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9502 Fixed value 2 (U099.02) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9503 Fixed value 3 (U099.03) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9504 Fixed value 4 (U099.04) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9505 Fixed value 5 (U099.05) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9506 Fixed value 6 (U099.06) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9507 Fixed value 7 (U099.07) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 8 (U099.08) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9501 K9508 Fixed value 9 (U099.09) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9510 Fixed value 10 (U099.10) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9511 Fixed value 11 (U099.11) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9512 Fixed value 12 (U099.12) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9513 Fixed value 13 (U099.13) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9514 Fixed value 14 (U099.14) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9515 Fixed value 15 (U099.15) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 16 (U099.16) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9509 K9516 Fixed value 17 (U099.17) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9518 Fixed value 18 (U099.18) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9519 Fixed value 19 (U099.19) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9520 Fixed value 20 (U099.20) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9521 Fixed value 21 (U099.21) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9522 Fixed value 22 (U099.22) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9523 Fixed value 23 (U099.23) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 24 (U099.24) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9517 K9524 Fixed value 25 (U099.25) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9526 Fixed value 26 (U099.26) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9527 Fixed value 27 (U099.27) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9528 Fixed value 28 (U099.28) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9529 Fixed value 29 (U099.29) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9530 Fixed value 30 (U099.30) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9525 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 531 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description K9531 Fixed value 31 (U099.31) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 32 (U099.32) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 33 (U099.33) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9534 Fixed value 34 (U099.34) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9535 Fixed value 35 (U099.35) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9536 Fixed value 36 (U099.36) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9537 Fixed value 37 (U099.37) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9538 Fixed value 38 (U099.38) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9539 Fixed value 39 (U099.39) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 40 (U099.40) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9532 K9533 K9540 Normalization Function diag., Sheet Fixed value 41 (U099.41) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9542 Fixed value 42 (U099.42) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9543 Fixed value 43 (U099.43) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9544 Fixed value 44 (U099.44) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9545 Fixed value 45 (U099.45) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9546 Fixed value 46 (U099.46) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9547 Fixed value 47 (U099.47) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 48 (U099.48) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9541 K9548 Fixed value 49 (U099.49) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9550 Fixed value 50 (U099.50) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9551 Fixed value 51 (U099.51) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9552 Fixed value 52 (U099.52) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9553 Fixed value 53 (U099.53) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9554 Fixed value 54 (U099.54) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9555 Fixed value 55 (U099.55) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 56 (U099.56) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9557 Fixed value 57 (U099.57) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9558 Fixed value 58 (U099.58) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9559 Fixed value 59 (U099.59) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9560 Fixed value 60 (U099.60) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9561 Fixed value 61 (U099.61) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9562 Fixed value 62 (U099.62) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9563 Fixed value 63 (U099.63) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 64 (U099.64) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9565 Fixed value 65 (U099.65) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9566 Fixed value 66 (U099.66) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9567 Fixed value 67 (U099.67) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9568 Fixed value 68 (U099.68) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9569 Fixed value 69 (U099.69) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9570 Fixed value 70 (U099.70) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9571 Fixed value 71 (U099.71) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 72 (U099.72) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9573 Fixed value 73 (U099.73) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9574 Fixed value 74 (U099.74) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9575 Fixed value 75 (U099.75) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9549 K9556 K9564 K9572 532 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Connector Description K9576 Fixed value 76 (U099.76) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 77 (U099.77) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 78 (U099.78) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9579 Fixed value 79 (U099.79) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9580 Fixed value 80 (U099.80) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9581 Fixed value 81 (U099.81) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9582 Fixed value 82 (U099.82) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9583 Fixed value 83 (U099.83) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9584 Fixed value 84 (U099.84) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 85 (U099.85) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9577 K9578 K9585 Normalization Function diag., Sheet Fixed value 86 (U099.86) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9587 Fixed value 87 (U099.87) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9588 Fixed value 88 (U099.88) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9589 Fixed value 89 (U099.89) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9590 Fixed value 90 (U099.90) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9591 Fixed value 91 (U099.91) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9592 Fixed value 92 (U099.92) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 Fixed value 93 (U099.93) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 B110 K9586 K9593 Fixed value 94 (U099.94) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = K9595 Fixed value 95 (U099.95) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9596 Fixed value 96 (U099.96) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9597 Fixed value 97 (U099.97) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9598 Fixed value 98 (U099.98) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9599 Fixed value 99 (U099.99) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9600 Fixed value 100 (U099.100) 100% [SW 1.8 and later] 16384 = B110 K9594 General connectors K9801 Alarm word 1 (= parameter r953) K9802 Alarm word 2 (= parameter r954) K9803 Alarm word 3 (= parameter r955) K9804 Alarm word 4 (= parameter r956) K9805 Alarm word 5 (= parameter r957) K9806 Alarm word 6 (= parameter r958) K9807 Alarm word 7 (= parameter r959) K9808 Alarm word 8 (= parameter r960) K9811 Fault number 1 (= parameter r947.01, last fault number) G189 K9812 Fault number 2 (= parameter r947.09, second last fault number) G189 K9813 Fault number 3 (= parameter r947.17, third last fault number) G189 K9814 Fault number 4 (= parameter r947.25, fourth last fault number) G189 K9815 Fault number 5 (= parameter r947.33) G189 K9816 Fault number 6 (= parameter r947.41) G189 K9817 Fault number 7 (= parameter r947.49) G189 K9818 Fault number 8 (= parameter r947.57) G189 K9990 Current total processor capacity utilization (C163/C165) (= parameter n009.01) K9991 Projected total processor capacity utilization (C163/C165) for line frequency = 65Hz (= parameter n009.02) K9992 Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by background routines (= parameter n009.03) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 533 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Connector Description K9993 Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in foreground cycle 4 (= parameter n009.04) K9994 Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in foreground cycle 2 (= parameter n009.05) K9995 Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in foreground cycle 1 (= parameter n009.06) K9999 Output of binary connector converter for DriveMonitor Trace function 534 Normalization Function diag., Sheet SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 12.2 Connectors and binectors Binector list The states of binectors can be displayed via parameters r045 and P046. Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B0000 Fixed value 0 G120 B0001 Fixed value 1 G120 Fixed values Binary inputs, terminals 36 to 43 B0010 Status of terminal 36 G110 B0011 Status of terminal 36, inverted G110 B0012 Status of terminal 37 G110 B0013 Status of terminal 37, inverted G110 B0014 Status of terminal 38 G110 B0015 Status of terminal 38, inverted G110 B0016 Status of terminal 39 G110 B0017 Status of terminal 39, inverted G110 B0018 Status of terminal 40 G110 B0019 Status of terminal 40, inverted G110 B0020 Status of terminal 41 G110 B0021 Status of terminal 41, inverted G110 B0022 Status of terminal 42 G110 B0023 Status of terminal 42, inverted G110 B0024 Status of terminal 43 G110 B0025 Status of terminal 43, inverted G110 Binary inputs, terminals 211 to 214 B0040 Status of terminal 211 G186 B0041 Status of terminal 211, inverted G186 B0042 Status of terminal 212 G186 B0043 Status of terminal 212, inverted G186 B0044 Status of terminal 213 G186 B0045 Status of terminal 213, inverted G186 B0046 Status of terminal 214 G186 B0047 Status of terminal 214, inverted G186 Analog inputs B0050 Analog input, terminal 4: 1 = Open circuit (i 2 mA) G113 B0051 Analog input, terminal 6: 1 = Open circuit (i 2 mA) G113 Pulse encoder evaluation B0052 Fault in digital speed sensing circuit G145 B0053 Underflow of actual position value [SW 1.9 and later] This binector changes to 1 when connector KK0046 (actual position value extended in software to a 32-bit value) counts from value 8000 0000H (= -231) to value 7FFF FFFFH (= +231 -1). Binector B0053 does not change back to 0 until connector KK0046 assumes a value other than 7FFF FFFFH (= +231 -1) again. G145 B0054 G145 Overrflow of actual position value [SW 1.9 and later] This binector changes to 1 when connector KK0046 (actual position value extended in software to a 32-bit value) counts from value 7FFF FFFFH (= +231 -1) to value 8000 0000H (= -231). Binector B0054 does not change back to 0 until connector KK0046 assumes a value other than 8000 0000H (= -231) again. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 535 Connectors and binectors Binector 03.2015 Name, description Function diag., Sheet Evaluation of the pulse encoder board SBP B0055 Position acquisition of SBP, underflow [SW 2.0 and later] Z120 B0056 Position acquisition of SBP, overflow [SW 2.0 and later] Z120 Status word 1 B0100 Stat.word 1, bit 0: B0101 Stat.word 1, bit 0 inverted G182 B0102 Stat.word 1, bit 1: G182 B0103 Stat.word 1, bit 1 inverted G182 B0104 Stat.word 1, bit 2: G182 B0105 Stat.word 1, bit 2 inverted G182 B0106 Stat.word 1, bit 3: G182 B0107 Stat.word 1, bit 3 inverted G182 B0108 Stat.word 1, bit 4: G182 B0109 Stat.word 1, bit 4 inverted G182 B0110 Stat.word 1, bit 5: G182 B0111 Stat.word 1, bit 5 inverted G182 B0112 Stat.word 1, bit 6: G182 B0113 Stat.word 1, bit 6 inverted G182 B0114 Stat.word 1, bit 7: G182 B0115 Stat.word 1, bit 7 inverted G182 B0116 Stat.word 1, bit 8: G182 B0117 Stat.word 1, bit 8 inverted G182 B0120 Stat.word 1, bit 10: 0=comparison setpoint not reached, 1=comparison setpoint reached G182 B0121 Stat.word 1, bit 10 inverted G182 B0122 Stat.word 1, bit 11: 0=undervoltage fault not active, 1=undervoltage fault active G182 B0123 Stat.word 1, bit 11 inverted G182 B0124 Stat.word 1, bit 12: 0=main contactor request not active, 1=request to energize main contactor active G182 B0125 Stat.word 1, bit 12 inverted G182 B0126 Stat.word 1, bit 13: 0=ramp-function generator not active, 1=ramp-function generator active G182 B0127 Stat.word 1, bit 13 inverted G182 B0128 Stat.word 1, bit 14: 0=negative speed setpoint, 1=positive speed setpoint G182 B0129 Stat.word 1, bit 14 inverted G182 0=not ready to switch on, 1=ready to switch on 0=not ready, 1=ready (pulses disabled) 0=pulses disabled, 1=Run (output terminals energized) 0=no active fault, 1=active fault (pulses disabled) 0=OFF2 active, 1=no active OFF2 0=OFF3 active, 1=no active OFF3 0=no starting lockout (unit can be switched on), 1=starting lockout active 0=no active alarm, 1=alarm active 0=setp./act. val. deviation detected, 1=no setp./act. val. deviation G182 Status word 2 B0136 Stat.word 2, bit 18: 0=overspeed, 1=no overspeed G183 B0137 Stat.word 2, bit 18 inverted G183 B0138 Stat.word 2, bit 19: 0=no external fault 1 active, 1=external fault 1 active G183 B0139 Stat.word 2, bit 19 inverted G183 B0140 Stat.word 2, bit 20: 0=no external fault 2 active, 1=external fault 2 active G183 B0141 Stat.word 2, bit 20 inverted G183 B0142 Stat.word 2, bit 21: 0=no external alarm active, 1=external alarm active G183 B0143 Stat.word 2, bit 21 inverted G183 B0144 Stat.word 2, bit 22: 0=no overload alarm active, 1=overload alarm active G183 B0145 Stat.word 2, bit 22 inverted G183 B0146 Stat.word 2, bit 23: 0=no overtemperature fault active, 1=overtemperature fault active G183 B0147 Stat.word 2, bit 23 inverted G183 B0148 Stat.word 2, bit 24: 0=no overtemperature alarm active, 1=overtemperature alarm active G183 B0149 Stat.word 2, bit 24 inverted G183 B0150 Stat.word 2, bit 25: 0=no motor overtemperature alarm active, 1=motor overtemperature alarm active G183 536 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B0151 Stat.word 2, bit 25 inverted G183 B0152 Stat.word 2, bit 26: 0=no motor overtemperature fault active, 1=motor overtemperature fault active G183 B0153 Stat.word 2, bit 26 inverted G183 B0156 Stat.word 2, bit 28: 0=no motor blocked fault active, 1=motor blocked fault active G183 B0160 0=AUS1 or AUS3 active, 1=no AUS1 and no AUS3 is pending G180 B0161 B0160 inverted G180 B0164 1 = n < nmin G188 B0165 B0164 inverted G188 B0166 1 = Voltage at power section is active B0167 B0166 inverted B0170 1=Voltage at power section AND operating state <= o7 G119 B0171 B0170 inverted G119 B0172 Output of "Setpoint-actual value deviation 2" signal [SW 1.9 and later] G187 B0173 B0172 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] G187 Messages Acknowledgement of fault codes B0179 [SW 2.1 and later] Acknowledgement of control word or P key on PMU (pulse) G180 Binary inputs B0180 1=Terminal 211 not activated for more than 10 s. B0181 G186 1=Terminal 212 activated for more than 2 s. G186 B0182 1=Terminal 213 not activated for more than 40 s while in operating state < o6 G186 B0183 1=Terminal 214 not activated for more than 10 s. G186 Temperature sensor inputs B0184 1=Alarm motor temperature 1 G185 B0185 1=Alarm motor temperature 2 G185 Alarm messages B0186 1=Alarm A037 (I2t motor) active B0187 1=Alarm A039 (I2t power section) active B0188 1=Alarm A067 (heatsink temperature) active B0189 1=Alarm A067 (converter fan) active Torque limitation, current limitation, current controller B0190 0 = pulsating current, 1 = continuous current [SW 2.0 and later] G162 B0192 Speed limitation controller: Positive speed limit reached [SW 1.8 and later] G160 B0193 Speed limitation controller: Negative speed limit reached [SW 1.8 and later] G160 B0194 Current limitation: Positive current limit reached [SW 1.8 and later] G161 B0195 Current limitation: Negative current limit reached [SW 1.8 and later] G161 B0198 Any positive limit (speed, torque, current) reached [SW 2.0 and later] B0199 Any positive limit (speed, torque, current) reached [SW 2.0 and later] B0200 Current limitation active G161 B0201 Speed limiting controller active G160 B0202 Upper torque limitation active G160 B0203 Lower torque limitation active G160 B0204 Torque or current limitation active or current controller at limitation G163 Speed controller B0205 Speed controller enabling by sequencing control SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 G152 537 Connectors and binectors Binector 03.2015 Name, description Function diag., Sheet Setpoint processing, ramp-function generator B0206 Limitation after ramp-function generator (setpoint limitation) has responded G137 B0207 Ramp-function generator output = 0 (y = 0) G136 B0208 Ramp-function generator, ramp-up G136 B0209 Ramp-function generator, ramp-down G136 B0210 1 = no direction of rotation enabled G135 B0211 Ramp-function generator: Enable setpoint (1 = setpoint enabled) G136 Torque limitation B0212 "Zero delay-angle" command G160 B0220 Enabled torque direction for parallel drive G163 B0221 1 = Torque direction I active [SW 2.1 and later] G163 B0222 1 = Torque direction II active [SW 2.1 and later] G163 B0225 1 = active paralleling master [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B0230 1 = No torque direction requested [SW 2.1 and later] G163 B0231 1 = Torque direction I requested [SW 2.1 and later] G163 B0232 1 = Torque direction II requested [SW 2.1 and later] G163 Gating unit Motorized potentiometer B0240 Motorized potentiometer output = 0 (y = 0) G126 B0241 Ramp-up/ramp-down finished (y = x) G126 Brake control B0250 Brake control (1=close brake, 0=release brake) G140 B0251 1=auxiliaries ON, 0=auxiliaries OFF see Sect. 9.7 B0252 1=converter fan ON, 0=converter fan OFF B0255 B0250 inverted B0256 B0251 inverted G140 Fixed control bits B0421 Control bit 1 (P421) G120 B0422 Control bit 2 (P422) G120 B0423 Control bit 3 (P423) G120 B0424 Control bit 4 (P424) G120 B0425 Control bit 5 (P425) G120 B0426 Control bit 6 (P426) G120 B0427 Control bit 7 (P427) G120 B0428 Control bit 8 (P428) G120 Control inputs B0500 Status of terminal 72 G117 B0501 Status of terminal 72, inverted G117 B0502 Status of terminal 73 G117 B0503 Status of terminal 73, inverted G117 B0504 Status of terminal 74 G117 B0505 Status of terminal 74, inverted G117 B0506 Status of terminal 75 G117 B0507 Status of terminal 75, inverted G117 538 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B0508 Status of terminal 76 G118 B0509 Status of terminal 76, inverted G118 B0510 Status of terminal 77 G118 B0511 Status of terminal 77, inverted G118 B0512 Status of terminal 78 G118 B0513 Status of terminal 78, inverted G118 B0514 Status of terminal 79 G118 B0515 Status of terminal 79, inverted G118 Control outputs B0520 Status of relay at terminal 81/82 G119 B0521 Status of relay at terminal 81/82, inverted G119 B0522 Status of relay at terminal 83/84 G119 B0523 Status of relay at terminal 83/84, inverted G119 B0524 Status of relay at terminal 85/86 G119 B0525 Status of relay at terminal 85/86, inverted G119 B0526 Status of relay at terminal 87/88 G119 B0527 Status of relay at terminal 87/88, inverted G119 B0528 Status of relay at terminal 89/90 G119 B0529 Status of relay at terminal 89/90, inverted G119 B0530 Status of relay at terminal 91/92 G119 B0531 Status of relay at terminal 91/92, inverted G119 B0532 Status of relay at terminal 93/94 G119 B0533 Status of relay at terminal 93/94, inverted G119 B0540 1=nset on ramp-function generator (K0190) is greater than U628 G136 B0541 B0540 inverted G136 Messages Serial interface 1 (USS1 on G-SST1) B2030 USS1 telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal G170 B2031 USS1 telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse G170 Serial interface 1 (USS1 on G-SST1) B2100 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 0 G170 B2101 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 1 G170 B2102 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 2 G170 B2103 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 3 G170 B2104 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 4 G170 B2105 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 5 G170 B2106 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 6 G170 B2107 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 7 G170 B2108 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 8 G170 B2109 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 9 G170 B2110 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 10 G170 B2111 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 11 G170 B2112 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 12 G170 B2113 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 13 G170 B2114 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 14 G170 B2115 USS1 receive data, word 1, bit 15 G170 B2200 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 0 G170 B2201 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 1 G170 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 539 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B2202 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 2 G170 B2203 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 3 G170 B2204 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 4 G170 B2205 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 5 G170 B2206 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 6 G170 B2207 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 7 G170 B2208 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 8 G170 B2209 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 9 G170 B2210 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 10 G170 B2211 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 11 G170 B2212 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 12 G170 B2213 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 13 G170 B2214 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 14 G170 B2215 USS1 receive data, word 2, bit 15 G170 B2300 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 0 G170 B2301 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 1 G170 B2302 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 2 G170 B2303 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 3 G170 B2304 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 4 G170 B2305 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 5 G170 B2306 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 6 G170 B2307 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 7 G170 B2308 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 8 G170 B2309 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 9 G170 B2310 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 10 G170 B2311 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 11 G170 B2312 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 12 G170 B2313 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 13 G170 B2314 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 14 G170 B2315 USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 15 G170 B2400 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 0 G170 B2401 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 1 G170 B2402 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 2 G170 B2403 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 3 G170 B2404 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 4 G170 B2405 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 5 G170 B2406 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 6 G170 B2407 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 7 G170 B2408 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 8 G170 B2409 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 9 G170 B2410 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 10 G170 B2411 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 11 G170 B2412 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 12 G170 B2413 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 13 G170 B2414 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 14 G170 B2415 USS1 receive data, word 4, bit 15 G170 B2500 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 0 G170 B2501 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 1 G170 B2502 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 2 G170 B2503 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 3 G170 540 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B2504 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 4 G170 B2505 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 5 G170 B2506 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 6 G170 B2507 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 7 G170 B2508 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 8 G170 B2509 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 9 G170 B2510 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 10 G170 B2511 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 11 G170 B2512 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 12 G170 B2513 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 13 G170 B2514 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 14 G170 B2515 USS1 receive data, word 5, bit 15 G170 B2600 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 0 G170 B2601 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 1 G170 B2602 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 2 G170 B2603 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 3 G170 B2604 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 4 G170 B2605 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 5 G170 B2606 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 6 G170 B2607 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 7 G170 B2608 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 8 G170 B2609 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 9 G170 B2610 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 10 G170 B2611 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 11 G170 B2612 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 12 G170 B2613 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 13 G170 B2614 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 14 G170 B2615 USS1 receive data, word 6, bit 15 G170 B2700 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 0 G170 B2701 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 1 G170 B2702 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 2 G170 B2703 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 3 G170 B2704 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 4 G170 B2705 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 5 G170 B2706 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 6 G170 B2707 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 7 G170 B2708 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 8 G170 B2709 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 9 G170 B2710 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 10 G170 B2711 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 11 G170 B2712 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 12 G170 B2713 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 13 G170 B2714 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 14 G170 B2715 USS1 receive data, word 7, bit 15 G170 B2800 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 0 G170 B2801 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 1 G170 B2802 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 2 G170 B2803 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 3 G170 B2804 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 4 G170 B2805 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 5 G170 B2806 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 6 G170 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 541 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B2807 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 7 G170 B2808 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 8 G170 B2809 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 9 G170 B2810 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 10 G170 B2811 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 11 G170 B2812 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 12 G170 B2813 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 13 G170 B2814 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 14 G170 B2815 USS1 receive data, word 8, bit 15 G170 B2900 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 0 G170 B2901 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 1 G170 B2902 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 2 G170 B2903 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 3 G170 B2904 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 4 G170 B2905 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 5 G170 B2906 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 6 G170 B2907 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 7 G170 B2908 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 8 G170 B2909 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 9 G170 B2910 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 10 G170 B2911 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 11 G170 B2912 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 12 G170 B2913 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 13 G170 B2914 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 14 G170 B2915 USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 15 G170 Process data exchange with 1st CB/TB B3030 Message timeout on 1st CB/TB - maintained signal Z110 st B3031 Message timeout on 1 CB/TB - 1s pulse B3035 Telegram failure timeout for 1st CB/TB Z110 [SW 1.9 and later] Z110 Process data exchange with 1st CB/TB B3100 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 0 Z110 B3101 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 1 Z110 B3102 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 2 Z110 B3103 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 3 Z110 B3104 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 4 Z110 B3105 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 5 Z110 B3106 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 6 Z110 B3107 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 7 Z110 B3108 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 8 Z110 B3109 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 9 Z110 B3110 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 10 Z110 B3111 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 11 Z110 st B3112 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 12 Z110 B3113 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 13 Z110 st B3114 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 14 Z110 B3115 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 1, bit 15 Z110 B3200 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 0 Z110 B3201 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 1 Z110 542 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B3202 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 2 Z110 B3203 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 3 Z110 B3204 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 4 Z110 B3205 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 5 Z110 B3206 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 6 Z110 B3207 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 7 Z110 B3208 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 8 Z110 B3209 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 9 Z110 B3210 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 10 Z110 Function diag., Sheet st B3211 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 11 Z110 B3212 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 12 Z110 st B3213 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 13 Z110 B3214 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 2, bit 14 Z110 B3215 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 15 Z110 B3300 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 0 Z110 B3301 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 1 Z110 B3302 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 2 Z110 B3303 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 3 Z110 B3304 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 4 Z110 B3305 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 5 Z110 B3306 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 6 Z110 B3307 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 7 Z110 B3308 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 8 Z110 B3309 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 9 Z110 B3310 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 10 Z110 st B3311 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 11 Z110 B3312 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 12 Z110 st B3313 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 13 Z110 B3314 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3, bit 14 Z110 B3315 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 15 Z110 B3400 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 0 Z110 B3401 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 1 Z110 B3402 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 2 Z110 B3403 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 3 Z110 B3404 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 4 Z110 B3405 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 5 Z110 B3406 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 6 Z110 B3407 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 7 Z110 B3408 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 8 Z110 B3409 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 9 Z110 B3410 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 10 Z110 B3411 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 11 Z110 st B3412 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 12 Z110 B3413 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 13 Z110 st B3414 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 14 Z110 B3415 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 4, bit 15 Z110 B3500 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 0 Z110 B3501 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 1 Z110 B3502 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 2 Z110 B3503 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 3 Z110 B3504 st Z110 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 4 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 543 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B3505 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 5 Z110 B3506 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 6 Z110 B3507 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 7 Z110 B3508 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 8 Z110 B3509 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 9 Z110 B3510 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 10 Z110 B3511 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 11 Z110 Function diag., Sheet st B3512 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 12 Z110 B3513 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 13 Z110 st B3514 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 14 Z110 B3515 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 5, bit 15 Z110 B3600 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 0 Z110 B3601 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 1 Z110 B3602 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 2 Z110 B3603 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 3 Z110 B3604 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 4 Z110 B3605 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 5 Z110 B3606 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 6 Z110 B3607 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 7 Z110 B3608 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 8 Z110 B3609 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 9 Z110 B3610 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 10 Z110 B3611 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 11 Z110 st B3612 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 12 Z110 B3613 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 13 Z110 st B3614 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 14 Z110 B3615 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 6, bit 15 Z110 B3700 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 0 Z110 B3701 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 1 Z110 B3702 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 2 Z110 B3703 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 3 Z110 B3704 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 4 Z110 B3705 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 5 Z110 B3706 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 6 Z110 B3707 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 7 Z110 B3708 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 8 Z110 B3709 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 9 Z110 B3710 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 10 Z110 st B3711 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 11 Z110 B3712 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 12 Z110 st B3713 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 13 Z110 B3714 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 7, bit 14 Z110 B3715 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 15 Z110 B3800 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 0 Z110 B3801 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 1 Z110 B3802 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 2 Z110 B3803 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 3 Z110 B3804 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 4 Z110 B3805 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 5 Z110 B3806 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 6 Z110 544 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B3807 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 7 Z110 B3808 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 8 Z110 B3809 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 9 Z110 B3810 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 10 Z110 B3811 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 11 Z110 Function diag., Sheet st B3812 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 12 Z110 B3813 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 13 Z110 st B3814 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 14 Z110 B3815 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 8, bit 15 Z110 B3900 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 0 Z110 B3901 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 1 Z110 B3902 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 2 Z110 B3903 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 3 Z110 B3904 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 4 Z110 B3905 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 5 Z110 B3906 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 6 Z110 B3907 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 7 Z110 B3908 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 8 Z110 B3909 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 9 Z110 B3910 st Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 10 Z110 B3911 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 11 Z110 st B3912 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 12 Z110 B3913 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 13 Z110 st B3914 Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 14 Z110 B3915 Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 9, bit 15 Z110 SCB1 with SCI B4100 SCI, slave 1, binary input 1 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4101 SCI, slave 1, binary input 2 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4102 SCI, slave 1, binary input 3 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4103 SCI, slave 1, binary input 4 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4104 SCI, slave 1, binary input 5 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4105 SCI, slave 1, binary input 6 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4106 SCI, slave 1, binary input 7 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4107 SCI, slave 1, binary input 8 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4108 SCI, slave 1, binary input 9 [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4109 SCI, slave 1, binary input 10 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4110 SCI, slave 1, binary input 11 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4111 SCI, slave 1, binary input 12 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4112 SCI, slave 1, binary input 13 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4113 SCI, slave 1, binary input 14 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4114 SCI, slave 1, binary input 15 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4115 SCI, slave 1, binary input 16 [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4120 SCI, slave 1, binary input 1 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4121 SCI, slave 1, binary input 2 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4122 SCI, slave 1, binary input 3 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4123 SCI, slave 1, binary input 4 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4124 SCI, slave 1, binary input 5 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4125 SCI, slave 1, binary input 6 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4126 SCI, slave 1, binary input 7 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 B4127 SCI, slave 1, binary input 8 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 545 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B4128 SCI, slave 1, binary input 9 inverted B4129 SCI, slave 1, binary input 10 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4130 SCI, slave 1, binary input 11 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4131 SCI, slave 1, binary input 12 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4132 SCI, slave 1, binary input 13 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4133 SCI, slave 1, binary input 14 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4134 SCI, slave 1, binary input 15 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4135 SCI, slave 1, binary input 16 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z140 B4200 SCI, slave 2, binary input 1 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4201 SCI, slave 2, binary input 2 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4202 SCI, slave 2, binary input 3 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4203 SCI, slave 2, binary input 4 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4204 SCI, slave 2, binary input 5 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4205 SCI, slave 2, binary input 6 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4206 SCI, slave 2, binary input 7 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4207 SCI, slave 2, binary input 8 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4208 SCI, slave 2, binary input 9 [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4209 SCI, slave 2, binary input 10 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4210 SCI, slave 2, binary input 11 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4211 SCI, slave 2, binary input 12 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4212 SCI, slave 2, binary input 13 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4213 SCI, slave 2, binary input 14 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4214 SCI, slave 2, binary input 15 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4215 SCI, slave 2, binary input 16 [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4220 SCI, slave 2, binary input 1 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4221 SCI, slave 2, binary input 2 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4222 SCI, slave 2, binary input 3 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4223 SCI, slave 2, binary input 4 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4224 SCI, slave 2, binary input 5 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4225 SCI, slave 2, binary input 6 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4226 SCI, slave 2, binary input 7 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4227 SCI, slave 2, binary input 8 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4228 SCI, slave 2, binary input 9 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z131, Z141 B4229 SCI, slave 2, binary input 10 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4230 SCI, slave 2, binary input 11 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4231 SCI, slave 2, binary input 12 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4232 SCI, slave 2, binary input 13 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4233 SCI, slave 2, binary input 14 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4234 SCI, slave 2, binary input 15 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 B4235 SCI, slave 2, binary input 16 inverted [SW 1.9 and later] Z141 Function diag., Sheet [SW 1.9 and later] Z130, Z140 Optional supplementary boards: 1st expansion board EB1 B5101 Analog input terminal 50 / 51: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA) Z112 B5102 Analog input terminal 52 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1") Z112 B5103 Analog input terminal 53 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1") Z112 B5104 State terminal 43 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z114 B5105 State terminal 43 (bidirectional input/output) Z114 B5106 State terminal 44 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z114 B5107 State terminal 44 (bidirectional input/output) Z114 B5108 State terminal 45 (bidirectional Input/output) inverted Z114 546 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B5109 State terminal 45 (bidirectional input/output) Z114 B5110 State terminal 46 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z114 B5111 State terminal 46 (bidirectional Input/output) Z114 B5112 State terminal 40 (digital input) inverted Z114 B5113 State terminal 40 (digital input) Z114 B5114 State terminal 41 (digital input) inverted Z114 B5115 State terminal 41 (digital input) Z114 B5116 State terminal 42 (digital input) inverted Z114 B5117 State terminal 42 (digital input) Z114 Optional supplementary boards: 1st Expansion board EB2 [SW 1.5 and later] B5121 Analog input terminal 49 / 50: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA) Z118 B5122 State terminal 53 (digital input) inverted Z118 B5123 State terminal 53 (digital input) Z118 B5124 State terminal 54 (digital input) inverted Z118 B5125 State terminal 54 (digital input) Z118 Optional supplementary boards: 2nd expansion board EB1 B5201 Analog input terminal 50 / 51: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA) Z115 B5202 Analog input terminal 52 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1") Z115 B5203 Analog input terminal 53 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1") Z115 B5204 State terminal 43 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z117 B5205 State terminal 43 (bidirectional input/output) Z117 B5206 State terminal 44 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z117 B5207 State terminal 44 (bidirectional input/output) Z117 B5208 State terminal 45 (bidirectional Input/output) inverted Z117 B5209 State terminal 45 (bidirectional input/output) Z117 B5210 State terminal 46 (bidirectional input/output) inverted Z117 B5211 State terminal 46 (bidirectional Input/output) Z117 B5212 State terminal 40 (digital input) inverted Z117 B5213 State terminal 40 (digital input) Z117 B5214 State terminal 41 (digital input) inverted Z117 B5215 State terminal 41 (digital input) Z117 B5216 State terminal 42 (digital input) inverted Z117 B5217 State terminal 42 (digital input) Z117 Optional supplementary boards: 2nd Expansion board EB2 B5221 Analog input terminal 49 / 50: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA) Z119 B5222 State terminal 53 (digital input) inverted Z119 B5223 State terminal 53 (digital input) Z119 B5224 State terminal 54 (digital input) inverted Z119 B5225 State terminal 54 (digital input) Z119 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6030 USS2 / Peer2 - Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal G171, G173 B6031 USS2 / Peer2 - Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse G171, G173 Paralleling interface B6040 Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6041 Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse [SW 2.1 and later] G195 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 547 Connectors and binectors Binector 03.2015 Name, description Function diag., Sheet Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6100 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 0 G171, G173 B6101 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 1 G171, G173 B6102 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 2 G171, G173 B6103 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 3 G171, G173 B6104 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 4 G171, G173 B6105 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 5 G171, G173 B6106 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 6 G171, G173 B6107 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 7 G171, G173 B6108 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 8 G171, G173 B6109 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 9 G171, G173 B6110 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 10 G171, G173 B6111 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 11 G171, G173 B6112 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 12 G171, G173 B6113 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 13 G171, G173 B6114 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 14 G171, G173 B6115 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1, bit 15 G171, G173 B6200 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 0 G171, G173 B6201 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 1 G171, G173 B6202 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 2 G171, G173 B6203 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 3 G171, G173 B6204 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 4 G171, G173 B6205 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 5 G171, G173 B6206 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 6 G171, G173 B6207 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 7 G171, G173 B6208 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 8 G171, G173 B6209 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 9 G171, G173 B6210 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 10 G171, G173 B6211 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 11 G171, G173 B6212 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 12 G171, G173 B6213 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 13 G171, G173 B6214 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 14 G171, G173 B6215 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2, bit 15 G171, G173 Paralleling interface B6220 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 0 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6221 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 1 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6222 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 2 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6223 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 3 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6224 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 4 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6225 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 5 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6226 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 6 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6227 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 7 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6228 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 8 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6229 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 9 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6230 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 10 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6231 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 11 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6232 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 12 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6233 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 13 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6234 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 14 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 548 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B6235 Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 15 Function diag., Sheet [SW 2.1 and later] G195 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6300 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 0 G171, G173 B6301 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 1 G171, G173 B6302 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 2 G171, G173 B6303 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 3 G171, G173 B6304 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 4 G171, G173 B6305 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 5 G171, G173 B6306 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 6 G171, G173 B6307 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 7 G171, G173 B6308 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 8 G171, G173 B6309 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 9 G171, G173 B6310 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 10 G171, G173 B6311 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 11 G171, G173 B6312 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 12 G171, G173 B6313 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 13 G171, G173 B6314 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 14 G171, G173 B6315 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3, bit 15 G171, G173 Paralleling interface B6320 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 0 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6321 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 1 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6322 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 2 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6323 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 3 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6324 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 4 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6325 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 5 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6326 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 6 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6327 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 7 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6328 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 8 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6329 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 9 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6330 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 10 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6331 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 11 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6332 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 12 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6333 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 13 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6334 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 14 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6335 Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 15 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6400 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 0 G171, G173 B6401 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 1 G171, G173 B6402 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 2 G171, G173 B6403 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 3 G171, G173 B6404 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 4 G171, G173 B6405 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 5 G171, G173 B6406 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 6 G171, G173 B6407 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 7 G171, G173 B6408 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 8 G171, G173 B6409 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 9 G171, G173 B6410 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 10 G171, G173 B6411 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 11 G171, G173 B6412 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 12 G171, G173 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 549 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B6413 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 13 G171, G173 B6414 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 14 G171, G173 B6415 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4, bit 15 G171, G173 Paralleling interface B6420 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 0 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6421 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 1 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6422 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 2 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6423 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 3 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6424 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 4 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6425 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 5 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6426 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 6 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6427 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 7 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6428 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 8 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6429 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 9 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6430 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 10 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6431 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 11 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6432 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 12 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6433 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 13 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6434 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 14 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6435 Word 1 from slave with address 4, bit 15 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6500 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 0 G171, G173 B6501 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 1 G171, G173 B6502 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 2 G171, G173 B6503 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 3 G171, G173 B6504 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 4 G171, G173 B6505 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 5 G171, G173 B6506 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 6 G171, G173 B6507 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 7 G171, G173 B6508 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 8 G171, G173 B6509 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 9 G171, G173 B6510 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 10 G171, G173 B6511 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 11 G171, G173 B6512 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 12 G171, G173 B6513 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 13 G171, G173 B6514 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 14 G171, G173 B6515 USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5, bit 15 G171, G173 Paralleling interface B6520 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 0 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6521 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 1 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6522 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 2 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6523 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 3 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6524 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 4 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6525 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 5 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6526 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 6 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6527 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 7 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6528 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 8 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 550 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B6529 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 9 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6530 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 10 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6531 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 11 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6532 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 12 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6533 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 13 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6534 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 14 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6535 Word 1 from slave with address 5, bit 15 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 Function diag., Sheet Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6600 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 0 G171 B6601 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 1 G171 B6602 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 2 G171 B6603 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 3 G171 B6604 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 4 G171 B6605 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 5 G171 B6606 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 6 G171 B6607 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 7 G171 B6608 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 8 G171 B6609 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 9 G171 B6610 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 10 G171 B6611 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 11 G171 B6612 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 12 G171 B6613 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 13 G171 B6614 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 14 G171 B6615 USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 15 G171 Paralleling interface B6620 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 0 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6621 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 1 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6622 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 2 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6623 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 3 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6624 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 4 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6625 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 5 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6626 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 6 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6627 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 7 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6628 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 8 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6629 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 9 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6630 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 10 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6631 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 11 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6632 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 12 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6633 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 13 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6634 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 14 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 B6635 Word 1 from slave with address 6, bit 15 [SW 2.1 and later] G195 Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2) B6700 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 0 G171 B6701 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 1 G171 B6702 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 2 G171 B6703 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 3 G171 B6704 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 4 G171 B6705 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 5 G171 B6706 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 6 G171 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 551 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B6707 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 7 G171 B6708 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 8 G171 B6709 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 9 G171 B6710 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 10 G171 B6711 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 11 G171 B6712 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 12 G171 B6713 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 13 G171 B6714 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 14 G171 B6715 USS2 receive data, word 7, bit 15 G171 B6800 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 0 G171 B6801 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 1 G171 B6802 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 2 G171 B6803 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 3 G171 B6804 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 4 G171 B6805 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 5 G171 B6806 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 6 G171 B6807 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 7 G171 B6808 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 8 G171 B6809 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 9 G171 B6810 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 10 G171 B6811 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 11 G171 B6812 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 12 G171 B6813 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 13 G171 B6814 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 14 G171 B6815 USS2 receive data, word 8, bit 15 G171 B6900 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 0 G171 B6901 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 1 G171 B6902 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 2 G171 B6903 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 3 G171 B6904 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 4 G171 B6905 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 5 G171 B6906 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 6 G171 B6907 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 7 G171 B6908 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 8 G171 B6909 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 9 G171 B6910 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 10 G171 B6911 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 11 G171 B6912 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 12 G171 B6913 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 13 G171 B6914 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 14 G171 B6915 USS2 receive data, word 9, bit 15 G171 Optional supplementary boards: SBP pulse encoder evaluation B7000 State terminal 74 / 75 (check track) Z120 B7001 State terminal 65 (coarse pulse 1) Z120 B7002 State terminal 66 (coarse pulse 2) Z120 B7003 State terminal 67 (fine pulse 2) Z120 Optional supplementary boards: SIMOLINK board B7030 552 1 = Telegram failure Z121 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B7040 1 = Time out Z121 B7050 1 = Alarm start-up Z121 B7100 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 0 Z122 B7101 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 1 Z122 B7102 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 2 Z122 B7103 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 3 Z122 B7104 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 4 Z122 B7105 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 5 Z122 B7106 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 6 Z122 B7107 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 7 Z122 B7108 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 8 Z122 B7109 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 9 Z122 B7110 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 10 Z122 B7111 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 11 Z122 B7112 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 12 Z122 B7113 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 13 Z122 B7114 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 14 Z122 B7115 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 1 bit 15 Z122 B7200 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 0 Z122 B7201 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 1 Z122 B7202 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 2 Z122 B7203 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 3 Z122 B7204 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 4 Z122 B7205 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 5 Z122 B7206 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 6 Z122 B7207 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 7 Z122 B7208 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 8 Z122 B7209 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 9 Z122 B7210 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 10 Z122 B7211 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 11 Z122 B7212 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 12 Z122 B7213 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 13 Z122 B7214 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 14 Z122 B7215 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 2 bit 15 Z122 B7300 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 0 Z122 B7301 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 1 Z122 B7302 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 2 Z122 B7303 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 3 Z122 B7304 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 4 Z122 B7305 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 5 Z122 B7306 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 6 Z122 B7307 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 7 Z122 B7308 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 8 Z122 B7309 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 9 Z122 B7310 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 10 Z122 B7311 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 11 Z122 B7312 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 12 Z122 B7313 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 13 Z122 B7314 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 14 Z122 B7315 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 3 bit 15 Z122 B7400 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 0 Z122 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 553 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B7401 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 1 Z122 B7402 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 2 Z122 B7403 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 3 Z122 B7404 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 4 Z122 B7405 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 5 Z122 B7406 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 6 Z122 B7407 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 7 Z122 B7408 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 8 Z122 B7409 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 9 Z122 B7410 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 10 Z122 B7411 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 11 Z122 B7412 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 12 Z122 B7413 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 13 Z122 B7414 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 14 Z122 B7415 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 4 bit 15 Z122 B7500 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 0 Z122 B7501 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 1 Z122 B7502 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 2 Z122 B7503 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 3 Z122 B7504 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 4 Z122 B7505 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 5 Z122 B7506 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 6 Z122 B7507 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 7 Z122 B7508 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 8 Z122 B7509 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 9 Z122 B7510 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 10 Z122 B7511 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 11 Z122 B7512 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 12 Z122 B7513 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 13 Z122 B7514 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 14 Z122 B7515 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 5 bit 15 Z122 B7600 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 0 Z122 B7601 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 1 Z122 B7602 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 2 Z122 B7603 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 3 Z122 B7604 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 4 Z122 B7605 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 5 Z122 B7606 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 6 Z122 B7607 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 7 Z122 B7608 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 8 Z122 B7609 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 9 Z122 B7610 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 10 Z122 B7611 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 11 Z122 B7612 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 12 Z122 B7613 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 13 Z122 B7614 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 14 Z122 B7615 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 6 bit 15 Z122 B7700 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 0 Z122 B7701 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 1 Z122 B7702 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 2 Z122 554 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B7703 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 3 Z122 B7704 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 4 Z122 B7705 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 5 Z122 B7706 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 6 Z122 B7707 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 7 Z122 B7708 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 8 Z122 B7709 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 9 Z122 B7710 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 10 Z122 B7711 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 11 Z122 B7712 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 12 Z122 B7713 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 13 Z122 B7714 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 14 Z122 B7715 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 7 bit 15 Z122 B7800 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 0 Z122 B7801 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 1 Z122 B7802 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 2 Z122 B7803 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 3 Z122 B7804 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 4 Z122 B7805 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 5 Z122 B7806 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 6 Z122 B7807 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 7 Z122 B7808 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 8 Z122 B7809 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 9 Z122 B7810 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 10 Z122 B7811 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 11 Z122 B7812 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 12 Z122 B7813 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 13 Z122 B7814 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 14 Z122 B7815 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 8 bit 15 Z122 B7900 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 0 Z122 B7901 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 1 Z122 B7902 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 2 Z122 B7903 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 3 Z122 B7904 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 4 Z122 B7905 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 5 Z122 B7906 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 6 Z122 B7907 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 7 Z122 B7908 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 8 Z122 B7909 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 9 Z122 B7910 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 10 Z122 B7911 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 11 Z122 B7912 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 12 Z122 B7913 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 13 Z122 B7914 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 14 Z122 B7915 Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 15 Z122 Process data exchange with 2nd CB B8030 Fault delay timeout for 2nd CB - maintained signal Z111 B8031 Fault delay timeout for 2nd CB - 1s pulse Z111 B8035 nd Telegram failure timeout for 2 CB SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [SW 1.9 and later] Z111 555 Connectors and binectors Binector 03.2015 Name, description Function diag., Sheet Process data exchange with 2nd CB B8100 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 0 Z111 B8101 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 1 Z111 nd B8102 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 2 Z111 B8103 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 3 Z111 nd B8104 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 4 Z111 B8105 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 5 Z111 nd B8106 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 6 Z111 B8107 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 7 Z111 nd B8108 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 8 Z111 B8109 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 9 Z111 nd B8110 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 10 Z111 B8111 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 11 Z111 nd B8112 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 12 Z111 B8113 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 13 Z111 nd B8114 Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 14 Z111 B8115 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 1, bit 15 Z111 nd B8200 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 0 Z111 B8201 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 1 Z111 nd B8202 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 2 Z111 B8203 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 3 Z111 nd B8204 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 4 Z111 B8205 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 5 Z111 nd B8206 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 6 Z111 B8207 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 7 Z111 nd B8208 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 8 Z111 B8209 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 9 Z111 nd B8210 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 10 Z111 B8211 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 11 Z111 nd B8212 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 12 Z111 B8213 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 13 Z111 nd B8214 Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 14 Z111 B8215 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 2, bit 15 Z111 nd B8300 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 0 Z111 B8301 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 1 Z111 B8302 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 2 Z111 nd B8303 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 3 Z111 B8304 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 4 Z111 nd B8305 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 5 Z111 B8306 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 6 Z111 nd B8307 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 7 Z111 B8308 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 8 Z111 nd B8309 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 9 Z111 B8310 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 10 Z111 nd B8311 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 11 Z111 B8312 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 12 Z111 nd B8313 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 13 Z111 B8314 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 3, bit 14 Z111 nd B8315 Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 15 Z111 B8400 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 0 Z111 556 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B8401 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 1 Function diag., Sheet nd Z111 B8402 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 2 Z111 B8403 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 3 Z111 nd B8404 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 4 Z111 B8405 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 5 Z111 nd B8406 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 6 Z111 B8407 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 7 Z111 nd B8408 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 8 Z111 B8409 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 9 Z111 nd B8410 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 10 Z111 B8411 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 11 Z111 nd B8412 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 12 Z111 B8413 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 13 Z111 nd B8414 Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 14 Z111 B8415 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 4, bit 15 Z111 nd B8500 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 0 Z111 B8501 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 1 Z111 nd B8502 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 2 Z111 B8503 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 3 Z111 nd B8504 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 4 Z111 B8505 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 5 Z111 nd B8506 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 6 Z111 B8507 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 7 Z111 nd B8508 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 8 Z111 B8509 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 9 Z111 nd B8510 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 10 Z111 B8511 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 11 Z111 nd B8512 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 12 Z111 B8513 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 13 Z111 nd B8514 Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 14 Z111 B8515 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 5, bit 15 Z111 nd B8600 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 0 Z111 B8601 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 1 Z111 nd B8602 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 2 Z111 B8603 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 3 Z111 B8604 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 4 Z111 nd B8605 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 5 Z111 B8606 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 6 Z111 nd B8607 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 7 Z111 B8608 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 8 Z111 nd B8609 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 9 Z111 B8610 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 10 Z111 nd B8611 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 11 Z111 B8612 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 12 Z111 nd B8613 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 13 Z111 B8614 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 6, bit 14 Z111 nd B8615 Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 15 Z111 B8700 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 0 Z111 nd B8701 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 1 Z111 B8702 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 2 Z111 B8703 nd Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 3 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Z111 557 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B8704 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 4 Function diag., Sheet Z111 nd B8705 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 5 Z111 B8706 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 6 Z111 nd B8707 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 7 Z111 B8708 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 8 Z111 nd B8709 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 9 Z111 B8710 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 10 Z111 nd B8711 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 11 Z111 B8712 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 12 Z111 nd B8713 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 13 Z111 B8714 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 7, bit 14 Z111 nd B8715 Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 15 Z111 B8800 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 0 Z111 nd B8801 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 1 Z111 B8802 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 2 Z111 nd B8803 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 3 Z111 B8804 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 4 Z111 nd B8805 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 5 Z111 B8806 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 6 Z111 nd B8807 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 7 Z111 B8808 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 8 Z111 nd B8809 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 9 Z111 B8810 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 10 Z111 nd B8811 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 11 Z111 B8812 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 12 Z111 nd B8813 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 13 Z111 B8814 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 8, bit 14 Z111 nd B8815 Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 15 Z111 B8900 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 0 Z111 nd B8901 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 1 Z111 B8902 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 2 Z111 nd B8903 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 3 Z111 B8904 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 4 Z111 nd B8905 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 5 Z111 B8906 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 6 Z111 B8907 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 7 Z111 nd B8908 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 8 Z111 B8909 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 9 Z111 nd B8910 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 10 Z111 B8911 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 11 Z111 nd B8912 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 12 Z111 B8913 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 13 Z111 nd B8914 Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 14 Z111 B8915 Receive data from 2nd CB, word 9, bit 15 Z111 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9030 USS3 / Peer3 - Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal G172, G174 B9031 USS3 / Peer3 - Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse G172, G174 558 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Binector Connectors and binectors Name, description Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Voltage monitor for electronics power supply B9050 Power ON (100ms pulse on connection of voltage) FB 1 B110 B9051 Power OFF (10ms pulse on disconnection of voltage) FB 1 B110 Technology software S00: Connector/binector converters B9052 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 0 FB 10 B120 B9053 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 1 FB 10 B120 B9054 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 2 FB 10 B120 B9055 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 3 FB 10 B120 B9056 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 4 FB 10 B120 B9057 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 5 FB 10 B120 B9058 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 6 FB 10 B120 B9059 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 7 FB 10 B120 B9060 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 8 FB 10 B120 B9061 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 9 FB 10 B120 B9062 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 10 FB 10 B120 B9063 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 11 FB 10 B120 B9064 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 12 FB 10 B120 B9065 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 13 FB 10 B120 B9066 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 14 FB 10 B120 B9067 Connector/binector converter 1, bit 15 FB 10 B120 B9068 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 0 FB 11 B120 B9069 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 1 FB 11 B120 B9070 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 2 FB 11 B120 B9071 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 3 FB 11 B120 B9072 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 4 FB 11 B120 B9073 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 5 FB 11 B120 B9074 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 6 FB 11 B120 B9075 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 7 FB 11 B120 B9076 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 8 FB 11 B120 B9077 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 9 FB 11 B120 B9078 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 10 FB 11 B120 B9079 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 11 FB 11 B120 B9080 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 12 FB 11 B120 B9081 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 13 FB 11 B120 B9082 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 14 FB 11 B120 B9083 Connector/binector converter 2, bit 15 FB 11 B120 B9084 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 0 FB 12 B120 B9085 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 1 FB 12 B120 B9086 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 2 FB 12 B120 B9087 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 3 FB 12 B120 B9088 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 4 FB 12 B120 B9089 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 5 FB 12 B120 B9090 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 6 FB 12 B120 B9091 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 7 FB 12 B120 B9092 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 8 FB 12 B120 B9093 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 9 FB 12 B120 B9094 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 10 FB 12 B120 B9095 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 11 FB 12 B120 B9096 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 12 FB 12 B120 B9097 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 13 FB 12 B120 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 559 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B9098 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 14 FB 12 B120 B9099 Connector/binector converter 3, bit 15 FB 12 B120 Function diag., Sheet Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9100 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 0 G172, G174 B9101 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 1 G172, G174 B9102 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 2 G172, G174 B9103 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 3 G172, G174 B9104 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 4 G172, G174 B9105 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 5 G172, G174 B9106 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 6 G172, G174 B9107 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 7 G172, G174 B9108 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 8 G172, G174 B9109 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 9 G172, G174 B9110 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 10 G172, G174 B9111 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 11 G172, G174 B9112 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 12 G172, G174 B9113 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 13 G172, G174 B9114 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 14 G172, G174 B9115 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 15 G172, G174 Technology software S00: Limiters B9150 Limiter 1: Positive limitation has responded FB 65 B135 B9151 Limiter 1: Negative limitation has responded FB 65 B135 B9152 Limiter 2: Positive limitation has responded FB 66 B135 B9153 Limiter 2: Negative limitation has responded FB 66 B135 B9154 Limiter 3: Positive limitation has responded FB 67 B135 B9155 Limiter 3: Negative limitation has responded B9156 Limiter 4: Positive limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 212 B134 B9157 Limiter 4: Negative limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 212 B134 B9158 Limiter 5: Positive limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 213 B134 B9159 Limiter 5: Negative limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 213 B134 FB 67 B135 Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor with filter B9160 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: |A| < B has responded FB 70 B136 B9161 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: A < B has responded FB 70 B136 B9162 Limit-value monitor with filter 1: A = B has responded FB 70 B136 B9163 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: |A| < B has responded FB 71 B136 B9164 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: A < B has responded FB 71 B136 B9165 Limit-value monitor with filter 2: A = B has responded FB 71 B136 B9166 Limit-value monitor with filter 3: |A| < B has responded FB 72 B136 B9167 Limit-value monitor with filter 3: A < B has responded FB 72 B136 B9168 Limit-value monitor with filter 3: A = B has responded FB 72 B136 Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor without filter B9169 Limit-value monitor without filter 1: |A| < B has responded FB 73 B137 B9170 Limit-value monitor without filter 1: A < B has responded FB 73 B137 B9171 Limit-value monitor without filter 1: A = B has responded FB 73 B137 B9172 Limit-value monitor without filter 2: |A| < B has responded FB 74 B137 B9173 Limit-value monitor without filter 2: A < B has responded FB 74 B137 560 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B9174 Limit-value monitor without filter 2: A = B has responded FB 74 B137 B9175 Limit-value monitor without filter 3: |A| < B has responded FB 75 B137 B9176 Limit-value monitor without filter 3: A < B has responded FB 75 B137 B9177 Limit-value monitor without filter 3: A = B has responded FB 75 B137 B9178 Limit-value monitor without filter 4: |A| < B has responded FB 76 B137 B9179 Limit-value monitor without filter 4: A < B has responded FB 76 B137 B9180 Limit-value monitor without filter 4: A = B has responded FB 76 B137 B9181 Limit-value monitor without filter 5: |A| < B has responded FB 77 B137 B9182 Limit-value monitor without filter 5: A < B has responded FB 77 B137 B9183 Limit-value monitor without filter 5: A = B has responded FB 77 B137 B9184 Limit-value monitor without filter 6: |A| < B has responded FB 78 B137 B9185 Limit-value monitor without filter 6: A < B has responded FB 78 B137 B9186 Limit-value monitor without filter 6: A = B has responded FB 78 B137 B9187 Limit-value monitor without filter 7: |A| < B has responded FB 79 B137 B9188 Limit-value monitor without filter 7: A < B has responded FB 79 B137 B9189 Limit-value monitor without filter 7: A = B has responded FB 79 B137 Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Simple ramp-function generator B9190 Ramp-function generator output = ramp-function generator input (y = x) FB 113 B165 B9191 0 = ramp-function generator initial run FB 113 B165 Technology software S00: EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each B9195 Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 1 FB 170 B206 B9196 Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 2 FB 171 B206 B9197 Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 3 FB 172 B206 B9198 Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 4 FB 173 B206 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9200 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 0 G172, G174 B9201 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 1 G172, G174 B9202 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 2 G172, G174 B9203 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 3 G172, G174 B9204 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 4 G172, G174 B9205 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 5 G172, G174 B9206 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 6 G172, G174 B9207 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 7 G172, G174 B9208 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 8 G172, G174 B9209 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 9 G172, G174 B9210 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 10 G172, G174 B9211 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 11 G172, G174 B9212 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 12 G172, G174 B9213 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 13 G172, G174 B9214 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 14 G172, G174 B9215 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2, bit 15 G172, G174 Technology software S00: Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 B9250 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q0 FB 118 B200 B9251 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q1 FB 118 B200 B9252 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q2 FB 118 B200 B9253 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q3 FB 118 B200 B9254 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q4 FB 118 B200 B9255 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q5 FB 118 B200 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 561 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B9256 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q6 FB 118 B200 B9257 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q7 FB 118 B200 B9260 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q0 FB 118 B200 B9261 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q1 FB 118 B200 B9262 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q2 FB 118 B200 B9263 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q3 FB 118 B200 B9264 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q4 FB 118 B200 B9265 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q5 FB 118 B200 B9266 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q6 FB 118 B200 B9267 Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q7 FB 118 B200 B9270 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q0 FB 119 B200 B9271 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q1 FB 119 B200 B9272 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q2 FB 119 B200 B9273 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q3 FB 119 B200 B9274 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q4 FB 119 B200 B9275 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q5 FB 119 B200 B9276 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q6 FB 119 B200 B9277 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q7 FB 119 B200 B9280 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q0 FB 119 B200 B9281 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q1 FB 119 B200 B9282 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q2 FB 119 B200 B9283 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q3 FB 119 B200 B9284 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q4 FB 119 B200 B9285 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q5 FB 119 B200 B9286 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q6 FB 119 B200 B9287 Decoder / demultiplexer 2: /Q7 FB 119 B200 Function diag., Sheet S00 technology software: Software counter B9290 Output overflow software counter [SW 1.9 and later] FB 89 B196 B9291 Output underflow software counter [SW 1.9 and later] FB 89 B196 Technology software S00: Limiters B9295 Limiter 6: Positive limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 214 B134 B9296 Limiter 6: Negative limitation has responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 214 B134 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9300 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 0 G172, G174 B9301 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 1 G172, G174 B9302 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 2 G172, G174 B9303 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 3 G172, G174 B9304 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 4 G172, G174 B9305 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 5 G172, G174 B9306 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 6 G172, G174 B9307 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 7 G172, G174 B9308 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 8 G172, G174 B9309 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 9 G172, G174 B9310 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 10 G172, G174 B9311 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 11 G172, G174 B9312 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 12 G172, G174 B9313 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 13 G172, G174 562 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B9314 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 14 G172, G174 B9315 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 15 G172, G174 Technology software S00: AND elements with 3 inputs each B9350 Output of AND element 1 FB 120 B205 B9351 Output of AND element 2 FB 121 B205 B9352 Output of AND element 3 FB 122 B205 B9353 Output of AND element 4 FB 123 B205 B9354 Output of AND element 5 FB 124 B205 B9355 Output of AND element 6 FB 125 B205 B9356 Output of AND element 7 FB 126 B205 B9357 Output of AND element 8 FB 127 B205 B9358 Output of AND element 9 FB 128 B205 B9359 Output of AND element 10 FB 129 B205 B9360 Output of AND element 11 FB 130 B205 B9361 Output of AND element 12 FB 131 B205 B9362 Output of AND element 13 FB 132 B205 B9363 Output of AND element 14 FB 133 B205 B9364 Output of AND element 15 FB 134 B205 B9365 Output of AND element 16 FB 135 B205 B9366 Output of AND element 17 FB 136 B205 B9367 Output of AND element 18 FB 137 B205 B9368 Output of AND element 19 FB 138 B205 B9369 Output of AND element 20 FB 139 B205 B9370 Output of AND element 21 FB 140 B205 B9371 Output of AND element 22 FB 141 B205 B9372 Output of AND element 23 FB 142 B205 B9373 Output of AND element 24 FB 143 B205 B9374 Output of AND element 25 FB 144 B205 B9375 Output of AND element 26 FB 145 B205 B9376 Output of AND element 27 FB 146 B205 B9377 Output of AND element 28 FB 147 B205 Technology software S00: OR elements with 3 inputs each B9380 Output of OR element 1 FB 150 B206vv B9381 Output of OR element 2 FB 151 B206 B9382 Output of OR element 3 FB 152 B206 B9383 Output of OR element 4 FB 153 B206 B9384 Output of OR element 5 FB 154 B206 B9385 Output of OR element 6 FB 155 B206 B9386 Output of OR element 7 FB 156 B206 B9387 Output of OR element 8 FB 157 B206 B9388 Output of OR element 9 FB 158 B206 B9389 Output of OR element 10 FB 159 B206 B9390 Output of OR element 11 FB 160 B206 B9391 Output of OR element 12 FB 161 B206 B9392 Output of OR element 13 FB 162 B206 B9393 Output of OR element 14 FB 163 B206 B9394 Output of OR element 15 FB 164 B206 B9395 Output of OR element 16 FB 165 B206 B9396 Output of OR element 17 FB 166 B206 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 563 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B9397 Output of OR element 18 FB 167 B206 B9398 Output of OR element 19 FB 168 B206 B9399 Output of OR element 20 FB 169 B206 Function diag., Sheet Serial interface 3 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9400 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 0 G172, G174 B9401 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 1 G172, G174 B9402 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 2 G172, G174 B9403 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 3 G172, G174 B9404 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 4 G172, G174 B9405 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 5 G172, G174 B9406 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 6 G172, G174 B9407 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 7 G172, G174 B9408 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 8 G172, G174 B9409 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 9 G172, G174 B9410 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 10 G172, G174 B9411 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 11 G172, G174 B9412 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 12 G172, G174 B9413 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 13 G172, G174 B9414 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 14 G172, G174 B9415 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4, bit 15 G172, G174 Technology software S00: Inverters B9450 Output of inverter 1 FB 180 B207 B9451 Output of inverter 2 FB 181 B207 B9452 Output of inverter 3 FB 182 B207 B9453 Output of inverter 4 FB 183 B207 B9454 Output of inverter 5 FB 184 B207 B9455 Output of inverter 6 FB 185 B207 B9456 Output of inverter 7 FB 186 B207 B9457 Output of inverter 8 FB 187 B207 B9458 Output of inverter 9 FB 188 B207 B9459 Output of inverter 10 FB 189 B207 B9460 Output of inverter 11 FB 190 B207 B9461 Output of inverter 12 FB 191 B207 B9462 Output of inverter 13 FB 192 B207 B9463 Output of inverter 14 FB 193 B207 B9464 Output of inverter 15 FB 194 B207 B9465 Output of inverter 16 FB 195 B207 Technology software S00: NAND elements with 3 inputs each B9470 Output of NAND element 1 FB 200 B207 B9471 Output of NAND element 2 FB 201 B207 B9472 Output of NAND element 3 FB 202 B207 B9473 Output of NAND element 4 FB 203 B207 B9474 Output of NAND element 5 FB 204 B207 B9475 Output of NAND element 6 FB 205 B207 B9476 Output of NAND element 7 FB 206 B207 B9477 Output of NAND element 8 FB 207 B207 B9478 Output of NAND element 9 FB 208 B207 564 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description B9479 Output of NAND element 10 FB 209 B207 B9480 Output of NAND element 11 FB 210 B207 B9481 Output of NAND element 12 FB 211 B207 Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: Binary signal selector switches B9482 Output of binary signal selector switch 1 FB 250 B216 B9483 Output of binary signal selector switch 2 FB 251 B216 B9484 Output of binary signal selector switch 3 FB 252 B216 B9485 Output of binary signal selector switch 4 FB 253 B216 B9486 Output of binary signal selector switch 5 FB 254 B216 Technology software S00: D flipflops B9490 D flipflop 1: Output Q B9491 D flipflop 1: Output /Q FB 230 B211 B9492 D flipflop 2: Output Q FB 231 B211 B9493 D flipflop 2: Output /Q FB 231 B211 B9494 D flipflop 3: Output Q FB 232 B211 B9495 D flipflop 3: Output /Q FB 232 B211 B9496 D flipflop 4: Output Q FB 233 B211 B9497 D flipflop 4: Output /Q FB 233 B211 FB 230 B211 Technology software S00: Technology controller B9499 Ramp-function generator output = ramp-function generator input (y = x) FB 113 B170 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9500 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 0 G172, G174 B9501 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 1 G172, G174 B9502 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 2 G172, G174 B9503 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 3 G172, G174 B9504 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 4 G172, G174 B9505 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 5 G172, G174 B9506 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 6 G172, G174 B9507 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 7 G172, G174 B9508 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 8 G172, G174 B9509 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 9 G172, G174 B9510 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 10 G172, G174 B9511 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 11 G172, G174 B9512 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 12 G172, G174 B9513 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 13 G172, G174 B9514 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 14 G172, G174 B9515 USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5, bit 15 G172, G174 Technology software S00: RS flipflops B9550 RS flipflop 1: Output Q FB 215 B210 B9551 RS flipflop 1: Output /Q FB 215 B210 B9552 RS flipflop 2: Output Q FB 216 B210 B9553 RS flipflop 2: Output /Q FB 216 B210 B9554 RS flipflop 3: Output Q FB 217 B210 B9555 RS flipflop 3: Output /Q FB 217 B210 B9556 RS flipflop 4: Output Q FB 218 B210 B9557 RS flipflop 4: Output /Q FB 218 B210 B9558 RS flipflop 5: Output Q FB 219 B210 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 565 Connectors and binectors 03.2015 Binector Name, description B9559 RS flipflop 5: Output /Q B9560 RS flipflop 6: Output Q FB 220 B210 B9561 RS flipflop 6: Output /Q FB 220 B210 B9562 RS flipflop 7: Output Q FB 221 B210 B9563 RS flipflop 7: Output /Q FB 221 B210 B9564 RS flipflop 8: Output Q FB 222 B210 B9565 RS flipflop 8: Output /Q FB 222 B210 B9566 RS flipflop 9: Output Q FB 223 B210 B9567 RS flipflop 9: Output /Q FB 223 B210 B9568 RS flipflop 10: Output Q FB 224 B210 B9569 RS flipflop 10: Output /Q FB 224 B210 B9570 RS flipflop 11: Output Q FB 225 B210 B9571 RS flipflop 11: Output /Q FB 225 B210 B9572 RS flipflop 12: Output Q FB 226 B210 B9573 RS flipflop 12: Output /Q FB 226 B210 B9574 RS flipflop 13: Output Q FB 227 B210 B9575 RS flipflop 13: Output /Q FB 227 B210 B9576 RS flipflop 14: Output Q FB 228 B210 B9577 RS flipflop 14: Output /Q FB 228 B210 Function diag., Sheet FB 219 B210 Technology software S00: Timers B9580 Timer 1: Output FB 240 B215 B9581 Timer 1: Output inverted FB 240 B215 B9582 Timer 2: Output FB 241 B215 B9583 Timer 2: Output inverted FB 241 B215 B9584 Timer 3: Output FB 242 B215 B9585 Timer 3: Output inverted FB 242 B215 B9586 Timer 4: Output FB 243 B215 B9587 Timer 4: Output inverted FB 243 B215 B9588 Timer 5: Output FB 244 B215 B9589 Timer 5: Output inverted FB 244 B215 B9590 Timer 6: Output FB 245 B215 B9591 Timer 6: Output inverted FB 245 B215 B9592 Timer 7: Output FB 246 B215 B9593 Timer 7: Output inverted FB 246 B215 B9594 Timer 8: Output FB 247 B215 B9595 Timer 8: Output inverted FB 247 B215 B9596 Timer 9: Output FB 248 B215 B9597 Timer 9: Output inverted FB 248 B215 B9598 Timer 10: Output FB 249 B215 B9599 Timer 10: Output inverted FB 249 B215 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9600 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 0 G172 B9601 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 1 G172 B9602 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 2 G172 B9603 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 3 G172 B9604 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 4 G172 B9605 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 5 G172 B9606 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 6 G172 566 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B9607 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 7 G172 B9608 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 8 G172 B9609 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 9 G172 B9610 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 10 G172 B9611 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 11 G172 B9612 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 12 G172 B9613 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 13 G172 B9614 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 14 G172 B9615 USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 15 G172 Technology software S00: PI controller [SW 1.8 and later] B9650 PI controller 1: Controller at output limitation FB 260 B180 B9652 PI controller 3: Controller at output limitation FB 262 B182 B9653 PI controller 4: Controller at output limitation FB 263 B183 B9654 PI controller 5: Controller at output limitation FB 264 B184 B9655 PI controller 6: Controller at output limitation FB 265 B185 B9656 PI controller 7: Controller at output limitation FB 266 B186 B9657 PI controller 8: Controller at output limitation FB 267 B187 B9658 PI controller 9: Controller at output limitation FB 268 B188 B9659 PI controller 10: Controller at output limitation FB 269 B189 B9660 PI controller 1: Controller at positive output limitation FB 260 B180 B9661 PI controller 2: Controller at positive output limitation FB 261 B181 B9662 PI controller 3: Controller at positive output limitation FB 262 B182 B9663 PI controller 4: Controller at positive output limitation FB 263 B183 B9664 PI controller 5: Controller at positive output limitation FB 264 B184 B9665 PI controller 6: Controller at positive output limitation FB 265 B185 B9666 PI controller 7: Controller at positive output limitation FB 266 B186 B9667 PI controller 8: Controller at positive output limitation FB 267 B187 B9668 PI controller 9: Controller at positive output limitation FB 268 B188 B9669 PI controller 10: Controller at positive output limitation FB 269 B189 B9670 PI controller 1: Controller at negative output limitation FB 260 B180 B9671 PI controller 2: Controller at negative output limitation FB 261 B181 B9672 PI controller 3: Controller at negative output limitation FB 262 B182 B9673 PI controller 4: Controller at negative output limitation FB 263 B183 B9674 PI controller 5: Controller at negative output limitation FB 264 B184 B9675 PI controller 6: Controller at negative output limitation FB 265 B185 B9676 PI controller 7: Controller at negative output limitation FB 266 B186 B9677 PI controller 8: Controller at negative output limitation FB 267 B187 B9678 PI controller 9: Controller at negative output limitation FB 268 B188 B9679 PI controller 10: Controller at negative output limitation FB 269 B189 S00 technology software: Limit-value monitors for double-word connectors B9680 Limit-value monitor 1: |A| < B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 68 B151 B9681 Limit-value monitor 1: A < B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 68 B151 B9682 Limit-value monitor 1: A = B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 68 B151 B9683 Limit-value monitor 2: |A| < B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 69 B151 B9684 Limit-value monitor 2: A < B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 69 B151 B9685 Limit-value monitor 2: A = B has responded [SW 1.9 and later] FB 69 B151 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 567 Connectors and binectors Binector 03.2015 Name, description Function diag., Sheet Technology software S00: root extractor B9686 |root extractor input| < threshold responded [SW 2.0 and later] FB 58 B153 B9687 |root extractor input| < threshold responded (inverted) [SW 2.0 and later] FB 58 B153 Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3) B9700 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 0 G172 B9701 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 1 G172 B9702 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 2 G172 B9703 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 3 G172 B9704 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 4 G172 B9705 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 5 G172 B9706 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 6 G172 B9707 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 7 G172 B9708 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 8 G172 B9709 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 9 G172 B9710 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 10 G172 B9711 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 11 G172 B9712 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 12 G172 B9713 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 13 G172 B9714 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 14 G172 B9715 USS3 receive data, word 7, bit 15 G172 B9800 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 0 G172 B9801 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 1 G172 B9802 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 2 G172 B9803 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 3 G172 B9804 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 4 G172 B9805 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 5 G172 B9806 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 6 G172 B9807 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 7 G172 B9808 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 8 G172 B9809 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 9 G172 B9810 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 10 G172 B9811 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 11 G172 B9812 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 12 G172 B9813 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 13 G172 B9814 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 14 G172 B9815 USS3 receive data, word 8, bit 15 G172 B9900 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 0 G172 B9901 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 1 G172 B9902 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 2 G172 B9903 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 3 G172 B9904 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 4 G172 B9905 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 5 G172 B9906 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 6 G172 B9907 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 7 G172 B9908 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 8 G172 B9909 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 9 G172 B9910 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 10 G172 B9911 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 11 G172 B9912 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 12 G172 568 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Connectors and binectors Binector Name, description Function diag., Sheet B9913 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 13 G172 B9914 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 14 G172 B9915 USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 15 G172 Trace function B9999 Trigger condition of trace function is fulfilled SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [SW 1.8 and later] 569 Connectors and binectors 570 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 13 Maintenance Maintenance WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. A hazardous voltage may be present at the signalling relays in the customer installation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. When carrying out maintenance work on this converter, please read all safety instructions included in this section and attached to the product itself. * Maintenance work on the converter may be carried out only by qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices in this manual and with the installation, operating and maintenance instructions. * Before carrying out visual checks and maintenance work, ensure that the AC power supply is disconnected and locked out and that the converter is grounded. Before the AC supply is disconnected, both converters and motors are at hazardous voltage levels. Even when the converter contactor is open, hazardous voltages are still present. * The snubber capacitors continue to carry hazardous voltage for up to 2 minutes after isolation from the supply. For this reason, the converter must not be opened for at least two minutes after switch-off. Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used. The SIMOTRAS HD converter must be thoroughly protected against the ingress of dirt so as to prevent voltage flashovers and thus irreparable damage. Dust and foreign bodies, and especially contamination drawn in through the cooling air flow, must be carefully removed at regular intervals depending on the degree of pollution, but at least once every 12 months. The converter must be cleaned with dry, compressed air, max. 1 bar, or with a vacuum cleaner. Please note the following with respect to SIMOTRAS HD converters with forced air cooling: The fan bearings are designed for a service lifetime of 30000 hours. The fans should be replaced in plenty of time in order to maintain the availability of the thyristor sets. 13.1 Procedure for updating software (Upgrading to a new software version) NOTICE Before updating your software, find out the product state of your SIMOTRAS HD device. You will find this on the rating plate (field on the bottom left-hand side "Prod. State"). Prod. State = A1, A2 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L1-xx): It is only permissible to load software versions 1.xx and 2.xx. Prod. State = A3 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L2-xx): It is only permissible to load software versions 3.xx. In the Internet at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804957/133100 a WINDOWS-based version of the loading program is available (HEXLOAD_WIN.EXE). This program is started by double clicking on it in step 5 of the procedure described below for updating software. USB-RS232 interface converters are supported. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 571 Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 03.2015 Read out and write down all parameter contents. (also note software version in r060.001 and r065.001!) Switch off electronics power supply Connect one COM port on the PC to connector X300 on the converter Cable order number: 9AK1012-1AA00 (see also Section 15.3) Switch on electronics power supply AND press down the UP key on the PMU of the SIMOTRAS HD converter at the same time The SIMOTRAS HD converter switches to operating state o13.0 Note: A software update can be started only from the PMU panel and not via an OP1S or the DriveMonitor system Open a DOS window on the PC and enter program call: Note: HEXLOAD.EXE: Loading program 7001Axxx.H86 and 7001Bxxx.H86: Data files which contain the SIMOTRAS software xxx is the SW release COMx: COM1 or COM2 HEXLOAD 7001Axxx.H86 7001Bxxx.H86 COMx Start the program by pressing Return The software update is performed automatically 6 When the software has been updated successfully, the SIMOTRAS HD switches to operating state o13.2 for approx. 1 s The SIMOTRAS HD converter then switches to operating state o12.9 in many cases (depending on which SW version was previously installed in the converter) for approximately 15s. 7 8 Note: The parameter set can be transferred to a PC or programming device by means of DriveMonitor (see also Section 15). Note: The currently programmed addressed is displayed on the PMU while the update is in progress The current status of the update routine is displayed on the PC Check the checksum: Comparison of the value of parameter r062.001 with the checksum in the Internet under menu item "Info" (see the inside page of the cover sheet of the operation instructions). Was the electronics supply disconnected while Step 6 was in progress? ? 9b n o 10b 11b 12 572 yes Acknowledge any fault message that may appear on the SIMOTRAS HD device Restore default setting (see Section 7.4) Start up the converter again (see Section 7.5) Note: The parameter set stored in Step 1 above can be loaded from a PC or programming device by means of DriveMonitor. End SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 13.2 Maintenance Replacement of components 13.2.1 Replacement of fan WARNING The converter fan may be replaced only by properly qualified personnel. The snubber capacitors continue to carry hazardous voltage for up to 2 minutes after isolation from the supply. For this reason, the converter must not be opened for at least two minutes after switch-off. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. Replacement of fan on D400 / 98 - 180 Mre converters 3 4 2 1 The two fans are mounted on the underside of the converter. * Remove connector a. * Release the two retaining clips s on the fan and swing fan out downwards. Installation: * When mounting the fan make sure it is in the correct mounting position (blowing direction upward, see arrow d on the fan housing). * Insert the fan into lugs f and push upwards until it engages in retaining clips s * Insert connector a again. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 573 Maintenance 03.2015 Replacement of fan on D400 / 225 - 525 Mre and D500 / 360 Mre converters 4U1 4V1 4W1 PE 1 2 The fan is mounted on the underside of the converter. * Remove connector a. * Use a T20 screwdriver to undo the two Torx screws s. * Lift the fan using the fixing straps and pull out downwards. Installation: * Push fan box up along the rear panel right up over the fixing clips. * Tighten the two Torx screws s with 2.5 Nm. * Insert connector a. 574 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Maintenance Replacement of fan on D400 / 680 Mre converters 3 1 2 The fan is mounted on top of the converter. * Remove connector a. * Use a T20 screwdriver to undo the two Torx screws s. * Undo the M6 hexagonal nut d. * Pull fan upwards out of its guideway and then forwards to remove. Installation: * Insert fan into guideway from above. * Tighten the two Torx screws s with 10 Nm. * Tighten hexagonal nut M6 d with 10 Nm. * Insert connector a. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 575 Maintenance 03.2015 Replacement of fan on D400 / 900 Mre converters WARNING When dismantling the fan-mounting box, please remember that it weighs 12 kg. Non-observance of this warning can result in severe personal injury or substantial property damage. 1 2 The fan is mounted on top of the converter. * Remove connector a. * Undo the M6 hexagonal nut s. * Swing fan upwards and pull it out towards you. Installation: * Tilting the fan from the front and upward (see Fig.), slot it into the two rear guide tabs and then tilt it downward as far as it will go. * Tighten hexagonal nut M6 s with 10 Nm. * Insert connector a. 576 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Maintenance 13.2.2 Replacement of PCBs WARNING PCBs may be replaced only by properly qualified personnel. PCBs must not be removed or inserted when the power supply is connected. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage. NOTICE PCBs contains electrostatically sensitive devices. Before touching a PCB, the person carrying out the work must himself be electrostatically discharged. The simplest way of doing this is to touch an electrically conductive earthed object, e.g. socket outlet earth contact. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 577 Maintenance 03.2015 13.2.3 Replacement of thyristor modules on D400 / 60 - 680 Mre and D500 / 360 Mre converters The thyristor modules are mounted by means of self-tapping screws. When a module is replaced, the support surfaces on the heatsink must be cleaned and a new layer of thermo-lubricant applied to the thyristor module. To fix the modules always use screws with a metric thread of the same length as the original screws and fixing elements (washer and spring lock washer). When screwing the modules to the busbars, also use screws with a metric thread and the same length as the original screws and fixing elements (washer and spring lock washer). * The layer of thermo-lubricant (silicone-free, type H-T-C made by Electrolube) applied to the modules must be so thin and even that the baseplate is still clearly visible underneath * No auxiliary cathodes must be contacted on the standby modules Module design Tightening torque on module: 3,5 Nm Tightening torque of current terminals: 3 Nm Tightening torque on module: 6 Nm Tightening torque of current terminals: 12 Nm 578 Tightening torque on module: 3,5 Nm Tightening torque of current terminals: 5 Nm Tightening torque on module: 6 Nm Tightening torque of current terminals: 15 Nm SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Maintenance 13.2.4 Replacement of fuses and thyristor assemblies on D400 / 900 Mre converters 2 3 5 1 25 Nm 10 Nm 4 6 Nm 7 6 25 Nm 8 6 Nm * Undo the M6 hexagonal nut a. * Swing the fan s upwards and hold in place with support rail d. * Remove the brace f with the attached protective cover by undoing the 2 M6 hexagon-head screws. * Remove fuses g by undoing the 2 hexagon-head screws on each (M10 or M12 depending on converter model). * Undo the M10 hexagon-head screw h and swing thyristor assembly j out towards you. * Undo assembly locking mechanism (M6 hexagonal nut) upwards at an angle. k, then pull out thyristor assembly j * Install the new components in the reverse order. Caution: The fuse mounting screws are of different lengths! SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 579 Maintenance 580 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Servicing / Spare parts 14 Servicing / Spare parts 14.1 Servicing Repairs If you would like to have a part/device repaired, please approach your regional contact for repairs. Service assignments Qualified technical personnel will carry out for you any maintenance and availability-enhancing work. This work can be charged on a time-and-materials basis (at actuals) or under a service agreement on a flat-rate basis. At-actuals work is carried out during the working hours applicable to the specific region, based on an appropriate arrival time. Service assignments can be requested from your regional contact. http://www.automation.siemens.com/aspa_app/?nodeKey=key_9175191 14.2 Spare parts Note If you contact us with a query, please specify the following converter data: * Converter order number and serial number * Software version * Hardware version of electronics board (screen printing on component side) * Hardware version and software version of supplementary boards (if installed) Software: Can be downloaded from the Internet (see Section 1.1) Accessories: Supplementary boards, adapters, etc., see Section 2.2 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 581 Servicing / Spare parts 03.2015 500V/60A 500V/78A 500V/98A 500V/112A 500V/142A 500V/180A 500V/225A 500V/285A 500V/360A*) 500V/525A 500V/680A 500V/900A 690V/360A*) 6SG7052-0EB60-0 6SG7055-0EB60-0 6SG7060-0EB60-0 6SG7062-0EB60-0 6SG7065-0EB60-0 6SG7070-0EB60-0 6SG7072-0EB60-0 6SG7076-0EB60-0 6SG7080-0EB60-0 6SG7082-0EB60-0 6SG7085-0EB60-0 6SG7076-0KB60-0 Order No. (MLFB) Converter / Order No. 6SG7050-0EB60-0 Spare part Electronics + terminals A7001-L2 Power interface + terminals A7022-L4 Power interface + terminals A7022-L6 Operator panel A7005-L1 Snubber circuit A7021-L1 Snubber circuit A7011-L7 Snubber circuit A7011-L3 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x W98624-S7000-C2 SKKT72/16E W98624-S1002-C82 SKKT106/18EH1 W97020-Z1009--C412 TT162 N16 W98624-S7000-C1 MCC170-16 i01 W98624-S1002-C8 TT251 N16 W98624-S1002-C48 MCC312-16I01 W98624-S1002-C39 TT500 N16 W98624-S1002-C97 TT570N16 Thyristor assembly C98130-A1256-B320 W98624-S1002-C68 TT430 N26 KOF 5x Description Printed circuit boards 6RY1703-0AA01 6RY1703-1HD06 6RY1703-1HD04 6RY1704-0AA00 6RY1703-1HD02 6RY1703-1HD03 6RY1703-1HD05 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x Thyristors 6RY1700-0HD01 6RY1700-0AA05 6SY7010-0AA02 6RY1700-0AA15 6SY7010-0AA03 6SY7010-0AA05 6SY7010-0AA04 6RY1700-0AA04 6RY1702-0CA01 6SY7010-0AA32 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x 5x *) with option H70: self-ventilated with rated current =130 A 582 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Servicing / Spare parts 500V/78A 500V/98A 500V/112A 500V/142A 500V/180A 500V/225A 500V/285A 500V/360A*) 500V/525A 500V/680A 500V/900A 690V/360A*) 6SG7052-0EB60-0 6SG7055-0EB60-0 6SG7060-0EB60-0 6SG7062-0EB60-0 6SG7065-0EB60-0 6SG7070-0EB60-0 6SG7072-0EB60-0 6SG7076-0EB60-0 6SG7080-0EB60-0 6SG7082-0EB60-0 6SG7085-0EB60-0 6SG7076-0KB60-0 Description 500V/60A Order No. (MLFB) Converter / Order No. 6SG7050-0EB60-0 Spare part 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x Other spare parts 6SY7010-6AA01 NTC thermistor W98628-S1001-C24 6RY1700-0TF00 NTC thermistor C98130-A7002-C90 6RY1702-0AA01 Current convertor C98130-A1023-C751 6RY1702-0AA02 Current convertor C98130-A1023-C752 6RY1702-0AA03 Current convertor C98130-A1023-C771 6RY1702-0AA06 Current convertor C98130-A1023-C850 6RY1702-0AA05 Current convertor C98130-A1023-C773 6RY1701-0AA07 Fan (complete) C98130-A1256-C553 6RY1701-0AA08 Fan module C98130-A7056-B130 6RY1701-0AA04 Fan radial C98247-S1002-C25 6RY1705-0AA02 Snubber resistance W98511-S1001-C207 6SY7010-3AA06 Snubber resistance W98511-S1001-C105 6RY1705-0AA01 Snubber resistance W98511-S1001-C208 6RY1702-0BA00 Fuse-link F1,F2 C97327-Z1006-C215 6RY1702-0BA01 Fuse-links C98327-S1002-C83 1x 1x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 1x 1x 1x *) 1x 1x *) 1x 1x 3x 5x 6x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 3x *) with option H70: self-ventilated with rated current =130 A SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 583 Servicing / Spare parts 584 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 15 DriveMonitor DriveMonitor The DriveMonitor software tool is available to assist the start-up, parameterization and diagnosis of SIMOTRAS HD 6SG70 units via a PC. 15.1 Scope of delivery DriveMonitor is supplied on a CD-ROM together with the operating manual. Order No. 6SG7000-0CD00 15.2 Installing the software Run the "start.htm" file from the CD-ROM in your Windows Explorer. After you have chosen an installation language you can call the DriveMonitor installation routine by selecting the links DriveMonitor - Start Installation. Then follow the instructions displayed by the installation routine. The default installation path for DriveMonitor is C:\Program Files\Siemens\DriveMonitor\ A "DriveMonitor" icon is also placed on your desktop. Note Please read the informations about the system requirements in the readme-file. 15.3 Connecting the SIMOTRAS HD to the PC The simplest method is to link connector X300 in the front panel of the SIMOTRAS HD unit to a COM port on the PC using the connecting cable available under order no. 9AK1012-1AA00. 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 On PC COMx socket SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 X300 1 2 RxD (RS232) 3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS485) 4 5 Ground 6 +5V (OP1S) 7 TxD (RS232) 8 Rx-/Tx- (RS485) 9 Ground On 6SG70 X300 connector 585 DriveMonitor 15.4 03.2015 Setting up an online link to the SIMOTRAS HD DriveMonitor always starts in offline mode. For this reason, you must open or create an offline file which has been set up specifically for the device and software version: To open an existing offline file: * File - Open <select parameter file> (if the parameter file has been created in SIMOVIS, the drive type SIMOTRAS 6SG70 and the software version used must then be set. If you want to set up an online link to the drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus address set in the device) To create a new offline file: * File - New - Based on Factory Setting <select drive type and software version> . (If you want to set up an online link to the drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus address set in the device) <enter file name> * File - New - Empty Parameter Set <select drive type and software version> (If you want to set up an online link to the drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus address set in the device) <enter file name> The data regarding drive type and software version are stored in the DNL file. You can then start the program in future by the normal Windows method, i.e. by double clicking on a DNL file, without further system queries. You can open the ONLINE Settings screen under Options to check, and if necessary change, the interface parameters such as COM port and baud rate. You can set the bus address and number of transmitted process data under File - Drive Settings. To switch to online mode, select View - Online or the appropriate button on the toolbar. If the message "Device is not networked" then appears, then "Offline mode" is currently selected. You can switch to online mode under File - Drive Settings. 15.5 Further information The engineering tool Drive ES is available for the diagnosis of complex installations containing several drives as well as PROFIBUS-based drive communication. Several different packages of Drive ES are available: 586 * Drive ES Basic Data management in Step 7 projects, drive communications via Profibus or USS Order No.: 6SW1700-5JA00-1AA0 * Drive ES Graphic Interconnection of Option S00 free functions blocks using the CFC interconnection editor Order No.: 6SW1700-5JB00-1AA0 * Drive ES Simatic Provides function blocks for SIMATIC CPUs and sample projects for communication with a SIMOREG (SIMOTRAS) unit Order No.: 6SW1700-5JC00-1AA0 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 16 Environmental compatibility Environmental compatibility Environmental aspects of development The number of parts has been greatly reduced through the use of highly integrated components and a modular design of the entire converter series. As a consequence, the power consumed in the production process is significantly lower. Particular importance has been attached to reducing the volume, mass and diversity of metal and plastic parts. Front components: PC + ABC ABS Bayblend Novodur Plastic components in converter: ABS PA 6.6 SE1-GFN1 Novodur Insulation: PC (FR) fl Lexan Makrolon or Keyboard membrane: Polyester membrane 0.15 mm Rating plate: Polyester membrane Noryl Flame arresters containing halogen and insulating materials containing silicone have been replaced by pollutant-free materials on all major components. Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of supplied parts. Environmental aspects of production Most supplied parts are shipped in reusable packaging. The packaging material itself is recyclable, consisting mainly of cardboard. With the exception of the converter housing, surface coating materials have not been applied. The production process is free of emissions. Environmental aspects of disposal The unit features screw and snap-on connections that can be separated easily to dismantle it into recyclable mechanical components. The printed circuit boards can be disposed of by thermal processing. The percentage of components containing dangerous substances is low. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 587 Environmental compatibility 588 03.2015 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 Mechanical Stop SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 71 230V~ Brake checkback signal Electrical Stop 39 37 36 79 78 ES2 Ack. 77 ES1 P24_S from terminal 34 Lifting gear overload Ack. button Limit switch 76 75 VE2 VE1 speed notch 74 73 FK2 High- 72 FK1 1 2 3 4 5 M P10 N10 Setpoint U608 FR FR FK P665 Fault processing SIMOTRAS HD Acknowledge U605 Zero delay angle U663 Reduction of n controller start pulse P661 Enable pulse Valid travel command P654 Ramp-function generator Control word 1 bit 3 Setpoint reduction U607 & Acknowledgement ST sNo faults signal 3 ST Start pulse Speed controller 100% 4 = Current limiting Electronics power supply ~ 5U1 5W1 5N1 <5> Brake control S1 87 88 S2 89 90 S3 91 92 S4 93 94 85 86 103 104 30 28 26 27 31 29 Current control Converter fan 4U1 4V1 4W1 5 Actual speed value Pre-limit switch Master switch 34 P24_S 38 84 83 82 81 2 230V~ k01 <1> MS G 90 0 15V <4> M <3> IG Gating unit Actual current value sensing 6 n Brake T1 M 3~ T2 V2 V1 U1 U2 <6> L2 L1 7 Load ST PE <2> 22 23 Motor temperature monitoring sNo faults signal 110 109 s <6> Power section connection <5> Converter fan connection <4> Terminal 26 supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply. <3> Analog tacho or pulse encoder G = analog tacho IG = pulse encoder <2> KTY84 or PTC connection for motor temperature monitoring <1> Signal from safety chain for brake control T3 W2 W1 L3 8 17 MS <1> 1 03.2015 Configuration example Configuration example Overview Control logic for rotor contactors Drive-specific (crane) control Figure 1, Block diagram 589 Configuration example 17.1 03.2015 Task The task is to design a crane drive with 100 kW output and a four-pole motor with a duty cycle of S360%. The task includes the design of the following components, including the ordering information. * * * * * Motor and accessories Converter and any accessories required Rotor resistors Rotor contactors Master switch Note * Catalog HE 1 * 1999 will be required when selecting the necessary components. The accessories for SIMOTRAS HD can be found in Catalog DA 65.10 * 1998/99. * The SIMOTRAS HD three-phase power controller will be included in the Catalog at a later date. 17.2 Selecting a motor The following motor, which has 3 integral and interconnected temperature sensors that will shut down the motor if an overtemperature occurs, is to be used (see Catalog HE 1, page 2/19): Order No.: 1LT8310-4AA40-Z, Z = A11. The relevant data with respect to the design of the rheostatic controller and the three-phase power controller are: * * * * Rated motor current i1 = 173 A Rotor current i2 = 199 A Locked-rotor voltage u2 = 310 V Characteristic rotor resistance k = 0.9 u2 ________ Formula for k: k = (i2 x 3 ) The characteristic rotor resistance is required in order to select the correct rotor resistors (see Section 17.4). 17.3 Selecting an actual value sensor A pulse encoder is the preferred type of actual value sensor. The pulse encoder is ordered quoting a short code, e.g. H73 (Catalog M11 * 1999), and a flange such as G37. The pulse encoder in this case is a Hubner HOG 10 D 1024 I. 590 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 17.4 Configuration example Selecting a rotor resistor Please note * contactor stages are to be configured. This circuit is recommended. * Do not use any special resistor packet assemblies! * Resistor banks of the same size should always be used (5th digit of order number). Reasons: Simpler spare parts holding and easier to install when the resistor banks are installed above one another. * A 3PR3, HE 1 cast-iron resistor bank (see page 3/40 ff.) is used. n [%] s=0 s = 0.05 100 % s = 0.1 Contactor stage 4 Contactor stage 3 Contactor stage 2 s = 0.5 Contactor stage 1 Maximum permitted torque s = 0.25 10 s=1 100 200 100 % torque 20 M [%] Countertorque s=2 Figure 2, Speed-torque diagram with 4 contactor stages SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 591 Configuration example Notes to Figure 2 03.2015 * The maximum torque is determined by the converter or the pull-out torque of the motor. In this case the rated controller current is based on two times the overload figure. * The characteristic curves can also be different, especially for contactor stage 1, as the position of the curves varies from application to application. Resistor selection table Contactor stage s R=sxk IR = i2 x u u Selected reCalculated tap/ sistance value tap terminal Order number 4 0.05 0.05 1.2 239 A 3 x 0.07 71 % / 9 3PR3 801-3B 3 0.1 1 199 A 3 x 0.07 43 % / 5 3PR3 801-3B 2 0.25 0.23 1 199A 3 x 0.19 47 % / 5 3PR3 801-3E 1 0,5 0.45 1 199 A 3 x 0.26 46 % / 5 3PR3 801-3F Y 1 1.8 0.6 119 A 3 x 1.4 86 % / 9 3PR3 801-3L 0.1 s: slip, see Figure 2, speed-torque diagram. k: characteristic rotor resistance k, see motor data. R: required resistance value for selected contactor stage. u: field values, can be varied on the plant by changing the connections on the resistor taps. IR: current through resistor or rotor current. Y: counter-torque stage, see 2 usually tap, example for contactor stage 2 Required: 0.3 , selected resistance values contactor stages 4 and 3 = 0.14 . 0.23 - 0.14 = 0.09 will be required. One resistance bank of 0.19 is selected. 0.09 / 0.19 x 100 % = 47 % of the resistance will be required. Terminal 3 is selected from the associated connection diagram (no. A 081 064) for cast-iron resistor bank 3PR3 801-01-3E. * Start-up: It will be necessary in many cases to improve the drive response on the plant by reconnecting the contactor stages to optimize resistance grading. * * * * * * * 3 M 3~ 3PR3801 *) 3 0 -3B 11 9 3 Contactor stage 4 0 -3B 11 3 0 -3E 11 3 0 -3F 11 3 3 3 3 Contactor stage 3 Contactor stage 2 Contactor stage 1 0 -3L 11 9 3 Y (shortcircuited) *) Caution: the resistance of the rotor cable may have to be taken into account in contactor stage 4 Figure 3, Connection diagram for rotor resistors 592 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Configuration example n [%] s=0 100 % s = 0.1 Contactor stage 3 s = 0.25 Maximum permitted torque Contactor stage 2 s = 0.5 Contactor stage1 10 s=1 100 200 100 % torque 20 M [%] Countertorque s=2 Figure 4, Speed-torque diagram with 3 contactor stages for information purposes. The notes to Figure 2 apply accordingly. SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 593 Configuration example 17.5 03.2015 Selecting a SIMOTRAS HD converter A converter with a rated current of 180 A is selected. Order No.: 6SG7065-0EB60-0 Accessories The SIMOTRAS HD supplementary boards are described in detail in Catalog DA 65.10 * 1998/99. The converter accessories might be used in the following case: * PROFIBUS DP interface: CBP communications board, order no.: 6SX7010-0FF00 will be required. Note The following parts are necessary to install the CBP: * LBA backplane bus system, order no.: 6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0 * ADB adapter board, order no.: 6SX7010-0KA00. The adapter board can hold a maximum of 2 supplementary boards. 17.6 Selecting the contactors The same rotor contactors and contactor relays are used for all contactor stages. * Contactor relays, see NS K Low-Voltage Controlgear, Switchgear and Systems catalog: The rotor contactors must be controlled via contactor relays. The contactor relays recommended here are suitable for all the stator and rotor contactors suggested in HE 1. Recommended contactor relays: 3TH20 22-0... Contactor relay with 2 NC and 2 NO contacts. * Rotor contactors, see HE 1 page 4/42 ff. and the NS K catalog: designed for S3-60 % duty, rated contactor current fir this crane application 210 A: Recommended rotor contactors: 3TF53 22-0... Rotor contactor with 2 NC and 2 NO auxiliary contacts. Caution: Contactors for delta connection, see Figure 1, for example. 17.7 Selecting a master switch The master switch should have the following features, see Catalog HE 1, page 471 ff. * gold contacts * 6 contacts * handle * linear potentiometer Order No.: 3SJ3 003-0AS05-Z, Z = B3 Note The connecting cable for the potentiometer must be ordered separately (order no.: 3SX4 175, or 3SX4 232). Operation with 4 stage master switch Two input coupling elements (order no. 3TX7002-2BF02) will be required. * Suggested connection: see Section 6.1 Block Diagram with suggested connection using 4 stage master switch. * Function: see Section 8 Function Diagrams (Sheet G125) - Evaluation * Parameter settings: see Section 7.6.6.2 Operation with 4 stage master switch. 594 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Appendix 18 Appendix 18.1 Compatibility with SIMOTRAS HE (6GA4625 series) It is desirable to make the inputs and outputs of the SIMOTRAS HD (6SG70 series) as compatible as possible with its predecessor (the SIMOTRAS HE, 6GA4625 series). The following parameters therefore need to be changed from the factory settings: Caution: With these parameter settings, the drive-specific (crane) control according to Section 6.4 is not active. Terminal on SIMOTRAS HE (6GA4625 series) Settings or measures necessary on SIMOTRAS HD (6SG70 series) to implement the functions of the terminal in the left hand column Term. 72 (FS ... enable setpoint) P662.001 = 500 P662.002 = 500 [G180.3] [G180.3] Term. 73 (FR ... enable controller) P654.001 = 502 P654.002 = 502 P661.001 = 502 P661.002 = 502 U617 = 0 .. Term. 37 inactive U618 = 0 .. Term. 38 inactive [G130.1] [G130.1] [G180.1] [G180.1] [G130.1] [G180.1] Term. 74 (FZ ... enable additional setpoint) U249 = 504 P401.001 .. 4 = 60% .. 100% U628 = 95% [K13.4] [K12.5] [G160.6] Term. 75 (VE .. pre-limit switch) U607.001 = 506 U607.002 = 506 U608.001 .. 4 = setpoint reduction factor [G135.5] [G135.5] [G135.5] Term. 76 (TL .. inch anticlockwise) *) P430.001 = 508 P431.001 = 402 P402 = inch anticlockwise setpoint [G127.2] [G127.2] [G120.1] Term. 77 (TR .. inch clockwise) *) P430.002 = 510 P431.002 = 403 P403 = inch clockwise setpoint [G127.2] [G127.2] [G120.1] Term. 76 + Term. 77 (reduced start pulse) (i.e. same control as terminals 76 and 77) U347.001 = 508 [B205.7] U347.002 = 510 [B205.7] U347.003 = 1 [B205.7] U657.001 = 9377 [G150.5] U657.002 = 9377 [G150.5] U652.001 .. 4 = start pulse reduction factor [G150.4] If this function is used, P402 must be = P403 Term. 78 (RS .. reset fault memory) P665.001 = 512 P665.002 = 512 [G180.1] [G180.1] *) The "inch" function on SIMOTRAS HE corresponds to the "fixed setpoint" on SIMOTRAS HD SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 595 Appendix 03.2015 Term. 81/82 (MB .. ready message) U621.001 = 162 U621.002 = 162 [G119.3] [G119.3] Term. 83/84 (ST .. setpoint in controlled range) U622.001 = 540 U622.002 = 540 [G119.3] [G119.3] Term. 85/86 (BR .. n n_min) U623.001 = 165 U623.002 = 165 [G119.3] [G119.3] Term. 87/88 (S1 .. rotor contactor stage 1) [G119.4] Term. 89/92 (S2 .. rotor contactor stage 2) For SIMOTRAS HD this is Term. 89/90 [G119.4] Term. 90/92 (S3 .. rotor contactor stage 3) For SIMOTRAS HD this is Term. 91/92 [G119.4] Term. 91/92 (S4 .. rotor contactor stage 4) For SIMOTRAS HD this is Term. 93/94 [G119.4] Terminals 90, 92 and 94 must be linked Term. 11/22 (MW .. message "temperature pre-warning") For SIMOTRAS HD this is Term. 109/110 [G112.6] U619.001 = 148 [G112.3] U619.002 = 148 [G112.3] Potentiometer on SIMOTRAS HE (6GA4625 series) Corresponding parameter on SIMOTRAS HD (6SG70 series) TF - Delayed enable P319 (factory setting = 0.05 s) TZ - Brake application time monitoring This function must be implemented using free modules if required (similar to ramp-down monitoring on Sheet K15 in Section 8) NT - Tachometer voltage normalization P741 (factory setting = 60.00 V) [G113.2] NS - Speed setpoint normalization P320 (factory setting = 100.00 %) [G135.2] SH - Lift start pulse U651 (factory setting = 0.00 %) [G150.2] NZ - Additional setpoint normalization No setting necessary as the "zero delay angle" function is implemented in a different way. HR - Clockwise acceleration ramp P303 (factory setting = 10.00 s) *) [G136.2] AR - Clockwise deceleration ramp P304 (factory setting = 10.00 s) *) [G136.3] HL - Anticlockwise acceleration ramp P303 (factory setting = 10.00 s) *) [G136.2] AL - Anticlockwise deceleration ramp P304 (factory setting = 10.00 s) *) [G136.3] VR - n controller gain P225 (factory setting = 3.00) [G151.2] ND - Speed monitoring normalization P388 (factory setting = 5.00 %) [G187.5] ST - Setpoint in controlled range U628 (factory setting = 55.0 %) [G160.6] BR - Standstill monitoring P370 (factory setting = 5.00 %) [G188.4] S1 - Switching logic rotor contactor stage 1 U630 (factory setting = - 1.0 %) [G119.2] S2 - Switching logic rotor contactor stage 2 U634 (factory setting = 50.0 %) [G119.6] S3 - Switching logic rotor contactor stage 3 U636 (factory setting = 75.0 %) [G119.6] S4 - Switching logic rotor contactor stage 4 U638 (factory setting = 90.0 %) [G119.6] [G136.2] *) If the ramp-up and ramp-down functions for clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation are to be set separately, the function data set must be switched over. 596 SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 03.2015 Appendix Microswitch on SIMOTRAS HE (6GA4625 series) Corresponding parameter on SIMOTRAS HD (6SG70 series) S1 - Override of ramp-function generator in controlled range No such setting, as the "zero delay angle" function is implemented in a different way. S2 - Speed monitoring Speed monitoring inactive if P590 = P591 S3 - Brake application time monitoring This function must be implemented using free modules if required (similar to run-back monitoring on Page K15 in Section 8) S4 - Controlled operation command The "zero delay angle" command is inactive when U605 = 0. S5 - Premature switchover of rotor contactor stage 1 to "Delay lowering" mode (counter-torque operation) U630 (factory setting = -1.0 %) [G119.2] S6 - I component of current controller P154 (factory setting = 1) [G162.6] S7 - I component of speed controller P224 (factory setting = 1) S8 - Selection of type of setpoint input P700 (factory setting = 0) SIMOTRAS HD Operating Instructions, 03/2015, A5E35846984A/RS-AA/001;1 [G113.2] 597 Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives P.O. Box 48 48 90026 NUREMBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation Subject to change 6SG7000-0BA76 (c) Siemens AG 1998-2015